430413 Catalog

101184-Attachment 101184-Attachment 101184-Attachment 782114 Batch7 unilog cesco-content

100836-Catalog 100836-Catalog 100836-Catalog 782113 Batch7 unilog cesco-content

430413-Catalog 430413-Catalog 430413-Catalog 782113 Batch5 unilog cesco-content

430413-Catalog 430413-Catalog 430413-Catalog 786685 Batch5 unilog cesco-content

101184-Attachment 101184-Attachment 101184-Attachment 782113 Batch7 unilog cesco-content

2014-07-05

: Pdf 430413-Catalog 430413-Catalog 782114 Batch5 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 739

Download430413-Catalog
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Eaton Corporation is a diversified power management company
with more than 100 years of experience providing energyefficient solutions that help our customers effectively manage
electrical, hydraulic and mechanical power. With 2011 sales of
$16.0 billion, Eaton is a global technology leader in electrical
components, systems and services for power quality, distribution
and control; hydraulics components, systems and services for
industrial and mobile equipment; aerospace fuel, hydraulics
and pneumatic systems for commercial and military use; and
truck and automotive drivetrain and powertrain systems for
performance, fuel economy and safety. Eaton has approximately
72,000 employees and sells products to customers in more than
150 countries. For more information, visit www.eaton.com.

Product Guide 2012

Product Guide 2012

Logic Control Products

Logic Control Products

Eaton Corporation
1111 Superior Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44114
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com

© 2012 Eaton Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Canada
Pub No. CA08100001K
June 2012

CA08100001K LCP 2012 Canada.indd 1

Canadian Operations
5050 Mainway
Burlington, ON L7L 5Z1
Canada
1-800-268-3578
EatonCanada.ca

Eaton is a registered trademark
of Eaton Corporation.
All trademarks are property of their
respective owners.

5/15/12 9:33:33 PM

Meeting demands
from packaging

to

Product
Name

The power of fusion.
Brand inception dates:

1874

1886

1893

1899

1906

1908

1911

1934

1962

1963

1976

processing

1983

1990

1999

There’s a certain energy at Eaton. It’s the power of
uniting some of the world’s most respected names to
build a brand you can trust to meet your every power
management need. The energy created supports our
commitment to powering business worldwide.
From power distribution to power quality and control,
Eaton allows you to proactively manage your complete
power system by providing electrical solutions that
make your applications more reliable, efficient and
safe. Visit Eaton.ca.

Electrical solutions
that streamline
control

In order to improve
competitive strength and
reduce costs, today’s machine
builders require state-ofthe-art automation systems.
Eaton can help you achieve
this through industry-leading
solutions that increase
throughput, improve uptime
and improve quality
that lower your total cost
of development.

We recognize the challenges
faced by this industry. There
is a demand for intelligence,
operator guidance, presence
sensing, advanced protection
and diagnostic functions of
machines, and the reduction
in overall machine size.
No matter what your needs
entail, Eaton will provide
component solutions to help
you run a more energyefficient business.
For more information, visit
us at Eaton.ca

All of the above are trademarks of Eaton Corporation or its affiliates. Eaton has
a license to use the Westinghouse name in Asia Pacific. ©2010 Eaton Corporation.

CA08100001K LCP 2012 Canada.indd 2

5/15/12 9:34:24 PM

MainTOC_Vol07.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 6, 2012 9:05 PM

Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial
Volume 2—Commercial Distribution
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies
Volume 4—Circuit Protection
Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection
Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control
Volume 7—Logic Control Products
Tab 37—Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T37-1

Tab 38—Stacklights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T38-1

Tab 40—Control Relays and Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T40-1

Tab 42—Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T42-1

Appendix 1—Alphabetical Catalogue Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I-1

Appendix 2—Alphabetical Parent Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I-55

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I-59

Appendix 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I-63

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

MainTOC_Vol07.fm Page 2 Wednesday, June 6, 2012 9:05 PM

Copyright
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings
Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalogue are approximate and should not
be used for construction purposes . Drawings containing exact dimensions are available
upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without
notice. Photographs are representative of production units.

Terms and Conditions
All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes
occur, they are published in the Eaton Corporation Price and Availability Digest (PAD).
For pricing consult with your local Eaton Representative. All orders accepted by Eaton
are subject to Eaton’s general terms and conditions.

Technical and Descriptive Publications
This catalogue contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further
information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated
brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton Products
Distributor, call 1-800-268-3578 or visit our Web site at www.eatoncanada.ca.

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21
Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in
facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for
atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of these
products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S. Nuclear
Regulatory Commission.

WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions of
the Canadian Electrical Code and/or other local codes or industry standards that are
pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these codes
and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
These catalogue pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide
for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products
Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalogue shall not become part of or modify any
prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eaton’s electrical sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.

Copyright ©2012, Eaton Corporation, All Rights Reserved.

Tab37book.fm Page 1 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
10250T Pushbuttons

37.1

Toggle Switches—E10
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37.2

37.4

T37-6

T37-8
T37-9
T37-10

T37-14
T37-16
T37-28

22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-35
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-36
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-104

37.5

22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-124
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-126
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-144

37.6

30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-167
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-172
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-227

37.8

30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-240
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-246
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-275

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

37.10 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

37

30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-149
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-151
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37-165

37.7

37

37

Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M22 Modular Pushbuttons

T37-4

Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37.3

T37-2

T37-283
T37-286
T37-319
T37-322

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-1

Tab37book.fm Page 2 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.1
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10

Contents

Toggle Switches—E10

Description

37

Page

Toggle Switches—E10
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
37
37
37
37

T37-3
T37-3
T37-4
T37-5
T37-5
T37-5
T37-6
T37-6
T37-7

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Product Description

Features

The E10 switches from
Eaton’s electrical sector are
intended for general purpose
light industrial use. Designed
for retrofit and OEM
applications.

General Purpose Toggles

37

●

●

●

37

●

37

●

37

●
●

37
37
37
37
37

Various circuit functions
include maintained and
momentary
Poles include from singlepole single-throw to fourpole double-throw
Spade, screw, and solder
terminations available
Numerous ratings
Short 11/32 in and tall
15/32 in bat lever available
Standard 15/32–32 thd.
Hardware furnished
assembled

Heavy-Duty Hesitation
Switches
●
●

One-hole panel mount
Three position switch
offers unique positive
centre stop feature to
assure lever cannot be
thrown from one side
through the centre OFF
position without stopping
●
Design feature is a
major acceptance for
motor reversing and
speed control
applications
●
Prevents motor damage
resulting from high
current generation by
counter EMF of the
armature at the time of
reversing
●
Known as anti-plugging,
hesitation, positive stop
or positive off switch

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-2

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Non-Illuminated AC Rated
Pushbuttons
●
●
●

●

●

One-hole panel mount
Medium-duty
Spade and screw
terminations available
Various bushing lengths
and button extensions
Numerous ampere ratings
with horsepower ratings

Tab37book.fm Page 3 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10

37.1

Standards and Certifications
●
●

37

UL Recognized
CSA—File No. LR40068

37
37
37

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37
Toggle Switches—E10 Series
Not to be used for ordering purposes

37
E10 T 1 06 A S =

E10T106AS

Series
Lever Length
T = 0.563 in (14.3 mm) lever
E = 0.688 in (17.5 mm) lever

Poles
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Ratings—125V
06 = 6 Amperes
15 = 15 Amperes
20 = 20 Amperes

A
B
D
E
F
G
H

Function
= ON—None—OFF
= OFF—None—(ON)
= ON—OFF—ON
= ON—None—ON
= ON—OFF—(ON)
= (ON)—OFF—(ON)
= ON—None—(ON)

Termination
S = Screw
L = Solder lug
P = Spade

37
37

Complete Cat. No.
0.563 in (14.3 mm)
Single-pole
6 Amperes
ON—None—OFF
Screw terminal

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-3

Tab37book.fm Page 4 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.1
37
37

Toggle Switches—E10

Product Selection
Toggle Switches
E10 Series—AC Rated—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces

37

50V

Poles
and
Throw 

Function—Circuit with Lever In
DOWN
UP
CENTRE
Position—
Position
Position
Keyway

Screw Terminal
Catalogue Number

0.250 in (6.4 mm)
Spade Terminal
Catalogue Number

Solder Lug
Catalogue Number

1 P.S.T.

ON

Nominal AC Ratings
Amperes
hp

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

125V
Single-Pole

250V

Single-Pole
6

3

—

E10T106AS

E10T106AP

E10T106AL

15

10

3/4

E10T115AS

E10T115AP

E10T115AL

20

10

3/4

E10E120AS

E10E120AP

E10E120AL

6

3

—

E10T106DS

E10T106DP

—

37

15

10

3/4

E10T115DS

E10T115DP

E10T115DL

20

10

3/4

E10E120DS

—

—

37

6

3

—

15

10

3/4

37
37

37
37

20

10

3/4

—

10

1/2

37
37

Two-Pole

1 P.D.T.

1 P.D.T.

ON

ON

None

OFF

None

OFF

ON

ON

E10T106ES

—

—

E10T115ES

E10T115EP

E10T115EL
—

E10E120ES

—

1 P.S.T.

OFF

None

(ON)

E10T115BS

E10T115BP

—

1 P.D.T.

ON

OFF

(ON)

E10T115FS

E10T115FP

—

1 P.D.T.

ON

None

(ON)

E10T115HS

E10T115HP

—

1 P.D.T.

(ON)

OFF

(ON)

E10T115GS

E10T115GP

—

2 P.S.T.

ON

None

OFF

E10T206AS

E10T206AP

—

E10T215AS

E10T215AP

E10T215AL

E10E220AS

E10E220AP

E10E220AL

E10T206DS

E10T206DP

—
E10T215DL

Two-Pole
6

3

—

15

10

3/4

37

20

10

3/4

6

3

—

37

15

10

3/4

E10T215DS

E10T215DP

20

10

3/4

E10E220DS

E10E220DP

—

37

6

3

—

E10T206ES

—

—

37

15

10

3/4

E10T215ES

E10T215EP

E10T215EL

20

10

3/4

E10E220ES

—

—

15

10

1/2

E10T215BS

—

—

37

37
37
37

Three-Pole

2. P.D.T.

2 P.D.T.

ON

ON

OFF

None

ON

ON

2 P.S.T.

OFF

None

(ON)

2 P.D.T.

ON

None

(ON)

E10T215HS

E10T215HP

—

2 P.D.T.

(ON)

OFF

(ON)

E10T215GS

E10T215GP

—

Three-Pole
15

10

3/4

37

3 P.S.T.

ON

None

OFF

E10E315AS

E10E315AP

—

3 P.D.T.

ON

OFF

ON

E10E315DS

E10E315DP

E10E315DL

3 P.D.T.

ON

None

ON

E10E315ES

E10E315EP

E10E315EL

E10E415AL

37
37
37

Four-Pole

Four-Pole
15

37
37

10

3/4

4 P.S.T.

ON

None

OFF

E10E415AS

—

4 P.D.T.

ON

OFF

ON

E10E415DS

—

E10E415DL

4 P.D.T.

ON

None

ON

E10E415ES

—

E10E415EL

37
37
Note
 See Circuit Diagrams on Page T37-6.

37
T37-4

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 5 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10

37.1

Hesitation Switches
Heavy-Duty Hesitation
Switch

37

E10 Series—Special Purpose—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Nominal Ratings
Amperes
28
125
Vdc
Vac

250
Vac

hp
250
Vac

15

10

3/4

15

37

Function—Circuit with Lever In…

Operation

UP
Position

CENTRE
Position

DOWN
Position—
Keyway

Poles
and
Throw 

Screw Terminal
Catalogue Number

Maintained

ON

OFF

ON

2 P.D.T.

E10E215SS

3 P.D.T.

E10E315SS

4 P.D.T.

E10E415SS

37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons
One-Hole Mounted
Medium-Duty, Mom.
Contact

37

E10 Series—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Nominal Ratings
Amperes
125 Vac
250 Vac
NO
NC
NO
NC
6

—

3

15

—

10

15

10

10

hp

Contacts

Bushing
Length
in (mm)
Dim. “A”

Button
Extension
in (mm)
Dim. “B”

Typical
Maximum
Operating
Force

Screw Terminal
Catalogue Number

Spade Terminal
0.250 in (6.4 mm)
Catalogue Number

NO

0.69 (17.5)

0.53 (13.5)

0.9 lbs

E10P106RS

E10P106RP

0.34 (8.6)

0.25 (6.4)

E10P106JS

—

0.69 (17.5)

0.53 (13.5)

E10P115RS

E10P115RP

0.34 (8.6)

0.25 (6.4)

E10P115JS

—

0.69 (17.5)

0.53 (13.5)

E10P115LS

—

125–
250V

Poles
and
Throw 

—

—

1 P.S.T.

—

1/3

1 P.S.T.

NO

5

1/4 

1 P.D.T.

NO, NC

0.9 lbs

1.0 lbs

37
37
37
37
37
37

Accessories

37
Toggle Switches Accessories—Minimum Order Quantity 100 Pieces

E10TA104

Description

Material/Notes

Catalogue Number

Hexagon locknut

Zinc-chromate treated steel

E10TA101

Knurled face nut

Zinc-chromate treated steel

E10TA102

Internal tooth lockwasher

Cadmium plated steel

E10TA103

Terminal screws

#6-32 x 3/16 in binding head

E10TA201

Spade terminal adapter—0.250 in (6.4 mm)

Assembles to screw terminals

E10TA202

ON-OFF indicating plate—vertical orientation

Burnished nickel finish steel

E10TA301

OFF-ON indicating plate—horizontal orientation

Burnished nickel finish steel

E10TA302

Flip-up guard for toggle switches

37
37
37
37
37

E10TA104

37
37
37

E10TA105

Fixed shroud for toggle switches

E10TA105

37
37
37

Notes
Interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through the centre position until pressure is momentarily relieved.
Designed for control and protection of reversing motors.



37
37

See Circuit Diagrams on Page T37-6.
Rated 1/4 hp at 125V, 1/2 hp at 250V.

37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-5

Tab37book.fm Page 6 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.1

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10

37

Technical Data and Specifications

37

Toggle Switches
Description

Specification

37

AC ratings

6–20A, 125 Vac
3–10A, 250 Vac
Max. 3/4 hp at 250 Vac

DC ratings

6–20A, 28 Vdc

37
37
37

Electrical life

6,000 cycles make/break at switch ampere rating

Operation

Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications
Maintained and momentary contacts

Poles/throws

1 through 4, single and double throw

37

Mounting

One hole with threaded 0.468 in-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 in (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway
that serves as anti-rotational feature

37

Lever lengths

0.563 in (14.3 mm) or 0.688 in (17.5 mm), bright nickel plated

Terminals

Screw, 0.250 in (6.4 mm) spade and solder lug

37
37

Hesitation Switches
Description

Specification

Operation

Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications; maintained contacts; ideal
for reversing motor applications; interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through centre position until manual
pressure is momentarily relieved

AC ratings

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
Max. 3/4 hp at 250 Vac

37

DC ratings

15A, 28 Vdc

Poles/throws

2, 3 and 4, double throw only

37

Mounting

Single-pole with threaded 0.468 in-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.049 in (1.7 x 1.2 mm) deep keyway

Lever length

0.687 in (17.4 mm), stainless steel

Terminals

Screw

37
37
37

37
37
37

Pushbutton Actuators
Description

Specification

AC ratings

37

6–15A, 125 Vac (NO)
3–10A, 250 Vac (NO)
Max. 1/3 hp at 125/250 Vac

Operation

37

Slow make/slow break mechanism
Normally open contacts

Poles/throws

Single, single and double throw

Mounting

One hole with 0.468 in-32 threaded bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 in (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway
Two bushing heights: 11/16 in (17.5 mm) and 11/32 in (8.7 mm)

37

37
37

Button extensions

17/32 in (13.5 mm) and 1/4 in (6.4 mm), bright nickel plated

Terminals

Screw

37
37

Circuit Diagrams

37

SPST

37

DPST

3PST

3PDT

4PST

SPDT
DPDT

37
37
37
T37-6

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

4PDT

Tab37book.fm Page 7 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.1

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10

Dimensions

37

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

37

Toggle Switch Dimensions
Operation

Bushing
Length
A

Lever
Length
B

Screw Terminals
C
D

E

Spade Terminals
C
D

E

C

D

E

1

Momentary
and maintained

0.47
(11.9)

0.56
(14.2)

1.00
(25.4)

1.17
(29.7)

0.63
(16.0)

1.13
(28.7)

1.13
(28.7)

0.63
(16.0)

1.00
(25.4)

1.13
(28.7)

0.63
(16.0)

2

Maintained

0.47
(11.9)

0.56
(14.2)

1.06
(26.9)

1.31
(33.3)

0.75
(19.1)

1.19
(30.2)

1.31
(33.3)

0.75
(19.1)

1.06
(26.9)

1.31
(33.3)

0.75
(19.1)

Momentary

0.47
(11.9)

0.56
(14.2)

1.25
(31.8)

1.31
(33.3)

0.75
(19.1)

1.31
(33.3)

1.31
(33.3)

0.75
(19.1)

1.25
(31.8)

1.31
(33.3)

0.75
(19.1)

37

3

Maintained

0.47
(11.9)

0.69
(17.5)

1.27
(32.3)

1.34
(34.0)

1.44
(36.6)

1.37
(34.8)

1.34
(34.0)

1.44
(36.6)

1.23
(31.2)

1.34
(34.0)

1.44
(36.6)

37

4

Maintained

0.47
(11.9)

0.69
(17.5)

1.20
(30.5)

1.30
(33.0)

1.40
(35.6)

1.30
(33.0)

1.34
(34.0)

1.40
(35.6)

1.23
(31.2)

1.34
(34.0)

1.44
(36.6)

37

No. of
Poles

37

Solder Lug

37
37

37
Toggle Switch

Hesitation Switch

Pushbutton Actuator

0.47-32
Thread

B

0.47
(11.9)

0.07 (1.8) x
0.05 (1.3)
Keyway

0.63
(16)

C
1.34
(34)

B

37

A

37
37

1.13
(28.7)

E
1.47
(37.3)

37

0.47-32
Thread

1.25
(31.8)

A

D

37

0.04 (1) x 0.07 (1.8)
Keyway

0.69
(17.5)

37

1.13
(28.7)

37

Accessories

37

E10TA101
Hexagon Locknut

E10TA301
ON-OFF Indicating Plate—
Vertical Orientation

E10TA102
Knurled Face Nut

0.63
(16)

0.63
(16)

0.07
(1.8)

1.0
(25.4)

0.06
(1.5)

37
37

ON

0.08
(2)

E10TA302
ON-OFF Indicating Plate—
Horizontal Orientation

OFF

0.63
(16)

O
F
F

O
N

37
37

0.03
(.8)

37

Note
 Spade terminal adapters are used on 6 ampere and momentary screw terminal switches, adding 0.42 in (10.7 mm) to dimension C.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-7

Tab37book.fm Page 8 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.2
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E

Contents

Toggle Switches—E10E

Description

37

Page

Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E
Product Selection
Molded-In Screw Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Econoswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
37
37

T37-9
T37-9
T37-9
T37-10
T37-11

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Product Description

Features

Designed for general purpose
and OEM applications, this
line of toggle switches
provides a high IP68 rating for
demanding environments.

Molded-In Screw Terminal
●

●

37

●

37

●

37

●

37

●

37

Completely sealed against
dust, moisture and other
contaminants
One-hole mounted bushing
for easy installation
Multi-circuits offered
Two- and three-position
with maintained and
momentary action
Molded-in terminal inserts
and terminals numbers
Single- and two-pole
circuitry

Standards and
Certifications
Switch Guard
●

●

●

●

●

●

Econoswitch

37

●
●

37

●

37
●

37

●

37
●

37

Environmentally sealed
Single- and two-pole
circuitry
One-hole mounting for
easy installation
Multi-circuits
Two- and three-position
with maintained and
momentary action
Three types of termination
offered as standard

Catalogue Number 125 Vac

250 Vac

Amperes
E10E118xx

18

9

E10E218xx

18

9

E10E118xx

1/4

1/2

Note: Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for more
information.

E10E218xx

1/2

1

E10E118xx

—

—

E10E218xx

—

—

●

37
37

●

37

●
●

●

T37-8

UL and CSA Nominal
Ratings

Options

●

37

●

UL—File number E15346;
Guide card number is
WOYR2
CSA—LR40068, class
number 6241

Single-Phase hp

●

37

For use with two-position
switch
Cover closure transfers
switch toggle lever to OFF
position
One-hole mounted
mounting style
Cover is molded out of red
thermoset molding
material
Guard cover is springloaded to either close or
lock in open position
Prevents accidental
operation at switches

●

Non-UL Recognized
devices
●
Alternate toggle levers
●
Locking toggle levers
●
Rocker buttons
Special mounting hardware
Mounting hardware
furnished assembled
Terminal screws furnished
assembled
Special circuits
Panel seal, part number
32-341
Spade terminal adapters
available

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Three-Phase hp

Tab37book.fm Page 9 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E

37.2

Product Selection

37

Molded-In Screw Terminal

37

E10E Series—Molded-In Screw Terminal
Circuit with Lever Position

Single-Pole

Nominal AC Ratings
Amperes

Single-Phase hp

Three-Phase hp

125V

250V

125V

250V

125/250V

9

1/4

1/2

—

Up

Centre

37

Down
(Keyway)

37
Catalogue Number

Single-Pole
18

ON

OFF

ON

E10E118DM

ON

NONE

OFF

E10E118AM

ON

NONE

ON

E10E118EM

37
37
37
37

Two-Pole

37

Two-Pole
18

9

1/2

1

—

ON

OFF

ON

E10E218DM

ON

NONE

OFF

E10E218AM

ON

NONE

ON

E10E218EM

37
37
37
37

Econoswitch

37

E10E Series—Econoswitch

Type of
Operation
Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Circuit with Lever Position
Current Ratings—Amperes
Down
Up
Centre (Keyway)
28 Vdc
115 Vac, 60 or 400 Hz
Solder Lug
Lamp Resistive Inductive Lamp Resistive Inductive
Screw Terminal Terminal
Spade Terminal
Load Load
Load
Load Load
Load
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

Single-Pole
Maintained 5

20

15

3

15

10

ON

OFF

ON

E10E118DS

E10E118DL

E10E118DP

Maintained 5

20

15

3

15

10

ON

NONE

OFF

E10E118AS

E10E118AL

E10E118AP

Maintained 5

20

15

3

15

10

ON

NONE

ON

E10E118ES

E10E118EL

E10E118EP

Momentary 4

15

10

2

15

7

ON 

OFF

ON 

E10E118GS

E10E118GL

E10E118GP

Momentary 4

15

10

2

15

7

OFF

NONE

ON 

E10E118BS

E10E118BL

E10E118BP

Maintained 7

20

15

4

15

15

ON

OFF

ON

E10E218DS

E10E218DL

E10E218DP

Maintained 7

20

15

4

15

15

ON

NONE

OFF

E10E218AS

E10E218AL

E10E218AP

Maintained 7

20

15

4

15

15

ON

NONE

ON

E10E218ES

E10E218EL

E10E218EP

Momentary 5

18

10

2

11

8

ON 

OFF

ON 

E10E218GS

E10E218GL

E10E218GP

Momentary 5

18

10

2

11

8

OFF

NONE

ON 

E10E218BS

E10E218BL

E10E218BP

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Two-Pole

37
37
37
37

Switch Guard
Switch Guard

37

E10E Series—Switch Guard

37

Catalogue Number
Switch Guard

E10TA104

37
37

Note
 Momentary contact.

37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-9

Tab37book.fm Page 10 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.2

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E

37

Technical Data and Specifications

37

E10E Series—Molded-In Screw Terminal
Description

Specification

37

Watertight seal

Per MIL-STD-108E and designed to meet IP68

37
37
37
37

Thermoset molding materials

Meet flame retardant requirements

Temperature range

–50° to 150°F (–46° to 66°C)

Life

20,000 operations at rated load; 40,000 operations mechanical life;
6,000 operations at hp ratings per UL and CSA requirements

Bushings

15/32 in-32 thread

E10E Series—Econoswitch

37

Description

Specification

Watertight seal

Per MIL-STD-108E and designed to meet IP68

37

Type of terminal

Screws—6-32 UNC-22A
Solder lug—0.125 in (3.17 mm) dia. hole
Spade—0.250 in (6.35 mm) x 0.032 in (0.81 mm) thick

Life

50,000 operations at rated load; 100,000 operations mechanical life

Temperature range

–50° to 150°F (–46° to 66°C)

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

T37-10

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 11 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.2

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E

Dimensions

37

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Single-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series
0.432
(10.97)

37

Two-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series

37

0.432
(10.97)

0.076
(1.93)

37

0.076
(1.93)

37
Keyway

37

Keyway

37

33°
16.5°

33°
16.5°

0.240 (6.10)
Dia.

37

0.240 (6.10)
Dia.

0.690
(17.53)
0.470
(11.94)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder

37

#6-32 Terminal Screw
with Internal Tooth
Lockwasher (SEMS)

0.130
(3.30)
4

1

2 3

37
37
37
37
37

5 6

0.635
(16.13)
Max.

0.380
(9.65)
Typ.
1.270 (32.26) Max.

37

1.100
0.130 (27.94) 1.370
(3.30) Max. (34.80)
Max.

0.250
(6.35)

#6-32 Terminal Screw
with Internal Tooth
Lockwasher (SEMS)

37

0.470
(11.94)

15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder

1.18
(29.9)
Max.

0.250
(6.35)

37

0.690
(17.53)

0.380 0.910
(9.65) (23.11)
Max.

37
37

1
2 3
0.380
(9.65)
Typ.
1.340 (34.04) Max.

37
37

Toggle Switch Panel Cutout

37

15/32 Dia. Bushing
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
0.375
(9.52)

0.130
(3.30)

Locking Ring

0.445
(11.30)

37

0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole

37
0.062
(1.57)
Keyway

37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-11

Tab37book.fm Page 12 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.2

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E

37

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

37

Single-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series
0.432
(10.97)

37

Keyway
0.076
(1.93)

37
37

33°
16.5°

0.240 (6.10)
Dia.

37

0.690
(17.53)

37
37
37

0.470
(11.94)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder

37

1.51
(38.4)
Max.

1.28
(32.5)
Max.

1.30
(33.0)
Max.

37
37

#6-32 UNC-2A
Terminal Screw,
SEMS

37

0.594
(15.09)

37

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

Solder Lug

Screw Terminal

37
37

0.250 x 0.032
(6.35) x (0.81)
Thick

0.125 (3.17)
Dia. Hole

1.25 (31.75)

2

3

Spade Terminal

Two-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series
0.432
(10.97)

37

Keyway

37

0.076
(1.93)

37
37

0.240 (6.10)
Dia.

33°
16.5°

37

0.690
(17.53)

37
37
37

0.468
(11.89)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
1.34
(34.1)
Max.

37

1.55
(39.4)
Max.

1.32
(33.5)
Max.

37
37

#6-32 UNC-2A
Terminal Screw,
SEMS

0.250 x 0.032
(6.35) x (0.81)
Thick

0.125 (3.17)
Dia. Hole

1.32 (33.5)

37
0.89
(22.6)

37
37

Screw Terminal

T37-12

Solder Lug

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Spade Terminal

Tab37book.fm Page 13 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E

37.2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

37

Switch Guard

37

33°

0.240 (6.10)
Dia.

37

0.688
(17.48)

0.840
(21.34)

37
37

0.468
(11.89)

15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder

37
37

Rivet

0.475
(12.07)
Dia.

37

0.031 0.062
(0.79) (1.57)

0.750
(19.05)
Max.

37

0.688
(17.48)
Max.

37
37

1.062
(26.97)
1.635 (41.53) Max.
1.830 (46.48) Max.

37
37

1.547 (39.29)
Rad.

Open

37
Closed

Red-Molded
Plastic

37
37

1.093
(27.76)
Max.

Switch
(Ref.)

Steel

37
37

0.032
(0.81)

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-13

Tab37book.fm Page 14 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.3
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Contents

Pushbutton Control Stations

Description

37

Page

Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
M22 Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commercial Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . .
10250H Series Heavy-Duty Control Stations . . .
10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm
Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty
30.5 mm Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant
30.5 mm Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Assembled Stations Specification Form . . .
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

T37-15
T37-16
T37-17
T37-18
T37-19
T37-20
T37-21
T37-22
T37-23
T37-23
T37-24
T37-26
T37-28
T37-28

37
37
37

Product Description

37

M22 Assembled Control
Stations

37
37
37
37

●
●

●

●
●

37
37
37

Commercial Control Stations
●
●
●

37
37
37
37
37

M22 series operators
Available in horizontal and
vertical configurations
Impact resistant
polycarbonate enclosures
Optional yellow covers
Base mounting contact
blocks and light units for
quick wiring and vibration
resistance
10250T series operators
Full front label
Specific function labels on
front of enclosure

General Purpose Control
Stations
●
●

●
●

Construction grade
General purpose wall
mount
Popular with contractors
UL (NEMA) Type 1

Special Purpose Control
Stations
●
●
●

Standard grade
Polyester enclosure
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 13

10250H Series Heavy-Duty
Control Stations
●
●

●

●

●

10250H Series operators
Dark brown polyester
enclosure
Protective rubber gaskets
provide NEMA 3S rating on
pushbuttons
Top and bottom 3/4 in NPT
conduit entrances
Includes alternate legend
plates and spare mounting
screws

10250T Series Heavy-Duty
30.5 mm Control Stations
●
●

●
●

●

10250T Series operators
ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc
enclosures
Surface or flush mounting
Single 3/4 in NPT conduit
entrance on one and two
element stations
Single 1 in NPT conduit
entrance on three element
stations

Class I Division 2 10250T
Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm
Control Stations
●
●

●

●

10250T Series operators
Factory sealed contact
blocks
Die-cast, polyester or
stainless steel enclosures
Approved for NEC Class I
Division 2, Groups B, C and
D or Class I Zone 2 Group
IIB plus Hydrogen type
hazardous locations

37
37
37
T37-14

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Class I Division 2 E34 Series
Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm
Control Stations
●
●

●

●

E34 Series operators
Factory sealed contact
blocks
Die-cast, polyester or
stainless steel enclosures
Approved for NEC Class I
Division 2 Groups B, C and
D or Class I Zone 2 Group
IIB plus Hydrogen type
hazardous locations

Tab37book.fm Page 15 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

37.3

Features
M22 Assembled Control
Stations
●

●

●
●

●

IP66, UL (NEMA) Type 4X,
13
Impact resistant
polycarbonate enclosures
Optional yellow cover
25% smaller depth than
most competitor
enclosures
Base mounting contact
blocks and light units for
faster wiring and vibration
resistance

Commercial Control Stations
●

●

●

ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc
enclosures
Pre-assembled and labeled
for functions such as “Fuel
Shut-Off”
Great for commercial
applications

General Purpose Control
Stations
●
●

●
●

Construction grade
General purpose wall
mount
Popular with contractors
UL (NEMA) Type 1

Special Purpose Control
Stations
●
●
●

Standard grade
Polyester enclosure
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 13

●
●
●
●

●

●
●
●
●
●
●

Industrial grade
Extra heavy-duty
Polyester enclosure
Booted buttons
Outdoor installation
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S,
4, 4X, 12, 13

37

30.5 mm operators
Industrial grade
Zinc die cast enclosure
Popular with industrial end
users
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12,
13

37
37
37
37

Class I Division 2 Control
Stations
●

●

10250H Series Heavy-Duty
Control Stations

37

10250T Series Heavy-Duty
30.5 mm Control Stations

●

●

●

●

37

Available with 10250T or
E34 30.5 mm operators
Zinc die cast, polyester or
stainless steel enclosures
Factory-sealed contact
blocks
Popular with industrial end
users
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12,
13
NEC Class I Division 2
Groups B, C and D

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-15

Tab37book.fm Page 16 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.3
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Product Selection
M22 Assembled Control Stations

37
37
37
37
37
37

One Element Control Stations

37

Orientation

37
37
37
37
37
37

Description

Colour



Enclosure
Cover Colour

Inscription

Catalogue
Number

Horizontal

40 mm mushroom head push-pull emergency stop operator

Red

NC

—

Yellow

M22-C1-M1H

Horizontal

40 mm illuminated mushroom head push-pull emergency stop
operator, 85–264 Vac

Red

NO-NC

—

Yellow

M22-C1-M2H

Horizontal

40 mm mushroom head twist-to-release emergency stop operator

Red

NC

—

Yellow

M22-C1-M3H

Horizontal

40 mm mushroom head key-release emergency stop operator

Red

NC

—

Yellow

M22-C1-M4H

Horizontal

Flush pushbutton

Green

NO

Horizontal

Flush pushbutton

Green

NO

Horizontal

Extended pushbutton

Red

NC

Horizontal

Extended pushbutton

Red

NC

Gray

M22-C1-M5H

START

Gray

M22-C1-M6H

Gray

M22-C1-M7H

STOP

Gray

M22-C1-M8H
M22-C1-M9H

Horizontal

Key-operated selector switch, two-position maintained

—

NO

OFF-ON

Gray

Horizontal

Knob type selector switch, three-position maintained

—

2NO

HAND 0 AUTO

Gray

M22-C1-M10H

Horizontal

Double pushbutton

Green

NO

START

Gray

M22-C1-M11H

Red

NC

STOP

37
37
37

Two Element Control Stations
Orientation

37
37

Element 1
Description

Colour



Inscription

Element 2
Description

Colour



Inscription

Enclosure
Cover Colour

Catalogue
Number

Horizontal

Extended pushbutton

Red

NC

Flush pushbutton

Green

NO

Gray

M22-C2-M1H

Vertical

Flush pushbutton

Green

NO

START

Extended pushbutton

Red

NC

STOP

Gray

M22-C2-M2V

Vertical

Flush pushbutton

Black

NO

FORWARD

Flush pushbutton

Black

NO

REVERSE

Gray

M22-C2-M3V

37
37

Three Element Control Stations

37

Orientation
Horizontal

37

Vertical

37

Horizontal

37

Vertical

37

Vertical
Vertical

37

Element 1
Description
Extended
pushbutton
Indicating
light
Flush
pushbutton
Flush
pushbutton
Flush
pushbutton
Flush
pushbutton

Element 2
Inscription Description

Colour



Red

NC

White

—

Green

85–264
Vac
NO

Black

NO

OPEN

Black

NO

FORWARD

Black

NO

UP

Indicating
light
Flush
pushbutton
Extended
pushbutton
Extended
pushbutton
Flush
pushbutton
Flush
pushbutton

Element 3
Inscription Description

Colour



—

Green

NO

Red

NC

Green

NO

Black

NO

Black
Black

Colour



White
Green

85–264
Vac
NO

Red

NC

Red

NC

STOP

Red

NC

STOP

Red

NC

STOP

START

37

Notes
For assembled control stations not found in this selection, please contact the Eaton Customer Service Centre
at 1-800-268-3578 or cscanada@eaton.com.

37



Contact block configuration.

T37-16

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Flush
pushbutton
Extended
pushbutton
Flush
pushbutton
Flush
pushbutton
Flush
pushbutton
Flush
pushbutton

Enclosure Catalogue
Inscription Cover Colour Number
Gray

M22-C3-M1H

Gray

M22-C3-M2V

Gray

M22-C3-M3H

CLOSE

Gray

M22-C3-M4V

NO

REVERSE

Gray

M22-C3-M5V

NO

DOWN

Gray

M22-C3-M6V

STOP

Tab37book.fm Page 17 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

37.3

Commercial Control Stations

37
Available Catalogue Numbers

Key Specifications
●

●

●
●
●

●

30.5 mm (10250T series)
operators
ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc
enclosures
Industrial grade
UL® Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Single 3/4 in NPT conduit
entrance
Dimensions—in (mm)
●
Enclosure:
3.88 W x 4.00 H x 3.00 D
(98.6 x 101.6 x 76.3)
●
Operator:
1.63 D (to enclosure) x
1.50 diameter
(41.4 x 38.1)

What is included?
Eaton’s pre-assembled,
enclosed emergency stop
pushbutton stations include
an operator, an enclosure,
contact blocks and a variety
of unique labels. Each label
has white lettering on a red
background indicating the
function and red lettering on a
white background indicating
the operator type.

37

Catalogue
Number 

Operator

Enclosure
Colour

Label

10250T5B62-S101

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY STOP

10250T5B62-S102

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF

10250T5B62-S103

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY GENERATOR STOP

10250T5B62-S104

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY HVAC SHUT-DOWN

10250T5B62-S105

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL DISCONNECT

10250T5B62-S106

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY BOILER SHUT-DOWN

10250T5B62-S107

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY CHILLER STOP

10250T5B62-S108

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY FUEL SHUT-OFF

10250T5B62-S109

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY REFRIGERATION STOP

10250T5B62-S110

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY POWER OFF

10250T5B62-S111

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY GAS SHUT-OFF

10250T5B62-S121

Pushbutton

Gray

EMERGENCY VENTILATION SHUT-DOWN

10250T5B62-S131

Pushbutton

Gray

GENERATOR

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Additional Contact Blocks
(Sold Separately)

37

Circuit
Catalogue Number Configuration

37

10250T51

1NC

10250T53

1NO

37

10250T1

NO-NC

10250T3

2NC

10250T2

2NO

37
37
37

Note
 Includes 1NO-1NC contact block.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-17

Tab37book.fm Page 18 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.3
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

General Purpose Control Stations
Type N Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 1

37

Contact
Symbol

Legends

Catalogue Number

Flush/green

START

10250H5100

Flush/red

STOP

10250H5101

Extended/red

STOP

10250H5104

Palm operated/black

None

10250H89 

Three-position selector
switch/black knob

RUN/OFF/AUTO

10250H289 

Flush/red

START/STOP

10250H5200

37

Flush/green
extended/red

START/STOP

10250H5207

37

Flush/black (all)

37
37

Single Button Station
with Padlock
Attachment Accessory

Button Type/Colour

One Element Enclosure Type

37
37
37
37
37

Selector Switch

37
37
37

Two Button Station

Two Element Enclosure Type

37

RAISE/LOWER

10250H5201

FOR/REV

10250H5202

OPEN/CLOSE

10250H5203

37

UP/DOWN

10250H5204

HIGH/LOW

10250H5205

37

FAST/SLOW

10250H5208

37

37

Three Button Station

Three Element Enclosure Type
FOR/REV/STOP

10250H5300

37

UP/DOWN/STOP

10250H5301

RAISE/LOWER/STOP

10250H5302

37

OPEN/CLOSE/STOP

10250H5303

FAST/SLOW/STOP

10250H5304

37

Flush/black (all)

Three Button Station
with Indicating Light

110/220V neon indicating light

37
37

START/STOP

Clear—flush/green; flush/red

10250H5310

Red—flush/green; flush/red

10250ED853

Amber—flush/green; flush/red

10250ED853-2

37
37

Note
 Round button.

37
37
37
37
T37-18

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 19 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

37.3

Type N Control Stations—Open Type Construction (No Cover)
Contact
Symbol
Selector Switch

Button Type/Colour

Legends

Catalogue Number

RUN/OFF/AUTO

10250H2538

37
37

One Element Enclosure Type
Three-position selector
switch/black knob

37
37
37

Two Button Station

Two Element Enclosure Type
Flush/green

START/STOP

37

10250H2747

37
37
Mechanically
Interlocked
Pushbuttons

None 

Flush/black (all)
mech. interlocked

37

10250H2544

37
37
37
37
37

Special Purpose Control Stations

37

Special Purpose Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13
Contact
Symbol
10250H_

Feature

Legends

Catalogue Number

37

START

10250H2738

37

STOP

10250H658

37

STOP

10250H665

One Element Pushbutton Type
Flush

With lock hasp

37
37

10250H_

Two Element Pushbutton Type
Flush

START/STOP

10250H364

37

With lock hasp

START/STOP

10250H671

37

Buttons interlocked

FAST/SLOW

10250ED664

37

FOR/REV

10250H2740

UP/DOWN

10250H2741

OPEN/CLOSE

10250H2742

37
37

Note
 No legend on buttons. Specify any standard legend.

37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-19

Tab37book.fm Page 20 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.3
37

Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

10250H Series Heavy-Duty Control Stations
Type H Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Element Type
10250H_

Feature

Circuit

Assembled
Legend
Plate

Without padlock hasp

1NO-1NC

JOG

Catalogue Number

START

10250H1881

One Element
Pushbuttons

37

STOP
RUN

37
Knob selector
switch

37
37

Unassembled
Alternate
Legend Plate

10250H_

With padlock hasp

1NC

STOP

—

10250H4239

Two-position

1NO-1NC

OFF/ON

—

10250H4526

Three-position

1NO-1NC

MAN/OFF/AUTO

—

10250H4527

Two Element
Pushbuttons

Standard

37

1NO-2NC

START/STOP

—

10250H1884

2NO-2NC

RAISE/LOWER

FORWARD

10250H1885

REVERSE

37

OPEN
CLOSE

37
37
10250H_

37

Standard and
standard with
padlock hasp

1NO-2NC

START/STOP

Standard

2NO-3NC

FOR/REV/STOP

Two standard and
standard with
padlock hasp

37
Indicating
light and
pushbuttons

37

120V

Light-red lens
and two plain

1NO-2NC

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-20

10250H4240

Three Element
Pushbuttons

37

—

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

MOTOR
RUNNING
START/STOP

START

OPEN

10250H1890

JOG

CLOSE

10250H4241

RAISE

FAST

LOWER

SLOW

—

10250H1913

Tab37book.fm Page 21 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

37.3

10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations

37

Complete Assembled Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Element Type 
Break Glass Station

Features

Contact
Block(s)

Legend

Gray enclosure

NC (logic level)

EMERG. OFF

Surface Mounting
Catalogue Number

Flush Mounting 
Catalogue Number

Break Glass Station
Break glass station 

Red enclosure

10250TGS

—

10250TGR

—

37
37
37
37
37

One Element

One Element
Pushbutton

Standard

Mushroom head

Selector switch

Push-pull
three-position
Two Element

START

10250T3516

10250T3573

NC

STOP

10250T3518

10250T3575

NO-NC

None

10250T3540

10250T3597

NO-NC

START

10250T3517

10250T3574

NC

STOP

10250T3519

10250T3576

With lock hasp 

NC

STOP

10250T3520

10250T3577

Two-position
black knob

NO-NC

OFF/ON

10250T3523

10250T3580

Three-position
black knob

2NO

MAN/OFF/AUTO

10250T3524

10250T3581

Momentary
red button

2NC

START/STOP

10250T3545

10250T3602

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Two Element
Pushbuttons

Standard

With lock hasp 

Three Element

NO-NC

1NO-2NC

START/STOP

10250T3525

10250T3582

2NO-2NC

RAISE/LOWER

10250T3672

10250T3673

2NO-2NC

None

10250T3541

10250T3598

1NO-2NC

START/STOP

10250T3542

10250T3599

Standard and mushroom head

1NO-2NC

START/STOP

10250T3526

10250T3583

Standard with
maintained contact 

NO-NC

START/STOP

10250T3528

10250T3585

37
37
37
37

Plus NC

Three Element
Pushbuttons

Indicating light
(transformer type)
and pushbuttons

Standard

2NO-3NC

FOR, REV, STOP

10250T3532

10250T3589

2NO-3NC

UP, DOWN, STOP

10250T3615

—

2NO-3NC

OPEN, CLOSE, STOP

10250T3614

—

2NO-3NC

None, None, STOP

10250T3543

10250T3600

Two standard and with lock hasp

2NO-3NC

None, None, STOP

10250T3544

10250T3601

Red lens — 120V

1NO-2NC

MOTOR RUN,
START/STOP

10250T3536

10250T3593

10250T3537

10250T3594

Red lens — 480V

Red lens — 240V

10250T3538

10250T3595

Red lens — 600V

10250T3539

10250T3596

37
37
37
37
37
37

Break Glass
Operator 

Break Glass Kit
Description

Catalogue Number

Operator with hammer and five glass discs

10250TBG

Glass discs only (5)

10250TGL

37
37
37
37

Notes
 Stop buttons are red—all others are black.
 NEMA 4–13, if properly mounted on a flat surface. Consists of front plate, legend, operator and contact blocks.
 Breaking glass closes contact.
 Lock is 10250TA2.
 Uses deep cover instead of shallow cover. Switch component is 10250TA67.
 Shown assembled to contact block (contact block supplied separately).

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

37
37
37
T37-21

Tab37book.fm Page 22 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.3
37

Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations
Complete Assembled Stations—
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D

37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Contact
Symbol
10250T7007

37

1NO

37
10250T7023P

37

Die Cast
Enclosure
Catalogue Number

Polyester Molded
Enclosure
Catalogue Number

Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalogue Number

Flush/green

START

10250T7003

10250T7003P

10250T7003S

Extended/red

STOP

10250T7005

10250T7005P

10250T7005S

Alum. jumbo
mushroom/red

EMER. STOP
(engraved button)

10250T7007

10250T7007P

10250T7007S

Flush/black

No legend

10250T7009

10250T7009P

10250T7009S

Flush/green

START

10250T7023

10250T7023P

10250T7023S

Extended/red

STOP

Flush/black

No legend

10250T7025

10250T7025P

10250T7025S

Flush/black

No legend

10250T7033

10250T7033P

10250T7033S

Two Pushbuttons

1NO
1NC
Each Button

37

Legend
Marking

Single Pushbutton

1NC

37

Button
Type/Colour

37
37
37

10250T7033S

37

Single Pilot Light—Two Pushbuttons

1NO
1NC
Each Button

37

120 Vac red

No legend

Flush/green

START

Extended/red

STOP

120 Vac red

No legend

10250T7035

10250T7035P

10250T7035S

Maintained
knob/black

HAND/OFF/AUTO

10250T7011

10250T7011P

10250T7011S

Maintained
knob/black

No legend

10250T7013

10250T7013P

10250T7013S

EMER. STOP
(engraved button)

10250T7019

10250T7019P

10250T7019S

Flush/black

37

Flush/black

37
Three-Position Selector Switch

37

2NO
2NC

37
37
37

Single Pushbutton Maintained
Push-pull
with jumbo
mushroom/red

37
37

Pull Push
O
X 1NO
X
O 1NC

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-22

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 23 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

37.3

Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations
E34EX_

37

Complete Assembled Stations—
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Contact
Symbol

37

Button
Type/Colour

Legend
Marking

Die Cast
Enclosure
Catalogue Number

Polyester Molded
Enclosure
Catalogue Number

Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalogue Number

Flush/green

START

E34EX7003

E34EX7003P

E34EX7003S

Extended/red

STOP

E34EX7005

E34EX7005P

E34EX7005S

Alum. jumbo
mushroom/red

EMER. STOP
(engraved button)

E34EX7007

E34EX7007P

E34EX7007S

37

Flush/black

No legend

E34EX7009

E34EX7009P

E34EX7009S

37

Flush/green

START

E34EX7023

E34EX7023P

E34EX7023S

E34EX7025

E34EX7025P

E34EX7025S

37

Single Pushbutton

1NO
1NC

37

Two Pushbuttons

1NO
1NC
Each Button

37

Extended/red

STOP

Flush/black

No legend

Flush/black

No legend

37
37
37
37
37

Three-Position Selector Switch

2NO
2NC

Maintained
knob/black

HAND/OFF/AUTO

E34EX7011

E34EX7011P

E34EX7011S

Maintained
knob/black

No legend

E34EX7013

E34EX7013P

E34EX7013S

37
37
37

Single Pushbutton Maintained
Push-pull with jumbo
mushroom/red

EMER. STOP
(engraved button)

E34EX7019

E34EX7019P

37

E34EX7019S

37
Pull Push
O
X 1NO
X
O 1NC

37
37
37

Accessories
Padlock Attachment

37

Type N Control Stations
Description

Catalogue Number

Padlock attachment—For field assembly on square button type
(except extended button types)

10250H5110

37
37
37

Note
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page T37-22.

37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-23

Tab37book.fm Page 24 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.3
37
37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Custom Assembled Stations Specification Form
Ordering Instructions
Step 1
Copy this ordering guide from
catalogue.

Position 1

Step 2
Specify 10250T or E34
pushbutton lines in the
corresponding box on the
following page.

Position 2

37

10250T

Pages T37-167–
T37-239

37

E34

Pages T37-240–
T37-282

37

10250T and E34
Class I Div. 2

Pages T37-283–
T37-324

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Step 7
Fax Sheet 2 of this form to
Eaton’s TRC, Technical
Resource Centre, at 828-6510549 to the attention of—
Custom Stations Order or
email to TRC@eaton.com.

Position 1

Within a few days you will
receive a confirmation fax
with the custom station part
number and price.

Position 1
Position 2
Position 3

Step 8
Place your order over the
VISTA System.

Position 1
Position 2

For Selector and Roto-Push
Operators

Position 3
Position 4

Step 3
Check back of panel
dimensions—specify single
or double depth enclosure in
the corresponding box on the
following page.
Step 4
Specify enclosure catalogue
number and price in the
corresponding box on the
following page. Enclosures
can be found on Pages T37219, T37-269 and T37-318.
For pricing, reference the
most recent PAD or VISTAline.

Position Locations
Step 6
For non-standard legends,
specify legend desired, letter
size and location on the
layout sketches on the
following page. For
limitations see Page T37218. For pricing, use the
blank legend catalogue
number and “STAMP” Suffix
(Ex.: 10250TS36STAMP) and
reference the most recent
PAD or VISTA-line.

10250T or E34
For single contact blocks or
1NO-1NC contact blocks, the
mounting position of contacts
must be specified. For
example: If a 1NO-1NC
contact block is required,
specify if NO is to be
mounted in Top A position or
Bottom B position.

Example: 10250TS36
Step 5
Specify catalogue numbers
for desired operator, legend
plate, light unit, accessory
and contact block(s) for each
location in the enclosure in
the corresponding box on the
following page. (See position
locations on this page.)

Special
Legend
for Position #_______
LETTER
SIZE
3/32 in
1/8 in

✔

3/16 in

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-24

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 25 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.3

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

To —

Eaton’s Customer Support Centre,
(905) 631-4284 FAX, or email to escanada@eaton.com

37

FACTORY USE ONLY
Part Number

37

Product Code

From — Customer Name ___________________________________________
Customer Contact __________________________________________

Suffix

Phone Number _____________________________________________

Date

Fax Number _______________________________________________

Engineer

37
37
37

Email Address _____________________________________________

✔

Step 3)

Step 2)
10250T

❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2

E34

❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2

37

Step 4)
Enclosure Catalogue Number

Single Depth Enclosure

Price

37

Double Depth Enclosure

37
37

Step 5)
Position

Operator

Price
CDN $

Light Unit

Price
CDN $

Contact
Block

Price
CDN $

A/L

B/R

Contact
Block

Price
CDN $

A/L

B/R

Total
Price

1

37

2

37

3
4

Position

37

37
Price
CDN $

Legend Plate

Lens or Caps

Price
CDN $

Accessory

Price
CDN $

Total
Price

37

1

37

2

37

3

37

4
Total:

37

10% Added
for Assembled Stations

Step 6) Non-standard Legends
Special Legend for Position #_______

37
37

Special Legend for Position #_______

Special Legend for Position #_______

37
37
37
37
37
37

LETTER SIZE
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)

✔

LETTER SIZE

✔

LETTER SIZE

3/32 inch (2.4 mm)

3/32 inch (2.4 mm)

1/8 inch (3.2 mm)

1/8 inch (3.2 mm)

3/16 inch (4.8 mm)

3/16 inch (4.8 mm)

✔

37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-25

Tab37book.fm Page 26 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.3
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Renewal Parts
Type N Renewal Parts

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Assembled Stations—Type N

37
37
37

Item
No.

37
37
37

1

Part Number

Cover

Item
No.

Description

9

Pushbutton element
1NO-1NC

86-2588

One element—top button

49-3524-2

2NO

86-2588-2

One element—bottom button

49-3524-3

1NO

86-2588-3

1NC

11-2168

3

Pushbutton support bracket

1

79-6649

10

Cover

4

Pushbutton support bracket screw

1

11-2090

11

5

Pushbutton spring

2

69-2571

12

16-1960

6

Disc (when used—two element assembly)

2

7

Pushbutton—top position

1

8

49-3464

Pushbutton support bracket

1

79-6650

Pushbutton—top position

1

FORWARD/black

53-1170-7

UP/black

53-1170-4

START/green

53-1169-3

RAISE/black

53-1170-5

RAISE/black

53-1169-66

OPEN/black

53-1170-9

FORWARD/black

53-1169-7

FAST/black

OPEN/black

53-1169-9

UP/blank

53-1169-11

REVERSE/black

53-1169-15

Blank/green

53-1169

DOWN/black

53-1169-18

LOWER/black

53-1169-16
53-1169-17

Pushbutton—bottom position

13

1

Pushbutton middle position

53-1202-2

CLOSE/black

Extended STOP/red

53-1202-5

SLOW/black

REVERSE/black

53-1169-8

CLOSE/black

53-1169-10

37

DOWN/black

53-1169-12

LOWER/black

53-1169-6

37

Blank/red

53-1202

37

14

Pushbutton—bottom position

15

Pushbutton element

16

Cover

53-1170-6
1

53-1169-13
1

STOP/red

53-1201-2
1

2NO-3NC

37
37
T37-26

86-2588-4
1

STOP/red

37

1

49-3524

2

37

Part Number

Two element

Cover screw

37

No.
Req.

Type N—Square Buttons, continued
1

2

37

37

No.
Req.

Type N—Square Buttons

37
37

Description

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

86-2593
1

49-3524-4

Tab37book.fm Page 27 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.3

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Assembled Stations—Type N, continued
Item
No.

No.
Req.

Description

Part Number

Type N—Square Buttons, continued
17

Item
No.

Description

37

No.
Req.

Part Number

1

10250H2538

Type N—Round Buttons

Lens

1

Similar Pushbutton assembly and element for:
to 27
10250H289

Clear

28-494

Red

28-887-2

10250H364

1

86-353

Amber

28-887-3

10250H685

1

86-353-8
86-353-8

Shield

1

73-1337

10250H665

1

19

Shield screws

4

11-2012

10250H671

1

86-353

20

Lamp (neon NE48)

1

28-494

10250H2738

1

86-353-3

21

Lamp receptacle

1

28-902

10250H2740

1

86-356

22

Lamp receptacle screw

1

911-330F1

10250H2741

1

86-356

86-2586

10250H2742

1

86-356

23

Pilot light terminal base

1

Lens

1

Clear

28-887

Red

28-887-2

Amber

28-887-3

25

Pushbutton support bracket

1

26

Pushbutton element

1

1NO-1NC

37
37

18

24

37

37
37
37
37
37
37

79-6650-2

37

86-2594

37
37

Type H Renewal Parts
7

37

7

7

8

37
6

9

10

12

10

37

5

5
4

37

4

37

5
4

37
3

3

37

11

37
1
Pushbutton

2

1
2
Indicating Light

2

1
Selector Switch

37
37

Assembled Stations—Type H
Item
No.

Description

No.
Req.

Part Number

Type H—Assembled Stations

Item
No.

Description

No.
Req.

37
Part Number

Type H—Assembled Stations

1

Screw

2

11-4654

7

Screw

4

11-953

2

Screw

2

11-5719

8

Diaphragm

1

32-253-2

3

Base

1

17-16560

9

Mounting plate

1

17-19522

4

Contact blocks

See Page T37-222

10

Gasket

1

32-254

5

10250T operator

See Pages T37-173 – T37-239

11

Base

1

17-16561

6

Mounting plate

1

12

Mounting plate

1

17-19523

17-19524

37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-27

Tab37book.fm Page 28 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.3
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Technical Data and Specifications
Ratings
Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type N Control Stations

37

Description

Volts AC
110

220

440

550

Volts DC
120

240

Make and emergency interrupt capacity

30

15

7.5

6

1.0

0.5

0.1

37

Normal load break

3

1.5

0.75

0.6

1.0

0.5

0.1

Continuous current

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

600

37
37

Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type H Control Stations

37

Description

Volts AC 50/60 Hz
120

240

Volts DC
480

600

125

250

37

Make and emergency interrupt capacity

60

30

15

12

1.1

0.55

Normal load break

6

3

1.5

1.2

1.1

0.55

37

Continuous amperes

10

10

10

10

10

10

37
37
37

Voltamperes —
Make and emergency interrupt capacity

7200

7200

7200

7200

138

138

Normal load break

720

720

720

720

138

138

Dimensions

37

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

37

Type N Control Stations
4.00
(101.6)

37
37

4.00
(101.6)

3.25
(82.6)

6.00
(152.4)

3.25
(82.6)

5.00
(127.0)

37
37
37
37
37

1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)

2.25 a
(57.2)

2.25 a
(57.2)

1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)

Single Button Station

Two Button Station

1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)

Three Button Station

Special Purpose Control Stations

37
37

5.50
(139.7)

6.25
(158.8)

37
37
37
37
37

2.25
(57.2)
3.13
(79.5)

3.38
(85.9)

0.75 (19.1)
Pipe Tap
Ship Wt.
2.5 Lb (1.1 kg)

Note
 2.38 (60.5) for neon indicating light.

37
T37-28

2.25 a
(57.2)

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 29 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

37.3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

37

Type H Control Stations

37

NEMA Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 13

37

Dimensions
Wide

No. of
Elements

High

Deep

1 and 2

4.50 (114.3)

8.25 (209.6)

4.50 (114.3)

3

4.50 (114.3)

10.75 (273.1)

4.25 (108.0)

37
37
37

10250T and E34

37

Approximate Enclosure Dimensions

Number
of
Elements

Surface Mounting
Dimensions in In (mm)
Wide
A

High
B

Deep
C

Mounting
D
E

1

3.88
(98.6)

4.0
(101.6)

3.0
(76.3)

2.69
(68.3)

3.25
(82.6)

3/4

2

3.88
(98.6)

5.88
(149.4)

3.0
(76.3)

2.69
(68.3)

5.13
(130.3)

3/4

3

3.88
(98.6)

7.75
(196.9)

3.0
(76.3)

2.69
(68.3)

7.0
(177.8)

1

4

33.88
(98.6)

9.63
(244.6)

3.0
(76.3)

2.69
(68.3)

8.88
(225.6)

1

Conduit
Entrance

4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester

37
37
37

Cast
E

37

B

37
D
A

37

C
Surface

37

Polyester
1

3.81
(96.8)

6.63
(168.4)

3.38
(85.9)

2.94
(74.7)

4.88
(124.0)



2

3.81
(96.8)

6.63
(168.4)

3.38
(85.9)

2.94
(74.7)

4.88
(124.0)



3

3.81
(96.8)

8.88
(225.6)

3.38
(85.9)

2.94
(74.7)

7.13
(181.1)



4

3.81
(96.8)

6.63
(168.4)

3.38
(85.9)

2.94
(74.7)

4.88
(124.0)



37
37
37
37

Stainless Steel
1

3.00
(76.2)

3.50
(88.9)

3.00
(76.2)

1.50
(38.1)

4.25
(108.0)



37

2

3.50
(88.9)

6.75
(171.5)

3.00
(76.2)

1.50
(38.1)

7.50
(190.5)



37

3

3.50
(88.9)

9.00
(228.6)

3.00
(76.2)

1.50
(38.1)

9.00
(228.6)



37

4

3.50
(88.9)

11.25
(285.8)

3.00
(76.2)

1.50
(38.1)

12.00
(304.8)



37
37

Note
 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-29

Tab37book.fm Page 35 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Contents

Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated

Description
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page

37
37

T37-36
T37-39
T37-41
T37-43
T37-46
T37-49
T37-51
T37-53

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Product Description

Features

Eaton’s M22 pushbutton
line is a complete, modular
and versatile offering. From
field-convertible maintained
operators to customizable
laser engraved buttons, the
M22 pushbutton line provides
endless opportunity for
flexibility and reduced
inventory. Each operator
type provides options for
ordering as complete or
component parts allowing
for a perfect fit for each
application. All of this
flexibility comes in a very
rugged design.

●

●

●

●

37

Field convertible from
maintained to momentary
(available on maintained
pushbuttons only)
Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
More than five million
mechanical operations on
momentary and 1 million
on maintained pushbuttons

●

●

Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules

37
37
37
37

Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-35

Tab37book.fm Page 36 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Catalogue Number Selection
Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons

37

M22 – D – S – X0 – K10

37

Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black

37
37
D=
DH =
DG =
DR =
DGH =
DRH =

37
37
37
37
37



Operator Type
Flush momentary
Extended momentary
Flush with guard 
Flush maintained
Extended momentary with guard 
Extended maintained

Button Plate Colour
G = Green
S = Black
Y = Yellow
R = Red
B = Blue
W = White

GB0 =
GB1 =
GB2 =
GB3 =
GB4 =
GB5 =
GB6 =
GB14 =
GB15 =
GB16 =

Inscription
STOP
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
RESET
FORWARD
REVERSE

X0 =
X1 =
X4 =
X5 =
X6 =
X7 =
X8 =

Silver bezel only.

Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary

37

Complete Devices

37

Bezel

Button Colour

Contact Block
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Silver

Black

NO

M22-D-S-K10

NC

M22-D-S-K01

2NO

M22-D-S-K20

2NC

M22-D-S-K02

1NO-1NC

M22-D-S-K11

NO

M22-D-R-K10

NC

M22-D-R-K01

2NO

M22-D-R-K20

2NC

M22-D-R-K02

1NO-1NC

M22-D-R-K11

NO

M22-D-G-K10

NC

M22-D-G-K01

37

2NO

M22-D-G-K20

2NC

M22-D-G-K02

37

1NO-1NC

M22-D-G-K11

NO

M22S-D-S-K10

NC

M22S-D-S-K01

2NO

M22S-D-S-K20

2NC

M22S-D-S-K02

1NO-1NC

M22S-D-S-K11

NO

M22S-D-R-K10

NC

M22S-D-R-K01

2NO

M22S-D-R-K20

2NC

M22S-D-R-K02

1NO-1NC

M22S-D-R-K11

NO

M22S-D-G-K10

NC

M22S-D-G-K01

37

2NO

M22S-D-G-K20

2NC

M22S-D-G-K02

37

1NO-1NC

M22S-D-G-K11

M22-D-G-K10

37
37
37

Red

37
37
Green

37

M22S-D-G-K10

Black

Black

37
37
37

Red

37
37
Green

37

Note
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
T37-36

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

K10 =
K01 =
K20 =
K02 =
K11 =

Contact Blocks
1NO
K30 = 3NO
1NC
K03 = 3NC
2NO
K21 = 2NO-1NC
2NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC

Tab37book.fm Page 37 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary

37

Operators Only 
M22-D-G

Bezel

Button Colour

Inscription

Catalogue Number

Silver

Black

—

M22-D-S

Red

—

M22-D-R

STOP

M22-D-R-GB0

37
37
37

M22-D-R-X0
Green

—

M22-D-G

START

M22-D-G-GB1

37
37

M22-D-G-X1

M22S-D-G

Black

White

—

M22-D-W

Blue

—

M22-D-B

Yellow

—

M22-D-Y

—

—

M22-D-X-SRG 

—

M22-D-X-SWRGYB 

Black

—

M22S-D-S

Red

—

M22S-D-R

STOP

M22S-D-R-GB0

37
37
37
37
37

M22S-D-R-X0
Green

—

M22S-D-G

START

M22S-D-G-GB1

37
37

M22S-D-G-X1

M22-DG-G

Silver guarded

White

—

M22S-D-W

Blue

—

M22S-D-B

Yellow

—

M22S-D-Y

—

—

M22S-D-X-SRG 

—

M22S-D-X-SWRGYB 

Black

—

M22-DG-S

Red

—

M22-DG-R

Green

—

M22-DG-G

White

—

M22-DG-W

Blue

—

M22-DG-B

Yellow

—

M22-DG-Y

—

—

M22-DG-X-SRG 

—

M22-DG-X-SWRGYB 

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes

Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 Buttonless operator comes with three colour buttons (black, red, green).
 Buttonless operator comes with all six colour buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-37

Tab37book.fm Page 38 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary

37
37
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37

Components
M22-XD-G

Button Plates 
Colour

37

Black

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Inscription
—
Custom
STOP
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
TEST
FORWARD
REVERSE
RAISE
LOWER

37
37
37

Red

37
37

Green

37
37
37

—
Custom
START
ON

Blue

—
Custom
RESET

White

—
Custom
START

37
37

—
Custom
STOP
OFF

37
Yellow

—
Custom
Black, red, green —
Black, white,
—
red, green,
yellow, blue

37
37
37
T37-38

Buttonless Operator
Bezel

Catalogue Number 

M22-D-X

Silver

M22-D-X

M22S-D-X

Black

M22S-D-X

M22-DG-X

Silver guarded

M22-DG-X

M22-K10

Contact Blocks 

Catalogue Number


M22-XD-S
M22-XD-S-ETCH 
M22-XD-S-GB0
M22-XD-S-GB1
M22-XD-S-GB2
M22-XD-S-GB3
M22-XD-S-GB4
M22-XD-S-GB5
M22-XD-S-GB6
M22-XD-S-GB9
M22-XD-S-GB15
M22-XD-S-GB16
M22-XD-S-GB17
M22-XD-S-GB18
M22-XD-S-X0
M22-XD-S-X1
M22-XD-S-X2
M22-XD-S-X4
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-S-X7
M22-XD-R 
M22-XD-R-ETCH 
M22-XD-R-GB0
M22-XD-R-GB5
M22-XD-R-X0
M22-XD-G 
M22-XD-G-ETCH 
M22-XD-G-GB1
M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-G-X1
M22-XD-B 
M22-XD-B-ETCH 
M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
M22-XD-W 
M22-XD-W-ETCH 
M22-XD-W-GB1
M22-XD-W-X1
M22-XD-Y 
M22-XD-Y-ETCH 
M22-XD-SRG
M22-XD-SWRGYB

Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Spring-cage

Notes
 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 Minimum order quantity of (10).
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 39 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 

37

Operators Only 
M22-DR-S

Bezel

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

Black
Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow

M22-DR-S
M22-DR-R
M22-DR-G
M22-DR-W
M22-DR-B
M22-DR-Y
M22-DR-X-SRG
M22-DR-X-SWRGYB
M22S-DR-S
M22S-DR-R
M22S-DR-G
M22S-DR-W
M22S-DR-B
M22S-DR-Y
M22S-DR-X-SRG
M22S-DR-X-SWRGYB




M22S-DR-S

Black

Black
Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow



37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes

Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

Buttonless operator comes with three colour buttons (black, red, green).

Buttonless operator comes with all six colour buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-39

Tab37book.fm Page 40 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 

37
37
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37

Components
M22-XD-S

Button Plates 
Colour

37

Black

37
37
37
37
37
37

Inscription
—
Custom
STOP
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
TEST
FORWARD
REVERSE
RAISE
LOWER

37
37
37
37

Red

37
37

Green

37
37
37

—
Custom
RESET

White

—
Custom
START

Yellow

—
Custom
—
—

37
37

Black, red, green
Black, white, red,
green, yellow, blue

37

—
Custom
START
ON

Blue

37
37

—
Custom
STOP
OFF

Buttonless Operator
Bezel

Catalogue Number 

M22-DR-X

Silver

M22-DR-X

M22S-DR-X

Black

M22S-DR-X

M22-K10

Contact Blocks 

Catalogue Number


M22-XD-S
M22-XD-S-ETCH 
M22-XD-S-GB0
M22-XD-S-GB1
M22-XD-S-GB2
M22-XD-S-GB3
M22-XD-S-GB4
M22-XD-S-GB5
M22-XD-S-GB6
M22-XD-S-GB9
M22-XD-S-GB15
M22-XD-S-GB16
M22-XD-S-GB17
M22-XD-S-GB18
M22-XD-S-X0
M22-XD-S-X1
M22-XD-S-X2
M22-XD-S-X4
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-S-X7
M22-XD-R 
M22-XD-R-ETCH 
M22-XD-R-GB0
M22-XD-R-GB5
M22-XD-R-X0
M22-XD-G 
M22-XD-G-ETCH 
M22-XD-G-GB1
M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-G-X1
M22-XD-B 
M22-XD-B-ETCH 
M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
M22-XD-W 
M22-XD-W-ETCH 
M22-XD-W-GB1
M22-XD-W-X1
M22-XD-Y 
M22-XD-Y-ETCH 
M22-XD-SRG
M22-XD-SWRGYB

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO

M22-K10

NO, early-make

M22-K10P

NC

M22-K01

NC, late-break

M22-K01D

NO

M22-CK10

NC

M22-CK01

NC, late-break

M22-CK01D

2NO

M22-CK20

2NC

M22-CK02

NO-NC

M22-CK11

Spring-cage

Notes
 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching
the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 Minimum order quantity of (10).
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
T37-40

Terminal
Type

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 41 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary

37

Complete Devices

M22-DH-R-K10

M22S-DH-R-K10

M22-DGH-R-K10

Bezel

Button Colour

Silver

Red

Black

Silver guarded

Red

Red

37

Contact Block
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

NO
NC
2NO
2NC
1NO-1NC

M22-DH-R-K10
M22-DH-R-K01
M22-DH-R-K20
M22-DH-R-K02
M22-DH-R-K11

37

NO
NC
2NO
2NC
1NO-1NC

M22S-DH-R-K10
M22S-DH-R-K01
M22S-DH-R-K20
M22S-DH-R-K02
M22S-DH-R-K11

37

NO
NC
2NO
2NC
1NO-1NC

M22-DGH-R-K10
M22-DGH-R-K01
M22-DGH-R-K20
M22-DGH-R-K02
M22-DGH-R-K11

37

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Operators Only 
M22-DH-R

Bezel

Button Colour

Inscription

Catalogue Number

Silver

Black
Red

—
—
STOP

Green
White
Blue
Yellow

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
STOP

M22-DH-S
M22-DH-R
M22-DH-R-GB0
M22-DH-R-X0
M22-DH-G
M22-DH-W
M22-DH-B
M22-DH-Y
M22-DH-X-SRG
M22-DH-X-SWRGYB
M22S-DH-S
M22S-DH-R
M22S-DH-R-GB0
M22S-DH-R-X0
M22S-DH-G
M22S-DH-W
M22S-DH-B
M22S-DH-Y
M22S-DH-X-SRG
M22S-DH-X-SWRGYB
M22-DGH-S
M22-DGH-R
M22-DGH-R-GB0
M22-DGH-R-X0
M22-DGH-G
M22-DGH-W
M22-DGH-B
M22-DGH-Y




M22S-DH-R

Black

Black
Red

Green
White
Blue
Yellow



M22-DGH-R

Silver guarded

Black
Red

Green
White
Blue
Yellow

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
STOP
—
—
—
—

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 Buttonless operator comes with three colour buttons (black, red, green).
 Buttonless operator comes with all six colour buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).

37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-41

Tab37book.fm Page 42 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary

37
37
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37

Components
M22-XDH-R

Button Plates 
Colour

37

Black

37
37
37
37
37
37

Inscription
—
Custom
STOP
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
TEST
FORWARD
REVERSE
RAISE
LOWER

37
37
37
37

Red

37
37

Green

37
37
37

—
Custom
RESET

White

—
Custom
START

Yellow

—
Custom
—
—

37
37

Black, red, green
Black, white, red,
green, yellow, blue

37

—
Custom
START
ON

Blue

37
37

—
Custom
STOP
OFF

Buttonless Operator
Bezel

Catalogue Number 

M22-D-X

Silver

M22-D-X

M22S-D-X

Black

M22S-D-X

M22-DG-X

Silver guarded

M22-DG-X

M22-K10

Contact Blocks 

Catalogue Number


M22-XDH-S
M22-XDH-S-ETCH 
M22-XDH-S-GB0
M22-XDH-S-GB1
M22-XDH-S-GB2
M22-XDH-S-GB3
M22-XDH-S-GB4
M22-XDH-S-GB5
M22-XDH-S-GB6
M22-XDH-S-GB9
M22-XDH-S-GB15
M22-XDH-S-GB16
M22-XDH-S-GB17
M22-XDH-S-GB18
M22-XDH-S-X0
M22-XDH-S-X1
M22-XDH-S-X2
M22-XDH-S-X4
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-S-X7
M22-XDH-R 
M22-XDH-R-ETCH 
M22-XDH-R-GB0
M22-XDH-R-GB5
M22-XDH-R-X0
M22-XDH-G 
M22-XDH-G-ETCH 
M22-XDH-G-GB1
M22-XDH-G-GB6
M22-XDH-G-X1
M22-XDH-B 
M22-XDH-B-ETCH 
M22-XDH-B-GB14
M22-XDH-B-X6
M22-XDH-W 
M22-XDH-W-ETCH 
M22-XDH-W-GB1
M22-XDH-W-X1
M22-XDH-Y 
M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 
M22-XDH-SRG
M22-XDH-SWRGYB

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Spring-cage

Notes
 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 Minimum order quantity of (10).
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
T37-42

Terminal
Type

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 43 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 

37

Operators Only 
M22-DRH-W

Bezel

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

Black
Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow

M22-DRH-S
M22-DRH-R
M22-DRH-G
M22-DRH-W
M22-DRH-B
M22-DRH-Y
M22-DRH-X-SRG
M22-DRH-X-SWRGYB
M22S-DRH-S
M22S-DRH-R
M22S-DRH-G
M22S-DRH-W
M22S-DRH-B
M22S-DRH-Y
M22S-DRH-X-SRG
M22S-DRH-X-SWRGYB




M22S-DRH-W

Black

Black
Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow



37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes

Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

Buttonless operator comes with three colour buttons (black, red, green).

Buttonless operator comes with all six colour buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-43

Tab37book.fm Page 44 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 

37
37
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37

Components
M22-XDH-W

Button Plates 
Colour

37

Black

37
37
37
37
37
37

Inscription
—
Custom
STOP
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
TEST
FORWARD
REVERSE
RAISE
LOWER

37
37
37
37

Red

37
37

Green

37
37
37

—
Custom
RESET

White

—
Custom
START

Yellow

—
Custom
—
—

37
37

Black, red, green
Black, white,
red, green, yellow,
blue

37
37
T37-44

—
Custom
START
ON

Blue

37
37

—
Custom
STOP
OFF

Buttonless Operator
Bezel

Catalogue Number 

M22-DR-X

Silver

M22-DR-X

M22S-DR-X

Black

M22S-DR-X

M22-K10

Contact Blocks 

Catalogue Number


M22-XDH-S
M22-XDH-S-ETCH 
M22-XDH-S-GB0
M22-XDH-S-GB1
M22-XDH-S-GB2
M22-XDH-S-GB3
M22-XDH-S-GB4
M22-XDH-S-GB5
M22-XDH-S-GB6
M22-XDH-S-GB9
M22-XDH-S-GB15
M22-XDH-S-GB16
M22-XDH-S-GB17
M22-XDH-S-GB18
M22-XDH-S-X0
M22-XDH-S-X1
M22-XDH-S-X2
M22-XDH-S-X4
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-S-X7
M22-XDH-R 
M22-XDH-R-ETCH 
M22-XDH-R-GB0
M22-XDH-R-GB5
M22-XDH-R-X0
M22-XDH-G 
M22-XDH-G-ETCH 
M22-XDH-G-GB1
M22-XDH-G-GB6
M22-XDH-G-X1
M22-XDH-B 
M22-XDH-B-ETCH 
M22-XDH-B-GB14
M22-XDH-B-X6
M22-XDH-W 
M22-XDH-W-ETCH 
M22-XDH-W-GB1
M22-XDH-W-X1
M22-XDH-Y 
M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 
M22-XDH-SRG
M22-XDH-SWRGYB

Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Spring-cage

Notes

Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 Minimum order quantity of (10).
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 45 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Illuminated Pushbuttons

37

M22 – DRL – R – GB0 – K10 – 230R
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black

DL =
DLH =
DGL =
DRL =
DGLH =
DRLH =


Operator Type
Illuminated flush momentary
Illuminated extended momentary
Illuminated flush momentary with guard 
Illuminated flush maintained
Illuminated extended momentary with guard 
Illuminated extended maintained

Silver bezel only.

Lens Colour
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
Y = Yellow
B = Blue

K10 =
K01 =
K20 =
K02 =
K11 =

Contact Blocks
1NO
K30 = 3NO
1NC
K03 = 3NC
2NO
K21 = 2NO-1NC
2NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC

37

Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
85–264 Vac
230W = White
230R = Red
230G = Green
230B = Blue

37
37
37
37
37
37

Inscription
GB0 = STOP
GB1 = START
GB2 = CLOSE
GB3 = UP
GB4 = DOWN
GB5 = OFF
GB6 = ON
GB14 = RESET
GB15 = FORWARD
GB16 = REVERSE
X0 =
X1 =
X4 =
X5 =
X6 =

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-45

Tab37book.fm Page 46 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37

22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Product Selection
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Complete Devices

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

M22-DL-G-K01-G

Bezel

Button Colour

Silver

Red

37
37
Green

37
37
37

White

37
37
37
M22S-DL-G-K01-G

Black

Red

37
37
37

Green

37
37
37

White

37
37
37

Contact Block
Configuration 

Light Unit Voltage

Catalogue Number

NC
NC
2NC
2NC
1NO/1NC
1NO/1NC
NO
NO
2NO
2NO
1NO/1NC
1NO/1NC
NO
NO
2NO
2NO
1NO/1NC
1NO/1NC
NC
NC
2NC
2NC
1NO/1NC
1NO/1NC
NO
NO
2NO
2NO
1NO/1NC
1NO/1NC
NO
NO
2NO
2NO
1NO/1NC
1NO/1NC

12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac

M22-DL-R-K01-R
M22-DL-R-K01-230R
M22-DL-R-K02-R
M22-DL-R-K02-230R
M22-DL-R-K11-R
M22-DL-R-K11-230R
M22-DL-G-K10-G
M22-DL-G-K10-230G
M22-DL-G-K20-G
M22-DL-G-K20-230G
M22-DL-G-K11-G
M22-DL-G-K11-230G
M22-DL-W-K10-W
M22-DL-W-K10-230W
M22-DL-W-K20-W
M22-DL-W-K20-230W
M22-DL-W-K11-W
M22-DL-W-K11-230W
M22S-DL-R-K01-R
M22S-DL-R-K01-230R
M22S-DL-R-K02-R
M22S-DL-R-K02-230R
M22S-DL-R-K11-R
M22S-DL-R-K11-230R
M22S-DL-G-K10-G
M22S-DL-G-K10-230G
M22S-DL-G-K20-G
M22S-DL-G-K20-230G
M22S-DL-G-K11-G
M22S-DL-G-K11-230G
M22S-DL-W-K10-W
M22S-DL-W-K10-230W
M22S-DL-W-K20-W
M22S-DL-W-K20-230W
M22S-DL-W-K11-W
M22S-DL-W-K11-230W

Note
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-46

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 47 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Operators Only
M22-DL-G

M22S-DL-G

M22-DGL-G

37



37

Bezel

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow

M22-DL-R
M22-DL-G
M22-DL-W
M22-DL-B
M22-DL-Y

Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow

M22S-DL-R
M22S-DL-G
M22S-DL-W
M22S-DL-B
M22S-DL-Y

Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow

M22-DGL-R
M22-DGL-G
M22-DGL-W
M22-DGL-B
M22-DGL-Y

Black

Silver guarded

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-47

Tab37book.fm Page 48 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary

37
37
37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37
37

Components
M22-XDL-G

Button Lenses 
Colour
Red

37
37
37

—
Custom
START
ON

Blue

—
Custom
RESET

37
37

White

37

Yellow

37

—
Custom
—
Custom

M22-LED-W
Catalogue Number


M22-XDL-R
M22-XDL-R-ETCH 
M22-XDL-R-GB0
M22-XDL-R-GB5
M22-XDL-R-X0
M22-XDL-G 
M22-XDL-G-ETCH 
M22-XDL-G-GB1
M22-XDL-G-GB6
M22-XDL-G-X1
M22-XDL-B 
M22-XDL-B-ETCH 
M22-XDL-B-GB14
M22-XDL-B-X6
M22-XDL-W 
M22-XDL-W-ETCH 
M22-XDL-Y 
M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 

Light Units 
Terminal
Type

LED
Colour

Light Unit
Voltage

Screw

White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue

12–30
Vac/Vdc

Screw

M22-K10

Buttonless Operator
M22-DL-X

Bezel

Catalogue Number 

Silver

M22-DL-X

37
37
37
M22S-DL-X

Black

M22S-DL-X

M22-DGL-X

Silver guarded

M22-DGL-X

37
37

M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B

Contact Blocks 
Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Notes

For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 Minimum order quantity of (10).
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-48

85–264
Vac

Catalogue Number

Terminal
Type

Spring-cage

37
37

—
Custom
STOP
OFF

Green

37
37

Inscription

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 49 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 

37

Complete Devices

M22-DRL-W-K10-W

M22S-DRL-W-K10-W

Bezel

Button Colour

Silver

White

Black

White

37

Contact Block
Configuration 

Light Unit Voltage

Catalogue Number

NO
NO
NC
NC
2NO
2NO
2NC
2NC
1NO/1NC
1NO/1NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
2NO
2NO
2NC
2NC
1NO/1NC
1NO/1NC

12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac

M22-DRL-W-K10-W
M22-DRL-W-K10-230W
M22-DRL-W-K01-W
M22-DRL-W-K01-230W
M22-DRL-W-K20-W
M22-DRL-W-K20-230W
M22-DRL-W-K02-W
M22-DRL-W-K02-230W
M22-DRL-W-K11-W
M22-DRL-W-K11-230W
M22S-DRL-W-K10-W
M22S-DRL-W-K10-230W
M22S-DRL-W-K01-W
M22S-DRL-W-K01-230W
M22S-DRL-W-K20-W
M22S-DRL-W-K20-230W
M22S-DRL-W-K02-W
M22S-DRL-W-K02-230W
M22S-DRL-W-K11-W
M22S-DRL-W-K11-230W

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Operators Only 
M22-DRL-W

37

Bezel

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow

M22-DRL-R
M22-DRL-G
M22-DRL-W
M22-DRL-B
M22-DRL-Y

37
37
37
37

M22S-DRL-W

Black

Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow

M22S-DRL-R
M22S-DRL-G
M22S-DRL-W
M22S-DRL-B
M22S-DRL-Y

37
37
37
37

Notes
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

37
T37-49

Tab37book.fm Page 50 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 

37
37
37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37
37

Components
M22-XDL-W

37

Button Lenses 
Colour

Inscription

Catalogue Number

Red

—
Custom
STOP
OFF

M22-XDL-R 
M22-XDL-R-ETCH 
M22-XDL-R-GB0
M22-XDL-R-GB5
M22-XDL-R-X0
M22-XDL-G 
M22-XDL-G-ETCH 
M22-XDL-G-GB1
M22-XDL-G-GB6
M22-XDL-G-X1
M22-XDL-B 
M22-XDL-B-ETCH 
M22-XDL-B-GB14
M22-XDL-B-X6
M22-XDL-W 
M22-XDL-W-ETCH 
M22-XDL-Y 
M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 

37
37

Green

—
Custom
START
ON

Blue

—
Custom
RESET

37
37
37
37

White

37

Yellow

37

—
Custom
—
Custom

Light Units 
Terminal
Type

LED
Colour

Light Unit
Voltage

Screw

White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue

12–30
Vac/Vdc

Screw

M22-K10

Buttonless Operator
M22-DRL-X

Bezel

Catalogue Number 

Silver

M22-DRL-X

37
37
37
M22S-DRL-X

37
37

Black

M22S-DRL-X

Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Notes

Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
 For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 Minimum order quantity of (10).
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-50

85–264
Vac

Catalogue Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B

Contact Blocks 

Spring-cage

37
37

M22-LED-W

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 51 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary

37

Complete Devices

M22-DLH-R-K11-R

M22S-DLH-R-K11-R

37

Bezel

Button Colour

Contact Block
Configuration 

Light Unit Voltage

Catalogue Number

Silver

Red

1NO/1NC

12–30 Vac/Vdc

M22-DLH-R-K11-R

Black

85–264 Vac

M22-DLH-R-K11-230R

2NO

12–30 Vac/Vdc

M22-DLH-G-K20-G

2NO

85–264 Vac

M22-DLH-G-K20-230G

White

2NO

12–30 Vac/Vdc

M22-DLH-W-K20-W

2NO

85–264 Vac

M22-DLH-W-K20-230W

1NO/1NC

12–30 Vac/Vdc

M22S-DLH-R-K11-R

1NO/1NC

85–264 Vac

M22S-DLH-R-K11-230R

2NO

12–30 Vac/Vdc

M22S-DLH-G-K20-G

2NO

85–264 Vac

M22S-DLH-G-K20-230G

Red

White

Silver

Red

2NO

12–30 Vac/Vdc

M22S-DLH-W-K20-W

85–264 Vac

M22S-DLH-W-K20-230W

12–30 Vac/Vdc

Catalogue Number
M22-T-R-R

M22-DLH-R

Bezel

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

Red

M22-DLH-R

Green

M22-DLH-G

M22-T-Y-W

White

M22-DLH-W

Green

M22-T-G-G

Blue

M22-DLH-B

White

M22-T-W-W

Yellow

M22-DLH-Y

Red

M22S-DLH-R

Green

M22S-DLH-G

White

M22S-DLH-W

Blue

M22S-DLH-B

Yellow

M22S-DLH-Y

Red

M22-DGLH-R

85–264 Vac

M22-T-R-230R
M22-T-R-230B

Yellow

M22-T-Y-230W

Green

M22-T-G-230G

White

M22-T-W-230W

Red

12–30 Vac/Vdc

M22S-DLH-R

Black

M22S-T-R-R
M22S-T-Y-W

Green

M22-DGLH-G

M22S-T-G-G

White

M22-DGLH-W

M22S-T-W-W

Blue

M22-DGLH-B

M22S-T-R-230R

Yellow

M22-DGLH-Y

85–264 Vac

Blue

M22S-T-B-230B

Yellow

M22S-T-Y-230W

Green

M22S-T-G-230G

White

M22S-T-W-230W

37
37

Green
Red

37

37

Yellow
White

37

37

M22S-T-B-B

Silver guarded

37

37

Blue

M22-DGLH-R

37

37

M22-T-B-B

Yellow

Blue

37

37

Operators Only 

Blue

Red

Black

Light Unit Voltage

37

2NO

Complete Press-to-Test Units
Button Colour

37

1NO/1NC
Green

Green

Bezel

37

37
37
37
37
37

Notes

All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-51

Tab37book.fm Page 52 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary

37
37
37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37
37

Components
M22-XDH-R

Button Lenses 
Colour
Red

37
37
37

—
Custom
START
ON

Blue

—
Custom
RESET

37
37

White

37

Yellow

37

—
Custom
—
Custom

M22-LED-W
Catalogue Number


M22-XDLH-R
M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 
M22-XDLH-R-GB0
M22-XDLH-R-GB5
M22-XDLH-R-X0
M22-XDLH-G 
M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 
M22-XDLH-G-GB1
M22-XDLH-G-GB6
M22-XDLH-G-X1
M22-XDLH-B 
M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 
M22-XDLH-B-GB14
M22-XDLH-B-X6
M22-XDLH-W 
M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 
M22-XDLH-Y 
M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH 

Light Units 
Terminal
Type

LED
Colour

Light Unit
Voltage

Screw

White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue

12–30
Vac/Vdc

Screw

M22-K10

Buttonless Operator
M22-DL-X

Bezel

Catalogue Number 

Silver

M22-DL-X

37
37
37
M22S-DL-X

Black

M22S-DL-X

M22-DGL-X

Silver guarded

M22-DGL-X

37
37

M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B

Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Notes

For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.

Minimum order quantity of (10).

When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-52

85–264
Vac

Catalogue Number

Contact Blocks 

Spring-cage

37
37

—
Custom
STOP
OFF

Green

37
37

Inscription

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 53 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 

37

Operators Only 
M22-DRLH-W

M22S-DRLH-W

Bezel

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow

M22-DRLH-R
M22-DRLH-G
M22-DRLH-W
M22-DRLH-B
M22-DRLH-Y

Red
Green
White
Blue
Yellow

M22S-DRLH-R
M22S-DRLH-G
M22S-DRLH-W
M22S-DRLH-B
M22S-DRLH-Y

Black

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-53

Tab37book.fm Page 54 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 

37
37
37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37
37

Components
M22-XDLH-W

Button Lenses 
Colour
Red

37
37
37

—
Custom
START
ON

Blue

—
Custom
RESET

37
37

White

37

Yellow

37

—
Custom
—
Custom

M22-LED-W
Catalogue Number

Terminal
Type



M22-XDLH-R
M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 
M22-XDLH-R-GB0
M22-XDLH-R-GB5
M22-XDLH-R-X0
M22-XDLH-G 
M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 
M22-XDLH-G-GB1
M22-XDLH-G-GB6
M22-XDLH-G-X1
M22-XDLH-B 
M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 
M22-XDLH-B-GB14
M22-XDLH-B-X6
M22-XDLH-W 
M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 
M22-XDLH-Y 
M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH 

Light Units 

M22-K10

Buttonless Operator
M22-DRL-X

Bezel

Catalogue Number 

Silver

M22-DRL-X

37
37
37
M22S-DRL-X

37
37
37

Black

M22S-DRL-X

Light Unit
Voltage

White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue

12–30
Vac/Vdc

85–264
Vac

Catalogue Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B

Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Notes

Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.

Minimum order quantity of (10).

When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDLH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
T37-54

LED
Colour

Contact Blocks 

Spring-cage

37
37

—
Custom
STOP
OFF

Green

37
37

Inscription

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 55 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Indicating Lights
Product Description

37

Features
As with the pushbuttons, the
indicating light lenses can be
laser engraved. Indicating
lights can be ordered as
complete devices, including
lens and LED unit, or as
modular components.

Eaton’s M22 indicating lights
use the combination of a
durable, bright LED unit and
modern lenses designed
specifically for this type of
LED to create a bright and
visible indicating light.

●

●

●

Customizable laser
engraving on all lenses
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
Lenses designed
specifically for LED
illumination

Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
●
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13
●

Catalogue Number Selection

37
37
37
37
37
37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Indicating Lights

37

M22 - L – B – GB8 – B
Operator Type
M22-L = Flush indicating light

Lens Colour
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
Y = Yellow
B = Blue

Plate Inscription
ETCH =
GB5 =
GB6 =
GB8 =
GB15 =
GB16 =


Note: Light unit should match colour of lens.
Use white light unit with yellow lens.



12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue

Custom
OFF
ON
FAULT
FORWARD
REVERSE

37

Light Units
85–264 Vac
230W = White
230R = Red
230G = Green
230B = Blue

37
37
37

When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-L-B-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.

37
37

Product Selection

37

Indicating Lights, Flush
M22-L-R-R

37

Complete Devices
Lens Colour

Light Colour

Light Unit Voltage

Catalogue Number

White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Amber
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Amber

White
Red
Green
White
Blue
White
White
Red
Green
White
Blue
White

12–30 Vac/Vdc

M22-L-W-W
M22-L-R-R
M22-L-G-G
M22-L-Y-W
M22-L-B-B
M22-L-A-W
M22-L-W-230W
M22-L-R-230R
M22-L-G-230G
M22-L-Y-230W
M22-L-B-230B
M22-L-A-230W

85–264 Vac

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Operators Only 
Lens Colour
M22-L-R

Flat
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Amber

Catalogue Number
M22-LH-R
M22-L-W
M22-L-R
M22-L-G
M22-L-Y
M22-L-B
M22-L-A

Lens Colour

Catalogue Number

Conical
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Amber

M22-LH-W
M22-LH-R
M22-LH-G
M22-LH-Y
M22-LH-B
M22-LH-A

37
37
37
37
37

Note

Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-55

Tab37book.fm Page 56 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Indicating Lights, Flush

37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

Components
M22-XL-R

Lenses 
Colour
Flat
Red

37
37

Green

37
37

Blue

37
37

White

37
37
37

Yellow

37

Amber

37

Conical
Red
Green
Blue
White
Yellow
Amber

37
37
37
37

M22-L-X

M22-LED-W
Inscription

Catalogue Number

—
Custom
OFF
—
Custom
ON
REVERSE
—
Custom
FAULT
—
Custom
OFF
ON
FAULT
FORWARD
—
Custom
—
Custom

M22-XL-R 
M22-XL-R-ETCH 
M22-XL-R-GB5
M22-XL-G 
M22-XL-G-ETCH 
M22-XL-G-GB6
M22-XL-G-GB16
M22-XL-B 
M22-XL-B-ETCH 
M22-XL-B-GB8
M22-XL-W 
M22-XL-W-ETCH 
M22-XL-W-GB5
M22-XL-W-GB6
M22-XL-W-GB8
M22-XL-W-GB15
M22-XL-Y 
M22-XL-Y-ETCH 
M22-XL-A 
M22-XL-A-ETCH 

–
–
–
–
–
–

M22-XLH-R
M22-XLH-G
M22-XLH-B
M22-XLH-W
M22–XLH-Y
M22-XLH-A

Light Unit
Voltage

Screw

White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue

12–30
Vac/Vdc

85–264
Vac

Catalogue Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B

Notes
 For complete listing of available lenses and light units, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 Minimum order quantity of (10).
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
 Select the same colour LED element as lens colour; for yellow and amber lenses,
choose a white LED.

Lensless Indicating Light
M22-L-X

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-56

LED
Colour

Screw

Catalogue Number

37

Light Units 
Terminal
Type

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 57 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Emergency Stops
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 emergency
stops are a durable and
reliable solution to a variety of
e-stop applications. With
standard push-pull, as well as
twist-to-release and keyrelease, illuminated options
and red or black operators,

37

Features
the M22 e-stop is a robust
solution. As with all
operators, they can be
ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
modular components for the
perfect fit.

●

●

Push-pull and twist to
release options available as
well as illuminated and
keyed release
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation

More than 100,000
mechanical operations
●
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
(IP66 key-release)
●
NEMA 4X, 13
●

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37
37

37

M22 – PVT – MS2 – K10 – 230R
Operator Colour
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black

PVS =
PVS45P =
PVS60P =
PVL =
PVLT =
PVLT45P =
PVLT60P =

37

37

Emergency Stops

PVT60P-MPI =

37

37

Catalogue Number Selection

PV =
PVT =
PVT45P =
PVT60P =
PVT45P-MPI =

37

Key Release Code
Blank = MS1
MS2 = MS2
MS3 = MS3
MS4 = MS4
MS5 = MS5
MS6 = MS6
MS7 = MS7
MS8 = MS8
RS = Ronis
(45 and 60 mm only)

Operator Type
Non-illuminated push-pull emergency stop
Non-illuminated twist-to-release emergency stop
Non-illuminated twist-to-release 45 mm emergency stop
Non-illuminated twist-to-release 60 mm emergency stop
Non-illuminated twist-to-release with mechanical
indication, 45 mm
Non-illuminated twist-to-release with mechanical
indication, 60 mm
Non-illuminated keyed release (red operator only)
Non-illuminated keyed release 45 mm (red only)
Non-illuminated keyed release 60 mm (red only)
Illuminated push-pull emergency stop
Illuminated twist-to-release emergency stop
Illuminated twist-to-release 45 mm emergency stop
Illuminated twist-to-release 60 mm emergency stop

Contact Blocks
K10 = NO
K10P = NO, early-make
K01 = NC
K01D = NC, late-break
CK10 = NO
CK01 = NC
CK01D = NC, late-break
Ck20 = 2NO
CK02 = 2NC
CK11 = NO-NC

37
37

Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
85–264 Vac
230W = White
230R = Red
230G = Green
230B = Blue

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Product Selection

37

Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops
M22-PV-K01

37

Complete Devices
Type

Colour

Push-pull

Red

Twist-to-release

Red

Key release

Red

Contact Block
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

NC
2NC
1NO-2NC
NC
2NC
1NO-2NC
NC
2NC
1NO-2NC

M22-PV-K01
M22-PV-K02
M22-PV-K12
M22-PVT-K01
M22-PVT-K02
M22-PVT-K12
M22-PVS-K01
M22-PVS-K02
M22-PVS-K12

37
37
37
37
37
37

Note

All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-57

Tab37book.fm Page 58 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops

37
37
37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37

Components
Operators Only 

37
37

M22-K10

Type

Colour

Actuator
Size

Catalogue Number

M22-PV

Push-pull

Red
Black

35 mm
35 mm

M22-PV
M22S-PV

M22S-PVT

Twist-torelease

Red

35 mm
45 mm
60 mm

M22-PVT
M22-PVT45P
M22-PVT60P
M22S-PVT

35 mm

M22-PVS 
M22-PVS-MS2
M22-PVS-MS3
M22-PVS-MS4
M22-PVS-MS5
M22-PVS-MS6
M22-PVS-MS7
M22-PVS-MS8
M22-PVS45P
M22-PVS45P-MS2
M22-PVS45P-MS3
M22-PVS45P-MS4
M22-PVS45P-MS5
M22-PVS45P-MS6
M22-PVS45P-MS7
M22-PVS45P-MS8
M22-PVS45P-RS
M22-PVS60P
M22-PVS60P-MS2
M22-PVS60P-MS3
M22-PVS60P-MS4
M22-PVS60P-MS5
M22-PVS60P-MS6
M22-PVS60P-MS7
M22-PVS60P-MS8
M22-PVS60P-RS
M22-PVT45P-MPI
M22-PVT60P-MPI

37

Contact Blocks 
Terminal
Type

Mounting Contact
Catalogue
Location  Configuration  Number

Screw

Front

37
37
37

Base

37

Black

Springcage

Front

37
37

Key release 

Red

37
37
37
37

45 mm

37
37
37
37

60 mm

37
37
37
37
Mechanical
indication

37
T37-58

Red

45 mm
60 mm

M22-ES-MS1

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
SMCB, NC
SMCB, 2NC
SMCB, NC
SMCB, 2NC
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-K01SMC10
M22-K02SMC10
M22-KC01SMC10
M22-KC02SMC10
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Extra Keys 
For Key Code

Catalogue Number

MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8

M22-ES-MS1
M22-ES-MS2
M22-ES-MS3
M22-ES-MS4
M22-ES-MS5
M22-ES-MS6
M22-ES-MS7
M22-ES-MS8

Notes

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

Key included. For identical locks and keys, use the same key code. One key is included with
actuator; additional keys are available as accessories.

Includes Key Code MS1.

For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 Self-monitoring contact blocks (SMCB type) cannot be used with illuminated emergency
stops.

All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

For use with key release operators only. One key included with operator.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 59 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Accessories
M22-XGPV

Description

Voltage

Catalogue Number

Yellow guard ring

—

M22-XGPV

37
37
37

M22G-XGPV

Gray guard ring

—

37

M22G-XGPV

37
37
M22-PL-PV

Sealing shroud

—

M22-PL-PV

37
37
37
M22-XPV60-Y-120

Illuminated ring

24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
230 Vac

M22-XPV60-Y-24
M22-XPV60-Y-120
M22-XPV60-Y-230

37
37
37
37

Illuminated Emergency Stops
M22-PVL-K01-R

Complete Devices
Type

Button Colour

LED Colour

Push-pull

Red

Red

Twist-to-release

37

Contact Block
Configuration 

Light Unit Voltage

Catalogue Number

NC
2NC
1NO-2NC
NC
2NC
1NO-2NC
NC
2NC
1NO-2NC
NC
2NC
1NO-2NC

12–30 Vac/Vdc
12–30 Vac/Vdc
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
85–264 Vac
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
12–30 Vac/Vdc
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
85–264 Vac
85–264 Vac

M22-PVL-K01-R
M22-PVL-K02-R
M22-PVL-K12-R
M22-PVL-K01-230R
M22-PVL-K02-230R
M22-PVL-K12-230R
M22-PVLT-K01-R
M22-PVLT-K02-R
M22-PVLT-K12-R
M22-PVLT-K01-230R
M22-PVLT-K02-230R
M22-PVLT-K12-230R

Note

All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-59

Tab37book.fm Page 60 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Emergency Stops

37
37
37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

Components

37

Operators Only 

37

Type

Colour

Actuator
Size

Catalogue Number

Push-pull

Red
Black

35 mm
35 mm

M22-PVL
M22S-PVL

37

M22-PVL

M22-K10

Contact Blocks 
Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

37
Spring-cage

37
37

M22S-PVLT

Twist-torelease

37

Red

Black

35 mm
45 mm
60 mm
35 mm

M22-PVLT
M22-PVLT45P
M22-PVLT60P
M22S-PVLT

37

Accessories

37
37

M22-LED-W

37

Light Units 
Terminal
Type

LED
Colour

Light Unit
Voltage

Screw

White

12–30
Vac/Vdc
12–30
Vac/Vdc
85–264
Vac
85–264
Vac
207–264 Vac
207–264 Vac

37

Red

37

Screw

37

White
Red

Screw

37

White
Red

Description

Voltage

Catalogue Number

M22-XGPV

Yellow guard ring

—

M22-XGPV

M22G-XGPV

Gray guard ring

—

M22G-XGPV

M22-PL-PV

Sealing shroud

—

M22-PL-PV

Illuminated ring

24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
230 Vac

M22-XPV60-Y-24
M22-XPV60-Y-120
M22-XPV60-Y-230

Catalogue Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230H-W
M22-LED230H-R

37
37
37

Notes
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.

All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
T37-60

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 61 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Contents

Selector Switches

Description
Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page

37
37

T37-62
T37-67
T37-71

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Selector Switches
Product Description

Features

Eaton’s M22 selector switch
line offers an almost endless
variety of options in
maintained/momentary, keyremoval and illuminated
devices. The coding adapters
used for maintained/
momentary and key removal
positions make the M22
stand out from competitive
devices. By simply adding or
removing a coding adapter
from inside the operator,
the end-user can change
the function of the button.
Operator options include
standard knob, rotary head,
illuminated and keyed
versions. As with all
operators, they can be
ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
modular components to
meet application specific
requirements.

●

●

●

37

Adding or removing coding
adapters allows for field
convertibility of
maintained/momentary
and key removal positions
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
More than 100,000
mechanical operations

●

●

Coding adapter options
make assembly fast and
simplify stocking of
different configurations of
selector switches
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules

37
37
37
37

Protection Type
●
IP66
●
NEMA 4X, 13

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-61

Tab37book.fm Page 62 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Catalogue Number Selection
Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches

37

M22 – WRK — – X91 – K10

37
Bezel Colour
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black

37

Inscription 
X91 = AUTO-HAND
X92 = II-I

37




37

W=
WK =
WKV =
WR =
WRK =

37
37



37

Handle Type
Momentary rotary
Momentary knob
Maintained V-position knob
Maintained rotary
Maintained knob

Rotary type only.

Number of Positions
Blank = Two-position
3 = Three-position
4 = Four-position

All momentary selector switches can
be converted in the field to maintained
operation with the removal of a colourcoded adapter.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-62

Contact Blocks
K10 = NO
K10P = NO, early-make

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

K11 =
K22 =
K20 =
K02 =

Options
NO-NC
2NO-2NC
2NO
2NC

Tab37book.fm Page 63 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Product Selection

37

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
M22-WKV-K10

37

Complete Devices, Knob Type 
Type

Switching Position

Bezel

Two-position

Maintained

Silver

Black

Maintained V

Silver

Black

Three-position

Maintained

Silver
Black

Contact Block
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

NO
1NO-1NC
2NO-2NC
NO
1NO-1NC
2NO-2NC
NO
1NO-1NC
2NO-2NC
NO
1NO-1NC
2NO-2NC
2NO
2NO-2NC
2NO
2NO-2NC

M22-WRK-K10
M22-WRK-K11
M22-WRK-K22
M22S-WRK-K10
M22S-WRK-K11
M22S-WRK-K22
M22-WKV-K10
M22-WKV-K11
M22-WKV-K22
M22S-WKV-K10
M22S-WKV-K11
M22S-WKV-K22
M22-WRK3-K20
M22-WRK3-K22
M22S-WRK3-K20
M22S-WRK3-K22

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-63

Tab37book.fm Page 64 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Components
M22-WK

37

Operators Only, Knob Type 
Type

Switching Position

Bezel

Catalogue Number

Two-position

Momentary 

Silver
Black

M22-WK
M22S-WK

Maintained

Silver
Black

M22-WRK
M22S-WRK

Maintained V

Silver
Black

M22-WKV
M22S-WKV

Momentary 

Silver
Black

M22-WK3
M22S-WK3

Maintained

Silver
Black

M22-WRK3
M22S-WRK3

Maintained, return from left

Silver
Black

M22-WRK3-2
M22S-WRK3-2

Maintained, return from right

Silver
Black

M22-WRK3-1
M22S-WRK3-1

Maintained

Silver
Black

M22-WRK4
M22S-WRK4

37
37
37
37
37
Three-position

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Four-position

37
37
Notes

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a colour
coded adapter. See Page V7-T37-103.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-64

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 65 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches

37

Components
M22S-WR3-X94

37

Operators Only, Rotary Type 
Type

Switching Position

Bezel

Inscription

Catalogue Number

37

Two-position

Momentary 

Silver
Black

I-O
I-O

M22-W
M22S-W

37

Maintained

Silver

I-O
Custom
AUTO-HAND
II-I
I-O
Custom
AUTO-HAND
II-I
I-O-II
I-O-II

M22-WR
M22-WR-ETCH 
M22-WR-X91
M22-WR-X92
M22S-WR
M22S-WR-ETCH 
M22S-WR-X91
M22S-WR-X92
M22-W3
M22S-W3

I-O-II
Custom
AUTO-O-MAN
I-O-II
Custom
AUTO-O-MAN
0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4
0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4

M22-WR3
M22-WR3-ETCH 
M22-WR3-X94
M22S-WR3
M22S-WR3-ETCH 
M22S-WR3-X94
M22-WR4
M22S-WR4

37

Black

Three-position

Momentary 

Maintained

Silver
Black

Silver

Black

Four-position

Maintained

Silver
Black

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a colour
coded adapter. See Page V7-T37-103.
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121)
into the Order Notes. For example, M22-WR3-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X88, Line item #_.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-65

Tab37book.fm Page 66 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches

37
37
37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37
37

Components
M22-K10

37

Contact Blocks 

Accessories

Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Description

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

M22-XW

Plunger bridge 

M22-XW

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

M22-XWS

Key cover

M22-XWS

M22-XC-R

Key withdraw adapter 

M22-XC-R

M22-XC-Y

Coding adapter

M22-XC-Y

M22-XGWK

Guard ring

M22-XGWK

37
37

Spring-cage

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
 Plunger needed to actuate centre-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-66

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 67 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Illuminated Selector Switches

37

M22 – WLK – R – K10 – R

37
Bezel Colour
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
Handle Type
WLK = Illuminated knob type
momentary, two-position
WLKV = Illuminated Knob type
momentary, V-position
WLK3 = Illuminated knob type
momentary, three-position

Handle Colour
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
Y = Yellow
B = Blue

K10 =
K01 =
K20 =
K02 =
K11 =

Contact Blocks
1NO
K30 = 3NO
1NC
K03 = 3NC
2NO
K21 = 2NO-1NC
2NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC

Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
85–264 Vac
230W = White
230R = Red
230G = Green
230B = Blue

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-67

Tab37book.fm Page 68 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Product Selection
Illuminated Selector Switches
Components
M22-WLK-W

Operators Only, Knob Type 
Type

37

Two-position

Switching Position
Momentary



Bezel

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue

M22-WLK-W
M22-WLK-R
M22-WLK-G
M22-WLK-Y
M22-WLK-B
M22S-WLK-W
M22S-WLK-R
M22S-WLK-G
M22S-WLK-Y
M22S-WLK-B
M22-WRLK-W
M22-WRLK-R
M22-WRLK-G
M22-WRLK-Y
M22-WRLK-B
M22S-WRLK-W
M22S-WRLK-R
M22S-WRLK-G
M22S-WRLK-Y
M22S-WRLK-B
M22-WLKV-W
M22-WLKV-R
M22-WLKV-G
M22-WLKV-Y
M22-WLKV-B
M22S-WLKV-W
M22S-WLKV-R
M22S-WLKV-G
M22S-WLKV-Y
M22S-WLKV-B

37
37
Black

37
37
37

Maintained

Silver

37
37
Black

37
37
37

Maintained V

Silver

37
37
Black

37
37
37

Notes
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a colour coded
adapter. See Page V7-T37-103.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-68

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 69 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Illuminated Selector Switches

37

Components
M22-WLK3-W

37

Operators Only, Knob Type 
Type

Switching Position

Bezel

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Three-position

Momentary 

Silver

White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue

M22-WLK3-W
M22-WLK3-R
M22-WLK3-G
M22-WLK3-Y
M22-WLK3-B
M22S-WLK3-W
M22S-WLK3-R
M22S-WLK3-G
M22S-WLK3-Y
M22S-WLK3-B
M22-WRLK3-W
M22-WRLK3-R
M22-WRLK3-G
M22-WRLK3-Y
M22-WRLK3-B
M22S-WRLK3-W
M22S-WRLK3-R
M22S-WRLK3-G
M22S-WRLK3-Y
M22S-WRLK3-B
M22-WRLK3-1-W
M22-WRLK3-1-R
M22-WRLK3-1-G
M22-WRLK3-1-Y
M22-WRLK3-1-B
M22S-WRLK3-1-W
M22S-WRLK3-1-R
M22S-WRLK3-1-G
M22S-WRLK3-1-Y
M22S-WRLK3-1-B
M22-WRLK3-2-W
M22-WRLK3-2-R
M22-WRLK3-2-G
M22-WRLK3-2-Y
M22-WRLK3-2-B
M22S-WRLK3-2-W
M22S-WRLK3-2-R
M22S-WRLK3-2-G
M22S-WRLK3-2-Y
M22S-WRLK3-2-B

Black

Maintained

Silver

Black

Maintained, return from right

Silver

Black

Maintained, return from left

Silver

Black

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a colour coded
adapter. See Page V7-T37-103.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-69

Tab37book.fm Page 70 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Selector Switches

37
37
37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37

M22-LED-W

37
37

Light Units  
LED
Colour

Light Unit
Voltage

Screw

White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue

12–30
Vac/Vdc

37
Screw

37

Accessories

Terminal
Type

37

85–264
Vac

Catalogue Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B

37
37

M22-K10

37

Contact Blocks

37

Contact
Configuration

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

Spring-cage

37
37
37
37
37

Catalogue Number

M22-XW

Plunger bridge 

M22-XW

M22-XWS

Key cover

M22-XWS

M22-XC-R

Key withdraw adapter

M22-XC-Y

Coding adapter

M22-XC-Y

M22-XGWK

Guard ring

M22-XGWK



M22-XC-R

Catalogue Number
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Notes
 For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 Plunger needed to actuate centre-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
 Select the same colour LED element as lens colour; for yellow lens, choose a white LED.

37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-70





Terminal
Type

37

Description

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 71 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Key-Operated Selector Switches

37

M22 – WS – MS2 – A1

37
Bezel Colour
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black

WS =
WS3 =
WRS =
WRS3 =

Handle Type
Two-position, momentary
Three-position, momentary
Two-position, maintained
Three-position, maintained

Key Code
Blank = MS1
MS2 = MS2
MS3 = MS3
MS4 = MS4
MS5 = MS5
MS6 = MS6
MS7 = MS7
MS8 = MS8

Key Removal Position
Refer to coding adapter assembly
and functional test guide on Page
V7-T37-103.

37
37
37
37

Product Selection

37

Key-Operated Selector Switches 

37

Components
M22-WS

37

Operators Only 
Type

Switching Position

Bezel

Key Removal Position

Key Code

Catalogue Number

Two-position

Momentary 

Silver

Return from right, key
removable left

MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8

M22-WS
M22-WS-MS2
M22-WS-MS3
M22-WS-MS4
M22-WS-MS5
M22-WS-MS6
M22-WS-MS7
M22-WS-MS8
M22S-WS
M22S-WS-MS2
M22S-WS-MS3
M22S-WS-MS4
M22S-WS-MS5
M22S-WS-MS6
M22S-WS-MS7
M22S-WS-MS8

Black

Return from right, key
removable left

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 Includes one key.
 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T37-103.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a colour coded adapter. See Page V7-T37-103.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-71

Tab37book.fm Page 72 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Key-Operated Selector Switches 
Components
Operators Only, continued 

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

M22S-WRS

Type

Switching Position

Bezel

Key Removal Position

Key Code

Catalogue Number

Two-position

Maintained

Silver

Key removable left

MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8

M22-WRS-A1
M22-WRS-MS2-A1
M22-WRS-MS3-A1
M22-WRS-MS4-A1
M22-WRS-MS5-A1
M22-WRS-MS6-A1
M22-WRS-MS7-A1
M22-WRS-MS8-A1
M22-WRS
M22-WRS-MS2
M22-WRS-MS3
M22-WRS-MS4
M22-WRS-MS5
M22-WRS-MS6
M22-WRS-MS7
M22-WRS-MS8
M22S-WRS-A1
M22S-WRS-MS2-A1
M22S-WRS-MS3-A1
M22S-WRS-MS4-A1
M22S-WRS-MS5-A1
M22S-WRS-MS6-A1
M22S-WRS-MS7-A1
M22S-WRS-MS8-A1
M22S-WRS
M22S-WRS-MS2
M22S-WRS-MS3
M22S-WRS-MS4
M22S-WRS-MS5
M22S-WRS-MS6
M22S-WRS-MS7
M22S-WRS-MS8
M22-WS3
M22-WS3-MS2
M22-WS3-MS3
M22-WS3-MS4
M22-WS3-MS5
M22-WS3-MS6
M22-WS3-MS7
M22-WS3-MS8
M22S-WS3
M22S-WS3-MS2
M22S-WS3-MS3
M22S-WS3-MS4
M22S-WS3-MS5
M22S-WS3-MS6
M22S-WS3-MS7
M22S-WS3-MS8

37
37
37
37

Key removable left/right

37
37
37
Black

37

Key removable left

37
37
37
Key removable left/right

37
37
37
37

M22-WS3-X93

Three-position

Momentary 

Silver

Return from left/right,
key removable centre

Black

Return from left/right,
key removable centre

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes

Includes one key.

Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T37-103.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a colour coded adapter. See Page V7-T37-103.

37
37
37
37
T37-72

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 73 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Key-Operated Selector Switches 
Components
M22-WS3-X93

37
37

Operators Only, continued 
Type

Switching Position

Bezel

Key Removal Position

Key Code

Catalogue Number

Three-position

Maintained

Silver

Key removable centre

MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8

M22-WRS3-A1
M22-WRS3-MS2-A1
M22-WRS3-MS3-A1
M22-WRS3-MS4-A1
M22-WRS3-MS5-A1
M22-WRS3-MS6-A1
M22-WRS3-MS7-A1
M22-WRS3-MS8-A1
M22-WRS3-A2
M22-WRS3-MS2-A2
M22-WRS3-MS3-A2
M22-WRS3-MS4-A2
M22-WRS3-MS5-A2
M22-WRS3-MS6-A2
M22-WRS3-MS7-A2
M22-WRS3-MS8-A2
M22-WRS3-A3
M22-WRS3-MS2-A3
M22-WRS3-MS3-A3
M22-WRS3-MS4-A3
M22-WRS3-MS5-A3
M22-WRS3-MS6-A3
M22-WRS3-MS7-A3
M22-WRS3-MS8-A3
M22-WRS3
M22-WRS3-MS2
M22-WRS3-MS3
M22-WRS3-MS4
M22-WRS3-MS5
M22-WRS3-MS6
M22-WRS3-MS7
M22-WRS3-MS8
M22-WRS3-A7
M22-WRS3-MS2-A7
M22-WRS3-MS3-A7
M22-WRS3-MS4-A7
M22-WRS3-MS5-A7
M22-WRS3-MS6-A7
M22-WRS3-MS7-A7
M22-WRS3-MS8-A7
M22-WRS3-A6
M22-WRS3-MS2-A6
M22-WRS3-MS3-A6
M22-WRS3-MS4-A6
M22-WRS3-MS5-A6
M22-WRS3-MS6-A6
M22-WRS3-MS7-A6
M22-WRS3-MS8-A6

Key removable
centre/left

Key removable
centre/right

Key removable left/right

Return from left,
key removable centre

Return from left,
key removable centre/right

Notes

Includes one key.
 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T37-103.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-73

Tab37book.fm Page 74 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Key-Operated Selector Switches 
Components
M22-WS3-X93

37

Operators Only, continued 
Type

Switching Position

Bezel

Key Removal Position

Key Code

Catalogue Number

Three-position

Maintained

Silver

Return from right,
key removable left/centre

MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8

M22-WRS3-A4
M22-WRS3-MS2-A4
M22-WRS3-MS3-A4
M22-WRS3-MS4-A4
M22-WRS3-MS5-A4
M22-WRS3-MS6-A4
M22-WRS3-MS7-A4
M22-WRS3-MS8-A4
M22-WRS3-A5
M22-WRS3-MS2-A5
M22-WRS3-MS3-A5
M22-WRS3-MS4-A5
M22-WRS3-MS5-A5
M22-WRS3-MS6-A5
M22-WRS3-MS7-A5
M22-WRS3-MS8-A5
M22S-WRS3-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A1
M22S-WRS3-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A2
M22S-WRS3-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A3
M22S-WRS3
M22S-WRS3-MS2
M22S-WRS3-MS3
M22S-WRS3-MS4
M22S-WRS3-MS5
M22S-WRS3-MS6
M22S-WRS3-MS7
M22S-WRS3-MS8

37
37
37
37

Return from right,
key removable centre

37
37
37
37

Black

Key removable centre

37
37
37
37

Key removable
centre/left

37
37
37
Key removable
centre/right

37
37
37
37

Key removable
left/right/centre

37
37
37
37

Notes

Includes one key.

Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T37-103.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

37
37
37
37
T37-74

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 75 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Key-Operated Selector Switches 
Components
M22-WS3-X93

37
37

Operators Only, continued 
Type

Switching Position

Bezel

Key Removal Position

Key Code

Catalogue Number

Three-position

Maintained

Black

Return from left,
key removable centre

MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8

M22S-WRS3-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A7
M22S-WRS3-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A6
M22S-WRS3-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A4
M22S-WRS3-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A5

Return from left,
key removable centre/right

Return from right,
key removable left/centre

Return from right,
key removable centre

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 Includes one key.
 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T37-103.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-75

Tab37book.fm Page 76 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Key-Operated Selector Switches

37
37
37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37
37

Components
M22-K10

37

Contact Blocks 

Accessories

Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Description

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

M22-XW

Plunger bridge 

M22-XW

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

M22-XWS

Key cover

M22-XWS

M22-XC-R

Key withdraw adapter 

M22-XC-R

37
37

Spring-cage

37
37
37
37

M22-ES-MS1

37
37
37
37
37

Extra Keys
Key Code

Catalogue Number

M22-XC-Y

Coding adapter

M22-XC-Y

MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8

M22-ES-MS1
M22-ES-MS2
M22-ES-MS3
M22-ES-MS4
M22-ES-MS5
M22-ES-MS6
M22-ES-MS7
M22-ES-MS8

M22-XGWK

Guard ring

M22-XGWK

Notes
 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.

All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

Plunger needed to actuate centre-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-76

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 77 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
Product Description

Features

Eaton’s M22 mushroom head
operators are a durable and
unique way to include
standard pushbutton
functionality. Like the
standard pushbutton line,
the maintained pushbuttons
are field convertible to
momentary. They also offer
laser engraving and a robust
five million mechanical
operations on the standard
momentary operator. As with
all operators, they can be
ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
modular components.

●

●

●

37

Field convertible from
maintained to momentary
(available on maintained
pushbuttons only)
Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons
More than five million
mechanical operations on
momentary and one million
on maintained pushbuttons

●

●

37

Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules

37
37
37
37

Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-77

Tab37book.fm Page 78 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Catalogue Number Selection
Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

Mushroom Head Pushbuttons

37

M22 – DP – R – GB4 – K01

37
37

Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black

37
37

Operator Type
DP = Non-illuminated momentary
mushroom head pushbutton
DRP = Non-illuminated maintained
mushroom head pushbutton

37
37
37
37
37

Operator Colour
R = Red
S = Black
G = Green
Y = Yellow

ETCH =
GB0 =
GB1 =
GB3 =
GB4 =
GB5 =
GB6 =
GB15 =
GB16 =


Plate Inscription
X0 =
X1 =
X4 =
X5 =
X6 =
X7 =

Custom 
STOP
START
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
FORWARD
REVERSE

When ordering, specify inscription
per catalogue number suffix from
the Symbols Library (see Pages
V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the
Order Notes.
For example, M22-DP-R-ETCH;
Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91,
Line item #_.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-78

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

K01 =
K10 =
K11 =
K12 =

Contact Blocks
NC
NO
NO-NC
1NO-2NC

Tab37book.fm Page 79 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Product Selection

37

Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 

37

Complete Devices

M22-DP-R-K01

Bezel

Button Colour

Silver

Red

Contact Block
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

NC
2NC
1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC

M22-DP-R-K01
M22-DP-R-K02
M22-DP-R-K12
M22-DP-R-K11

NC
2NC
1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC

M22S-DP-R-K01
M22S-DP-R-K02
M22S-DP-R-K12
M22S-DP-R-K11

37
37
37
37

M22S-DP-R-K01

Black

Red

37
37
37
37

Operators Only 
M22-DP-G

Bezel

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

Black
Red
Green
Yellow

M22-DP-S
M22-DP-R
M22-DP-G
M22-DP-Y

37
37
37
37

M22S-DP-G

Black

Black
Red
Green
Yellow

37

M22S-DP-S
M22S-DP-R
M22S-DP-G
M22S-DP-Y

37
37
37

Notes

35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-79

Tab37book.fm Page 80 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

Components
M22-XDP-G

Mushroom Head Plates
Colour
Black

37
37
37
37
37

Inscription
-—
Custom
STOP
START
FORWARD
REVERSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON

37
37
37

Red

37
37

Green

37
37
37

White

37

Yellow

37

—
Custom
STOP
OFF
—
Custom
START
ON

—
Custom
—
Custom

M22-DP-G-X
Catalogue Number


M22-XDP-S
M22-XDP-S-ETCH 
M22-XDP-S-GB0
M22-XDP-S-GB1
M22-XDP-S-GB15
M22-XDP-S-GB16
M22-XDP-S-GB3
M22-XDP-S-GB4
M22-XDP-S-GB5
M22-XDP-S-GB6
M22-XDP-S-X0
M22-XDP-S-X1
M22-XDP-S-X4
M22-XDP-S-X5
M22-XDP-S-X7
M22-XDP-R 
M22-XDP-R-ETCH 
M22-XDP-R-GB0
M22-XDP-R-GB5
M22-XDP-R-X0
M22-XDP-G 
M22-XDP-G-ETCH 
M22-XDP-G-GB1
M22-XDP-G-GB6
M22-XDP-G-X0
M22-XDP-G-X1
M22-XDP-W 
M22-XDP-W-ETCH 
M22-XDP-Y 
M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 

Bezel

Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Black
Red
Green
Yellow

M22-DP-S-X
M22-DP-R-X
M22-DP-G-X
M22-DP-Y-X
M22S-DP-S-X
M22S-DP-R-X
M22S-DP-G-X
M22S-DP-Y-X

Black

M22-K10

Contact Blocks 
Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Spring-cage

Notes
 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
 Minimum order quantity of (10).
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-80

Insertless Mushroom Head Operators

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 81 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Product Selection

37

Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained  

37

Complete Devices

M22-DRP-R-K01

Bezel

Button Colour

Silver

Red

Contact Block
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

NC
2NC
1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC

M22-DRP-R-K01
M22-DRP-R-K02
M22-DRP-R-K12
M22-DRP-R-K11

37
37
37
37

M22S-DRP-R-K01

Black

Red

NC
2NC
1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC

37

M22S-DRP-R-K01
M22S-DRP-R-K02
M22S-DRP-R-K12
M22S-DRP-R-K11

37
37
37
37

Operators Only
M22-DRP-G

Bezel

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

Black
Red
Green
Yellow

M22-DRP-S
M22-DRP-R
M22-DRP-G
M22-DRP-Y

Black
Red
Green
Yellow

M22S-DRP-S
M22S-DRP-R
M22S-DRP-G
M22S-DRP-Y

37
37
37
37

M22S-DRP-G

Black

37
37
37

Notes
 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.

37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-81

Tab37book.fm Page 82 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

Components
M22-XDP-G

Mushroom Head Plates
Colour
Black

37
37
37
37
37

Inscription
—
Custom
STOP
START
FORWARD
REVERSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON

37
37
37

Red

37
37

Green

37
37
37

White

37

Yellow

37
37

—
Custom
STOP
OFF
—
Custom
START
ON

—
Custom
—
Custom



M22-DRP-G-X
Catalogue Number


M22-XDP-S
M22-XDP-S-ETCH 
M22-XDP-S-GB0
M22-XDP-S-GB1
M22-XDP-S-GB15
M22-XDP-S-GB16
M22-XDP-S-GB3
M22-XDP-S-GB4
M22-XDP-S-GB5
M22-XDP-S-GB6
M22-XDP-S-X0
M22-XDP-S-X1
M22-XDP-S-X4
M22-XDP-S-X5
M22-XDP-S-X7
M22-XDP-R 
M22-XDP-R-ETCH 
M22-XDP-R-GB0
M22-XDP-R-GB5
M22-XDP-R-X0
M22-XDP-G 
M22-XDP-G-ETCH 
M22-XDP-G-GB1
M22-XDP-G-GB6
M22-XDP-G-X0
M22-XDP-G-X1
M22-XDP-W 
M22-XDP-W-ETCH 
M22-XDP-Y 
M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 

Bezel

Colour

Catalogue Number

Silver

Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Black
Red
Green
Yellow

M22-DRP-S-X
M22-DRP-R-X
M22-DRP-G-X
M22-DRP-Y-X
M22S-DRP-S-X
M22S-DRP-R-X
M22S-DRP-G-X
M22S-DRP-Y-X

Black

M22-K10

Contact Blocks 
Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

Spring-cage

Notes
 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
 Minimum order quantity of (10).
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.

For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-82

Insertless Mushroom Head Operators

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 83 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Double Pushbuttons
Product Description

Features

Eaton’s M22 double
pushbutton line is perfect for
applications such as motor
and pump starting, as well as
anytime space is limited. In
addition to the two buttons
that fit in one 22 mm hole is
the integrated white
indicating light between
them. These three operators
allow for multiple functions to
occur in a single space.
Green/red, black/white and
black/black colour options
along with laser engraving
allow for further custom
applications.

●

●

●

●

37

Flush and extended, as
well as colour options
allow for the perfect
combination button
Integrated indicating light
adds even more
functionality in one
standard 22 mm hole
Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation

●

●

37

More than 200,000
mechanical operations
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules

37
37

Protection Type
●
IP66
●
NEMA 4X, 13

37
37
37
37
37
37

Catalogue Number Selection
Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Double Pushbuttons

37

M22 – DDL – GR – GB5 – K10 – G
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black

Operator Type
DDL = Extended buttons and light
DDLF = Flush buttons and light
DDLM = Extended bottom button

Button Plate Colour
Top
Bottom
GR = Green
Red
WS = White
Black
S = Black
Black

Inscription
GB0 = STOP
GB1 = START
GB3 = UP
GB4 = DOWN
GB5 = OFF
GB6 = ON
GB14 = RESET
GB15 = FORWARD
GB16 = REVERSE
X0 =
X1 =
X5 =
X5 =
X6 =
X7 =
X5 =

K10 =
K01 =
K20 =
K02 =
K11 =

Contact Blocks
1NO
K30 = 3NO
1NC
K03 = 3NC
2NO
K21 = 2NO-1NC
2NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC

37
37

Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
85–264 Vac
230W = White
230R = Red
230G = Green
230B = Blue

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-83

Tab37book.fm Page 84 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Product Selection
Components
Double Pushbuttons, Extended Pushbuttons and Centre Light, Momentary

37

Operators Only 

37

Bezel

Colour
Top

Bottom

Silver

Green

Red

White

Black

Black

Black

Green

Red

White

Black

M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0

37

Inscription
Top

Bottom

Catalogue Number

—
Custom

—
Custom

START
—
Custom

STOP
—
Custom

START
—
Custom
—

STOP
—
Custom
—

—
Custom

—
Custom

Black

START
—
Custom

STOP
—
Custom

Black

START
—
Custom

STOP
—
Custom
—

M22-DDL-GR
M22-DDL-GR-ETCH 
M22-DDL-GR-X1-X0
M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
M22-DDL-WS
M22-DDL-WS-ETCH 
M22-DDL-WS-X1-X0
M22-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0
M22-DDL-S
M22-DDL-S-ETCH 
M22-DDL-S-X4-X5
M22-DDL-S-X7-X7
M22S-DDL-GR
M22S-DDL-GR-ETCH 
M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0
M22S-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
M22S-DDL-WS
M22S-DDL-WS-ETCH 
M22S-DDL-WS-X1-X0
M22S-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0
M22S-DDL-S
M22S-DDL-S-ETCH 
M22S-DDL-S-X4-X5
M22S-DDL-S-X7-X7

37
37
37
37
37

M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0

Black

37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DDL-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-84

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 85 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbuttons and Centre Light, Momentary

37

Operators Only 

M22-DDLF-GR

Bezel

Colour
Top

Bottom

Silver

Green

Red

White

M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0

Black

Black

Inscription
Top

Bottom

37

Catalogue Number

—

—

M22-DDLF-GR

Custom

Custom

M22-DDLF-GR-ETCH 

—

—

M22-DDLF-WS

Custom

Custom

M22-DDLF-WS-ETCH 

37
37
37

Green

Red

M22-DDLF-GR-X1-X0

White

Black

M22-DDLF-WS-X1-X0

37

Green

Red

37

White

Black

—

—

M22S-DDLF-GR

Custom

Custom

M22S-DDLF-GR-ETCH 

—

—

M22S-DDLF-WS

Custom

Custom

M22S-DDLF-WS-ETCH 

Green

Red

M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0

White

Black

M22S-DDLF-WS-X1-X0

37
37
37
37

Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbutton and Centre Light, Extended Bottom Pushbutton, Momentary

37

Operators Only 

M22-DDLM-GR

Bezel

Colour
Top

Silver

Green
White

Bottom

Inscription
Top

Bottom

Catalogue Number

Red

—

—

M22-DDLM-GR

Custom

Custom

M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH 

—

—

M22-DDLM-WS

Custom

Custom

M22-DDLM-WS-ETCH 

Black

Green

Red

M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0

White

Black

M22-DDLM-WS-X1-X0

Green

Red

37
37
37
37
37

M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0

Black

White

Black

—

—

M22S-DDLM-GR

Custom

Custom

M22S-DDLM-GR-ETCH 

—

—

M22S-DDLM-WS

Custom

Custom

M22S-DDLM-WS-ETCH 

Green

Red

M22S-DDLM-GR-X1-X0

White

Black

M22S-DDLM-WS-X1-X0

37
37
37
37

Notes

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-85

Tab37book.fm Page 86 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Double Pushbuttons

37
37
37

ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37

M22-LED-W

37
37
37

Light Units 

M22-K10

Terminal
Type

LED
Colour

Light Unit
Voltage

Screw

White

Contact Blocks 

Catalogue Number

Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

12–30
Vac/Vdc

M22-LED-W

Screw

NO
NO, early-make

M22-K10
M22-K10P

NC

M22-K01

85–264
Vac

M22-LED230-W

NC, late-break

M22-K01D

NO

M22-CK10

NC

M22-CK01

NC, late-break

M22-CK01D

2NO

M22-CK20

2NC

M22-CK02

NO-NC

M22-CK11

Spring-cage

37
37
37
37

Notes
 For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-86

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 87 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Four-Way Pushbuttons
Product Description

Features

Eaton’s M22 four-way pushbutton is a truly unique
offering. A four-way
pushbutton offers four
different buttons mounted
in a single 22 mm hole. This
is ideal not only for an
application with limited
space, but also directional
applications (when ordered
with the four arrow engraving
option). Another unique
option is the interlocked
version, which prevents two
opposite buttons from being
actuated at the same time.

●

●

37

Four buttons in one
operator allows for
increased functionality in
limited space
Optional interlocking
option, which prevents two
buttons from being
actuated at the same time

●

●

37

Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons for
directional or other
applications
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules

37
37
37

Protection Type
●
IP66

37
37
37
37

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Four-Way Pushbuttons

37

M22 – D4 – S – X7 – K01

37
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black

Button Colour
S = Black

Inscription
ETCH = Custom 
X7 =


Operator Type
D4 = Four-way pushbutton,
momentary, non-interlocked
DI4 = Four-way pushbutton,
momentary, interlocked

When ordering, specify
inscription per catalogue
number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T37-114
to V7-T37-121) into the Order
Notes.
For example, M22-D4-S-ETCH;
Order Notes: Mark with symbol
X91, Line item #_.

K10 =
K01 =
K20 =
K02 =
K11 =

37

Contact Blocks
1NO
K30 =3NO
1NC
K03 =3NC
2NO
K21 =2NO-1NC
2NC
K12 =1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-87

Tab37book.fm Page 88 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Product Selection
Four-Way Pushbuttons, Momentary

37
37
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37

Components

37

M22-D4-S-X7

37

Operators Only 
Type

Bezel

Colour

Non-interlocked

Silver

Black

Inscription

Catalogue Number

—

M22-D4-S

Custom

M22-D4-S-ETCH 

Directional arrows
—

M22-D4-S-X7
M22S-D4-S

37

Custom

M22S-D4-S-ETCH 

37

Directional arrows
—

M22S-D4-S-X7
M22-DI4-S

Custom

M22-DI4-S-ETCH 

Directional arrows
—

M22-DI4-S-X7
M22S-DI4-S

Custom

M22S-DI4-S-ETCH 

Directional arrows

M22S-DI4-S-X7

37
Black

Interlocked

Silver

Black

Black

37
Black

37
37
37

M22-K10

Black

Contact Blocks 

37

Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

37

Screw

NO
NO, early-make

M22-K10
M22-K10P

NC

M22-K01

NC, late-break

M22-K01D

NO

M22-CK10

NC

M22-CK01

NC, late-break

M22-CK01D

2NO

M22-CK20

2NC

M22-CK02

NO-NC

M22-CK11

37
37

Spring-cage

37
37
37

Notes

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.

When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-D4-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-88

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 89 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Joysticks
Product Description

Features

Eaton’s M22 joystick line
comes in a wide variety of
options. From vertical and
horizontal two-position
switches to the maintained
four-position, these operators
fit a variety of applications. An
additional option, two switch
points, allows for eight
isolated circuits to be
actuated individually on a
single operator.

●

●

37

Available in four-position
and two-position
Two switch point option
allows for two contacts in
each direction (up to eight
total contacts in one
operator)

●

37

Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules

37

Protection Type
●
IP66

37
37
37
37

Product Selection

37

Joysticks

37

Components
M22-WJ2H

37

Operators 
Bezel
Silver

Black

Number of
Directions

Switching
Position

Two-position horizontal
Two switch points
Two-position horizontal
Two-position vertical
Two switch points
Two-position vertical
Four-position
Two switch points
Four-position
Two-position horizontal
Two switch points
Two-position horizontal
Two-position vertical
Two switch points
Two-position vertical
Four-position
Two switch points
Four-position

Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained

37

Catalogue Number
M22-WJ2H
M22-WJ2H-2P
M22-WRJ2H
M22-WJ2V
M22-WJ2V-2P
M22-WRJ2V
M22-WJ4
M22-WJ4-2P
M22-WRJ4
M22S-WJ2H
M22S-WJ2H-2P
M22S-WRJ2H
M22S-WJ2V
M22S-WJ2V-2P
M22S-WRJ2V
M22S-WJ4
M22S-WJ4-2P
M22S-WRJ4

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note

Includes contact block mounting adapter.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-89

Tab37book.fm Page 90 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Joysticks

37
37
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss

37
37
37

Note: Included
with operator.

37
37
37

M22-K10

37

Contact Blocks 
Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC

M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11

37
37

Spring-cage

37
37
37
37
37

Joystick with Double Contact

Terminal
Type

Notes
 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

The joystick allows the control
of up to four directions of
movement on machines.
Different variants of the
joystick have two/fourpositions and other variants
have two settings for each
position. This allows, for
example, two-speed settings
for each direction. For this
application, a standard
normally open contact and an
early-make contact are fitted
in series. Momentary contact
and latching contact versions
are available.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-90

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

0
1

0

1
2

Tab37book.fm Page 91 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Potentiometers

Acoustic Devices

Product Description

Product Description

Eaton’s M22 potentiometers allow for a ready to use operator in
a conveniently sized package. M22 potentiometers include the
resistive element, instead of just a knob, and a built in legend
surrounding the knob. The slim design, with integrated contacts
and the range of resistances available, allows for a quick install.

Eaton’s M22 acoustic devices are a simple and aesthetic way to
add a buzzer or indicator to any application. Fitting in the same
22 mm hole, these devices can be ordered in continuous or
pulsed tone and with or without the IP40 enclosure.

Features

Features

●

●
●

Scale markings on the knob allows the operator to be used
without an additional legend plate
Oversized knob option available
Slim design allows for space saving and simple wiring and
installation

37
37
37
37

●
●
●

Continuous or pulsed tone available
83dB/10 cm decibel rating
Slim design allows for space saving and simple wiring and
installation

37
37
37

Protection Type
●
IP66
●
NEMA 4X, 13

Protection Type
●
IP40
●
NEMA 12

37

Product Selection

Product Selection

37

Potentiometers

Acoustic Devices

37

M22-R10K

Complete Devices
Bezel
Silver

Resistance
Rk

1
4.7
10
47
100
470
Black
1
4.7
10
47
100
470
Oversized Knob
Silver
1
4.7
10
47
100
470
Black
1
4.7
10
47
100
470

M22-AMC-XAM

37

Complete Devices

Catalogue Number

Description

M22-R1K
M22-R4K7
M22-R10K
M22-R47K
M22-R100K
M22-R470K
M22S-R1K
M22S-R4K7
M22S-R10K
M22S-R47K
M22S-R100K
M22S-R470K

Indicator with buzzer,
black continuous tone,
24 Vac/Vdc
Indicator with buzzer,
black pulsed tone,
24 Vdc

M22-R1K-RH
M22-R4K7-RH
M22-R10K-RH
M22-R47K-RH
M22-R100K-RH
M22-R470K-RH
M22S-R1K-RH
M22S-R4K7-RH
M22S-R10K-RH
M22S-R47K-RH
M22S-R100K-RH
M22S-R470K-RH

Decibel
Rating

37
Catalogue Number

83 dB/
10 cm

M22-AMC-XAM

83 dB/
10 cm

M22-AMC-XAMP

37
37
37
37

M22-XAM

Buzzers
Description
Indicator without
buzzer, black
Buzzer only,
continuous tone,
24 Vac/Vdc
Buzzer only, pulsed
tone, 24 Vdc

Decibel
Rating

Catalogue Number

37

83 dB/
10 cm
83 dB/
10 cm

M22-AMC

37

M22-XAM

37

83 dB/
10 cm

M22-XAMP

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-91

Tab37book.fm Page 92 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Through-the-Door Operators

Bulkhead Interfaces

Product Description

Product Description

Eaton’s M22 through-the-door operators use the same familiar
flush pushbutton look with the addition of a cut-to-length rod
that allows for a simple reset operator.

Eaton’s M22 bulkhead interfaces are another unique offering in
the M22 line. This device allows for a secure connection to any
USB or RJ45 connected device within an enclosure or panel.
With an IP66 rating when closed, these devices are not only
convenient, but robust and reliable.

Features

Features

37
37
37
37

●
●
●

Customizable laser engraving on all buttons
More than five million mechanical operations
Pushrod can be cut to length

37
37

Product Selection

37

Through-the-Door Operators

37

M22-DZ-B-X6

Product Selection


Bulkhead Interfaces

Complete Devices

M22-USB-SA

USB Socket 

Colour

Inscription

Catalogue Number

Description

Catalogue Number

Blue

—
RESET

Used for USB connection
USB 2.0 Type A plug
IP65 when closed
IP20 when connected

M22-USB-SA

Red

—

M22-DZ-B
M22-DZ-B-GB14
M22-DZ-B-X6
M22-DZ-R
M22-DZ-R-X0
M22-DZ-R-GB0

37
37

Convenient and safe way to make a data connection to inside
of the panel without opening the panel door

Protection Type
●
IP66 when closed, IP20 when connected

Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13

37

●

STOP

37
37

M22-DZ-X

37

Buttonless Operator
Bezel

Catalogue Number

Silver

M22-DZ-X

M22-RJ45-SA

37
37
37

M22-XD-B

37
37
37

Colour

Inscription

Catalogue Number

Blue

—
RESET

Red

—

M22-XD-B 
M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
M22-XD-R 
M22-XD-R-X0
M22-XD-R-GB0

Catalogue Number

Used for RJ45 Ethernet
connection IP65 when
closed IP20 when connected

M22-RJ45-SA

Notes
 The pushrod is 3.24 in long and can be cut to length.
 Any combination of plate colour and inscription is available.
 Minimum order quantity of (10).
 USB interface is complete with 2-ft-long USB cable.
 UL and CSA pending.
 RJ45 interface is an eight-wire connector.

37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-92

Description

Button Plates 

STOP

37

RJ45 Socket 

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 93 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

ASi Adapter Modules

37

Product Description

37

Eaton’s M22 ASi adapter modules add functionality to every
operator in the M22 line. These devices can be connected to any
operator that uses contact blocks or LED units. The simple snapon design allows for a quick integration of an entire application of
operators to a communicating network.

37
37

Features
●

●

●

●

●

37

Allows compatible operators to communicate on an ASi
network
Not only can the status of a contact block be read, but LEDs
can be illuminated by an ASi adapter
ASi adapters simply clip on to the back of the contact blocks
and LEDs
Insulation displacement connectors allow for installation of
adapters without any tools
Two integrated LEDs indicate status of communications

37
37
37
37

Protection Type
●
IP20

37
37

Product Selection

37

ASi Adapter Modules
M22-ASI

37

Complete Devices
Description

Catalogue Number

ASi adapter module
ASi adapter module for
base mounting
ASi adapter module for
E-stop
ASi adapter module for
E-stop base mounting

M22-ASI
M22-ASI-C

37
37

M22-ASI-S

37

M22-ASI-CS

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-93

Tab37book.fm Page 94 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Palm Switches

Catalogue Number Selection
Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and
not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Palm Switches, Type 4X/13 Enclosure

37

FAK – S – KC10 – I

37
37

Operator Type
FAK = Palm switch

37

Operator Colour
S = Black
R = Red
Y = Yellow

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Product Description
Eaton’s M22 palm switches are an oversized button that mount
directly to an enclosure base. This allows for a standalone button
that can be mounted anywhere. The enclosure uses basemounted contact blocks, which allows for quick wiring and
mounting. The palm switches come in momentary or maintained
versions. As with other M22 operators, the palm switches are
available as complete devices, including the enclosure and
contact blocks or as modular components.

Complete Devices
Operator, Base and Contact Blocks
Button
Colour

●
●

●

Oversized operator in black, red and yellow colour options
Button integrated directly into an enclosure
Base mounting contact blocks allow for simple wiring and
installation
More than one million mechanical operations on momentary
and 100,000 on maintained operators

FAK-S-KC11-I

FAK-R-V-KC01-IY

Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13

37

Contact Block
Configuration 

Momentary
Black
1NO-1NC
Red
1NO-1NC
Yellow
1NO-1NC

Maintained
Red

NC
2NC
1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC

Notes
 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-94

Enclosure
Top Colour
I = Gray
IY = Yellow

Product Selection

Features
●

Contact Blocks
KC10 = NO
KC01 = NC
CKC10 = NO
CKC01 = NC

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca



Catalogue Number
FAK-S-KC11-I
FAK-R-KC11-I
FAK-Y-KC11-I

FAK-R-V-KC01-IY
FAK-R-V-KC02-IY
FAK-R-V-KC12-IY
FAK-R-V-KC11-IY

Tab37book.fm Page 95 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Components
FAK-S

37
Operators Only
Type

Button Colour

Catalogue Number

Momentary

Black
Red
Yellow
Red

FAK-S
FAK-R
FAK-Y
FAK-R-V-Y

Maintained

37
37
37
37

FAK-IU

Palm Switch Enclosure Base

37

Catalogue Number

37

FAK-IU

37
M22-KC10

37

Contact Blocks 
Terminal
Type

Contact
Configuration 

Catalogue Number

Screw

NO
NC
NO
NC

M22-KC10
M22-KC01
M22-CKC10
M22-CKC01

Spring-cage

37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T37-96 to V7-T37-101.
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-95

Tab37book.fm Page 96 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Accessories
M22-XD-S

37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

M22-XDH-R

37
37
M22-XDP-G

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Button Plates
Colour

Inscription

Black
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Black, white, red, green, yellow, blue
Black, red, green
Black
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Black
Red
Black
White
Green
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
Black
Green
Black
Blue
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
Green
Black
White
Green
Black
Green
Black
Black
Blue
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Custom
Custom
Custom
Custom
Custom
Custom
STOP
STOP
START
START
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
TEST
RESET
FORWARD
REVERSE
RAISE
LOWER

See  below
See  below
See  below
See  below
See  below
See  below
See  below
See  below
See  below

Catalogue Number
Flush Pushbutton

Catalogue Number
Extended Pushbutton

Catalogue Number
Mushroom Head Button

M22-XD-S
M22-XD-W
M22-XD-R
M22-XD-G
M22-XD-Y
M22-XD-B
M22-XD-SWRGYB
M22-XD-SRG
M22-XD-S-ETCH
M22-XD-W-ETCH
M22-XD-R-ETCH
M22-XD-G-ETCH
M22-XD-Y-ETCH
M22-XD-B-ETCH
M22-XD-S-GB0
M22-XD-R-GB0
M22-XD-S-GB1
M22-XD-W-GB1
M22-XD-G-GB1
M22-XD-S-GB2
M22-XD-S-GB3
M22-XD-S-GB4
M22-XD-S-GB5
M22-XD-R-GB5
M22-XD-S-GB6
M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-S-GB9
M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-S-GB15
M22-XD-S-GB16
M22-XD-S-GB17
M22-XD-S-GB18
M22-XD-S-X0
M22-XD-R-X0
—
M22-XD-S-X1
M22-XD-W-X1
M22-XD-G-X1
M22-XD-S-X2
M22-XD-G-X2
M22-XD-S-X4
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-B-X6
M22-XD-S-X7
M22-XD-S-X8
M22-XD-S-X9
M22-XD-S-X10
M22-XD-S-X11
M22-XD-S-X12
M22-XD-S-X13
M22-XD-S-X14
M22-XD-S-X15
M22-XD-S-X16
M22-XD-S-X17

M22-XDH-S
M22-XDH-W
M22-XDH-R
M22-XDH-G
M22-XDH-Y
M22-XDH-B
M22-XDH-SWRGYB
M22-XDH-SRG
M22-XDH-S-ETCH
M22-XDH-W-ETCH
M22-XDH-R-ETCH
M22-XDH-G-ETCH
M22-XDH-Y-ETCH
M22-XDH-B-ETCH
M22-XDH-S-GB0
M22-XDH-R-GB0
M22-XDH-S-GB1
M22-XDH-W-GB1
M22-XDH-G-GB1
M22-XDH-S-GB2
M22-XDH-S-GB3
M22-XDH-S-GB4
M22-XDH-S-GB5
M22-XDH-R-GB5
M22-XDH-S-GB6
M22-XDH-G-GB6
M22-XDH-S-GB9
M22-XDH-B-GB14
M22-XDH-S-GB15
M22-XDH-S-GB16
M22-XDH-S-GB17
M22-XDH-S-GB18
M22-XDH-S-X0
M22-XDH-R-X0
—
M22-XDH-S-X1
M22-XDH-W-X1
M22-XDH-G-X1
M22-XDH-S-X2
M22-XDH-G-X2
M22-XDH-S-X4
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-B-X6
M22-XDH-S-X7
M22-XDH-S-X8
M22-XDH-S-X9
M22-XDH-S-X10
M22-XDH-S-X11
M22-XDH-S-X12
M22-XDH-S-X13
M22-XDH-S-X14
M22-XDH-S-X15
M22-XDH-S-X16
M22-XDH-S-X17

M22-XDP-S
M22-XDP-W
M22-XDP-R
M22-XDP-G
M22-XDP-Y
—
—
—
M22-XDP-S-ETCH
M22-XDP-W-ETCH
M22-XDP-R-ETCH
M22-XDP-G-ETCH
M22-XDP-Y-ETCH
—
M22-XDP-S-GB0
M22-XDP-R-GB0
M22-XDP-S-GB1
—
M22-XDP-G-GB1
—
M22-XDP-S-GB3
M22-XDP-S-GB4
M22-XDP-S-GB5
M22-XDP-R-GB5
M22-XDP-S-GB6
M22-XDP-G-GB6
—
—
M22-XDP-S-GB15
M22-XDP-S-GB16
—
—
M22-XDP-S-X0
M22-XDP-R-X0
M22-XDP-G-X0
M22-XDP-S-X1
—
M22-XDP-G-X1
—
—
M22-XDP-S-X4
M22-XDP-S-X5
—
M22-XDP-S-X7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Note

Refer to the Symbols Library, (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121), for symbol image.

37
T37-96

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 97 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

M22-XDLH-W

M22-XDL-G

37.4

Button Lenses
Colour

Inscription

Catalogue Number
Flush

Catalogue Number
Extended

Colour

Inscription

White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow

—
—
—
—
—
Custom
Custom
Custom
Custom

M22-XDL-W
M22-XDL-R
M22-XDL-G
M22-XDL-Y
M22-XDL-B
M22-XDL-W-ETCH
M22-XDL-R-ETCH
M22-XDL-G-ETCH
M22-XDL-Y-ETCH

M22-XDLH-W
M22-XDLH-R
M22-XDLH-G
M22-XDLH-Y
M22-XDLH-B
M22-XDLH-W-ETCH
M22-XDLH-R-ETCH
M22-XDLH-G-ETCH
M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH

Blue
Red
Green
Red
Green
Blue
Red
Green
Blue

Custom
STOP
START
OFF
ON
RESET

Catalogue Number
Flush

Catalogue Number
Extended

M22-XDL-B-ETCH
M22-XDL-R-GB0
M22-XDL-G-GB1
M22-XDL-R-GB5
M22-XDL-G-GB6
M22-XDL-B-GB14
M22-XDL-R-X0
M22-XDL-G-X1
M22-XDL-B-X6

M22-XDLH-B-ETCH
M22-XDLH-R-GB0
M22-XDLH-G-GB1
M22-XDLH-R-GB5
M22-XDLH-G-GB6
M22-XDLH-B-GB14
M22-XDLH-R-X0
M22-XDLH-G-X1
M22-XDLH-B-X6

M22-A4

M22-LS

37
37
37
37
37
37

Mounting Adapters
M22-A

37

Description

Catalogue Number

Contact block mounting adapter

M22-A

Contact block mounting adapter,
four-position (for use with
four-way pushbuttons, joysticks
and four-position selector switches
only).

M22-A4

Allows mounting of M22 pushbuttons
to LS-Titan limit switch bodies
(for the full LS-Titan catalogue section,
see CA08100010E/MSC).

M22-LS

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

M22-K10

37

Contact Blocks
Mounting
Location

Terminal Type

Front

Screw

Base

Front

Base

Spring-cage

Contact
Configuration 

Package
Qty.

Catalogue Number

NO
NO
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC
NC
NC, late-break
SMCB, NC
SMCB, 2NC
NO
NO
NO
NC
NC
NC
SMCB, NC
SMCB, 2NC
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO 
2NC 
NO-NC 
NO
NC

1
25
100
1
1
25
100
1
1
1
1
25
100
1
25
100
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

M22-K10
M22-K10-B25
M22-K10-B100
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01-B25
M22-K01-B100
M22-K01D
M22-K01SMC10
M22-K02SMC10
M22-KC10
M22-KC10-B25
M22-KC10-B100
M22-KC01
M22-KC01-B25
M22-KC01-B100
M22-KC01SMC10
M22-KC02SMC10
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-CKC10
M22-CKC01

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
 Not stackable.

37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-97

Tab37book.fm Page 98 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

M22-LED-W

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Light Units
Terminal Type

Mounting
Location

Screw

Front

37
37
37
37
37
37

Base

37
37
37
37
37
Spring-cage

37

Front

37
37
37
Base

37
37
37
37
37
37

M22-XLED60

37
37

LED Colour

Light Unit Voltage

Catalogue Number

White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue

12–30 Vac/Vdc

M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B
M22-LED230H-W
M22-LED230H-R
M22-LED230H-G
M22-LED230H-B
M22-LEDC-W
M22-LEDC-R
M22-LEDC-G
M22-LEDC-B
M22-LEDC230-W
M22-LEDC230-R
M22-LEDC230-G
M22-LEDC230-B
M22-LEDC230H-W
M22-LEDC230H-R
M22-LEDC230H-G
M22-LEDC230H-B
M22-CLED-W
M22-CLED-R
M22-CLED-G
M22-CLED-B
M22-CLED230-W
M22-CLED230-R
M22-CLED230-G
M22-CLED230-B
M22-CLEDC-W
M22-CLEDC-R
M22-CLEDC-G
M22-CLEDC-B
M22-CLEDC230-W
M22-CLEDC230-R
M22-CLEDC230-G
M22-CLEDC230-B

85–264 Vac

207–264 Vac

12–30 Vac/Vdc

85–264 Vac

207–264 Vac

12–30 Vac/Vdc

85–264 Vac

12–30 Vac/Vdc

85–264 Vac

LED Resistor and Test Elements
Terminal Type

Mounting
Location

Element
Type

Screw

Front

Resistor 
Test

Voltage

Catalogue Number

42–60 Vac/Vdc
220 Vdc
12–240 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac

M22-XLED60
M22-XLED220
M22-XLED-T
M22-XLED230-T

37
Notes

Resistor units to be used with 12–30V light units.

Refer to IL04716002E for use of resistor elements in series for higher DC voltage.

37
37
37
37
T37-98

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 99 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Legend Plate Holders and Inserts, Pushbuttons and Double Pushbuttons
M22S-ST-X

Description

Inscription

Catalogue Number

Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert,
for pushbuttons
Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert,
for double pushbuttons

—

M22S-ST-X

—

M22S-STDD-X

37.4



37
37
37
37

M22-XST-GB0

Legend plate insert

—
Custom
STOP
START
OFF
ON
RUN
FAULT
OFF ON
MAN. AUTO
MAN. O AUTO
HAND AUTO
HAND O AUTO
1
2
OI
O-I
I O II

37

M22-XST
M22-XST-ETCH 
M22-XST-GB0
M22-XST-GB1
M22-XST-GB5
M22-XST-GB6
M22-XST-GB7
M22-XST-GB8
M22-XST-GB10
M22-XST-GB11
M22-XST-GB12
M22-XST-D11
M22-XST-D12
M22-XST-X52
M22-XST-X53
M22-XST-X88
M22-XST-X89
M22-XST-X93

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes

When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.

Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13.

37
37
37

Example
To order a legend plate for a pushbutton with non-standard markings (FORWARD):

37

1. Select legend plate holder—M22S-ST-X.
2. Select legend plate insert—M22-XST-ETCH.

37

3. Select FORWARD from the Symbols Library, Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121, identified by GB15 suffix.

37

4. Indicate on the order form in the order notes—suffix GB15, line item # ___ .

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-99

Tab37book.fm Page 100 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Legend Plates, Complete

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

M22S-ST-GB0



Description

Inscription

Catalogue Number

For use with pushbuttons
and indicating lights

Legend plate holder with insert

Selector switches

—

Emergency-stop operators

Rectangular yellow legend plate

STOP
START
OFF
ON
RUN
FAULT
1
2
OFF ON
MAN. AUTO
MAN. O AUTO
HAND AUTO
HAND O AUTO
OI
O-I
I O II
—
Custom
EMERGENCY-STOP

M22S-ST-GB0
M22S-ST-GB1
M22S-ST-GB5
M22S-ST-GB6
M22S-ST-GB7
M22S-ST-GB8
M22S-ST-X52
M22S-ST-X53
M22S-ST-GB10
M22S-ST-GB11
M22S-ST-GB12
M22S-ST-D11
M22S-ST-D12
M22S-ST-X88
M22S-ST-X89
M22S-ST-X93
M22-XZK
M22-XZK-ETCH 
M22-XZK-GB99

—
—
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom)
—
Custom
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom)

M22-XYK
M22-XYK-ETCH 
M22-XYK1
M22-XYK5
M22-XAK
M22-XAK-ETCH 
M22-XAK1
M22-XAK5

Round yellow legend plate, 60 mm

—
Custom
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom)

M22-XBK
M22-XBK-ETCH 
M22-XBK1
M22-XBK5

Silver square legend plate

—
Custom
Four directional arrows
0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4
Two directional arrows

M22-XCK
M22-XCK-ETCH 
M22-XCK1
M22-XCK2
M22-XCK3

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

M22-XZK

37
37

Square yellow legend plate

M22-XYK

37
37

Round yellow legend plate, 90 mm

37
37

M22-XBK1

37
37
37

M22-XCK1

37

Four-way pushbutton,
joystick and four-position
selector switches

37
37

Notes
 When ordering, specify inscription per catalogue number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T37-114 to V7-T37-121) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-100

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 101 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Surface Mounting Enclosures
Description
M22-IY1-PG



Selector Switch Accessories

Catalogue Number

Yellow top, black base for
emergency-stop operators

37.4

M22-IY1-PG

Description
M22-XW

Plunger bridge

Catalogue Number


M22-XW

37
37
37

M22-XWS
M22-IY-PG

One-element enclosure
Two-element enclosure
Three-element enclosure
Four-element enclosure
Six-element enclosure
M20 connecting screw
M20 cord grip

M22-I1-PG
M22-I2-PG
M22-I3-PG
M22-I4-PG
M22-I6-PG
M22-XI
V-M20

M22-XC-R

Key withdraw adapter 

37

M22-XC-R

37
37
Coding adapter

M22-XC-Y

37

Flush Mounting Plates, Aluminum
Finish
One Hole
Yellow paint for
emergency-stop
operators
Gray anodized
Two Holes
Gray anodized
Three Holes
Gray anodized
Four Holes
Gray anodized
Five Holes
Gray anodized
Six Holes
Anodized

Rating

Catalogue Number

37
M22-XGWK

Guard ring

M22-XGWK

37

—

M22-EY1

IP65

M22-E1

37

IP65

M22-E2

37

IP65

M22-E3

IP65

M22-E4

IP65

M22-E5

IP40

M22-E6

Emergency Stop Operator Accessories
M22-XGPV

Description

Voltage

Catalogue Number

Yellow guard ring

—

M22-XGPV

37
37
37

M22G-XGPV

M22-H1

37

M22-XWS

37

M22-XC-Y
M22-EY1

Key cover

Gray guard ring

—

M22G-XGPV

37
37

Shrouds, Plastic
Description

Rating

Catalogue Number

One-element
Two-element
Three-element
Four-element
Five-element
Six-element
Mounting plate
Plaster keys for
flush mounting

IP55
IP55
IP55
IP40
IP40
IP40
—
—

M22-H1
M22-H2
M22-H3
M22-H4
M22-H5
M22-H6
M22-XE5
M22-UPE

37
M22-PL-PV

Sealing shroud

—

M22-PL-PV

37
37

Illuminated ring

24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
230 Vac

M22-XPV60-Y-24
M22-XPV60-Y-120
M22-XPV60-Y-230

37
37
37

M22-B

Blanking Plugs
Colour

Catalogue Number

37

Gray
Black

M22-B
M22S-B

37
37

Notes
 Requires use of base mounted contact blocks.
 Plunger needed to actuate centre-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.

Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.

37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-101

Tab37book.fm Page 102 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Mounting Accessories

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

M22-TC and M22-TA

37

Description

Catalogue Number

Telescopic clip with top-hat rail
Telescopic clip
Telescopic clip extension

M22-TC
M22-TA
M22-TCV

DIN rail mounting adapter

M22-IVS

37
M22-IVS

M22-T-D and
M22-T-DD

M22-ADC4

37
37
37

M22-GR

Mounting ring

M22-GR

37

Catalogue Number

Flush pushbuttons and
indicating lights
Double pushbuttons

M22-T-D
M22-T-DD

Dust Covers
Description

Catalogue Number

Contact block dust cover
Operator dust cover,
max three contact blocks
Operator dust cover,
max four contact blocks

M22-XKDP
M22-ADC
M22-ADC4

Kits

37
M22-MS

Mounting ring tool

M22-MS

M22S-R30

Adapter ring set for
30 mm holes

M22S-R30

37
37
37
37
37

Protective Diaphragm
For Use with …

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-102

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Description

Catalogue Number

Includes one each: M22-XW,
M22-XC-R, M22-XC-Y, M22S-B,
M22-A, M22-XD-SWRGYB

M22-KT1

Tab37book.fm Page 103 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Coding Adapter Guide

37

Selector Switches

37

Two-Position Selector Switch
Top (B)

Top (B)

Bottom (A)

Catalogue Number

Function

M22(S)-W(L)(K)

Momentary

M22(S)-WR(L)(K)

Maintained

37
37
37

Bottom (A)

Three-Position Selector Switch
Top (B)

Bottom (A)

37

Catalogue Number

Function
Left

Right

M22(S)-W(L)(K)3

Momentary

Momentary

37

M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3

Maintained

Maintained

37

M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3-1 Maintained

Momentary

37

M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3-2 Momentary

Maintained

37
37

Two-Position Key-Operated Selector Switch
Top (B)

Bottom (A)

Catalogue Number

Centre
Key Withdraw

Right
Function

Key Withdraw

M22(S)-WS

Yes

Momentary

No

M22(S)-WRS

Yes

Maintained

Yes

M22(S)-WRS-A1

Yes

Maintained

No

37
37
37
37
37

Three-Position Key-Operated Selector Switch
Top (B)

Bottom (A)

Catalogue Number

Left
Function

Key Withdraw

Centre
Key Withdraw

Right
Function

M22(S)-WS3

Momentary

Key Withdraw

No

Yes

Momentary

No

M22(S)-WRS3

Maintained

Yes

Yes

Maintained

Yes

37

M22(S)-WRS3-A1

Maintained

No

Yes

Maintained

No

37

M22(S)-WRS3-A2

Maintained

Yes

Yes

Maintained

No

37

M22(S)-WRS3-A3

Maintained

No

Yes

Maintained

Yes

37

M22(S)-WRS3-A4

Maintained

Yes

Yes

Momentary

No

M22(S)-WRS3-A5

Maintained

No

Yes

Momentary

No

M22(S)-WRS3-A6

Momentary

No

Yes

Maintained

Yes

37

M22(S)-WRS3-A7

Momentary

No

Yes

Maintained

No

37

37

37

37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-103

Tab37book.fm Page 104 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Technical Data and Specifications
Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches and Emergency-Stop Operators

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Description

Maintained
Pushbuttons

Indicating Lights,
Buzzers and
Potentiometers

Emergency-Stop Selector
Operators
Switches

Key-Operated
Operators

Double
Pushbuttons

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #340491

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184

>5
>3600

—
—

>0.1
>2000

>0.1
>100

–
>0.3

—
>0.5

>0.2
>3600
>5

General
Standards

x 10 6

Actuating force

n

>5

>1
>1800
>5

—

>0.1
>600
>50

Operating torque
(screw terminals)

Nm

—

—

—

—

IP

IP67, IP69K

IP67, IP69K

Indicating lights: IP67, 69K IP67, IP69K
Buzzers: IP40
Potentiometers: IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

UL type

4X, 13

4X, 13

Indicating lights: 4X/13
Buzzers: 12
Potentiometers: 4X/13

4X, 13

4X, 13

4X, 13

4X, 13

–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)

–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)

–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)

–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)

Lifespan, mechanical

Operations

Operating frequency

Operations/h

—

Protection Type

Climatic proofing

Damp heat, constant, according to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30

Ambient temperature,
operating

˚F
(˚C)

–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
As required

As required

As required

As required

As required

As required

As required

g

>30

>30

>30

>50

>30

>30

>30

AWG

—

—

—

—

Mounting position
Mechanical shock
resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27
shock duration 11 ms,
half-sinusoidal

–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)

–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)

Terminal Capacities
Solid

mm2
Stranded

AWG

—

mm2

37

Contacts

37

Rated impulse withstand Uimp
voltage

Vac

Rated insulation voltage Ui

V

37

Momentary
Pushbuttons

Overvoltage category/
pollution degree

—

—

20-16

—

—

0.5–1.5

—

—

20-16

—

—

0.5–1.5

—

—

4000

—

—

—

—

—
—

—

—

—

—

2500

—

—

—

—

—

—

III/3

—

—

—

—

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-104

—

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 105 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Contact Blocks and Light Units
Description

37

Contact
Blocks

LED
Light Units

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184

37

>5
>3600

—
—

37

37

General
Standards

Lifespan, mechanical

Operations

Operating frequency

Operations/h

x 10 6

Actuating force

n

>5

—

Operating torque (screw terminals)

Nm

<0.8

—

IP

IP20

IP20

UL type

—

—

37
37

Protection Type

Climatic proofing

37

Damp heat, constant, according to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30

Ambient temperature, operating

˚F (˚C)

–13 to 158 (–25 to 70)
As required

As required

g

>30

>30

Mounting position
Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27 shock duration
11 ms, half-sinusoidal

37

–13 to 158 (–25 to 70)

37
37

Terminal Capacities
Solid
Stranded

AWG

18–14

18–14

mm2

0.75–2.5

0.75–2.5

AWG

20–14

20–14

mm2

0.5–2.5

0.5–2.5

6000

6000

37
37
37

Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage

Uimp

Vac

Rated insulation voltage

Ui

V

37

500

500

Overvoltage category/
pollution degree

III/3

III/3

NEMA contact ratings

A600, Q300

—

Current draw

—

5–15 mA

37
37

37

Control Circuit Reliability
-7

7

at 24 Vdc/5 mA

HF

Fault probability

<10 , <1 fault in 10 operations

—

at 5 Vdc/1 mA

HF

Fault probability

<5 x 10 -6, <1 fault in 5 x 10 6 operations

—

A

10

—

37

Max. Short-Circuit Protective Device
Fuse

gG/gL

37

Switching Capacity
Rated Operational Current

37

AC-15
115V

Ie

A

6

—

230V

Ie

A

6

—

400V

Ie

A

4

—

500V

Ie

A

2

—

37

24V

Ie

A

3

—

42V

Ie

A

1.7

—

37

60V

Ie

A

1.2

—

110V

Ie

A

0.8

—

220V

Ie

A

0.3

—

Operations

x 10 6

1.6

—

230V/1.0A

Operations

x 10

6

1

—

230V/3.0A

Operations

x 10 6

0.7

—

Operations

x 10 6

1.2

—

37

DC-13

37
37

Lifespan, Electrical

37

AC-15
230V/0.5A

37
37

DV-13
12V/2.8A

37

Contact Element Note: >200 Vac/60 Hz: –25/55˚C

37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-105

Tab37book.fm Page 106 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Palm Switches
Description

Momentary

Maintained

FAK-R-V-KC11-I

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660

IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660

x 10 6

>1
>3600

>0.1
>600

>0.1
>600

General
Standards
Lifespan, mechanical

Operations

37

Operating frequency

Operations/h

Actuating force

n

20–40

40–60

15–25

37

Operating torque

Nm

—

—

—

37
37
37
37
37

Degree of protection, IEC/EN 60529

IP

IP67, IP69K

IP67, IP69K

IP65

UL Type

4X, 13

4X, 13

4X, 13

Climatic proofing

Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60068-2-30

Ambient temperature, operating

˚F (˚C)

Mounting position

–73 to 104 (–25 to 40)

–73 to 104 (–25 to 40)

–73 to 104 (–25 to 40)

>15

>15

As required

Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27
shock duration 11 ms, half-sinusoidal

g

>15

ASi Adapter Modules
M22-ASI

M22-ASI-C

Standards

IEC/EN 60947,
DIN EN 50295

IEC/EN 60947,
DIN EN 50295

Radio interference suppression

EN 55011,
EN 55022

EN 55011,
EN 55022

Limit value class

—

—

37

Protection type

IP20

IP00

Climatic proofing

Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78, cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30

37

Ambient temperature, operating

˚F (˚C)

–13 to 131 (–25 to 55)

–13 to 131 (–25 to 55)

Shock resistance shock duration 11 ms

g

>30

>30

37

Vibration to IEC 60068-2-27
(amplitude 1 mm)

Hz

—

—

37

Dimensions

mm

—

—

Weight

kg

—

—

37

Mounting

Front mounting

Front mounting

Mounting position

As required

As required

37

Power Supply
26.5–31.6

26.5–31.6

Connection technique

Yellow plug-in terminal as insulation
piercing terminal

Two cables onboard

Power supply

Completely from the AS-interface cable

37
37
37

37
37
37
37
37
37

Description
General

Rated voltage to AS-interface
specification

Vdc

Addressing
Total power consumption of
the AS-interface

mA

AS-interface

Via connection to AS-interface cable
>40

>40

—

—

Rated operational current at full load

mA

—

—

Rated operational current when idle
(no I, O set)

mA

—

—

POWER AS-interface cable:
green LED on the rear side of the element

POWER AS-interface cable:
green LED on the board

Status LEDs

37

ERROR AS-interface, AS-interface master
ERROR AS-interface, AS-interface master
failure: red LED on the rear side of the element failure: red LED on the board

37
37
37
37
T37-106

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 107 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

ASi-S Adapter Modules
Description

M22-ASI-S

M22-ASI-CS

37

Inputs
Inputs, protected against
short-circuit

Number

Two (normally 22V/5 mA)

Two (normally 22V/5 mA)

Voltage range

Vdc

—

—

37
37

Rated current per input

mA

—

—

High signal level

V

—

—

Low signal

mA

—

—

Length of connecting cables

cm

—

—

Outputs, protected against
short-circuit

Number

One (normally 19V/8 mA)

One (normally 19V/8 mA)

Voltage range

Vdc

—

—

37

—

—

37

—

—

—

—

Profile

S-3.A.E

S-3.A.E

Specification

2.1

2.1

62

62

37

Connection of the AS-interface line

Yellow plug terminal with insulation
piercing

Two cables on the circuit board

37

Power supply

Complete from AS-interface,
cable 26.5–31.6 Vdc

Complete from AS-interface,
cable 26.5–31.6 Vdc

37

Fixing

Front mounted

Base mounted

37
37

Outputs

37

Max. Current Carrying Capacity
All outputs
 three external outputs
Length of connecting cables

Addresses

cm

Number

37
37

Emergency-Stop Circuits

Addressing

Via AS-interface cable

Via AS-interface cable

Max. total current

A

45 mA

45 mA

Ambient temperature, operating

˚F (˚C)

–13 to 131 (–25 to 55)

–13 to 131 (–25 to 55)

37
37

Shock resistance

30g/11 ms as per IEC 60068-2-27

30g/11 ms as per IEC 60068-2-27

Protection type

IP20

IP00

37

Climatic proofing

Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78,
cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30

Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78,
cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30

37

Mounting position

As required

As required

Standards

EN 50178
EN 50 295

EN 50178
EN 50 295

Inputs

Two-channel input (22V/5 mA)
(moduled by code sequence)
(two break contact sets M22-K01)

Two-channel input (22V/5 mA)
(moduled by code sequence)
(two break contact sets M22-K01)

Outputs

One output, typically 19V/8 mA,
short-circuit proof

One output, typically 19V/8 mA,
short-circuit proof

Power, AS-interface cable

Green LED on the back

Green LED on the back

AS-interface error,
AS-interface master failure

Red LED on the back

Red LED on the back

37

Profile

S-7.B.E

S-7.B.E

37

37
37
37
37

Status Displays

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-107

Tab37book.fm Page 108 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37

Dimensions

37

Operators and Indicating Lights

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

M22 x 0.06 (1.5)

37
37
37

Ø 1.16 (29.5)

Ø 1.17 (29.7)

37

1.17 (29.7)
0.04 (1)–0.24 (6)

37

0.39 (10) 0.75 (19)

37
37

Pushbuttons

Selector Switches Operators

M22…-D-_

M22…-DH-_

M22…-W-_

M22…-WL-_

0.93 (23.7)

1.06 (26.9)

37
37
37
37
37

0.39 (10)

37

M22-DG(L)-_

Key-Operated Selector Switches
M22…-W(R)S-_

Ø1.17 (29.7)

2.15 (54.7)

37

M22…-DD-_

Ø1.17 (29.7)

37

0.65 (16.4)

37
37
37

0.65 (16.5)

0.52 (13.2)
0.81 (20.6)
1.88 (47.75)

M22-D, Base Mounted

1.47 (37.2)

37
37
37
37

>0.01 (0.3)

37

Indicating Light
M22-L_

0.04 (1)

1.78 (45.3)

37
37

0.45 (11.5)

37
37
37
T37-108

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 109 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Illuminated Pushbuttons

Contact Block Mounting Adapter

M22…-DL-_

M22-A_

37

M22S-A…

0.85 (21.5)

1.77 (45)

M22…-DLH_

37
37
37
0.76 (19.3)

37
1.73 (44)

37

1.18 (30)
0.39 (10)

0.65 (16.4)

37

Mushroom Head Pushbutton

Front Mounted Centering Adapter

M22…-DP-_

M22-ZA

37

Ø1.44 (36.5)

0.84 (21.4)

37
37
37

1.18 (30)

0.93 (23.6)

37

0.7 (17.8)

37

Front Mounted Indicating Light

37

Emergency-Stop Operators

37

1.46 (37)

M22-PV_
M22S-PV_
M22-PVL_
M22-PVS_

37

1.38 (35)

37

1.5 (38)

37

1.77 (45)

1.18 (30)

37
Pushbutton, Complete Devices

37

1.89 (47.9)

37
A

2.96 (75.1)

37
37

0.39 (10)

M22(S)-R_

0.39 (10)

0.39 (10)

Potentiometer

37

1.77 (45)
2.8 (71)

37

1.18 (30)

A
1.15 (29.2)

1 x M22-K_

2 x M22-K_

1 x M22-CK_

2 x M22-CK_

1.46 (37.2)

1.46 (37.2)

1.54 (39.0)

1.54 (39.0)

37
37

1.3 (32.9)

37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-109

Tab37book.fm Page 110 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Front Mounted Mounting Plate

DIN-Rail Mounting Adapter

37

1.42 (36)

37
M22-D...
M22-L...
M22-W...
M22-P...

37
37
37
37
37

0.12 (3.1)

M22-D_
M22-L_
M22-W_
M22-P_

M22-TC

M22-TCV



37

0.12 (3)

a1

0.18 (4.5 (M4))

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights with M22-TC Telescopic
Clip and M22-TVC Extension

Catalogue
Number

a1

e

Catalogue
Number

a1

e

M22-E(Y) 
M22-E2
M22-E3

2.83 (72)
4.13 (105)
5.43 (138)

2.21 (56)
3.50 (89)
4.80 (122)

M22-E4
M22-E5
M22-E6

6.73 (171)
8.03 (204)
9.33 (237)

6.10 (155)
7.40 (188)
8.70 (221)

Base Mounted Surface Mounting Enclosure

C

37

M22-I_

A

37

E

B

G
H

F

37

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

37

1.77
(45)

2.36–3.94
(60–100)

0.79
(20)

0.79
(20)

0.18
(4.5)

0.39
(10)

154
(39)

0.39
(10)

37

0.7 (17.8)
2.2 (56)

Palm Switches
FAK_
M20

L-...

M5 x 20

2.56 (65)

37
1.42 (36)

0.26 (6.5) – 0.3 (7.5)

Ø94

37
3.98 (101)

37
37

Catalogue
Number

Mounting
Locations

M22-I(Y)1

1

M22-I2

2

M22-I3

3

M22-I4

4

M22-I6

6

3.35 (85)

37

37



M20
1.89 (48)

37

37

M4

M20/M25

0.71 (18)

37

e

1.3 (33)
b
a

Top-hat rail to IEC/EN 60715.

1.57 (40)

37



1.36 (34.5)

37

M20

M20

37

1.73 (44)
3.15 (80)

D

37



0.1 (2.5)

1.3 (33)
e

1.39 (35.2)
2.23 (56.7)

4 x M4 x 16

2.62 (66.5)

37

0.88 (22.4)

2.2 (56)

2.15 (54.5)

0.88 (22.4)

2.54 (64.5)

37

M22-E_

2.83 (72)

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

3 x M20 lateral, 1 x M16 in bottom.

37
T37-110

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

a

b

e

Cable Entries

2.83
(72.0)
4.72
(120.0)
6.02
(153.0)
7.32
(186.0)
9.92
(252.0)

1.68
(42.6)
3.37
(85.6)
4.67
(118.6)
5.97
(151.6)
8.57
(217.6)

2.30
(58.5)
4.19
(106.5)
5.49
(139.5)
6.79
(172.5)
9.39
(238.5)

2 x M16 3 x M20 2 x M25
2 x M20 3 x M20 2 x M25
2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20
2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20
2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20

Tab37book.fm Page 111 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Covers
M22-H_

M22S-ST-_

37

M22S-STDD-X

3.74 (95)

1.85 (47)

M20

37

0.59 (15)
1.18 (30)

Catalogue
Number

a2

Cable Entry

Style

M22-H1
M22-H2
M22-H3
M22-H4
M22-H5
M22-HE6

1.65 (42)
2.95 (75)
4.25 (108)
5.55 (141)
6.85 (174)
8.15 (207)

3 x M20
4 x M20
4 x M20
4 x M20
5 x M20
6 x M20

One-piece

37
37
37

1.18 (30)
Split

37

Mounting Hole with Lug Slot

37

0.13 (3.2)

37

0.95 (24.1)

Connecting Screw
M22-XI

37

1.08 (27.5)

M20

37

1.38 (35)

2.32 (59)

a2

M20

37

Legend Plates



37
37
37

0.88 (22.3)

0.04 (1)–0.24 (6)

37

0.04 (1)


Gasket.

37

Shroud with Plaster Keys

37

M22-UPE

37

a2 +1.65 (42)
a2 +1.26 (32)

37

a2

M22-H...

2.76 (70)

0.16 (4)
2.2 (56)

37
37
37

e

37

e + 0.51 (13)
0.35 (9)

M22-H...






37

0.35 (9)
1.02 (26)



37

0.31 (8)

0.31 (8)

37

M22-UPE

37



37

Box for closing off when plastering.
Plaster thickness less than 8 mm.
Plaster thickness more than 8 mm

37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-111

Tab37book.fm Page 112 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Grid Dimension for M22-DD_

Grid Dimension to IEC/EN 60947

37
37
37
37

2.48 (63)

37
37
37
1.18 (30)

37
37

2.95 (75)

1.97 (50)

37

Grid Dimension for Various Combinations

37
37

1.18 (30)
B

37

Grid Dimension for M22-DDL_
a 1.18 (30)

37
37

Pushbutton
Diaphragm
M22-T-DD 

A

Pushbutton diaphragm cannot be combined with label mount.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Catalogue Number

A>

B>

M22(S)-_(IEC/EN 60947)
RMQ-Titan min.
M22-D_ + M22-T-D
M22-D(R)P_
M22-PV_
M22-PV(L) + M22-PL-PV
M22-PV(L)(S_) + M22-D_
M22-DDL_
M22-DDL_ + M22-T-DD
M22-ST_
M22-STDD_
M22-CK_
M22-CLED_
M22-XAK_
M22-XZK_
M22-XBK_
M22-XYK_
M22-D4
M22-WR…4
M22-W…J4

1.18 (30.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.30 (33.0)
1.50 (38.0)
1.50 (38.0)
1.89 (48.0)
1.30 (33.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.30 (33.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.18 (30.0)
3.54 (90.0)
1.30 (33.0)
2.36 (60.0)
1.97 (50.0)
2.17 (55.0)
1.97 (50.0)
1.97 (50.0)

1.97 (50.0)
1.58 (40.0)
1.58 (40.0)
1.58 (40.0)
1.58 (40.0)
2.20 (56.0)
1.58 (40.0)
2.17 (55.0)
2.28 (58.0)
1.97 (50.0)
2.95 (75.0)
1.77 (45.0)
1.77 (45.0)
3.54 (90.0)
2.04 (52.0)
2.36 (60.0)
1.97 (50.0)
2.17 (55.0)
1.97 (50.0)
1.97 (50.0)



Pushbutton diaphragm cannot be combined with label mount.

Emergency Stop Sealing Cover
M22-PL-PV
2.03 (51.6)

37

0.41 (10.4)
1.89 (48)

Pushbutton Diaphragm

b 1.73 (44)

37

b 2.28 (58)

37

1.26 (32)

T37-112

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 113 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Blanking Plugs

Emergency Stop Legend Plate

M22…B-_

M22-XAK_

37
37

M22-X(Y)ZK_

1.16 (29.5)

37

1.97 (50)

0.65 (16.5)

d= 0.03 (0.8)

37
37

1.3 (33)

37

Pushbutton Diaphragm
M22-T-D

37

3.54 (90)

M22-XBK-_

2.28 (58)

37

M22-XYK-_

37

(2
2

.5

)

0.13 (3.2)

Ø

0.

89

1.97 (50)

0.67 (17)

M22-T-D

37
37

0.49 (12.5)
1.3 (33)

1.3 (33)

0.67 (17)

37

1.97 (50)
0.91 (23)

37

Guard Ring
Ø 2.36 (60)

37

M22-XGPV
0.98 (25)

M22-XGWK

R35 R41

Joystick

37

M22…W…J_

37
37

Ø 1.42 (36)

2.68 (68)

37

1.97 (50)

37

3.07 (78)
2.95 (75)
1.18 (30)

37

Key Cover

37

Four-Way Pushbutton

M22-XWS

M22…-D…4-_

37

0.79 (20)

0.2 (5)

37
37
37
0.47 (12)

Ø 0.98 (25)

37

2.17 (55)
0.45 (11.5)

37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-113

Tab37book.fm Page 114 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Symbols Library
Instructions for Ordering Laser Inscriptions
1. Identify part number to be inscribed.
2. Pick symbol from library and identify suffix code associated with the symbol.
3. Order part number already listed in the catalogue with -ETCH suffix.

37
37
37
37

4. When placing an order by fax or Vistaline on the Web, reference order item number and
indicate appropriate suffix code.
Example
To order a green flush button plate with the inscription AUTO HAND:
Order Catalogue Number: M22-XD-G-ETCH (see Page V7-T37-38).
AUTO HAND inscription is found on Page V7-T37-118 in the Symbols Library, suffix code is X91.

37

In the order notes, reference item number and suffix X91.

37
37

Letter height 3 mm: max three lines, max. 12 characters per line.
Letter height 5 mm: max. two lines, max. eight characters per line.

37
37

Note: For symbols or text not found in the Symbols Library, please contact the
Eaton Customer Support Centre at 1-800-268-3578.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-114

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 115 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

37.4

Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm).

Text—English
Inscription

Text—German
Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

37
37

GB0

GB18

D0

D25

37

GB1

GB19

D1

D28

37

GB2

GB20

D2

D29

37

GB3

GB21

D3

D30

37

GB4

GB22

D4

D31

37

GB5

GB23

D5

D32

37

GB6

GB24

D6

D33

37

GB7

GB25

D7

D34

37

GB8

GB26

D8

D35

37

GB9

GB27

D9

D36

37

GB10

GB32

D10

D37

37

GB11

GB62

D11

D38

37

GB12

GB63

D12

D39

37

GB14

GB64

D13

D40

37

GB15

GB65

D14

D41

37

GB16

GB66

D15

D42

37

GB17

GB99

D16

D43

37

D17

D44

37

D18

D72

37

D19

D73

37

D20

D74

37

D21

D75

37

D22

D99

37

D23

D100

37
37

D24

37
37
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

37
T37-115

Tab37book.fm Page 116 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm).

Text—French
Inscription

Text—Swedish
Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Symbols
Catalogue
Number Suffix

37

F0

S0

37

F1

S1

37

F2

S2

37

F3

S3

37

F4

S4

37

F5

S5

37

F6

S6

37

F7

S7

37

F8

S8

37

F9

S9

37

F10

S10

37

F11

S11

37

F12

S12

37

F14

S14

37

F15

S15

37

F16

S16

37

F17

S17

37

F18

S18

F19

S19

F20

S20

F67

S21

F68

S22

F99

S23

37
37
37
37
37

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

X0

X13

X1

X14

X2

X15

X3

X16

X4

X17

X5

X18

X6

X19

X7

X20

X8

X21

X9

X22

X10

X23

X11

X24

X12

X25

S32

37

S45

37

S46

37

S99

37
37

Inscription

Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

T37-116

Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 117 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

X26

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

X40

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

X54

37.4
Catalogue
Number Suffix

37

X68

37
37

X27

X41

X55

37

X69

37
X28

X42

X56

37

X70

37
X29

X43

X57

X71

37
37

X30

X44

X58

X72

X31

X45

X59

X73

37
37
37
37

X32

X46

X60

X74

37
37

X33

X47

X61

X75

X34

X48

X62

X76

X35

X49

X63

X77

X36

X50

X64

X78

X37

X51

X65

X79

X38

X52

X66

X80

X39

X53

X67

X81

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

37
T37-117

Tab37book.fm Page 118 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Inscription

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

X82

X104

X118

X132

X83

X105

X119

X133

X88

X106

X120

X134

X89

X107

X121

X135

X90

X108

X122

X136

X91

X109

X123

X137

X92

X110

X124

X138

X93

X111

X125

X139

X94

X112

X126

X140

X95

X113

X127

X141

X100

X114

X128

X142

X101

X115

X129

X143

X102

X116

X130

X144

X103

X117

X131

X145

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

T37-118

Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 119 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

X146

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

X160

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

X174

37.4
Catalogue
Number Suffix

37

X188

37
37

X147

X161

X175

37

X189

37
X148

X162

X176

37

X190

37
X149

X163

X177

X191

37
37

X150

X164

X178

X192

X151

X165

X179

X193

37
37
37
37

X152

X166

X180

X194

37
37

X153

X167

X181

X195

X154

X168

X182

X196

X155

X169

X183

X197

X156

X170

X184

X198

X157

X171

X185

X199

X158

X172

X186

X200

X159

X173

X187

X201

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

37
T37-119

Tab37book.fm Page 120 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.4
37

Inscription

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

X202

X216

X230

X244

X203

X217

X231

X245

X204

X218

X232

X246

X205

X219

X233

X247

X206

X220

X234

X248

X207

X221

X235

X249

X208

X222

X236

X250

X209

X223

X237

X251

X210

X224

X238

X252

X211

X225

X239

X253

X212

X226

X240

X254

X213

X227

X241

X255

X214

X228

X242

X256

X215

X229

X243

X257

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

T37-120

Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 121 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Inscription

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

X258

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

X265

Catalogue
Number Suffix

Inscription

X272

37.4
Catalogue
Number Suffix

37

X279

37
37

X259

X266

X273

37

X280

37
X260

X267

X274

37

X281

37
X261

X268

X275

X282

37
37

X262

X269

X276

X283

X263

X270

X277

X284

37
37
37
37

X264

X271

X278

X285

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

37
T37-121

Tab37book.fm Page 122 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Contents

22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Description

37

Page

22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
37
37
37

T37-124
T37-125
T37-134
T37-136
T37-139
T37-144
T37-146

37
37
37
37
37

Product Overview

37

Product Description

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Eaton’s C22 compact
pushbutton line offers an
industry leading array of
functional, attractive, and
ergonomically designed
“all-in-one” illuminated and
non-illuminated pushbuttons,
selector switches, emergency
stops and indicating lights.
The complete illuminated line
is only offered in LED light
units to ensure high-quality
brightness and up to 100,000
hours of LED illumination.
C22 operators are available
with either a silver or black
bezel and share the exact
same front of the panel
look and feel as Eaton’s
M22 line. The C22’s compact,
“all-in-one” design with the
contact block(s) and
operators integral provides
the user with a simple solution.

Standards and Certifications
Wide Product Breadth
●
In addition to the standard
compact offering of
indicating lights and
pushbuttons, Eaton’s
C22 offers keyed and
non-keyed operators
and emergency stops
●
Hundreds of styles with
standard laser etch
markings with the ability
to use custom M22 laser
etched buttons in
conjunction with C22
buttonless operators

LED Indicators
●
100,000 hours of life
in high-vibration
environments
●
Lenses specifically
designed for LED
illumination
Rugged Design
●
Pushbuttons (momentary)
rated for 5 million
mechanical operations
and selector switches
(non-keyed) rated for
1 million mechanical
operations
●
All components have IP65
rating, and some carry IP67
and IP69K for wash-down
environment

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-122

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

All operators are IEC/EN
60947 VDE 0660, UL Listed,
and CSA Certified.
All operators carry an IP65,
IP66, IP67 or IP69K rating.
All products carry ratings of
NEMA 1, 3R, 4X, 12 and 13

Tab37book.fm Page 123 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Features
●

●

●

●

●

Field convertible
maintained pushbuttons
from maintained to
momentary
Field convertible selector
switches from momentary
to maintained operation
and vice versa
LED offering only for all
illuminated operators
Laser engraved
pushbuttons and lenses
Heavy-duty construction
with a minimum of IP65
and UL NEMA® Type 4X/13
on front of panel operators.
Many operators even carry
IP67 and IP69K, for the
toughest applications

37.5

Benefits
●

●

●

●

Silver or black colored
nylon bezels
Notched hole mounting
with anti-rotation tab and
central nut mounting on
each operator
Pushbuttons (momentary)
rated for 5 million
mechanical operations
and selector switches
(non-keyed) rated for
1 million mechanical
operations
Unique compact offerings,
including keyed and nonkeyed operators and
emergency stops

●

●

●

●

Compact, “all-in-one”
operator and contact block
design simplifies product
selection, inventory, and
installation
Field convertibility of
pushbuttons and selector
switches helps distributors
and customers reduce
inventory and increase
functionality
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
Plastic construction is
corrosion resistant

●

●

●

●

●

Operators are designed
for rugged environments,
ideal for wash-down
applications (reference
each operator’s IP ratings
for ingress protection
definition)
Anti-rotation tab saves
installation time and
prevents operator rotation
High mechanical and
electrical life allows for
use in tough and
challenging applications
Laser inscription
capabilities allow for high
quality, wear-resistant
markings
By having a compact
design emergency stop, the
C22 design eliminates the
need for self-monitoring
contact blocks

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-123

Tab37book.fm Page 124 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Product Selection Guide
Pushbuttons

37
37
37
37
37
37

Description

Non-illuminated, flush

Non-illuminated, extended

Illuminated, flush

Operator

Momentary

Maintained

Momentary

Maintained

Momentary

Maintained

Momentary

Maintained

Product Selection

Page V7-T37-126

Page V7-T37-127

Page V7-T37-128

Page V7-T37-129

Page V7-T37-130

Page V7-T37-131

Page V7-T37-132

Page V7-T37-133

37
37

Indicating Lights

37
37
37
37

Description

Indicating lights

Product Selection

Page V7-T37-135

37
37

Emergency Stops

37
37
37
37
37
37

Description

Twist release

Keyed-release

Product Selection

Page V7-T37-137

Page V7-T37-137

Selector Switches

37
37
37
37
37

Description

Non-illuminated, knob type

Key-operated

Product Selection

Page V7-T37-140

Page V7-T37-141

37
37
37
37
T37-124

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Illuminated, extended

Tab37book.fm Page 125 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37.5

Contents

Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated

Description
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page

37
37

T37-126
T37-127
T37-128
T37-129
T37-130
T37-131
T37-132
T37-133
T37-134
T37-136
T37-139
T37-144
T37-146

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Product Description

Features

Eaton’s C22 Compact
Pushbuttons are a complete
line of monoblock type
pushbuttons with the contact
blocks, mounting adapter,
and operator all-in-one. The
C22 pushbuttons offer the
same look and feel as their
modular counterpart, the
M22. They also carry many of
the same rugged ratings and
options, such as laser
etching, field convertibility,
and LED technology.

●

●

●

●

37

Field convertible
maintained pushbuttons
from maintained to
momentary
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
Laser engraved
pushbuttons and lenses
Pushbuttons (momentary)
rated for 5 million
mechanical operations

Protection Type
●
IP67/IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: For additional accessories,
please see Volume 7—Motor
Controls, Logic and Connectivity,
CA08100008E, Tab 37, section
37.4, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-125

Tab37book.fm Page 126 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

C22 - D - G - X1 - K10

37
37

Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S = Black

37
37

D=
DR =
DH =
DRH =

Operator Type
Flush, momentary
Flush, maintained
Extended, momentary
Extended, maintained

Button Plate Colour
G = Green
R = Red
S = Black
W = White
X = Buttonless

Button Etching
X0 =
X1 =

37
37

Product Selection

37

Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary

37

C22(S)-D-_

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Button
Colour

37

Green

37
37
37

Button
Etching

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

—

1NO

C22-D-G-K10

C22S-D-G-K10

—

2NO

C22-D-G-K20

C22S-D-G-K20

—

1NO/1NC

C22-D-G-K11

C22S-D-G-K11

X1

1NO

C22-D-G-X1-K10

C22S-D-G-X1-K10
C22S-D-G-X1-K20

X1

2NO

C22-D-G-X1-K20

X1

1NO/1NC

C22-D-G-X1-K11

C22S-D-G-X1-K11

—

1NC

C22-D-R-K01

C22S-D-R-K01

37

—

2NC

C22-D-R-K02

C22S-D-R-K02

—

1NO/1NC

C22-D-R-K11

C22S-D-R-K11

37

X0

1NC

C22-D-R-X0-K01

C22S-D-R-X0-K01

X0

2NC

C22-D-R-X0-K02

C22S-D-R-X0-K02

X0

1NO/1NC

C22-D-R-X0-K11

C22S-D-R-X0-K11

—

1NC

C22-D-S-K01

C22S-D-S-K01

—

2NC

C22-D-S-K02

C22S-D-S-K02

37

—

1NO/1NC

C22-D-S-K11

C22S-D-S-K11

X0

1NC

C22-D-S-X0-K01

C22S-D-S-X0-K01

37

X0

2NC

C22-D-S-X0-K02

C22S-D-S-X0-K02

X0

1NO/1NC

C22-D-S-X0-K11

C22S-D-S-X0-K11

—

1NO

C22-D-W-K10

C22S-D-W-K10

—

2NO

C22-D-W-K20

C22S-D-W-K20

—

1NO/1NC

C22-D-W-K11

C22S-D-W-K11

X1

1NO

C22-D-W-X1-K10

C22S-D-W-X1-K10

X1

2NO

C22-D-W-X1-K20

C22S-D-W-X1-K20

X1

1NO/1NC

C22-D-W-X1-K11

C22S-D-W-X1-K11

—

1NO

C22-D-X-K10

C22S-D-X-K10

—

2NO

C22-D-X-K20

C22S-D-X-K20

37

—

1NC

C22-D-X-K01

C22S-D-X-K01

—

2NC

C22-D-X-K02

C22S-D-X-K02

37

—

1NO/1NC

C22-D-X-K11

C22S-D-X-K11

37

Red

37
Black

37

37

White

37
37
37
Buttonless

37

37
37
T37-126

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Contact Blocks
K10 = 1NO
K20 = 2NO
K01 = 1NC
K02 = 2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC

Tab37book.fm Page 127 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37.5

Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained
C22(S)-DR-_

37

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
Button
Colour

Button
Etching

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

Green

—

1NO

C22-DR-G-K10

C22S-DR-G-K10

—

2NO

C22-DR-G-K20

C22S-DR-G-K20

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DR-G-K11

C22S-DR-G-K11

Red

Black

White

Buttonless

X1

1NO

C22-DR-G-X1-K10

C22S-DR-G-X1-K10

X1

2NO

C22-DR-G-X1-K20

C22S-DR-G-X1-K20

X1

1NO/1NC

C22-DR-G-X1-K11

C22S-DR-G-X1-K11

—

1NC

C22-DR-R-K01

C22S-DR-R-K01

—

2NC

C22-DR-R-K02

C22S-DR-R-K02

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DR-R-K11

C22S-DR-R-K11

X0

1NC

C22-DR-R-X0-K01

C22S-DR-R-X0-K01

X0

2NC

C22-DR-R-X0-K02

C22S-DR-R-X0-K02

X0

1NO/1NC

C22-DR-R-X0-K11

C22S-DR-R-X0-K11

—

1NC

C22-DR-S-K01

C22S-DR-S-K01

—

2NC

C22-DR-S-K02

C22S-DR-S-K02

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DR-S-K11

C22S-DR-S-K11

X0

1NC

C22-DR-S-X0-K01

C22S-DR-S-X0-K01

X0

2NC

C22-DR-S-X0-K02

C22S-DR-S-X0-K02

X0

1NO/1NC

C22-DR-S-X0-K11

C22S-DR-S-X0-K11

—

1NO

C22-DR-W-K10

C22S-DR-W-K10

—

2NO

C22-DR-W-K20

C22S-DR-W-K20

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DR-W-K11

C22S-DR-W-K11

X1

1NO

C22-DR-W-X1-K10

C22S-DR-W-X1-K10

X1

2NO

C22-DR-W-X1-K20

C22S-DR-W-X1-K20

X1

1NO/1NC

C22-DR-W-X1-K11

C22S-DR-W-X1-K11

—

1NO

C22-DR-X-K10

C22S-DR-X-K10

—

2NO

C22-DR-X-K20

C22S-DR-X-K20

—

1NC

C22-DR-X-K01

C22S-DR-X-K01

—

2NC

C22-DR-X-K02

C22S-DR-X-K02

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DR-X-K11

C22S-DR-X-K11

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-127

Tab37book.fm Page 128 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary
C22(S)-DH-_

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Button
Colour

37

Green

Button
Etching

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

—

1NO

C22-DH-G-K10

C22S-DH-G-K10

37

—

2NO

C22-DH-G-K20

C22S-DH-G-K20

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DH-G-K11

C22S-DH-G-K11

37

X1

1NO

C22-DH-G-X1-K10

C22S-DH-G-X1-K10

X1

2NO

C22-DH-G-X1-K20

C22S-DH-G-X1-K20

37

X1

1NO/1NC

C22-DH-G-X1-K11

C22S-DH-G-X1-K11

—

1NC

C22-DH-R-K01

C22S-DH-R-K01

—

2NC

C22-DH-R-K02

C22S-DH-R-K02

37

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DH-R-K11

C22S-DH-R-K11

X0

1NC

C22-DH-R-X0-K01

C22S-DH-R-X0-K01

37

X0

2NC

C22-DH-R-X0-K02

C22S-DH-R-X0-K02

Red

37

X0

1NO/1NC

C22-DH-R-X0-K11

C22S-DH-R-X0-K11

—

1NC

C22-DH-S-K01

C22S-DH-S-K01

37

—

2NC

C22-DH-S-K02

C22S-DH-S-K02

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DH-S-K11

C22S-DH-S-K11

37

X0

1NC

C22-DH-S-X0-K01

C22S-DH-S-X0-K01

X0

2NC

C22-DH-S-X0-K02

C22S-DH-S-X0-K02

37

Black

37

X0

1NO/1NC

C22-DH-S-X0-K11

C22S-DH-S-X0-K11

—

1NO

C22-DH-W-K10

C22S-DH-W-K10

—

2NO

C22-DH-W-K20

C22S-DH-W-K20

37

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DH-W-K11

C22S-DH-W-K11

X1

1NO

C22-DH-W-X1-K10

C22S-DH-W-X1-K10

37

X1

2NO

C22-DH-W-X1-K20

C22S-DH-W-X1-K20

X1

1NO/1NC

C22-DH-W-X1-K11

C22S-DH-W-X1-K11

White

37

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-128

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 129 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37.5

Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained
C22(S)-DRH-_

37

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained
Button
Colour

Button
Etching

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

Green

—

1NO

C22-DRH-G-K10

C22S-DRH-G-K10

—

2NO

C22-DRH-G-K20

C22S-DRH-G-K20

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DRH-G-K11

C22S-DRH-G-K11

Red

Black

White

X1

1NO

C22-DRH-G-X1-K10

C22S-DRH-G-X1-K10

X1

2NO

C22-DRH-G-X1-K20

C22S-DRH-G-X1-K20

X1

1NO/1NC

C22-DRH-G-X1-K11

C22S-DRH-G-X1-K11

—

1NC

C22-DRH-R-K01

C22S-DRH-R-K01

—

2NC

C22-DRH-R-K02

C22S-DRH-R-K02

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DRH-R-K11

C22S-DRH-R-K11

X0

1NC

C22-DRH-R-X0-K01

C22S-DRH-R-X0-K01

X0

2NC

C22-DRH-R-X0-K02

C22S-DRH-R-X0-K02

X0

1NO/1NC

C22-DRH-R-X0-K11

C22S-DRH-R-X0-K11

—

1NC

C22-DRH-S-K01

C22S-DRH-S-K01

—

2NC

C22-DRH-S-K02

C22S-DRH-S-K02

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DRH-S-K11

C22S-DRH-S-K11

X0

1NC

C22-DRH-S-X0-K01

C22S-DRH-S-X0-K01

X0

2NC

C22-DRH-S-X0-K02

C22S-DRH-S-X0-K02

X0

1NO/1NC

C22-DRH-S-X0-K11

C22S-DRH-S-X0-K11

—

1NO

C22-DRH-W-K10

C22S-DRH-W-K10

—

2NO

C22-DRH-W-K20

C22S-DRH-W-K20

—

1NO/1NC

C22-DRH-W-K11

C22S-DRH-W-K11

X1

1NO

C22-DRH-W-X1-K10

C22S-DRH-W-X1-K10

X1

2NO

C22-DRH-W-X1-K20

C22S-DRH-W-X1-K20

X1

1NO/1NC

C22-DRH-W-X1-K11

C22S-DRH-W-X1-K11

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-129

Tab37book.fm Page 130 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Illuminated Pushbuttons

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

C22 - DL - G - X1 - K10 - 24

37
37
37

Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S = Black

37

DL =
DRL =
DHL =
DRHL =

Operator Type
Illuminated, flush, momentary
Illuminated, flush, maintained
Illuminated, extended, momentary
Illuminated, extended, maintained

37
37

LED/Lens Colour
G = Green
R = Red
W = White
B = Blue
XG = Green without lens
XR = Red without lens
XW = White without lens
XB = Blue without lens

Lens Etching
X0 =
X1 =

Contact Blocks
K10 = 1NO
K01 = 1NC

LED Voltage
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
120 = 120 Vac
230 = 230 Vac

Product Selection

37

Illuminated, Flush, Momentary

37

C22(S)-DL-_

37

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
LED Colour

Button
Colour

Green

Green

Voltage

Button
Etching

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DL-G-K10-24

C22S-DL-G-K10-24

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-G-K10-120

C22S-DL-G-K10-120

37

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-G-K10-230

C22S-DL-G-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

X1

1NO

C22-DL-G-X1-K10-24

C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-24

37

120 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DL-G-X1-K10-120

C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-120

230 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DL-G-X1-K10-230

C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DL-XG-K10-24

C22S-DL-XG-K10-24

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-XG-K10-120

C22S-DL-XG-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-XG-K10-230

C22S-DL-XG-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NC

C22-DL-R-K01-24

C22S-DL-R-K01-24

120 Vac

—

1NC

C22-DL-R-K01-120

C22S-DL-R-K01-120

230 Vac

—

1NC

C22-DL-R-K01-230

C22S-DL-R-K01-230

24 Vac/Vdc

X0

1NC

C22-DL-R-X0-K01-24

C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-24

120 Vac

X0

1NC

C22-DL-R-X0-K01-120

C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-120

230 Vac

X0

1NC

C22-DL-R-X0-K01-230

C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-230

37

37

Buttonless

37
37

Red

Red

37
37
37

Buttonless

37
37

White

White

37
37
37
Buttonless

37
37

Blue

Blue

37
37

Buttonless

37
T37-130

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NC

C22-DL-XR-K01-24

C22S-DL-XR-K01-24

120 Vac

—

1NC

C22-DL-XR-K01-120

C22S-DL-XR-K01-120

230 Vac

—

1NC

C22-DL-XR-K01-230

C22S-DL-XR-K01-230

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DL-W-K10-24

C22S-DL-W-K10-24

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-W-K10-120

C22S-DL-W-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-W-K10-230

C22S-DL-W-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

X1

1NO

C22-DL-W-X1-K10-24

C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-24

120 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DL-W-X1-K10-120

C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-120

230 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DL-W-X1-K10-230

C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DL-XW-K10-24

C22S-DL-XW-K10-24
C22S-DL-XW-K10-120

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-XW-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-XW-K10-230

C22S-DL-XW-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DL-B-K10-24

C22S-DL-B-K10-24

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-B-K10-120

C22S-DL-B-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-B-K10-230

C22S-DL-B-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DL-XB-K10-24

C22S-DL-XB-K10-24

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-XB-K10-120

C22S-DL-XB-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DL-XB-K10-230

C22S-DL-XB-K10-230

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 131 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37.5

Illuminated, Flush, Maintained
C22(S)-DRL-_

37

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
LED Colour

Button
Colour

Voltage

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

Green

Green

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

C22-DRL-G-K10-24

C22S-DRL-G-K10-24

120 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-G-K10-120

C22S-DRL-G-K10-120

230 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-G-K10-230

C22S-DRL-G-K10-230

Buttonless

Red

Red

Buttonless

White

White

Buttonless

Blue

Blue

Buttonless

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

C22-DRL-XG-K10-24

C22S-DRL-XG-K10-24

120 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-XG-K10-120

C22S-DRL-XG-K10-120

230 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-XG-K10-230

C22S-DRL-XG-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC

C22-DRL-R-K01-24

C22S-DRL-R-K01-24

120 Vac

1NC

C22-DRL-R-K01-120

C22S-DRL-R-K01-120

230 Vac

1NC

C22-DRL-R-K01-230

C22S-DRL-R-K01-230

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC

C22-DRL-XR-K01-24

C22S-DRL-XR-K01-24

120 Vac

1NC

C22-DRL-XR-K01-120

C22S-DRL-XR-K01-120

230 Vac

1NC

C22-DRL-XR-K01-230

C22S-DRL-XR-K01-230

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

C22-DRL-W-K10-24

C22S-DRL-W-K10-24

120 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-W-K10-120

C22S-DRL-W-K10-120

230 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-W-K10-230

C22S-DRL-W-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

C22-DRL-XW-K10-24

C22S-DRL-XW-K10-24

120 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-XW-K10-120

C22S-DRL-XW-K10-120

230 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-XW-K10-230

C22S-DRL-XW-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

C22-DRL-B-K10-24

C22S-DRL-B-K10-24

120 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-B-K10-120

C22S-DRL-B-K10-120

230 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-B-K10-230

C22S-DRL-B-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

C22-DRL-XB-K10-24

C22S-DRL-XB-K10-24

120 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-XB-K10-120

C22S-DRL-XB-K10-120

230 Vac

1NO

C22-DRL-XB-K10-230

C22S-DRL-XB-K10-230

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-131

Tab37book.fm Page 132 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Illuminated, Extended, Momentary
C22(S)-DLH-_

37

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
LED Colour

Button
Colour

Green

Green

Voltage

Button
Etching

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DLH-G-K10-24

C22S-DLH-G-K10-24

37

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DLH-G-K10-120

C22S-DLH-G-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DLH-G-K10-230

C22S-DLH-G-K10-230

37

24 Vac/Vdc

X1

1NO

C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-24

C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-24

120 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-120

C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-12

37

230 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-230

C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-23

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NC

C22-DLH-R-K01-24

C22S-DLH-R-K01-24

120 Vac

—

1NC

C22-DLH-R-K01-120

C22S-DLH-R-K01-120

37

230 Vac

—

1NC

C22-DLH-R-K01-230

C22S-DLH-R-K01-230

24 Vac/Vdc

X0

1NC

C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-24

C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-24

37

120 Vac

X0

1NC

C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-120

C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-12

230 Vac

X0

1NC

C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-230

C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-23

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DLH-W-K10-24

C22S-DLH-W-K10-24

Red

37

37

White

Red

White

37
37
37
Blue

37
37

Blue

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DLH-W-K10-120

C22S-DLH-W-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DLH-W-K10-230

C22S-DLH-W-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

X1

1NO

C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-24

C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-24

120 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-120

C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-12

230 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-230

C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-23

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DLH-B-K10-24

C22S-DLH-B-K10-24

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DLH-B-K10-120

C22S-DLH-B-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DLH-B-K10-230

C22S-DLH-B-K10-230

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-132

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 133 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37.5

Illuminated, Extended, Maintained
C22(S)-DRLH-_

37

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
LED Colour

Button
Colour

Voltage

Button
Etching

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

Green

Green

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DRLH-G-K10-24

C22S-DRLH-G-K10-24

Red

White

Blue

Red

White

Blue

37
37

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DRLH-G-K10-120

C22S-DRLH-G-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DRLH-G-K10-230

C22S-DRLH-G-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

X1

1NO

C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-24

C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-24

120 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-120

C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-120

230 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-230

C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NC

C22-DRLH-R-K01-24

C22S-DRLH-R-K01-24

120 Vac

—

1NC

C22-DRLH-R-K01-120

C22S-DRLH-R-K01-120

37
37
37
37

230 Vac

—

1NC

C22-DRLH-R-K01-230

C22S-DRLH-R-K01-230

24 Vac/Vdc

X0

1NC

C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-24

C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-24

120 Vac

X0

1NC

C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-120

C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-120

230 Vac

X0

1NC

C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-230

C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-230

37
37
37

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DRLH-W-K10-24

C22S-DRLH-W-K10-24

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DRLH-W-K10-120

C22S-DRLH-W-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DRLH-W-K10-230

C22S-DRLH-W-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

X1

1NO

C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-24

C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-24

120 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-120

C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-120

230 Vac

X1

1NO

C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-230

C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-230

24 Vac/Vdc

—

1NO

C22-DRLH-B-K10-24

C22S-DRLH-B-K10-24

120 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DRLH-B-K10-120

C22S-DRLH-B-K10-120

230 Vac

—

1NO

C22-DRLH-B-K10-230

C22S-DRLH-B-K10-230

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-133

Tab37book.fm Page 134 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Contents

Indicating Lights

Description

37

Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Lights
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Indicating Lights

37

Product Description

Features

C22 indicating lights use a
combination of a durable,
bright LED unit and modern
lenses designed specifically
for this type of LED to create
a bright and visible indicating
light. As with the
pushbuttons, the indicating
light lenses can be laser
etched, simply order without
lens and order M22/C22
custom etched lenses
to attach.

●

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

●

●

LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
Lenses specifically
designed for LED
illumination
Lenses capable of being
laser etched for custom
solutions that last

Protection Type
●
IP67/IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13

Note: For additional accessories,
please see section 37.4 Modular
Pushbuttons—M22 of this
catalogue.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-134

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Page
T37-125
T37-135
T37-135
T37-136
T37-139
T37-144
T37-146

Tab37book.fm Page 135 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37.5

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Indicating Lights

C22 - L - G - 24

37
37

Bezel
C22-L = Flush indicating light

G=
R=
W=
Y=
B=
XG =
XR =
XW =
XB =

LED/Lens Colour
Green
Red
White
Yellow
Blue
Green without lens
Red without lens
White without lens 
Blue without lens

LED Voltage
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
120 = 120 Vac
230 = 230 Vac

37
37
37
37
37

Product Selection

37

Indicating Lights
C22-L-_

37

Indicating Lights
Lens Colour

LED Colour

Voltage

Catalogue Number

Green

Green

24 Vac/Vdc

C22-L-G-24

120 Vac

C22-L-G-120

230 Vac

C22-L-G-230

Red

White

Yellow

Blue

Without Lens

Red

White

White

Blue

Green

Red

White

Blue

24 Vac/Vdc

C22-L-R-24

120 Vac

C22-L-R-120

230 Vac

C22-L-R-230

24 Vac/Vdc

C22-L-W-24

120 Vac

C22-L-W-120

230 Vac

C22-L-W-230

24 Vac/Vdc

C22-L-Y-24

120 Vac

C22-L-Y-120

230 Vac

C22-L-Y-230

24 Vac/Vdc

C22-L-B-24

120 Vac

C22-L-B-120

230 Vac

C22-L-B-230

24 Vac/Vdc

C22-L-XG-24

120 Vac

C22-L-XG-120

230 Vac

C22-L-XG-230

24 Vac/Vdc

C22-L-XR-24

120 Vac

C22-L-XR-120

230 Vac

C22-L-XR-230

24 Vac/Vdc

C22-L-XW-24

120 Vac

C22-L-XW-120

230 Vac

C22-L-XW-230

24 Vac/Vdc

C22-L-XB-24

120 Vac

C22-L-XB-120

230 Vac

C22-L-XB-230

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note
 Use white LED for both white and yellow lenses.

37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-135

Tab37book.fm Page 136 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Contents

Emergency Stops

Description

37

Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops
Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Emergency Stops

37

Product Description

Features

C22 emergency stops are a
durable and reliable solution
to a variety of e-stop
applications. This compact
e-stop, available as twist-torelease and keyed-release,
is a simple product that
eliminates the need for selfmonitoring contact blocks,
all while still meeting almost
all of the industry safety
standards.

●

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Available in both twistrelease and keyed-release
with either 45 mm or
60 mm operators

Protection Type
●
Twist-Release
●
IP67/IP69K
●

Keyed-Release
●
IP66

●

NEMA 4X, 13

Note: For additional accessories,
please see section 37.4 Modular
Pushbuttons—M22 of this
catalogue.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-136

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Page
T37-125
T37-134
T37-137
T37-137
T37-139
T37-144
T37-146

Tab37book.fm Page 137 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37.5

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Emergency Stops

C22 - PVS45P - MS1 - K01
Operator Type
PVT45P = Twist-release, 45 mm
PVT60P = Twist-release, 60 mm
PVS45P = Key-release, 45 mm
PVS60P = Key-release, 60 mm

MS1 =
MS2 =
MS3 =
MS4 =
MS5 =
MS6 =
MS7 =
MS8 =
RS =

Key Code
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
Ronis-445

37
37

Contact Blocks
K02 = 2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC

37
37
37
37

Product Selection

37

Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release
C22-PVT_

37

Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Twist-Release
Release Method

Operator Size

Twist-release

45 mm

60 mm

37

Contact Block
Configuration

Catalogue Number

2NC

C22-PVT45P-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVT45P-K11

2NC

C22-PVT60P-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVT60P-K11

37
37
37
37

Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release
C22-PVS_

37

Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Keyed-Release
Release Method

Operator Size

Key Code

Keyed-release

45 mm

MS1

MS2

MS3

MS4

MS5

MS6

MS7

MS8

Ronis

Contact Block
Configuration

Catalogue Number

2NC

C22-PVS45P-MS1-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS45P-MS1-K11

2NC

C22-PVS45P-MS2-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS45P-MS2-K11

2NC

C22-PVS45P-MS3-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS45P-MS3-K11

2NC

C22-PVS45P-MS4-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS45P-MS4-K11

2NC

C22-PVS45P-MS5-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS45P-MS5-K11

2NC

C22-PVS45P-MS6-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS45P-MS6-K11

2NC

C22-PVS45P-MS7-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS45P-MS7-K11

2NC

C22-PVS45P-MS8-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS45P-MS8-K11

2NC

C22-PVS45P-RS-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS45P-RS-K11

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-137

Tab37book.fm Page 138 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5
37

C22-PVS_

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Keyed-Release, continued
Release Method

Operator Size

Key Code

Contact Block
Configuration

Catalogue Number

Keyed-release

60 mm

MS1

2NC

C22-PVS60P-MS1-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS60P-MS1-K11

2NC

C22-PVS60P-MS2-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS60P-MS2-K11

2NC

C22-PVS60P-MS3-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS60P-MS3-K11

2NC

C22-PVS60P-MS4-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS60P-MS4-K11

2NC

C22-PVS60P-MS5-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS60P-MS5-K11

2NC

C22-PVS60P-MS6-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS60P-MS6-K11

2NC

C22-PVS60P-MS7-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS60P-MS7-K11

2NC

C22-PVS60P-MS8-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS60P-MS8-K11

2NC

C22-PVS60P-RS-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-PVS60P-RS-K11

37
MS2

37
MS3

37
37

MS4

37

MS5

37

MS6

37

MS7

37

MS8

37
Ronis

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-138

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 139 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37.5

Contents

Selector Switches

Description
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated, Knob Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page
T37-125
T37-134
T37-136

37
37
37
37

T37-140
T37-141
T37-144
T37-146

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Selector Switches
Product Description

Features

With over 20 variations of
operation and 8 varieties of
key codes, the C22 line offers
a very complete line of
selector switches.

●

Note: For additional accessories,
please see section 37.4 Modular
Pushbuttons—M22 of this
catalogue.

●

37

Selector switch (nonkeyed) rated for 1 million
mechanical operations
Momentary selector
switches are field
convertible from
momentary to maintained

Protection Type
●
IP65
●
NEMA 4X, 13

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-139

Tab37book.fm Page 140 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Selector Switches—Non-Keyed

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

C22 - WK - K10

37
37

Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S = Black

37

WK =
WKV =
WRK =
WRKV =
WK3 =
WRK3 =

37
37
37
37
37

Operator Type
2-position, momentary
2-position, momentary, “V” position
2-position, maintained
2-position, maintained, “V” position
3-position, momentary
3-position, maintained

Contact Blocks
K10 = 1NO
K20 = 2NO
K01 = 1NC
K02 = 2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC

Product Selection
Non-Illuminated, Knob Type
C22(S)-WK-_/
C22(S)-WRK_

37

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Knob Type
Type

Switching
Position

Two-position

Momentary
40˚

37
37
37

Momentary
60˚

37
37
37

Maintained
40˚

37
37
Maintained

37

60˚

37
37
Three-position

37

Momentary
40˚

37

40˚

Maintained

37

60˚

37

60˚

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

1NO

C22-WK-K10

C22S-WK-K10

2NO

C22-WK-K20

C22S-WK-K20

1NC

C22-WK-K01

C22S-WK-K01

2NC

C22-WK-K02

C22S-WK-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WK-K11

C22S-WK-K11

1NO

C22-WKV-K10

C22S-WKV-K10

2NO

C22-WKV-K20

C22S-WKV-K20

1NC

C22-WKV-K01

C22S-WKV-K01

2NC

C22-WKV-K02

C22S-WKV-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WKV-K11

C22S-WKV-K11

1NO

C22-WRK-K10

C22S-WRK-K10

2NO

C22-WRK-K20

C22S-WRK-K20

1NC

C22-WRK-K01

C22S-WRK-K01

2NC

C22-WRK-K02

C22S-WRK-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WRK-K11

C22S-WRK-K11

1NO

C22-WRKV-K10

C22S-WRKV-K10

2NO

C22-WRKV-K20

C22S-WRKV-K20

1NC

C22-WRKV-K01

C22S-WRKV-K01

2NC

C22-WRKV-K02

C22S-WRKV-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WRKV-K11

C22S-WRKV-K11

2NO

C22-WK3-K20

C22S-WK3-K20

2NC

C22-WK3-K02

C22S-WK3-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WK3-K11

C22S-WK3-K11

2NO

C22-WRK3-K20

C22S-WRK3-K20

2NC

C22-WRK3-K02

C22S-WRK3-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WRK3-K11

C22S-WRK3-K11

Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.

37
37
37
37
T37-140

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 141 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37.5

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Selector Switches—Keyed

C22 - WS - MS1 - A1 - K10

37



Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S = Black

Operator Type
WS
= 2-position, momentary
WRS
= 2-position, maintained
WRS-…-A1 = 2-position, maintained,

key removal left
WS3
= 3-position, momentary
WRS3
= 3-position, maintained

Key Code
MS1 = MS1
MS2 = MS2
MS3 = MS3
MS4 = MS4
MS5 = MS5
MS6 = MS6
MS7 = MS7
MS8 = MS8

37

Contact Blocks
K10 = 1NO
K20 = 2NO
K01 = 1NC
K02 = 2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC

37
37
37
37

Non-Illuminated, Key Operated
C22(S)-WS-MS_

37

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated
Position

Type

Key Code

Two-position

Momentary
key removal left

MS1

40˚

MS2

MS3

MS4

MS5

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

1NO

C22-WS-MS1-K10

C22S-WS-MS1-K10

2NO

C22-WS-MS1-K20

C22S-WS-MS1-K20

1NC

C22-WS-MS1-K01

C22S-WS-MS1-K01

2NC

C22-WS-MS1-K02

C22S-WS-MS1-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WS-MS1-K11

C22S-WS-MS1-K11

1NO

C22-WS-MS2-K10

C22S-WS-MS2-K10

2NO

C22-WS-MS2-K20

C22S-WS-MS2-K20

1NC

C22-WS-MS2-K01

C22S-WS-MS2-K01

2NC

C22-WS-MS2-K02

C22S-WS-MS2-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WS-MS2-K11

C22S-WS-MS2-K11

1NO

C22-WS-MS3-K10

C22S-WS-MS3-K10

2NO

C22-WS-MS3-K20

C22S-WS-MS3-K20

1NC

C22-WS-MS3-K01

C22S-WS-MS3-K01

2NC

C22-WS-MS3-K02

C22S-WS-MS3-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WS-MS3-K11

C22S-WS-MS3-K11

1NO

C22-WS-MS4-K10

C22S-WS-MS4-K10

2NO

C22-WS-MS4-K20

C22S-WS-MS4-K20

1NC

C22-WS-MS4-K01

C22S-WS-MS4-K01

2NC

C22-WS-MS4-K02

C22S-WS-MS4-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WS-MS4-K11

C22S-WS-MS4-K11

1NO

C22-WS-MS5-K10

C22S-WS-MS5-K10

2NO

C22-WS-MS5-K20

C22S-WS-MS5-K20

1NC

C22-WS-MS5-K01

C22S-WS-MS5-K01

2NC

C22-WS-MS5-K02

C22S-WS-MS5-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WS-MS5-K11

C22S-WS-MS5-K11

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.

37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-141

Tab37book.fm Page 142 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5
37

C22(S)-WRS-MS_

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, continued
Position

Type

Key Code

Two-position,
continued

Momentary
key removal left

MS6

40˚

37

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

1NO

C22-WS-MS6-K10

C22S-WS-MS6-K10

2NO

C22-WS-MS6-K20

C22S-WS-MS6-K20

1NC

C22-WS-MS6-K01

C22S-WS-MS6-K01

2NC

C22-WS-MS6-K02

C22S-WS-MS6-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WS-MS6-K11

C22S-WS-MS6-K11

1NO

C22-WS-MS7-K10

C22S-WS-MS7-K10

37

2NO

C22-WS-MS7-K20

C22S-WS-MS7-K20

1NC

C22-WS-MS7-K01

C22S-WS-MS7-K01

37

2NC

C22-WS-MS7-K02

C22S-WS-MS7-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WS-MS7-K11

C22S-WS-MS7-K11

1NO

C22-WS-MS8-K10

C22S-WS-MS8-K10

2NO

C22-WS-MS8-K20

C22S-WS-MS8-K20

1NC

C22-WS-MS8-K01

C22S-WS-MS8-K01

2NC

C22-WS-MS8-K02

C22S-WS-MS8-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WS-MS8-K11

C22S-WS-MS8-K11

1NO

C22-WRS-MS1-K10

C22S-WRS-MS1-K10

2NO

C22-WRS-MS1-K20

C22S-WRS-MS1-K20

1NC

C22-WRS-MS1-K01

C22S-WRS-MS1-K01

2NC

C22-WRS-MS1-K02

C22S-WRS-MS1-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WRS-MS1-K11

C22S-WRS-MS1-K11

37

MS7

37

MS8

37
37
37

Two-position

Maintained
key removal left/right

MS1

40˚

37
37
37

MS2

37
37
MS3

37
37
37

1NO

C22-WRS-MS2-K10

C22S-WRS-MS2-K10

2NO

C22-WRS-MS2-K20

C22S-WRS-MS2-K20

1NC

C22-WRS-MS2-K01

C22S-WRS-MS2-K01

2NC

C22-WRS-MS2-K02

C22S-WRS-MS2-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WRS-MS2-K11

C22S-WRS-MS2-K11

1NO

C22-WRS-MS3-K10

C22S-WRS-MS3-K10

2NO

C22-WRS-MS3-K20

C22S-WRS-MS3-K20

1NC

C22-WRS-MS3-K01

C22S-WRS-MS3-K01

2NC

C22-WRS-MS3-K02

C22S-WRS-MS3-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WRS-MS3-K11

C22S-WRS-MS3-K11

Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-142

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 143 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

C22(S)-WRS…-MS1_

37.5

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, continued
Position

Type

Key Code

Contact Block
Configuration

Silver Bezel
Catalogue Number

Black Bezel
Catalogue Number

Two-position,
continued

Maintained
key removal left/right

MS4

1NO

C22-WRS-MS4-K10

C22S-WRS-MS4-K10

2NO

C22-WRS-MS4-K20

C22S-WRS-MS4-K20

1NC

C22-WRS-MS4-K01

C22S-WRS-MS4-K01

2NC

C22-WRS-MS4-K02

C22S-WRS-MS4-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WRS-MS4-K11

C22S-WRS-MS4-K11

1NO

C22-WRS-MS5-K10

C22S-WRS-MS5-K10

2NO

C22-WRS-MS5-K20

C22S-WRS-MS5-K20

1NC

C22-WRS-MS5-K01

C22S-WRS-MS5-K01

2NC

C22-WRS-MS5-K02

C22S-WRS-MS5-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WRS-MS5-K11

C22S-WRS-MS5-K11

40˚

MS5

MS6

MS7

MS8

Two-position

Maintained
key removal left

MS1

40˚

Three Position

Momentary
Key Removal Centre
40˚

MS1

40˚

Maintained
MS1
Key Removal Left/Right
60˚

60˚

1NO

C22-WRS-MS6-K10

C22S-WRS-MS6-K10

2NO

C22-WRS-MS6-K20

C22S-WRS-MS6-K20

1NC

C22-WRS-MS6-K01

C22S-WRS-MS6-K01

2NC

C22-WRS-MS6-K02

C22S-WRS-MS6-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WRS-MS6-K11

C22S-WRS-MS6-K11

1NO

C22-WRS-MS7-K10

C22S-WRS-MS7-K10

2NO

C22-WRS-MS7-K20

C22S-WRS-MS7-K20

1NC

C22-WRS-MS7-K01

C22S-WRS-MS7-K01

2NC

C22-WRS-MS7-K02

C22S-WRS-MS7-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WRS-MS7-K11

C22S-WRS-MS7-K11

1NO

C22-WRS-MS7-K10

C22S-WRS-MS7-K10

2NO

C22-WRS-MS7-K20

C22S-WRS-MS7-K20

1NC

C22-WRS-MS7-K01

C22S-WRS-MS7-K01

2NC

C22-WRS-MS7-K02

C22S-WRS-MS7-K02

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

1NO/1NC

C22-WRS-MS7-K11

C22S-WRS-MS7-K11

1NO

C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K10

C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K10

2NO

C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K20

C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K20

1NC

C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K01

C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K01

2NC

C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K02

C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K02

37
37
37

1NO/1NC

C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K11

C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K11

2NO

C22-WS3-MS1-K20

C22S-WS3-MS1-K20

2NC

C22-WS3-MS1-K02

C22S-WS3-MS1-K02

1NO/1NC

C22-WS3-MS1-K11

C22S-WS3-MS1-K11

37

2NO

C22-WRS3-MS1-K20

C22S-WRS3-MS1-K20

2NC

C22-WRS3-MS1-K02

C22S-WRS3-MS1-K02

37

1NO/1NC

C22-WRS3-MS1-K11

C22S-WRS3-MS1-K11

37

37
37

Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.

37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-143

Tab37book.fm Page 144 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37

Technical Data and Specifications

37

22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37

Description

Unit

37

General

37

Lifespan, mechanical

Operations

Operating frequency

Operations/h

37

Pushbutton Actuators
Illuminated Pushbuttons C22
Momentary
Maintained

Indicator
Lights C22

5

1

—

1

0.1

0.05

>3600

>3600

—

>2000

>100

>300

Standards

Selector Switch
Actuators C22

Key-Operated
Buttons C22

Emergency Stop/
Emergency Switching
OFF Pushbuttons C22

IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660
x 106

Actuating force

N

>5

>5

—

—

—

>50

37

Operating torque

Nm

—

—

—

>0.3

>0.5

—

Terminal screw tightening torque

Nm

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

37

Threaded ring tightening torque

Nm

2

2

2

2

2

2

IP67, IP69K

IP67, IP69K

IP67, IP69K

IP65

IP66

IP67, IP69K

Protection type

37

Climatic proofing

37

Ambient temperature

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60068-2-30

Open

˚C

–25˚ to 70˚

–25˚ to 70˚

–25˚ to 70˚

–25˚ to 70˚

–25˚ to 70˚

–25˚ to 70˚

Storage

˚C

–30˚ to 80˚

–30˚ to 80˚

–30˚ to 80˚

–30˚ to 80˚

–30˚ to 80˚

–30˚ to 80˚

As required

As required

As required

As required

As required

As required

g

30

30

30

30

30

30

Solid

mm2

2 x 0.5–1.5

2 x 0.5–1.5

2 x 0.5–1.5

2 x 0.5–1.5

2 x 0.5–1.5

2 x 0.5–1.5

Flexible with ferrule

mm2

2 x 0.5–1.5

2 x 0.5–1.5

2 x 0.5–1.5

2 x 0.5–1.5

2 x 0.5–1.5

2 x 0.5–1.5

Mounting position
Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27 Shock duration
11 ms, half-sinusoidal
Terminal capacities

Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage

Uimp

Vac

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

Rated insulation voltage

Ui

V

250

250

250

250

250

250

III/3

III/3

III/3

III/3

III/3

III/3

Values follow

—

Values follow

Values follow

Values follow

Overvoltage category/pollution
degree
Control circuit reliability
at 5 Vdc/1 mA

HF

Fault
probability

Values follow

at 17 Vdc/7 mA

HF

Fault
probability

N/O contact: statistically determined —
1 failure per 17 x 106 operations
N/C contact: statistically determined
1 failure per 0.9 x 106 operations

at 24 Vdc/5 mA

HF

Fault
probability

Values follow

Values follow

—

Values follow

Values follow

Values follow

gG/gL

A

10

10

—

10

10

10

N/O contact: statistically determined 1 failure per
17 x 106 operations
N/C contact: statistically determined 1 failure per
0.9 x 106 operations

Max. short-circuit protective device
Fuse

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-144

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 145 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22, continued

Description

Push-button Actuators
Illuminated Pushbuttons C22
Momentary
Maintained

Unit

Indicator
Lights C22

Selector Switch
Actuators C22

Key-Operated
Buttons C22

Emergency Stop/
Emergency Switching
OFF Pushbuttons C22

Switching Capacity

37

AC-15
24V

Ie

A

4

4

—

4

4

4

110V

Ie

230V

Ie

A

2

2

—

2

2

2

A

1.5

1.5

—

1.5

1.5

1.5

24V

Ie

A

3

3

—

3

3

3

60V

Ie

A

1

1

—

1

1

1

110V

Ie

A

0.6

0.6

—

0.6

0.6

0.6

220V

Ie

A

0.3

0.3

—

0.3

0.3

0.3

Operations

x 106

0.4

0.4

—

0.4

0.4

0.4

x 106

0.6

0.6

—

0.6

0.6

0.6

37
37

DC-13

37
37
37

Lifespan, electrical
AC-15
230V/0.5A
230V/1.0A

37
37
37

Contact Travel

37

Contact Travel Diagram
3

37
0

3.15

37

5.5

37

1

2

37
37

Rated operational current

4

37

0

2.2

37

5.5

Contact closed

37

Contact open

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-145

Tab37book.fm Page 146 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37

Dimensions

37

Illuminated Pushbuttons

37

Flat

Extended

C22(S)-DRL_/C22(S)-DL_

C22(S)-DRLH_/C22(S)-DLH_

37

Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]

37

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

37
37

Ø29.7
[1.17]

37
37

10.4
[0.41]

37
37
37

6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]

9.6
[0.38]

6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
M22 x 1.5

20.2
[0.80]

Ø29.5
[1.16]

Ø29.7
[1.17]

16.7
[0.66]

54.6 [2.15]

20.2
[0.80]

Extended

C22(S)-DR_/C22(S)-D_

C22(S)-DRH_/C22(S)-DH_

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

37
37

6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]

Ø29.7
[1.17]

9.6
[0.38]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
M22 x 1.5

20.2
[0.80]

Ø29.5
[1.16]

6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]

Ø29.7
[1.17]

10.4
[0.41]

37

16.7
[0.66]

54.6 [2.15]

Indicating Lights
Flat
C22-L_

37
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

37

6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]

9.6
[0.38]

M22 x 1.5

37
Ø29.7
[1.17]

37

Ø20.2
[0.80]

Ø29.5
[1.16]

37
11.7
[0.46]

37

55.9 [2.20]

37
37
37
T37-146

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

9.6
[0.38]

M22 x 1.5

20.2
[0.80]

37

37

Ø29.5
[1.16]

60.9 [2.40]

Flat

37

37

M22 x 1.5

Pushbutton Actuators

37

37

9.6
[0.38]

60.9 [2.40]

Ø29.5
[1.16]

Tab37book.fm Page 147 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

37.5

Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]

37

Emergency Stop/Emergency Switching OFF Pushbuttons
C22-PVT45P_

37

C22-PVT60P_

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

6.0
[0.24]

9.3
[0.37]

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

4.0
[0.16]

Ø45.0
[1.77]
48.0
[1.89]

45.0
[1.77]

37

9.3
[0.37]

37

4.0
[0.16]

37

Ø60.0
[2.36]

Ø29.5
[1.16]
Ø20.4
[0.80]

6.0
[0.24]

Ø29.5
[1.16]

M22 x 1.5
48.0
[1.89]

93.0 [3.66]

45.0
[1.77]

Ø20.4
[0.80]
M22 x 1.5

37

C22-PVT45P-RS_
9.3
[0.37]

6.0
[0.24]

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

4.0
[0.16]

Ø45.0
[1.17]

Ø29.5
[1.16]
48.0
[1.89]
75.0 [2.95]
120.0 [4.72]

45.0
[1.77]

Ø20.4
[0.80]

6.0
[0.24]

37

9.3
[0.37]
4.0
[0.16]

Ø45.0
[1.77]

Ø29.5
[1.16]
48.0
[1.89]

M22 x 1.5

Ø20.4
[0.80]
45.0
[1.77]

37
37

9.3
[0.37]

37

4.0
[0.16]

37

Ø29.5
[1.16]
48.0
[1.89]

45.0
[1.77]

37
37

C22-PVT60P-MS_

Ø60.0
[2.36]

37
37

71.0 [2.80]

6.0
[0.24]

37

M22 x 1.5

116.0 [4.57]

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

37
37

92.0 [3.62]

C22-PVT45P-MS_

37

37

Ø20.4
[0.80]
M22 x 1.5

37
37

75.0 [2.95]
120.0 [4.72]

37

C22-PVT60P-MS_
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

6.0
[0.24]

37

9.3
[0.37]

37

4.0
[0.16]

Ø60.0
[2.36]

37

Ø29.5
[1.16]
48.0
[1.89]

45.0
[1.77]

37

Ø20.4
[0.80]
M22 x 1.5

37
37

71.0 [2.80]
116.0 [4.57]

37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-147

Tab37book.fm Page 148 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.5
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]

Selector Switch Actuators

37
37

Selector Switch Actuators/V Position
C22(S)-W(R)K_

C22(S)-W(R)KV_

37
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

37

9.6
[0.38]

6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]

30°

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

M22 x 1.5

6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]

9.6
[0.38]

M22 x 1.5

37
Ø29.7
[1.17]

37

20.2
[0.80]

Ø29.5
[1.16]

Ø29.7
[1.17]

20.2
[0.80]

37
27.8
[1.09]

37

27.8
[1.09]

72.0 [2.83]

37
37

Key Operated Actuators
C22(S)-WS(3)-MS_/C22(S)-WRS(3)-MS_

37
37

6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

37
37

Ø29.7
[1.17]

9.6
[0.38]

M22 x 1.5

20.2
[0.80]

Ø29.5
[1.16]

37
20.8
[0.82]

37

44.2 [1.74]

47.9 [1.89]

37
37

92.1 [3.63]

C22(S)-WS(3)-RS_/C22(S)-WRS(3)-RS_

37
37

1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]

37
37

6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]

Ø29.7
[1.17]

37

M22 x 1.5

20.2
[0.80]
24.9
[0.98]

37

9.6
[0.38]

Ø29.5
[1.16]

44.2 [1.74]

47.9 [1.89]

37

92.1 [3.63]

37
37
37
37
T37-148

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

72.0 [2.83]

Ø29.5
[1.16]

Tab37book.fm Page 149 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

37.6

Contents

30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Description

Page

30.5 mm Square Multifunction
Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
37

T37-150

37

T37-151
T37-154
T37-160
T37-161
T37-164
T37-165
T37-166

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Features

The E30 industrial pushbutton
and indicating light line from
Eaton’s electrical sector
features a wide selection of
square, multifunction
operators which conveniently
mount in a standard 30.5 mm
(1-13/64 in) diameter panel
hole. Up to six input and
indicating functions can be
grouped into a single
operating head, saving
valuable panel space.
Attractive square operator
styling, coupled with custom
legending of colored buttons
and lenses and many special
function accessories, makes
E30 components ideally
suited for use on control
consoles and for a variety of
industrial OEM applications.

Type E30 control units consist
of a basic operator with one
or more buttons and lenses
and contact block selection
dependent on the specific
operator configuration.
●

●

●

37

Standards and
Certifications

Product Description

Pushbutton operators
will accommodate up to
four single depth stackable
contact blocks behind each
operating button, up to
eight circuits maximum.
Indicating lights are
supplied complete with
either a transformer light
unit up to 600 Vac supply
line voltage or full voltage
light unit up to 120 Vac/Vdc
supply line voltage.
Combination pushbutton
with indicating light
operators are supplied
complete with a
transformer or full voltage
unit. Contact blocks must
be ordered separately, up to
four circuits maximum.

Die Cast Construction
Each operator has high
pressure type seals to
prevent the passage of oil
and other contaminants
through the operator into the
contact structure or panel
interior. Each operator uses a
Buna N cork gasket between
the mounting flange on the
operator and the panel to
maintain oiltightness.

●

●

UL Listed—File No.
E131568
CSA Certified—File No.
LR68551

37
37
37
37

Ingress Protection
●

●

Single and dual indicating
lights
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
All other operators
●
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
4, 4X, 12, 13

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-149

Tab37book.fm Page 150 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Product Identification
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
Multifunction Operator
(see Pages T37-151 to T37-153)

Upper Contact Block
Operating Plunger

37

Quarter Turn Screw—
Mounts Locking Ring to Operator

Gasket

Single Circuit
Contact Block

37
37
37
37
37

Buttons and Lenses Supplied
Blank or with Custom
Legend(s)
(see Pages T37-154 to
T37-158)

37

Retaining Nut
Secures Operator
to Panel
Lower Contact
Block Operating
Plunger

Locking Ring—Supplied with
Operator—Serves as Mount
for Light Element and
Contact Blocks

Transformer or
Full Voltage Light
Element—Supplied
with Operator

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-150

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Two Circuit
Contact Block

Tab37book.fm Page 151 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

37.6

Product Selection

37

Operators

37
When Ordering a Complete E30 Control Unit Specify
Catalogue Number of …

37

Ordering Example (E30AB)

Operator

E30KB130

“START”

Button(s)

E30KB231

“STOP”

Contact block(s)

E30KLA1

1NO

Accessories (if required)

E30KLA2

1NC

37
37
37
37

Square Multifunction Operators
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37
Single Button Operator

Single Button Operator/without Button (Order Button Separately)
Button Type
Required 

37
Operation

Special Features

Catalogue Number

Momentary

—

E30AA

37
37

Shown with
Extended Button

Two Button Operator

37
Button Types
Required 

Shown with
Extended Buttons

Two Button Operator

Operation
Top Button

Bottom Button

Special Features

Catalogue Number

Momentary

Momentary

—

E30AB

Momentary

Momentary

With mechanical
interlock

E30AC

Maintained
(all contacts)

Release
(all contacts)

—

E30AD 

Maintained
(all contacts)

Release
(all contacts)

With mechanical
interlock

E30AP 

37
37
37
37
37
37

Two Button Operator with Long (OFF) Release Bar—Includes OFF Bar/Button
(Order Other Buttons Separately)
Button Types
Required 

Shown with Long
Release Bar

37

Two Button Operator/without Buttons (Order Buttons Separately)

Operation
Top Button

Bottom Button

Special Features

Catalogue Number

Maintained

Maintained

—

E30AF

Maintained

Maintained

With mechanical
interlock

E30AG

Maintained

Momentary

With mechanical
interlock

E30AH

Maintained
(all contacts)

Maintained
(bottom contacts only)

Top button operates
both top and
bottom contacts

E30AK 

37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 Order from table on Page T37-154.
 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
 Buttons are interlocked so that one of the two is maintained at all times.
Depressing the other button releases the maintained button and maintains the depressed button.
 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch.
For other colours or markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Centre 1-800-268-3578.
For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR100.
 Order from table on Page T37-155.
 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.

37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-151

Tab37book.fm Page 152 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6
37

30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37

Two Button Operator with (OFF) Release—Includes OFF Bar/Button(s)
(Order Other Buttons Separately)

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Button Types
Required 
Two Button Operator

Operation
Top Button

Bottom Button

Special Features

Catalogue Number

Maintained

Momentary

Release bar for
top button

E30AL

Maintained

Maintained

Individual release
bars for each button

E30AN

Maintained
with interlock

Maintained
with interlock

Individual release
bars for each button

E30AM

37
37
37
37

Shown with Release
Bar for Top Button
Two Button Operator

37
37
37

Shown with Release
Bars for Each Button

37
37

Single Indicating
Light Unit

Single Indicating Light Unit/without Lens (Order Lens Separately)

37
37
37

Lens Type
Required 

Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Lamp
Voltage
Number 
120

6PSB

Catalogue Number

Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lamp
Voltage
Number 

Catalogue Number

E30BA

24

24PSB

E30BJ

120

120PSB

E30BM

Shown with Lens

37
37
37
37

Dual Indicating
Light Unit

37

Lens Types
Required 

37
37

Dual Indicating Light Unit/without Lenses (Order Lenses Separately)

Shown with Lens

Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Lamp
Voltage
Number 
120

6PSB

Catalogue Number

Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lamp
Voltage
Number 

Catalogue Number

E30CA

24

24PSB

E30CJ

120

120PSB

E30CM

37
Notes
 Order from table on Page T37-155.
 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colours or
markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Centre 1-800-268-3578. For replacement of
standard red release bar, order E30KR101.
 Order from table on Page T37-156.
 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED part numbers, see table on Page T37-164.
 Order from table on Page T37-157.

37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-152

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 153 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

37.6

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37

Single Button Operator Single Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Button or Lens
(Order Button and Lens Separately)
and Indicating Light

Button and
Lens Types
Required 

Operation
(Bottom
Button)

Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Catalogue
Lamp
Voltage Number  Number

Momentary 120

Shown with Button
and Lens

6PSB

E30DA

37
37

Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lamp
Catalogue
Voltage Number  Number
24

24PSB

E30DX3

120

120PSB

E30DF

37
37
37
37

Single Button Operator
with Release Bar and
Indicating Light

37

Single Button Operator with (OFF) Release Bar and Indicating Light—
Includes OFF Bar/Button (Order Other Button and Lens Separately)

Button and
Lens Types
Required 

Operation
(Bottom
Button)

Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Catalogue
Lamp
Voltage Number  Number

Maintained 120

6PSB

E30DG

Shown with Button
and Lens

37
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lamp
Catalogue
Voltage Number  Number
24

24PSB

E30DX13

120

120PSB

E30DM

37
37
37
37

Two Button Operator
with Indicating Light

Button and
Lens Types
Required 

Button
Operation

Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Lamp
Catalogue
Voltage Number  Number

Momentary 120

Shown with Button
and Lens

Momentary 120
with
interlock

Two Button Operator
with Dual Indicating
Lights

6PSB

6PSB

E30EA

E30EG

37

Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lamp
Catalogue
Voltage Number  Number
24

24PSB

E30EX3

120

120PSB

E30EF

24

24PSB

E30EX13

120

120PSB

E30EM

37
37
37
37
37
37

Two Button Operator with Dual Indicating Lights/without Buttons and Lens

Button and
Lens Types
Required 

Button
Operation

Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Lamp
Catalogue
Voltage Number  Number

Momentary 120
Shown with Button
and Lens

37

Two Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Buttons or Lens
(Order Buttons and Lens Separately)

6PSB

E30JA

37

Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lamp
Catalogue
Voltage Number  Number
24

24PSB

E30JX3

120

120PSB

E30JF

37
37
37
37

Notes
 Order from tables on Pages T37-154 to T37-158.
 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED part numbers, see table on Page T37-164.
 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colours or
markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Centre 1-800-268-3578. For replacement of
standard red release bar, order E30KR101.
 Order from tables on Pages T37-156 and T37-157.

37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-153

Tab37book.fm Page 154 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Operator Components
Operating Buttons Only
Type A Extended
Button

Type A Buttons with Standard Markings
Button
Application

37
37

Colour Marking

Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Black

Red

37
37
Green

37
37
37

Type B Extended
Button

37

Short Button
Catalogue Number

Colour Marking

Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Short Button
Catalogue Number

Blank

E30KA100

E30KA150

Green

E30KA330

E30KA380

START

—

E30KA180

Yellow Blank

E30KA400

E30KA450

Blank

E30KA200

E30KA250

White

Blank

E30KA500

E30KA550

EMERG. STOP E30KA204

—

Gray

Blank

E30KA600

E30KA650

OFF

E30KA218

E30KA268

Brown

Blank

E30KA700

E30KA750

STOP

E30KA231

E30KA281

Orange Blank

E30KA800

E30KA950

Blank

E30KA300

E30KA350

Blue

E30KA900

E30KA950

Type B Buttons with Standard Markings
Button
Application



START

Blank



Colour Marking

Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Short Button
Catalogue Number

Colour Marking

Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Short Button
Catalogue Number

Black

E30KB100

E30KB150

Black

E30KB125

E30KB175

Blank

REVERSE

AUTO

E30KB101

E30KB151

RUN

E30KB126

E30KB176

37

CLOSE

E30KB102

E30KB152

SLOW

E30KB128

E30KB178

DOWN

E30KB103

E30KB153

START

E30KB130

E30KB180

37

FAST

E30KB105

E30KB155

TEST

E30KB132

E30KB182

FORWARD

E30KB107

E30KB157

UP

E30KB134

E30KB184

HIGH

E30KB109

E30KB159

Blank

E30KB200

E30KB250

37

IN

E30KB110

E30KB160

EMERG. STOP E30KB204

—

INCH

E30KB111

E30KB161

OFF

E30KB218

E30KB268

37

JOG

E30KB112

E30KB162

STOP

E30KB231

E30KB281

JOG FOR.

E30KB113

E30KB163

Blank

E30KB300

E30KB350

JOG REV.

E30KB114

E30KB164

START

E30KB330

E30KB380

LOW

E30KB115

E30KB165

Yellow Blank

E30KB400

E30KB450

LOWER

E30KB116

E30KB166

White

Blank

E30KB500

E30KB550

37

MAN

E30KB117

E30KB167

AUTO

E30KB501

—

ON

E30KB119

E30KB169

HAND

E30KB508

—

37

OPEN

E30KB120

E30KB170

Gray

Blank

E30KB600

E30KB650

OUT

E30KB121

E30KB171

Brown

Blank

E30KB700

E30KB750

RAISE

E30KB122

E30KB172

Orange Blank

E30KB800

E30KB850

RESET

E30KB124

E30KB174

Blue

E30KB900

E30KB950

37

37
37

37
37

Red

Green

Notes
 Use with operator E30AA, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
 Use with operators E30AB thru AE, AL and DA thru DF, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
 See Appendix 4 for French engraving.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-154

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Blank

Tab37book.fm Page 155 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Type C Extended
Button

Type C Buttons with Standard Markings
Button
Application

37.6



Colour Marking

Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Short Button
Catalogue Number

Colour Marking

Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Short Button
Catalogue Number

Black

E30KC100

E30KC150

Black

E30KC124

E30KC174

Blank

RESET

AUTO

E30KC101

E30KC151

REVERSE

E30KC125

E30KC175

CLOSE

E30KC102

E30KC152

RUN

E30KC126

E30KC176

DOWN

E30KC103

E30KC153

SLOW

E30KC128

E30KC178

FAST

E30KC105

E30KC155

START

E30KC130

E30KC180

FORWARD

E30KC107

E30KC157

TEST

E30KC132

E30KC182

HAND

E30KC108

E30KC158

UP

E30KC134

E30KC184

HIGH

E30KC109

E30KC159

Blank

E30KC200

E30KC250

IN

E30KC110

E30KC160

OFF

E30KC218

—

INCH

E30KC111

E30KC161

STOP

E30KC231

E30KC281

JOG

E30KC112

E30KC162

Blank

E30KC300

E30KC350

JOG FOR.

E30KC113

E30KC163

START

E30KC330

E30KC380

JOG REV.

E30KC114

E30KC164

Yellow Blank

E30KC400

E30KC450

LOW

E30KC115

E30KC165

White

Blank

E30KC500

E30KC550

LOWER

E30KC116

E30KC166

Gray

Blank

E30KC600

E30KC650

MAN

E30KC117

E30KC167

Brown

Blank

E30KC700

E30KC750

ON

E30KC119

E30KC169

Orange Blank

E30KC800

E30KC850

OPEN

E30KC120

E30KC170

Blue

E30KC900

E30KC950

OUT

E30KC121

E30KC171

RAISE

E30KC122

E30KC172

Red

Green

Blank

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note
 Use with operators E30AF thru AK, AL thru AM and DG thru DM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
 See Appendix 4 for French engraving.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-155

Tab37book.fm Page 156 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

37

Operating Buttons and Lens Only
Standard Colour Buttons and Lens Marking

37

Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.

37
Type E Button

37



Type E Buttons with Standard Markings
Button
Application

37



Colour Marking

Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Colour Marking

Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Black

Black

Blank

E30KE100

RESET

E30KE124

CLOSE

E30KE102

REVERSE

E30KE125

DOWN

E30KE103

RUN

E30KE126

37

FAST

E30KE105

SLOW

E30KE128

FORWARD

E30KE107

START

E30KE130

37

HIGH

E30KE109

TEST

E30KE132

IN

E30KE110

UP

E30KE134

INCH

E30KE111

Blank

E30KE200

JOG

E30KE112

OFF

E30KE218

JOG FOR.

E30KE113

STOP

E30KE231

37

JOG REV.

E30KE114

Blank

E30KE300

LOW

E30KE115

START

E30KE330

37

LOWER

E30KE116

Yellow Blank

E30KE400

ON

E30KE119

White

Blank

E30KE500

OPEN

E30KE120

Gray

Blank

E30KE600

OUT

E30KE121

Brown

Blank

E30KE700

PHASE

E30KE122

Orange Blank

E30KE800

Blue

E30KE900

37

37
37

37
37

Red

Green

37
37
Type F Lens

37

Type F Lenses with Standard Markings
Button
Application

37

Catalogue Number

Colour Marking

Catalogue Number

Red

Blank

E30KF10

Green

OFF

E30KF22

MOTOR RUN

E30KF11

Amber

Blank

E30KF30

ON

E30KF12

Blue

Blank

E30KF40

POWER ON

E30KF13

Clear

Blank

E30KF50

Blank

E30KF20

White

Blank

E30KF60

MOTOR STOP

E30KF21

MOTOR RUN

E30KF23

Green

37
37



Colour Marking

37
37

Blank

Notes
 For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different colour, refer to instructions on
Pages T37-161 to T37-163.
 Use with operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and JA thru JM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
 Use with operators E30BA thru BY, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
 See Appendix 4 for French engraving.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-156

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 157 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Operating Lens Only
Standard Colour Buttons and Lens Marking

37.6
37



37

Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
Type G Lens

Type G Lenses with Standard Markings
Lens
Application

37



Colour Marking

Catalogue Number

Colour Marking

Catalogue Number

Red

Blank

E30KG10

Green

OFF

E30KG22

MOTOR RUN

E30KG11

READY

E30KG23

ON

E30KG12

Amber

Blank

E30KG30

POWER ON

E30KG13

Blue

Blank

E30KG40

Blank

E30KG20

Clear

Blank

E30KG50

MOTOR RUN

E30KG24

White

Blank

E30KG60

MOTOR STOP

E30KG21

Green

37
37
37
37
37
37

Type J Lens

Type J Lenses with Standard Markings
Lens
Application

Colour Marking

Catalogue Number

Colour Marking

Catalogue Number

Red

Blank

E30KJ10

Green

OFF

E30KJ22

MOTOR RUN

E30KJ11

ON

E30KJ24

ON

E30KJ12

Amber

Blank

E30KJ30

POWER ON

E30KJ13

Blue

Blank

E30KJ40

MOTOR STOP

E30KJ14

Clear

Blank

E30KJ50

Blank

E30KJ20

White

Blank

E30KJ60

MOTOR STOP

E30KJ21

MOTOR RUN

E30KJ23

Green

Type K Lenses

37



Lens
Application

Red

37
37
37
37
37

Type K Lenses with Standard Markings (Sold in Pairs Only)
Colour
Left Hand
Lens

37

37



Marking

37

Right Hand
Lens

Left Hand
Lens

Right Hand
Lens

Catalogue Number

Red

ON

ON

E30KK12

Green

ON

OFF

E30KK13

OFF

OFF

E30KK22

OFF

ON

E30KK23

Green
Red

37
37
37

Notes
 For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different colour, refer to instructions on
Pages T37-161 to T37-163.
 Use with operators E30CA thru CM and DA thru DM, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high except MOTOR RUN,
POWER ON and MOTOR STOP are 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
 Use with operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and GA thru GM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
 Use with operators E30JA thru JW, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high
 See Appendix 4 for French engraving.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-157

Tab37book.fm Page 158 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6
37

Type K Lenses

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Type K Lenses—Blank (Sold in Pairs Only)
Colour
Left Hand
Lens

37

Red

37
37
37
37

Green

37
37
37
Amber

37
37
37
37

Right Hand
Lens

Catalogue Number

Colour
Left Hand
Lens
Blue

Right Hand
Lens

Catalogue Number

Red

E30KK10

Red

E30KK41

Green

E30KK11

Green

E30KK42

Amber

E30KK17

Amber

E30KK43

Blue

E30KK14

Blue

E30KK40

Clear

E30KK15

Clear

E30KK45

White

E30KK16

White

E30KK46

Red

E30KK21

Red

E30KK51

Clear

Green

E30KK20

Green

E30KK52

Amber

E30KK27

Amber

E30KK53

Blue

E30KK24

Blue

E30KK54

Clear

E30KK25

Clear

E30KK50

White

E30KK26

White

E30KK56

Red

E30KK31

Red

E30KK61

White

Green

E30KK32

Green

E30KK62

Amber

E30KK30

Amber

E30KK63

Blue

E30KK34

Blue

E30KK64

Clear

E30KK35

Clear

E30KK65

White

E30KK36

White

E30KK60

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-158

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 159 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks—Molded, phenolic construction.
Enclosed silver contacts with reliability “nibs” that improve the
reliability of switching performance under dry circuit, corrosive
atmosphere and fine dust conditions. For more extreme
conditions, the logic level contact blocks described below are
recommended.
Logic Level Contact Blocks—Feature palladium contacts.
Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for
voltages and currents approaching zero. When mounted in an
enclosure rated for highly corrosive environments, logic level
contact blocks can be used where exposure to chemicals may
cause failure to other types of materials.
Mounting Limitations
See the contact block mounting limitations for Type E30
pushbutton and combination pushbutton and light operators on
this page. Mounting positions 1 thru 8 indicate single depth
contact blocks. Each of these positions can represent either a
single circuit 600 volt block or a two-circuit 120 volt block. The
two-circuit 600 volt block requires two of the numbered
positions shown.

37

Mounting Positions
Upper Contact Block Stack Operating Plunger
1

5

2

6

3

Upper Contact
Block Stack

37

Contact Block
Mounting
Positions

37

4

7

8

37

Lower Contact
Block Stack

Lower Contact Block Stack
Operating Plunger

37

Catalogue Number
of Operator

Contact Blocks Can Be Mounted in
Positions Listed Below
Upper Stack
Lower Stack

E30AA thru E30AM 

1-2-3-4

5-6-7-8

E30BA thru E30CM

None

None

E30DA thru E30DM

None

5-6-7-8

E30EA thru E30GM

2-3-4

6-7-8

E30JA thru E30JM

3-4

7-8

37
37
37
37
37
37

Contact Block Type 
Single Circuit,
Screw Terminals

Contact Block Selection
Pressure Terminals
Standard
Catalogue Number

Circuit
1NO

Two Circuit,
Screw Terminals

Logic Level
Catalogue Number

Quick Connect Terminals 
Standard
Catalogue Number

37
37

600 Vac, 250 Vdc—Single Circuit
E30KLA1

E30KLAE1

E30KLB1

1NC

E30KLA2

E30KLAE2

E30KLB2

1NO-1NC

600 Vac, 250 Vdc—Two Circuit

37
37

E30KLA3

E30KLAE3

E30KLB3

2NO

E30KLA4

E30KLAE4

E30KLB4

2NC

E30KLA5

E30KLAE5

E30KLB5

37

Two Circuit, Quick
Connect Terminals

37
37

Special Contact Operation
120 Vac Only—
Two Circuit

37

1NO-1NC
Overlapping

E30KLA6 

—

E30KLB6 

37

2NO
(One early closing)

E30KLA7 

—

E30KLB7 

37

2NC
(One late opening)

E30KLA8

—

E30KLB8

1NO-1NC

120 Vac Only—Two Circuit

37
37
E30KLA9 

—

37

E30KLB9 

37

Notes
 Except operator E30AD, AJ or AK which will accommodate contact blocks 1, 2, 5 and 6 only. (See Mounting Positions above.)
 Individually boxed contact blocks master packed 10 per carton.
 Supplied with non-stacking screws. Limited to 2 contact blocks mounted in positions 1 and 5.
 Do not use with maintained operators.
 Contacts must be same polarity.

37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-159

Tab37book.fm Page 160 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Accessories
Accessories

37

Description

Colour/Type

Catalogue Number

Collar—Snap on mounting for assembly in the field. Permits
colour coding of operator heads. Size: 1-19/32 x 1-19/32 x 9/16 in.

Black

E30KR1

Red

E30KR2

Green

E30KR3

37

Yellow

E30KR4

White

E30KR5

37

Gray

E30KR6

Orange

E30KR8

Blue

E30KR9

Brown

E30KR10

Full shroud
(gray)

E30KT6

Half shroud
(gray)

E30KT7

Red with white slide

E30KR31

Red with clear slide

E30KR32

37

E30KR_

37

37
37

E30KT_

37

Shroud—Similar to collar above except for extension above
the face of button to prevent accidental actuation of button.
Half shroud with an extension on only half the collar may be
Full
Shroud positioned to protect top or bottom button.

37
37
37

Half
Shroud

E30KR3_

Guard—Two collars deep, removable slide prevents accidental
operation. White slide can be marked with grease pencil.

37
37
37

E30KR30

Terminal Block—2 terminals, each will accommodate 2-wire
terminations.

E30KT_

Padlock Attachment for locking single button and bottom button
of multi-function operators in the depressed position. Locks NC
contacts open or early closing NO contacts closed. Cannot be used
in conjunction with collar, shroud or boot.

E30KR30

37
37
37
37

E30KT3

Transparent Boot—Guards against ingress of foreign material
and freezing rain. Note: If this boot is used in conjunction with
operator types AD or AE, an extended type button must be used
in the top position and a short button in the lower position.

E30KT_

Square Hole Plug—
Gray enameled

37

Short button

E30KT1

Extended button

E30KT2

E30KT3 

37
37

Stainless steel

E30KT4
E30KT5

37
37
37

E30KV1

Lamp and Lens Removal Tool—Will not fit Cat. No. E30B light units
listed on Page T37-152.

E30KV1

E22CW

Octagonal Wrench for mounting operators to panel.

E22CW

E30KV2

Button and Lens Removal Tool

E30KV2

37
37
37
37

Note
 Colour coordinating collars, padlock attachments or legend plates cannot be used with operators equipped with a
transparent boot.

37
T37-160

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 161 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Options

37

Markings and Legend Plates
Ordering Instructions
●
Specify catalogue number
of blank button or lens of
desired colour, plus suffix
“STAMP” for non-standard
or “STD” for standard
markings in order notes.
See Pages T37-154 to
T37-158.
●
Specify size, legend desired
and location in order notes
by alphas as shown in
example.
●
Do not exceed maximum
number of legend
characters per line.

Buttons or Lenses with NonStandard Horizontal Markings
Markings not listed as
Standard Markings below are
considered non-standard. If
more than one marking is
required on a button or lens,
order non-standard markings.

37

How to Use the Legend
Location Figure

Ordering Example
Green Type B button to be
marked with non-standard
legend “ALL
ELEVATORS DOWN.”

37

No. of Characters per Line
Lenses
Buttons
Line Position

Catalogue No.:
E30KB300STAMP
Letter Size: 1/8 in
Pos. A—ALL
Pos. C—ELEVATORS
Pos. F—DOWN

7

A

8

9
7

C
E

8
8

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Legend Locations

37

Type A buttons and Type F lenses
A

8

9

D

8

9

G

8

9

K

8

9

N

8

9

1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.

3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.

G

F

8

J

D

9
9

H

9

G

8

9

K

8

9

B

8

9

F

8

9

K

8

8

8
9

8

8

8
9

D

9

E

9
9

8

9

B

8

9

E

8

9

J

8

9

M

8

9

B

8

9

E

8

9

J

8

9

K

8

37
37
37
Type F lens only

37

A

8

C

8

F

8

J

8

L

8

Type B buttons and Type G lenses
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.

9

C

8

9

B

8

9

D

8

7
9
7

9

C

8

B

8

8

D

8

8

37
6

C

5

B

5

D

4
6
4

3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.

A
C
E

5

B

5

D

37

6 C

37

Type K buttons

Type D buttons
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.

37
37

Type C buttons
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.

37
37

3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.

8
8
8

A
C
F

37

6

5
5

B

3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.

A
C

6

B

1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.

B 4

E 4

A 4
C 4

D 4
F 4

3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.

B 4

E 4

37
37
37

Type E buttons and Type J lenses
1/8 in
(3 mm)
9
B
High
Char.

8

7
7

A
C

8
8

3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.

37
9

B

8

37
37

Standard Markings
AUTO
CLOSE
DOWN

EMERG. STOP
FAST
FORWARD

HAND
HIGH
IN

INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.

JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER

MAN.
OFF
ON

OPEN
OUT
RAISE

RESET
REVERSE
RUN

SLOW
START
STOP

TEST
UP
MOTOR RUN

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

MOTOR STOP
POWER ON
READY

37
T37-161

Tab37book.fm Page 162 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Legend Arrangements and Legend Locations
Legend plates
E30KM1 or KM11

Legend plates
E30KM5 or KM15

B

37

H

G

Legend plates
E30KM4 or KM14

37

H
B

A

K

B

37
37

Legend plates
E30KM6 or KM16

D

M

A

J

B

K

Legend plates
E30KM3 or KM13
B

37

F

M

C

C

L

D

M

D

37
37

A

E

B

F

Legend plates
E30KM2 or KM12

G

C

B

B

F

M

A

E

L

B

F

M

D

37
37

B

F

F

37
37
37
37
37

Legend Plates E30KN76 or KN76B
LINE B
L
I
N
E

L
I
N
E

A

C

Legend plates
E30KN76 or KN76B
1/8 in character
size only with a maximum
of six characters.

37
37
37

Maximum Number and Size of Permissible Legend Characters of Custom Stamped Legend Plates

37

No.of
Lines

Size and Maximum Number of Characters Per Line
One Span
Two Span
3/32 in
1/8 in
3/16 in
3/32 in
(2.5 mm)
(3 mm)
(5 mm)
(2.5 mm)

1/8 in
(3 mm)

3/16 in
(5 mm)

Three Span
3/32 in
(2.5 mm)

1/8 in
(3 mm)

3/16 in
(5 mm)

37

Type
Standard

1

13

10

10

30

22

22

47

34

34

37

Large

1

13

10

10

30

23

23

47

36

36

2

13

10

10

30

23

23

47

36

36

37
37

Characters available for non-standard markings
3/32 in (2.5 mm)—1/8 in (3 mm)—3/16 in (5 mm)
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-162

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

./—,

1234567890

Tab37book.fm Page 163 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Buttons or Lenses with Non-Standard Vertical Markings
Ordering Instructions
●
Specify catalogue number
of blank button or lens of
desired colour, selected
from listings on Pages
T37-154 to T37-158.
●
Specify size, legend
desired, location and state
“vertically marked” in
order notes.
Note: Specify either 1/8 or 3/16 in
(3.2 or 4.8 mm) character height.
Do not exceed maximum number
of characters as outlined in table
below.

Ordering Example:
Green Type K button to be
marked with “RUN” “ON.”

Legend Plates
Legend plates for Type E30
compact pushbutton and
indicating light operators
hook directly onto the
operator and are clamped in
place when the operator
locking nut behind the panel
is secured.
Two and three span plates
are designed for use where
two or more operators are
mounted adjacent to each
other on minimum
horizontal mounting
centers. These legend plates
mount in the same manner as
single span units.

37
When Ordering Legend Plates
with Markings
●
Catalogue number of blank
legend plate
●
Insert the following in
order notes:
●
Legends required
●
Size of characters—
3/32, 1/8, 3/16 in (2.4,
3.2, 4.8 mm)
●
Positions of legends on
one line standard and
two line large legend
plates by alphas as
shown in sketches on
following page.

Type

Standard— One Span

Buttons

Lenses

Standard

7

5

B

7

5

C

4

3

D

5

3

E

7

5

F

7

5

G

7

5

J

7

5

K

3

2

37
37
37
37
37
37

One Span
Catalogue Number

37
37
37
37

E30KM1

Maximum Number of Characters
1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.8 mm)

A

37

37

Black

Maximum Number of Characters
Type

Catalogue No.:
E30KM3STAMP
Letter Size: 1/8 in (3.2 mm)
Pos. C—MASTER CONTROL
Pos. B—STATION A
Pos. F—STATION B

Blank Legend Plates and Legend Plates
with Markings

Catalogue No.: E30KK20STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 in (4.8 mm)
Vertically Marked
Pos. B—RUN
Pos. E—ON

Description

Ordering Example:
Three span legend plate to be
marked “MASTER
CONTROL”, “STATION A”
and “STATION B.”

37
Large—One Span

Large

E30KM4

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-163

Tab37book.fm Page 164 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

37

Replacement Parts

37

Replacement Light Units for E30 Components

37

Voltage
AC and DC

37

Full Voltage Type

37

Part Numbers—Receptacles without Lamps
Single
Dual
Single Light
Indicating Light
Indicating Light
Single Pushbutton

Single Light
Dual Pushbutton

Dual Light
Dual Pushbutton

6V

57-2579-3A

57-2568A

57-2568A

57-2579-3A

57-2567

12V

57-2579-3A

57-2568A

57-2568A

57-2579-3A

57-2567

18/24V

57-2579-3A

57-2568A

57-2568A

57-2579-3A

57-2567

28V

57-2579-3A

57-2568A

57-2568A

57-2579-3A

57-2567

37

32V

57-2579-3A

57-2568-2A

57-2568-2A

—

57-2567

48V

57-2579-3A

57-2568A

57-2568A

57-2579-3A

57-2567

37

120V

57-2579-3A

57-2568A

57-2568A

57-2579-3A

57-2567

120V

42-2672A

42-2663A

42-2663A

42-2671A

42-2664A

208V

42-2672-2A

42-2663-2A

42-2663-2A

42-2671-2A

42-2664-2A

240V

42-2672-3A

42-2663-3A

42-2663-3A

42-2671-3A

42-2664-3A

37

380V

42-2672-4A

42-2663-4A

42-2663-4A

42-2671-4A

42-2664-4A

480V

42-2672-5A

42-2663-5A

42-2663-5A

42-2671-5A

42-2664-5A

37

600V

42-2672-6A

42-2663-6A

42-2663-6A

42-2671-6A

42-2664-6A

37

Transformer Type

37
37

Description and Part Numbers—Related Parts

37
37
37
37
37

Inner lens

28-1008

28-1010

28-1010

28-1010

28-1010

Retaining nut

15-1885

15-1885

15-1885

15-1885

15-1885

Gasket

16-2092

16-2092

16-2092

16-2092

16-2092

Locking ring

52-1116

52-1116

52-1116

52-1116

52-1116

Replacement Lamps for E30 Illuminated Operators
Mfg. Lamp Type

Voltage

Base Style

Application

Part Number

6PSB

6V

T2 slide

E30 transformer and full voltage

28-1022

12PSB

12V

T2 slide

E30 full voltage

28-1025

37

24PSB

24V

T2 slide

E30 full voltage

28-1026

28PSB

28V

T2 slide

E30 full voltage

28-1027

37

48PSB

48V

T2 slide

E30 full voltage

28-1028

60PSB

60V

T2 slide

E30 full voltage

28-1598

37

120PSB

120V

T2 slide

E30 full voltage

28-1029

#259

6.3V

T3-1/4 wedge

E30 single transformer

28-949

37

37
37

Replacement Lamps—Incandescent and LED
Lamp
Voltage

Manufacturer’s
Part Number

Base
Style

Eaton’s
Part Number

LED Lamps
Eaton’s Part Number
Red
Green

Yellow

Blue 

6

6PSB

T2 slide

28-1022

35-1523

35-1523-2

35-1523-3

35-1523-17

37

12

12PSB

T2 slide

28-1025

35-1523-11

35-1523-12

35-1523-13

35-1523-18

24

24PSB

T2 slide

28-1026

35-1523-4

35-1523-5

35-1523-6

35-1523-19

37

28

28PSB

T2 slide

28-1027

35-1523-4

35-1523-5

35-1523-6

35-1523-19

48

48PSB

T2 slide

28-1028

35-1523-14

35-1523-15

35-1523-16

35-1523-20

120

120PSB

T2 slide

28-1029

35-1523-7

35-1523-8

35-1523-9

35-1523-21

37
37

37
37

Incandescent Lamps

Note
 E30 blue LED bulbs may not provide sufficient intensity for some applications.

37
T37-164

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 165 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

37.6

Technical Data and Specifications

37

Operator Specifications
Description

37

Specification

37

Climate Conditions
Operating

–20˚ to 150˚F (–29˚ to 65˚C)

37

Terminals
Light units

Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)

37

Contact block

Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)

37

Materials
Operator

Zinc base die casting with a copper-nickel-chrome plated finish
Withstands the 200 hr. salt spray test in accordance with MIL Spec. QQ-M-151A and NEMA 4X testing.

Internal parts

Including shafts, washers and springs, are made of stainless steel

Buttons and lenses

Colorfast, wear resistant, molded acetal resin

Contact blocks

Made of molded, heat resistant, mineral filled phenolic
Contact block plungers are molded of nylon filled phenolic
Contacts are silver

Reliability nibs

These nibs combine a scrubbing action with high pressure density when the contacts are closed
They push through particles and films found on contact surfaces in industrial environments
Reliability nibs self-adjust to the application—dry circuit, normal or heavy-duty

37
37
37
37
37
37

Reliability Nibs

Dry Circuit

37
37

Heavy-Duty

Medium Duty

37
Electrical Ratings

37

Contact Blocks

37

Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designation A600 and P300
Vac A600
Description
120V
240V

37

480V

600V

Vdc P300
24/28V

125V

250V

Make and emergency
interrupting capacity (Amps)

60

30

15

12

5.73

1.1

0.55

37

Normal load break (Amps)

6

3

1.5

1.2

5.73

1.1

0.55

37

Continuous current (Amps)

10

10

10

10

5

5

5

●
●

●
●

37

UL A600/P300 nominal connect 10A
1NO, 1NC, 2NO, 2NC, 1NO-1NC, early make, late break and
overlapping configurations
Mechanical positive drive operation on NC contacts
Palladium alloy contact for logic level or highly corrosive
environments

37
37
37
37

Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and
Hostile Atmosphere Application

Light Unit

Description

Description

Specification


Maximum amperes

0.5A

Maximum volts

120 Vac/Vdc

37

Specification

Bulbs—Average Life
Transformer type

37

20,000 hrs.

Resistor/direct voltage type

2,500 hrs. min. at rated voltage

LED

60,000 to 100,000 hrs.

37
37

Note
 Logic level contact blocks are UL A600/P500 rated per table above.

37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-165

Tab37book.fm Page 166 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.6

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

37

Dimensions

37

Pushbutton Operators

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

37

0.53
(13.5)

1.75
(44.5)

37

37
37

0.81
(20.6)

1.72
(43.7)

1.72
(43.7)

1.75
(44.5)

Plunger
2 Circ.
Extends to
Cont. Blocks 0.25 (6.4)

1.13
(28.7)

37
37

Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators
0.53
(13.5)

0.81
(20.6)

1.13
(28.7)

1.47
(37.3) 0.63 (16)
Std.
Square
Button
0.78 (19.8) Ext. Button

1.47
(37.3)
Square

Panel
0.88 0.88
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max. (22.4) (22.4)
1 Circ.
Cont. Blocks

Operator
Types E30EA–
E30GM
Operator
Types E30JA–
E30JW

0.88
(22.4)

1.88
(47.8)

1.88
(47.8)

1.72
(43.7)

0.84
(21.3)

Transformer
or Full Voltage
Light Element

Panel
Plungers
0.06 (1.5) Min.
Extended
0.25 (6.4) Max. to 0.25 (6.4)

37
Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators

37
0.53
(13.5)

1.75
(44.5)

37

1.13
(28.7)

37
37

1.47
(37.3)
Square

37
37

1.72
(43.7)

Full Voltage
Types DF,
DM and DX

0.88
(22.4)

1.88
(47.8)

37

0.81
(20.6)

Transformer
Types DA – DL

0.84
(21.3)

Padlocking Attachment and Half Shroud E30KT7

0.53
(13.5)
1.13
(28.7)

0.81
(20.6)

1.72
(43.7)

Operator
Types E30BA–
E30BM

0.88
(22.4)

1.88
(47.8)

Operator
Types E30CA–
E30CM
1.47
(37.3)
Square

Plunger Extends
Panel
to 0.25 (6.4) on
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max. Contact Blocks

0.84
(21.3)

Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max.

Drilling Dimensions—Minimum Spacing



1.63 a
(41.3)

0.69
(17.5)

37

0.5 (12.7)

37

2.25 a
(57)

0.75
(19.1)

37

1.59
(40.4) 0.56
(14.2)

1.13
(28.7)

1.44
(36.6)

37

0.11 (2.8)
Max.

37

0.31 (7.9)
Dia. Hole

ø 1.20 (30.5)
Notes
 Dimensions shown allow adequate space for the addition of one or two high legend plates
and colour coordinating collars.
 Locating nib hole or notch is 0.136 in (3.5 mm) drill. Alternate to drilling mounting holes use
Greenlee Tool Co. punch (No. 730-S) to punch the hole and (No. 730-K) to punch the notch.

Legend Plates
4.69 (119.1) Three Span

37

3.06 (77.7) Two Span
1.44
(36.6)
One Span

37
0.78
(19.8) 0.39
(9.9)

37
Large

37

Standard

0.08 (1.9)
0.05 (1.3)

0.02
(0.5)

37
T37-166

Drill .14
(3.5)
0.6
(15)

37

37

1.75
(44.5)

0.88 (22.4) 0.88 (22.4)

37

37

Indicating Light Operators

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 167 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Contents

30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Description

Page

30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalogue Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Point-of-Purchase Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated Momentary
Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . .
Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . .
Joystick Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roto-Push Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roto-Push Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AccessoriesAccessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T37-168
T37-169
T37-170

37
37
37
37

T37-172
T37-173
T37-174
T37-178
T37-179
T37-180
T37-182
T37-185
T37-188
T37-189
T37-193
T37-194
T37-197
T37-200
T37-201
T37-202
T37-205
T37-206
T37-211
T37-216
T37-225
T37-227
T37-230

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Product Description

Features

The 30.5 mm pushbutton line
features a zinc die cast
construction with chromeplated housing and mounting
nut. The same durable
construction is also available
with the corrosive resistant
E34 line of pushbuttons.
See E34 section on Pages
T37-240 to T37-274.

●

●

●

●

Application Description

Heavy-duty zinc die cast
construction
Enclosed silver contacts
with reliability nibs
Diaphragm seals with
drainage holes
Grounding nibs on the
operator casing

Benefits
●

●

●

Reliability nibs improve
contact reliability even
under dry circuit and fine
dust conditions
Drainage holes prevent
buildup of liquid inside the
operator which can prevent
operation in freezing
environments
Grounding nibs bit through
paint and other coatings to
provide secure ground

Contact Operation
Slow make and break. All
normally closed contacts
have positive opening
operation, i.e., normally closed
contacts are forced open in
the event of contact weld or
spring breakage.

37

Standards and
Certifications
●

●
●

CE EN 60947-5-1 and
60947-5-5
UL 508—File No. 131568
CSA C22.2 No. 14—File
No. LR68551

37
37
37
37

Ingress Protection

37

When mounted in similarly
rated enclosure—

37

●

●

Standard indicating lights
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65
All other operators
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-167

37
37
37
37
37

Tab37book.fm Page 168 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Product Overview
Reliability Nibs

Grounding Nibs

Eaton’s contact blocks
feature enclosed silver
contacts with pointed
“reliability nibs” for reliable
performance from logic level
up to 600V. To ensure reliable
switching, nibs bite through
oxide which can form on silver
contacts, eliminating the
need for expensive logic level
blocks for most applications.

10250T line operators have
“grounding nibs”—four
metal points on the operator
casting designed to bite
through most paints and
other coatings on metal
panels to enhance the ground
connection when the operator
is securely tightened.

Grounding
Nibs

Reliability Nibs

37
37

Dry Circuit

37
37

Grounding Nibs

Medium Duty

Diaphragm Seal with
Drainage Holes
Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s pushbutton operators
offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator
bushing. Hidden from view
by the mounting nut, these
holes prevent buildup of
liquid inside the operator,
which can prevent operation
in freezing environments.
The holes also provide a
route for escaping liquid in
high pressure washdowns,
effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.
Diaphragm Seal

37

Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole

Heavy-Duty

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Reliability nibs improve
performance in dry circuit,
corrosive, fine dust and other
contaminated atmospheres.
Under normal environmental
conditions, the minimum
operational voltage is 5V and
the minimum operational
current is 1 mA, AC/DC. For
operation under a wider
range of environmental
conditions, logic level contact
blocks with inert palladium
tipped contacts are
recommended.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-168

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Flexible
Diaphragm
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Colorfast
Molded
Button
Drainage Hole
Mounting Nut

Tab37book.fm Page 169 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Product Identification

37

30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Series

37
Terminal Clamps
Shipped Ready to Wire

37
37
37
37
37

Mounting Nut

Legend Plate

Operator

Colour Coded Plungers
Red = NC Green = NO

37

Stackable Contact
Blocks up to 12
Circuits per Operator

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-169

Tab37book.fm Page 170 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Catalogue Number Selection
Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons

37

10250T 10 1 – 1



37
37

Operator
10 = Flush
11 = Extended
12 = 40 mm mushroom
17 = 65 mm mushroom
50 = 1/2 shroud vertical mount
51 = 1/2 shroud horizontal mount

37
37

Button Colour
1 = Black
5 = Gray
2 = Red
6 = White
3 = Green
8 = Blue
4 = Yellow
9 = Orange

37
37

10250T 5 63 C47

37
37
37

Operator
5 = Two-position maintained
4 = Three-position mom push-mom pull
9 = Three-position mt push-mom pull
10 = Three-position mom push-mom pull
Incandescent
Light Unit
Blank = Non-illuminated
89 = 24V/XFR
63 = 120V/XFR
64 = 208V/XFR
65 = 240V/XFR
82 = 277V/XFR
66 = 380V/XFR
67 = 480V/XFR
68 = 600V/XFR
69 = 6V/FV
70 = 12V/FV
79 = 24V/FV
83 = 32V/FV
80 = 120V/RES
81 = 240V/RES

37
37
37
37
37
37

LED
Light Unit
Blank = Non-illuminated
89L = 24V/XFR
63L = 120V/XFR
64L = 208V/XFR
65L = 240V/XFR
82L = 277V/XFR
66L = 380V/XFR
67L = 480V/XFR
68L = 600V/XFR
97L = Full voltage

37

B60
B62
B63
B61
B64
J60
J62
J63
J61
J64

Non-illuminated
Button
= Black 40 mm
= Red 40 mm
= Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
= Green 40 mm
= Blue 40 mm
= Black 65 mm
= Red 65 mm
= Red 65 mm—“E” STOP
= Green 65 mm
= Yellow 65 mm

37
37
Note
 Add X at end of catalogue number to receive parts assembled from factory.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-170

– 1



LED Voltage
Blank = Non-illuminated
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc

37

37

Circuit
= Operator only
= 1NO-1NC
= 2NO
= 2NC
= 1NC
= 1NO

Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Push-Pulls

37
37

Blank
1
2
3
51
53

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Incandescent
C47 =
C53 =
C48 =
C49 =
C50 =
C51 =
C52 =
C57 =
C63 =
C58 =
C59 =
C64 =
C60 =
C61 =
C62 =
C65 =
C66 =
C67 =

Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =

Circuit
Operator only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO

Illuminated
LED
Lens Type
RD = Red 40 mm
ED = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
GD = Green 40 mm
LD = Blue 40 mm
AD = Amber 40 mm
WD = White 40 mm
— = Clear 40 mm
RS = Red side light
ES = Red side light—“E” STOP
GS = Green side light
LS = Blue side light
AS = Amber side light
YS = Yellow side light
WS = White side light
— = Clear side light
RH = Red heavy-duty
GH = Green heavy-duty
AH = Amber heavy-duty

Tab37book.fm Page 171 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Illuminated Pushbuttons

37
10250T 416 C21

Incandescent Light Unit
416 = 24V/XFR
412 = 120V/XFR
412 = 240V/XFR
419 = 277V/XFR
413 = 380V/XFR
414 = 480V/XFR
415 = 600V/XFR
473 = 6V/FV
474 = 12V/FV
476 = 24V/FV
477 = 32V/FV
478 = 48V/FV
471 = 120V/RES
472 = 240V/RES

LED Light Unit
416L = 24V/XFR
411L = 120V/XFR
412L = 240V/XFR
419L = 277V/XFR
413L = 380V/XFR
414L = 480V/XFR
415L = 600V/XFR
497L = Full voltage

Incandescent Lens Colour
C21 = Red
C22 = Green
C23 = Yellow
C26 = White
C24 = Blue
C43 = Amber
C25 = Clear

LED Lens Colour
RD = Red
GD = Green
YD = Yellow
WD = White
LD = Blue
AD = Amber

– 1



LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc

37
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =

37

Circuit
Operator only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test

10250T 203N C1N



37
37

Light Unit Type
Standard—Incandescent
181N = 120V/XFR
182N = 240V/XFR
198N = 277V/XFR
183N = 380V/XFR
184N = 480V/XFR
185N = 600V/XFR
203N = 6V/FV
204N = 12V/FV
206N = 24V/FV
207N = 32V/FV
208N = 48V/FV
201N = 120V/RES
202N = 240V/RES
226N = 120V/neon
227N = 240V/neon
PresTest—Incandescent
221N = 120V/XFR
222N = 240V/XFR
223N = 380V/XFR
224N = 480V/XFR
225N = 600V/XFR
232N = 6V/FV
233N = 12V/FV
235N = 24V/FV
238N = 32V/FV
239N = 48V/FV
231N = 120V/RES
240N = 240V/RES
Master Test—Incandescent
187N = 120V/XFR
189N = 240 Vac—SS

Standard—LED
181L = 120V/XFR
182L = 240V/XFR
198L = 277V/XFR
183L = 380V/XFR
184L = 480V/XFR
185L = 600V/XFR
197L = Full voltage
PresTest—LED
221L = 120V/XFR
222L = 240V/XFR
223L = 380V/XFR
224L = 480V/XFR
225L = 600V/XFR
297L = Full voltage

LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Plastic
Glass
Lens Colour
Standard/Master—Incandescent
C1N =
C7N = Red
C2N =
C8N = Green
C3N =
— = Yellow
C6N =
C12N = White
C4N =
C10N = Blue
C19N =
C9N = Amber
C5N =
C11N = Clear
PresTest—Incandescent
C21 =
C13N = Red
C22 =
C14N = Green
C23 =
— = Yellow
C26 =
C18N = White
C24 =
C16N = Blue
C43 =
C15N = Amber
C25 =
C17N = Clear

37
37
37
37

Plastic
Glass
Lens Colour
Standard/Master/PresTest—LED
RP =
RG = Red
GP =
GG = Green
YP =
— = Yellow
WP =
WG = White
LP =
LG = Blue
AP =
AG = Amber

37
37
37
37

LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A

37
37
37
37
37
37

Note
 Add X at end of catalogue number to receive parts assembled from factory.

37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-171

Tab37book.fm Page 172 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Product Selection
Point-of-Purchase Packaging
Point-of-Purchase
Packaged Pilot Device

10250T Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Devices
Product

Description

Catalogue Number

Emergency Stop Operators

37
37
37
37

Red non-illuminated
push-pull

1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.

10250T5B62-1-POP

Red mushroom
pushbutton

1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.

10250T32R-POP

Red jumbo
mushroom pushbutton

Engraved EMERG. STOP with 1NO-1NC contact block.

10250T33-POP

Momentary Pushbuttons

37

Black flush
pushbutton

1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: START and JOG.

10250T30B-POP

37

Red extended
pushbutton

1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes one square engraved
legend plate: STOP.

10250T31R-POP

Red indicating light

10250T206NC1N-POP

37

Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc with two extra lenses: Green and amber.
Also includes two square engraved legend plates: RUN and JOG.

Red indicating light

10250T34R-POP

37

Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc with two extra lenses: Green and Amber.
Also includes one square engraved legend plate: RUN and JOG.

Illuminated Pushbuttons

37

Red illuminating
pushbutton

Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc with 1NO-1NC contact block and two
extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes one square
engraved legend plate: POWER ON.

10250T476C21-1-POP

Red illuminating
pushbutton

Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc with 1NO-1NC contact block and two
extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes one square
engraved legend plate: POWER ON.

10250T411C21-1-POP

Indicating Lights

37

37
37

Selector Switches

37

Black knob two-position
selector switch

1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes three square engraved
legend plates: OFF/ON, HAND/AUTO and RUN/JOG.

10250T20KB-POP

37

Black knob three-position
selector switch

2NO-2NC contact blocks. Also includes 1 square engraved
legend plate: HAND/OFF/AUTO.

10250T22KB-POP

37

Black knob three-position
selector switch

1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes legend plate:
HAND/OFF/AUTO

10250T21KB-POP

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-172

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 173 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units

37

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Flush Button

37

Pushbutton Units—Flush, Extended, Mushroom Head or Jumbo Mushroom Head Operators


Contact
Type

Button Colour

Flush Button
Catalogue Number

Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Mushroom Button
Catalogue Number

Jumbo Mushroom
Catalogue Number

37

1NO

Black

10250T23B

10250T25B

10250T26B

10250T27B

Red

10250T23R

10250T112-53

10250T122-53

10250T172-53

37

Extended Button

1NC

Mushroom Button

1NO-1NC

Jumbo Mushroom

2NO

2NC

Green

10250T23G

10250T25G

10250T26G

10250T27G

Yellow

10250T23Y

10250T25Y

10250T26Y

10250T27Y

Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP

—

—

—

10250T17213-53

Black

10250T101-51

10250T111-51

10250T121-51

10250T171-51

Red

10250T102-51

10250T25R

10250T26R

10250T27R

Green

10250T103-51

10250T113-51

10250T123-51

10250T173-51

Yellow

10250T104-51

10250T120-51

10250T124-51

10250T174-51

Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP

—

—

—

10250T29

Black

10250T30B

10250T31B

10250T32B

10250T33B

Red

10250T30R

10250T31R

10250T32R

10250T33R

Green

10250T30G

10250T31G

10250T32G

10250T33G

Yellow

10250T30Y

10250T31Y

10250T32Y

10250T33Y

Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP

—

—

—

10250T33

Black

10250T101-2

10250T111-2

10250T121-2

10250T171-2

Red

10250T102-2

10250T112-2

10250T122-2

10250T172-2

Green

10250T103-2

10250T113-2

10250T123-2

10250T173-2

Yellow

10250T104-2

10250T120-2

10250T124-2

10250T174-2

Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP

—

—

—

10250T17213-2

Black

10250T101-3

10250T111-3

10250T121-3

10250T171-3

Red

10250T102-3

10250T112-3

10250T122-3

10250T172-3

Green

10250T103-3

10250T113-3

10250T123-3

10250T173-3

Yellow

10250T104-3

10250T120-3

10250T124-3

10250T174-3

Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP

—

—

—

10250T17213-3

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note
 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-173

Tab37book.fm Page 174 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Pushbuttons
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37

Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated

37

Button

Colour

Catalogue Number

Black

10250T101

Red

10250T102

Green

10250T103

Yellow

10250T104

37

Gray

10250T105

White

10250T106

37

Blue

10250T108

Orange

10250T109

Black

10250T111

37

Red

10250T112

Green

10250T113

37

Yellow

10250T120

White

10250T116

37

Blue

10250T118

Orange

10250T119

10250T10_

Flush button



37
37

37

37

10250T11_

10250T5_

Extended button

Half shrouded button

Note: To order complete assembled unit
using one composite catalogue number,
add contact block and legend plate suffix
to the end of operator catalogue number.
Example: 10250T101-1TS33

Operator
10250T101

Vertical

Horizontal

37

Black

10250T501

10250T511

Red

10250T502

10250T512

37

Green

10250T503

10250T513

Yellow

10250T504

10250T514

Gray

10250T505

10250T515

37

White

10250T506

10250T516

Blue

10250T508

10250T518

37

Orange

10250T509

10250T519

Black

10250T121

Red

10250T122

Green

10250T123

Yellow

10250T124

Blue

10250T129

Black

10250T171

Red

10250T172

37

Red (EMERG. STOP)

10250T17213

Green

10250T173

37

Yellow

10250T174

Black

10250ED1164-2

Red

10250ED1164-3

37

Green

10250ED1164-4

Yellow

10250ED1164-5

37

Clear

10250ED1164

37

10250T12_

Mushroom button

37
37
37
37

10250T17_

Jumbo mushroom button 

37
10250ED1164_

37

37

Low operating force—
jumbo mushroom 

Notes
 To order operator with factory assembled extended retaining nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications,
add suffix letter E to listed catalogue number. Example: 10250T101E.
 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
 Operating force—Standard = 2.4 lb; low force = 1.6 lb.

37
37
T37-174

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Contact Block
10250T1

Legend Plate
10250TS33

Tab37book.fm Page 175 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
10250TA_

37

Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators
Description

Catalogue Number

Black flush and green flush

10250TA66

Black flush and long red

10250TA67

Black flush and red mushroom head

10250TA68

Black flush and lock-down red mushroom head

10250TA69 

Black flush and red jumbo mushroom head

10250TA76

Green flush and long red

10250TA72

Black long and long red

10250TA73

Green flush and red mushroom head

10250TA77

Green flush and black flush

10250TA75

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note
 NC contacts must be mounted behind lock-down mushroom head operator to ensure lockout.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-175

Tab37book.fm Page 176 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37

Lockout Pushbutton Operators with Padlock Attachments
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37

The following pushbutton and
mushroom operators include
an integral padlock
attachment for applications
requiring lockout/tagout of
specific machine functions.
They are available in styles
which allow locking of a
button in the down position

37
37
37

(stopped position) or locking a
button in the up position (to
prevent starting). Select the
“Hand” latch type which
functions as a momentary
pushbutton until the operator
presses the button and
moves the padlock
attachment into position for

locking, or choose the
“Spring Loaded” latch type
where the padlock
attachment springs into place
when the button is pressed.
Units accept a customer
supplied 1/4 in padlock.

37
37

10250TA16

Padlockable in the Down Position



Operator Type

Colour

Latch Type

Catalogue Number

Flush head

Red

Hand

10250TA16

37

Mushroom head

Red

Hand

10250TA42

Red

Spring loaded

10250TA45

37

Jumbo head 

Red

Hand

10250TA52

Red

Spring loaded

10250TA55

Red (EMERG. STOP)

Spring loaded

10250ED952

Latch Type

Catalogue Number

37

37
37

Padlockable in the Up Position

37
37

Operator Type
10250TA4_

Mushroom head

Colour



Black

Hand

10250TA41

Green

Hand

10250TA43

10250TA51

37
37
37

10250TA5_

Jumbo mushroom
head 

37

Black

Hand

Green

Hand

10250TA53

Yellow

Hand

10250TA54

37
37

Notes
Hand attachment must be manually moved into place for locking. Spring loaded: when operator is pressed—
attachment springs into place. Must be moved manually to release button.

37




37

Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included.
Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-176

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 177 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Key Pushbutton Operator
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
These devices incorporate an
integral locking mechanism
which enables locking units in
various positions (Locked
Down), locking units to

37
37

normal operation. With the
key in the centre position,
these operators function as a
normal momentary
pushbutton (Free).

prevent operation (Locked
Up) or setting unit to lock
when the button is pressed
(Push to Lock), requiring the
key to be inserted to return to

37
37

Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Key Operators Below
Replacement Keys
Listed operators have
identical locks and keys
Description
Catalogue Number
(Key Code H661) Catalogue
Replacement
keys
10250ED824
Number 10250ED824. For
(code H661)
dissimilar lock and key
combinations, see listing on
Page T37-198.
10250T43_

37
37
37
37

Key Pushbutton Operator
Key Position and
Pushbutton Operations

37

C
L

R

Key Removal
Positions

Vertical Mounting 
Catalogue Number

37
37

Three-Position

37

Lock up

Free

Lock down

All

10250T430

Lock up

Free

Lock down

L and R

10250T431

Lock up

Free

Lock down

C and R

10250T432

37

Free

—

L and C

10250T433

37

Two-Position
Lock up
Lock up

Free

—

L

10250T434

—

Free

Lock down

C and R

10250T435

—

Free

Lock down

R

10250T436

—

Free

Push to lock

C and R

10250T437

—

Free

Push to lock

R

10250T438

37
37
37
37

Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
10250ED1043-4

37
37

Operator Only with Button
Description

Catalogue Number

Latch-in, twist-to-release operator with red mushroom head button

10250ED1043-4

37
37
37

Note
 Horizontal mounting available on request.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-177

Tab37book.fm Page 178 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37

30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

●

LED or incandescent
Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
Plastic lenses

37
37

24V Full Voltage
Illuminated Pushbutton

Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Illuminated Pushbutton
1NO
Catalogue Number

1NO-1NC
Catalogue Number

1NC
Catalogue Number

10250T397LRD24-53

10250T397LRD24-1

10250T397LRD24-51

10250T397LGD24-53

10250T397LGD24-1

10250T397LGD24-51

Amber

10250T397LAD24-53

10250T397LAD24-1

10250T397LAD24-51

Yellow

10250T397LYD24-53

10250T397LYD24-1

10250T397LYD24-51

Blue

10250T397LLD24-53

10250T397LLD24-1

10250T397LLD24-51

White

10250T397LWD24-53

10250T397LWD24-1

10250T397LWD24-51

Red

10250T397LRD2A-53

10250T397LRD2A-1

10250T397LRD2A-51

Green

10250T397LGD2A-53

10250T397LGD2A-1

10250T397LGD2A-51

Amber

10250T397LAD2A-53

10250T397LAD2A-1

10250T397LAD2A-51

37

Yellow

10250T397LYD2A-53

10250T397LYD2A-2

10250T397LYD2A-51

Blue

10250T397LLD2A-53

10250T397LLD2A-1

10250T397LLD2A-51

37

White

10250T397LWD2A-53

10250T397LWD2A-1

10250T397LWD2A-51

Red

10250T411LRD06-53

10250T411LRD06-1

10250T411LRD06-51

37

Green

10250T411LGD06-53

10250T411LGD06-1

10250T411LGD06-51

Amber

10250T411LAD06-53

10250T411LAD06-1

10250T411LAD06-51

37

Yellow

10250T411LYD06-53

10250T411LYD06-1

10250T411LYD06-51

Blue

10250T411LLD06-53

10250T411LLD06-1

10250T411LLD06-51

White

10250T411LWD06-53

10250T411LWD06-1

10250T411LWD06-51

37

Type

Voltage

Colour

LED/Lamp
Number

LED Lamp

37

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

Red
Green

37
37
37

120 Vac

37

Transformer

37

120 Vac

Bayonet
base

Incandescent Lamp

37

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

37
37
37
Resistor

37

120 Vac/Vdc

37
37
37

Transformer

120 Vac

10250T476C21-53

10250T476C21-1

10250T476C21-51

Green

Red

10250T476C22-53

10250T476C22-1

10250T476C22-51

Amber

10250T476C43-53

10250T476C43-1

10250T476C43-51

Yellow

10250T476C23-53

10250T476C23-1

10250T476C23-51

Blue

10250T476C24-53

10250T476C24-1

10250T476C24-51

Clear

10250T476C25-53

10250T476C25-1

10250T476C25-51

White

10250T476C26-53

10250T476C26-1

10250T476C26-51

10250T471C21-53

10250T471C21-1

10250T471C21-51

Green

10250T471C22-53

10250T471C22-1

10250T471C22-51

Amber

10250T471C43-53

10250T471C43-1

10250T471C43-51

Yellow

10250T471C23-53

10250T471C23-1

10250T471C23-51

Blue

10250T471C24-53

10250T471C24-1

10250T471C24-51

Clear

10250T471C25-53

10250T471C25-1

10250T471C25-51

White

10250T471C26-53

10250T471C26-1

10250T471C26-51

10250T75R 

10250T76R 

10250T77R 

Red

Red

#757

120MB

#755

37

Green

10250T75G 

10250T76G 

10250T77G 

Amber

10250T75A 

10250T76A 

10250T77A 

37

Yellow

10250T75Y 

10250T76Y 

10250T77Y 

Blue

10250T75B





10250T77B 

37

Clear

10250T75C 

10250T76C 

10250T77C 

White

10250T75W 

10250T76W 

10250T77W 

37

10250T76B

Note
 For flashing module catalogue number 10250TFL1, add suffix code FM to listed catalogue number. Example: 10250T75RFM.

37
37
T37-178

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 179 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Indicating Light Units 

37

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●

LED or incandescent
Full voltage, resistor or
transformer type

24V Full Voltage
Illuminated Light

●

●

Standard and PresTest
types
Plastic lenses

PresTest—This device
incorporates a press-to-test
feature whereby depressing
the lens disconnects the light
from the source being

monitored and connects
the lamp to a continuously
energized circuit for
immediate detection of
faulty lamps.

Voltage

Colour

24 Vac/Vdc

Red
Green

120 Vac Transformer
PresTest

120 Vac

Transformer

120 Vac

Indicating Light
Catalogue Number

PresTest
Catalogue Number

37

Bayonet
base

10250T197LRP24

10250T297LRP24

37

10250T197LGP24

10250T297LGP24

Amber

10250T197LAP24

10250T297LAP24

Yellow

10250T197LYP24

10250T297LYP24

Blue

10250T197LLP24

10250T297LLP24

White

10250T197LWP24

10250T297LWP24

Red

10250T197LRP2A

10250T297LRP2A

Green

10250T197LGP2A

10250T297LGP2A

Amber

10250T197LAP2A

10250T297LAP2A

Yellow

10250T197LYP2A

10250T297LYP2A

Blue

10250T197LLP2A

10250T297LLP2A

White

10250T197LWP2A

10250T297LWP2A

Red

10250T181LRP06

10250T221LRP06

Green

10250T181LGP06

10250T221LGP06

Amber

10250T181LAP06

10250T221LAP06

Yellow

10250T181LYP06

10250T221LYP06

Blue

10250T181LLP06

10250T221LLP06

White

10250T181LWP06

10250T221LWP06

10250T206NC1N

10250T235NC21

Green

10250T206NC2N

10250T235NC22

Amber

10250T206NC19N

10250T235NC43

Yellow

10250T206NC3N

10250T235NC23

Blue

10250T206NC4N

10250T235NC24

Clear

10250T206NC5N

10250T235NC25

White

10250T206NC6N

10250T235NC26

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

Resistor

Transformer

120 Vac/Vdc



120 Vac

37

LED/Lamp
Number

LED Lamp
Full voltage

37
37

Indicating Light Units
Type

37

Red

Red

#757

10250T201NC1N

10250T231NC21

Green

10250T201NC2N

10250T231NC22

Amber

10250T201NC19N

10250T231NC43

Yellow

10250T201NC3N

10250T231NC23

Blue

10250T201NC4N

10250T231NC24

Clear

10250T201NC5N

10250T231NC25

White

10250T201NC6N

10250T231NC26

Red

120MB

#755

Green

10250T34R

10250T74NR

10250T34G

10250T74NG

Amber

10250T34A

10250T74NA

Yellow

10250T34Y

10250T74NY

Blue

10250T34B

10250T74NB

Clear

10250T34C

10250T74NC

White

10250T34W

10250T74NW

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 Standard indicating lights are rated UL (NEMA) 3S as well.
 For flashing lamp add letter F to listed catalogue number. Example: 10250T34RF.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

37
37
T37-179

Tab37book.fm Page 180 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●
●

LED or incandescent
Full voltage, resistor or transformer type

Illuminated Pushbutton

Operators without Lens

37
Type

37

Full voltage AC/DC
Indicating Light

37
37
Resistor AC/DC 

37
PresTest

Transformer AC only 

37
37
37

Illuminated
Pushbutton
Catalogue Number

Indicating Light
Catalogue Number

PresTest
Catalogue Number

Master Test
Catalogue Number

Incandescent Unit

37

37

Voltage

LED/Lamp
Number

Master Test

37

Neon AC/DC 

37

Solid-state 50/60 Hz only

6

#755

10250T473

10250T203N

10250T232N

—

12

#756

10250T474

10250T204N

10250T233N

—

24

#757

10250T476

10250T206N

10250T235N

—

32

#1828

10250T477

10250T207N

10250T238N

—

48

#1835

10250T478

10250T208N

10250T239N

—

120

120MB

10250T47

10250T201N

10250T231N

—

240

120MB

10250T472

10250T202N

10250T240N

—

24

#755

10250T416

—

—

—
—

120

10250T411

10250T181N

10250T221N

240

10250T422

10250T182N

10250T222N

—

277

10250T419

10250T198N

—

—

380

10250T413

10250T183N

10250T223N

—

480

10250T414

10250T184N

10250T224N

—

600

10250T415

10250T185N

10250T225N

—

120

NE51H-R22

—

10250T226N

—

—

240

NE51H-R68

—

10250T227N

—

—

120

120MB

—

—

—

10250T189N

Bayonet
base

10250T397L

10250T197L

10250T297L

—

10250T416L

—

—

—

120

10250T411L

10250T181L

10250T221L

—

240

10250T412L

10250T182L

10250T222L

—

277

10250T419L

10250T198L

—

—

380

10250T413L

10250T183L

10250T223L

—

480

10250T414L

10250T184L

10250T224L

—

600

10250T415L

10250T185L

10250T225L

—

LED (LEDs not included) 

37
37
37
37
37
37

Full voltage

—

Transformer AC only

24

Notes
 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens colour. See Page T37-225 for LED Selection and Page T37-171 for Catalogue Numbering System.
 Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
 For flashing lamp, add letter F to listed catalogue number. Example: 10250T181NF.
 Resistant to shock and vibration. For best illumination use amber, yellow or clear lens.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-180

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 181 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Plastic

Glass

10250TC2_

Plastic

Glass

37.7

Indicating and Master Test Lenses
Colour

Plastic
Catalogue Number

Glass
Catalogue Number

Red

10250TC1N

10250TC7N

Green

10250TC2N

10250TC8N

Amber

10250TC19N

10250TC9N

Yellow

10250TC3N

—

Blue

10250TC4N

10250TC10N

Clear

10250TC5N

10250TC11N

White

10250TC6N

10250TC12N

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses
Colour

Catalogue Number

Red

10250TC21

Green

10250TC22

Yellow

10250TC23

Amber

10250TC43

Blue

10250TC24

Clear

10250TC25

White

10250TC26

37
37
37
37
37
37

PresTest Lenses
Colour

Plastic
Catalogue Number

Glass
Catalogue Number

37

Red

10250TC21

10250TC13N

37

Green

10250TC22

10250TC14N

Amber

10250TC43

10250TC15N

Yellow

10250TC23

—

Blue

10250TC24

10250TC16N

Clear

10250TC25

10250TC17N

White

10250TC26

10250TC18N

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-181

Tab37book.fm Page 182 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37

30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Push-Pull Emergency Stops (Compliant with IEC 60947-5-5)
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

●

Two- and three-position
Non-illuminated
LONC contact block

37
37

10250T579C47-71X

Two-Position Push-Pull Units
Operator Position 
Pull
Push

Button Type/Colour

Lamp

Type

Voltage

Catalogue Number

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated

Incandescent

Transformer

120 Vac/Vdc

10250T563C47-71X

37

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP

Incandescent

Transformer

120 Vac/Vdc

10250T563C53-71X

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP

LED

Transformer

120 Vac/Vdc

10250T563LED06-71X

37

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated

Incandescent

Full voltage

24 Vdc

10250T579C47-71X

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP

Incandescent

Full voltage

24 Vdc

10250T579C53-71X

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated

Incandescent

Resistor

120 Vac/Vdc

10250T580C47-71X

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP

Incandescent

Resistor

120 Vac/Vdc

10250T580C53-71X

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated

Incandescent

Transformer

24 Vdc

10250T589C47-71X

37

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP

Incandescent

Transformer

24 Vdc

10250T589C53-71X

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP

LED

Transformer

24 Vdc

10250T589LED06-71X

37

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated

LED

Transformer

24 Vdc

10250T589LRD06-71X

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP

LED

Full voltage

24 Vdc

10250T597LED24-71X

37

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP

LED

Full voltage

120 Vac/Vdc

10250T597LED2A-71X

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated

LED

Full voltage

24 Vdc

10250T597LRD24-71X

X

O

40 mm red—illuminated

LED

Full voltage

120 Vac/Vdc

10250T597LRD2A-71X

37

X

O

40 mm red

—

—

—

10250T5B62-71X

X

O

40 mm red

—

—

—

10250T5B63-71X

37

X

O

65 mm red

—

—

—

10250T5J62-71X

X

O

65 mm red

—

—

—

10250T5J63-71X

37

37
37

37

37

Note
 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-182

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 183 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37

Two-Position Push-Pull Units

37

Operator Position 
Pull

Push
Button Type/Colour



Contact
Type

Mounting Location
A

B

Catalogue Number



37

Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
10250T5B62-1X

O
X

X
O

40 mm/red

37

1NO

10250T5B62-1X

37

1NC

37
10250T5B63-1X

O
X

X
O

40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red

1NO

37

10250T5B63-1X

37

1NC

37
10250T5J63-1X

O
X

X
O

65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red

1NO

37

10250T5J63-1X

1NC

37
37

10250ED1080-2

O
X

X
O

65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red

1NO

Special security
jumbo mushroom head

1NC

10250ED1080-2

37
37
37
37

Button and Colour Selection
Colour
Standard

Jumbo Mushroom
Head

Suffix Code

Catalogue Number

Red

B62

10250TB62

Red (EMERG. STOP)

B63

10250TB63

Green

B61

10250TB61

Black

B60

10250TB60

Blue

B64

10250TB64

Red

J62

10250TJ62

Red (EMERG. STOP)

J63

10250TJ63

Green

J61

10250TJ61

Black

J60

10250TJ60

Yellow

J64

10250TJ64

37

Standard—40 mm

37
37
37
37

Jumbo Mushroom Head 
(Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm

37
37
37
37

Notes
 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 To order different type or colour buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table.
Example: 10250T5B64-1X.
 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.

37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-183

Tab37book.fm Page 184 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
10250T_

Three-Position Push-Pull Units
Operator Position 

37

Pull

Intermediate

37

Maintained Push, Momentary Pull

Push
Button Type/Colour 

X
X

37

O
X

O
O

Contact
Type

Mounting Location
A

1NC

10250T9B60-3X

40 mm/red

1NC

10250T9B62-3X
10250T9B63-3X

Momentary Push, Momentary Pull

37
37
37

X
X

O
X

O
O

40 mm/black

1NC

10250T4B60-3X

40 mm/red

1NC

10250T4B62-3X

O
X

O
O

X
O

40 mm/black

1NO

10250T10B60-1X

40 mm/red

1NC

10250T10B62-1X

37
37
37

Button and Colour Selection
Colour
Standard

37
37
37
37

Catalogue Number 

40 mm/black

40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red

37

B

Jumbo Mushroom
Head

Suffix Code

Catalogue Number

Red

B62

10250TB62

Red (EMERG. STOP)

B63

10250TB63

Green

B61

10250TB61

Black

B60

10250TB60

Blue

B64

10250TB64

Standard—40 mm

Jumbo Mushroom Head 
(Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm

37

Red

J62

10250TJ62

Red (EMERG. STOP)

J63

10250TJ63

37

Green

J61

10250TJ61

Black

J60

10250TJ60

Yellow

J64

10250TJ64

37

Notes
 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 To order different type or colour buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table.
Example: 10250T5B64-1X.
 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-184

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 185 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Illuminated Push-Pull Units

37

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
●

37

LED or incandescent
Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
Two-position maintained

37
37

Two-Position PushPull Operator

Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull

37

Operator Position 
Maintained—
Pull

O
X

Maintained—
Push

X
O

Lamp

Type

Voltage

Contact Mounting Location
Type
A
B

LED/Lamp
Number

LED

Full Voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

120 Vac/Vdc

1NC

Bayonet
base

Transformer

24 Vac

X
O

Incandescent

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

10250T597LRD2A-1X

Resistor

120 Vac/Vdc

1NC

Transformer

24 Vac

#757

10250T579C47-1X

120MB

10250T580C47-1X

#755

10250T589C47-1X

120 Vac

10250ED137_

10250T597LRD24-1X

10250T563LRD06-1X

Full voltage

37



10250T589LRD06-1X

120 Vac
O
X

Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalogue Number

10250T563C47-1X

37
37
37
37
37
37

Jumbo Lens Illuminated E-Stops
Contact
Type

37

Lamp

Button Type/Colour

Type

Voltage

Catalogue Number

LED

Two-position illuminated maintained push/pull—
50 mm jumbo lens/red

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO
1NC

10250ED1375

LED

Three-position illuminated momentary push/pull—
50 mm jumbo lens/red

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC
1NC

10250ED1376

LED

Three-position illuminated momentary push/pull—
50 mm jumbo lens/red

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO
1NC

10250ED1377

LED

Three-position illuminated maintained push/momentary pull—
50 mm lens/red

Full voltage

1NO
1NC

10250ED1378

37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 To order different type or colour lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on next page. Example: 10250T579C63-1X.
For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page T37-191.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-185

Tab37book.fm Page 186 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37

Lens and Colour Selection

37

Colour

37

Standard

37
37
37
37
37

Side-Lighted
Aluminum

Incandescent
Suffix Code

LED
Suffix Code

Catalogue Number

Red

C47

RD

10250TC47

Red (EMERG. STOP)

C53

ED

10250TC53

Green

C48

GD

10250TC48

Blue

C49

LD

10250TC49

Amber

C50

AD

10250TC50

White

C51

WD

10250TC51

Clear

C52

CD

10250TC52

Standard—40 mm

Side-Lighted Aluminum—40 mm 
Red

C57

RS

10250TC57

Red (EMERG. STOP)

C63

ES

10250TC63

Green

C58

GS

10250TC58

37

Blue

C59

LS

10250TC59

Amber

C64

AS

10250TC64

37

Yellow

C60

YS

10250TC60

White

C61

WS

10250TC61

37

Clear

C62

CS

10250TC62

37

37

Aluminum Transparent
Centre

37

Aluminum Transparent Centre—40 mm 
Red

C65

RH

10250TC65

Green

C66

GH

10250TC66

Amber

C67

AH

10250TC67

—

—

10250TC77

37
Jumbo Lens

37

Jumbo Lens—50 mm
Red

37
Note
 Clear anodized aluminum and colored lens.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-186

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 187 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Three-Position PushPull Operator

37

Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Position 
Momentary— Maintained—
Pull
Intermediate

O
X

O
O

37

Momentary—
Push

X
O

Lamp

Type

Voltage

Contact
Type

LED

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

120 Vac

1NC

Transformer

Mounting Location LED/
Lamp
Number
A
B

Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalogue Number 

Bayonet
base

10250T1097LRD24-1X

24 Vac
120 Vac

X
X

O
X

O
O

Full voltage

Transformer

O
X

O
O

X
O

Incan- Full voltage
descent
Resistor
Transformer

10250T1063LRD06-1X

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC

120 Vac

1NC

Bayonet
base

O
X

O
O

10250T497LRD24-3X
10250T497LRD2A-3X

24 Vac

10250T489LRD06-3X

120 Vac

10250T463LRD06-3X

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

#757

10250T1079C47-1X

120 Vac

1NC

120MB

10250T1080C47-1X

#755

10250T1089C47-1X

24 Vac
120 Vac

X
X

10250T1097LRD2A-1X
10250T1089LRD06-1X

10250T1063C47-1X

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC

#757

10250T479C47-3X

Resistor

120 Vac

1NC

120MB

10250T480C47-3X

Transformer

24 Vac

#755

10250T489C47-3X

120 Vac

10250T463C47-3X

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Three-Position PushPull Operator

Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Position 
Momentary— Maintained—
Pull
Intermediate

X
X

O
X

Momentary—
Push

O
O

Lamp

Type

Voltage

Contact
Type

LED

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC

120 Vac

1NC

Transformer

X
X

O
X

37

O
O

Incandescent

Mounting Location LED/
Lamp
Number
A
B
Bayonet
base

Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalogue Number 

10250T997LRD2A-3X

24 Vac

10250T989LRD06-3X

120 Vac

10250T963LRD06-3X

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC

#757

10250T979C47-3X

120 Vac

1NC

120MB

10250T980C47-3X

24 Vac

#755

120 Vac

37

10250T997LRD24-3X

Resistor
Transformer

37

10250T989C47-3X

37
37
37
37

10250T963C47-3X

37

Notes
 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 To order different type or colour lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on Page T37-186.
Example: 10250T1079C53-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page T37-191.
 To order different type or colour lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on Page T37-186.
Example: 10250T979C53X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page T37-191.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-187

Tab37book.fm Page 188 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Potentiometers
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13
Vertical or Horizontal  Potentiometer
One-Hole Mounting
Potentiometer
Ohms

with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10%
Catalogue Number

2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 

37

1000

10250T331

2500

10250T332

5000

10250T338

10000

10250T333

37

25000

10250T334

50000

10250T335

37

Operator only 

10250T330

Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings

E34LP99

37
37

37

Notes
 Shown with standard aluminum dial plate.
 Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalogue number.
Example: 10250T33136. To order separately, see footnote  below.
 Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates,
order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
 For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing
on Page T37-235.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-188

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 189 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated push-pull
pushbutton unit, arranged for
one-hole mounting, can
replace two pushbuttons and
a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace
two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
types:

●

●

Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
Momentary—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
an intermediate position
when pulled or pushed and
released.

●

Momentary Pull,
Maintained Push—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
intermediate position
when pulled. Maintains in
pushed position until
manually returned to
intermediate (ready to
reset) position. Maintained
stop holds circuit open and
will prevent other series
connected operators from
starting the system.

The operators, buttons,
contact blocks, etc., are
offered as building block
components that can be
intermixed to satisfy many
requirements. This minimizes
the need for a varied and
costly inventory.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Typical
Two-Position
Maintained Push-Pull  Control

Applications

Three-wire
three-position
momentary

Line—Diagram
L1

M

B Circuit

Two-wire
two-position
maintained

Push-Pull
Operator

A Circuit

L2

OL

Push-Pull
Operator
M

Circuits

Operator Mode

2NC
contact block
10250T3

START (mom.)

37
Normal pos.
(maint.)

STOP (mom.)

37
37

M

L1

Operator
Momentary
push and pull
10250T4

L2
OL

Momentary
push and pull
10250T10

1NO-1NC
contact block
10250T1

Maintained
push and pull
10250T5

1NC
contact block
10250T51

37
37
START (maint.)

No
intermediate
position

STOP (maint.)

37
37
37

A or B Circuit
Three-wire
momentary pull L1
maintained push

A Circuit

Push-Pull
Operator
M

B Circuit

OL

L2

Maintained
push and
momentary
pull
10250T9

2NC
contact block
10250T3

START (mom.)

Normal pos.
(maint.)

STOP (maint.)

37
37
37

M

37

Notes
A and B circuits shown in the application illustrations are defined in the “Application Guide” on the following page.
 Shown without button on lens.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-189

Tab37book.fm Page 190 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Application Guide
To assist in the selection of
contact blocks, the sketch to
the right shows pictorially by
symbols A and B locations of
contact circuits after
assembly of contact blocks

Contact Circuit Locations

and adapter to the operator.
The table below shows the
effect of the push and pull
operations on either NO or
NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open).

Locating Nib

A

37

B

37
37

10250T579C47-71X

Push-Pull Operator Components
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out—Pull
In—Push
Intermediate

37
37
Type of Operator

37

Contact Block Mounting Location
A
B
A
B

A

B

Contact Block 

Catalogue Number

X
O

1NO
1NC

10250T5

X
O

2NO
2NC

X
O

1NO
1NC

X
O

2NO
2NC

O
O

1NO
1NC

O
O

2NO
2NC

O
O

1NO
1NC

O
O

2NO
2NC

X
O

1NO
1NC

X
O

2NO
2ND

Two-Position Operator without Lens

37

Maintained push-pull

37

O
X

or

O
X

37

Maintained push-pull with
anti-theft jumbo mushroom

O
X

No intermediate
position

O
X
or

O
X

37

O
X

O
X

X
O

or

X
O
No intermediate
position

O
X

X
O

or

X
O

10250ED1080

Three-Position Operator without Lens

37

Momentary push-pull

37

O
X

or

O
X

37

Maintained push-momentary pull

37

O
X

or

O
X

37

Momentary push-pull

37

O
X
O
X

37

or

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

or

or

or

O
X

X
O

O
X

X
O

O
X

X
O

O
X

X
O

O
O

X
O

O
O

X
O

or

or

or

10250T4 

10250T9 

10250T10 

Note
 Maximum of two blocks, four circuits. Special function contact blocks shown on Page T37-221 CANNOT be used with three-position push-pull operators 10250T4,
10250T9 or 10250T10.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-190

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 191 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Ordering Example with One Composite Number

37

Non-illuminated:
10250T5 + 10250TB62 + 10250T1 = 10250T5B62-1X

37
37

Incandescent:
10250T5 + 10250T79 + 10250TC47 + 10250T1 = 10250T579C47-1X

37

LED:
10250T5 + 10250T97L + 10250TC47 + Voltage code + 10250T1 = 10250T597LRD24-1X
06—6 Vac/Vdc
12—12 Vac/Vdc
24—24 Vac/Vdc
48—48 Vac/Vdc

37

60—60 Vac/Vdc
2A—120 Vac
2D—120 Vdc

37
37

Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Light Unit
Type
LED

(LEDs not included)

Incandescent

Type

Voltage

Full voltage

—

Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz

24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600

LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base

37
Catalogue Number

37

10250T97L

37

10250T89L
10250T63L
10250T64L
10250T65L
10250T82L
10250T66L
10250T67L
10250T68L

Full voltage
AC or DC

6
12
24/28
32

Resistor
AC or DC

120
240

120MB

10250T80
10250T81

Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz

24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600

#755

10250T89
10250T63
10250T64
10250T65
10250T82
10250T66
10250T67
10250T68

37
37
37

10250T69
10250T70
10250T79
10250T83

37
37
37
37
37
37

Note
 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens colour, see Page T37-225.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-191

Tab37book.fm Page 192 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Incandescent
Suffix Code

LED
Suffix Code 

Catalogue Number

Red

C47

RD

10250TC47

Red (EMERG. STOP)

C53

ED

10250TC53

Green

C48

GD

10250TC48

Blue

C49

LD

10250TC49

Amber

C50

AD

10250TC50

White

C51

WD

10250TC51

Clear

C52

CD

10250TC52

Lens Colour
Standard

37
37
37
37
37

30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Side-Lighted Anodized
Aluminum Ring

Standard

Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red

C57

RS

10250TC57

Red (EMERG. STOP)

C63

ES

10250TC63

Green

C58

GS

10250TC58

Blue

C59

LS

10250TC59

37

Amber

C64

AS

10250TC64

Yellow

C60

YS

10250TC60

37

White

C61

WS

10250TC61

Clear

C62

CS

10250TC62

37
37

37

Heavy-Duty Aluminum

Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Centre

37

Red

C65

RH

10250TC65

Green

C66

GH

10250TC66

37

Amber

C67

AH

10250TC67

Blue

C69

—

10250TC69

37

White

C68

—

10250TC68

—

—

10250TC77

37

Jumbo Lens

Jumbo Lens—50 mm
Red

37
37
Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices

37
37

Colour
Standard

37
37
37
37

Jumbo Mushroom
Head

Suffix Code

Catalogue Number

Red

B62

10250TB62

Red (EMERG. STOP)

B63

10250TB63

Green

B61

10250TB61

Black

B60

10250TB60

Blue

B64

10250TB64

Standard

Jumbo
Standard
P
S

Jumbo Mushroom Head 
(Anodized) Aluminum
Red

J62

10250TJ62

37

Red (EMERG. STOP)

J63

10250TJ63

Green

J61

10250TJ61

37

Black

J60

10250TJ60

Yellow

J64

10250TJ64

37

Legend Plates
For a complete listing
of available legend plates
see Pages T37-216 to
T37-218.

Notes
 Suffix codes should only be used for assembling composite catalogue numbers. To order lens above, order by catalogue number.
 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.

37
37
37
T37-192

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

R
T

Tab37book.fm Page 193 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Selector Switch Units

37

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●

37

Two-, three- and four-position maintained
Non-illuminated and illuminated

37
Two-Position
Maintained Switch

37

Two-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 
Operator
Action 
X

Contact
Type

O

1NC
M

O

Non-Illuminated
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number




A
B
10250T20KB

10250T20LB

10250ED1117-KR

10250ED1117-LR

M

X

37
37
37

1NO

37
Three-Position
Maintained Switch

Operator
Action 

Non-Illuminated
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number




A
B

Contact
Type
1NO

10250T21LB

10250ED1117-2KR

37

10250ED1117-2LR

O

O

O

O

X

1NO

X

O

O

1NO

O

X

O

2NC (Series)

37

O

O

X

1NO

37

M

10250T21KB

37

X

M

Three-Position
Maintained Switch

37

Three-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 

37

M

10250T22KB

10250T22LB

10250ED1117-3KR

10250ED1117-3LR

37

37
Three-Position
Maintained Switch

Four-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 
Operator
Action 
X

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

M

Contact
Type

37
Non-Illuminated
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number




A
B

1NC

M

10250T46KB

10250T46LB

10250ED1117-4KR

10250ED1117-4LR

37
37

1NO

37

O

1NO

37

X

1NC

37

M

M

37
Colour Selection
Illuminated
Colour

Code
Letter

Colour

Code
Letter

Colour

Code
Letter

Non-Illuminated
Code
Colour
Letter

Red
Green

R
G

White
Blue

W
B

Amber
Clear

A
C

Black
Red

B
R

37
Colour

Code
Letter

Colour

Code
Letter

37

Green
White

G
W

Blue
Orange

L
O

37

Notes
 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 M = Maintained.
 To order different type or colour selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Colour Selection table. Example: 10250T20KG.

37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-193

Tab37book.fm Page 194 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Selector Switch Selection

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their
varied forms (two-position,
three-position and fourposition) are a big factor
contributing to the great
flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons”
can achieve. Because of their
flexibility, they tend to cause
difficulty with product
selection and application.
The following systematic
approach should simplify
that task.
Cam and contact block
selection is better understood
if you:
●

●

Work with each incoming
and outgoing wire/circuit
separately.
Recognize the terms NO
and NC only identify the
type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” table
(Page T37-196) shows
how that contact will act
after assembly to the
operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.

●

●

Up to six NO or NC
contacts may be mounted
behind each plunger
location for a total of
twelve contacts. Single
circuit contact blocks have
only one plunger with the
other side of the block
“open.” Therefore, single
circuit contact blocks
transmit motion to blocks
behind them only for the
position containing the
circuit.
Each cam has two
separate lobes, each of
which operates one of the
two contact block plungers
independently of each
other. Those are identified
as position A (locating nib
side) and position B
(opposite of locating nib).
The position designations
give direction in selecting
and mounting of the
contact blocks.

Contact Circuit Locations

Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFFAUTO selector switch. In this
circuit, one incoming line is
distributed to two other
outgoing circuits by the
switch. The two circuits can
be looked at individually.
Step 1: Elementary
Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your
mind, a simple elementary
diagram of the switching
scheme as follows:
HAND
Incoming
Line

OFF
AUTO

Outgoing
Circuit

Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary
diagram, you can construct
an “X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts
are to be closed (X) or open
(O) in the various positions of
the switch. The “X-O” for the
HAND circuit looks like this:

Locating Nib

HAND OFF AUTO
A
B

37

Outgoing
Circuit

X O O

In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
(HAND) but open in the
centre and right.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-194

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

For the AUTO circuit, the
“X-O” diagram would look like
this:
HAND OFF AUTO
O O X

Putting them together, the
complete “X-O” diagram is:
XOO
OOX

Once the “X-O” diagram has
been generated the next step
is to select the cam and
contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
desired “X-O” functions.
The selection tables on the
following pages list the
various types (shapes) of
cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact
and position to achieve the
function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.

Tab37book.fm Page 195 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select
determines the operation of
all contact blocks mounted to
the operator. It is selected on
the basis that it provides the
simplest circuitry for the
desired “X-O” diagram. The
selection tables show all the
“X-O” combinations. For the
purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those
tables is shown on this page.
Now to make the cam
selection, make a simple
worksheet such as:

Step 5: Selector Switch
Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose
from the many types of
operators—knob and lever
in various colors or keyed.
Also what combinations of
maintained and spring
return functions are
required. Selection of these
operators can be found on
Page T37-198. For the
example in step 4 you may
want a three-position
maintained black knob,
cam 3—Catalogue Number
10250T1323.

Example Selection Table
No.

“X-O” Pattern

1

X

O

Cam Code #2
Top A
Bottom B
O

O

O

X

XOO
OOX

Cam 3
(A)NO
(B)NO

It becomes immediately
obvious that cam 3 is the
better choice for two
reasons, (1) the series
combination can be avoided
making it simpler to wire, (2)
only two contacts are
required, which is less
expensive than the three
contacts required by cam 2.
Step 4: Contact Block
Selection.
Having selected the cam,
contact block selection is
simply a matter of gathering
the A position and B position
circuits into pairs which make
up the most convenient contact
block arrangement. If there is
an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then
single circuit blocks must be
selected for these leftover
circuits.
Back to the worksheet,
having selected cam 3 do
this:
X O X
O O X

ANO
BNO

10250T2

The Complete Switch:
10250T1323 with one
10250T2 or, for one
composite catalogue number,
10250T21KB found on
Page T37-193.
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate
connections to obtain a
selector switch circuit
combination and are shown
with their appropriate line
diagrams. Field wiring of
jumper connections required
as shown.

NC

—

37
37
37

NO

37

—
NO

NO

37
Two-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks Required to
Accomplish Circuit Function
Top Plunger A
Bottom Plunger B

No.
Cam 2
(A)NO-(B)NC
(B)NO

—

a

NO
4

Cam Code #3
Top A
Bottom B

1

X

O
NC

2

O

or

37
37
37

NC

X

37

or
NO

37

NO

37

Note
 Wired in series.

37
37
37
37

X = Closed circuit
O = Open circuit

37

Wiring of Jumper
Connections

37
37

Series Connection

37
37

Parallel Connection

37

Four-position selector
switches are limited to four
contact blocks.

37
37

Contact Blocks
For selection and number
of available contact blocks
per operator, see Pages
T37-221 to T37-224.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-195

Tab37book.fm Page 196 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37

30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection

37

Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
Operator with Cam Code #2
Operator with Cam Code #3
Mounting Location
Mounting Location
Top
Bottom
Top
Bottom
Plunger
Plunger
Plunger
Plunger
A
B
A
B

Desired Circuit and
Operator Position

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

No.
1

X

O

O

37
37
37

NO
2

X

X

NO

O
NC

3

X

O

NC

X

37
37

NC

NO
NO
4

O

O

NO

37

5

O

X

NO

X
NC

37
37

NO

X

NC
6

O

X

NO

O
NC

NC

NC

37
37

Four-Position Switch—Contact Block Selection
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function

37
37
37

Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
No.

37

1

37

2

37
37
37

Mounting Location
Top
Bottom
Plunger
Plunger
A
B

X

O

O

O

37

O

X

O

37

No.
10

X

O

X

O
NC
NO

O
NO

3

O

O

X

O

11

X

X

X

O

NO
4

O

O

O

NC
NO

X
NC

5

X

O

O

X

6

O

X

X

O

7

O

O

X

X

8

X

X

O

O

12
NC

37

X

O

X

NC
NO

NO
X

O

X

X

NC
NC

NO

X

14

X

X

O

X

NO
NC

37
T37-196

NO

X

NO
NC
NC

O

X

NC

13
NO

9

O

NO
NO

37
37

Desired Circuit and
Operator Position

NC

37
37

Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
Mounting Location
Top
Bottom
Plunger
Plunger
A
B

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

NC

NO
NC

Tab37book.fm Page 197 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Selector Switch Operators

37

Key Operators

37

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Two-Position
Maintained 

37

Key Operators with Cam
Positions

Operator Action 

Two-position—60˚ throw
M

M
M

M

1, 2, 3

10250T1511_

10250T1611_

1

2

10250T1571_

10250T1581_

37

2

1–7

10250T1522_

10250T1622_

10250T1523_

10250T1623_

37

10250T1532_

10250T1632_

10250T1533_

10250T1633_

10250T1542_

10250T1642_

10250T1543_

10250T1643_

10250T1652_

10250T1662_

10250T1653_

10250T1663_

10250T1677_

10250T1687_

3

S

M

S

2, 4, 6

3
7

M

4

3
2

M

1, 4, 5

3
2

M
S

M

1

2

M
S

M

Horizontal Mounting
Catalogue Number

7

37
37

S

M

Four-position—40˚ throw

Vertical Mounting
Catalogue Number

M

M

Three-position—60˚ throw

Cam Code 

Optional Key
Removal Positions 

37
37
37
37
37

M

37

Notes
 Horizontal mount, key removal #1 keyed selector switch, cam 1 shown.
 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and tables on
Pages T37-194, T37-195 and T37-196.
 Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page T37-198. Add key removal code no. to listed catalogue number.
Example: 10250T15112.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-197

Tab37book.fm Page 198 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Key Removal Positions
C
L

R

Code
Suffix

Key Removal
Position

1

Right only

37

2

Left only

3

Right and left

37

4

Centre only

5

Right and centre

6

Left and centre

7

All positions

37

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note: Key removal in “spring
return from” positions not
recommended.

Replacement Keys or Dissimilar
Locks for Key Operators
Operators listed on Page
T37-198 have identical locks
and keys (Key Code H661)
Catalogue Number
10250ED824. For dissimilar
lock and key combinations,
see listing on this page.

37
37
37

Replacement Key
Description

Catalogue Number

Replacement keys
(code H661)

10250ED824

“H” Series Locks without
Master Key—with Key Slot
Cover
Lock and Key Code Numbers

Selector Switch Operators with
Dissimilar Locks and Keys
(UL [NEMA] 4, 4X and 13)
The locks in all key operators
listed on Pages T37-177,
T37-198 and T37-311 are
identical and use key code
number H661. Two keys are
supplied with every lock. For
additional code number H661
keys, order Catalogue
Number 10250ED824. For
others, order 10250ED1130
and designate lock number.
When dissimilar locks for
each operator or each group
of operators are required,
select from the lock and key
combination listed below.
When Ordering Operator
Only or a complete control
unit with a substitute lock,
order from table below and
add “except Lock and Key
Code No. …”

Master Keys for Above
Locks
Application

Catalogue Number

For code:

H501

H635

H663

H620

H639

H675

H621

H643

H683

H634

H654

H688

MD1–MD20

10250ED825-3

ME2–ME18

10250ED825-4

MJ1–MJ16

10250ED825-5

“M” Series Locks with
Master Key—with Key Slot
Cover
Lock and Key Code Numbers
MD1

MD14

ME8

MJ6

MD2

MD15

ME11

MJ10

MD3

MD16

ME16

MJ11

MD4

MD19

ME17

MJ13

MD5

MD20

ME18

MJ15

MD7

ME2

ME19

MJ16

MD9

ME3

MJ1

MD17

MD10

ME5

MJ3

MD11

ME6

MJ4

MD13

ME7

MJ5

Selector Switch Operators with Caps
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Selector Switch Operators with Caps

37
37
37

Positions
Two-Position
Maintained 

Operator Action 

Two-position—60˚ throw

37

M

M

M

S

Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 
Cam Code 
Catalogue Number

Black Lever Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 
Cam Code 
Catalogue Number

1

10250T1311

1

10250T3011

1

10250T1371

1

10250T3071

2
3

10250T1322
10250T1323

2
3

10250T3022
10250T3023

2
3
2
3
2
3

10250T1332
10250T1333
10250T1342
10250T1343
10250T1352
10250T1353

2
3
2
3
2
3

10250T3032
10250T3033
10250T304
10250T3043
10250T3052
10250T3053

7

10250T1367

7

10250T3067

37
37

Three-Position
Maintained 

Three-position—60˚ throw

M
M

37

S

37

S

M
M
M

M
S
M

37

M

Four-position—40˚ throw

37

M
M

37

S
M
M

Notes
 Black knob selector switch, cam 1 shown.
 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
 Field convertible to horizontal mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and
tables on Pages T37-194, T37-195 and T37-196.
 Black lever selector switch, cam 3 shown.

37
37
37
T37-198

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 199 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Selector Switch Operators without Caps
Operators can be ordered
with caps assembled to
them by adding the code
number from the table on
this page to the end of
catalogue number below.
Example: 10250T4011KB
Two-Position Selector
Switch Maintained

37
37
37
37

Selector Switch Operators without Caps
Operator Action 

Positions
Two-position—60˚ throw

M

M

M

S

Three-position—60˚ throw

M
M

M
M

S

M

M
S

S
M

M

Four-position—40˚ throw

M
M

Knob

S
M

37

Cam Code 

Catalogue Number

1

10250T4011

37

1

10250T4081

37

2

10250T4022

37

3

10250T4023

2

10250T4032

3

10250T4033

2

10250T4042

3

10250T4043

2

10250T4052

3

10250T4053

7

10250T4067

37
37
37
37
37

M

37
37

Operating Caps


Coin Slot
Catalogue and
Code Number

37

Colour

Lever
Catalogue and
Code Number

10250TLB

Black

10250TSB

10250TCB

37

10250TKR

10250TLR

Red

10250TSR

10250TCR

37

Green

10250TKG

10250TLG

Green

10250TSG

10250TCG

37

Yellow

10250TKY

10250TLY

Yellow

10250TSY

10250TCY

37

White

10250TKW

10250TLW

White

10250TSW

10250TCW

37

Gray

10250TKA

10250TLA

Gray

10250TSA

10250TCA

37

Blue

10250TKL

10250TLL

Blue

10250TSL

10250TCL

37

Orange

10250TKD

10250TLO

Orange

10250TSO

10250TCO

37

Colour

Knob
Catalogue and
Code Number

Lever
Catalogue and
Code Number

Black

10250TKB

Red

Lever

Lever for Use with
Maintained Operators

Coin Slot

Notes
 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and
tables on Pages T37-194, T37-195 and T37-196.
 Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.

37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-199

Tab37book.fm Page 200 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
Illuminated Selector Switches without Caps
Two-Position Selector
Switch Maintained

Operator without Knob or Lever

6 Volt #755 Lamp
Cam
Voltage
Code 

Code Number and
Catalogue Number 

Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 
Lamps: 6V—#755, 12V—#756, 24V—#757,
48V—#1835, 120/240V—120MB
Code Number and
Cam
Voltage
Catalogue Number 
Code 

1

1

Transformer Type—50/60 Hz

37
Positions

37

Operator Action 

Two-position—60˚ throw
M

37

M

37
37

24

10250T5961

6

10250T6201

120

10250T5971

12

10250T6211

208

10250T6511

24

10250T6221

240

10250T5981

48

10250T6231

380

10250T5991

120

10250T6361

480

10250T6001

240 

10250T6371

600

10250T6011

24

10250T602_

6

10250T624_

120

10250T603_

12

10250T625_

208

10250T652_

24

10250T626_

240

10250T604_

48

10250T627_

380

10250T605_

120

10250T638_

480

10250T606_

240 

10250T639_

600

10250T607_

24

10250T654_

6

10250T612_

120

10250T620_

12

10250T632_

37

208

10250T655_

24

10250T642_

240

10250T656_

48

10250T672_

37

380

10250T657_

120

10250T622_

480

10250T658_

240

10250T682_

37

600

10250T659_

24

10250T660_

6

10250T613_

120

10250T621_

12

10250T633_

208

10250T661_

24

10250T643_

240

10250T662_

48

10250T673_

380

10250T663_

120

10250T623_

480

10250T664_

240

10250T683_

600

10250T665_

24

10250T614_

6

10250T628_

120

10250T615_

12

10250T629_

208

10250T653_

24

10250T630_

37

240

10250T616_

48

10250T631_

380

10250T617_

120

10250T640_

37

480

10250T618_

240 

10250T641_

37

Three-position—60˚ throw

+ 2 or 3

M
M

37

M

37
37
+ 2 or 3

M

37

M

S

+ 2 or 3

M

37

S

M

37
37
37

+ 2 or 3

M
S

37

37

Four-position—40˚ throw

37

S

M
M

37
37

7

M
M

+ 2 or 3

+ 2 or 3

+ 2 or 3

+ 2 or 3

600

10250T619_

24

10250T6087

6

10250T6327

120

10250T6097

12

10250T6337

208

10250T6547

24

10250T6347

240

10250T6107

48

10250T6357

380

10250T6117

120

10250T6427

480

10250T6127

240 

10250T6437

600

10250T6137

7

Notes
 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
 For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection tables on Pages T37-194, T37-195 and T37-196.
 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page T37-225.
 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.

37
37
37
T37-200

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 201 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Knob

Lever

Illuminated Knobs and Levers
Colour 

Knob
Code Number and
Catalogue Number

Lever
Code Number and
Catalogue Number

Red

10250TER

10250TFR

Green

10250TEG

10250TFG

Yellow

10250TEA

10250TFA

Blue

10250TEL

10250TFL

Clear

10250TEC

10250TFC

White

10250TEW

10250TFW

Amber

10250TEM

10250TFM

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Joystick Units
Two-Position Joystick

37
Joystick Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37

Operator Position 
Up

Down
Centre

X

O

Operator
Action 
O

Contact
Type

S

1NC

S

1NC

Mounting Location
A
B

Two-Position
Assembled Unit
Catalogue Number 
10250T452-3X

M
O

O

X

37
37
37
37

Notes
 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer), red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
 Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-201

Tab37book.fm Page 202 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Joysticks
Two-Position Joystick Operators
The device mounts in the
standard 30.5 mm mounting
hole. Allow sufficient panel
space for lever movement.

The maximum travel of the
knob operator (full up to full
down) is 2.2 in (24˚)
momentary, 2.5 in (30˚)
maintained, but ample space
for lever operation must be
allowed. These operators are
field convertible from
momentary to maintained
operation or vice versa.

37
37
37
37
37

Two-Position Joystick
Operator

Two-Position Joystick Operators—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Two-Position Operator Only—AC Applications Only
Description 
Catalogue Number

Contact Block Limitations

37

Momentary Mode
4NC contact blocks max.
3NO contact blocks max.

37

Maintained Mode
2 contact blocks max.

37
37

The use of NC contacts is
preferred because they
provide positive drive contact
opening and a direct
relationship between lever
movement and affected
terminal, i.e., up movement
affects the top terminals.

Momentary up and down

10250T452

Maintained up—momentary down

10250T4521

Maintained down—momentary up

10250T4522

Maintained up and down

10250T4525

Contact Block Operation and Selection
Handle Position 
Up
Centre

Down

X

O

O

1NC

10250T51

O

O

X

1NC

10250T51

37

O

X

O

2LONC (Series)

10250T45

37

X

O

O

1NC

10250T3

O

O

X

1NC

X

X

O

1LONC

37

O

X

X

1LONC

X

O

O

1NC

37

O

O

X

1NO

37

O

O

X

1NC

X

O

O

1NO

37
37
37

37

Contact Block
Type 

Mounting Location 
Top A

Bottom B

Catalogue Number

10250T45

10250T44 

37
37

A and B Mounting Location
Locating Nib

37

Top
Contacts

Up

Bottom
Contacts

Down

Center

37
37

Up
NC Contact at Top
Is Closed, NO at
Bottom Is Closed

37

Center
All NC and NO Contacts
Are Open (1/2 Way),
Late Opening NC Is Closed

Down
NC Contact at Bottom
Is Closed, NO at
Top Is Closed

Notes
 Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa. To expedite shipment of maintained types,
order momentary operator 10250T452 which is a stocked device.
 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 See above for “A” and “B” mounting location.
 NO = normally open, NC = normally closed, LONC = late opening normally closed.
 Four circuits in single block depth—rated 300V max.

37
37
37
T37-202

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Application Caution
Joystick operators are not
recommended on certain DC
applications above 24 Vdc
which may involve lightly
engaging the contacts
(teasing) to achieve speed
control, positioning, jogging,
etc. Excessive arcing and
deterioration of the contacts
will occur.

Tab37book.fm Page 203 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Four-Position Joystick Operators
The joystick operated control
unit is intended for AC
application only. For other
use, see Application
Caution on preceding page.

Four-Position Joystick
Operator

The panel area required for
the four-position operator is
equivalent to two standard
pushbutton operators.

37

The latch holds the lever in
the centre position. The
trigger latch must be released
before lever can moved into
any position.

37
37
37

Four-Position Joystick Operators—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Contact Block Limitations

Description 

Catalogue Number

37
37

Operator Only—AC Application Only
Four contact blocks max.—two in each position

Four-position—without latch

10250T451_

Four-position—with latch

10250T461_

37

To plug unused hole

10250TA7

37

Hole Plug
Four contact blocks max.—two in each position
Four-Position Joystick
Operator with Latch

37
37
37
37

Field Conversion—Gate
The factory assembled fourposition operator is
assembled with a gate
arranged for four handle
positions.
Handle Positions

Two-, Three- or EightPosition Operation

Left
Up

Up

Right
Up

or
Two-Position
Gate
or

or

Left

Right

or
Left
Down

Three-Position
Gate
Four-Position
Gate

Three additional gates,
supplied with every operator,
allow on the job conversion to
three- or eight-position
operation as illustrated.

Adjacent Functions

Down

Right
Down

Maintained Position
Eight-Position
Gate

The eight-position gate
controls the four functions
shown as “Up,” “Down,”
“Left” and “Right.” The
remaining four diagonal
positions each actuate two
adjacent functions; for
example, “Left Down”
actuates both “Left” and
“Down.” The operator may
be arranged for spring return
of handle to centre position,
or maintained in up to eight
positions (see description of
maintained position operator).

For maintained position (nonspring return), locate required
maintained position or
positions of operating lever
and add appropriate suffix
number to the catalogue
number selected from the
table above.

Maintained Positions

37

Maintained Positions
Up Down Left Right

Suffix
Number

37

X

—

—

—

1

—

—

—

—

2

37

—

X

—

—

3

—

—

X

—

4

—

—

—

—

5

X

—

X

—

6

X

—

—

X

7

—

X

X

—

8

—

X

—

X

9

—

—

X

X

10

X

X

X

—

11

X

X

—

X

12

X

—

X

X

13

—

X

X

X

14

X

X

X

X

15

On an eight-position gate,
when an adjacent vertical and
horizontal position are both
maintained, the included
diagonal position is also
maintained.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note
 Momentary operators—spring return to centre. For maintained operators add suffix code from table on this page.
Example: 10250T45110. Operator without latch, maintained in left and right positions.

37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-203

Tab37book.fm Page 204 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Contact Block Operation

Blank Legend Plates for Joystick Operators

Contact blocks mount directly to the back of the operator. For
reliable operation, the maximum number of contact blocks that
should be installed behind each operator lever is two (four total).

When ordering engraved legend plates, order by catalogue
number and insert the following into order notes:

The figure below identifies the circuits activated by each of the
eight possible lever positions. Contact block plungers 1, 2, 3, 4
are depressed (change state) when handle is in the position
indicated by arrows below.

Legend required
Size of characters: 3/16,
1/8, 3/32 in (4.8, 3.2, 2.4 mm)
Location by letter (A–N)

●
●

●

Locations K and M can accommodate up to two lines
horizontally; L and N up to two lines vertically.

Circuit Activation

37

1

37

2

37

3

Maximum number of characters:
Horizontal
3/16 in—13, 1/8 in—14, 3/32 in—19
Vertical
3/16 in—10, 1/8 in—13, 3/32 in—14

●

●

4

37

Ordering Example:
Two-position legend plate to be marked “UP” “DOWN.”

37
37
37

Note: Joystick in its resting state, centre position, does not activate
contact block plungers.

Ordering Example:

37

Suppose you are looking for a four-position momentary joystick
without a latch and the following circuit arrangements.
X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit.

37

Example Circuit Arrangements

37

Circuit

Up

Down

Left

Right

1st

X

X

X

X

37

2nd

37

The contact blocks and their mounting locations would be as
follows:

37

X

O

O

X

Example Contact Blocks and Locations
2nd
1st
Circuit Circuit

37
37
37

NO

NO

NC

NO

10250T1 10250T2
NC

37

NO

K

K

2.19
(55.6)
Sq.

L

N

M

M

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

Blank Plate
10250TJS3

10250TJS4

Engraved Plate
10250TJS3STAMP

10250TJS4STAMP

Four-Position
C

A
B

C

D
F

E
G

J

H

Catalogue Number

37

A complete bill of material for this example would include:

37

Example Order

37

Two-Position

A
B

D
F

E
G

J

H

NO
NO
10250T1 10250T2

37

37

Catalogue No. 10250TJ2S4STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 in (4.8 mm)
Pos. K—UP
Pos. M—DOWN

10250TJS1

Qty.

Catalogue Number

1

10250T4

2

10250T2

2

10250T1

10250TJS2

Engraved Plate
10250TJS1STAMP

37
37
37
T37-204

Catalogue Number

Blank Plate

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

10250TJS2STAMP

Tab37book.fm Page 205 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Roto-Push Units

37

Two-Position Momentary
Complete assembled twoposition Roto-Push® Units are
listed below. These operators
have black flush buttons and
are arranged for vertical
mounting. Order legend
plates separately.

Mounting Location

37

Locating
Nib

37
A

37

B

37
37

Roto-Push—Black
Flush Button

Roto-Push Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position 
Collar Left
Typical Applications
(Most Common Examples)

37
37

Collar Right

Normal

Depressed

Normal

Depressed

FORWARD/REVERSE;
HIGH/LOW; OPEN/CLOSE;
UP/DOWN; etc.

O
O

O
X

O
O

X
O

JOG/RUN; MAN./AUTO;
etc.

O
O

Contact
Type

Mounting Location
A
B

Catalogue Number 

Two-Position
1NO

10250T2411-2

O
X

X
X

1NO

10250T24111-2

O
X

X
X

O
O

X
O

1NO

10250T24111-1

1NC
SAFE/RUN; etc.

O
O

O
O

O
X

X
X

1NO

37
37

10250T2415-2

1NO

Two-Position Latched
The two-position Roto-Push
Latch Unit is fully assembled
and only requires a legend
plate for a great variety of
applications. When the
selector collar is in the
extreme left position, the
button is in the free or normal
position and can be operated
as a standard pushbutton.
Rotating the collar to the

37
37

1NO
RUN/JOG; START/JOG;
etc.

37
37

1NO
X
O

37

37
37
37
37

extreme right position
automatically depresses and
latches the button in the
depressed position. The
white filled groove in the
button indicates the selector
collar position. The selector
collar has spring return to the
left position except when in
the extreme right latched
position.

37
37
37
37
37

Red Long

Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Colour and Type
of Button

Contact
Block

Vertical Mounting
Catalogue Number

Red long

1NC
2NC

10250T72

37
37
37

10250T73

Notes
 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 Roto-Push assembled with contact blocks.

37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-205

Tab37book.fm Page 206 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Roto-Push Operators
Roto-Push Components
A Roto-Push control unit
combines the function of a
pushbutton and a selector
switch. The contacts are
operated by the combined
action of rotating the outer
collar and pushing a button
contained in the collar.

37
37

In selecting the cam and
contact blocks for the listed
function, the analysis involves
considering the function with
the collar rotated to the given
position with the button free
(designated as “N”) and then
in that same position with
the button depressed
(designated “D”). This is
done for each rotational
position of the collar.

37
37

Operator and Cam

When Ordering Specify
●
Catalogue number of
operator with cam code
suffix from tables below
and on following pages,
Example: 10250T2411.
●
Catalogue number(s) for
contact blocks and legend
plates if required.
●
To select the cam and
contact blocks needed for
two-position and threeposition switches, use the
tables on following pages.

Operator and Cam

37

Colour and
Type of
Button

Cam Code No.
Select from Tables

Vertical Mounting
Catalogue and
Code Number

Horizontal Mounting
Catalogue and
Code Number

37

Black flush

+ 1 to 18

10250T241_

10250T251_

Red flush 

10250T242_

10250T252_

Green flush

10250T243_

10250T253_

37

Black long

10250T261_

10250T271_



10250T262_

10250T272_

37

Green long

10250T263_

10250T273_

37

37
37
37
37
37
37

Red long

Two-Position Roto-Push Operator—Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Special Rotor Latch
This differs from the other
Roto-Push operators in that
as the collar is rotated to the
right it depresses the button
and releases the button when
rotated left. But the button in
the released position can be
momentarily pushed
independent of the collar or

its position. As the button is
depressed by rotating the
collar, the button also rotates
and indicates its mode by a
white line on the button face.
This button can be used as an
emergency stop or latched
stop.

37
37

Special Roto Latch—
Red Long Button

37
37
37

Special Rotor Latch—
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Colour and Type
of Button

Vertical Mounting
Catalogue Number

Red long

10250T3213

Black long

10250T3214

Note
 Not to be used for emergency stop application.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-206

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 207 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push

37

Collar Position

37
Combination
Number

Circuit Sequence 
N
D
N

D

1

O

X

O

O

Cam Code 1

A
2

O

3

O

O

O

X

X

O

X

Cam Code 2

NO

—

A

Cam Code 4

—

—

Cam Code 5

A
—

—

—

O

X

O

O

B
5

O

X

O

X

A
B

NO

NO
NO

A

NC

B

NO

—

NC

A

NC

B

NO

B

NO

NO

O

X

X

O

—

—

—

7

O

X

X

X

—

—

A or B NO

8

X

O

O

O

—

—

9

X

O

O

X

—

—

10

X

O

X

O

A

NC

B

B

NC

11

X

O

X

X

B

12

X

X

O

O

—

13

X

X

O

O

—

14

X

X

X

O

A

NC

—

A

6

NC

37
A

NO

A

NC

B

NO

—

—

—

—

—

NO

A or B NC

B

NC

—

—

—

A

NC

37
37
37

—

B

37
37

NO

B

NO

—

B

NC

—

—

—

—

37
37
37
37

—

—

—

—

—

B

—

—

NO
NC

NO

—

—

A
B

37

—

—

—

B

37

NO

A

B
4

37

Cam Code 6
—

NO

—

—

Cam Code 3

A
B
NC

A

NO
NC
NC

37
37
37

NC

A

NC

—

A
B
—

NO
NC

A
B
A

NO
NC
NC

—

37
37

—

37
Series and Parallel
Connections
A
B

NO
NC

Circuit Location

37

Locating
Nib

37
37

A

Series Connection

B
A
B

37

NO
NC

Parallel Connection

The connections are not
made at the factory. They are
illustrated in the selection
table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.

37

Letters “A” and “B”
represent the locations which
the two circuits of a contact
block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the
operator.

37
37
37

Note
 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.

37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-207

Tab37book.fm Page 208 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push, continued
Collar Position

37
37

Combination
Number

Circuit Sequence 
N
D
N

D

Cam Code 10

15

O

X

—

O

O

Cam Code 11

A
B

37
37
37
37

16

O

17

O

O

18

O

O

X

X

X

O

O

X

O

19

37

20

O

X

X

O

37

21

O

X

X

X

X

22

X

O

O

O

37

NO

B

A

NO

A
B

Cam Code 14
—

A or B NC

A

—

—

—

—

—

A

NC

—

A
B

NO
NC
NO

—

B

A
B

A

NC

A

NC

B

NC

B

NC

X

O

O

X

—

—

24

X

O

X

O

—

A

25

X

O

X

X

A

NC

A
B

26

X

X

O

O

B

NC

B

27

X

X

O

O

—

B

NO
NO

A
B

NC
NO

A
B

NO
NC

—

NC

—

—

—

A
B

—

—

—

—

—

A
B

—

—

—

—

B

—

—

—

B

NO

NO

—

NO
NO

23

NC

NO

—

A

37
37

NC

B
NO

O

37

37

A

B

Cam Code 13
—

NO
NO

X

37
O

—

Cam Code 12
—

NC

NC
NO

NO
NC

37
37
37
37
37

28

X

X

X

O

—

37
37
37
37

Series and Parallel
Connections
A
B

37
37

NO
NC

A

A
B

NC
NC

—

A
B

A
B

NO
NC

Parallel Connection

Letters “A” and “B”
represent the locations which
the two circuits of a contact
block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the
operator.

37
37

Note
 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.

T37-208

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

NC

A or B NO

A
B

Locating
Nib

NO
NC

The connections are not
made at the factory. They are
illustrated in the selection
table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.

37

NC

Circuit Location

Series Connection

37

NO
NO

NO

A
—

—

NO

Tab37book.fm Page 209 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push

37

Collar Position

37
Combination
Number

Circuit Sequence 
N D N D N

D

1

O

X

O

O

O

O

Cam Code 7
A
B

2

O

3

O

O
O

O
O

O
X

X
O

X
O

Cam Code 8
A

NO
NO B

—

Cam Code 15 

Cam Code 9
NC

—

NO

—

B

NO

A
B

NO
NC

—

4

O

O

O

X

O

X

—

—

5

O

O

O

X

X

X

—

—

6

O

O

X

X

O

O

—

NO

B

NO

—

Cam Code 18

37

A

NC

B

NO

37

—

NO

37

—
A
B

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

B


A

7

O

O

X

X

O

X

O

9

O

10

O

11

O

O

O
X

X

X

X
O

O

X

X
O

O

X

X
O

O

O

37
37
—

—

—

37

—

—

—

—

—

—

37

—

—

—

—

—

—

B

A
B

B

NO

B

NO

A
B

NO A
NC B

NO

O

—

A

A

—

—

A
B

NO

37

NO

A

NO A
NO B

NO
NO
NO

NO

—

X

O

O

X

X

—

—

—

—

—

13

O

X

O

X

O

O

—

—

—

—

—

—

14

O

X

O

X

O

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

15

O

X

X

X

O

O

—

—

—

—

—

—

16

O

X

X

X

O

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

17

O

X

X

X

X

X

—

—

—

—

—

A
B
NO
NO

NO
NC

NO
NO

—

37

—

37
A

NO

A
B

NO
NO

Locating
Nib
A

37
37
37
37

Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations
which the two circuits of a contact block will
occupy in relation to the locating nib of the
operator.

B

A
B

37
37

Circuit Location

The connections are not made at the factory.
They are illustrated in the selection table as
requirements, but must be made on the job.

Series Connection

NO
NO

37
37

NO

Series and Parallel Connections
A
B

A
B

NO
NC

—

O

A

37



NO
NC

12

A
B

37

—

NC

X

37

—

A

X

NO

NO
NO

—

B
8

NO
NO

NO

—
A
B

37

—

A
—

—

Cam Code 17
—



B

—

—

Cam Code 16

37
37
37

NO
NC

37

Parallel Connection

37

Notes
 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
 Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page T37-222.

37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-209

Tab37book.fm Page 210 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push, continued
Collar Position

37
37

Combination
Number

Circuit Sequence 
N D N D N

D

37

18

X

O

O

O

O

O

Cam Code 7

Cam Code 8 

Cam Code 9

Cam Code 15

Cam Code 16

Cam Code 17

Cam Code 18

A

NC

—

—

—

—

—

—

B

NC
NC

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

A

NC

B

NC

37

19

X

O

O

O

X

X

—

A

37

20

X

O

O

O

X

O

—

A

NC

B

NC

37
37
37
37

21

X

O

X

X

O

O

—

—

22

X

O

X

X

X

X

A
B

NC A
NO B

23

X

O

X

X

X

O

A

NC —

NC —
NO

—

A

NC

B

—

—

A

NC

—

—

B

NC

—

A

NC

B

NC
NC

37
37

24

X

O

X

O

X

O

—

—

37

25

X

O

X

O

X

X

—

37

26

X

X

O

O

O

O

B

37

27

X

X

O

O

O

X

28

X

X

O

O

X

O

—

B

29

X

X

O

O

X

X

—

A
B

37

30

X

X

X

X

O

O

—

—

37

31

X

X

X

X

X

O

A
B

32

X

X

X

O

X

O

—

37

A
B

NC

NO
NC

—

—

—

—

—

A

—

NC

A

NC

B

NC

A


NC

—

NC

A
B

—

—

A

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NC —
NO

—

—

—

—

—

A

—

B

NC

NC
NO

37
37

37
37

33

X

X

X

O

X

X

—

NC
NC

A
B

NC A
NO B
B

NO
NC

—
—

NC

—



—
—

37
37

Series and Parallel Connections

37

A
B

37

Series Connection

37
37
37

NO
NC

The connections are not made at the factory.
They are illustrated in the selection table as
requirements, but must be made on the job.

B

NC

A
B

NO
NC

NO
NC

Parallel Connection
Notes
 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
 Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page T37-222.

37
T37-210

—

—

A
B

—

—

B

—

—

A
B

NO
NC
NC

NC
NC

Circuit Location
Locating
Nib
A
B

A
B

NC

NC

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations
which the two circuits of a contact block will
occupy in relation to the locating nib of the
operator.

Tab37book.fm Page 211 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Accessories

37

Padlocks not included with
padlocking attachments. For
operators with built-in
padlock attachment, see
Page T37-176.

37
37
37

Accessories
Description

Catalogue Number

37

Padlock Attachments
10250TA2

10250TA26

Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.
Will not lock NO contact.

10250TA2

Padlocking Attachment for Use with Extended Pushbutton
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.

10250TA26

37
37
37
37

10250TA36

10250TA38

Padlocking Cover Guard
Cover locked over flush button makes it unaccessible or on extended button
locks NC contacts open. Takes 1/4 in shank size padlock.

10250TA36

Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard
When used with a 1/4 in padlock, makes flush and long button and knob selector
switch unaccessible, but not locked down. Without the padlock, it is a flip-up guard.
Padlock hasp can be removed before assembly.

10250TA38

Padlocking Attachment for Use with Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
Used on long button operators. Stainless steel. Use only for locking NC contacts open.

10250TA63

37
37
37
37
37

10250TA63

37
37

10250TA64

10250TA11

Padlock Attachment
For use with illuminated pushbuttons and maintained push-pull operators having
standard button or lens only. Use 1/4 in padlock. Locks in down position only.

10250TA64

Padlocking Attachment for Non-Illuminated Knob Selector Switches
Provision for up to 5, 1/4 in padlocks.

10250TA11

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-211

Tab37book.fm Page 212 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Accessories, continued

37

Description

37

Catalogue Number

Shrouds and Guards
10250TA6

Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator
Prevents accidental operation. (Not for push-pull operators.)

10250TA6

10250TA12

Extended Retaining Nut
Replaces standard nut and provides guard for flush head pushbutton operators.

10250TA12

10250TA15

Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton

10250TA15

10250TA56_

Shroud
For jumbo mushroom head operator.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Gray

10250TA56

37

Yellow

10250TA56Y

10250ED1241

Half Shroud—Yellow
For jumbo mushroom head operator.

10250ED1241

10250TA101

Fingerproof Shroud—10 per package
Fits new style contact blocks and light units.

10250TA101

37
37
37
37
37
37

Boots
10250TA_

37

Black

37
37

Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
For use with button operators (extended buttons preferred).
Temperature to –25˚F (–32˚C).
(See Page T37-215 for 10250TA96 Tightening Tool.)
10250TA4 

Green

10250TA10

10250TA25

Transparent Boot
For regular illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest—
Temperature to –38˚F (–39˚C). 

10250TA4_

Boot for Flush Pushbutton

37

10250TA3

Red

10250TA25

37
37

Clear

10250TA46

37

Black

10250TA47

Red

10250TA48

37

Green

10250TA49

Notes
 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-212

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 213 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Accessories, continued
Description

37

Catalogue Number

37

Hardware and Kits
10250TK3

10250TK5

56-9337

Thrust Washers—
To meet Ford Motor Co. mounting specifications.

10250TK3

Contact Block Tape Seal—
Seals plunger openings on last contact block. Order in multiples of 10 pieces.

10250TK5

Selector Switch Operator Gasket—
Seals out dust from getting in-between the cam and contact block plungers.
Supplied as standard with all selector switches.

56-9337

37
37
37
37
37
37

10250TA3_

10250TA62

Special Retaining Nut—
To accommodate thick panel:

37

Indicating lights

10250TA30

PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches

10250TA31

Terminal Block—
Two terminals, each will accommodate two wire terminations.

37
37

10250TA62

37
37
10250TA8

Spacer Ring—
Used when legend plate is not required.

10250TA8

37
37

10250TA79

Stacking Screw—
Replaces transformer mounting screws on indicating light so terminal block
10250TA62 can be mounted to light to support and connect a series resistor.
This screw also fits all contact blocks. Order in multiples of 10.

10250TA2_

Base Mounting Spacers —

10250TKG_

10250TA7_

10250TA79

37
37

Equivalent to contact block in depth
(one block deep).

10250TA22

37

Complete with screws, washers, etc.
(two block deep).

10250TA23

37
37

Grounding Kits—
Kits consist of a ring connector and a #6 screw for mounting connector to rear
of contact block mounting screw.

37

All components except standard indicating lights and PresTest indicating lights.

10250TKG1

Standard indicating lights

10250TKG2 

PresTest indicating lights

10250TKG3 

37
37

Contact Block Terminal Jumpers—
Available in multiples of 100 only.

37

Terminal to terminal—within block (short)
100 per pkg.

10250TA70

1000 per pkg.

10250TA70-2

37
37

Terminal to terminal—block to block (long)
100 per pkg.

10250TA71

1000 per pkg.

10250TA71-2

37

Notes
 Component only. Not to be used for custom built (factory assembled) stations.
 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.

37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-213

Tab37book.fm Page 214 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Accessories, continued

37

Description

37

Catalogue Number

Special Operators and Attachments
10250TA5

Wobble Stick
Complete with retaining nut—fits standard button.

10250TA5

10250TA14

Lever Operator
For use with two vertically mounted flush pushbuttons.

10250TA14

10250TA_

Maintained Contact Attachment Release Button Assembly 
Mechanically interlocks with another pushbutton and contact block (not included).
Provides mode indication. Minimum hole centers 1.62 in (41.1 mm), maximum
2.313 in (58.8 mm).

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

37
37
37
37
37

Black

10250TA17

Red

10250TA18

37

Green

10250TA19

Yellow

10250TA20

Same with Long Button—Black

10250TA39

37
37

10250TA1

Maintained Contact Attachment 
Mechanically interlocks two buttons and provides position indication for one.
Use with two pushbutton operators and one or more contact blocks.

10250TA1

10250TA13

Roto-Push Lever Operator—
Used to provide lever operation for Roto-Push operators.

10250TA13

37
37
37
37
37
37

Special Light Modules
10250TA79

37

48 Vdc

37
37

10250TFL_

37
37
37

Master Test (Dual Input) Module—
Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation
between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.

10250ED986-4

37

Flasher Module—
Changes any AC illuminated device to a controlled flashing light.
Fits 10250T, E30 and E34 devices.
24V

10250TFL2

120V

10250TFL1

Flashing Incandescent Lamp—
For use with 120V transformer type or 6V full voltage type indicating lights including
PresTest and most E29 devices.

37
37

Note
 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.

37
37
37
T37-214

10250TMT8

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

10250ED986-4

Tab37book.fm Page 215 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Accessories, continued
Description

37

Catalogue Number

37

Hole Plugs
10250TA7

Plug—
For unused holes—steel, painted gray (stainless steel, use E30KT5, see Page T37-160)

10250TA7

37
37

Tools
10250TA95

Octagonal 10250T (notched to fit over selector switch lever), E29 and E30

37

10250TA95

37
37
E22CW

E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T (will not fit over selector switch levers)

E22CW

10250TA96

Tool for Tightening Boots—
Used to install boot Catalogue Numbers 10250TA3, A4, A10 and A25.

10250TA96

10250TA102

10250T, E34 Allen Wrench—
Used for removal of jumbo mushroom head.

10250TA102

10250TA74

Lamp Removal Tools—
For transformer type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches.
Fits #12 lamp.

10250TA74

E30KV1

For full voltage and resistor type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and
selector switches and E30.

E30KV1

E29KLT

Standard indicating lights. Fits #44, #755, #6S6 and #10S6.

E29KLT

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-215

Tab37book.fm Page 216 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Options
Legend Plates
Legend Plates with Standard Markings
spacing less than 1.75 in,
The legend plates listed
replace the S in the catalogue
below are sized for all
number with MS, or the M
standard commercial
with P (except push-pull). No
enclosures and Eaton’s cast
change in price. The smaller
enclosures. For vertical

size legend plates, “MS” or
“P” size, have limited space
for legend.

For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights—Standard

Square Legend Plate

37

Legend

Colour of
Field

Square 
Catalogue Number

1/2 Round
Catalogue Number

Legend

Colour of
Field

Square 
Catalogue Number

1/2 Round
Catalogue Number

Blank—see table on Page T37-218.

37
1/2 Round Legend Plate

Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High

37

CLAMP

10250TS90

10250TM90

OFF

Red

10250TS24

10250TM24

CLOSE

10250TS73

10250TM11

ON

Black

10250TS25

10250TM25

37

DOWN

10250TS74

10250TM12

OPEN

10250TS26

10250TM26

Black

EMERG. STOP

Red

10250TS13

10250TM13

OUT

10250TS27

10250TM27

FAST

Black

10250TS75

10250TM14

POWER ON

10250TS80

10250TM80

37

FASTER

10250TS87

10250TM87

RAISE

10250TS28

10250TM28

FEEDER ON

10250TS94

10250TM94

READY

10250TS86

10250TM86

37

FEEDER OFF

10250TS95

10250TM95

RESET

10250TS29

10250TM29

FORWARD

10250TS15

10250TM15

REVERSE

10250TS30

10250TM30

HIGH

10250TS16

10250TM16

RUN

10250TS31

10250TM31

IN

10250TS17

10250TM17

SAFE

10250TS85

10250TM85

INCH

10250TS18

10250TM18

SLOW

10250TS32

10250TM32

37

JOG

10250TS19

10250TM19

SLOWER

10250TS88

10250TM88

JOG FOR.

10250TS20

10250TM20

START

10250TS33

10250TM33

37

JOG REV.

10250TS21

10250TM21

STOP

Red

10250TS34

10250TM34

LOW

10250TS22

10250TM22

TEST

Black

10250TS83

10250TM83

LOWER

10250TS23

10250TM23

TRANSFER

10250TS93

10250TM93

37

LUBE-FAIL

10250TS92

10250TM92

TRIP

10250TS84

10250TM84

MOTOR RUN

10250TS81

10250TM81

UNCLAMP

10250TS91

10250TM91

37

MOTOR STOP

10250TS82

10250TM82

UP

10250TS35

10250TM35

37

37
37

37

37

Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square

37
37
37

Colour
Lettering

Field

Standard
Catalogue Number

Jumbo 
Catalogue Number

Extra Large
Catalogue Number

Black

White or silver 

10250TSP76

10250TLP76

10250TEP76

White

Red or black 

10250TSP77

10250TLP77

10250TEP77

Notes
 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Colour is on lower portion.
 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field colour required.
 See Appendix 4 for French engraving.

37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-216

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 217 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Square Legend Plate

37.7

For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators—Standard Size
Legend

Colour of
Field

1/2 Round
Square 
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

Legend

Colour of
Field

Square 
1/2 Round
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

Blank—see table on Page T37-218.
1/2 Round Legend Plate

2-Position—5/32 in High Lettering
FOR. REV.

70 mm Round—Plastic
Legend Plate

Black

10250TM38

AUTO OFF HAND

HAND AUTO

10250TS39

10250TM39

HIGH LOW

10250TS40

10250TM40

JOG RUN

10250TS41

MAN. AUTO
OFF ON

Black

10250TS49

10250TM49

FOR. OFF REV.

10250TS50

10250TM50

FOR. SAFE REV.

10250TS69

10250TM69

10250TM41

HAND OFF AUTO

10250TS51

10250TM51

10250TS67

10250TM67

MAN. OFF AUTO

10250TS68

10250TM68

10250TS42

10250TM42

OPEN OFF CLOSE

10250TS53

10250TM53

OPEN CLOSE

10250TS43

10250TM43

RUN SAFE JOG

10250TS70

10250TM70

RUN JOG

10250TS44

10250TM44

UP OFF DOWN

10250TS54

10250TM54

SAFE RUN

10250TS45

10250TM45

ON STOP SAFE

10250TS71

10250TM71

START JOG

10250TS46

10250TM46

START STOP

10250TS47

10250TM47

UP DOWN

10250TS48

10250TM48

Red

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

45 mm and 70 mm Plastic—Round
Colour
Lettering

Field

Catalogue Number

Yellow or red 

10250TRP78

Blank

Yellow or red 

10250TRP76

Red EMERG. STOP

Yellow

10250TRP79

37
37

45 mm
Blank

37
37

3-Position—1/8 in High Lettering

10250TS38

37

37

70 mm

37
37

For Push-Pull Units 
Legend

Colour of
Field

Square 
Catalogue Number

37

1/2 Round
Catalogue Number

37

Standard Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/32 in High
PULL START/PUSH STOP

Green/red

10250TPP2

10250TR2

PUSH ON/PULL OFF

Black

10250TPP5

10250TR5

37
37

PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE

Black

10250TPP8

10250TR8

PULL UP/PUSH DOWN

Black

10250TPP11

10250TR11

37
37

Jumbo Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 1/8 in High
PULL START/PUSH STOP

Green/red

10250TPP3

10250TR3

PULL ON/PUSH OFF

Black

10250TPP6

10250TR6

PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE

Black

10250TPP9

10250TR9

PULL UP/PUSH DOWN

Black

10250TPP12

10250TR12

37
37

Notes
 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Colour is on lower portion.
 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field colour required.
 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols
in the centre of the plate.
 See Appendix 4 for French engraving.

37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-217

Tab37book.fm Page 218 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings
Catalogue No.:
When Ordering Specify
10250TS36STAMP
●
Catalogue number of blank
Letter Size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm)
plate phase plus Suffix
Pos. A—POWER HOUSE
“STAMP.”
Pos. B—START PUMP 1
●
Insert the following into
Order Notes: legend, letter
size and locations (letters
A–W)—combine letters for
definitive locations as
shown.

Blackening Kit

Legend Characters
Available

Solution blackens aluminum
exposed by engraving
process. Must be applied
immediately after engraving.
0.3 oz. bottle—sufficient for
approximately 1100 legend
plates.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
OPQRSTUVWXYZ/-.,
1234567890
Legend characters on black
and red plates are white—
on satin aluminum plates,
characters are black.

Catalogue Number:
10250TBK

Ordering Example:

37
37

Legend Positions

37

Extra Large Size
Cat. No. 10250TNP99

Small Size
10250TMS or TP Series

A

A
Jumbo Size
10250TL or TJ Series

C
D

37

A
B
C
D
K

K
L

37
37

37

37
37
37
37
37

AE

AF

B4

C4

A4

D4
G

A
H

I

Four-Position Selector Switch
Push-Pull with Symbols 
Extra Large 
Standard
Standard
Jumbo 
Small
Standard
Jumbo 
Custom 
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

Colour

10250TMS36

10250TS36

10250TL36

—

10250TS76

10250TS72

10250TPP17

10250TPP18

Red

10250TMS37

10250TS37

10250TL37

—

—

—

—

—

Green/red

—

—

—

—

—

—

10250TPP20

10250TPP21

Satin alum.

—

—

—

10250TNP99

—

—

—

—

1/2 Round

Black

10250TP36

10250TM36

10250TJ36

—

—

10250TM72

10250TR17

10250TR18

Red

10250TP37

10250TM37

10250TJ37

—

—

—

—

—

Green/red

—

—

—

—

—

—

10250TR20

10250TR21

Satin alum.

—

10250TM89

10250TJ89

—

—

—

—

—

Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions
Top
(Aluminum
and Plastic)

Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
Width
Height

Small 

1.59 (40.4)

1.59 (40.4)

37
37

AB

Black

37
37

F

Style

37
37

G

Square 

37
37

B

Blank and Custom Engraved Legend Plates

37
37

A

B

37

37

Standard Size
10250TS or TM Series

Standard and
custom

1.75 (44.5)

Jumbo 

2.19 (55.6)

Extra large 

2.44 (62)

1.75 (44.5)
2.19 (55.6)
2.44 (62)

Style

Character Size
3/32 in High
Number
Number of
of Lines
Characters

1/8 in High
Number
of Lines

3/16 in High
Number
of Lines

Number of
Characters

Square

1

17

—

—

—

—

1/2 Round

1

15

1

12

1

9

Square

2

18

2

13

1

9

1/2 Round

2

15

2

12

1

9

Square

5

23

3

18

2

12

1/2 Round

5

19

4

15

2

11

Square

6

25

3

18

3

12

Notes
 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols
in the centre of the plate.
 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
 When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures.
 Slightly larger than standard size for legends requiring more space—fits cast enclosures.
 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Colour is on lower portion.
 Recommended only when mounting on minimum centers (less than 1-3/4 in [44.5 mm] vertical centers).
 Can be used on top row only of any enclosure.

T37-218

Number of
Characters

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 219 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Enclosures

37

Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures

37

Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 
Number of
Elements
Die Cast Enclosure

Polyester Enclosure

Stainless Steel
Enclosure

One Contact Block Depth
Catalogue Number

37

Two Contact Block Depth
Catalogue Number

37

Die Cast Enclosure—In-Line  NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
1

10250TN1

10250TN11

2

10250TN2

10250TN12

3

10250TN3

10250TN13

4

—

10250TN14

37
37
37

Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1

—

E34N51

2

—

E34N52

3

—

E34N53

4

—

E34N54

37
37
37

Stainless Steel —In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1

—

10250TN33

2

—

10250TN34

3

—

10250TN35

4

—

10250TN36

37
37
37
37

Dimensions, see Page T37-232.

37
37

Mounting Instructions
One and Two Contact Block
Depth Enclosures

37

Enclosure Layouts

37

Top – For Vertical Mounting
1

One Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

3

Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure

4

Top – For Horizontal
Mounting

Two-position joystick must be
used with two contact block
deep enclosures (maximum
number of contact blocks = 1).
Four-position joysticks cannot
be used within these
enclosures.

37
37
37
37

Notes
 For spacing increments, see Page T37-220.
 All die cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23.
See listing on Page T37-213.
 When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
 When used with resistor light units, only the 2 contact block depth enclosure can be used.
 14 gauge, type 304.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-219

Tab37book.fm Page 220 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only
Flush Mounting Covers

Covers Only—Flush Mounting
Number of
Elements

37

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

Flush Die Cast Covers

37

In-Line Deep
Cover

In-Line Flat
Cover

37

1

10250TF11

10250TF1

2

10250TF12

10250TF2

37

3

10250TF13

10250TF3

4

10250TF14

10250TF4

37

In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 
With Pullbox

37
37
37

37
37
37

1

10250TS10

10250TS1

2

10250TS11

10250TS2

3

10250TS12

10250TS3

4

10250TS14

10250TS4

Dimensions, see Page T37-233.

37
37

Without Pullbox

Spacing Increments
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Type

F

G

H

Die cast

2.44 (62)

2.5 (63.5)

1.88 (47.8)

Polyester

1.88 (47.8)

Min. 2.13 (54.1)

2.25 (57.2)

Stainless steel

1.69 (42.9)

Min. 1.73 (43.9)

2.25 (57.2)

37
37

Spacing Increments for
Enclosures

Top – For Vertical Mounting
G

37

H

1

37
37
37

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

3
4

F

Top – For Horizontal
Mounting

37

37

Enclosure Layouts

Note
 Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-220

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 221 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Colour-coded plungers—
red/green for NC/NO
circuits
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Gray (opaque) or amber
(translucent) housings
●
Pressure plate or spade
terminals
●
Fingerproof shrouds (for
pressure terminals only)
Logic Level Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Colour-coded plungers
●
Inert palladium knife-blade
contacts
●
Gray (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate or spade
terminals
Special Function Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Colour-coded plungers
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Gray (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate terminals
only

37
Special Purpose Contact Block
●
Maximum 300V rated
●
Black plungers
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Black (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate terminals
only
●
Fingerproof shrouds not
available
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs are the
hallmark of Eaton’s contact
blocks. A pointed silver nib on
the contact tip ensures
reliable switching from logic
level (5V) up to 600V
applications. Therefore
standard contact blocks can
be used for most logic level
applications where the
contacts are not exposed to
any harsh environmental
conditions.

Palladium Contacts
Palladium, which is more
inert than gold, is well suited
for voltages and currents
approaching zero and is
recommended for applications
where environmental
conditions are a factor.

37
37
37
37

Maximum Contact Block
Mounting per Operator Type

37

Operator

Max.
Stack

37

Pushbuttons

6

Push-pull operators

2

37

Roto-push operators

4

Two- or three-position
selector switches

6

Four-position selector
switches

4

Joysticks

4

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-221

Tab37book.fm Page 222 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37

10250T1

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Contact Blocks

Symbol

Circuit

Description 

Standard
Pressure Terminal
Catalogue Number

Spade Terminal 
Catalogue Number

Logic Level
Pressure Terminal
Catalogue Number

Spade Terminal 
Catalogue Number

37

Blank
No
Plunger

1NC

Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T51

10250T59

10250T51E

10250T59E

37

Blank
No
Plunger

1NO

Stack up to six blocks six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T53

10250T60

10250T53E

10250T60E

NO-NC

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T1

10250T40

10250T1E

10250T40E

2NC

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T3

10250T42

10250T3E

10250T42E

2NO

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T2

10250T41

10250T2E

10250T41E

37
37
37

Special Function Blocks 

37

LONC

Late opening NC. Stack up to six
blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.

10250T71 

—

10250T71E 

—

ECNONC

Early closing NO and standard NC.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T47 

—

10250T47E 

—

37

ECNONO

Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T57 

—

10250T57E 

—

37

2LONC

Two late opening NC contacts.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T45 

—

10250T45E 

—

LONCECNO

Overlapping contacts. Stack up to
10250T55 
four blocks unless otherwise noted.

—

10250T55E 

—

Blank
No
Plunger

37
37

37
37

Special Purpose Blocks 

37

2NO2NC

37

Four circuits in single block depth.
Rated 300V max. Stack up to four
blocks unless otherwise noted.

10250T44 

—

Notes
 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).
Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
 Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or roto-push operators. Okay to use with three-position push-pull operators only
on low voltage (30V or less) circuits. Fingerproof shrouds not available.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-222

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 223 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

10250T1CP

Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
Logic Level
Pressure Terminal 
Catalogue Number

Circuit

Description 

Standard
Pressure Terminal 
Catalogue Number

Blank
No
Plunger

1NC

Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.

10250T51P

10250T51EP

Blank
No
Plunger

1NO

Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.

10250T53P

10250T53EP

NO-NC

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.

10250T1P

10250T1EP

2NC

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.

10250T3P

10250T3EP

2NO

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.

10250T2P

10250T2EP

Symbol

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Special Function Blocks 
Blank
No
Plunger

LONC

Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.

10250T71P 

10250T71EP 

37

ECNO-NC

Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks
unless otherwise noted.

10250T47P 

10250T47EP 

37





37

ECNO-NO

Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks
unless otherwise noted.

10250T57P

10250T57EP

2LONC

Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T45P 

10250T45EP 

37

LONC-ECNO

Overlapping contacts. Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T55P 

10250T55EP 

37

Notes
 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
 To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change suffix P to CP in catalogue number e.g. 10250T51CP.
 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-223

Tab37book.fm Page 224 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37

10250T1C

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Amber Contact Blocks

Symbol

Circuit

Description 

Standard
Pressure Terminal 
Catalogue Number

Spade Terminal 
Catalogue Number

Logic Level
Pressure Terminal 
Catalogue Number

Spade Terminal 
Catalogue Number

37

Blank
No
Plunger

1NC

Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T51C

10250T59C

10250T51EC

10250T59EC

37

Blank
No
Plunger

1NO

Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T53C

10250T60C

10250T53EC

10250T60EC

NO-NC

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T1C

10250T40C

10250T1EC

10250T40EC

2NC

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T3C

10250T42C

10250T3EC

10250T42EC

2NO

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T2C

10250T41C

10250T2EC

10250T41EC

—

10250T71EC 

—

37
37
37

Special Function Blocks 

37

LONC

Late opening NC. Stack up to six
10250T71C 
blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise
noted.

ECNONC

Early closing NO and standard NC.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T47C 

—

10250T47EC 

—

37

ECNONO

Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T57C 

—

10250T57EC 

—

37

2LONC

Two late opening NC contacts.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T45C 

—

10250T45EC 

—

LONCECNO

Overlapping contacts. Stack up to
10250T55C 
four blocks unless otherwise noted.

—

10250T55EC 

—

Blank
No
Plunger

37
37

37
37

Notes
 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
 To order amber contact blocks with fingerproof shrouds, change suffix to CP in the catalogue number e.g. 10250T51CP. Not available with spade terminals.
 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).
Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-224

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 225 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Replacement Parts

37
37

Replacement Lamps—For 10250T Illuminated Operators
Mfg. Lamp Type

Voltage

Base Style

Application

Part Number

120MB

120V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T resistor indicating light

28-3044

#267

6.3V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T flasher

10250ED986-4

#755

6.3V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T transformer, PresTest and full voltage

28-2202

#756

12V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T full voltage

28-5184

#757

24V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T full voltage

28-5185

#1828

32V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T full voltage

28-5186

#1835

55V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T resistor

28-5185

NE48

120V

T 4-1/2 bayonet

10250T neon

28-494

NE51H-R22

120V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T neon

28-3754

NE51H-R68

240V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T neon

28-3755

Standard LED Lamp

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Replacement LED Lamps—For 10250T, E34 and E22 Units

Voltage
6–12V

24V

48V

60V

120V

Colour

Continuous
AC/DC
Catalogue Number

Flashing
AC
Catalogue Number

DC
Catalogue Number

Red

E22LED612RN

E22LED006RAF

E22LED006RDF

Orange

E22LED612ON

E22LED006OAF

E22LED006ODF

Yellow

E22LED612YN

E22LED006YAF

E22LED006YDF

Green

E22LED612GN

E22LED006GAF

E22LED006GDF

Blue

E22LED612BN

E22LED006BAF

E22LED006BDF

White

E22LED612WN

E22LED006WAF

E22LED006WDF

Red

E22LED024RN

E22LED024RAF

E22LED024RDF

Orange

E22LED024ON

E22LED024OAF

E22LED024ODF

Yellow

E22LED024YN

E22LED024YAF

E22LED024YDF

Green

E22LED024GN

E22LED024GAF

E22LED024GDF

Blue

E22LED024BN

E22LED024BAF

E22LED024BDF

White

E22LED024WN

E22LED024WAF

E22LED024WDF

Red

E22LED048RN

E22LED048RAF

E22LED048RDF

Orange

E22LED048ON

E22LED048OAF

E22LED048ODF

Yellow

E22LED048YN

E22LED048YAF

E22LED048YDF

Green

E22LED048GN

E22LED048GAF

E22LED048GDF

Blue

E22LED048BN

E22LED048BAF

E22LED048BDF

White

E22LED048WN

E22LED048WAF

E22LED048WDF

Red

E22LED060RN

E22LED060RAF

E22LED060RDF

Orange

E22LED060ON

E22LED060OAF

E22LED060ODF

Yellow

E22LED060YN

E22LED060YAF

E22LED060YDF

Green

E22LED060GN

E22LED060GAF

E22LED060GDF

Blue

E22LED060BN

E22LED060BAF

E22LED060BDF

White

E22LED060WN

E22LED060WAF

E22LED060WDF

Red

E22LED120RN

E22LED120RAF

E22LED120RDF

Orange

E22LED120ON

E22LED120OAF

E22LED120ODF

Yellow

E22LED120YN

E22LED120YAF

E22LED120YDF

Green

E22LED120GN

E22LED120GAF

E22LED120GDF

Blue

E22LED120BN

E22LED120BAF

E22LED120BDF

White

E22LED120WN

E22LED120WAF

E22LED120WDF

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-225

Tab37book.fm Page 226 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37
37
37
37

Flush Head
Pushbutton
Operator

Two-Position
Joystick Operator

Mushroom Head
Pushbutton
Operator

Mushroom Head
Operator with
Padlock Attachment

Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator

Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator

37
37
37
37
37
37

Four-Position Joystick
Operator (without Latch)

Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator

Full Voltage, Resistor
and Transformer Type
Illuminated Selector Switch

37

10250T Style Operator Replacement Parts

37

Item
No.

Transformer Type
Indicating Light

Potentiometers

Description

No.
Req.

Part Number

Item
No.

Description

No.
Req.

Part Number

37

1

Gasket

1

16-1548

14

Gasket (supplied with basic unit)

1

32-803

2

Mounting nut

1

15-1530

15

2

11-4553

37

3

Handle

1

24-5045

Round head screw (#4-40 x 0.344 in long)
(supplied with basic unit)

4

Knob

1

53-3157

16

Mounting screw

2

11-1632

17

Simple potentiometer
(does not include items 18, 28 or 29)

1

As Req. Below

37
37
37

Knob (not shown) for joystick operator with latch

1

53-3159

5

Common gate (supplied with operator)

2

16-3400

1,000 ohms

—

41-782-2

6

Set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex)

2

11-2014

2,500 ohms

—

41-782-3

7

Mushroom head button (includes [2] Item 6)

1

As Req. Below

5,000 ohms

—

41-782-10

Black

—

53-1317

10,000 ohms

—

41-782-4

Red

—

53-1317-2

25,000 ohms

—

41-782-5

Yellow

—

53-1317-3

50,000 ohms

—

41-782-6

Green

—

53-1317-4

18

Connector (includes screw and lug)

2

25-1851

Blue

19

Indicating plate

1

As Req. Above

37
37
37
37

—

53-1317-22

8

Set screw (#10-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex)

2

11-544

Standard size (without legend)

—

30-4460

9

Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—includes [2] Item 8)

1

As Req. Below

Large size (specify legend)

—

10250TR30

37

Red

—

Black

37
37

—

Yellow

—

Green
10

37
11

37

—

Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—red EMERG. STOP)
does not include Item 8

1

53-1317-9
53-1317-10

53-1317-12
53-1349-18

Position gate:
1

54-7278

37

Three-position

1

54-7173

Four-position

1

54-12278

37

Eight-position

1

54-12279

2

10250TA79

37
37

13

T37-226

Mounting screw (#6-32 x 0.710 in long)

Retaining nut

1

15-1547

21

Knob

1

53-1314

Socket set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long)

2

11-2014

22

Coupling

1

29-3749-2

23

Set screw (#6-32 x 0.188 in long)

1

11-1199

24

Spacer

2

56-1066-18

53-1317-11

Two-position

12

20

Washer

2

16-2038

Terminal screw and lug (captive)

Req.

80-5502KIT

25

Connector (includes screw and lug)

1

25-1851-2

26

Mounting nut

1

15-1938

27

Four-position joystick operating mechanism
(complete)

1

24-6565

28

Four-position joystick operating mechanism
(not shown) (with latch) complete

1

24-6565-2

29

Spring loaded latch

1

52-1214-2

30

Hand operated latch

1

52-913-3

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 227 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Technical Data and Specifications

37

Mechanical Ratings
Description

37

Specification

37

Frequency of Operation
All pushbuttons

6000 operations/hr.

37

Key and lever selection switches

3000 operations/hr.

Auto-latch devices

1200 operations/hr.

37

Pushbuttons

10 x 106 operations

Contact blocks

10 x 106 operations

37

PresTest units

10 x 106 operations

Lever and key selector switches

0.25 x 106 operations

Twist to release pushbuttons

0.3 x 106 operations

Life

37
37

Shock Resistance
Duration

37

20 ms >5g

37
General Specifications
Description

37

Specification

37

Climate Conditions
Operating temperature

1˚ to 150˚F (–17˚ to 66˚C)

Storage temperature

–40˚ to 176˚F (–40˚ to 80˚C)

Altitude

6,562 ft (2,000m)

Humidity

Max. 95% RH at 60˚C

37
37
37

Terminals
Marking

NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1–2
for normally closed, 3–4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005).

Clamps

Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
conductors

Torque

7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)

Degree of protection against direct electrical contact

IP2X with fingerproof shroud

37

Will withstand short-circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60997-5-1

37

37
37

Light Units
Transformers
Bulbs—average life:

37

Transformer type

20,000 hrs.

Resistor/direct voltage type

2500 hrs. minimum at rated voltage

LED

60,000 to 100,000 hrs.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-227

Tab37book.fm Page 228 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Electrical Ratings
Description

Specification

Insulation

Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc

Thermal

Ith = 10A

Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Rated conditional short circuit current

1 kA

Fuse type

GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1

UL rating

A600, P600

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour
10A

110V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations

5A

250V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations

2A

600V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations

Switching capacity
AC 15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
6A

120V pf 0.3

4A

240V pf 0.3

2A

660V pf 0.3

DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
1.0A

125V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms

0.55A

250V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms

0.1A

660V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms

10A

110V pure resistive

Maximum ratings for logic level and
hostile atmosphere application
Maximum amperes

0.5A

Maximum volts

120 Vac/Vdc

Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
50 Vac or 60 Hz
120
240

Description

480

600

Vdc
24/28

125

250

Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp)

60

30

15

12

5.7

1.1

0.55

Normal load break (amp)

6

3

1.5

1.2

5.7

1.1

0.55

Thermal current (amp)

10

10

10

10

5.0

5.0

5.0

Voltamperes:
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity

7200

7200

7200

7200

138

138

138

Normal load break

720

720

720

720

138

138

138

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-228

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 229 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Mounting Options

37

Panel Thickness
●
Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm)
●
Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
●
Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut
●
Indicating light: 10250TA30
●
Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31

37
37
37
37

Mounting Matrix

37

Legend
Plate

Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
B

C

D

Small

1.63 (41.3)

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

1.63 (41.3)

Medium

1.75 (44.5)

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

1.75 (44.5)

Large

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

37
37
37
37

Mounting Options in Inches (mm)
Terminals on Top
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.

37

0.6
(15.2)

D
Min.

37

B
Min.

A
Min.

C
Min.

37

1.22
(31)

37

Terminals at Side
Horizontal Mounting

37

Vertical Mounting

37

Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block.
Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals.

37

Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 in (3.6 mm) #29 drill.

37
37

Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.

37

0.6
(15.2)

37
37

1.20
(30.5)

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-229

Tab37book.fm Page 230 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators

37

Adjustable

37

1.62 (41.1)
Min.

37
37
37

37

0.88 (22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact Block

1.07
(27.2)

0.89
(22.6)

Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Down Position

1.78
(45.2)
2.03
(51.6)

1.09
(27.7)

2.0
(50.8)

Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Up Position—Mushroom Head
2.5 (63.5)

37
37

0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)

0.75
(19.1)
Potentiometer

A

B

C

2 watt single

1.31 (33.3)

0.94 (23.9)

0.94 (23.9)

25 watt—up to 25 mohms

2.38 (60.5)

1.19 (30.2)

0.81 (20.6)

50 mohms

2.56 (65)

1.69 (42.9)

1.25 (31.8)

1.63
(41.4)

3.88
(98.6)
2.2 (55.9)
mom.
2.5 (63.5)
main.

2.06
(52.3)
2.13
(54.1)
0.88 (22.4)
per Block

0.06 (1.5) to
0.26 (6.6)
Panel Thickness

2.0 (50.8)

1.75
(44.5)
1.5
(38.1)

4.0
(101.6)

Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Up Position—Jumbo Mushroom Head

37

2.31
(58.7)

2.38
(60.5)

1.88
1.19
(47.8) 0.88 (22.4) (30.2)
Per Unit

37
1.75
(44.5)

37
37

0.94
(23.9)

Four-Position Joystick Operator

37
37

Std. Dial Plate

Contact 0.89
Block (22.6)

37
37

1.31
(33.3)

1.09
1.0
(27.7) (25.4)

Two-Position Joystick Operator

37

37

1.88
(47.8)

1.13
(28.7)

37
37

Large Dial Plate

2.5 (63.5)
Max.

37
37

Potentiometer

2.5 (63.5)

37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-230

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

1.25
(31.8)

3.75
(95.3)

1.25
(31.8)

Tab37book.fm Page 231 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Key Operated Pushbutton Operator

37
Operator and Cam

1.53
(38.9)

1.5
(38.1)

Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator
Only with Button
0.86
(21.8)

37

1.38
(35.1)

1.38
(35.1)

0.24 (6)

37

1.13
(28.7)

1.13
(28.7)

37
37

0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only

37
37

Special Rotor Latch

37

1.13
(28.7)

1.55 (39.3)
Spring Return
2.37 (60.3)
Auto-Latch

37

1.38
(35.1)
1.5
(38.1)
1.53
(38.9)

37

0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-231

Tab37book.fm Page 232 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Surface Mounting
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester

37
37

E
B

37
37
D
A

37
37
37
37

C
Surface

Number of
Elements

Mounting
D

E

Conduit
Entrance

3.0 (76.3) 

2.69 (68.3)

3.25 (82.6)

3/4



2.69 (68.3)

5.13 (130.3)

Element
Arrangement

Wide
A

High
B

Deep
C

In-line

3.88 (98.6)

4.0 (101.6)

Die Cast
1
2

3.88 (98.6)

5.88 (149.4)

3.0 (76.3)

3

3.88 (98.6)

7.75 (196.9)

3.0 (76.3) 

2.69 (68.3)

7.0 (177.8)

37

4

3.88 (98.6)

9.63 (244.6)

3.0 (76.3) 

2.69 (68.3)

8.88 (225.6)

37

1

37

37
37

Polyester
3.81 (96.8)

6.63 (168.4)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

4.88 (124.0)

2

In-line

3.81 (96.8)

6.63 (168.4)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

4.88 (124.0)

3

3.81 (96.8)

8.88 (225.6)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

7.13 (181.1)

4

3.81 (96.8)

11.13 (282.7)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

9.38 (238.3)

3.00 (76.2)

3.50 (88.9)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

4.25 (108.0)

1
2

3.50 (88.9)

6.75 (171.5)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

7.50 (190.5)

37

3

3.50 (88.9)

9.00 (228.6)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

9.00 (228.6)

4

3.50 (88.9)

11.25 (285.8)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

12.00 (304.8)

37



Stainless Steel

37
37

1

In-line

Notes
 Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 in (19.1 mm).
 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-232

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca



Tab37book.fm Page 233 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

37

Flush Mounting

37

Die Case and Stainless Steel Covers Only

37

4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size
for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger

37
37

E

37

B

37
37

D
C
A
Surface or Pendant

37
37

Wide
A

High
B

Deep
C

Mounting
D

E

37

1

3.88 (98.6)

4.0 (101.6)

0.25 (6.4) 

3.50 (88.9)

3.63 (92.2)

37

2

3.88 (98.6)

5.88 (149.4)

0.25 (6.4) 

3.50 (88.9)

5.50 (139.7)

3

3.88 (98.6)

7.75 (196.9)

0.25 (6.4) 

3.50 (88.9)

6.0 (152.4)

9.63 (244.6)



3.50 (88.9)

9.25 (235)

37



37

Number of
Elements
Die Cast

4

3.88 (98.6)

0.25 (6.4)

37

Stainless Steel
1

5.00 (127)

5.0 (127

2.50 (63.5)

3.25 (82.6)

1.88 (47.8)

2

5.00 (127)

6.88 (174.8)

2.50 (63.5) 

3.25 (82.6)

3.63 (92.2)

3

5.00 (127)

8.63 (219.2)

2.50 (63.5) 

3.25 (82.6)

5.50 (139.7)

4

5.00 (127)

10.50 (266.7)

2.50 (63.5) 

3.25 (82.6)

7.25 (184.2)

37
37

Notes
 Depth given includes pull box.
 Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover is 3/4 in (19.1 mm) deeper.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-233

Tab37book.fm Page 234 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Flush and Long Pushbutton Half Shroud
1.81
(46)

1.09
(27.7)

1.06
(26.9)

0.38
(9.7)

Long
Button
Only

Push-Pull Switch
0.88
0.88
(22.4) (22.4)

0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness

37
37
37
37
37

1.38
(35.1)

1.78
(45.2)

Half Shroud Is Same as Long Pushbutton with
Lower Half of Guard Ring Cut Back

Mushroom and Jumbo Head Pushbutton

37

0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness

37

37
37

1.13
0.88 (22.4) (28.7)
for Each
Additional
Contact Block

1.75
(44.5)

Pushbutton with Cylinder Lock
1.13
(28.7)

37

37

1.78
(45.2)

Flush Pushbutton Operator with
Padlock Attachment
1.13
(28.7)

1.78
(45.2)

2.03
(51.6)

1.91
(48.5)

1.09
(27.7)

2.0
(50.8)

Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
2.5
(63.5)

37
37

2.63
(66.8)
1.65
(41.9)

1.63
(41.4)

37
37

0.25
(6.4)

2.5
1.5 (63.5)
(38.1)

37
37

1.13
(28.7)

2.0
(50.8)

1.63
(41.4)

1.75
(44.5)

1.38
(35.1)
1.5
(38.1)

37
37
37

Illuminated Pushbutton
1.09
(27.7)

1.09
(27.7)

0.69
(17.5)

Indicating Light—Transformer Type
1.8
(45.7)

37
1.13
(28.7)

37
37

1.38
(35.1)

37
37
37
37
T37-234

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

1.78
(45.2)

1.38
(35.1)

1.1
(27.9)

A

Tab37book.fm Page 235 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

37

PresTest Indicating Light—Transformer Type

PresTest Indicating Light—Resistor Type

37

1.88
(47.8)
1.78
(45.2)

37

1.38
(35.1)
1.78
(45.2)
2.19
(55.6)

1.94
(49.3)

37

1.38
(35.1)

1.56
(39.6)

37
1.88
(47.8)

37

1.56
(39.6)

37
Jumbo Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
2.31
(58.7)

2.38
(60.5)

Plastic 1.38 (35.1)
Glass 1.59 (40.4)
1.63
(41.4)

1.75
(44.5)

1.78
(45.2)

2.5
(63.5)

37

Master Test Indicating Light
B
Spade Terminal

37

A
Screw Terminal

37
37

1.38
(35.1)

37

Description

B

C

Relay type

4.38 (111.2)

4.28 (108.7)

Solid-state type

2.94 (74.7)

2.88 (73.2)

37
37
37

Indicating Light—Resistor and Neon Type

37

Threaded
Bushing

A
1.78
(45.2)

37

Potentiometer Shaft

1.38
(35.1)

37
B
Shaft

1.1
(27.9)

1.81
(46)
Lens

A

Plastic

1.38 (35.1)

Glass

1.56 (39.6)

A

37

Shaft Dimensions of Potentiometer
That C-H Operator Will Accept

Operator
Catalogue Number
10250T330

37

A

B

0.38 (9.7) dia. x
0.38 (9.7) long

0.25 (6.4) dia. x
0.63 (16) long

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-235

Tab37book.fm Page 236 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Coin Operated Selector Switch

Wobble Stick Catalogue No. 10250TA5
1.44
(36.6)

Coin Slot
Knob

2.44
(62)
21°

1.38
(35.1)

37

21°

37
37
37
37

Lever
A

1.22
(31)

Operator

Dim. A

Knob

1.38 (35.1)

Lever

1.50 (38.1)

Coin slot

1.38 (35.1)

Lever Operator—For Use with Two
Vertically Mounted Flush Pushbuttons
Catalogue No. 10250TA14
2.19
(55.6)

37
37

Key Operated Selector Switch
Cam

1.13
(28.7)

37

1.38
(35.1)

37
37

1.75
(44.5)

Illuminated Selector Switch

Flexible Boot—For Protecting
Flush or Long Pushbutton
Catalogue No. 10250TA3 Typical

1.13
(28.7)

37

1.47
(37.3)

1.38
(35.1)

37
37
37
37

1.09
(27.7)

1.59
(40.4)

1.96
(49.8)

Roto-Push

37

1.13
(28.7)

37

1.38
(35.1)

37
37

1.88
(47.8)

3.75
(95.3)

37
37

3.59
(91.2)

1.53
(38.9)

37

0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only

Transparent Flexible Boot—
For Illuminated Pushbutton
Catalogue No. 10250TA25

1.59
(40.4)

1.33
(33.8)

1.88
(47.8)

37
37
37
37
37
T37-236

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 237 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

37.7

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Padlock Attachment—For Knob Selector Switch
Catalogue No. 10250TA11

37

Maintained Contact Attachment
Catalogue No. 10250TA17 Typical

37

0.97
(24.6)

37

1.63
(41.4)

37
1.63 (41.4)
Min.

0.44
(11.2)

37

2.31 (58.7)
Max.

37

Padlock Attachment—For Flush Pushbutton
Catalogue No. 10250TA2
0.75
(19.1)

0.84
(21.3)

0.94
(23.9)

37

1.63
(41.4)

0.38
(9.7)

Padlock Attachment—For Extended Pushbutton
Catalogue No. 10250TA26

1.16
(29.5)

0.75
(19.1)

37
37

1.0
(25.4)

37
37

2.19
(55.6)

1.06
(26.9)

37

1.91
(48.5)

37

0.91
(23.1)

2.06
(52.3)
0.84
(21.3)

37

Padlock Cover Guard for Flush Pushbutton
Catalogue No. 10250TA36
0.25
(6.4)

0.38
(9.7)

0.91
(23.1)

1.13
(28.7)

37
Padlock Attachment for Maintained Push-Pull Operator
Catalogue No. 10250TA64

1.5
(38.1)

37

0.38
(9.7)

37

Maintained Pushbutton
Catalogue No. 10250TA66 Typical

2.19
(55.6)

37
37

Adjustable
0.94
(23.9)
1.62 (41.1)
Min.
2.5 (63.5)
Max.
0.88
(22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact
Block

37

1.47
(37.3)

1.25
(31.8)

37

Protecting Shroud for Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
Catalogue No. 10250TA56

37
37

1.07
(27.2)

37

0.89
(22.6)
3.25
(82.6)

37
37

1.65
(41.9)

37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-237

Tab37book.fm Page 238 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Protecting Shroud for
Mushroom Head Button
Catalogue No. 10250TA6

B
Min.

1.69
(42.9)

A
Min.

A
Min.

1.22
(31)

Terminals at
Side
Horizontal Rows

Protecting Shroud for
Illuminated Pushbutton
Catalogue No. 10250TA15
1.75
(44.5)

37

Lever for
Roto-Push Operator
Catalogue No. 10250TA13
0.44
(11.2)

1.50
(38.1)

37

0.6
(15.2)

B
Min.

1.25
(31.8)

37

37

Terminals on Top

1.38
(35.1)

37

37

Panel Drilling and Minimum Spacing

1.31
(33.3)

1.53
(38.9)

37

37

Extended Retaining Nut
Catalogue No. 10250TA12

1.81
(46)

Legend
Plate

Vertical Rows
A
Min.

B
Min.

Small or none

1.63 (41.4)

2.25 (57.2)

Standard

1.75 (44.5)

2.25 (57.2)

Jumbo 

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

Extra large

2.50 (63.5)

2.60 (66)

1 or 2 Circuit Contact Blocks

4 Circuit Contact Block 10250T44

37

Small or none
Standard

1.88 (47.8)

2.25 (57.2)

37

Jumbo 

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

Extra large

2.50 (63.5)

2.60 (66)

37
37
37

Padlock Hasp or
Flip-Up Guard
Catalogue No. 10250TA38
0.84
(21.3)

1.50
(38.1)



If jumbo plates are to be placed one above the other vertically, add 0.13 (3.3) to minimum
dimensions listed.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-238

2.25 (57.2)

Notes
Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36–1.4 in (34.5–35.6 mm) #29 drill.

1.75
(44.5)

37

1.88 (47.8)

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 239 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.7

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

37
Chain Hook Bracket

Multiple Button Guard
2.16
(54.9)

1.88
(47.8)

2

4.0 (101.6)

3

5.88 (149.4)

4

7.88 (200.2)

7

13.38 (339.9)

37
37

D
A

0.75
(19.1)

A

37

B E

A

Number of
Elements

37

0.38 (9.7)
Dia. Hole

1.31
(33.3)

C

37

Enclosure Size
(No. of Elements)

Wide
A

High
B

Deep
C

Mounting
D

E

37

2, 3 and 4

3.75
(95.3)

1.94
(49.3)

0.13
(3.3)

2.69
(68.3)

1.38
(35.1)

37

6 and 7

4.0
(101.6)

2.19
(55.6)

0.13
(3.3)

2.88
(73.2)

1.63
(41.4)

37
37
37
37

Master Test Module, Flasher Module and Legend Plate
1.63
(41.4)

1.78
(45.2)

37

A

37

B

1.31
(33.3)

37

6 Mounting Holes

1.14
(29)

Master Test Module,
Flasher Module
Legend
Plate

37
Legend Plate

A

B

1.56 (39.6)

0.91 (23.1)

37
37
37

1/2 Round Legend Plates
Small
Standard

1.59 (40.4)

1.07 (27.2)

Jumbo

2.06 (52.3)

1.53 (38.9)

Small

1.59 (40.4) sq.

0.90 (22.9)

Standard

1.75 (44.5) sq.

1.06 (26.9) 

Jumbo

2.19 (55.6) sq.

1.50 (38.1)

Extra large

2.44 (62.0) sq.

1.63 (41.4)

37
37

Square Legend Plates

37
37
37

Notes
Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36–1.4 in (34.5–35.6 mm) #29 drill.


37

For plastic legend plate, Dimension B is 1.12 (28.4).

37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-239

Tab37book.fm Page 240 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Contents
Description

37

30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering Complete Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Momentary
Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plastic Lens Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Product Description

Features

Eaton’s E34 Series 30.5 mm
pushbutton line features the
same rugged die cast
construction of our 10250T
line with an additional
two-layer 100% solid
thermosetting cathodic epoxy
coating. This coating provides
a flat black smooth,
consistent, corrosion
resistant surface that has
passed a demanding 600
hour salt spray test. (The
industry standard for this 4X
test requires only 200 hours.)

●

37

●
●

●

Epoxy-coated metal
operators
Corrosion resistant
Integral ground screw
terminal on operators
FDA approved for sanitary
chemical resistance
requirements

Standards and
Certifications
●

●
●

●

Ingress Protection
When mounted in similarly
rated enclosure—
●

Standard indicating lights
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65

●

All other operators
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65

37
37
37
37

CE EN60947-5-1 and
60947-5-5
UL 508—File No. E131568
CSA C22.2 No. 14—File
No. LR68551
FDA 3-A Sanitary
Standards

37
37
37
T37-240

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Page
T37-241
T37-242
T37-243
T37-245
T37-246
T37-246
T37-247
T37-248
T37-250
T37-251
T37-253
T37-254
T37-258
T37-259
T37-262
T37-262
T37-264
T37-265
T37-267
T37-273
T37-275
T37-278

Tab37book.fm Page 241 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Product Overview

37

Ultraviolet Light

Reliability Nibs

E34 cathodic coating is not
recommended for use in
applications where exposure
to ultraviolet light exists—use
NEMA 4X 10250T operators.

Eaton’s contact blocks
feature enclosed silver
contacts with pointed
“reliability nibs” for reliable
performance from logic level
up to 600V. To ensure reliable
switching, nibs bite through
oxide which can form on silver
contacts, eliminating the
need for expensive logic level
blocks for most applications.
Reliability Nibs

Dry Circuit

Medium Duty

Diaphragm Seal with
Drainage Holes

37

Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s pushbutton operators
offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator
bushing. Hidden from view
by the mounting nut, these
holes prevent buildup of
liquid inside the operator,
which can prevent operation
in freezing environments. The
holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high
pressure washdowns,
effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Diaphragm Seal
Heavy-Duty

37

Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole

37

Flexible
Diaphragm

37

Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring

37

Colorfast
Molded
Button

37
37

Drainage Hole
Mounting Nut

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-241

Tab37book.fm Page 242 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Product Identification
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Series
Octagonal Mounting Nut Self-Adjusts to
Panel Thickness—Eliminates Spacer Washers
and Set Screws
Internal Sealing Diaphragm
for Excellent Sealing

37

Terminal Clamps Shipped
Open Ready to Wire

37
37
37
37
37

Die Cast Construction with Thick,
Tough Corrosion Resistant Coating

Three Styles of Legend Plates
in Four Sizes

Wide Variety of Operator
Types and Colors

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-242

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Stackable Contact Blocks up
to 12 Circuits per Operator

Tab37book.fm Page 243 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Catalogue Number Selection

37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons

E34 PB 1 – 1

37



37
PB =
EB =
LB =
JB =
EVB =
EHB =

Operator
Flush
Extended
40 mm mushroom
65 mm mushroom
1/2 shroud vertical mount
1/2 shroud horizontal mount

Button Colour
1 = Black
7 = Gray
2 = Red
5 = White
3 = Green
6 = Blue
4 = Yellow
8 = Orange

Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =

37

Circuit
Operator only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO

37
37
37
37

Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Push-Pulls

37

E34 GDB 63 M2
GDB =
GEB =
GFB =
GHB =

Operator
Two-position maintained
Three-position mom push-mom pull
Three-position mt push-mom pull
Three-position mom push-mom pull
Incandescent
Light Unit
Blank = Non-illuminated
89 = 24V/XFR
63 = 120V/XFR
64 = 208V/XFR
65 = 240V/XFR
82 = 277V/XFR
66 = 380V/XFR
67 = 480V/XFR
68 = 600V/XFR
69 = 6V/FV
70 = 12V/FV
79 = 24V/FV
83 = 32V/FV
80 = 120V/RES
81 = 240V/RES

LED
Light Unit
Blank = Non-illuminated
89L = 24V/XFR
63L = 120V/XFR
64L = 208V/XFR
65L = 240V/XFR
82L = 277V/XFR
66L = 380V/XFR
67L = 480V/XFR
68L = 600V/XFR
97L = Full voltage

– 1



37

LED Voltage
Blank = Non-illuminated
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Non-Illuminated
Button
C1 = Black 40 mm
C2 = Red 40 mm
C2N8 = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
C3 = Green 40 mm
C6 = Blue 40 mm
— = Black 65 mm
J2 = Red 65 mm
J2N8 = Red 65 mm—“E” STOP
— = Green 65 mm
— = Yellow 65 mm

Incandescent
M2 =
M2N8 =
M3 =
M6 =
M9 =
M5 =
M0 =

Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =

37

Circuit
Operator only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO

37
37
37
37
37

Illuminated
LED
Lens Type
RD = Red 40 mm
ED = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
GD = Green 40 mm
LD = Blue 40 mm
AD = Amber 40 mm
WD = White 40 mm
— = Clear 40 mm

37
37
37
37
37

Note
 Add X at end of catalogue number to receive parts assembled from factory.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-243

Tab37book.fm Page 244 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Illuminated Pushbuttons

E34 XB 24 V2

37
37
37
37



Light Unit Type
XB = Transformer
CB = Full voltage
SB = Resistor
Incandescent Light Unit
024 = 24V/XFR
120 = 120V/XFR
240 = 240V/XFR
277 = 277V/XFR
380 = 380V/XFR
480 = 480V/XFR
600 = 600V/XFR
06 = 6V/FV
12 = 12V/FV
24 = 24V/FV
32 = 32V/FV
48 = 48V/FV
120 = 120V/RES
240 = 240V/RES

37
37
37
37
37
37

Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =

LED Light Unit
024L = 24V/XFR
120L = 120V/XFR
240L = 240V/XFR
277L = 277V/XFR
380L = 380V/XFR
480L = 480V/XFR
600L = 600V/XFR
397L = Full voltage

Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
Incandescent Lens Colour
V2 = Red
V3 = Green
V4 = Yellow
V5 = White
V6 = Blue
V9 = Amber
V0 = Clear

37
37

– 1

LED Voltage
Incandescent
48 =
6 Vac/Vdc
60 =
12 Vac/Vdc
2A =
24 Vac/Vdc
2D =

Circuit
Operator only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO

48 Vac/Vdc
60 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
120 Vdc

LED Lens Colour
RD = Red
GD = Green
YD = Yellow
WD = White
LD = Blue
AD = Amber

Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test

37

E34 FB06 H2



37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Light Unit Type
Standard—Incandescent
Standard—LED
TB120 = 120V/XFR
TB120L = 120V/XFR
TB240 = 240V/XFR
TB240L = 240V/XFR
TB277 = 277V/XFR
TB277L = 277V/XFR
TB380 = 380V/XFR
TB380L = 380V/XFR
TB480 = 480V/XFR
TB480L = 480V/XFR
TB600 = 600V/XFR
TB600L = 600V/XFR
FB06 = 6V/FV
FB197L = Full voltage
FB12 = 12V/FV
PresTest—LED
FB24 = 24V/FV
TPB120L = 120V/XFR
FB32 = 32V/FV
TPB240L = 240V/XFR
FB48 = 48V/FV
TPB380L = 380V/XFR
RB120 = 120V/RES
TPB480L = 480V/XFR
RB240 = 240V/RES
TPB600L = 600V/XFR
NB120 = 120V/neon
FPB297L = Full voltage
NB240 = 240V/neon
PresTest—Incandescent
TPB120 = 120V/XFR
TPB240 = 240V/XFR
TPB380 = 380V/XFR
TPB480 = 480V/XFR
TPB600 = 600V/XFR
FPB06 = 6V/FV
FPB12 = 12V/FV
FPB24 = 24V/FV
FPB32 = 32V/FV
FPB48 = 48V/FV
RPB120 = 120V/RES
RPB240 = 240V/RES

LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Plastic
Glass
Lens Colour
Standard/Master—Incandescent
H2 =
G2 = Red
H3 =
G3 = Green
H4 =
G4 = Yellow
H5 =
G5 = White
H6 =
G6 = Blue
H9 =
G9 = Amber
H0 =
G0 = Clear
PresTest—Incandescent
V2 =
P2 = Red
V3 =
P3 = Green
V4 =
P4 = Yellow
V5 =
P5 = White
V6 =
P6 = Blue
V9 =
P9 = Amber
V0 =
P0 = Clear

Note
 Add X at end of catalogue number to receive parts assembled from factory.

37
T37-244

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Plastic
Glass
Lens Colour
Standard/Master/PresTest—LED
RP =
RG = Red
GP =
GG = Green
YP =
YG = Yellow
WP =
WG = White
LP =
LG = Blue
AP =
AG = Amber

Tab37book.fm Page 245 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Ordering Complete Devices
Complete E34 pushbuttons,
indicating lights and/or
selector switch operators
including contact block(s) and
legend plate can be ordered
using a single composite
catalogue number. The

individually packaged
components will be shipped
unassembled in a single
overpack carton marked with
the composite catalogue
number.

37

Ordering Example
Illuminated Pushbutton
Device—Catalogue Number
E34XB120V2-153SP90

37
37

For a complete Catalogue
Number breakdown, see
Pages T37-243 to
T37-244.

37
37
37

For Complete E34 Device Ordering

37

E34XB120 V2 – 153 SP90
Operator

37
37

Legend Plate
E34;SP90
Lens
E34V2

37

Contact Blocks
10250T1 and 10250T53

37

Insert Hyphen Before
Contact Block(s)

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-245

Tab37book.fm Page 246 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Flush Button

37

Pushbutton Units
Contact
Type

Button Colour

Flush Button
Catalogue Number

Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Mushroom Button
Catalogue Number

Jumbo Mushroom 
Catalogue Number

1NO

Black

E34PB1-53X

E34EB1-53X

E34LB1-53X

E34JB1-53X

Red

E34PB2-53X

E34EB2-53X

E34LB2-53X

E34JB2-53X

Green

E34PB3-53X

E34EB3-53X

E34LB3-53X

E34JB3-53X

Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP

—

—

—

E34JB2N8-53X

Black

E34PB1-51X

E34EB1-51X

E34LB1-51X

E34JB1-51X

Red

E34PB2-51X

E34EB2-51X

E34LB2-51X

E34JB2-51X

Green

E34PB3-51X

E34EB3-51X

E34LB3-51X

E34JB3-51X

Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP

—

—

—

E34JB2N8-51X

37
37

Extended Button
1NC

37
37
37

Mushroom Button

Black

E34PB1-1X

E34EB1-1X

E34LB1-1X

E34JB1-1X

37

Red

E34PB2-1X

E34EB2-1X

E34LB2-1X

E34JB2-1X

Green

E34PB3-1X

E34EB3-1X

E34LB3-1X

E34JB3-1X

37

Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP

—

—

—

E34JB2N8-1X

37

1NO-1NC

Jumbo Mushroom

37
37
37
37
37
37

Plastic Lens Indicating Light Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
24V Full Voltage
Indicating Light

Indicating Light Units
Type

Voltage

Colour

LED/Lamp
Number

Indicating Light 
Catalogue Number

Red

Bayonet base

E34FB197LRP24

LED Lamp;

37

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

37
37

120 Vac

37

Green

E34FB197LGP24

Amber

E34FB197LAP24

Red

E34FB197LRP2A

Green

E34FB197LGP2A

Amber

E34FB197LAP2A

Incandescent Lamp

37

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

37

Red

#757

Green

E34FB24H3X

Amber

37

Resistor

120 Vac/Vdc

Red

E34FB24H9X
120MB

Green

37
37
37

120 Vac
50/60 Hz

Red

E34RB120H2X
E34RB120H3X

Amber
Transformer

E34FB24H2X

E34RB120H9X
#755

E34TB120H2X

Green

E34TB120H3X

Amber

E34TB120H9X

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37



37
T37-246

Anodized aluminum head—may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 247 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Pushbuttons

37

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37

Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-Illuminated
E34PB_

E34EB_

E34EHB_

E34LB_

E34JB_

Button

Colour

Catalogue Number

Flush button

Black

E34PB1

Red

E34PB2

Green

E34PB3

Yellow

E34PB4

White

E34PB5

Blue

E34PB6

Gray

E34PB7

Orange

E34PB8

Extended button

Black

E34EB1

Red

E34EB2

Green

E34EB3

Yellow

E34EB4

White

E34EB5

Blue

E34EB6

Gray

E34EB7

Orange

E34EB8

Half shrouded button

Mushroom button

Anodized aluminum jumbo
mushroom button 

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Vertical

Horizontal

Black

E34EVB1

E34EHB1

Red

E34EVB2

E34EHB2

Green

E34EVB3

E34EHB3

Yellow

E34EVB4

E34EHB4

White

E34EVB5

E34EHB5

Blue

E34EVB6

E34EHB6

Gray

E34EVB7

E34EHB7

Orange

E34EVB8

E34EHB8

37
37
37
37
37
37

Black

E34LB1

Red

E34LB2

Green

E34LB3

Yellow

E34LB4

Blue

E34LB6

37

Black

E34JB1

37

Red

E34JB2

Red (Engraved EMERG. STOP)

E34JB2N8

Green

E34JB3

Yellow

E34JB4

37

37
37
37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37



37

Anodized aluminum head—may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.

37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-247

Tab37book.fm Page 248 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37

30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Illuminated Pushbutton

37

Operators without Lens

Type

Indicating
Light
Catalogue Number

E34CB497L

E34FB197L

E34FPB297L

E34XB024L

—

—

120

E34XB120L

E34TB120L

E34TPB120L

240

E34XB240L

E34TB240L

E34TPB240L

277

E34XB277L

E34TB277L

—

380

E34XB380L

E34TB380L

E34TPB380L

480

E34XB480L

E34TB480L

E34TPB480L

600

E34XB600L

E34TB600L

E34TPB600L

Voltage

Indicating Light

Full voltage

—

Transformer AC only

24

37
37
37

Illuminated
Pushbutton
Catalogue Number

Lamp Number

PresTest
Catalogue Number

LED Lamp (LEDs not included) 

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

PresTest

Bayonet
base

Incandescent Lamp

37

Full voltage AC/DC

6

#755

E34CB06

E34FB06

E34FPB06

12

#756

E34CB12

E34FB12

E34FPB12

24

#757

E34CB24

E34FB24

E34FPB24

32

#1828

E34CB32

E34FB32

E34FPB32

48

#1835

E34CB48

E34FB48

E34FPB48

120

120MB

E34SB120

E34RB120

E34RPB120

E34SB240

E34RB240

E34RPB240

E34XB024

—

—

120

E34XB120

E34TB120

E34TPB120

240

E34XB240

E34TB240

E34TPB240

277

E34XB277

E34TB277

—

37

380

E34XB380

E34TB380

E34TPB380

480

E34XB480

E34TB480

E34TPB480

37

600

E34XB600

E34TB600

E34TPB600

37
37
37

Resistor AC/DC 

240

37

Transformer AC only

37
37

Neon AC/DC

37

24

#755

120

NE51H-R-22

—

E34NB120

—

240

NE51H-4-68

—

E34NB240

—

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37



37



These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens colour, see Page T37-225 for LED Selection and Pages T37-243 to T37-244 for Catalogue Numbering
Selection.
Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-248

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 249 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Plastic

Glass

E34V_

Plastic

Glass

37.8

Indicating Light Lens
Colour

Plastic
Catalogue Number

Glass 
Catalogue Number

Red

E34H2

E34G2

Green

E34H3

E34G3

Yellow

E34H4

E34G4

White

E34H5

E34G5

Blue

E34H6

E34G6

Ambler

E34H9

E34G9

Clear

E34H0

E34G0

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Illuminated Pushbutton Lens
Colour

Catalogue Number

Red

E34V2

Green

E34V3

Yellow

E34V4

White

E34V5

Blue

E34V6

Ambler

E34V9

Clear

E34V0

37
37
37
37
37
37

PresTest Lens
Colour

Plastic
Catalogue Number

Glass 
Catalogue Number

37

Red

E34V2

E34P2

37

Green

E34V3

E34P3

Yellow

E34V4

E34P4

White

E34V5

E34P5

Blue

E34V6

E34P6

Ambler

E34V9

E34P9

Clear

E34V0

E34P0

37
37
37
37

Note
 Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-249

Tab37book.fm Page 250 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37

30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Two- and three-position
Non-illuminated

Two-Position
Push-Pull Unit

Two-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated
Operator Position 
Pull

Push

37

Button Type/Colour 

Mounting Location

Contact
Type

A

B

Catalogue Number

Maintained Push, Maintained Pull

37

O
X

37

X
O

40 mm/red

1NO

E34GDBC2-1X

40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red

1NC

E34GDBC2N8-1X

65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red

37

E34GDBJ2N8-1X

37
37

Three-Position
Push-Pull Unit

Three-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated
Operator Position 
Pull

37

Intermediate

Push
Button Type/Colour 

37

Contact
Type

Mounting Location
A

B

Catalogue Number

Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
X
X

37

O
X

O
O

40 mm/black

1NC

E34GFBC1-3X

40 mm/red

1NC

E34GFBC2-3X

40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red

37

E34GFBC2N8-3X

Momentary Push, Momentary Pull

37
37
37
37

X
X

O
X

O
O

40 mm/black

1NC

E34GEBC1-3X

40 mm/red

1NC

E34GEBC2-3X

O
X

O
O

X
O

40 mm/black

1NO

E34GHBC1-1X

40 mm/red

1NC

E34GHBC2-1X

Button and Colour Selection

37

Suffix Code

Catalogue Number

Black

C1

E34C1

37

Red

C2

E34C2

Red (EMERG. STOP)

C2N8

E34C2N8

37

Green

C3

E34C3

Blue

C6

E34C6

Red

J2

E34J2

Red (EMERG. STOP)

J2N8

E34J2N8

37

37

Colour
Standard

Jumbo Mushroom
Head

37

Standard—40 mm

Jumbo Mushroom Head 
(Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm

37
37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37



37





X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or colour buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code
from the table. Example: E34GDBC6-1X.
Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications.

37
37
T37-250

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 251 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Illuminated Push-Pull Units

37

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●

37

Two-position maintained
Illuminated

Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit

37

Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull

37

Operator Position 
Maintained—
Pull

O
X

Maintained—
Intermediate

X
O

Lamp

Type

Voltage

LED

Full voltage

Transformer

Contact
Type

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

120 Vac/Vdc

1NC

Mounting Location
A
B

LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base

24 Vac

X
O

Incandescent

37

E34GDB97LRD24-1X

37

E34GDB97LRD2A-1X
E34GDB89LRD06-1X

120 Vac
O
X

Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalogue Number 

E34GDB63LRD06-1X

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

#757

E34GDB79M2-1X

Resistor

120 Vac/Vdc

1NC

120MB

E34GDB80M2-1X

Transformer

24 Vac

#755

E34GDB89M2-1X

120 Vac

E34GDB63M2-1X

37
37
37
37
37

Standard

Lens and Colour Selection

37

Incandescent
Suffix Code

LED
Suffix Code

Catalogue Number

Red

M2

RD

E34M2

Red (EMER. STOP)

M2N8

ED

E34M2N8

Green

M3

GD

E34M3

Blue

M6

LD

E34M6

Amber

M9

AD

E34M9

White

M5

WD

E34M5

Clear

M0

CD

E34M0

Colour

37

Standard

37
37
37
37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37



37



X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or colour lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from Lens and Colour Selection table above.
Example: E34GDB79M3 -1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page T37-257.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-251

Tab37book.fm Page 252 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●

Three-position maintained
Illuminated

Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit

37

Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Position 
Momentary—
Pull

Maintained—
Intermediate

Momentary—
Push

37
O
X

37

O
O

X
O

Lamp

Type

Voltage

Contact
Type

LED

Full
voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

120 Vac

1NC

37

Transformer

37
37

X
X

O
X

O
O

Full
voltage

37
37

Transformer

37
O
X

37

O
O

X
O

37
37

Incandescent

Mounting Location
A

B

LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base

X
X

37
37
37

O
X

O
O

24 Vac

E34GHB89LRD06-1X

120 Vac

E34GHB63LRD06-1X

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC

120 Vac

1NC

Bayonet
base

24 Vac

E34GEB89LRD06-3X

120 Vac

E34GEB63LRD06-3X

Full
voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NO

#757

E34GHB79M2-1X

Resistor

120 Vac

1NC

120MB

E34GHB80M2-1X

Transformer

24 Vac

#755

E34GHB89M2-1X
E34GHB63M2-1X

Full
voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC

#757

E34GEB79M2-3X

Resistor

120 Vac

1NC

120MB

E34GEB80M2-3X

Transformer

24 Vac

#755

E34GEB89M2-3X

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37




37

X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or colour lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from Lens and Colour Selection table on the
bottom of Page T37-251. Example: E34GEB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page T37-257.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-252

E34GEB97LRD24-3X
E34GEB97LRD2A-3X

120 Vac

37

E34GHB97LRD24-1X
E34GHB97LRD2A-1X

120 Vac

37

Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalogue Number 

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

E34GEB63M2-3X

Tab37book.fm Page 253 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●

37

Three-position—maintained push, momentary pull
Illuminated

Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit

37

Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Position 
Momentary— Maintained—
Pull
Intermediate

X
X

O
X

Maintained—
Push

O
O

Lamp

Type

Voltage

Contact
Type

LED

Full
voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC

120 Vac

1NC

Transformer

X
X

O
X

O
O

Incandescent

37
Mounting Location
A

B

LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base

Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalogue Number 
E34GFB97LRD24-3X

37
37
37

E34GFB97LRD2A-3X

37

24 Vac

E34GFB89LRD06-3X

120 Vac

E34GFB63LRD06-3X

37

Full
voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC

#757

E34GFB79M2-3X

37

Resistor

120 Vac

1NC

120MB

E34GFB80M2-3X

37

Transformer

24 Vac

#755

E34GFB89M2-3X

37

E34GFB63M2-3X

37

120 Vac

37
Vertical or Horizontal
One-Hole Mounting 

Potentiometers
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

37

Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10%

37

Potentiometer
Ohms

37

Catalogue Number

2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 
1000

E34PDB1F1

2500

E34PDB1F2

5000

E34PDB1F5

10000

E34PDB1F10

25000

E34PDB1F25

50000
Operator only

37
37
37
37

E34PDB1F50


E34PDB1A0

Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings

37

E34LP99

Dimensions, see Page T37-278.

37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37









X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or colour lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table
on the bottom of Page T37-251.
Example: E34GFB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page T37-257.
Shown with standard aluminum dial plate.
Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalogue number.
Example: E34PDB1F136. To order separately, see footnote  below.
Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate
as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page T37-230.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-253

Tab37book.fm Page 254 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37
37
37
37

37

●

Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
Momentary—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
an intermediate position
when pulled or pushed and
released.

37
37

●

An illuminated push-pull
pushbutton unit, arranged for
one-hole mounting, can
replace two pushbuttons and
a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace
two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
types:

37

37

30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Push-Pull Operators

●

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Two-Position Maint.
Push-Pull 

The operators, buttons,
contact blocks, etc., are
offered as building block
components that can be
intermixed to satisfy many
requirements. This minimizes
the need for a varied and
costly inventory.

Locating Nib

A
B

Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out—Pull
In—Push
Intermediate

Type of Operator

37

Contact Circuit Locations

Push-Pull Operator Components

37
37

Application Guide
To assist in the selection of
contact blocks, the sketch
below shows pictorially by
symbols A and B locations of
contact circuits after
assembly of contact blocks
and adapter to the operator.
The table below shows the
effect of the push and pull
operations on either NO or
NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open).

Momentary Pull,
Maintained Push—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
intermediate position when
pulled. Maintains in pushed
position until manually
returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position.
Maintained stop holds
circuit open and will
prevent other series
connected operators from
starting the system.

Contact Block Mounting Location
A
B
A
B

A

B

Contact Block 

Catalogue Number

X
O

1NO
1NC

E34GDB

X
O

2NO
2NC

O
O

1NO
1NC

O
O

2NO
2NC

O
O

1NO
1NC

O
O

2NO
2NC

X
O

1NO
1NC

X
O

2NO
2NC

Two-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained push-pull

37

O
X

or

O
X

37

O
X

No intermediate
position

O
X

X
O

or

X
O

Three-Position Operator without Lens

37

Momentary push-pull

37

O
X

or

O
X

37

Maintained push-momentary pull

O
X

or

O
X

37
Momentary push-pull

37

O
X
O
X

37

or

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

or

or

or

O
X

X
O

O
X

X
O

O
X

X
O

O
X

X
O

O
O

X
O

O
O

X
O

37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37

See Typical Applications on Page T37-189.



37

or

or

Shown without button on lens.
Maximum of two blocks, four circuits. Special function contact blocks shown on Page T37-272 CANNOT be used with
three-position push-pull operators E34GEB, E34GFB or E34GHB.

37
37
37
37
T37-254

or

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

E34GEB 

E34GFB 

E34GHB 

Tab37book.fm Page 255 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Ordering Example with One Composite Number

37

Non-illuminated:
E34GDB + E34C2 + 10250T1 = E34GDBC2-1X

37
37

Incandescent:
E34GDB + 10250T79 + E34M2 + 10250T1 = E34GDB79M2-1X

37

LED:
E34GDB + 10250T97L + E34M2 + Voltage Code + 10250T1 = E34GDB97LRD24-1X
06—6 Vac/Vdc
12—12 Vac/Vdc
24—24 Vac/Vdc
48—48 Vac/Vdc

37

60—60 Vac/Vdc
2A—120 Vac
2D—120 Vdc

37
37
37

Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Light Unit
Type
LED
(LEDs not included) 

Incandescent

Type

Voltage

Full voltage

—

Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz

24

Full voltage
AC or DC

LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base

10250T97L

10250T63L

208

10250T64L

240

10250T65L

277

10250T82L

380

10250T66L

480

10250T67L

600

10250T68L

12
24/28

#755
#756
#757
#1828

32
Resistor
AC or DC

120

Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz

24

37

10250T89L

120

6

37

Catalogue Number

37
37
37
37
37

10250T69
10250T70

37

10250T79
10250T83

120MB

240

37

10250T80

37

10250T81
#755

10250T89

120

10250T63

208

10250T64

240

10250T65

277

10250T82

380

10250T66

480

10250T67

600

10250T68

37
37
37
37
37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.


37

These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens colour from chart on Page T37-257.

37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-255

Tab37book.fm Page 256 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8

Incandescent
Suffix Code

Catalogue Number

Black

C1

E34C1

Red

C2

E34C2

Red (EMERG. STOP)

C2N8

E34C2N8

Green

C3

E34C3

Blue

C6

E34C6

Red 

J2

E34J2

Red (EMERG. STOP)

J2N8

E34J2N8

Colour
Standard

37
37
37
37

30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Jumbo Mushroom
Head

37

Standard Button

Jumbo Mushroom Head

37
37
37

E34M_

Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Colour

Incandescent
Suffix Code

LED
Suffix Code 

Catalogue Number

Red

M2

RD

E34M2

Red (EMERG. STOP)

M2N8

ED

E34M2N8

Green

M3

GD

E34M3

37

Blue

M6

LD

E34M6

Amber

M9

AD

E34M9

37

White

M5

WD

E34M5

Clear

M0

—

E34M0

37
37

37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37




37

Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications.
Suffix codes should only be used for assembling composite catalogue numbers. To order lens, order by catalogue number.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-256

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 257 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Standard LED Lamp

LED Selection
Voltage

Colour

Catalogue Number

Voltage

6 Vac/Vdc
suitable for
use with
transformers

Red

E22LED006RN

60 Vac/Vdc

Orange

E22LED006ON

Yellow

E22LED006YN

Yellow

E22LED060YN

Green

E22LED006GN

Green

E22LED060GN

Blue

E22LED006BN

Blue

E22LED060BN

White

E22LED006WN

White

E22LED060WN

Red

E22LED012RN

Red

E22LED120RA

Orange

E22LED012ON

Orange

E22LED120OA

Yellow

E22LED012YN

Yellow

E22LED120YA

Green

E22LED012GN

Green

E22LED120GA

Blue

E22LED012BN

Blue

E22LED120BA

White

E22LED012WN

White

E22LED120WA

Red

E22LED024RN

Red

E22LED120RD

Orange

E22LED024ON

Orange

E22LED120OD

Yellow

E22LED024YN

Yellow

E22LED120YD

Green

E22LED024GN

Green

E22LED120GD

Blue

E22LED024BN

Blue

E22LED120BD

White

E22LED024WN

White

E22LED120WD

Red

E22LED048RN

Orange

E22LED048ON

Yellow

E22LED048YN

Green

E22LED048GN

Blue

E22LED048BN

White

E22LED048WN

12 Vac/Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

48 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac

120 Vdc

Colour

Catalogue Number

Red

E22LED060RN

Orange

E22LED060ON

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-257

Tab37book.fm Page 258 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37

30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Selector Switch Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Two-, three- and four-position—maintained
Non-illuminated and illuminated

Two-Position Maint.
Switch Knob

Two-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 
Mounting Location
Operator
Action 

37
X
O

37

O
X

Contact
Type

A

Cam
Code

B

1NC
M

1

Non-Illuminated
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number








E34VFBK1-1X

E34VFBL1-1X

E34VFB120ER-1X

E34VFB120FR-1X

M

1NO

37
37
37

Three-Position Maint.
Switch Knob

Three-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 
Mounting Location
Operator
Action 

37
X
O

37

O
O

O
X

Contact
Type

B

1NO

M
M

A

Cam
Code

Non-Illuminated
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number








3

E34VHBK1-2X

E34VHBL1-2X

E34VHB120TER-2X

E34VHB120TFR-2X

3

E34VHBK1-23X

E34VHBL1-23X

E34VHB120TER-23X E34VHB120TFR-23X

M

1NO

37

X
O
O

37

O
X
O

O
O
X

1NO
2NC
(Series)

37

1NO

37
37

Four-Position Maint.
Switch Lever

Four-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 

37

Mounting Location
Operator
Action 

37

X
O
O
O

37

O
X
O
O

O
O
X
O

O
O
O
X

M
M

Contact
Type

A

B

1NC

M
M

Cam
Code
7

Non-Illuminated
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number






E34VTBK1-23X

E34VTBL1-23X

E34VRB120TER-23X E34VRB120TFR-23X

1NO

37

1NO

37

1NC

37
Colour Selection, Non-Illuminated

37
37
37
37

Colour

Code Letter

Colour

Code Letter

Black

1

White

5

Red

2

Blue

6

Green

3

Gray

7

Yellow

4

Orange

8

Notes
For Light Unit Voltage Suffix and Knobs, Levers tables, see Page T37-264.

37

Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37





37

X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained.
To order different type or colour selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from
the Colour Selection table. Example: E34VFBK2-X1.

37
T37-258

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca



Tab37book.fm Page 259 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Selector Switch Selection

37
37
37
37

Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their
varied forms (two-position,
three-position and fourposition) are a big factor
contributing to the great
flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons”
can achieve. Because of their
flexibility, they tend to cause
difficulty with product
selection and application.
The following systematic
approach should simplify
that task.
Cam and contact block
selection is better understood
if you:
●

●

Work with each incoming
and outgoing wire/circuit
separately.
Recognize the terms NO
and NC only identify the
type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” chart
(Page T37-261) shows
how that contact will act
after assembly to the
operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.

●

●

Up to six NO or NC
contacts may be mounted
behind each plunger
location for a total of
twelve contacts. Single
circuit contact blocks have
only one plunger with the
other side of the block
“open.” Therefore, single
circuit contact blocks
transmit motion to blocks
behind them only for the
position containing the
circuit.
Each cam has two
separate lobes, each of
which operates one of the
two contact block plungers
independently of each
other. Those are identified
as position A (locating nib
side) and position B
(opposite of locating nib).
The position designations
give direction in selecting
and mounting of the
contact blocks.

Contact Circuit Locations

Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFFAUTO selector switch. In this
circuit, one incoming line is
distributed to two other
outgoing circuits by the
switch. The two circuits can
be looked at individually.
Step 1: Elementary
Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your
mind, a simple elementary
diagram of the switching
scheme as follows:
HAND
Incoming
Line

Outgoing
Circuit

OFF
AUTO

Outgoing
Circuit

Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary
diagram, you can construct
an “X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts
are to be closed (X) or open
(O) in the various positions of
the switch. The “X-O” for the
HAND circuit looks like this:

37
For the AUTO circuit, the
“X-O” diagram would look like
this:

37

HAND OFF AUTO

37

O O X

37

Putting them together, the
complete “X-O” diagram is:

37

37
37

XOO
OOX

37

Once the “X-O” diagram has
been generated, the next
step is to select the cam
and contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
desired “X-O” functions.
The selection tables on the
following pages list the
various types (shapes) of
cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact
and position to achieve the
function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Locating Nib

HAND OFF AUTO

37

A
B

X O O

37

In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
(HAND) but open in the
centre and right.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-259

Tab37book.fm Page 260 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select
determines the operation of
all contact blocks mounted to
the operator. It is selected on
the basis that it provides the
simplest circuitry for the
desired “X-O” diagram. The
selection tables show all the
“X-O” combinations. For the
purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those
tables is shown on this page.
Now to make the cam
selection, make a simple
worksheet such as:

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Example Selection Table
No.

“X-O” Pattern

1

X

O

Cam Code #2
Top A
Bottom B
O

4

O

O

X

XOO
OOX

Cam 3
(A)NO
(B)NO

It becomes immediately
obvious that cam 3 is the
better choice for two
reasons, (1) the series
combination can be avoided
making it simpler to wire,
(2) only two contacts are
required, which is less
expensive than the three
contacts required by cam 2.
Step 4: Contact Block
Selection.
Having selected the cam,
contact block selection is
simply a matter of gathering
the A position and B position
circuits into pairs which make
up the most convenient contact
block arrangement. If there is
an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then
single circuit blocks must be
selected for these leftover
circuits.
Back to the worksheet,
having selected cam 3 do
this:
X O X
O O X

37

ANO
BNO

10250T2

The Complete Switch:
E34VHBK1 with one
10250T2 or, for one
composite catalogue number,
E34VHBK1-Y1 found on
Page T37-259.
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate
connections to obtain a
selector switch circuit
combination and are shown
with their appropriate line
diagrams. Field wiring of
jumper connections required
as shown.

—
NC

—

NO
—

NO

NO

Two-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position

1

Contact Blocks Required to
Accomplish Circuit Function
Top Plunger A
Bottom Plunger B
X

O
NC

2

O

or

NC

X
or
NO

Note
 Wired in series.

X = Closed circuit
O = Open circuit
Wiring of Jumper
Connections

Series Connection

Parallel Connection

Four-position selector
switches are limited to four
contact blocks.
Contact Blocks
For selection and number
of available contact blocks
per operator, see Page
T37-271.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-260

Cam Code #3
Top A
Bottom B

a

NO

No.
Cam 2
(A)NO-(B)NC
(B)NO

37
37

Step 5: Selector Switch
Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose
from the many types of
operators—knob and lever
in various colors or keyed.
Also what combinations
of maintained and spring
return functions are
required. Selection of these
operators can be found on
Page T37-262. For the
example in step 4, you
may want a three-position
maintained black knob,
cam 3—Catalogue Number
E34VHBK1.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

NO

Tab37book.fm Page 261 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection

Desired Circuit and
Operator Position

No.
1

X

O

X

X

NC

X

37
37
37

NO

37

O
NC

3

37

O
NO

2

37

Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
Operator with Cam Code #2
Operator with Cam Code #3
Mounting Location
Mounting Location
Top
Bottom
Top
Bottom
Plunger
Plunger
Plunger
Plunger
A
B
A
B

O

NC

37

X

37

NO
NO
4

O

O

X

37
NO

5

O

NO

X

NO

37

X
NC
NC

6

O

X

37

NO

O
NC

NC

37

NC

37
37

Four-Position Switch—Contact Block Selection
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position

Mounting Location
Top
Bottom
Plunger
Plunger
A
B

No.
1

X

O

O

O

Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
Mounting Location
Top
Bottom
Plunger
Plunger
A
B

Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
No.
10

X

O

X

37
37
37
37

O

NC
2

O

X

O

37

NC
NO

O
NO

3

O

O

X

O

4

O

O

O

X

11

X

X

X

37

O

NO
NC
NO

NC
5

X

O

O

X

12
NC

6

O

X

X

7

O

O

X

X

8

X

X

O

O

O

37

X

37

NC

37

NC
NO

NO
13

X

O

X

37

X

37

NC
NO
NC

NC
X

X

NO

NO

O

X

O
NO

9

O

37
NO

37

NC

NO

X

14
NO
NC

X

X

O

37

X

NC

37

NO
NC

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

37
T37-261

Tab37book.fm Page 262 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Selector Switch Operators
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Two-Position Knob
Selector Switch

Operators with Knob Assembled

Positions

37

Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 
Cam Code 
Catalogue Number 

Operator
Action 

Two-position—60˚ throw
M

M

M

S

37
37
Three-position—60˚ throw

M

37

M

37

S

M
M

37

M

M
S

S

37

M
M

37

Four-position—40˚ throw

M

37
37

M

E34VFBK1

1

E34VEBK1

2

E34VGBK1

3

E34VHBK1

2

E34VJBK1

3

E34VKBK1

2

E34VLBK1

3

E34VMBK1

2

E34VNBK1

3

E34VPBK1

7

E34VTBK1

M

M

Key Operators

37
37

S

1

Three-Position Keyed
Selector Switch

Key Operators with Cam and Cap

Positions

37

Operator
Action 

Two-position—60˚ throw

37
37

M

M

M

S

Three-position—60˚ throw

37

M
M

M

S

37

M

S

S

M

Four-position—40˚ throw

37

M
M

1

1, 2, 3

E34KFB_

E34KFHB_

1

2

E34KEB_

E34KEHB_

2

1–7

E34KGB_

E34KGHB_

E34KHB_

E34KHHB_

E34KJB_

E34KJHB_

E34KKB_

E34KKHB_

E34KLB_

E34KLHB_

E34KMB_

E34KMHB_

E34KNB_

E34KNHB_

E34KPB_

E34KPHB_

E34KTB_

E34KTHB_

3

S

4

3
2, 4, 6

3
7

M

1, 4, 5

3

2

M

37

Vertical
Horiz.
Mounting
Mounting
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

2

M

37

Key
Removal
Positions 

2

M

37

Cam
Code 

7

M

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37



37




37



37



M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
Field convertible to horizontal mounting.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and
tables on Pages T37-259 to T37-261.
For other colors of either the knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the catalogue number with the
appropriate suffix code from Alternate Knob and Lever table on Page T37-263. Example: E34VFBL2.
Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page T37-263. Add key removal code number to listed catalogue number.
Example: E34KFB2.

37
37
T37-262

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 263 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Key Removal Positions



Dissimilar Locks and Keys
Listed operators have
identical locks and keys (Key
Code H661), Catalogue
Number 10250ED824. For
dissimilar lock and key
combinations, see Page T37198.

C
L

R

Code
Suffix

Key Removal
Position

1

Right only

2

Left only

3

Right and left

4

Centre only

6

Left and centre

7

All positions

37.8
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

E34K_

E34L_

E34A_

Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators

Colour

37



37

Lever Designed for
Added Ingress Protection 

Knob

Lever

Suffix
Code

Suffix
Catalogue Number Code

Suffix
Catalogue Number Code

Catalogue Number

Black

K1

E34K1

L1

E34L1

A1

E34A1

Red

K2

E34K2

L2

E34L2

A2

E34A2

Green

K3

E34K3

L3

E34L3

A3

E34A3

Yellow

K4

E34K4

L4

E34L4

A4

E34A4

White

K5

E34K5

L5

E34L5

A5

E34A5

Blue

K6

E34K6

L6

E34L6

A6

E34A6

Gray

K7

E34K7

L7

E34L7

A7

E34A7

Orange

K8

E34K8

L8

E34L8

A8

E34A8

37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
 See operators on Page T37-262.
 For use on maintained operators only.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-263

Tab37book.fm Page 264 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
120 Vac Transformer
Selector Switch, Cam 1

37

Operator without Knob or Lever

Positions

Operator Action

Two-position—60˚ throw

37

M

37

Three-position—60˚ throw

M
M

M

37

M

M

37

M

M
S
Four-position—40˚ throw

Cam Code 1 
E34SFB_

Cam Code 2 

Cam Code 3 

Cam Code 2 

Cam Code 3 

E34VGB_

E34VHB_

E34SGB_

E34SHB_



E34VPB_



E34SNB_



E34SPB_ 

E34VJB_ 

E34VKB_ 

E34SJB_ 

E34SKB_ 

E34VLB_

E34VMB_

E34SLB_

E34SMB_

E34VRB_

—

E34SRB_

—

M

37
37

Cam Code 1 
E34VFB_

S

S

37

Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 
Lamps—#755, #757, #1835, 120MB 
Catalogue Number 

E34VNB_

M

37

Transformer Type—50/60 Hz
6V #755 Lamp
Catalogue Number 

S
M

M

M

M

37
37

Knob

Knobs and Levers
Colour 


Knob
Catalogue Number
and Code Number

Lever
Catalogue Number
and Code Number

Red

10250TER

10250TFR

Green

10250TEG

37

Yellow
Blue

37

37
37

Lever

37

Light Unit Voltage Suffix
Add to operator Catalogue Number listed in table above.

10250TFG

Type of Light Unit
Transformer Type
50/60 Hz
Voltage

10250TEA

10250TFA

10250TEL

10250TFL

Clear

10250TEC

White
Amber

37

Suffix Code

Full Voltage Type
AC or DC 
Voltage

Suffix Code

24

024

6

06

120

120

12

12

10250TFC

208

208

24

24

10250TEW

10250TFW

240

240

48

48

10250TEM

10250TFM

380

380

120

120

480

480

240 	

240

600

600

37
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages T37-167 to T37-239.

37



37



37







37



	

37




Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page T37-225.
120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
Add suffix code for light unit voltage to listed catalogue number from Light Unit Voltage Suffix table above.
Example: For 24V transformer type light unit, order E34VFB024.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection tables on Pages T37-259 to T37-261.
120 and 240V transformer only.
120 full voltage only.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (R). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (R).

37
37
37
37
37
T37-264

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 265 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Accessories

37
Accessories

E34TA2

Description

Catalogue Number

Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators.
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.
Will not lock NO contact.

E34TA2

37
37
37
37

10250TA_

Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with flush pushbutton operators.
Clear

10250TA47

Red

10250TA48

Green

10250TA49

Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with button operators (extended
buttons preferred).
Black

E34TA3_

E34TA6

37
37
37

10250TA3


Red

10250TA4

Green

10250TA10

Clear

10250TA85

Transparent Boot for regular, illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest.

10250TA25 

Special Retaining Nut—to accommodate thick panel.
Indicating light

E34TA30

PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches

37

10250TA46

Black

37
37
37
37

E34TA31

37
Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator—prevents accidental operation.
(Not for push-pull operators.)

E34TA6

37
37

E34TA12

Extended Retaining Nut—replaces standard nut and provides guard for
flush type pushbutton operators.

37

E34TA12

37
37

E34TA15

Guard for illuminated pushbutton

37

E34TA15

37
37
E34TA11

Padlocking Attachment for non-illuminated knob selector switches—
accommodates up to five, 1/4 in padlocks.

E34TA11

37
37
37

Notes
 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.

37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-265

Tab37book.fm Page 266 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8

30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Accessories, continued

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Description

Catalogue Number

E34TK3

Thrust Washer—To meet Ford Motor Company mounting specifications.

E34TK3

10250TA7_

Contact Block Terminal Jumps—Available in multiples of 100 only.

37
37
37

Terminal to terminal—within block (short):
100 per package

37

1000 per package
Terminal to terminal—block to block (long):
100 per package

37
37

1000 per package
10250TMT8

37

10250TA70
10250TA70-2
10250TA71
10250TA71-2

Master Test (Dual Input) Module—Internal Form C relay suitable for either
AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation between monitored and test circuit.
Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48 Vdc

10250TMT8

Flasher Module—Internal Form C relay suitable for AC applications.
One unit required for each operator in master test circuit.
24 Vac

10250TFL2

37
37
37

10250TFL_

37

120 Vac

10250TFL1

37
37

E22CW

Panel Mounting Nut Wrench—E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T.

E22CW

10250TA101

Fingerproof Shroud—10 per package
Fits new style contact blocks and light units.

10250TA101

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-266

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 267 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Options

37

Legend Plates 

37

Field Colour
Legend plates can be
supplied printed on black,
red, silver or white field. To
order legend printed on a
colour other than indicated—
add suffix code to the end of

37

Example: E34SP26R—
Standard plate with red field
marked OPEN.

the catalogue number as
follows:
“R” for Red field;
“W” for White field; or
“S” for Silver field.

37
37
37

Standard

For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights
Colour of
Field

Legend

Standard  
Catalogue Number

Jumbo
Catalogue Number

Legend

Colour of
Field

Standard  
Catalogue Number

Jumbo
Catalogue Number

37

Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High
CLAMP

Black

CLOSE
Jumbo

DOWN

E34SP90

E34LP90

OFF

Red

E34SP24

E34LP24

E34SP73

E34LP73

ON

Black

E34SP25

E34LP25

E34SP74

E34LP74

OPEN

E34SP26

E34LP26

EMERG. STOP

Red

E34SP13

E34LP13

OUT

E34SP27

E34LP27

FAST

Black

E34SP75

E34LP75

POWER ON

E34SP80

E34LP80

FASTER

E34SP87

E34LP87

RAISE

E34SP28

E34LP28

FEEDER ON

E34SP94

E34LP94

READY

E34SP86

E34LP86

FEEDER OFF

E34SP95

E34LP95

RESET

E34SP29

E34LP29

FORWARD

E34SP15

E34LP15

REVERSE

E34SP30

E34LP30

HIGH

E34SP16

E34LP16

RUN

E34SP31

E34LP31

IN

E34SP17

E34LP17

SAFE

E34SP85

E34LP85

INCH

E34SP18

E34LP18

SLOW

E34SP32

E34LP32

JOG

E34SP19

E34LP19

SLOWER

E34SP88

E34LP88

JOG FOR.

E34SP20

E34LP20

START

E34SP33

E34LP33

JOG REV.

E34SP21

E34LP21

STOP

Red

E34SP34

E34LP34

LOW

E34SP22

E34LP22

TEST

Black

E34SP83

E34LP83

LOWER

E34SP23

E34LP23

TRANSFER

E34SP93

E34LP93

LUBE-FAIL

E34SP92

E34LP92

TRIP

E34SP84

E34LP84

MOTOR RUN

E34SP81

E34LP81

UNCLAMP

E34SP91

E34LP91

MOTOR STOP

E34SP82

E34LP82

UP

E34SP35

E34LP35

Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square
Colour
Lettering

Field
Side 1

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37



Standard 

37

Side 2

Catalogue Number

Jumbo
Catalogue Number

Extra Large
Catalogue Number

37
37

Black

White

Silver

10250TSP76

10250TLP76

10250TEP76

White

Red

Black

10250TSP77

10250TLP77

10250TEP77

37

Notes
 For dimensions, see Page T37-244.
 3/32 in high lettering.
 Legend plates with non-standard markings or aluminum legend plates see 10250T listing on Page T37-218.
 See Appendix 4 for French engraving.

37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-267

Tab37book.fm Page 268 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37

Standard

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

For Selector Switch Operators
Colour of
Field

Standard 
Catalogue Number

Legend

E34SP38

E34LP38

AUTO OFF HAND

E34SP49

E34LP49

HAND AUTO

E34SP39

E34LP39

FOR. OFF REV.

E34SP50

E34LP50

HIGH LOW

E34SP40

E34LP40

FOR. SAFE REV.

E34SP69

E34LP69

JOG RUN

E34SP41

E34LP41

HAND OFF AUTO

E34SP51

E34LP51

MAN. AUTO

E34SP67

E34LP67

MAN. OFF AUTO

E34SP68

E34LP68

37

OFF ON

E34SP42

E34LP42

OPEN OFF CLOSE

E34SP53

E34LP53

OPEN CLOSE

E34SP43

E34LP43

RUN SAFE JOG

E34SP70

E34LP70

37

RUN JOG

E34SP44

E34LP44

UP OFF DOWN

E34SP54

E34LP54

SAFE RUN

E34SP45

E34LP45

ON STOP SAFE

E34SP71

E34LP71

START JOG

E34SP46

E34LP46

START STOP

E34SP47

E34LP47

UP DOWN

E34SP48

E34LP48

37

Two-Position—3/16 in High Lettering

37
37

FOR. REV.
Jumbo

37

37
37

Black

Three-Position—3/16 in High Lettering

37
For Push-Pull Units

37
37
37
37

Legend

Colour of
Field

Standard  
Catalogue Number

Jumbo 
Catalogue Number

PULL ON/PUSH OFF

Black

E34PP5

E34R5

PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE

Black

E34PP8

E34R8

PULL UP/PUSH DOWN

Black

E34PP11

E34R11

Notes
 3/32 in (2.4 mm) high lettering.
 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high lettering.
 See Appendix 4 for French engraving.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-268

Colour of
Field

Standard 
Jumbo
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

Jumbo
Catalogue Number

Legend

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Black

Tab37book.fm Page 269 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Enclosures

37

Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures

37

Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 
Number of
Elements
Die Cast Enclosure

Polyester Enclosure

Stainless Steel
Enclosure

One Contact Block Depth
Catalogue Number

37

Two Contact Block Depth
Catalogue Number

37

Die Cast Enclosure—In-Line  NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
1

E34N1

E34N11

2

E34N2

E34N12

3

E34N3

E34N13

4

—

E34N14

37
37
37

Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1

—

E34N51

2

—

E34N52

3

—

E34N53

4

—

E34N54

37
37
37

Stainless Steel —In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1

—

10250TN33

2

—

10250TN34

3

—

10250TN35

4

—

10250TN36

37
37
37
37

Dimensions, see Page T37-278.

37
37

Mounting Instructions
One and Two Contact Block
Depth Enclosures

Enclosure Layouts

37

Top – For Vertical Mounting

37

1

One Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

3

Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure

4

Top – For Horizontal
Mounting

These E34 Die Cast
Enclosures feature a
corrosion resistant coating
identical to finish on the E34
operators except gray in
colour. Not for use in
ultraviolet light applications.

37
37
37
37

Notes
 For spacing increments, see Page T37-270.
 All die cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23.
See listing on Page T37-213.
 When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
 14 gauge, type 304.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-269

Tab37book.fm Page 270 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only 
Flush Mounting Covers

Covers Only—Flush Mounting
Number of
Elements

37

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

Flush Die Cast Covers

37

In-Line Deep
Cover

In-Line Flat
Cover

37

1

E34F11

E34F1

2

E34F12

E34F2

37

3

E34F13

E34F3

4

E34F14

E34F4

37

In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 
With Pullbox

37
37
37

37
37
37

1

10250TS10

10250TS1

2

10250TS11

10250TS2

3

10250TS12

10250TS3

4

10250TS14

10250TS4

Dimensions, see Page T37-279.

37
37

Without Pullbox

Spacing Increments
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Type

F

G

H

Die cast

2.44 (62)

2.5 (63.5)

1.88 (47.8)

Polyester

1.88 (47.8)

Min. 2.13 (54.1)

2.25 (57.2)

Stainless steel

1.69 (42.9)

Min. 1.73 (43.9)

2.25 (57.2)

37
37

Spacing Increments for
Enclosures

Top – For Vertical Mounting
G

37

H

37
37
37

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

3
4

F

Top – For Horizontal
Mounting

37

37

Enclosure Layouts

Notes
 These E34 die cast covers feature a corrosion resistant coating identical to the finish on the E34 operators except gray in colour.
 Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-270

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 271 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Colour-coded plungers—
red/green for NC/NO
circuits
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Black (opaque) or amber
(translucent) housings
●
Pressure plate or spade
terminals
●
Fingerproof shrouds (for
pressure terminals only)
Logic Level Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Black plungers
●
Inert palladium knife-blade
contacts
●
Black (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate or spade
terminals
●
Fingerproof shrouds not
available

37
Special Purpose Contact Block
●
Maximum 300V rated
●
Black plungers
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Black (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate terminals
only
●
Fingerproof shrouds not
available
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs are the
hallmark of Eaton’s contact
blocks. A pointed silver nib on
the contact tip ensures
reliable switching from logic
level (5V) up to 600V
applications. Therefore
standard contact blocks can
be used for most logic level
applications where the
contacts are not exposed to
any harsh environmental
conditions.

Palladium Contacts
Palladium, which is more
inert than gold, is well suited
for voltages and currents
approaching zero and is
recommended for
applications where
environmental conditions are
a factor.

37
37
37
37
37

Maximum Contact Block
Mounting per Operator Type
Operator

Max.
Stack

Pushbuttons

6

37
37

Push-pull operators

2

Roto-push operators

4

Two- or three-position
selector switches

6

37

Four-position selector
switches

4

37

Joysticks

4

37

37

37

Special Function Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Black plungers
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Black (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate terminals
only
●
Fingerproof shrouds not
available

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-271

Tab37book.fm Page 272 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37

10250T1

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Contact Blocks

Symbol

Circuit

Description 

Standard
Pressure Terminal
Catalogue Number

Spade Terminal 
Catalogue Number

Logic Level
Pressure Terminal
Catalogue Number

Spade Terminal 
Catalogue Number

37

Blank
No
Plunger

1NC

Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T51

10250T59

10250T51E

10250T59E

37

Blank
No
Plunger

1NO

Stack up to six blocks six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T53

10250T60

10250T53E

10250T60E

NO-NC

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T1

10250T40

10250T1E

10250T40E

2NC

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T3

10250T42

10250T3E

10250T42E

2NO

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.

10250T2

10250T41

10250T2E

10250T41E

37
37
37

Special Function Blocks 

37

LONC

Late opening NC. Stack up to six
blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.

10250T71 

—

10250T71E 

—

ECNONC

Early closing NO and standard NC.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T47 

—

10250T47E 

—

37

ECNONO

Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T57 

—

10250T57E 

—

37

2LONC

Two late opening NC contacts.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T45 

—

10250T45E 

—

LONCECNO

Overlapping contacts. Stack up to
10250T55 
four blocks unless otherwise noted.

—

10250T55E 

—

Blank
No
Plunger

37
37

37
37

Special Purpose Blocks 

37

2NO2NC

37

Four circuits in single block depth.
Rated 300V max. Stack up to four
blocks unless otherwise noted.

10250T44 

—

Notes
 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).
Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
 Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or roto-push operators. Okay to use with three-position push-pull operators only
on low voltage (30V or less) circuits.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-272

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 273 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

10250T1CP

Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
Logic Level
Pressure Terminal 
Catalogue Number

Circuit

Description 

Standard
Pressure Terminal 
Catalogue Number

Blank
No
Plunger

1NC

Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.

10250T51P

10250T51EP

Blank
No
Plunger

1NO

Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.

10250T53P

10250T53EP

NO-NC

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.

10250T1P

10250T1EP

2NC

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.

10250T3P

10250T3EP

2NO

Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.

10250T2P

10250T2EP

Symbol

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Special Function Blocks 
Blank
No
Plunger

LONC

Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.

10250T71P 

10250T71EP 

37

ECNO-NC

Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks
unless otherwise noted.

10250T47P 

10250T47EP 

37





37

ECNO-NO

Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks
unless otherwise noted.

10250T57P

10250T57EP

2LONC

Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T45P 

10250T45EP 

37

LONC-ECNO

Overlapping contacts. Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.

10250T55P 

10250T55EP 

37
37

Replacement Parts

37

Replacement Lamps—For E34 Illuminated Operators
Mfg. Lamp Type

Voltage

Base Style

Application

Part Number

120MB

120V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T resistor indicating light

28-3044

#267

6.3V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T flasher

10250ED986-4

#755

6.3V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T transformer, PresTest and full voltage

28-2202

#756

12V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T full voltage

28-5184

#757

24V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T full voltage

28-5185

#1828

32V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T full voltage

28-5186

#1835

55V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T resistor

28-5187

NE48

120V

T 4-1/2 bayonet

10250T neon

28-494

NE51H-R22

120V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T neon

28-3754

NE51H-R68

240V

T 3-1/4 bayonet

10250T neon

28-3755

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
 To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change suffix P to CP in catalogue number e.g. 10250T51CP.
 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-273

Tab37book.fm Page 274 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37
37
37
37
37
37

Flush Head
Pushbutton Operator

Mushroom Head
Pushbutton Operator

Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator

Potentiometers

Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator

Transformer Type
Indicating Light

Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator

Full Voltage, Resistor
and Transformer Type
Illuminated Selector Switch

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

E34 Style Operator Replacement Parts
Item
No.

Description

No.
Req.

Part
Number

Item
No.

Description

1

Gasket

1

16-1548

12

2

Mounting nut

1

15-1530-4

13

3

Set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex)

2

11-2014

4

Mushroom head button (includes [2] item 5)

1

As Req. Below

Black

37

Red

—

Blue
5
6

37
37
7

37
37

—

Green

37

37

—

Yellow

37
37

—

8

Set screw (#10-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex)
Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—includes [2] item 5)

No.
Req.

Part
Number

Mounting screw

2

11-1632

Simple potentiometer
(does not include items 18, 28 or 29)

1

As Req. Below

1,000 ohms

—

41-782-2

2,500 ohms

—

41-782-3

5,000 ohms

—

41-782-10

10,000 ohms

—

41-782-4

25,000 ohms

—

41-782-5

50,000 ohms

—

41-782-6

53-1317
53-1317-2
53-1317-3
53-1317-4

—

53-1317-22

2

11-544

14

Connector (includes screw and lug)

2

25-1851

15

Indicating plate

1

As Req. Above

Standard size (without legend)

—

30-4460

Large size (specify legend)

—

10250TR30

1

As Req. Below

Red

—

53-1317-9

Black

—

53-1317-10

16

Retaining nut

1

15-1547-3

Yellow

—

53-1317-11

17

Knob

1

53-1314

Green

—

53-1317-12

Socket set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long)

1

11-2014

1

53-1349-18

18

Coupling

1

11-2014

2

10250TA79

19

Set screw (#6-32 x 0.188 in long)

1

2

16-2038

20

Spacer

2

56-1066-18

Connector (includes screw and lug)

1

25-1851-2

Mounting nut

1

15-1938-2

Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—red EMERG. STOP)
does not include item 5
Mounting screw (#6-32 x 0.710 in long)
Washer

29-3749-2

37

9

Terminal screw and lug (captive)

Req.

80-5502

21

10

Gasket (supplied with basic unit)

1

32-803

22

37

11

Round head screw (#4-40 x 0.344 in long)
(supplied with basic unit)

2

11-4553

37
37
T37-274

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

11-1199

Tab37book.fm Page 275 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Technical Data and Specifications

37

Mechanical Ratings
Description

37

Specification

37

Frequency of Operation
All pushbuttons

6000 operations/hr.

37

Key and lever selector switches

3000 operations/hr.

Auto-latch devices

1200 operations/hr.

37

Pushbuttons

10 x 106 operations

Contact blocks

10 x 106 operations

37

PresTest units

10 x 106 operations

Lever and key selector switches

0.25 x 106 operations

Twist to release pushbuttons

0.3 x 106 operations

Life

37
37

Shock Resistance
Duration

37

210 ms >5g

37
General Specifications
Description

37

Specification

37

Climate Conditions
Operating temperature

1˚ to 150˚F (–17˚ to 66˚C)

Storage temperature

–40˚ to 176˚F (–40˚ to 80˚C)

Altitude

6,562 ft (2,000m)

Humidity

Max. 95% RH at 60˚C

37
37
37

Terminals
Marking

NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1–2
for normally closed, 3–4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005).

Clamps

Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
conductors

Torque

7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)

Degree of protection against direct electrical contact

IP2X with fingerproof shroud

37

Transformers

Will withstand short-circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60947-5-1

37

Bulbs—average life:
Transformer type

20,000 hrs.

37

37
37

Light Units

Resistor/direct voltage type

2500 hrs. minimum at rated V

LED

60,000 to 100,000 hrs.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-275

Tab37book.fm Page 276 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Electrical Ratings
Description

Specification

Insulation

Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc

Thermal

Ith = 10A

Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Rated conditional short circuit current

1 kA

Fuse type

GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1

UL rating

A600, P600

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour
10A

110V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations

5A

250V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations

2A

600V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations

Switching capacity
AC 15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
6A

120V pf 0.3

4A

240V pf 0.3

2A

660V pf 0.3

DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)

37

1.0A

125V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms

0.55A

250V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms

37

0.1A

660V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms

10A

110V pure resistive

37
37
37

Maximum ratings for logic level and
hostile atmosphere application
Maximum amperes

0.5A

Maximum volts

120 Vac/Vdc

Low voltage switching

Conical shaped points or “reliability nibs” improve performance in dry circuit,
corrosive, fine dust and other contaminated atmospheres. Under normal
environmental conditions, the minimum operational voltage is 5V and the minimum
operational current is 1 mA, Vac/Vdc.

Contact operation

Slow make and break. All normally closed contacts have positive opening operation,
i.e., normally closed contacts are forced open in the event of contact weld or spring
breakage.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
50 Vac or 60 H
Description
120
240
480

600

Vdc
24/28

125

250

Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp)

60

30

15

12

5.7

1.1

0.55

Normal load break (amp)

6

3

1.5

1.2

5.7

1.1

0.55

Thermal current (amp)

10

10

10

10

5.0

5.0

5.0

Voltamperes:
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity

7200

7200

7200

7200

138

138

138

Normal load break

720

720

720

720

138

138

138

37
37
37
37
T37-276

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 277 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Mounting Options

37

Panel Thickness
●
Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm)
●
Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
●
Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut
●
Indicating light: 10250TA30
●
Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31

37
37
37
37

Mounting Matrix

37

Legend
Plate

Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
B

C

D

Small

1.63 (41.3)

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

1.63 (41.3)

Medium

1.75 (44.5)

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

1.75 (44.5)

Large

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

37
37
37
37

Mounting Options in Inches (mm)
Terminals on Top
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.

37

0.6
(15.2)

D
Min.

37

B
Min.

A
Min.

C
Min.

37

1.22
(31)

37

Terminals at Side
Horizontal Mounting

37

Vertical Mounting

37

Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block.
Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals.

37

Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 in (3.6 mm) #29 drill.

37
37

Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.

37

0.6
(15.2)

37
37

1.20
(30.5)

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-277

Tab37book.fm Page 278 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Potentiometer

Legend Plates

Large Dial Plate
1.88
(47.8)

37

1.09
1.0
(27.7) (25.4)

Std. Dial Plate

37

1.31
(33.3)

0.94
(23.9)

0.94
(23.9)

0.75
(19.1)

37
37
37
37

2.19
(55.6)

1.77
(45)

0.94
(23.9)

37
37

2.19
(55.6)

1.77
(45)

Jumbo

Standard

Surface Mounting
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester

37
37

E
B

37
37

D
A

37
37
37
37
37
37

C
Surface

Number of
Elements

Mounting
D

E

Conduit
Entrance

3.0 (76.3) 

2.69 (68.3)

3.25 (82.6)

3/4



Element
Arrangement

Wide
A

High
B

Deep
C

In-line

3.88 (98.6)

4.0 (101.6)

Die Cast
1
2

3.88 (98.6)

5.88 (149.4)

3.0 (76.3)

2.69 (68.3)

5.13 (130.3)

3

3.88 (98.6)

7.75 (196.9)

3.0 (76.3) 

2.69 (68.3)

7.0 (177.8)

4

3.88 (98.6)

9.63 (244.6)

3.0 (76.3) 

2.69 (68.3)

8.88 (225.6)

Polyester

37

1

3.81 (96.8)

6.63 (168.4)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

4.88 (124.0)

2

3.81 (96.8)

6.63 (168.4)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

4.88 (124.0)

37

3

3.81 (96.8)

8.88 (225.6)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

7.13 (181.1)

4

3.81 (96.8)

11.13 (282.7)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

9.38 (238.3)

3.00 (76.2)

3.50 (88.9)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

4.25 (108.0)

2

3.50 (88.9)

6.75 (171.5)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

7.50 (190.5)

3

3.50 (88.9)

9.00 (228.6)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

9.00 (228.6)

4

3.50 (88.9)

11.25 (285.8)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

12.00 (304.8)

37
37
37
37
37

1

In-line



Stainless Steel
1

In-line

Notes
 Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 in (19.1 mm).
 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.

37
37
T37-278

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca



Tab37book.fm Page 279 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

37

Flush Mounting

37

Die Case and Stainless Steel Covers Only

37

4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size
for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger

37
37

E

37

B

37
37

D
C
A
Surface or Pendant

37
37

Wide
A

High
B

Deep
C

Mounting
D

E

37

1

3.88 (98.6)

4.0 (101.6)

0.25 (6.4) 

3.50 (88.9)

3.63 (92.2)

37

2

3.88 (98.6)

5.88 (149.4)

0.25 (6.4) 

3.50 (88.9)

5.50 (139.7)

3

3.88 (98.6)

7.75 (196.9)

0.25 (6.4) 

3.50 (88.9)

6.0 (152.4)

9.63 (244.6)



3.50 (88.9)

9.25 (235)

37



37

Number of
Elements
Die Cast

4

3.88 (98.6)

0.25 (6.4)

37

Stainless Steel
1

5.00 (127)

5.0 (127

2.50 (63.5)

3.25 (82.6)

1.88 (47.8)

2

5.00 (127)

6.88 (174.8)

2.50 (63.5) 

3.25 (82.6)

3.63 (92.2)

3

5.00 (127)

8.63 (219.2)

2.50 (63.5) 

3.25 (82.6)

5.50 (139.7)

4

5.00 (127)

10.50 (266.7)

2.50 (63.5) 

3.25 (82.6)

7.25 (184.2)

37
37

Notes
 Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover is 3/4 in (19.1 mm) deeper.
 Depth given includes pull box.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-279

Tab37book.fm Page 280 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Padlocking Attachment for Flush
Pushbutton Operators
0.84
(21.3)

0.75
(19.1)

0.94
(23.9)

1.63
(41.4)

37
37

Flexible Weather Resistant Boot

37

1.47
(37.3)
1.59
(40.4)

37
Transparent Boot

37

1.92
(48.8)

1.31
(33.3)
1.14
(29)

1.06
(26.9)

1.53
(38.9)

0.88
(22.4)

Contact
Blk.

Shroud for Mushroom
Head Operator

Each Addl.
Contact Blk.

1.78
(45.2)

Extended Pushbutton
1.44
(36.6)

Extended Retaining Nut
0.88
(22.4)

1.25
(31.8)

1.38
(35.1)

1.31
(33.3)

Contact
Blk.

1.78
(45.2)

Each Addl.
Contact Blk.

37
37

1.38
(35.1)

1.09
(27.7)

1.50
(38.1)

37

1.38
(35.1)

1.09
(27.7)

Half Shroud Pushbutton
1.44
(36.6)

37
1.63
(41.4)

37

1.50
(38.1)

37

1.78
(45.2)

0.88
(22.4)

37
37
37
37
37
T37-280

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Contact
Blk.

Guard for Illuminated
Pushbutton

Each Addl.
Contact Blk.

37

1.78
(45.2)

1.59
(40.4)

37

37

Master Test Module and
Flasher Module

Flush Pushbutton

37

37

0.86
(21.8)

6 Mounting Holes

37

37

0.45
(11.4)

1.63
(41.4)

37

37

0.25
(6.4)

0.25
(6.4)

0.25
(6.4)

37

37

Contact Block Terminal Jumps

1.09
(27.7)

1.38
(35.1)

Tab37book.fm Page 281 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37.8

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1.63
(41.4)

1.09
(27.7)

0.88
(22.4)

1.50
(38.1)

1.09
(27.7)

1.78
(45.2)

Contact
Blk.

37
1.58
(40.1)
Knob

37
37

Contact
Block

1.75
(44.5)

37

Selector Switch

Each Additional
Contact Block

Each Addl.
Contact Blk.

2.50
(63.5)

1.09
(27.7)

37

1.13
(28.7)

Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton

0.88
(22.4)

37

1.38
(35.1)

1.09
(27.7)

1.78
(45.2)

37

0.69
(17.5)

Light
Unit

Contact
Blk.

Each Addl.
Contact Blk.

1.78
(45.2)

37

Illuminated Pushbutton

Mushroom Pushbutton

37
37

Push-Pull Switch
0.88
(22.4)

0.88
(22.4)

0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness

0.25
(6.4)

1.78
(45.2)

1.09
(27.7)

37
37

Key Selector Switch

37
37
37

0.88
1.09
(22.4) (27.7)

Indicating Light
1.78
(45.2)

37

1.58
(40.1)
Lever

Contact
Block

2.63
(66.8)
1.65
(41.9)

1.13
(28.7)

Each Addl.
Contact Blk.

Contact Light
Block Unit

0.88
(22.4)

1.5
(38.1)

37

1.58 (40.1)
to Remove
Key

1.38
(35.1)

37
37

1.1
(27.9)

1.38
(35.1)

Illuminated Selector Switch

PresTest Indicating Light
0.69
(17.5)
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)

37
37

Light
Unit

Contact
Blk.

Each Addl.
Contact Blk.

1.78
(45.2)

1.09
(27.7)

Each Additional
Contact Block

1.9
(48.3)

37

1.58
(40.1)
Knob

37
37

0.88
(22.4)

1.09
(27.7)

1.58
(40.1)
Lever

37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-281

Tab37book.fm Page 282 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.8

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
This page left intentionally blank

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-282

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 283 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Contents

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Description

Page

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—
10250T/E34
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . .
Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
37

T37-284
T37-285
T37-285
T37-286
T37-290
T37-292
T37-293
T37-294
T37-295
T37-297
T37-299
T37-302
T37-306
T37-308
T37-311
T37-314
T37-316
T37-319
T37-321
T37-322

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Product Description
All the Industry-Proven
Quality of Eaton’s 10250T and
E34 Series of Logic Devices,
plus Class I Division 2
Certification
The 10250T1H consists of a
normally open-normally
closed factory sealed contact
block that is UL Listed for use
in Class I, Division 2, Groups
B, C and D (NEC 500–503)—
Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC
505) hazardous locations and
is rated for both NEMA A600
and NEMA Q300. 10250T
and E34 illuminated
components have also been
UL Listed for use in Class I,
Division 2, Groups B, C and D
(NEC 500–503)—Class I,
Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC 505).
This, combined with the
industry-proven Eaton
10250T 30.5 mm pushbutton
line, offers a complete
solution to Division 2
hazardous location
requirements.

Benefits
Single composite catalogue
numbers for complete
assembled stations and
operators for use in Division 2
hazardous locations are
featured throughout this
section.

●

●

●

Features
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Factory sealed contact
blocks
Heavy-duty zinc die cast
construction
NEMA rated 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 12, 13
Front-of-panel drainage
holes
Grounding nibs on the
operator casing
Solid thermosetting
cathodic epoxy coating on
E34
Corrosion resistance in
E34

●

●

Pushbutton for hazardous
locations
Drainage holes prevent
buildup of liquid inside the
operator which can prevent
operation in freezing
environments
Grounding nibs bite
through paint and other
coatings to provide secure
ground
Suitable for corrosive
environments (E34 only)
Earth terminal provides
additional grounding point
and allows for daisy chain
grounding (E34 line)

Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●

●

37

UL 508—File No. E131568
UL 1604—File No. E10323
CSA Certified C22.2
No.14—File No. LR 68551
CSA Certified C22.2 No.
213-M1987—File No. LR
20713

37
37
37
37
37

Ingress Protection
●

●

Standard indicating lights
●
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65
All other operators
●
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-283

Tab37book.fm Page 284 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Product Overview
Operator

10250T Grounding Nibs

The 30.5 mm 10250T
pushbutton line features a
zinc die cast construction with
chrome-plated housing and
mounting nut.

10250T line operators have
“grounding nibs”—four metal
points on the operator casting
designed to bite through
most paints and other
coatings on metal panels to
enhance the grounding
connection when the
operator is securely
tightened.

37

Eaton’s E34 Series 30.5 mm
pushbutton line features the
same rugged die cast
construction of our 10250T
line with an additional twolayer 100% solid thermosetting
cathodic epoxy coating. This
coating provides a flat black
smooth, consistent, corrosion
resistant surface that has
passed a demanding 600 hour
salt spray test. (The industry
standard for this 4X test
requires only 200 hours.)

37

Ultraviolet Light

37
37
37
37
37

37

E34 epoxy coating is not
recommended for use in
applications where exposure
to ultraviolet light exists—use
NEMA 4X 10250T operators.

37

Ratings

37

37
37
37
37
37
37

Our Class I Division 2 line of
pushbuttons are UL Listed
(NEMA type) 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 12 and 13. Our Class I
Division 2 E34 line meets IEC
947-1 IP66 standards and the
cathodic coating meets FDA
3A sanitary chemical
resistance requirements.
For a complete listing of all
applicable ratings see
Pages T37-319 to
T37-320.

Diaphragm Seal with
Drainage Holes

10250T Grounding Nibs

Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s pushbutton operators
offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator
bushing. Hidden from view
by the mounting nut, these
holes prevent buildup of
liquid inside the operator,
which can prevent operation
in freezing environments. The
holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high
pressure washdowns,
effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.

E34 Grounding Nibs

Diaphragm Seal

E34 line of operators is
equipped with a ground
screw terminal as part of its
die cast construction. This
earthing terminal provides an
easily accessible point for
grounding operators when
used in a painted or
nonmetallic enclosure and
eliminates the need for extra
kits when daisy chain
grounding is required.
E34 Grounding Nibs

Nib
Earth
Terminal

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-284

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Flexible
Diaphragm
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Colourfast
Molded
Button
Drainage Hole
Mounting Nut

Tab37book.fm Page 285 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Product Identification

37

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Catalogue Number Selection
Catalogue Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalogue numbers.

37

Non-Illuminated Assembled Operators

37
37

10250T 718 E J

37
Operator Type
10250T = Heavy-duty oiltight
E34EX = Corrosion resistant oiltight

706 =
707 =
708 =
709 =
710 =
711 =
712 =
713 =
714 =
715 =
716 =
717 =
718 =
721 =

Operator and Contact Block
Flush 1NO-1NC
722 = 2P SS MT XO,OX-CAM1
Flush 2NO-2NC
723 = 2P SS MT XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
Extended 1NO-1NC
724 = 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX-CAM1
Extended 2NO-2NC
725 = 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
Mushroom 1NO-1NC
726 = 3P SS MT XOO,OOX-CAM3
Mushroom 2NO-2NC
727 = 3P SS MT XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
JMB mushroom 1NO-1NC
728 = 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OOX-CAM3
JMB mushroom 2NO-2NC
729 = 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
2P MT push-pull 1NO-1NC
730 = 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OOX-CAM3
2P MT push-pull 2NO-2NC
731 = 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P MT push-mom pull 1NO-1NC 732 = 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OOX-CAM3
3P MT push-mom pull 2NO-2NC 733 = 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P mom push-pull 1NO-1NC
743 = 4P SS MT XOOO,OXOO,OOXO,OOOX-CAM7
3P mom push-pull 2NO-2NC

B
R
G
Y
W
L
N
E
T

Button Colour
= Black
= Red
= Green
= Yellow
= White
= Blue
= Orange
= Red EMERG. STOP
= Keyed-SS

ACC/SS Type
Blank = None
J = JMB push-pull
B = Booted-FL/EXT
G = Guarded-FL
K = Knob-SS
L = Lever-SS
A = Lever W/IP-SS
C = Coin-SS
Keyed-SS
— —
Cam
1
2
3
7

37
37
37
37
37

Key Removal
1 = RT only
2 = LT only
3 = RT and LT
4 = CT only
5 = RT and CT
6 = LT and CT
7 = All

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-285

Tab37book.fm Page 286 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37
37

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
10250T Flush Button

37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Non-Illuminated Flush and Extended Pushbuttons

Contact Type

Button
Colour 

Flush Button
10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

Extended Button
10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

1NO-1NC

Black

10250T706B

E34EX706B

10250T708B

E34EX708B

Red

10250T706R

E34EX706R

10250T708R

E34EX708R

Green

10250T706G

E34EX706G

10250T708G

E34EX708G

Black

10250T707B

E34EX707B

10250T709B

E34EX709B

Red

10250T707R

E34EX707R

10250T709R

E34EX709R

Green

10250T707G

E34EX707G

10250T709G

E34EX709G

E34 Flush Button

37
37
37

10250T Extended
Button

37
2NO-2NC

37
37
37

E34 Extended Button

37
37
37
37

Colour Selection

37
37

Colour

Suffix Code

Colour

Suffix Code

Black

B

White

W

Red

R

Blue

L


Green

G

Orange

37

Yellow

Y

Red (EMERG. STOP) 

37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.


37



37




E

To order different colour guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalogue number with
appropriate suffix code from Colour Selection table above. Example: 10250T710Y.
Blue not available on jumbo mushroom pushbutton.
Orange is only available on flush or extended pushbuttons.
Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for jumbo mushroom pushbutton only.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-286

N

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 287 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
10250T Mushroom
Button

37

Non-Illuminated Mushroom and Jumbo Mushroom Pushbuttons

Contact Type

Button
Colour 

Mushroom Button
10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

Jumbo Mushroom Button
E34 
10250T 
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number

1NO-1NC

Black

10250T710B

E34EX710B

10250T712B

E34EX712B

37
37
37
37

E34 Mushroom Button
Red

10250T710R

E34EX710R

10250T712R

37

E34EX712R

37
Green

10250T710G

E34EX710G

10250T712G

37

E34EX712G

37

10250T Jumbo
Mushroom Button

37
2NO-2NC

Black

10250T711B

E34EX711B

10250T713B

E34EX713B

37
37
Red

10250T711R

E34EX711R

10250T713R

E34EX713R

37

E34 Jumbo Mushroom
Button

37
Green

10250T711G

E34EX711G

10250T713G

37

E34EX713G

37
37
37

Colour Selection
Colour

Suffix Code

Colour

Suffix Code

Black

B

White

W

Red

R

Blue

37
37

L


Green

G

Orange

Yellow

Y

Red (EMERG. STOP) 

N

37

E

37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.






37

To order different colour guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalogue number with
appropriate suffix code from Colour Selection table above. Example: 10250T710Y.
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet applications.
Blue not available on jumbo mushroom pushbutton.
Orange is only available on flush or extended pushbuttons.
Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for jumbo mushroom pushbutton only.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-287

Tab37book.fm Page 288 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
●

Momentary contact
Non-illuminated
Booted or guarded

37
37

Booted Flush Button

37

10250T Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded
Contact Type

Button Colour

Booted Flush Button
Catalogue Number

Booted Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Guarded Extended Button 
Catalogue Number

1NO-1NC

Black

10250T706BB

10250T708BB

10250T706BG

Red

10250T706RB 

10250T708RB

10250T706RG

Green

10250T706GB

10250T708GB

10250T706GG

Black

10250T707BB

10250T709BB

10250T707BG

Red

10250T707RB 

10250T709RB

10250T707RG

Green

10250T707GB

10250T709GB

10250T707GG

37
37
37

Booted Extended
Button

37
37
2NO-2NC

37
37

Guarded Extended
Button

37
37
37
37

Colour Selection

37
37
37

Colour

Suffix Code

Colour

Suffix Code

Black

B

White

W

Red

R

Blue

L

Green

G

Orange

N

Yellow

Y

37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.

37




37

To order different colour guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalogue number with
appropriate suffix code from Colour Selection table above. Example: 10250T706YG.
Red booted flush pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-288

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 289 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
●

37

Momentary contact
Non-illuminated
Booted or guarded

Booted Flush Button

37
37

E34 Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded
Contact Type

Button Colour

Booted Flush Button
Catalogue Number

Booted Extended Button
Catalogue Number

Guarded Extended Button 
Catalogue Number

37

1NO-1NC

Black

E34EX706BB

E34EX708BB

E34EX706BG

37

Red

E34EX706RB 

E34EX708RB

E34EX706RG

Green

E34EX706GB

E34EX708GB

E34EX706GG

37
37

Booted Extended
Button

37
37

2NO-2NC
Guarded Extended
Button

Black

E34EX707BB

E34EX709BB

E34EX707BG

Red

E34EX707RB 

E34EX709RB

E34EX707RG

37
37
37

Green

E34EX707GB

E34EX709GB

37

E34EX707GG

37
37
Colour Selection
Colour

Suffix Code

Colour

Suffix Code

Black

B

White

W

Red

R

Blue

L

Green

G

Orange

N

Yellow

Y

37
37
37
37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.



37

To order different colour guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalogue number with
appropriate suffix code from Colour Selection table above. Example: 10250T706YG.
Red booted flush pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-289

Tab37book.fm Page 290 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, and 13
10250T Flush Button

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact

E34
Catalogue
Number

Extended Button
10250T
E34
Catalogue
Catalogue
Number
Number

Half Shrouded Button
10250T
Vertical
Horizontal
Catalogue
Catalogue
Number
Number

E34
Vertical
Catalogue
Number

Horizontal
Catalogue
Number

10250T101

E34PB1

10250T111

E34EB1

10250T501

10250T511

E34EVB1

E34EHB1

Red

10250T102

E34PB2

10250T112

E34EB2

10250T502

10250T512

E34EVB2

E34EHB2

Green

10250T103

E34PB3

10250T113

E34EB3

10250T503

10250T513

E34EVB3

E34EHB3

Yellow

10250T104

E34PB4

10250T120

E34EB4

10250T504

10250T514

E34EVB4

E34EHB4

Gray

10250T105

E34PB5

—

E34EB5

10250T505

10250T515

E34EVB5

E34EHB5

White

10250T106

E34PB6

10250T116

E34EB6

10250T506

10250T516

E34EVB6

E34EHB6

Blue

10250T108

E34PB7

10250T118

E34EB7

10250T508

10250T518

E34EVB7

E34EHB7

Orange

10250T109

E34PB8

10250T119

E34EB8

10250T509

10250T519

E34EVB8

E34EHB8

37
37
37

Colour

Flush Button
10250T 
Catalogue
Number

Black
E34 Flush Button

37
37
37
37

10250T Extended
Button

37
37
37
37

E34 Extended Button

37
37
37

10250T Half Shrouded
Button

37
37
37
37

E34 Half Shrouded
Button

37
37
37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.

37



37

To order operator with factory assembled extended retaining nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications, add suffix letter E to listed catalogue number.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-290

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 291 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, and 13
10250T Mushroom
Button

37

Mushroom Head Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact

Colour

Mushroom Button
10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button
10250T 
E34 
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number

Black

10250T121

E34LB1

10250T171

E34JB1

Red

10250T122

E34LB2

10250T172

E34JB2

Red (EMERG. STOP)

—

—

10250T17213

E34JB2N8

37
37
37
37

E34 Mushroom Button

37
37
37

10250T Jumbo
Mushroom Button

37
Green

10250T123

E34LB3

10250T173

E34JB3

37
37

E34 Jumbo Mushroom
Button

Yellow

10250T124

E34LB4

10250T174

E34JB4

37
37

Blue

10250T129

E34LB6

—

37

—

37
37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.



37

Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Anodized aluminum head may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-291

Tab37book.fm Page 292 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●

Momentary contact
Illuminated
Plastic lenses

37

●

37

10250T8_

37

Illuminated Pushbuttons

Type

37

Voltage

Colour

Contact

Red

1NO-1NC

10250T
LED/Lamp
Number

E34
Catalogue Number 

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

Green

Bayonet
base

Amber
E34EX8_

120 Vac

Red

37

Amber
Transformer

120 Vac

Red

37

10250T828RD24
10250T828GD24

Catalogue Number 

E34EX828GD24
E34EX828AD24

10250T828RD2A

E34EX828RD2A

10250T828GD2A

E34EX828GD2A
E34EX828AD2A

10250T828AD2A
1NO-1NC

E34EX828RD24

10250T802RD06

Green

10250T802GD06

Amber

10250T802AD06

Bayonet
base
6 Vac

E34EX802RD06
E34EX802GD06
E34EX802AD06

Incandescent Lamp

37

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

37

Red

1NO-1NC

#757

Green

Resistor

120 Vac/Vdc

Red

120MB

37

120 Vac

37

Red

10250T824RD

#755

10250T802RD

Green

10250T802GD

Amber

10250T802AD

37
10250TC_

Lens Selection
Colour

37

Suffix
Code

Catalogue Number

10250T

Colour

Suffix
Code

Catalogue Number

E34

Red

R

10250TC21

Red

R

E34V2

Green

G

10250TC22

Green

G

E34V3

37

Yellow

Y

10250TC23

Yellow

Y

E34V4

Amber

A

10250TC43

Amber

A

E34V9

37

Blue

L

10250TC24

Blue

L

E34V6

Clear

C

10250TC25

Clear

C

E34V0

White

W

10250TC26

White

W

E34V5

E34V _

37
37

Note
 To order different colour lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the catalogue number with appropriate
suffix code from Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T828YD24.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-292

E34EX818AD
120MB

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

E34EX824RD
E34EX824GD
E34EX824AD

10250T824AD
1NO-1NC

E34EX818RD
E34EX818GD

10250T824GD

Amber
Transformer

#757

10250T818AD
1NO-1NC

Green

37

10250T818RD
10250T818GD

Amber

37

37

Bayonet
base

10250T828AD24
1NO-1NC

Green

37

37

LED/Lamp
Number

LED Lamp

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

#755
6 Vac

E34EX802RD
E34EX802GD
E34EX802AD

Tab37book.fm Page 293 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units

37

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
●

37

Momentary contact
Guarded illuminated
Plastic lenses

10250T8_

37
37

Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons

Type

Voltage

Colour

Contact

24 Vac/Vdc

Red

1NO-1NC

10250T
LED/Lamp
Number

E34
Catalogue Number 

LED/Lamp
Number

Catalogue Number 

37
37

LED Lamp
Full voltage

Green

Bayonet
base

120 Vac

Transformer

E34EX828RG24
E34EX828GG24
E34EX828AG24

10250T828RG2A

E34EX828RG2A

Green

10250T828GG2A

E34EX828GG2A

Amber

10250T828AG2A

E34EX828AG2A

Red

120 Vac

10250T828GG24

Bayonet
base

10250T828AG24

Amber
E34EX8_

10250T828RG24

1NO-1NC

10250T802RG06

E34EX802RG06

Green

10250T802GG06

E34EX802GG06

Amber

10250T802AG06

E34EX802AG06

Red

1NO-1NC

Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

Resistor

120 Vac/Vdc

Transformer

120 Vac

Red

1NO-1NC

#757

10250T818RG

#757

10250T818GG

E34EX818GG

Amber

10250T818AG

E34EX818AG

Red

1NO-1NC

120MB

10250T824RG

120MB

10250T824GG

E34EX824GG

Amber

10250T824AG

E34EX824AG

Red

1NO-1NC

#755

10250T802RG

Green

10250T802GG

Amber

10250T802AG

#755
6 Vac

37
37
37
37
37

E34EX824RG

Green

37

37

E34EX818RG

Green

37

37

E34EX802RG

37

E34EX802GG

37

E34EX802AG

37
10250TC2_

Lens Selection
Suffix
Code

Catalogue Number

Red

R

10250TC21

Catalogue Number

Red

R

E34V2

Green

G

Yellow

Y

10250TC22

Green

G

E34V3

10250TC23

Yellow

Y

E34V4

Amber

A

10250TC43

Amber

A

E34V9

Blue

L

10250TC24

Blue

L

E34V6

Clear

C

10250TC25

Clear

C

E34V0

White

W

10250TC26

White

W

E34V5

10250T
E34V_

37

Suffix
Code

Colour

Colour

37

E34

37
37
37
37

Note
 To order different colour lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the catalogue number with appropriate
suffix code from Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T828YD24.

37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-293

Tab37book.fm Page 294 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37
37

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Indicating Light Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Standard
Plastic lenses

10250T_

37

Indicating Lights
Type

Voltage

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

Bayonet
base

10250T197HLRP24

E34FB197HLRP24

10250T197HLGP24

E34FB197HLGP24

Amber

10250T197HLAP24

E34FB197HLAP24

Red

10250T197HLRP2A

E34FB197HLRP2A

Green

10250T197HLGP2A

E34FB197HLGP2A

Amber

10250T197HLAP2A

E34FB197HLAP2A

Red

10250T181HLRP06

E34TB120HLRP06

Green

10250T181HLGP06

E34TB120HLGP06

Amber

10250T181HLAP06

E34TB120HLAP06

Red

120 Vac

E34_

37
Transformer

37
37

120 Vac

Incandescent Lamp

37

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

Resistor

37

120 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac

37

10250T206HAP

E34FB24HAP

10250T201HRP

E34RB120HRP

Green

10250T201HGP

E34RB120HGP

Amber

10250T201HAP

E34RB120HAP

10250T181HRP

E34HB120HRP

Green

10250T181HGP

E34HB120HGP

Amber

10250T181HAP

E34HB120HAP

Plastic
Suffix
Code

Glass
Suffix
Code

120MB

#755

Lens Selection
Plastic
Suffix
Code

Red
Green

37
Colour

37

E34FB24HGP

Amber

Red

37

Plastic

E34FB24HRP

10250T206HGP

#757

Red

37
Transformer

10250T206HRP

Green

Red

37

37

E34
Catalogue Number 

Green

37

37

10250T
Catalogue Number 

LED Lamp

37
37

LED/Lamp
Number

Colour

Catalogue Number

Glass
Suffix
Code

Catalogue Number

Colour

RP

10250TC1N

RG

10250TC7N

Red

RP

E34H2

RG

E34G2

GP

10250TC2N

GG

10250TC8N

Green

GP

E34H3

GG

E34G3

10250T
Glass

37

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

E34

Amber

AP

10250TC19N

AG

10250TC9N

Amber

AP

E34H9

AG

E34G9

Yellow

YP

10250TC3N

—

—

Yellow

YP

E34H4

YG

E34G4

37

Blue

LP

10250TC4N

LG

10250TC10N

Blue

LP

E34H6

LG

E34G6

37

Clear

CP

10250TC5N

CG

10250TC11N

Clear

CP

E34H0

CG

E34G0

White

WP

10250TC6N

WG

10250TC12N

White

WP

E34H5

WG

E34G5

37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.

37



To order different colour lens, simply substitute the underlined characters in the catalogue number with appropriate suffix code from the Lens Selection table above.
Example: 10250T201HYP.

37
37
37
37
T37-294

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 295 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

37

NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
10250T Illuminated
Pushbutton

37

Operators without Lenses

Type

Voltage

LED/Lamp
Number

Illuminated Pushbutton
10250T
E34
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number

Indicating Light
10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

10250T397HL

E34CB497HL

10250T197HL

E34FB197HL

10250T416HL

E34XB024HL

—

—

LED Light Unit Type (LEDs not included) 

E34 Illuminated
Pushbutton

10250T Indicating Light

Full voltage

—

Transformer
AC only

24

Bayonet
base

120

10250T411HL

E34XB120HL

10250T181HL

E34TB120HL

240

10250T412HL

E34XB240HL

10250T182HL

E34TB240HL

37
37

277

10250T419HL

E34XB277HL

10250T198HL

E34TB277HL

380

10250T413HL

E34XB380HL

10250T183HL

E34TB380HL

480

10250T414HL

E34XB480HL

10250T184HL

E34TB480HL

600

10250T415HL

E34XB600HL

10250T185HL

E34TB600HL

37
37

6

#755

10250T473H

E34CB06H

10250T203H

E34FB06H

12

#756

10250T474H

E34CB12H

10250T204H

E34FB12H

24

#757

10250T476H

E34CB24H

10250T206H

E34FB24H

32

#1828

10250T477H

E34CB32H

10250T207H

E34FB32H

48

#1835

10250T478H

E34CB48H

10250T208H

E34FB48H

Resistor 
AC/DC

120

120MB

10250T471H

E34SB120H

10250T201H

E34RB120H

240

120MB

10250T472H

E34SB240H

10250T202H

E34RB240H

Transformer
AC only

24

#755

10250T416H

E34XB024H

—

—

120

10250T411H

E34XB120H

10250T181H

E34TB120H

240

10250T412H

E34XB240H

10250T182H

E34TB240H

277

10250T419H

E34XB277H

10250T198H

E34TB277H

380

10250T413H

E34XB380H

10250T183H

E34TB380H

480

10250T414H

E34XB480H

10250T184H

E34TB480H

600

10250T415H

E34XB600H

10250T185H

E34TB600H

E34 Indicating Light

Neon
AC/DC

37

120

NE51H-R-22

—

—

10250T226H

E34NB120H

240

NE51H-4-68

—

—

10250T227H

E34NB240H

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.



37
37

Incandescent Light Unit Type
Full voltage
AC/DC

37

37

These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens colour from the LED Selection table on Page T37-305.
Resister units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-295

Tab37book.fm Page 296 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10

Colour
Plastic

37
37

10250TC_

37

10250TC1N
10250TC2N

E34H3

Amber

10250TC19N

E34H9
E34H4
E34H6

Clear

10250TC5N

E34H0

E34H_

White

10250TC6N

E34H5

Glass

Glass
Red

10250TC7N

E34G2

Green

10250TC8N

E34G3

Amber

10250TC9N

E34G9

Yellow

—

E34G4

Blue

10250TC10N

E34G6

Clear

10250TC11N

E34G0

E34G_

White

10250TC12N

E34G5

10250TC_

Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses

10250TC_

Colour

37
37

Red
Green

10250TC3N

37
37

E34H2

Plastic

10250TC4N

37
37

E34
Catalogue Number

Yellow

37
37

10250T
Catalogue Number

Blue

37
37

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Indicating Light Lenses

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

E34V_

37
37

10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number
E34V2

Red

10250TC21

Green

10250TC22

E34V3

Yellow

10250TC23

E34V4

Amber

10250TC43

E34V9

Blue

10250TC24

E34V6

Clear

10250TC25

E34V0

White

10250TC26

E34V5

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-296

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 297 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Push-Pull Units

37

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●

37

Two- and three-position
Non-illuminated

10250T71_

37

Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull

37

Operator Function (Position) 
Maintained—
Pull

Maintained—
Push

O
X

Mounting Location 

Contact
Type

X
O

Red Standard Push-Pull 

1

2

1NO
1NC

10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

10250T714R

E34EX714R

37
37
37

E34EX71_

O
X
O
X

X
O
X
O

2NO
2NC

10250T715R

37

E34EX715R

37
37
37

10250T71_

37

Three-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Function (Position) 
Momentary—
Pull

O
X

Maintained—
Intermediate

O
O

Maintained—
Push

X
O

Contact
Type
1NO
1NC

Mounting Location 
1

2

Red Standard Push-Pull 

37

10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

37

10250T716R

E34EX716R

37

E34EX71_

37
X
X

O
X

O
O

1NC
1NC

10250T717R

37

E34EX717R

37
37

Notes
 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 To order different type or colour buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Colour Selection
table on Page T37-298. Example: 10250T714G.
 To order different type or colour buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Colour Selection
table on Page T37-298. Example: 10250T716G.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-297

Tab37book.fm Page 298 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●

Two- and three-position
Non-illuminated

37

●

37

10250T7_

Three-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Function (Position) 

37

Momentary—
Pull

Maintained—
Intermediate

Momentary—
Push

37
37

Contact
Type

Mounting Location 
1

2

Red Standard Push-Pull 
10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

O
X

O
O

X
O

1NO
1NC

10250T718R

E34EX718R

X
X

O
X

O
O

1NC
1NC

10250T721R

E34EX721R

E34EX7_

37
37
37
37
Button and Colour Selection

37
37

Colour
Standard

37
37
37
37

Jumbo Mushroom
Head

37
37

Suffix
Code

10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

Standard
Red

R

10250TB62

E34C2

Red (EMERG. STOP)

E

10250TB63

E34C2N8
E34C3

Green

G

10250TB61

Black

B

10250TB60

E34C1

Blue

L

10250TB64

E34C6

E34J2

Jumbo Mushroom Head
(Anodized) Aluminum
Red

RJ

10250TJ62

Red (EMERG. STOP)

EJ

10250TJ63

E34J2N8

Green

GJ

10250TJ61

—

Black

BJ

10250TJ60

—

37

Yellow

YJ

10250TJ64

—

37

Notes
 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 To order different type or colour buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the
Button and Colour Selection table above. Example: 10250T718G.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-298

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 299 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Illuminated Push-Pull Units

37

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●

37

Two-position maintained
Illuminated

10250T8_

37

Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull

37

Operator Function (Position) 
Maintained—
Pull

Maintained—
Push

Contact
Type

Mounting Location 

Red Standard Push-Pull 
10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

10250T853RD24

E34EX853RD24

10250T853RD2A

E34EX853RD2A

24 Vac

10250T843RD06

E34EX843RD06

120 Vac

10250T844RD06

E34EX844RD06

10250T849RD

E34EX849RD

10250T851RD

E34EX851RD

24 Vac

10250T843RD

E34EX843RD

120 Vac

10250T844RD

E34EX844RD

Type

Voltage

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1

2

37

LED Lamp
O
X

X
O

1NO
1NC

120 Vac

E34EX8_
Transformer

37
37
37

Incandescent Lamp
O
X

37

X
O

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

Resistor

120 Vac/Vdc

Transformer

1NO
1NC

37
37
37

Lens and Colour Selection
10250T
Suffix Code

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

37

Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)

RD

10250TC47

RD

E34M2

37

ED

10250TC53

ED

E34M2N8

Green

GD

10250TC48

GD

E34M3

Blue

LD

10250TC49

LD

E34M6

Amber

AD

10250TC50

AD

E34M9

White

WD

10250TC51

WD

E34M5

Clear

CD

10250TC52

CD

E34M0

Colour
Standard

Side-Lighted
(Anodized) Aluminum

HD Aluminum with
Transparent Centre

37

E34
Suffix Code

Standard

37
37
37
37

Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum
Red

RS

10250TC57

—

—

Red (EMERG. STOP)

ES

10250TC63

—

—

Green

GS

10250TC58

—

—

Blue

LS

10250TC59

—

—

Amber

AS

10250TC64

—

—

37

Yellow

YS

10250TC60

White

WS

10250TC61

—

—

37

Clear

CS

10250TC62

—

—

37
37

37
37

Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Centre
Red

RH

10250TC65

—

—

Green

GH

10250TC66

—

—

Amber

AH

10250TC67

—

—

37
37

Notes
 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 To order different type or colour lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the
Lens and Colour Selection table above. Example: 10250T851GS.

37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-299

Tab37book.fm Page 300 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●

Three-position—maintained push, momentary pull
Illuminated

37

●

37

10250T8_

Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Function (Position) 
Momentary— Maintained—
Pull
Intermediate

37

Maintained—
Push

37

Type

Voltage


Contact Mounting Location
Type
1
2

Red Standard Push-Pull 
10250T
E34
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

LED Lamp

37
37

O
X

O
O

X
O

Full voltage

E34EX8_
Transformer

37

X
X

37

O
X

O
O

Full voltage

E34EX864RD24

10250T864RD2A

E34EX864RD2A

24 Vac

10250T854RD06

E34EX854RD06

120 Vac

10250T855RD06

E34EX855RD06

10250T875RD24

E34EX875RD24

10250T875RD2A

E34EX875RD2A

24 Vac

10250T865RD06

E34EX865RD06

120 Vac

10250T866RD06

E34EX866RD06

10250T860RD

E34EX860RD

10250T862RD

E34EX862RD

24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac

Transformer

37

10250T864RD24

24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac

1NO
1NC

1NC
1NC

Incandescent Lamp

37

O
X

37

O
O

X
O

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

Resistor

120 Vac

Transformer

24 Vac

10250T854RD

E34EX854RD

120 Vac

10250T855RD

E34EX855RD

10250T871RD

E34EX871RD

10250T873RD

E34EX873RD

37
X
X

37
37
37

O
X

O
O

1NO
1NC

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC
1NC

Resistor

120 Vac

Transformer

24 Vac

10250T865RD

E34EX865RD

120 Vac

10250T866RD

E34EX866RD

Notes
 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 To order different type or colour lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and
Colour Selection table on the bottom of Page T37-299. Example: 10250T862AS.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-300

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 301 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●

37

Three-position—momentary
Illuminated

10250T8_

37

Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Function (Position) 
Momentary— Maintained—
Pull
Intermediate

Maintained—
Push
Type

Voltage

Contact
Type

37
Mounting Location 
1

2

37

Red Standard Push-Pull 
10250T
E34
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

37

LED Lamp
O
X

O
O

X
O

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac

E34EX8_
Transformer

1NO
1NC

24 Vac
120 Vac

X
X

O
X

O
O

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

E34EX886RD24

10250T886RD2A

E34EX886RD2A

10250T876RD06

E34EX876RD06

10250T877RD06

E34EX877RD06

10250T897RD24

E34EX897RD24

O
O

X
O

O
X

O
O

37
37

E34EX897RD2A

10250T887RD06

E34EX887RD06

120 Vac

10250T888RD06

E34EX888RD06

37

10250T882RD

E34EX882RD

37

10250T884RD

E34EX884RD

10250T876RD

E34EX876RD

10250T877RD

E34EX877RD

10250T893RD

E34EX893RD

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

Resistor

120 Vac

Transformer

24 Vac

1NO
1NC

120 Vac
X
X

37

10250T897RD2A

Incandescent Lamp
O
X

37

24 Vac

120 Vac
Transformer

1NC
1NC

10250T886RD24

Full voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

1NC
1NC

Resistor

120 Vac

10250T895RD

E34EX895RD

Transformer

24 Vac

10250T887RD

E34EX887RD

120 Vac

10250T888RD

E34EX888RD

37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 To order different type or colour lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and
Colour Selection table on the bottom of Page T37-299. Example: 10250T862AS.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-301

Tab37book.fm Page 302 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37
37
37
37

An illuminated push-pull
pushbutton unit, arranged for
one-hole mounting, can
replace two pushbuttons and
a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace
two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
types:

37
37
37
37

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Push-Pull Operators

●

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

●

Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
Momentary—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
an intermediate position
when pulled or pushed and
released.

●

Application Guide
To assist in the selection of
contact blocks, the sketch
below shows pictorially by
symbols 1 and 2 locations of
contact circuits after
assembly of contact blocks
and adapter to the operator.
The table below shows the
effect of the push and pull
operations on either NO or
NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open).

Momentary Pull,
Maintained Push—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
intermediate position when
pulled. Maintains in pushed
position until manually
returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position.
Maintained stop holds
circuit open and will
prevent other series
connected operators from
starting the system.

The operators, buttons,
contact blocks, etc., are
offered as building block
components that can be
intermixed to satisfy many
requirements. This minimizes
the need for a varied and
costly inventory.

Locating Nibs
Locating Nib
1

2

37
37

10250T_

Push-Pull Operator Components
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out—Pull
Intermediate
In—Push

37
37
Type of Operator

37
37

Contact
Block

Contact Block Mounting Location
1
2
1
2
1

1NO
1NC

O
X

2NO
2NC

O
X

1NO
1NC

O
X

2NO
2NC

O
X

1NO
1NC

O
X

2NO
2NC

O
X

2

10250T
E34
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

Two-Position Operator without Lens
E34G_

Maintained push-pull

37

or

O
X

No intermediate X
position
O

O
X

X
O

or

X
O

10250T5

E34GDB

10250T4

E34GEB

10250T9

E34GFB

10250T10

E34GHB

X
O

Three-Position Operator without Lens

37

Momentary push-pull

37

Maintained push-momentary pull

37

Momentary push-pull

37
37

or

or

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

O
X

O
O

Note
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-302

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

or

or

O
X

X
O

O
X

X
O

O
O

X
O

O
O

X
O

or

O
O
O
O

or

X
O
X
O

Tab37book.fm Page 303 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D

37
37

Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Light Unit
Type
LED
(LEDs not included) 

Incandescent

Type

Voltage

Full voltage

—

Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz

24

Full voltage
AC or DC

LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base

10250T97HL

10250T63HL

208

10250T64HL

240

10250T65HL

277

10250T82HL

380

10250T66HL

480

10250T67HL

600

10250T68HL

12
24/28

#755
#756
#757
#1828

32
Resistor
AC or DC

120

Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz

24

37

10250T89HL

120

6

37

Catalogue Number

37
37
37
37
37

10250T69H
10250T70H

37

10250T79H
10250T83H

120MB

240

37

10250T80H
10250T81H

#755

37

10250T89H

120

10250T63H

208

10250T64H

240

10250T65H

277

10250T82H

380

10250T66H

480

10250T67H

600

10250T68H

37
37
37
37
37

Note
 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens colour from table on Page T37-305.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-303

Tab37book.fm Page 304 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10

10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

Red

10250TC47

E34M2

Red (EMERG. STOP)

10250TC53

E34M2N8

Green

10250TC48

E34M3

Blue

10250TC49

E34M6

Amber

10250TC50

E34M9

White

10250TC51

E34M5

Clear

10250TC52

E34M0

Colour
Standard

37
37
37
37
37

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Side-Lighted
(Anodized) Aluminum

Standard

Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red

10250TC57

—

Red (EMERG. STOP)

10250TC63

—

Green

10250TC58

—

Blue

10250TC59

—

37

Amber

10250TC64

—

Yellow

10250TC60

—

37

White

10250TC61

—

Clear

10250TC62

—

37
37

37

HD Aluminum with
Transparent Centre

Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Centre

37

Red

10250TC65

—

Green

10250TC66

—

37

Amber

10250TC67

—

37
37

Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices

37

Colour

37

Standard

10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

Standard
Red

10250TB62

E34C2

37

Red (EMERG. STOP)

10250TB63

E34C2N8

37

Green

10250TB61

E34C3

Black

10250TB60

E34C1

Blue

10250TB64

E34C6

37
37

Jumbo Mushroom
Head

37
37

Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum 
Red

10250TJ62

E34J2

Red (EMERG. STOP)

10250TJ63

E34J2N8

Green

10250TJ61

—

Black

10250TJ60

—

Yellow

10250TJ64

—

37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.

37



Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use with ultraviolet light applications.

37
37
37
37
T37-304

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 305 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Standard LED Lamp

37.10

LED Selection
Voltage

Colour

Catalogue Number

Voltage

6 Vac/Vdc
suitable for
use with
transformers

Red

E22LED006RN

60 Vac/Vdc

Orange

E22LED006ON

Yellow

E22LED006YN

Yellow

E22LED060YN

Green

E22LED006GN

Green

E22LED060GN

Blue

E22LED006BN

Blue

E22LED060BN

White

E22LED006WN

White

E22LED060WN

Red

E22LED012RN

Red

E22LED120RA

Orange

E22LED012ON

Orange

E22LED120OA

Yellow

E22LED012YN

Yellow

E22LED120YA

Green

E22LED012GN

Green

E22LED120GA

Blue

E22LED012BN

Blue

E22LED120BA

White

E22LED012WN

White

E22LED120WA

Red

E22LED024RN

Red

E22LED120RD

Orange

E22LED024ON

Orange

E22LED120OD

Yellow

E22LED024YN

Yellow

E22LED120YD

Green

E22LED024GN

Green

E22LED120GD

Blue

E22LED024BN

Blue

E22LED120BD

White

E22LED024WN

White

E22LED120WD

Red

E22LED048RN

Orange

E22LED048ON

Yellow

E22LED048YN

Green

E22LED048GN

Blue

E22LED048BN

White

E22LED048WN

12 Vac/Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

48 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac

120 Vdc

Colour

Catalogue Number

Red

E22LED060RN

Orange

E22LED060ON

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Note
For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page T37-225.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-305

Tab37book.fm Page 306 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Selector Switch Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●

37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Two- and three-position
Non-illuminated

10250T72_

37

Two-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
Operator Position 

37
X
O

37
37

O
X

E34EX72_

37

X
O
X
O

37

O
X
O
X

37
37

10250T_

Operator
Action 

Contact
Type

M

M

1NC
1NO

M

S

M

M

M

S

Mounting Location 
1

2

1NC
1NO
1NC
1NO

Black Knob—Selector Switch 
Cam
Code

10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

1

10250T722BK

E34EX722BK

10250T724BK

E34EX724BK

10250T723BK

E34EX723BK

10250T725BK

E34EX725BK

1

Three-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
Operator Position 

37

Operator
Action 

37
X
O

37

O
O

O
X

Contact
Type

M
M

M

Mounting Location 
1

2

1NO
1NO

Black Knob—Selector Switch 
Cam
Code

10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

3

10250T726BK

E34EX726BK

10250T728BK

E34EX728BK

10250T730BK

E34EX730BK

10250T732BK

E34EX732BK

10250T727BK

E34EX727BK

10250T729BK

E34EX729BK

10250T731BK

E34EX731BK

10250T733BK

E34EX733BK

M

37

S

37

S

37

M

M

M
S
M

X
O
O

37
37

O
X
O

O
O
X

S

M
M

M
M

S

37

1NO
1NC-1NC
(Series)
1NO

3

M

M
S

37

S
M

M

37

S

Notes
 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).

 To order different type or colour selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate
suffix code from the table on Page T37-307.
Example: 10250T722LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T722T13.
 To order different type or colour selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate
suffix code from the Switch and Colour Selection table on Page T37-307.
Example: 10250T726LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T726T13.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-306

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 307 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●

37

Four-position maintained
Non-illuminated

37

Four-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated

10250T743_

Operator Position 
Operator
Action 
X
O
O
O

E34EX743_

O
X
O
O

O
O
X
O

O
O
O
X

M
M

Contact
Type

Mounting Location 
1

2

1NC
1NO
1NO
1NC

M
M

37

Black Knob—Selector Switch 
Cam
Code

10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

37

7

10250T743BK

E34EX743BK

37
37
37
37
37

Lever

Coin Slot



Colour

Knob
Suffix Code

Lever
Suffix Code

Lever 
Suffix Code

Coin Slot 
Suffix Code

37

Black

BK

BL

BA

BC

37

Red

RK

RL

RA

RC

Green

GK

GL

GA

GC

Yellow

YK

YL

YA

YC

White

WK

WL

WA

WC

Gray

AK

AL

AA

AC

Blue

LK

LL

LA

LC

Orange

NK

NL

NA

NC

Key Operated Selection
Number of Operator
Position
Action 

Suffix and
Removal
Position

2

T1 + 1, 2, 3

M
M

3

4

37

Switch and Colour Selection

Knob

M



S

T1 + 2

Key Removal Positions

37
37
37
37
37



C
L

37

R

37

T3 + 1–7

Code
Suffix

Key Removal
Position

37

S

T3 + 1, 4, 5

1

Right only

S

T3 + 4

2

Left only

37

T3 + 2, 4, 6

3

Right and left

T7 + 7

4

Centre only

6

Left and centre

7

All positions

M

M

M

M M
MS
M M S


MMMM

37
37
37

Notes
 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
 M = Maintained.
 To order different type or colour selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the
Switch and Colour Selection table above. Example: 10250T743LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam) + _ (key removal position). Example: 10250T743T77.
 Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.
 10250T only.
 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).

 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.

37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-307

Tab37book.fm Page 308 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Selector Switch Selection

37
37
37
37

10250T

E34

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their
varied forms (two-position,
three-position, and fourposition) are a big factor
contributing to the great
flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons”
can achieve. Because of their
flexibility, they tend to cause
difficulty with product
selection and application.
The following systematic
approach should simplify
that task.

37

Cam and contact block
selection is better understood
if you:

37

●

37
●

37
37
37
37
37

Work with each incoming
and outgoing wire/circuit
separately.
Recognize the terms NO
and NC only identify the
type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” table
(Page T37-310) shows
how that contact will act
after assembly to the
operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.

●

●

One NO-NC contact block
may be mounted behind
each plunger of the
mounting adapter for a
total of four circuits.
Each cam has two
separate lobes, each of
which operates one of the
two contact block plungers
independently of each
other. Those are identified
as position 1 (locating nib
side) and position 2
(opposite of locating nib).
The position designations
give direction in selecting
and mounting of the
contact blocks.

Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFFAUTO selector switch. In this
circuit, one incoming line is
distributed to two other
outgoing circuits by the
switch. The two circuits can
be looked at individually.
Step 1: Elementary
Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your
mind, a simple elementary
diagram of the switching
scheme as follows:
HAND
Incoming
Line

Contact Circuit Locations
Locating Nib
1

2

HAND OFF AUTO
X O O

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-308

Outgoing
Circuit

Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary
diagram, you can construct
an “X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts
are to be closed (X) or open
(O) in the various positions of
the switch. The “X-O” for the
HAND circuit looks like this:

37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

For the AUTO circuit, the “XO” diagram would look like
this:
HAND OFF AUTO
O O X

Putting them together, the
complete “X-O” diagram is:

Outgoing
Circuit

OFF
AUTO

In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
(HAND) but open in the
centre and right.

XOO
OOX

Once the “X-O” diagram has
been generated, the next
step is to select the cam and
contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
desired “X-O” functions. The
selection tables on the
following pages list the
various types (shapes) of
cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact
and position to achieve the
function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.

Tab37book.fm Page 309 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select
determines the operation of
all contact blocks mounted to
the operator. It is selected on
the basis that it provides the
simplest circuitry for the
desired “X-O” diagram. The
selection tables show all the
“X-O” combinations. For the
purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those
tables is shown on this page.
Now to make the cam
selection, make a simple
worksheet such as below.
(1) or (2) = mounting location
from chart above:

XOO
OOX

Cam 2
(1)NO-(2)NC 
(2)NO

Cam 3
(1)NO
(2)NO

It becomes obvious that
cam 3 is the better choice
because the series
connection can be avoided,
making it simpler to wire.
Step 4: Contact Block
Selection.
Having selected the cam,
contact block selection is
simply a matter of
determining if you require one
NO-NC contact block (Cat. No
10250T1H) or two. Given the
limitations of the factory
sealed contact block and the
desired “X-O” application,
you may have circuits that
will not be needed—as seen
here with the two additional
NC circuits. (1) or (2) =
mounting location from chart
above.
Qty
2

Step 5: Selector Switch
Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose
from the many types of
operators—knob and lever
in various colors or keyed.
Also what combinations of
maintained and spring
return functions are
required. Selection of these
operators can be found on
Page T37-311. For the
example in step 4, you may
want a three-position
maintained black knob,
cam 3—Catalogue Number
10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1).
The Complete Switch:
10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1)
with two 10250T1H or for
one composite catalogue
number—10250T726BK (or
E34EX726BK) found on
Page T37-306.

37.10

Example Selection Table
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
No.
1

X

O

Cam Code #2
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location

Cam Code #3
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location

1

1

2

2

37
37

—

O

37

37
NO
4

O

O

X

NC 

—

37

NO
—

NO

37
37

NO

37

Note
 Wired in series.

37
37
37
37

Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate
connections to obtain a
selector circuit combination
and are shown with their
appropriate line diagrams in
BOLD. Field wiring of jumper
connections required as
shown.

37
37
37
37

X = Closed circuit
O = Open circuit

37
37
37
37
37
37

Catalogue No.
Cam 3
10250TIH (1)NO (2)NC
(1)NC (2)NO

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-309

Tab37book.fm Page 310 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Two-Position Selector Switch

Four-Position Selector Switch

Desired Circuit and
Operator Position

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Number

Cam Code #1
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
1

1

X

O

2

O

X

2

Desired Circuit and
Operator Position

Cam Code #7
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location

Number

1

1

X

O

O

O

2

O

X

O

O

3

O

O

X

O

4

O

O

O

X

5

X

O

O

X

6

O

X

X

O

7

O

O

X

X

8

X

X

O

O

9

O

X

O

X

2
—

37
37

NC

NC

NC
—

37
37
37

NO

37

Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
No.
1

X

O

Cam Code #2
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location

Cam Code #3
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location

1

1

2

NO

NO (Series)
2

X

X

O

NC

—

NO
—

NC
3

X

O

X

NC

4

O

O

X

NO

NO (Parallel)

—

—

NO
5

O

X

NC (Parallel)

NC

NO (Parallel)

NO

NO (Parallel)

NC

NC (Parallel)

NO

—

NO

37
37

—

NC

37
37

—

—

37
37

2

O

37
37

NO

Three-Position Selector Switch

37
37

NO

NO

X

—

37
37
37

NC (Parallel) NO
6

O

37

X

O

NC

—

NC

NC (Series)

NO/NC
(Parallel)

NC
10

37

—

37

X

O

X

O

—

NO/NC
(Parallel)

37
37
37
37
37
T37-310

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 311 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Selector Switch Operators

37

10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Black Knob Selector
Switch

37

Operator Action 

Positions
Two-position—60˚ throw

Black Lever Selector
Switch

M

M

M

S

Three-position—60˚ throw

M
M

M
M

S

M

M
S

S
M

M

Four-position—40˚ throw

S
M

M

Operator Action 
M

1

10250T1311

1

10250T3011

37

1

10250T1371

1

10250T3071

37

2

10250T1322

2

10250T3022

37

3

10250T1323

3

10250T3023

2

10250T1332

2

10250T3032

3

10250T1333

3

10250T3033

2

10250T1342

2

10250T3042

3

10250T1343

3

10250T3043

2

10250T1352

2

10250T3052

3

10250T1353

3

10250T3053

7

10250T1367

7

10250T3067

37
37
37
37
37

M

Vertical Mounting
Catalogue Number 

Horizontal Mounting
Catalogue Number 

1

1, 2, 3

10250T1511_

10250T1611_

1

2

10250T1571_

10250T1581_

2

1–7

10250T1522_

10250T1622_

10250T1523_

10250T1623_

10250T1532_

10250T1632_

10250T1533_

10250T1633_

10250T1542_

10250T1642_

10250T1543_

10250T1643_

10250T1652_

10250T1662_

10250T1653_

10250T1663_

10250T1677_

10250T1687_

3
2

M
M

2
S

2
S

2, 4, 6

3
7

M

M

4

3

M
M

1, 4, 5

3

M
S

37
37

7

37
37
37
37
37
37

M

M

37

37
M

S

Key Removal Positions

Optional Key
Removal Positions 

S

M

Four-position—40˚ throw

Cam Code 

M

M

Three-position—60˚ throw

L

37

37

Two-position—60˚ throw

C

Black Lever Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 
Cam Code 
Catalogue Number

10250T Key Operators with Cam
Positions

Key Removal Positions

Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 
Cam Code 
Catalogue Number

M

M

Horizontal Mounting

37

10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps



Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Above Key Operators
Listed operators have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661)
Catalogue Number 10250ED824.

Code
Suffix

Key Removal
Position

Code
Suffix

Key Removal
Position

1

Right only

5

Right and centre

2

Left only

6

Left and centre

Replacement Keys

3

Right and left

7

All positions

Description

Catalogue Number

4

Centre only

Replacement keys (code H661)

10250ED824

R

37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).

 Field convertible to horizontal mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages T37-308 to T37-310.
 Choose key removal position required for application from table above. Add key removal code no. to listed catalogue number. Example: 10250T15112.
 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

37
37
T37-311

Tab37book.fm Page 312 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Black Knob Selector
Switch

37

E34 Selector Switch Operators with Knob Assembled
Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 
Cam Code 
Catalogue Number 

Operator Action 

Positions
Two-position—60˚ throw

37
37

M

M

M

S

Three-position—60˚ throw

37

M
M

M

37

M
S

M

37

M
S

37

S
M

M

37

Four-position—40˚ throw

S
M

M

37

1

E34VFBK1

1

E34VEBK1

2

E34VGBK1

3

E34VHBK1

2

E34VJBK1

3

E34VKBK1

2

E34VLBK1

3

E34VMBK1

2

E34VNBK1

3

E34VPBK1

7

E34VTBK1

M

M

37
37

E34KFB_

E34 Key Operators with Cam and Cap
Positions

37

Operator Action 

Two-position—60˚ throw
M

M

M

S

37
37

Three-position—60˚ throw

M

37

M

37

S

M

M

S

S

M

37

M
M

37

Horizontal Mounting
Catalogue Number

1

1, 2, 3

E34KFB_

E34KFHB_

1

2

E34KEB_

E34KEHB_

2

1–7

E34KGB_

E34KGHB_

E34KHB_

E34KHHB_

E34KJB_

E34KJHB_

3

S

4

3
2, 4, 6

3
7

M

1, 4, 5

3

2

M

Four-position—40˚ throw

Vertical Mounting
Catalogue Number

2

M

37

Key Removal
Positions 

2

M

37

Cam Code 

7

E34KKB_

E34KKHB_

E34KLB_

E34KLHB_

E34KMB_

E34KMHB_

E34KNB_

E34KNHB_

E34KPB_

E34KPHB_

E34KTB_

E34KTHB_

M

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page T37-311.

37




37




37



M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).

Field convertible to horizontal mounting.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages T37-308 to T37-310.
For other colors of either knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the catalogue number with the appropriate suffix code from Alternate Knobs and Levers table
on Page T37-313. Example: E34VFBL2.
Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page T37-313. Add key removal code no. to listed catalogue number. Example: E34KFB2.

37
37
37
37
37
T37-312

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 313 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Key Removal Positions
C
L

37.10

Key Removal Positions
Code
Suffix

Key Removal
Position

Code
Suffix

Key Removal
Position

1

Right only

5

Right and centre

2

Left only

6

Left and centre

3

Right and left

7

All positions

4

Centre only

37
37

R

37
37
37

Knob

Lever

Lever for Added
Ingress Protection

Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators

Colour

Knob
Suffix
Code



Lever
Suffix
Catalogue Number Code

Lever Designed for
Added Ingress Protection 
Suffix
Catalogue Number Code
Catalogue Number

Black

K1

E34K1

L1

E34L1

A1

E34A1

Red

K2

E34K2

L2

E34L2

A2

E34A2

Green

K3

E34K3

L3

E34L3

A3

E34A3

Yellow

K4

E34K4

L4

E34L4

A4

E34A4

White

K5

E34K5

L5

E34L5

A5

E34A5

Blue

K6

E34K6

L6

E34L6

A6

E34A6

Gray

K7

E34K7

L7

E34L7

A7

E34A7

Orange

K8

E34K8

L8

E34L8

A8

E34A8

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Notes
 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
 For use on maintained operators only.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-313

Tab37book.fm Page 314 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
Two-Position Maint.
Selector Switch

10250T Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz

37
37

Operator Action 

Position
Two-position—60˚ throw

37

M

6V #755 Lamp
Cam
Code 
Voltage

Catalogue and
Code Number 

Lamps: 6V—#755, 12V—#756, 24V—#757,
48V—#1835, 120/240V—120MB
Catalogue and
Cam
Voltage
Code Number 
Code 

1

1

M

37
37

24

10250T5961H

6

10250T6201H

120

10250T5971H

12

10250T6211H

208

10250T6511H

24

10250T6221H

240

10250T5981H

48

10250T6231H

380

10250T5991H

120

10250T6361H

480

10250T6001H

240 

10250T6371H

600

10250T6011H

24

10250T602_H

6

10250T624_H

120

10250T603_H

12

10250T625_H

208

10250T652_H

24

10250T626_H

37

240

10250T604_H

48

10250T627_H

380

10250T605_H

120

10250T638_H

37

480

10250T607_H

240 

10250T639_H

600

10250T607_H

120

10250T620_H

+ 2 or 3

120

10250T622_H

240

10250T656_H

120

10250T621_H

+ 2 or 3

120

10250T623_H

240

10250T662_H

24

10250T614_H

+ 2 or 3

6

10250T628_H

120

10250T615_H

12

10250T629_H

208

10250T653_H

24

10250T630_H

240

10250T616_H

48

10250T631_H

380

10250T617_H

120

10250T640_H

480

10250T618_H

240 

10250T641_H

37

Three-position—60˚ throw

+ 2 or 3

M
M

37

37

M

+ 2 or 3

M
M

37

S
+ 2 or 3

M

37

S

37

S

M
+ 2 or 3

M
S

37
37

+ 2 or 3

600

10250T619_H

24

10250T6087H

6

10250T6327H

120

10250T6097H

12

10250T6337H

208

10250T6547H

24

10250T6347H

37

240

10250T6107H

48

10250T6357H

380

10250T6117H

120

10250T6427H

37

480

10250T6127H

240 

10250T6437H

600

10250T6137H

37

Four-position—40˚ throw

37

M
M

7

M
M

7

37
37

Knob

37
37

Knobs and Levers
Colour 

Knob
Catalogue and
Code Number

Lever
Catalogue and
Code Number

Colour 

Knob
Catalogue and
Code Number

Lever
Catalogue and
Code Number

Red

10250TER

10250TFR

Clear

10250TEC

10250TFC

Green

10250TEG

10250TFG

White

10250TEW

10250TFW

Yellow

10250TEA

10250TFA

Amber

10250TEM

10250TFM

Blue

10250TEL

10250TFL

Lever

37
37

Notes
 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).

 For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Page T37-310.
 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page T37-225.
 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer), red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).

37
37
37
T37-314

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 315 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

120 Vac Transformer
Selector Switch, Cam 1

Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever

Positions

Operator Action

Two-position—60˚ throw
M
Three-position—60˚ throw

M
M

M

M

M
M

37
37

Cam Code 1 

Cam Code 1 

37

E34VFB_H

E34SFB_H

Cam Code 2 

Cam Code 3 

Cam Code 2 

Cam Code 3 

E34VGB_H

E34VHB_H

E34SGB_H

E34SHB_H



E34VPB_H



E34SNB_H



37

E34SPB_H 

E34VJB_H 

E34VKB_H 

E34SJB_H 

E34SKB_H 

E34VLB_H

E34VMB_H

E34SLB_H

E34SMB_H

E34VRB_H

—

E34SRB_H

—

37
37
37

M
M

S

37
37

S
M

M

M

Lever

Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 
Lamps—#755, #757, #1835, 120MB 
Catalogue Number 

S

S

Four-position—40˚ throw

Transformer Type—50/60 Hz
6V #755 Lamp
Catalogue Number 

E34VNB_H

M

Knob

37.10

37

M

Knobs and Levers
Lever
Catalogue Number
and Code Number

37
Light Unit Voltage Suffix
Add to operator catalogue number listed in table above.

37
37

Colour 


Knob
Catalogue Number
and Code Number

Red

10250TER

10250TFR

Green

10250TEG

10250TFG

Type of Light Unit
Transformer Type
50/60 Hz
Voltage

Yellow

10250TEA

10250TFA

Blue

10250TEL

10250TFL

Clear

10250TEC

White

10250TEW

Amber

10250TEM

Suffix Code

Full Voltage Type
AC or DC 
Voltage

Suffix Code

24

024

6

06

120

120

12

12

10250TFC

208

208

24

24

10250TFW

240

240

48

48

10250TFM

380

380

120

120

480

480

240 	

240

600

600

37
37
37
37
37

Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page T37-314.

37



37







	



Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
Replace underscore with proper voltage suffix code from Light Unit Voltage Suffix table above. Example: three-position maintained with 120V transformer type light unit:
E34VGB120H.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page T37-225.
120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Page T37-310.
120 and 240V transformer only.
120 full voltage only.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-315

Tab37book.fm Page 316 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Options
Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters
NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Contact Block

37

Contact Block
Description

Catalogue Number

Class I Division 2 factory sealed contact block with 1NO-1NC

10250T1H

37
Dimensions, see Page T37-321.

37
37
37

Mounting Adapter

37
37

Mounting Adapter
Description

Catalogue Number

Mounting adapter for pushbuttons

10250TD2

Mounting adapter for selector switches

10250TD3

Dimensions, see Page T37-321.

37
37

Mounting Adapters with Contact Block(s)—Overpacked
Description

Catalogue Number

Pushbutton adapter with 1NO-1NC

10250TD21H

37

Pushbutton adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC)

10250TD21H1H

Selector switch adapter with 1NO-1NC

10250TD31H

37

Selector switch adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC)

10250TD31H1H

37

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-316

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 317 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Mounting and Assembly

37

Panel Thickness
●
Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm)
●
Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
●
Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using
optional retaining nut
●
Indicating light: 10250TA30/E34TA30
●
Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31/E34TA31

Mounting Matrix

37

Legend
Plate

Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
B

C

D

Small

2.87 (72.6)

2.25 (57.2)

2.25 (57.2)

2.87 (72.6)

Jumbo

2.87 (72.6)

2.32 (58.6)

2.32 (58.6)

2.87 (72.6)

Extra large

2.87 (72.6)

2.56 (65.2)

2.52 (64.1)

2.87 (72.6)

37
37

Panel Spacing and Drilling
Notch for
Locating Nib

37

37
Terminals for
Light Unit

“B” Min.

ø.14
(ø3.4)

37

Terminals for
Light Unit

“D” Min.

37
.19
(5.0)

37

.60
(15.2)

37
“C” Min.

“A” Min.

.67
(17.0)

Notch for
Locating Nib

ø1.2
(ø30.5)

37
ø1.2
(ø30.5)

37

NOTE: Suitable for Use
in This Alternate
Mounting Hole.

37

Drilling for One Hole Mounting
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Horizontal Rows.

Drilling for One Hole Mounting
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Vertical Rows.

37
37
37
37

Operator Assembly
Illuminated
Pushbutton

Lens
Washer

Nameplate
Thrust
Washer
(Optional)

Operator Operator
Gasket

E34 Earth
Terminal

Contact Block
Mounting Adapter

RATINGS ARE STAMPED
ON LIGHT UNIT
AND CONTACT BLOCK

37
37
37

Lamp

37

Indicator
Light

37
37
37

Push/Pull
Retaining Nut
5 lb-ft (6.8 Nm)

Panel
0.06" – 0.25"
(1.6 – 8 mm)
with Optional
Retaining Nut
Up to 0.375"
(15.9 mm)

Light Unit
Terminal Clamp:
One or Two Copper Conductors
22 – 12 AWG (0.34 – 4.0 mm2)
7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)

37

Contact Block
Terminal Clamp:
Single Copper Conductor
18 – 14 AWG (0.75 – 2.5 mm2)
9 lb-in (1.0 Nm)

37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-317

Tab37book.fm Page 318 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37

30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Enclosures
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 

37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

Number of
Elements
Die Cast Enclosure

10250T
Catalogue Number

E34
Catalogue Number

Die Cast Enclosure—Deep Cover—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13

37

1

10250TN11

E34N11

2

10250TN12

E34N12

37

3

10250TN13

E34N13

4

10250TN14

E34N14

37

Polyester Enclosure

37
37
37
37

Stainless Steel
Enclosure

37
37

Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1

—

E34N51

2

—

E34N52

3

—

E34N53

4

—

E34N54

Stainless Steel —In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1

—

10250TN33

2

—

10250TN34

3

—

10250TN35

4

—

10250TN36

37
Dimensions, see Page T37-321.

37

Notes
 For spacing increments, see Page T37-220.
 14 gauge, type 304.

37
37
37
37
37

2. Polyester enclosures
must be used when
mounting illuminated
operators.

Enclosure Layouts
Top – For Vertical Mounting
1

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

3
4

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-318

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Top – For Horizontal
Mounting

37

Application Notes:
1. Operators need to be
mounted in their
horizontal orientation for
all enclosures. For die
cast enclosures remove
locating nib on operators
and use thrust washer
(Catalogue Number
10250TK3).

Tab37book.fm Page 319 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Technical Data and Specifications

37

Mechanical Ratings
Description

37

Specification

37

Frequency of Operation
All pushbuttons

6000 operations/hr.

Key and lever selector switches

3000 operations/hr.

37

Pushbuttons

10 x 106 operations

37

Contact block

10 x 106 operations

Key and lever selector switches

0.25 x 106 operations

Life

37
37

Shock Resistance
Duration/force

20 ms >5g

37
37

Climatic Conditions
Description

Specification

Operating temperature

32˚ to 140˚F (0˚ to 66˚C)

Storage temperature

–40˚ to 176˚F (–40˚ to 80˚C)

Altitude

6,562 ft (2,000m)

Humidity

Max. 95% RH at 60˚C

37
37
37
37

Terminals
Description

37

Specification

Light Units

37

Clamps

Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (4.0 mm2)
conductors

Torque

7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)

Degree of protection against direct electrical contact

IP2X with fingerproof shroud

37

Clamps

Terminals are stainless steel saddle clamp type for 1 x 18–14 AWG (0.75–2.5 mm2)
solid or stranded copper conductor

37

Torque

9 lb-in (1.0 Nm) with size 2 Phillips screwdriver

37

Degree of protection against direct electrical contact

IP2X with fingerproof shroud

37

Contact Blocks

37
37

Electrical Ratings
Description

Specification

37

Light Units
Bulbs—average life:
Transformer type

37

20,000 hrs.

Resistor/direct voltage type

2500 hrs. minimum at rated voltage

LED

60,000 to 100,000 hrs.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-319

Tab37book.fm Page 320 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q300
A600 (AC)
Description
120V
240V

480V

600V

Q300 (DC)
125V

Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amps)

60

30

15

12

0.55

0.27

Normal load break (amps)

6

3

1.5

1.2

0.55

0.27

37

Thermal current (amps)

10

10

10

10

2.5

2.5

37

Voltamperes:
Maximum make

7200

7200

7200

7200

69

69

Maximum break

720

720

720

720

69

69

37
37

37
37
37
37

Temperature Codes
All illuminated devices have operating temperatures below
100˚C except for the following catalogue numbers with
temperature codes per NEC table 500-5(d) and UL 1604:
10250T

E34

Temp. Code

10250T201H

E34RB120H

T3C

10250T202H

E34RB240H

T3A

10250T471H

E34SB120H

TC3

37

10250T472H

E34SB240H

T3B

10250T80H

—

T3C

37

10250T81H

—

37
37

T3B

All selector switches w/120MB lamp

T3C

37

All illuminated devices with lamp 1835

T4A

37

Note: For additional technical information, see Publication Number
TD.7.4.T.E.04.

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-320

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

250V

Tab37book.fm Page 321 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Dimensions

37

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Surface Mounting

37

Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures

37

4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester

37
37
37

E

37

B

37
D
A

37

C
Surface

37

Element
Arrangement

Wide
A

High
B

Deep
C

Mounting
D

E

Conduit
Entrance

In-line

3.88 (98.6)

4.0 (101.6)

3.0 (76.3)

2.69 (68.3)

3.25 (82.6)

3/4

2

3.88 (98.6)

5.88 (149.4)

3.0 (76.3)

2.69 (68.3)

5.13 (130.3)

3

3.88 (98.6)

7.75 (196.9)

3.0 (76.3)

2.69 (68.3)

7.0 (177.8)

4

3.88 (98.6)

9.63 (244.6)

3.0 (76.3)

2.69 (68.3)

8.88 (225.6)

3.81 (96.8)

6.63 (168.4)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

4.88 (124.0)

2

3.81 (96.8)

6.63 (168.4)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

4.88 (124.0)

3

3.81 (96.8)

8.88 (225.6)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

7.13 (181.1)

4

3.81 (96.8)

11.13 (282.7)

3.38 (85.9)

2.94 (74.7)

9.38 (238.3)

3.00 (76.2)

3.50 (88.9)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

4.25 (108.0)

2

3.50 (88.9)

6.75 (171.5)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

7.50 (190.5)

3

3.50 (88.9)

9.00 (228.6)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

9.00 (228.6)

4

3.50 (88.9)

11.25 (285.8)

3.00 (76.2)

1.50 (38.1)

12.00 (304.8)

Number of
Elements

37
37

Die Cast
1

37
1

37

Polyester
1

In-line

37



37
37

Stainless Steel
1

In-line

Contact Block

37



37
37
37

Mounting Adapter

1.70
(43.2)
1.43
(36.3)

1.88
(47.8)

1.85
(47.0)

0.25
(6.4)

37
37
37

1.02
(25.9)
1.72
(43.7)

1.86
(47.2)

2.57
(65.3)

37

0.84
(21.3)

37
37

0.44
(11.2)
1.23
(31.2)

37

Note
 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.

37
37
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-321

Tab37book.fm Page 322 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.10
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Ratings

Summary of Classifications

Summary of NEC Article 500

NEC 500–503

The NEC Article 500 explains
in great detail the
requirements for the
installation of wiring and
electrical equipment in
hazardous locations. The
purpose of this summary is
for general reference only,
the National Electric Code
along with other applicable
authorities having jurisdiction
over the site should be the
installer’s guidelines when
wiring or installing electrical
equipment in any hazardous
or potentially hazardous
location.

Class I, Division 2 Definition
Class I, Division 2 covers
hazardous locations where
flammable gases, vapors or
volatile liquids are handled
either in a closed system, or
confined within suitable
enclosures, or where
hazardous concentrations are
normally prevented by
positive mechanical
ventilation. Areas adjacent to
Division 1 locations, into
which gases might
occasionally flow, would
also belong to Division 2
(NEC (500-5[b])).

Hazardous Location
Any area where there is the
possibility of explosion and
fire resulting from the
presence of flammable
vapors, liquids or gas, or
combustible dust or fibers.

Class
I. Gas

Division
1. Hazard may exist—May exist in
atmosphere under normal operating
conditions

B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing 30% hydrogen by
volume (e.g. butadiene, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)

D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone,
ammonia, vinyl chloride)
2. Potential hazard—May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal
circumstances OR location adjacent to
Class I, Division 1 location

A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing 30% hydrogen by
volume (e.g. butadiene, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen
sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone,
ammonia, vinyl chloride)

II. Dust

1. Hazard may exist—May exist in
atmosphere under normal operating
conditions

E. Conductive and combustible dust (resistivity <105 ohm/cm)
(metal dusts)
F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but <108 ohms/cm) (e.g.
carbon black, coke dust, coal)
G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity >105 ohms/cm)
(e.g. grain dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics)

III. Fibers

2. Potential hazard—May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal
circumstances

F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but <108 ohms/cm) (e.g.
carbon black, coke dust, coal)

1. Production areas

Easily ignitable fibers or flyings

2. Handling and storage areas

Easily ignitable fibers or flyings

G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity >105 ohms/cm)
(e.g. grain dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics)

NEC 505
Class
I. Gas

Zone
0. Continuously present or present for long
periods of time

Group
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard

1. Likely to exist under normal operating or
maintenance conditions or adjacent to
Zone 0

IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard

2. Not likely to occur in normal operation
and if they do occur will only exist for
short period or adjacent to Zone 1

IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard

Note
For additional information on grouping of compounds, see NFPA 497M-1991 and NFPA 325-1994.

37
37
37
T37-322

A. Acetylene

C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen
sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane)

Summary of NEC Article 505
The NEC also classifies
hazardous locations for
flammable gases and vapors
into zones under NEC 505.
This system is more in line
with the European
Standards, CENELEC and
IEC, with the major
difference being that NEC
505 only classifies gases and
vapors while CENELEC and
IEC also include dusts.

Group

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab37book.fm Page 323 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37.10

Summary of Basic Methods Available for Class I, Division 2 Locations
Features
Configuration

Method
Factory sealed contact block

Closed-ended labyrinth contact block with an
incendive circuit incapable of external ignition

37

Advantages

Disadvantages

Higher continuous carrying amperages—up to 10A

May not be suitable for logic level circuits

37
37

Direct drive contacts—contacts can be forced open

37

Suitable for use in all enclosures
Best suited for motor control applications
Hermetically sealed block

Reed switch sealed against an external
atmosphere

Suitable for low energy level circuits

Lower continuous carrying amperages are not
suitable for motor control applications
(typically 3A to 5A rated)

Suitable for use in all enclosures

Contacts cannot be forced open
Permanent magnet attracts metallic dust and
filings that can reduce the electrical creepage
distance between live terminals
Explosion proof enclosures
(Class I, Division 1 and 2)

Enclosures capable of withstanding an internal
explosion while preventing external ignition.
Enclosures designed for Class I, Division 1 can
safely be used in Class I, Division 2

Factory Sealed Contact Blocks
Internal
Ignition

Higher level of protection than required for Class I
Division 2

37
37
37

Higher material and installation costs

37

Conduit sealing is still required
Time consuming maintenance

37

Hermetically Sealed Reed Contact Block

Cooled
Escaping
Gas

37

37
37

Hermetically sealed
reed does not allow
external atmosphere to
enter switching chamber.

37
37
37
37
37

Depression of plunger
rotates magnet and either
opens/closes contacts.
Contacts can not be
forced apart if subject to
arch/fault current, because no
mechanical connection exists.

Direct Drive Contacts
• Contacts can be
mechanically forced
apart if subject to an
arch/fault current.

37
37
37
37
37

Explosion Proof Enclosure

37
37

Threaded Joint
Cooled
Escaping
Gas

37

Flat Joint
Internal
Ignition

Internal
Ignition

37

Cooled
Escaping
Gas

37
37
37
37

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T37-323

Tab37book.fm Page 324 Tuesday, July 3, 2012 10:46 PM

37.1

Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37

This page left intentionally blank

37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
T37-324

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab38book.fm Page 1 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

Stacklights
Three-Light Unit Stacklight
with 60 mm Extension

38.1

E26 Series
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-2
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-2
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-2
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-3
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-4
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-5
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-10
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-11
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-12
Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-13
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T38-14

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T38-1

Tab38book.fm Page 2 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

38.1
38

Stacklights
E26 Series

Contents

Stacklights—E26 Series

Description

38

Page

E26 Series
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38
38
38
38

T38-3
T38-4
T38-5
T38-10
T38-11
T38-12
T38-13
T38-14

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38

Product Description

Features

The E26 stacklight unit is a
modular system that provides
illuminated and audible status
indication in all directions.
Easily assembled plug-in
modular units include
constant, flashing and strobe
light units, as well as monotonal, bi-tonal, intermittent
audible alarms. Stacklights
may be assembled in a
variety of configurations,
which are identified in the
Maximum Configurations
table on Page T38-3. Several
lamp, colour and mounting
options further enhance the
stacklight’s versatility.

●
●
●

●

Modular construction
Six lens colours
Variety of lamp types and
voltages
Mono-tonal, bi-tonal and
intermittent audible alarms

Benefits
●

●

●

●

Combination of visible and
audible alarms
Modular components
reduce inventory
requirements, increase
flexibility
Steady and flashing modes
allow one light to signal
multiple conditions
No-tools assembly permits
easy lamp replacement

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
T38-2

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●

CE 60947-5-1
UL 508—File No. E131568
cUL C22.2 No. 14—File
No. E131568

Ingress Protection
●
Stacklight base and light
units: IP65, NEMA 4, 4X
and 13
●
Alarm units: IP20, NEMA 1
Electrical Shock Protection
●
Stacklight base and light
unit: IP2X
●
Alarm units: IP0X

Tab38book.fm Page 3 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

Stacklights
E26 Series

38.1

Product Identification

38
Complete Stacklight Modules
●

Level
3
Level
2

Standard Stacklight Base
For use with incandescent or
standard LEDs for steady,
non-flashing illumination or
with flashing LEDs for
flashing illumination. Bases
include terminal block for
wiring, stacklight cover and
gasket. See Page T38-8.

Flashing Stacklight Base
Allows configuration of each
light in the stack for either
steady or 60 times per
minute flashing illumination.
Flashing circuit for use with
incandescent lamps only.
(Maximum allowable number
of light modules is 2 at 12V, 4
at 24V and 6 at 48V and
above.) See Page T38-8.
For flashing LEDs use
standard base with flashing
LED light module.

Level
1

●

Stacklight
Base

Xenon Strobe
Sets are similar to standard
lens/diffuser units, except
each set consists of two lens
units. The lower unit includes
the electronics and is
permanently fused to the
upper unit which contains the
Xenon lamp. Xenon units may
be placed in any position in a
complete stacklight unit.
They will flash 60 times per
minute when used with a
standard or flashing base.
See Page T38-6.

Alarms

Stacklights accept a
maximum of six
incandescent or LED light
modules or two Xenon
Flasher modules and can
be mounted in any position
on the stack.
Alarm units are mounted in
the top most position only.

38
38
38
38
38
38

Extension
Tube

38

Mounting
Base

38
38
38

Maximum Configurations
Incandescent
or
LED Modules

Xenon
Modules

Alarm
Modules

Max. Number
of Modules

6

—

—

6

5

—

1

6

4

1

—

5

3

1

1

5

2

2

—

4

1

2

1

4

38
38
38
38
38
38

May be fitted to the top of a
complete stacklight unit or
directly to the stacklight
bases, if desired. Available in
three versions, each with
adjustable sound levels. See
Page T38-9.

38
38
38
38
38

Light Modules

38

Available in a variety of colours
for both incandescent lamps
and LED lamps. To maximize
illumination and light dispersion,
incandescent units include an
opal white diffuser while LED
diffusers are clear. See Page
T38-6.

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T38-3

Tab38book.fm Page 4 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

38.1
38
38

Stacklights
E26 Series

Catalogue Number Selection
Stacklight Catalogue Numbering System

E26X 9 KM L 39R W – V 4

38
38

Mounting Base 
Description

Code

38

W
4
8
9

38

None (base mount)
3/4 in NPT hub, chrome
Standard three-hole
Standard four-hole

38
38

Code

38

W
HM
JM
KM
MM

38
38

HU
JU
KU
MU
RU

38
38

Extension Tube 
Description
None (base mount)
Gray Aluminum
20 mm 3/4 in NPT
160 mm 3/4 in NPT
360 mm 3/4 in NPT
760 mm 3/4 in NPT
Black Aluminum
20 mm 3/4 in NPT
160 mm 3/4 in NPT
360 mm 3/4 in NPT
760 mm 3/4 in NPT
Right angle 3/4 in NPT

38
Code

38

L
F

38

Component
Catalogue No.
—
E26S104
E26S108
E26S109

Code
W
Q
N
P

Component
Catalogue No.
—
E26BHM
E26BJM
E26BKM
E26BMM
E26BHU
E26BJU
E26BKU
E26BMU
E26BRU

Stacklight Base
Description
Component
Catalogue No. 
Standard
E26BL
E26BF_
Flashing 

M
E
U
V
K
Z
X0
X2
X3
X4
X6
X9

38
38
38
38

None
Mono-tonal
Bi-tonal
Intermittent

Code
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5 

Component
Catalogue No. 
—
E26BQ_
E26BN_
E26BP_

Light Module
Description

Code
0
2
3
4
6
9
W
R
G
Y
B
A
W1
R1
G1
Y1
B1
A1

Alarm
Description

Voltage 
Description
12V
24V
48V
120V
240V

Component
Catalogue No. 
E26B0_
E26B2_
E26B3_
E26B4_
E26B6_
E26B9_
E26BW_
E26BR_
E26BG_
E26BY_
E26BB_
E26BA_
E26BW1_
E26BR1_
E26BG1_
E26BY1_
E26BB1_
E26BA1_

Clear incandescent
Red incandescent
Green incandescent
Yellow incandescent
Blue incandescent
Amber incandescent
White cluster LED with clear lens
Red cluster LED with red lens
Green cluster LED with green lens
Yellow cluster LED with yellow lens
Blue cluster LED with blue lens
Amber cluster LED with amber lens
White cylindrical LED with clear lens 
Red cylindrical LED with red lens 
Green cylindrical LED with green lens 
Yellow cylindrical LED with yellow lens 
Blue cylindrical LED with blue lens 
Amber cylindrical LED with amber lens 
Flashing white cluster LED with clear lens
Flashing red cluster LED with red lens
Flashing green cluster LED with green lens
Flashing yellow cluster LED with yellow lens
Flashing blue cluster LED with blue lens
Flashing amber cluster LED with amber lens
Xenon flasher with clear lens
Xenon flasher with red lens
Xenon flasher with green lens
Xenon flasher with yellow lens
Xenon flasher with blue lens
Xenon flasher with amber lens

E26BM_
E26BE_
E26BU_
E26BV_
E26BK_
E26BZ_
E26BX0_
E26BX2_
E26BX3_
E26BX4_
E26BX6_
E26BX9_

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38

Voltage Codes
Voltage Code

Incandescent Lamp

Cluster LED

Cylindrical LED

Xenon Flasher

(Blank)

No lamp supplied

No LED supplied

No LED supplied

—

Flasher Base/Alarm
—

V1

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

V2

24 Vac/Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

V3

48 Vac/Vdc

48 Vac/Vdc

48 Vac/Vdc

48 Vac/Vdc

48 Vac/Vdc

V4

120 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac

120 Vac

120 Vac

120 Vac/Vdc

V5

240 Vac/Vdc

240 Vac

—

240 Vac

240 Vac/Vdc

Notes
 Unless base mount is specified, an extension tube must be selected for a complete unit.
 Component catalogue numbers for flashing bases, alarm units and light modules are incomplete and require the addition of a suffix code to specify the required voltage rating. See table above.
 If no voltage is specified, assembled stacklight will be supplied without lamps or LEDs.
 240V not available for cylindrical LEDs.
 For complete length (extension tube and base), see Page T38-9.
 Flashing base is for use with incandescent lamps.

38
T38-4

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab38book.fm Page 5 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

38.1

Stacklights
E26 Series

Product Selection

38

Assembled Units

38

One-, Two- and Three-Light Assembled Stacklights
●
Base mountable
●
Incandescent or LED versions
●
24V and 120V versions

38
38
38

One-Light Unit Stacklight
Volts
AC/DC

Alarm

First Level
Colour

Illumination Type

Catalogue Number

24V

None

Red

Incandescent—steady

E26XWWL2W-V2

24V

None

Red

Cylindrical LED—steady

E26XWWLR1W-V2

24V

None

Green

Incandescent—steady

E26XWWL3W-V2

24V

None

Green

Cylindrical LED—steady

E26XWWLG1W-V2

24V

None

Amber

Incandescent—steady

E26XWWL9W-V2

24V

None

Amber

Cylindrical LED—steady

E26XWWLA1W-V2

120V

None

Red

Incandescent—steady

E26XWWL2W-V4

120V 

None

Red

Cylindrical LED—steady

E26XWWLR1W-V4

120V

None

Green

Incandescent—steady

E26XWWL3W-V4

120V 

None

Green

Cylindrical LED—steady

E26XWWLG1W-V4

120V

None

Amber

Incandescent—steady

E26XWWL9W-V4

120V 

None

Amber

Cylindrical LED—steady

E26XWWLA1W-V4

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38

Two-Light Unit Stacklight
Volts
AC/DC

Alarm

First Level
Colour

24V

None

24V
120V
120V 

38
Illumination Type

Second Level
Colour

Illumination Type

Catalogue Number

Green

Incandescent—steady

Red

Incandescent—steady

E26XWWL32W-V2

None

Green

Cylindrical LED—steady

Red

Cylindrical LED—steady

E26XWWLG1R1W-V2

None

Green

Incandescent—steady

Red

Incandescent—steady

E26XWWL32W-V4

None

Green

Cylindrical LED—steady

Red

Cylindrical LED—steady

E26XWWLG1R1W-V4

38
38
38
38

Three-Light Unit Stacklight
Volts
AC/DC

First
Level
Alarm Colour Illumination Type

Second
Level
Colour

24V

None

Green

Incandescent—steady

24V

None

Green

Cylindrical LED—steady

38

Illumination Type

Third
Level
Colour Illumination Type

Catalogue Number

Amber

Incandescent—steady

Red

Incandescent—steady

E26XWWL392W-V2

Amber

Cylindrical LED—steady

Red

Cylindrical LED—steady

E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V2

38

120V

None

Green

Incandescent—steady

Amber

Incandescent—steady

Red

Incandescent—steady

E26XWWL392W-V4

120V 

None

Green

Cylindrical LED—steady

Amber

Cylindrical LED—steady

Red

Cylindrical LED—steady

E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V4

38
38
38

Note
LED modules have very low current draw and should not be used with triac output devices like PLC triac output modules.
It is recommended that dry contact outputs be used to switch 120 Vac modules.



38
38
38
38
38
38

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T38-5

Tab38book.fm Page 6 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

38.1
38
38

Light modules include lens
diffusers which provide
even illumination and
eliminate hot spots.

38
Light/LED Module

38

Without bulb
or LED

38
Xenon Strobe Module

38
38

12 Vac/Vdc

38
38
38

●

Xenon strobes emit a
bright attention-getting
white flashing light. Flash
rate = 60/min.

Light and Xenon Strobe Modules
LED/Lamp
Voltage

38
38

E26 Series

Light and Xenon Strobe Modules
●

38

Stacklights

24 Vac/Vdc

38
38
38
48 Vac/Vdc

●

Xenon strobe modules
occupy two positions in the
stacklight assembly.



Lens Colour

Incandescent
Steady or Flashing
Catalogue Number

Cylindrical LED
Steady Only
Catalogue Number

Cluster LED
Steady
Catalogue Number

Cluster LED
Flashing
Catalogue Number

Xenon
Flashing
Catalogue Number

Red

E26B2

E26B

E26BR

E26BR

—

Green

E26B3

E26BG

E26BG

E26BG

—

Yellow

E26B4

E26BY

E26BY

E26BY

—

Blue

E26B6

E26BB

E26BB

E26BB

—

Amber

E26B9

E26BA

E26BA

E26BA

—

Clear

E26B0

E26BW

E26BW

E26BW

—

Red

E26B2V1

E26BR1V1

E26BRV1

E26BEV1

E26BX2V1

Green

E26B3V1

E26BG1V1

E26BGV1

E26BUV1

E26BX3V1

Yellow

E26B4V1

E26BY1V1

E26BYV1

E26BVV1

E26BX4V1

Blue

E26B6V1

E26BB1V1

E26BBV1

E26BKV1

E26BX6V1

Amber

E26B9V1

E26BA1V1

E26BAV1

E26BZV1

E26BX9V1

Clear

E26B0V1

E26BW1V1

E26BWV1

E26BMV1

E26BX0V1

Red

E26B2V2

E26BR1V2

E26BRV2

E26BEV2

E26BX2V2

Green

E26B3V2

E26BG1V2

E26BGV2

E26BUV2

E26BX3V2

Yellow

E26B4V2

E26BY1V2

E26BYV2

E26BVV2

E26BX4V2

Blue

E26B6V2

E26BB1V2

E26BBV2

E26BKV2

E26BX6V2

Amber

E26B9V2

E26BA1V2

E26BAV2

E26BZV2

E26BX9V2

Clear

E26B0V2

E26BW1V2

E26BWV2

E26BMV2

E26BX0V2

Red

E26B2V3

E26BR1V3

E26BRV3

E26BEV3

E26BX2V3

Green

E26B3V3

E26BG1V3

E26BGV3

E26BUV3

E26BX3V3

Yellow

E26B4V3

E26BY1V3

E26BYV3

E26BVV3

E26BX4V3

Blue

E26B6V3

E26BB1V3

E26BBV3

E26BKV3

E26BX6V3

Amber

E26B9V3

E26BA1V3

E26BAV3

E26BZV3

E26BX9V3

Clear

E26B0V3

E26BW1V3

E26BWV3

E26BMV3

E26BX0V3

Red

E26B2V4

E26BR1V4

E26BRV4

E26BEV4

E26BX2V4

38

Green

E26B3V4

E26BG1V4

E26BGV4

E26BUV4

E26BX3V4

Yellow

E26B4V4

E26BY1V4

E26BYV4

E26BVV4

E26BX4V4

38

Blue

E26B6V4

E26BB1V4

E26BBV4

E26BKV4

E26BX6V4

38

Amber

E26B9V4

E26BA1V4

E26BAV4

E26BZV4

E26BX9V4

Clear

E26B0V4

E26BW1V4

E26BWV4

E26BMV4

E26BX0V4

Red

E26B2V5

—

E26BRV5

E26BEV5

E26BX2V5

Green

E26B3V5

—

E26BGV5

E26BUV5

E26BX3V5

Yellow

E26B4V5

—

E26BYV5

E26BVV5

E26BX4V5

Blue

E26B6V5

—

E26BBV5

E26BKV5

E26BX6V5

38
38
38
38

120 Vac 

240 Vac 

38
38
38
38

Amber

E26B9V5

—

E26BAV5

E26BZV5

E26BX9V5

Clear

E26B0V5

—

E26BWV5

E26BMV5

E26BX0V5

Notes
 Include lens, diffusers and lamps unless otherwise noted.
 Incandescent bulbs are AC/DC rated, LEDs are AC rated only.

38
38
38
T38-6

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab38book.fm Page 7 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

Stacklights
E26 Series

38.1

LEDs—Cylindrical or Cluster

Cylindrical
Stacklight LED

38
38

Cylindrical or Cluster LEDs

Voltage

Colour

Cylindrical LED
Steady Only
Catalogue Number

12 Vac/Vdc

Red

E26S110

Cluster LED
24 Vac/Vdc

48 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/Vdc

240 Vac/Vdc

Cluster LED
Steady
Catalogue Number

Cluster LED
Flashing
Catalogue Number

E26S15

E26S48

Green

E26S114

E26S19

E26S53

Yellow

E26S112

E26S23

E26S58

Blue

E26S115

E26S27

E26S63

White

E26S116

E26S71

E26S75

Amber

E26S111

E26S79

E26S84

Red

E26S117

E26S16

E26S49

Green

E26S121

E26S20

E26S54

Yellow

E26S119

E26S24

E26S59

Blue

E26S122

E26S28

E26S64

White

E26S123

E26S72

E26S76

Amber

E26S118

E26S80

E26S85

Red

E26S124

E26S17

E26S50

Green

E26S128

E26S21

E26S55

Yellow

E26S126

E26S25

E26S60

Blue

E26S129

E26S29

E26S65

White

E26S130

E26S73

E26S77

Amber

E26S125

E26S81

E26S86

Red

E26S138

E26S18

E26S51

Green

E26S142

E26S22

E26S56

Yellow

E26S140

E26S26

E26S61

Blue

E26S143

E26S30

E26S66

White

—

E26S74

E26S78

Amber

E26S139

E26S82

E26S87

Red

—

E26S44

E26S52

Green

—

E26S45

E26S57

Yellow

—

E26S46

E26S62

Blue

—

E26S47

E26S67

White

—

E26S101

E26S102

Amber

—

E26S83

E26S88

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T38-7

Tab38book.fm Page 8 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

38.1
38

Stacklights
E26 Series

Mounting Bases Components
Standard Base

Flashing Base

38
or

6



C

or

5

38
38

or

4

3

or

7 8

38

1

or


- C

Factory
Wiring

or

Field
Wiring
- C

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

6

Orange Flasher
Wire

External
Switching
Devices

Supply

Flashing
Circuit
7
8

External
Switching
Devices

Supply

Steady
Circuit
9 10

Flashing
Orange Module
Wire

38
Description

Voltage

Catalogue Number

12 Vac/Vdc to 240 Vac/Vdc

E26BL

Standard Base
For use with steady incandescent or steady/flashing LED

38

Flashing Base
12 Vdc

E26BFV1

24 Vac/Vdc

E26BFV2

38

48 Vac/Vdc

E26BFV3

120 Vac/Vdc

E26BFV4

38

240 Vac/Vdc

E26BFV5

Voltage

Catalogue Number

38

Enables configuration of incandescent light modules for steady or flashing operation

38
38
38

Mounting Bases and Hubs
Description
Standard Three-Hole
Mounting Base

Mounting Base
Standard three-hole mounting base

—

E26S108

Standard Four-Hole
Mounting Base

Standard four-hole mounting base

—

E26S109

Myers Type Hub

Myers Type Hub
—

E26S104

38
38
38
38
38

3/4 in NPT threaded hub

38
38

Notes
 Audible alarm units must be wired via the steady circuit on flashing base units.
 Audible alarm units can be wired in positions as shown but only one unit is permitted on each stack and unit must occupy
the last or top mounting position.

38
38
T38-8

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Flasher
Max. Allowable
No. of Light
Modules
12 Vdc
2
24 Vac/Vdc
4
48 Vac/Vdc
6
120 Vac/Vdc
6
240 Vac/Vdc
6

Flasher
Base Voltage

6

38

38

9 10

2
1

38

38

1 2 3 4 5 6



2

38

C
 

or

3


38

 

or

5

1 2 3 4 5 6



4

or

6

38

38

 



Tab38book.fm Page 9 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

Stacklights
E26 Series

38.1

Alarm Units and Extension Tubes Components

38
38

Audible Alarm Units-NEMA Type 1 (IP20) 

E26B_

Description

Voltage

Catalogue Number

38

4.5 mA

12 Vac/Vdc

E26BQV1

38

12.6 mA

24 Vac/Vdc

E26BQV2

9.4 mA

48 Vac/Vdc

E26BQV3

11.5 mA

120 Vac/Vdc

E26BQV4

5.1 mA

240 Vac/Vdc

E26BQV5

4.5 mA

12 Vac/Vdc

E26BNV1

12.6 mA

24 Vac/Vdc

E26BNV2

9.4 mA

48 Vac/Vdc

E26BNV3

11.5 mA

120 Vac/Vdc

E26BNV4

5.1 mA

240 Vac/Vdc

E26BNV5

38

4.5 mA

12 Vac/Vdc

E26BPV1

38

12.6 mA

24 Vac/Vdc

E26BPV2

9.4 mA

48 Vac/Vdc

E26BPV3

11.5 mA

120 Vac/Vdc

E26BPV4

5.1 mA

240 Vac/Vdc

E26BPV5

Mono-Tonal

38
38
38

Bi-Tonal

38
38

Intermittent

38
38
38

Extension Tubes
Description
Extension Tube
A

Extension Tube
A

E26BRU

Voltage

Catalogue Number

0.79 in (20 mm) extension

—

E26BHM

6.30 in (160 mm) extension

—

E26BJM

14.17 in (360 mm) extension

—

E26BKM

29.92 in (760 mm) extension

—

E26BMM

0.79 in (20 mm) extension

—

E26BHU

6.30 in (160 mm) extension

—

E26BJU

14.17 in (360 mm) extension

—

E26BKU

29.92 in (760 mm) extension

—

E26BMU

Right angle extension tube

—

E26BRU

38
38

Extension “A” 

38
38

Extension “A” 

38
38
38
38
38
38

Notes
 Volume adjustment range: 64 dB to 90 dB typical current draw (mA).
 For use with standard mounting base or 3/4 in NPT threaded hub—gray aluminum.
 For use with standard mounting base or 3/4 in NPT threaded hub—black aluminum.

38
38
38
38
38
38

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T38-9

Tab38book.fm Page 10 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

38.1

Stacklights
E26 Series

38

Replacement Parts

38

Stacklight Replacement Parts

38

Description

Notes

Replacement
cover

Normally included with
stacklight base

1

E26S68

Replacement
lens O-ring

Normally included with light
modules

2

E26S106 

Clear

3

E26S38

38
38

Replacement lenses

Typical Stacklight Assemblies
Number in Catalogue
Diagram
Number

38

Red

E26S39

Green

E26S40

38

Yellow

E26S41

Blue

E26S42

38
38

Amber
Replacement Xenon
strobe dual high
(does not include lenses)

38
38
38

Replacement diffusers

E26S34

48 Vac/Vdc

E26S35

120 Vac

E26S36

38
38

12V

4
Light
Diffuser

E26S32
5

Terminal
Board

E26S8

24V

E26S9

48V

E26S10

120V

E26S11

240V

Lamp 5

E26S31

E26S12

38

Replacement extension
tube O-rings

Normally included with
extension tubes

6

E26S107 

38

Replacement mounting
gasket 

Normally included with
stacklight base

7

E26S105

Lamp removal tool

For E26 and E22
incandescent lamps

38

Lens 3

E26S37
4

Clear — normally supplied
with LED light modules
Replacement lamps 

2 O-Ring

E26S33

24 Vac/Vdc

White — normally supplied
with incandescent light
modules

Alarm

E26S43
4

240 Vac

38
38

12 Vac/Vdc

1 Cover

E22BA3

O-Ring 2
Set Screw
Recommended
Tightening
Torque
Is 7 in-lb
(0.79 Nm)

7
Mounting
Gasket

Stacklight
Base

O-Rings 6
Extension
Tube

38
38

Mounting
Base

38
Typical Stacklight Assembly
(Exploded View)

38
38
38

Panel

38

Myers Type
ST-2 or
ST-2CP Hub

38
Alternate Conduit Hub

38
38
38

Notes
 Sold in packages of 5 pieces.
 For replacement LEDs, see table on Page T38-7.
 Sold in packages of 10 pieces.
 Mounting gaskets have two sets of mounting holes—one set with centre-to-centre spacing of
1.75 in (44.5 mm) and another set with centre-to-centre spacing of 1.65 in (42 mm).

T38-10

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab38book.fm Page 11 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

Stacklights
E26 Series

38.1

Technical Data and Specifications

38

General Specifications
Description

38

Specification

Mechanical Ratings

38

Shock (IEC 68-2-27)

11 ms, 15g

Vibration (IEC 68-2-6)

10 sweeps 10–150 Hz, 2g

Bump (IEC 68-2-29)

1000 pulses, 6 ms, 15g

38
38

Climate Conditions
Operating

Maximum 104˚F (40˚C) at 95% RH,
Temperature –4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

Storage

Temperature –40˚ to 176˚F (–40˚ to 80˚C)

38
38

Materials
Cover

Polycarbonate

Lenses

Polycarbonate

Stacklight base

Nylon

Extension tubes

Aluminum

Mounting base

Zinc die cast

38
38
38

Terminals
Single conductor

14–30 AWG (2.5–0.05 mm2)

Two conductors (same size))

18–26 AWG (0.75–0.14 mm2)

38
38

Do not mix solid and stranded wire in the same terminal
Recommended tightening torque

4.4–5.3 lb-in (0.5–0.6 Nm)

38
38

Electrical Ratings
Insulation voltage (Ui)

690V

Operational voltage (Ue)

250V

Impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

1.5 kV

38

Bulb Specifications

38

Incandescent lamp type

BA15d

Maximum lamp wattage

6W

38

Incandescent

7,000 to 12,000 hrs. (based on voltage)

38

Xenon flasher

20,000 hrs.

LED

60,000 to 100,000 hrs. (based on colours)

Bulbs—average life

38

LED/Incandescent Comparison
Incandescent lamps

Average operating life of 7,000 hours
Each lamp can be used with any colour lens
Low cost results in short term savings

LED lamps

Average operating life of 60,000 to 100,000 hours
Low power consumption
Extended life results in long-term savings

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T38-11

Tab38book.fm Page 12 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

38.1
38

Stacklights
E26 Series

Ratings

38

Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory
conditions and should be used for comparison only.
Actual life may be shorter due to various application conditions.

38

Stacklight Incandescent Application Data

38

Type
of Light

Lamp
Used

Approximate Current,
mA per Light

LED Application Data

Theoretical Lamp Life,
Hours as Applied

Cluster LED
Approximate
Current, mA
at Rated Volts

38

12V

BA15d

417

7,000

Type of
Light

24V

BA15d

208

7,000

Continuous/Flashing Stacklight LED

38

48V

BA15d

104

7,000

110–140V

BA15d

36–50

7,000

12
Vac/Vdc

220–260V

BA15d

23–27

12,000

38
38

Xenon Flasher Application Data

38

Type
of Light

38

12V

Lamp
Used

Approximate Current,
mA per Light

Theoretical Lamp Life,
Hours as Applied

Theoretical
Lamp Life,
Hours as Applied

Red

92

92

100,000

Amber

92

92

100,000

Yellow

92

92

100,000

Green

60

60

80,000

Blue

60

60

60,000

White

60

60

60,000

DC

460 mA

20,000

Red

47

47

100,000

AC

780 mA

20,000

Amber

47

47

100,000

20,000

Yellow

47

47

100,000

20,000

Green

59

59

80,000

20,000

Blue

59

59

60,000

20,000

White

59

59

60,000

Red

25

25

100,000

Amber

25

25

100,000

Yellow

25

25

100,000

38

Green

18

18

80,000

Blue

31

31

60,000

38

White

31

31

60,000

Red

25

25

100,000

Amber

25

25

100,000

38

Yellow

25

25

100,000

Green

18

18

80,000

38

Blue

17

17

60,000

White

17

17

60,000

Red

24

24

100,000

Amber

24

24

100,000

Yellow

24

24

100,000

38

Green

17

17

80,000

Blue

16

16

60,000

38

White

16

16

60,000

38

24V

DC
AC

38
38
38

48V

DC
AC

120V
240V

AC
AC

190 mA
320 mA
100 mA
150 mA
60 mA 
30 mA 

20,000

24
Vac/Vdc

Colour

Cylindrical LED
Approximate
Current, mA
at Rated Volts

48
Vac/Vdc

20,000

60
Vac/Vdc

38

38

120
Vac/Vdc

38

Note
 Represents average current draw, 1.6A peak for 120V and 0.8A peak at 240V.

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
T38-12

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab38book.fm Page 13 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

Stacklights
E26 Series

38.1

Mounting Instructions
Stacklight bases may be
mounted without the use of
an extension tube or
mounting base. If additional
height is required, choose

0.8–30 in (20–760 mm)
extension tubes that fit
between the mounting base
and stacklight base. The
extension tubes are threaded

with 3/4 in NPT threads,
allowing for direct connection
to conduit fittings or threaded
holes without the use of a
mounting base.

Base Mounting

Utilizing Extension Tube
and Mounting Base

Utilizing Extension Tube
and 3/4 In (19.1 mm)
Conduit Hub

Set Screw
Recommended
Tightening Torque
Is 7 in-lb
(0.79 Nm)

Set Screw
Recommended
Tightening Torque
Is 7 in-lb
(0.79 Nm)

Customer
Supplied

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38

Stacklight
Base

Stacklight
Base

Mounting
Gasket
Panel

Stacklight
Base

O-Rings

O-Rings

Extension
Tube

Extension
Tube

Mounting
Base

Myers Type
ST-2 or
ST-2CP Hub

Mounting
Gasket
Customer
Supplied

38
38
38
38
38
38

Panel

38

Panel

38
38
(Use Rubber-Jawed Pliers for
Installation to Avoid Scratching
the Black Anodized Coating)

38
38

Mounting Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Base Mounting
0.18 (4.6) Dia.
or #8–32 Thread
or (M4 x 0.7)

38

Three-Hole Mounting for
E26S108

Four-Hole Mounting for
E26S109

1.06 Dia.
(27)

2.12 (53.8)
Dia.

1.92 (48.8)
Dia.

38
38

0.87
(22.1)
Dia.

0.87
(22.1)
Dia.

0.87 Dia.
(22.1)

Conduit Hub for E26S104—
3/4 In (19.1 mm)

38
38
38

1.75 (44.5)
or 1.65 (42.0) a

90°
120°

0.18 (4.6) Dia.
or #8–32 Thread
or (M4 x 0.7)

38

0.20 (5.08) Dia.
or #10–32 Thread
or (M5 x 0.7)

38
38

Note
 Stacklight base and gasket are supplied as standard with two sets of base mount holes.
One set with centre-to-centre spacing of 1.75 in (44.5 mm) and another set with centre-to-centre spacing of 1.65 in (42 mm).

38
38

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T38-13

Tab38book.fm Page 14 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

38.1
38

Stacklights
E26 Series

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

38
38

Standard and Flashing Bases



Assembled Extension Tubes



38

1.75
(44)

38
38
2.32
(59)

38
38

A

Alarm Units
2.56
(65)

38
38

0.59
(15)

38
1.69
(42.9)

38

Tube Extension

Height A

0.79 (20)

1.77 (45)

6.30 (160)

7.28 (185)

14.17 (360)

15.16 (385)

29.92 (760)

30.91 (785)

Right Angle Extension Tubes

38
38

2.00
(50.8)

38
38

2.50
(63.5)

38
38
38

Notes
 Bases also suitable for mounting with extension tubes listed on Page T38-9.
 Mounting gasket and cover are supplied as standard with stacklight bases.

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
T38-14

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab38book.fm Page 15 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

Stacklights
E26 Series

38.1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

38

One-Light Unit Stacklight
Standard

38
With Alarm

With Xenon Flasher

38

2.56 (65)

2.56 (65)

2.56 (65)

0.59 (15)
0.59 (15)

2.72 (69)

2.24 (57)

38

2.72 (69)

Light
Unit
2.72 (69)

1.73 (44)

38

Alarm
Xenon
Light
Unit
(2 High)

Light
Unit

38
38

2.72 (69)

Base
1.73 (44)

38

Base
1.73 (44)

Base

38
38
Two-Light Unit Stacklight
Standard

38
With Alarm

2.56 (65)

2.56 (65)

Light
Unit

2.24 (57)

38

Xenon
Light
Unit
(2 High)

Light
Unit

Light
Unit

38
38

2.72 (69)

2.72 (69)
1.73 (44)

38

Alarm
2.72 (69)

2.72 (69)
2.72 (69)

38

2.56 (65)
0.59 (15)

0.59 (15)

2.72 (69)

With Xenon Flasher

38

Light
Unit

Base

1.73 (44)

2.72 (69)

Light
Unit

1.73 (44)

Base

38

Base

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T38-15

Tab38book.fm Page 16 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 9:22 PM

38.1
38
38

Stacklights
E26 Series

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Three-Light Unit Stacklight
Standard

38
38
38

With Alarm
2.56 (65)

2.56 (65)

0.59 (15)
2.72 (69)

38

2.24 (57)

Light
Unit

Light
Unit

2.72 (69)

Light
Unit

1.73 (44)

Base

Light
Unit

2.72 (69)

2.72 (69)

1.73 (44)

38

Light
Unit
2.72 (69)

Light
Unit

2.72 (69)

Light
Unit

1.73 (44)

Base

Light
Unit

Base

38
38
38

Light Modules
Standard

38

a

Xenon
2.56 (65)

a

38

0.59 (15)

0.59 (15)

38

2.72 (69.1)

2.72 (69.1)

2.56 (65)

38
2.72 (69.1)

38
38
38

Note
 Cover included with stacklight base.

38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
T38-16

Xenon
Light
Unit
(2 High)

2.72 (69)

38
38

Alarm
2.72 (69)

38
38

2.56 (65)
0.59 (15)

2.72 (69)
2.72 (69)

With Xenon Flasher

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 1 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
D1 Series General Purpose Relay

40.1

Relay Products
Control Relays and Timers Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40.2

T40-2

40

XR Series Terminal Block Relays
Standard, OptoCoupler and High Current
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40.3

40
T40-3

40

EASY Intelligent Relays

40

Relays, Modules, Power Supplies, Accessories and Software
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40.4

T40-19

General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40.5

T40-42

General Purpose Relays—Type AA

40.6

T40-116

Solid-State Relays

40.7
Universal TR Series Timing Relay

T40-120

Machine Tool Relays

40.8

40
T40-139

Timing Relays

40.9

T40-165

Alternating Relays
T40-187

40.10 Safety Relays
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40

D85 Series
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40

Universal TR, TR and TMR Series
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40

Freedom Multipole, Industrial Control, and
Multipole with Convertible Contacts
Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40

D93, D96 and D99 Series
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40

9575H Series 3000 Relay
9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40

General Purpose Relays
D96 Series Solid-State Relay

40

T40-192
T40-193
T40-194
T40-197

40
40
40
40
40

Learn
Online

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-1

Tab40book.fm Page 2 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.1
40

Control Relays and Timers
Relay Product Overview

Contents

Relay Products

Description

40

Page

XR Series Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Plug-In Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Relays—Type AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid-State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine Tool Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternating Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40

T40-3
T40-19
T40-42
T40-116
T40-120
T40-139
T40-165
T40-187

40
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers Comparison

40

Selection Guide by Catalogue Number Prefix

Relays

Type

Mounting

Contacts

Maximum
Amperage
(AC)

9575H3

General purpose

Panel mount

Fixed

40A

40
40

—

UL

CSA

CE

Page
Number

X

X

X

T40-117

AR/ARD

Machine tool

Panel mount

Convertible

10A

—

X

X

—

T40-152

BF/BFD

Machine tool

Panel mount

Fixed

10A

X

—

X

—

T40-146

D2PF

Full featured plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

10A

X

—

X

X

T40-53

D2PR

Standard plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount/flange

Fixed

10A

X

—

X

X

T40-53

D3PF

Full featured plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

16A

X

—

X

X

T40-63

D3PR

Standard plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

16A

X

—

X

X

T40-63

D4PR

Standard plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

10A

X

—

X

X

T40-72

40

D5PF

Full featured plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

16A

X

—

X

X

T40-77

D5PR

Standard plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount/PC board

Fixed

16A

X

—

X

X

T40-77

40

D7PF

Full featured plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

20A

X

—

X

X

T40-87

D7PR

Standard plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount/flange

Fixed

20A

X

—

X

X

T40-88

40
40
40
40

40

D8PR

Standard plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount/flange

Fixed

30A

X

—

X

X

T40-101

40

D9PR

Standard plug-in

Panel mounting

Fixed

25A

X

—

X

—

T40-107

D15

Machine tool

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

10A

—

X

X

X

T40-141

40

D26

Machine tool

Panel or channel mount

Convertible

10A

—

X

X

—

T40-157

D85

Alternating relays

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

10A

X

X

—

X

T40-188

D1PF

Full featured plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

20A

X

—

X

X

T40-47

D1PR

Standard plug-in

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

20A

X

—

X

X

T40-47

EASY

Intelligent relay

DIN rail

Fixed

8A

X

—

X

X

T40-21

40

TMR5

Timing relay (non-programmable)

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

10A

X

X

—

X

T40-178

TMR6

Timing relay (non-programmable)

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

10A

X

X

—

X

T40-182

40

TR

Timing relay (programmable)

DIN rail/panel mount

Fixed

10A

—

X

X

—

T40-175

Universal TR

Timing relay (programmable)

DIN rail

Fixed

8A

—

X

X

X

T40-171

XR

Terminal block relay

DIN rail

Fixed

6A, 10A

X

—

—

X

T40-5

40
40

40
40
40

T40-2

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 3 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Relay Product Overview

40.2

Contents

XR Series Terminal Block Relays

Description

Page

XR Series Terminal Block Relays
Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . .
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40

T40-4
T40-12
T40-15
T40-18

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Catalogue Number Selection

40

XR Series—Overview

40
XR U 1 D 12 G

40

Gold-Flashed Contacts
Blank = No
G = Yes

Description
XR = XR terminal block relay

Connection Type
U = Screw
P = Spring
R = Replacement relay

40
40
40

Poles
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT

Type
D = Standard relay
S = Octocoupler (solid-state)
H = High current

12 =
24 =
24U =
120U =
230U =

Voltage
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
230 Vac/220 Vdc

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-3

Tab40book.fm Page 4 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.2
40

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

Contents

Standard Terminal Block Relay

Description

40

Page

Standard Terminal Block Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40

T40-5
T40-6
T40-11
T40-11
T40-12
T40-15
T40-18

40
40
40
40
40

Standard Terminal Block Relays

40

Product Description

Application Description

Features

The XR Series Terminal
Block Relays are ideal for
applications that require a
high switching capacity and
long electrical service life.
The relays are plug-in
interfaces that connect to
basic terminal blocks. The
XR Series uses screw or
spring-cage technology, as
well as offers quick system
wiring, superior safety
features, clear labeling and
a high level of modularity.

Used in automation systems,
electromechanical relays
guarantee a safe connection
between process I/O and
electronic controls. The
following functions are
covered by relay coupling
elements:

●

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

●

40
●
●

40

●

●
●

●

●

40

●

Electrical isolation
between the input and
output circuits
Independence of the type
of switching current (AC
and DC)
High short-term overload
resistance in the event of
short circuits or voltage
peaks
Low switching losses
Ease of operation

●

●

Pluggable relay allows for
field replacement
Functional plug-in bridges
Choice of screw
connections or spring-cage
connection
LED status indication
DIN rail mount
Only 6.2 mm wide for
single-pole versions,
14 mm wide for doublepole
All common input
voltages between
12 Vdc to 120 Vac

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-4

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

●

●

Gold-plated contacts
available
Equipped with a robust,
miniature relay:
●
IP67 protection
●
Environmentally friendly,
cadmium-free contact
material
●
Easy, cost-effective
installation and
replacement using the
engagement lever

Standards and Certifications
●
●

cULus listed
CE

Tab40book.fm Page 5 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

40.2

Product Selection
XRU1D 24U

40
Standard Terminal Block Relays
Gold-Plated
Contacts

Rated
Current

Supply
Voltage

Standard
Pack

40

Catalogue
Number

40

1PDT Screw Connection
No

6A

12 Vdc

10

XRU1D12

No

6A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRU1D120U

Yes

6A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRU1D120UG

No

6A

24 Vdc

10

XRU1D24

No

6A

24 Vac/Vdc

10

XRU1D24U

Yes

6A

24 Vac/Vdc

10

XRU1D24UG

No

6A

230 Vac/220 Vdc

10

XRU1D230U

10

XRP1D12

40
40
40
40
40

1PDT Spring Cage Connection
No

6A

12 Vdc

No

6A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRP1D120U

No

6A

24 Vdc

10

XRP1D24

No

6A

24 Vac/Vdc

10

XRP1D24U

No

6A

230 Vac/220 Vdc

10

XRP1D230U

40
40

40
40

DPDT Screw Connection
No

6A

12 Vdc

10

XRU2D12

No

6A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRU2D120U

No

6A

24 Vdc

10

XRU2D24

No

6A

24 Vac/Vdc

10

XRU2D24U

No

6A

230 Vac/220 Vdc

10

XRU2D230U

40
40
40

Standard Replacement Relays
Gold-Plated
Contacts

40

Rated
Current

Supply
Voltage

Standard
Pack

Catalogue
Number

No

6A

12 Vdc

10

XRR1D12

No

6A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRR1D120U

Yes

6A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRR1D120UG

No

6A

24 Vdc

10

XRR1D24

Yes

6A

24 Vdc

10

XRR1D24G

No

6A

230 Vac/220 Vdc

10

XRR1D230U

40

No

6A

12 Vdc

10

XRR2D12

40

No

6A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRR2D120U

No

6A

24 Vdc

10

XRR2D24

No

6A

230 Vac/220 Vdc

10

XRR2D230U

40

1PDT

40
40
40

DPDT

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-5

Tab40book.fm Page 6 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.2
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

Technical Data and Specifications
Standard 1PDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays
Catalogue Number
Replacement Relay

XRU1D12
XRR1D12

XRU1D24
XRR1D24

XRU1D24U
XRR1D24

XRU1D120U
XRR1D120U

Input voltage

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

40

Connection Data
Rigid solid AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

40

Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

40

Input Data for 1PDT Screw Connection Versions
Input voltage

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

40

Permissible range

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

Typical input current

15.3 mA

9 mA

11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc)

3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc)

40

Typical response time

5 ms

5 ms

6 ms

6 ms

Typical release time

8 ms

8 ms

15 ms

15 ms

40

Input protection

Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode

Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode

Bridge rectifier

Bridge rectifier

40

Output Data
Contact type

1PDT

1PDT

1PDT

1PDT

Contact material

AgSnO

AgSnO

AgSnO

AgSnO

Max. switching voltage

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

Min. switching voltage

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

Limiting continuous current

6A

6A

6A

6A

Min. switching current

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Min. switching power

120 mW

120 mW

120 mW

120 mW

40
40
40
40
40

Miscellaneous Data
Ambient temp range

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

Rated operating mode

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

Inflammability class

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

40

Mechanical service life

2 x 107 cycles

2 x 107 cycles

2 x 107 cycles

2 x 107 cycles

40

Note
 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.
Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.

40

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-6

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 7 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

40.2

Standard 1PDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays with Gold Contacts

40

Catalogue Number
Replacement Relay

XRU1D24UG
XRR1D24G

XRU1D120UG
XRR1D120UG

Input voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

Rigid solid AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

40
40

40
40

Connection Data

Input Data for 1PDT Screw Connection Versions with Gold Contacts
Input voltage

24 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

Permissible range

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

Typical input current

11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc)

3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc)

Typical response time

6 ms

6 ms

Typical release time

15 ms

15 ms

Input protection

Bridge rectifier

Bridge rectifier

1PDT

1PDT

40
40
40

Output Data
Contact type

40

Contact material

AgSnO, gold plated 

AgSnO, gold plated 

Max. switching voltage

30 Vac/36 Vdc (250 Vac/Vdc) 

30 Vac/36 Vdc (250 Vac/Vdc) 

Min. switching voltage

100 mV (12 Vac/Vdc) 

100 mV (12 Vac/Vdc) 



Limiting continuous current

50 mA (6A)

Min. switching current

1 mA (10 mA) 

Min. switching power

100 mW (120 mW)

40
40

50 mA (6A) 

40

1 mA (10 mA) 


100 mW (120 mW)



40

Miscellaneous Data
Ambient temp range

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–20˚ to 55˚C)

Rated operating mode

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

Inflammability class

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

Mechanical service life

2 x 107 cycles

2 x 107 cycles

40
40
40

Notes
 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal
points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.
 If the maximum values are exceeded, the gold layer is destroyed and the values in parentheses apply.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-7

Tab40book.fm Page 8 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.2
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

Standard 1PDT Spring Cage Terminal Block Relays
Catalogue Number
Replacement Relay

XRP1D12
XRR1D12

XRP1D24
XRR1D24

XRP1D24U
XRR1D24

XRP1D120U
XRR1D120U

Input voltage

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

Rigid solid AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

Connection Data

40

Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions
Input voltage

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

40

Permissible range

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

Typical input current

15.3 mA

9 mA

11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc)

3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc)

Typical response time

5 ms

5 ms

6 ms

6 ms

Typical release time

8 ms

8 ms

15 ms

15 ms

Input protection

Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode

Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode

Bridge rectifier

Bridge rectifier

1PDT

40
40
40

Output Data

40

Contact type

1PDT

1PDT

1PDT

Contact material

AgSnO

AgSnO

AgSnO

AgSnO

40

Max. switching voltage

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

Min. switching voltage

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

Limiting continuous current

6A

6A

6A

6A

Min. switching current

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Min. switching power

120 mW

120 mW

120 mW

120 mW

40
40
40

Miscellaneous Data
Ambient temp range

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 131˚F (–20˚ to 55˚C)

40

Rated operating mode

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

Inflammability class

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

Mechanical service life

2 x 107 cycles

2 x 107 cycles

2 x 107 cycles

2 x 107 cycles

40
40
40

Note
 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.
Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-8

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 9 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

40.2

Standard DPDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays

40

Catalogue Number
Replacement Relay

XRU2D12
XRR2D12

XRU2D24
XRR2D24

XRU2D24U
XRR2D24

XRU2D120U
XRR2D120U

Input voltage

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

Rigid solid AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

40
40

40
40

Connection Data

Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions
Input voltage

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

Permissible range

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

Typical input current

33 mA

18 mA

17.5 mA

4.5 mA (120 Vac)/4.2 mA (110 Vdc)

Typical response time

8 ms

8 ms

8 ms

7 ms

Typical release time

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

Input protection

Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode

Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode

Bridge rectifier

Bridge rectifier

Contact type

2PDT

Single contact, 2PDT

Single contact, 2PDT

Single contact, 2PDT

Contact material

AgNi

AgNi

AgNi

AgNi

40
40
40
40

Output Data

40

Max. switching voltage

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

Min. switching voltage

5V

5V

5V

5V

Limiting continuous current

6A

6A

6A

6A

Max. inrush current

15A (300 ms)

15A (300 ms)

15A (300 ms)

15A (300 ms)

Min. switching current

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Min. switching power

50 mW

50 mW

50 mW

50 mW

40
40

40
40
40

General Data
Ambient temp range

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

Rated operating mode

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

Inflammability class

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

Mechanical service life

3 x 107 cycles

3 x 107 cycles

3 x 107 cycles

3 x 107 cycles

40
40

Note
 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.
Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-9

Tab40book.fm Page 10 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.2
40
40

40

1.4

DPDT Relay Modules
Operating Range Voltage for 12 Vdc
1.4

A

1.2

1.2

U 1.1
UN
1.0

U 1.1
UN
1.0

UN = 12 Vdc

0.9

0.9

0.8

0.8

B
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]

40

Operating Range Voltage for 120 Vac/110 Vdc

40

1.4

Operating Range Voltage for 120 Vac/110 Vdc
1.4

A

1.2

1.2

40

U 1.1
UN
1.0

U 1.1
UN
1.0

40

0.9

UN = 110 Vdc/120 Vac
B

Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vdc

Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vdc

1.4

1.4

A

1.3
1.2

1.2
U 1.1
UN
1.0

UN = 24 Vdc

0.9

0.9

0.8

0.8

B
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]

40

Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vac/Vdc

40

1.4

Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vac/Vdc
1.4

A

40

1.2

1.2

40

U 1.1
UN
1.0

U 1.1
UN
1.0

40

0.9

40

40
40

A

1.3

UN = 24 Vdc/24 Vac

UN = 24 Vdc/24 Vac

0.9
B

0.8

0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]

40

UN = 24 Vdc

B
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]

1.3

0.8

A

1.3

U 1.1
UN
1.0

40

40

B

0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]

40

40

UN = 110 Vdc

0.9

0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]

40

40

UN = 120 Vac

0.8

0.8

40

A

1.3

40

40

UN = 12 Vdc

B
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]

1.3

40

A

1.3

1.3

40
40

XR Series Terminal Block Relays

Permissible Range Diagrams
1PDT Relay Modules
Operating Range Voltage for 12 Vdc

40
40

Control Relays and Timers

B

0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]

Notes
General Conditions — Direct alignment in the block, all devices 100% operating factor, horizontal or vertical mounting.
Curve A — Maximum permissible continuous operating voltage Umax with limiting continuous current on the contact side (see respective technical data).
Curve B — Minimum permissible relay operate voltage Uop after pre-excitation ) (see respective technical data).


Pre-excitation: Relay has been operated in a thermally steady state at the ambient temperature TU with nominal voltage UN and limiting continuous current on the contact side (see respective
technical data) (warm coil). After being switched off for a short time, the relay must reliably pick up again at Uop.

T40-10

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 11 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.2

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

Electrical Schematics
1PDT Terminal Block Relays

40

DPDT Terminal Block Relays

40
40
21

24
A2

40
40

11
22
A2
14

A1

40

11

40
40

A1
12

14

40
40

12

40
Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Standard 1PDT Terminal Block Relays

40

Standard DPDT Terminal Block Relays

40
40
40
40
3.70 (94.0)

3.70 (94.0)

40
40
40
40
40

3.15 (80.0)

3.15 (80.0)

40
0.24 (6.2)

40

0.55 (14.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-11

Tab40book.fm Page 12 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.2
40

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

Contents

OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relay

40
40
40
40
40

Description

Page

Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T40-4
T40-13
T40-13
T40-14
T40-14
T40-15
T40-18

40
40
40
40
40

OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays

40

Product Description

Application Description

Features

The XR Series OptoCoupler
Terminal Block Relays can be
used in all applications and
consist of a pluggable
miniature OptoCoupler and a
basic terminal block. The XR
Series uses screw or springcage technology, as well as
offers quick system wiring,
superior safety features, clear
labeling and a high level of
modularity.

The XR Series OptoCoupler
relays can be used as an
input or output interface.
They provide the typical
reliability of OptoCouplers
and are especially suited for
high operating frequencies.

●

40
40
40
40
40

●
●
●
●
●

●

●

40
●

40
●

40
●

40

Pluggable relay allows for
field replacement
Functional plug-in bridges
LED status indication
DIN rail mount
Only 6.2 mm wide
Switching capacity up to
24 Vdc/3A
IP67-protected optical
electronics
Wear-resistant and
bounce-free switching
Insensitive to shock and
vibration
Integrated protection
circuit
Zero voltage switch at AC
output

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-12

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Standards and Certifications
●
●

cULus listed
CE

Tab40book.fm Page 13 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

40.2

Product Selection
XRU1S24

40

OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays
Rated Current

Supply Voltage

Standard Pack

Catalogue
Number

2A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRU1S120U

2A

24 Vdc

10

XRU1S24

40
40
40
40

OptoCoupler Replacement Relays
Rated Current

Supply Voltage

Standard Pack

Catalogue
Number

2A

24 Vdc

18

XRR1S24

2A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRR1S120U

40
40
40
40

Technical Data and Specifications

40

Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State) Terminal Block Relays
Catalogue Number
Replacement Relay

XRU1S24
XRR1S24

XRU1S120U
XRR1S120U

40

Input voltage

24 Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

40

Rigid solid AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

40

Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

Input voltage

24 Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

Permissible range

0.8–1.2

0.8 –1.1

Connection Data

40

Input Data

Typical input current

9 mA

4 mA

Switching level 1 signal (“H”)

>0.8

>0.8

Switching level 0 signal (“L”)

<0.4

<0.25

Typical switch-on time

20 µS

6 ms

Typical turn-off time

500 µS

10 ms

Input protection

Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode

Bridge rectifier

Max. switching voltage

33 Vdc

33 Vdc

Min. switching voltage

3 Vdc

3 Vdc

Limiting continuous current

3A (See derating curve)

3A (See derating curve)

Max. inrush current

15A (10 ms)

15A (10 ms)

Output circuit

2-conductor floating

2-conductor floating

Output protection

Polarity protection, surge protection

Polarity protection, surge protection

Voltage drop at maximum
limiting continuous current

< 200 mV

< 200 mV

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

40
40
40
40
40

Output Data

40
40
40
40
40

General Data
Ambient temp range
Rated operating mode

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

Inflammability class

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

Mechanical service life

2 x 107 cycles

2 x 107 cycles

40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-13

Tab40book.fm Page 14 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.2
40
40
40

Derating Curve
OptoCoupler

Dimensions
Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State)
Terminal Block Relays

40
40
40
40

XR Series Terminal Block Relays

Load Current (A)

40

Control Relays and Timers

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3
2
1
0
0

10

20 30 40 50 60

Ambient Temperature (°C)

Electrical Schematic
Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State)
Terminal Block Relays

3.70 (94.0)

40
40
40
40
40

A2

13+

A1

14

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-14

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

3.15 (80.0)

0.24 (6.2)

Tab40book.fm Page 15 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

40.2

Contents

High Current Terminal Block Relay

Description

Page

Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Current Terminal Block Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T40-4
T40-12
T40-16
T40-16
T40-17
T40-17
T40-18

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

High Current Terminal Block Relays
Product Description

Application Description

Features

The XR Series Relays include
products designed to meet
high continuous current and/
or long electrical service life
applications. The XR Series
Relays are plug-in interfaces
that connect to basic terminal
blocks that use screw
connection technology.
Overall width is 14 mm.

These relays are best suited
for applications that require
higher continuous load
currents than miniature
relays can carry and switch.
They can withstand inrush
currents or brief overloads
without damage, and allow
for continuous load currents
of up to 10A. The XR Series
Relay boasts an average
service life of the contacts
that is two or three times
the normal life of a less
powerful relay, resulting in
service cost savings.

●
●

●

●
●
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

14 mm wide
Pluggable relay allows for
field replacement
Convenient plug-in bridge
system
LED status indication
DIN Rail Mount
IP67-protected optical
electronics
Wear-resistant and
bounce-free switching
Insensitive to shock and
vibration
Integrated protection
circuit
Zero voltage switch at AC
output
Environmentally friendly,
cadmium-free contact
material
Electrical isolation
between input and output

Standards and Certifications
●
●

cULus listed
CE

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-15

Tab40book.fm Page 16 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.2
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

Product Selection
High Current Terminal Block Relays

XRU1H24

Rated Current

Supply Voltage

Standard Pack

Catalogue
Number

10A

12 Vdc

10

XRU1H12

10A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRU1H120U

10A

24 Vdc

10

XRU1H24

40

10A

24 Vac/Vdc

10

XRU1H24U

40

High Current Replacement Relays

40

Rated Current

Supply Voltage

Standard Pack

Catalogue
Number

10A

24 Vdc

10

XRR1H24

10A

24 Vac/Vdc

10

XRR1H24U

10A

12 Vdc

10

XRR1H12

10A

120 Vac/110 Vdc

10

XRR1H120U

40
40

40
40
40
40
40
40

Technical Data and Specifications
High Current Terminal Block Relays (1PDT)
Catalogue Number
Replacement Relay

XRU1H12
XRR1H12

XRU1H24
XRR1H24

XRU1H24U
XRR1H24U

XRU1H120U
XRR1H120U

Input voltage

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

40

Connection Data
Rigid solid AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

40

Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

26–14 (0.14–2.5)

40

Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions
Input voltage

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

120 Vac/110 Vdc

Permissible range

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

See Page T40-10

Typical input current

33 mA

18 mA

17.5 mA

4.5 mA (120 Vac)/4.2 mA (110 Vdc)

Typical response time

8 ms

8 ms

8 ms

7 ms

Typical release time

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

40

Input protection

Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode

Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode

Bridge rectifier

Bridge rectifier

40

Output Data
Contact type

Single contact, 1PDT

Single contact, 1PDT

Single contact, 1PDT

Single contact, 1PDT

40

Contact material

AgNi

AgNi

AgNi

AgNi

Max. switching voltage

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

250 Vac/Vdc 

40

Min. switching voltage

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

12 Vac/Vdc

Limiting continuous current

10A 

10A 

10A 

10A 

Max. inrush current

30A (300 ms)

30A (300 ms)

30A (300 ms)

30A (300 ms)

Min. switching current

100 mA

100 mA

100 mA

100 mA

Min. switching power

1.2W

1.2W

1.2W

1.2W

40
40

40
40
40

Miscellaneous Data
Ambient temp range

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

–4˚ to 140˚F (–20˚ to 60˚C)

40

Rated operating mode

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

100% operating factor

Inflammability class

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

V0, in accordance with UL 94

40

Mechanical service life

3 x 107 cycles

3 x 107 cycles

3 x 107 cycles

3 x 107 cycles

40

Notes
 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.
Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.
 The current rating for the normally open contact (#14) is 10A. The current rating for the normally closed contact (#12) is 6A and can be increased to 10A by bridging the
two #12 contact connections.

40
40

T40-16

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 17 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

40.2

Electrical Schematic

40

High Current Terminal Block Relays

40
40
40
40
A2

11

A1

14

40
40
40

12

40
40

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

High Current Terminal Block Relays

40
40
40
40
40
3.70 (94.0)

40
40
40
40
40

3.15 (80.0)

40
40

0.55 (14.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-17

Tab40book.fm Page 18 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.2
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
XR Series Terminal Block Relays

XR Series Accessories
Product Description
Power Terminal Block

Product Selection
Bridges

40

XR Series Accessories
Colour

Standard
Pack

Catalogue
Number

40

2-Position Snap-In Jumper
Red

10

XRAFBST2RD

40

Blue

10

XRAFBST2BU

Gray

10

XRAFBST2GY

40

80-Position Snap-In Jumper

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

The XRAPLCESK power
terminal block has the same
shape as the relay modules
and is used to feed in the
bridging potentials. The
nominal current is 32A. When
the total current is less than
or equal to 6A, supply can
take place directly at the
connecting terminal blocks of
one of the connected relays.
End Cover

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

The XRAATPBK end cover
is required at the start and
stop of a relay strip. It can
also be used for visual
separation of groups of
relays as well as separating
relays with voltages greater
than 250V and separating
neighboring bridges with
different potentials. It is
equipped with pre-scored
break out points at the
bridging positions so that
individual bridges can be
passed through as needed.
It may also be necessary to
use the end cover between
adjacent relays when three
phases (L1, L2, L3) are
used on the contact side
of the relay.

Red

5

XRAFBST500RD

Blue

5

XRAFBST500BU

Gray

5

XRAFBST500GY

5

XRAPLCESK

5

XRAATPBK

Power Terminal Block

The XRAFBST colored,
insulated plug-in bridge
system reduces wiring
time by up to 70% compared
to conventionally wired
relays. The XRAFBST2,
2-position bridges, are
suited for bridging a smaller
number of relays and total
currents <6A. When a circuit
is supplied from both sides,
the circuit can be opened at
any point, allowing all other
modules to continue being
supplied at the same time.
The XRAFBST500 allow up
to 80 modules to be bridged
at one time. If bridges with
different potentials meet in
neighboring modules, the
end cover XRAATPBK
should be used. All bridges
are equipped with a groove
for removal with a standard
screwdriver.

Gray
End Cover
Black

Technical Data and Specifications
Power Terminal Block
Description
Connection Data
Rigid solid AWG (mm2)

24–10 (0.2–4)

Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)

24–10 (0.2–4)

Miscellaneous Data
Max. current

32A

Max. voltage

250 Vac 

Note
 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V
(L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is
then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.

Standards and Certifications
●

cRUus

40
40
T40-18

Specification

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 19 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Contents

EASY Intelligent Relays

Description
EASY Intelligent Relays
EASY500/700/800 Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MFD Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page

40
40

T40-20
T40-25
T40-28
T40-33
T40-36

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Product Overview
The EASY Intelligent Relays
combine timers, relays,
counters, special functions,
inputs and outputs into one
compact device that is easily
programmed. The EASY
family of products provides an
exception level of flexibility
together with substantial
savings of commissioning
time and effort.

40

Application Description
The EASY Intelligent Relays
are available in more than
35 styles that support from
12 I/O up to a network of up
to 320 I/O points providing
the ideal solution for lighting,
energy management,
industrial control, irrigation,
pump control, HVAC and
home automation.
Once EASY products are
installed, changes are
easily accomplished through
front panel programming,
eliminating the need
to change wiring and
minimizing downtime.

40

The EASY Intelligent Relays
excel in traditional applications
where multiple relays, timers
and pushbuttons are used.
Applications span residential,
commercial and industrial
installations.

40
40
40

Typical control
applications are:
●
●
●

●
●
●
●
●
●

40

Car washes
Automatic doors
Commercial and
residential lighting
Pump control
12 Vdc automotive
Greenhouse
Machinery
Irrigation
Heating and air conditioning

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-19

Tab40book.fm Page 20 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3
40

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

Contents

EASY500/700/800 Intelligent Relays

Description

40

Page

EASY500/700/800 Intelligent Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MFD Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40

T40-21
T40-22
T40-23
T40-25
T40-28
T40-33
T40-36

40
40
40
40
40

EASY500/700/800 Intelligent Relays

40

Product Description

Standards and Certifications
●

40

Three families make up
the EASY Intelligent Relay
product line.
EASY500 Series—for
controlling small applications
with up to 12 input/output
signals. Models are available
with and without displays.
DIN rail mounted.

●

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

●
●

●

EN 50178
IEC/EN 60947
UL
CSA
CSA Class I, Div. 2,
Groups A, B, C, D;
Temp. Code T3C

Catalogue Number Selection
EASY500/700/800

EASY7xx - AC - T C X
Module Type
EASY5xx = 500 Series
EASY7xx = 700 Series
EASY8xx = 800 Series

EASY700 Series—for
controlling medium-sized
applications with 20 I/O points
(expandable to 40 I/O points).
DIN rail mounted.
EASY800 Series—for
controlling large-scale
applications with 20 points,
expandable to 40 points
locally, and expandable using
the EASY-NET network up to
320 I/O points. Models are
available with and without
displays. DIN rail mounted.

Display
Blank = Display
X = No display
Clock
C = Clock
Blank = No clock
Digital Outputs
R = Relay
T = Transistor

Note: Not all combinations are possible. See selection tables.

The EASY-NET integrated
network provides easy and
inexpensive linking of up
to eight EASY800 devices
over a distance of up to
1000 meters. Each EASY800
device can run its own
program, or be used as a
distributed input/output
module. Connect up to
eight controllers with up
to 40 I/O to obtain 320 I/O.

40
T40-20

Digital Inputs
AB = 24 Vac
AC = 110–240 Vdc
DA = 12 Vdc
DC = 24 Vdc

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 21 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Product Selection

40
EASY500 Intelligent Relays
Description

EASY500 with Display

110–240 Vac

12 Vdc

Outputs
Relay

Analogue 

24 Vdc

Transistor

Catalogue
Number

40
40

Display
12 I/O, no clock
12 I/O, clock

EASY500 without
Display

Inputs
24 Vac

—

8

—

—

—

4

—

EASY512-AC-R

—

—

—

8

2

4

—

EASY512-DC-R

8

—

—

—

2

4

—

EASY512-AB-RC

—

8

—

—

—

4

—

EASY512-AC-RC

—

—

8

—

2

4

—

EASY512-DA-RC

—

—

—

8

2

4

—

EASY512-DC-RC

—

—

—

8

2

—

4

EASY512-DC-TC

8

—

—

—

2

4

—

EASY512-AB-RCX

—

8

—

—

—

4

—

EASY512-AC-RCX

—

—

8

—

2

4

—

EASY512-DA-RCX

—

—

—

8

2

4

—

EASY512-DC-RCX

—

—

—

8

2

—

4

EASY512-DC-TCX

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

Analogue 

Outputs
Relay

Transistor

Catalogue
Number

No Display
12 I/O, clock

EASY700 Intelligent Relays
Description
EASY700 with Display

110–240 Vac

20 I/O, clock

20 I/O, clock

EASY800 with Display

EASY800 without
Display

40
40
40
40

12

—

—

—

4

6

—

EASY719-AB-RC

12

—

—

—

6

—

EASY719-AC-RC

—

—

12

—

4

6

—

EASY719-DA-RC

—

—

—

12

4

6

—

EASY719-DC-RC

—

—

—

12

4

—

8

EASY721-DC-TC

40
40

12

—

—

—

4

6

—

EASY719-AB-RCX

—

12

—

—

—

6

—

EASY719-AC-RCX

—

—

12

—

4

6

—

EASY719-DA-RCX

—

—

—

12

4

6

—

EASY719-DC-RCX

—

—

—

12

4

—

8

EASY721-DC-TCX

40
40

40
40
40
40

Inputs
110–240 Vac

24 Vdc

Analogue 

Outputs
Relay

Transistor

Analogue

Catalogue
Number

12

—

—

6

—

—

EASY819-AC-RC

—

12

4

6

—

—

EASY819-DC-RC

40

Display
18 I/O, clock

40

—

EASY800 Intelligent Relays
Description

40

40

No Display
18 I/O, clock

40

40

Display
18 I/O, clock

EASY700 without
Display

Inputs
24 Vac

40

40

19 I/O, clock

—

12

4

6

—

1

EASY820-DC-RC

20 I/O, clock

—

12

4

—

8

—

EASY821-DC-TC

21 I/O, clock

—

12

4

—

8

1

EASY822-DC-TC

40
40

No Display
18 I/O, clock

12

—

—

6

—

—

EASY819-AC-RCX

—

12

4

6

—

—

EASY819-DC-RCX

19 I/O, clock

—

12

4

6

—

1

EASY820-DC-RCX

20 I/O, clock

—

12

4

—

8

—

EASY821-DC-TCX

21 I/O, clock

—

12

4

—

8

1

EASY822-DC-TCX

Note
 Analogue inputs optional. Use of analogue inputs will result in a decrease in the same number of available digital inputs.

40

40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-21

Tab40book.fm Page 22 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

Technical Data and Specifications
EASY500 Series
Type

EASY512-AB…

EASY512-AC…

EASY512-DA…

EASY512-DC-R…

EASY512-DC-TC.

Supply voltage

24 Vac

100–240 Vac

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

Heat dissipation

5 VA

5 VA

2W

2W

2W

Continuous current outputs 

8A

8A

8A

8A

0.5A

Short-circuit proof with power factor 1

Line protection B16, 600 A

—

Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7

Line protection B16, 900 A

—

40

Mounting

On top-hat rail to DIN 50022, 35 mm or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 fixing brackets

40

Solid

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Flexible

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Degree of protection

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

RFI suppression

EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4

40
40

40
40

Connection cables

Ambient operating temperature

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

40

Transport and storage temperature

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

Hazardous location

CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C

40

EASY700 Series
EASY721-DC-TC.

40
40
40
40
40

Type

EASY719-AB…

EASY719-AC…

EASY719-DA…

EASY719-DC-RC…

Supply voltage

24 Vac

100–240 Vac

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

Heat dissipation

7 VA

10 VA

3.5W

3.5W

3.5W

Continuous current outputs 

8A

8A

8A

8A

0.5A

Short-circuit proof with power factor 1

Line protection B16, 600A

Line protection B16, 600A

Line protection B16, 600A

Line protection B16, 600A

—

Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7

Line protection B16, 900A

Line protection B16, 900A

Line protection B16, 900A

Line protection B16, 900A

—

Mounting

On top-hat rail to DIN 50022, 35 mm or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 fixing brackets

Connection cables
Solid

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Flexible

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Degree of protection

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

40

RFI suppression

EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4

Ambient operating temperature

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

40

Transport and storage temperature

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

Hazardous location

CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C

EASY820-DC-RC…

EASY821-DC-TC…

EASY822-DC-TC.

40

40
40

EASY800 Series
Type

EASY819-AC…

Supply voltage

100–240 Vac

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

Heat dissipation

10 VA

3.4W

3.4W

3.4W

3.4W

Continuous current outputs 

8A

8A

8A

8A

0.5A

Short-circuit proof with power factor 1

Line protection B16, 600A

Line protection B16, 600A

Line protection B16, 600A

Line protection B16, 600A

—

40

Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7

Line protection B16, 900A

Line protection B16, 900A

Line protection B16, 900A

Line protection B16, 900A

—

Mounting

On top-hat rail to DIN 50022, 35 mm or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 fixing brackets

40

Connection cables

40
40

EASY819-DC-RC…

Solid

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Flexible

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Degree of protection

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

RFI suppression

EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4

40

Ambient operating temperature

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

Transport and storage temperature

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

40

Hazardous location

CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C

40
40

40

Note
 Relay = 8A (10A to UL) with resistive load, 3A with inductive load. Transistor outputs = 0.5A/24 Vdc, maximum four outputs switchable in parallel.

T40-22

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 23 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40
EASY500 Series, Drawing Number MD05013001E
0.42 (10.8)

40

1.97 (50.0)

40

EASY500

40
40

3.54
(90.0)

4.02
(102.0)

1.77
(45.0)

40

4.33
(110.0)

40
40

0.18 (4.5)
1.87 (47.5)

(M4) 0.157 Dia.
(3.9)

2.22 (56.5)

40
1.41
(35.8)

40

2.81 (71.5)

2.28 (58.0)

40
40

EASY700 Series, Drawing Number MD05013002E
EASY600

0.64 (16.3)

2.96 (75.0)

0.64 (16.3)

40
40

3.54
(90.0)

40

4.02
(102.0)

1.77
(45.0)

40

4.33
(110.0)

40
40

0.18 (4.5)
1.87 (47.5)
2.22 (56.5)

(M4)

40

0.157
Dia.
(3.9)

40

4.23 (107.5)

40

2.28 (58.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-23

Tab40book.fm Page 24 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

EASY800 Series, Drawing Number MD05013003E
0.64
(16.3)

40

2.96
(75.0)

0.64
(16.3)

EASY800

40
40

3.54
(90.0)

40

4.02
(102.0)

1.77
(45.0)

40

4.33
(110.0)

40
40
0.18
(4.5)
1.91
(48.5)
2.78
(70.5)

40
40
40

(M4)

0.157
Dia.
(3.9)

4.23
(107.5)

2.83
(72.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-24

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 25 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Contents

EASY/MFD Expansion Modules

Description

Page

EASY500/700/800 Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Expansion Modules
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MFD Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T40-20
T40-26
T40-27
T40-28
T40-33
T40-36

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

EASY/MFD Expansion
Modules
Product Description
Expansion modules are
available for increasing the
input/output of the EASY700/
800 and MFD intelligent
relays to 24 inputs and up to
16 outputs. Expansion
modules can be mounted
directly to the EASY/MFD
unit or up to 98 ft. (30 m)
away using coupling module
EASY200-EASY.

40
Product Selection
EASY202-RE

40
EASY700/800/MFD I/O Expansion Modules



Description

Inputs
110–240 Vac

24 Vdc

Outputs
Relay

Transistor

Catalogue
Number

2 I/O expansion

—

—

2

—

EASY202-RE

18 I/O expansion

20 I/O expansion

40
40

12

—

6

—

EASY618-AC-RE

—

12

6

—

EASY618-DC-RE

—

12

—

8

EASY620-DC-TE

Coupling module for remote mounting of expansion modules

40
40

EASY200-EASY

40

Note
 All expansion modules include one EASY-LINK-DS.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-25

Tab40book.fm Page 26 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40

Technical Data and Specifications

40

EASY700/800/MFD I/O Expansion Modules
Type

EASY202-RE

EASY618-AC-RE

EASY618-DC-RE

EASY620-DC-TE

EASY200-EASY

Supply voltage

—

100 – 240 Vac

24 Vac

24 Vac

—

40

Heat dissipation

1W

10 VA

4W

4W

1W

Continuous current outputs 

8A

8A

8A

0.5A

—

40

Short-circuit proof with
power factor 1

Line protection
B16, 600A

Line protection
B16, 600A

Line protection
B16, 600A

Line protection
B16, 600A

—

40

Short-circuit proof with
power factor 0.7…0.7

Line protection
B16, 900A

Line protection
B16, 900A

Line protection
B16, 900A

Line protection
B16, 900A

—

40

Connection cables
Solid

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Flexible

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Degree of protection

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

RFI suppression

EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4

Ambient operating temperature

–25˚ to 55ºC

–25˚ to 55ºC

–25˚ to 55ºC

–25˚ to 55ºC

–25˚ to 55ºC

Transport and storage temperature

–40˚ to 70ºC

–40˚ to 70ºC

–40˚ to 70ºC

–40˚ to 70ºC

–40˚ to 70ºC

Certification, standards

EN 50178, IEC/EN 60947, UL, CSA

Mounting

On top-hat rail to DIN 50022, 35 mm or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 fixing brackets

40

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

T40-26

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 27 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

EASY600 Series, Drawing Number MD05013002E
EASY600

0.64 (16.3)

2.96 (75.0)

40

0.64 (16.3)

40
40

3.54
(90.0)

40

4.02
(102.0)

1.77
(45.0)

40

4.33
(110.0)

40
40

0.18 (4.5)
(M4)

1.87 (47.5)

40

0.157
Dia.
(3.9)

40

4.23 (107.5)

2.22 (56.5)
2.28 (58.0)

40
40

EASY202-RE/EASY200-EASY/EASY205-ASI Series, Drawing Number MD05013012E
EASY202-RE
EASY200-EASY
EASY205-ASI

0.30
(7.5)

40
40
40
3.54
(90.0)

40

4.02
(102.0)

1.77
(45.0)

40

4.33
(110.0)

40
40

0.18
(4.5)
1.87
(47.5)
2.22
(56.5)

(M4)

40

0.157
Dia.
(3.9)

0.30
(7.5)

40

1.40
(35.5)

40

2.28
(58.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-27

Tab40book.fm Page 28 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3
40

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

Contents

MFD Intelligent Relays

Description

40

EASY500/700/800 Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MFD Intelligent Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

MFD Intelligent Relays

40

Product Description

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

MFD Intelligent Relays are
comprised of three parts, a
display, a controller, and an
I/O module. Match each
piece to the needs of your
application. If you need to
both monitor and modify
parameters within your
application, choose the MFD80-B. The preprogrammed
and user programmable
buttons give you the
capability to make small
changes to the way your
application is running, start
or stop a process, or change
your program completely.
Select a controller with or
without EASY-NET support,
and with AC or DC power.
Finally, add the MFD I/O
module that best suits your
application.

40

Standards and Certifications
MFD Series—for controlling
small applications that require
graphic visualization and for
large-scale applications with
20 points, expandable to 40
points locally, and expandable
using the EASY-NET network
up to 320 I/O points. The
MFD display can be linked to
the EASY500/700/800
models to provide an
enhanced text based operator
interface. Panel mounted.

●
●
●
●
●

EN 50178
IEC/EN 60947
UL
CSA
CSA Class I, Div. 2,
Groups A, B, C, D;
Temp. Code T3C

The EASY-NET integrated
network provides easy and
inexpensive linking of up to
eight MFD devices over a
distance of up to 1000
meters. Each MFD device
can run its program, or be
used as a distributed input/
output module. Connect up
to eight controllers with up to
40 I/O to obtain 320 I/O.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-28

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Page
T40-20
T40-25
T40-29
T40-30
T40-31
T40-33
T40-36

Tab40book.fm Page 29 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Product Selection
MFD-80-B

40
MFD Displays (MFD-80)
Description

Catalogue
Number

MFD, no buttons

MFD-80

MFD, buttons (shown)

MFD-80-B

40
40
40
40

MFD-CP8

MFD-R16

MFD Controllers (MFD-CP8)
Description

Catalogue
Number

MFD CPU with 24 Vdc, power supply, clock

MFD-CP8-ME

MFD CPU with 24 Vdc, power supply, clock, EASY-NET

MFD-CP8-NT

MFD CPU with 100–240 Vac, power supply, clock

MFD-AC-CP8-ME

MFD CPU with 100–240 Vac, power supply, clock, EASY-NET

MFD-AC-CP8-NT

40
40
40
40
40

MFD I/O Modules
Inputs 
110–240 Vac

Description
16 I/O

17 I/O

24 Vdc

Outputs
Analogue Relay Transistor

40

Catalogue
Analogue Number

12

—

—

4

—

—

MFD-AC-R16

—

12

4

4

—

—

MFD-R16

—

12

4

—

4

—

MFD-T16

—

12

4

4

—

1

MFD-RA17

—

12

4

—

4

1

MFD-TA17

40
40
40
40
40



MFD-CP4-800 Attached MFD Display to EASY Communication Modules (MFD-CP4)
to EASY-80 Display and Description
Catalogue Number
EASY800 Unit
MFD display to EASY500/700 DC communication module with EASY500/700 communication MFD-CP4-500
cable (MFD-CP4-500-CAB5)

40

MFD display to EASY500/700 AC communication module with EASY500/700 communication
cable (MFD-CP4-500-CAB5)

MFD-AC-CP4-500

40

MFD display to EASY800 DC communication module with EASY800 communication cable
(MFD-CP4-800-CAB5)

MFD-CP4-800

40

MFD display to EASY800 AC communication module with EASY800 communication cable
(MFD-CP4-800-CAB5)

MFD-AC-CP4-800

40

Replacement communication module (all controllers—no cable)

MFD-CP4

40
40
40
40

MFD-80

+

MFD-CP8

+

MFD-I/O

=

40

MFD Assembly

40
Notes
For additional expansion, see EASY/MFD Expansion Modules on Page T40-26.



40

Analogue inputs optional.
Link MFD displays to EASY 500/700 or 800 intelligent relays for text only cabinet door installations.

40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-29

Tab40book.fm Page 30 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

Technical Data and Specifications
MFD-80, MFD-CP4, MFD-CP8
Type

MFD-80…

MFD-CP4/CP8

Solid

—

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Flexible

—

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Degree of protection

IP 65

IP 20

RFI suppression

EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4

EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4

Ambient operating temperature

Clearly legible at –5 to 50˚C

–25 to 55˚C

Transport and storage temperature

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

Hazardous location

CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C

CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C

Connection cables

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

MFD I/O Modules
Type

MFD-AC-R16

MFD-R16

MFD-RA17

MFD-T16

MFD-TA17

Supply voltage

Supply via
MFD-CP8 module

Supply via
MFD-CP8 module

Supply via
MFD-CP8 module

Supply via
MFD-CP8 module

Supply via
MFD-CP8 module

Heat dissipation

0.5W

0.5W

0.5W

0.5W

0.5W

Continuous current outputs 

8A

8A

8A

0.5A

0.5A

Short-circuit proof with
power factor 1

Line protection
B16, 600A

Line protection
B16, 600A

Line protection
B16, 600A

—

—

Short-circuit proof with
power factor 0.7…0.7

Line protection
B16, 600A

Line protection
B16, 600A

Line protection
B16, 600A

—

—

Solid

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Flexible

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Degree of protection

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

RFI suppression

EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4

Ambient operating temperature

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

Transport and storage temperature

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

Mounting

Snap fitted to
MFD-CP8 module

Snap fitted to
MFD-CP8 module

Snap fitted to
MFD-CP8 module

Snap fitted to
MFD-CP8 module

Snap fitted to
MFD-CP8 module

Connection cables

40
40

MFD-CP4 and CP8 Communication Modules

40

Type

MFD-80…

MFD-CP4-…

MFD-CP8…

MFD-AC-CP8…

Supply voltage

Supply from -CP

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

100–240 Vac

40

Heat dissipation

3W

1.5W

3W

8 VA

Mounting

Front mounting in 2 x 22.5 mm
Standard drill holes

Snap fitted to MFD-80

Snap fitted to MFD-80 or on top-hat rail to DIN 50022, 35 mm or screw
Mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 fixing brackets

40
40

Note
 Relay = 8A with resistive load, 3A with inductive load.
Transistor outputs = 0.5A/24 Vdc, maximum four outputs switchable in parallel.

40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-30

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 31 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

MFD-80 Series, Drawing Number MD05013005E

40

0.89
(22.5)

MFD-80
0.67
(17.0)

MFD-80

40

0.88 + 0.02
(22.3) + 0.4

40
40

1.26
(32.0)

1.18
(30.0)

3.41
(86.5)

40
40

MFD-CP…

40
1.18 ± 0.01
(30.0) ± 0.2

0.79
(20.0)
0.54
(13.7)

1.11
(28.3)

1.11
(28.3)
2.44
(62.0)

40

1.18
(30.0)

40

Template for Holes, Scale 1:1

40

3.41
(86.5)

40
40

MFD-CP8 Series, Drawing Number MD05013006E
MFD-CP8
2.95
(75.0)

0.64
(16.3)

40

0.640
(16.3)

40
40
40
40

3.54
(90.0)

40
40
1.18 ± 0.01
(30.0 ± 0.2)
1.53
(38.8)

1.53
(38.8)

40

0.18
(4.5)
1.16
(29.5)

40
40

4.23
(107.5)

40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-31

Tab40book.fm Page 32 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

MFD-R/MFD-T I/O Module, Drawing Number MD05013007E

40

MFD-R and MFD-T I/O

40
40

3.54
(90.0)

40
40
40

0.75
(19.0)

3.47
(88.1)

40

0.98
(25.0)

40

MFD-CP4, MFD-80 and MFD-CP4 Series Combined, Drawing Number MD013013E

40

1-6

-0.24
(0.04)

MFD-80
MFD-CP4

40

0.81
(20.5)

40

1.70
(43.2)

MFD-CP4

40
MFD-CP4

40
2.28
(58.0)

40
40
40

0.89
(22.5)

40

1.08
(27.5)

40

0.89
(22.5)
1.18
(30.0)
2.95
(75.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-32

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

1.43
(36.2)

Tab40book.fm Page 33 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Contents

EASY/MFD Communication Modules

Description

Page

EASY500/700/800 Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MFD Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Communication Modules
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T40-20
T40-25
T40-28
T40-34
T40-35
T40-36

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

EASY/MFD
Communication Modules
Product Description
Five modules are available for
easily connecting to worldstandard networks. The
communication modules can
be used with the EASY700/
800 and MFD intelligent
relays.
Available communication
modules support:
●
●

●
●
●

40
Product Selection
EASY204-DP
Communication
Module

40
EASY Communication Interface Modules

40

Description

Catalogue
Number

PROFIBUS-DP slave interface module

EASY204-DP

AS-Interface slave with 4 in and 4 out interface module

EASY205-ASI

CANopen interface module

EASY221-CO

DeviceNet slave interface module

EASY222-DN

Ethernet Gateway

EASY209-SE

40
40
40
40

PROFIBUS-DP
AS-I (Actuator Sensor
Interface) networks
CANopen
DeviceNet
Ethernet (also compatible
with EASY500)

40
40
40

All modules act as a gateway
and operate exclusively as a
slave station on the network.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-33

Tab40book.fm Page 34 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3
40
40
40

EASY Intelligent Relays

Technical Data and Specifications
EASY700/800/MFD Communication Interface Modules
EASY204-DP, EASY205-ASI, EASY221-CO, EASY222-DN, EASY209-SE
Description

40
40

Connection cables
Solid

Heat dissipation



Specification

Supply voltage

40

Control Relays and Timers

24 Vdc


1W
0.2 – 4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)
0.2 – 2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Flexible
Degree of protection

IP20

RFI suppression

EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4

40

Ambient operating temperature

–25˚ to 55ºC

Transport and storage temperature

–40˚ to 70ºC

40

Certification, standards

EN 50178, IEC/EN 60947, UL, CSA

Mounting

On top-hat rail to DIN 50022, 35 mm or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 fixing brackets

40

40
40

Notes
 EASY209-SE is also compatible with EASY500 Intelligent Relays.
 EASY204-DP dissipates 2W.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-34

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 35 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

EASY202-RE
EASY200-EASY
EASY205-ASI

40

EASY204-DP Series,
Drawing Number MD05013011E

EASY202-RE/EASY200-EASY/EASY205-ASI/
EASY209-SE Series, Drawing Number MD05013012E

40
0.30
(7.5)

0.30
(7.5)

40

EASY204-DP

40
40
3.54
(90.0)
1.77
(45.0)

4.02
(102.0)

1.77
(45.0)

3.54
(90.0)
4.02
(102.0)
4.33
(110.0)

4.33
(110.0)

0.18
(4.5)

(M4)

1.87
(47.5)

0.30
(7.5)

2.22
(56.5)

1.40
(35.5)

1.87
(47.5)
2.22
(56.5)

40
(M4)

0.157
Dia.
(3.9)
1.40
(35.5)

40

0.30
(7.5)

40
40

2.44
(62.0)

2.28
(58.0)

40
40

0.18
(4.5)

0.157
Dia.
(3.9)

40

40
EASY221-CO/EASY222-DN Series,
Drawing Number MD05013010E
EASY221-CO
EASY222-DN

(M4)

0.157
Dia.
(3.9)

40
40

0.30
(7.5)

40
40
3.54
(90.0)

1.77
(45.0)

40
40

4.02
(102.0)

40

4.33
(110.0)

40
0.18
(4.5)

40
0.30
(7.5)

1.87
(47.5)
2.22
(56.5)
2.64
(67.0)

40

1.40
(35.5)

40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-35

Tab40book.fm Page 36 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3
40

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

EASY/MFD Power Supplies, Accessories and Software

Contents
Description

40

Page

EASY500/700/800 Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MFD Intelligent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY/MFD Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40

T40-20
T40-25
T40-28
T40-33

T40-37
T40-38
T40-38
T40-39

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

EASY/MFD Power Supplies, Accessories and
Software
Product Description
EASY/MFD Power Supplies
12 Vdc and 24 Vdc power
supplies for applications
where only 100–240 Vac
is available.
EASY/MFD Accessories
Memory modules, cables
and other components to
complete your automation
solutions.

40
40
40

Product Selection
EASY Power Supplies

EASYSoft Software
The EASYSoft software is
used to program all of the
EASY and MFD controllers
and displays. The Windows®based software provides
straightforward circuit
diagram input and editing
and the diagrams can be
displayed in the format
desired. When EASY800
and MFD controllers are
connected using EASY-NET,
all connected devices can
be accessed and their
programs loaded from a
single controller.

Description

Catalogue
Number

100–240 Vac input to 12 Vdc at 20 mA/24 Vdc at 250 mA

EASY200-POW

100–240 Vac input to 24 Vdc at 1.25A

EASY400-POW

Note
 See Technical Data and Specifications on Page T40-38 for more information.

EASYSoft includes an
integrated offline simulation
tool that allows users to
test a circuit diagram
before commissioning.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-36



Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 37 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Accessories

40
40

EASY/MFD Memory Storage Modules
Description

Catalogue Number

EASY500/700 32K memory storage module

EASY-M-32K

EASY800/MFD 256K memory storage module

EASY-M-256K

40
40
40
40

EASY/MFD Cables and Connectors
Description

Catalogue Number

EASY500/700 to PC programming cable RS-232 from PC

EASY-PC-CAB

EASY800/MFD to PC programming cable RS-232 from PC

EASY800-PC-CAB

EASY500/700 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 5m

MFD-CP4-500-CAB5

EASY800 to MFD-CP8 communication cable, 2m

MFD-800-CAB

EASY800 to MFD-CP8 communication cable, 5m

MFD-800-CAB5

EASY800 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 5m

MFD-CP4-800-CAB5

EASY800/MFD EASY-NET cable, 0.3m networking cable

EASY-NT-30

EASY800/MFD EASY-NET cable, 0.8m networking cable

EASY-NT-80

EASY800/MFD EASY-NET cable, 1.5m networking cable

EASY-NT-150

EASY800/MFD network termination resistor, 2/pack

EASY-NT-R

EASY800/MFD EASY-NET cable (cable only, no connectors, see EASY-NT-RJ45), 100m

EASY-NT-CAB

RJ45 network connectors for EASY-NET cable (EASY-NT-CAB), 10/pack

EASY-NT-RJ45

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

EASY700/500
Panel Window
and Mounting Kit

EASY/MFD Miscellaneous Parts
Description

Catalogue Number

EASY500 relay simulator

EASY412-DC-SIM-NA

EASY500 panel window

SKF-FF4

EASY700/800 panel window

SKF-FF6

EASY500/700/800 panel window mounting kit to front mount units

SKF-HA

EASY/MFD panel mount brackets, 9/pack

ZB4-101-GF1

EASY/MFD grounding kit

ZB4-102-KS1

MFD display DIN rail mount kit

MFD-TS144

MFD display protective membrane cover

MFD-XM-80

MFD display protective plastic cover

MFD-XS-80

EASY/MFD six-channel high current input adapter 

EASY256-HCI

EASY/MFD spare interface connector, base to expander

EASY-LINK-DS

EASY starter kit (includes EASY512-DC-RC, EASY-PC-CAB, EASY412-DC-SIM-NA, EASYSoft)

EASYSTARTKIT1

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

EASY Software
EASY Software

40
EASY/MFD Software
Description

Catalogue Number

Programming software for EASY500/700/800 and MFD

EASYSOFT

40
40
40
40

Note
 See Technical Data and Specifications on Page T40-38 for more information.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

40
T40-37

Tab40book.fm Page 38 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

Technical Data and Specifications
EASY Power Supplies
Type

EASY200-POW

EASY400-POW

Supply voltage

100–240 Vac

100–240 Vac

Maximum range

85–264 Vac

85–264 Vac

Output voltage

24 Vdc (±3%)

24 Vdc (±3%)

Output current (rated value)

0.25A

1.25A

Overcurrent limitation form

0.3A

1.4A

Short-circuit proof (secondary)

Yes

Yes

Overload proof

Yes

Yes

Potential isolation (prim/sec.)

Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805)

Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805)

Others

Additional output voltage 12 DC, 20 mA

Additional output voltage 12 DC, 20 mA

Solid

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Flexible

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22-12)

Degree of protection

IP20

IP 20

RFI suppression

EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4

EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4

Ambient operating temperature

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

Transport and storage temperature

–40 to 70˚C

–40 to 70˚C

Mounting

On top-hat rail to DIN 50022, 35 mm or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 fixing brackets

Connection cables

Wiring Diagram
EASY256-HCI
L
N
>1A

40

S.. S..

40
40

L

40

115/230 Vh

40

N

N

EASY5..-AC-..
EASY7..-AC-..

40

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

.....

N

N

1

2

3

4

5

6

Input 115/230 Vh

EASY256-HCI

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-38

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 39 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

EASY200-POW/EASY256-HCI and EASY400-POW Series, Drawing Number MD05013004E

0.42
(10.8)

40

EASY200-POW
EASY256-HCI

EASY400-POW

40

0.30
(7.5)

1.97
(50.0)

40
40

3.54
(90.0)
4.02
(102.0)

1.77
(45.0)

40

3.54
(90.0)

40

4.02
(102.0)

4.33
(110.0)

40

4.33
(110.0)

40
40

0.18
(4.5)
1.87
(47.5)

(M4)

1.41
(35.8)
2.22
(56.5)

.157
Dia.
(3.9)

40

0.30
(7.5)

40

1.40
(35.5)

2.81
(71.5)

40
MFD-XS-80 and MFD-XM-80 Series, Drawing Number MD05013009E
MFD-XS-80

40

MFD-XM-80

40
40
40

3.48
(88.5)

3.74
(95.0)

40
40
3.41
(86.5)

0.98
(25.0)

3.48
(88.5)

40

0.89
(22.5)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-39

Tab40book.fm Page 40 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.3

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

SKF-FF4 and SKF-FF6 Series, Drawing Number MD05013014E

40

SKF-FF4

SKF-FF6

0.63
(16.0)

0.63
(16.0)

40
40

2.99
(76.0)

2.99
(76.0)

40
40
40
40

0.98
(25.0)

3.70
(94.0)

40

5.12
(130.0)

0.98
(25.0)

SKF-HA Series, Drawing Number MD05013015E
0.43
(11.0)

SKF-HA

40
40
40

2.60
(66.0)

1.89
(48.0)

40
40
40

3.23
(82.0)

40
40

ZB4-101-GF1 Series
* 3 fixing feet sufficient

40
40

*

*

*

*

40
40
40
40
ZB4-101-GF1

40
Fitting on 35 mm Top-Hat Rail

40

Fitting on Mounting Plate (Horizontal)

40
40
40
40
T40-40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 41 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
EASY Intelligent Relays

40.3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
ZB4-102-KS1 Series—
Grounding the Screen for Top-Hat Rail

40
40

EASY412-DC-SIM-NA Series

40

Connection
Cable

40
Connect
Outputs

40

Digital
Inputs

40
40
40

DEL

ALT

40

ZB4-102-KS1 Series—
Grounding the Screen for Mounting Plate
ESC

40

OK

40
40
40
40
40
Power
Supply
Unit

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-41

Tab40book.fm Page 42 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Contents

General Purpose Plug-In Relay

Description

40

D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Product Selection Guide

40

General Purpose Relay Selection Characteristics
●

40

●

40
●

40
●

40

Current rating: 1A–30A
Contact arrangement:
SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT,
etc.
Coil voltage: 6V–240 Vac/
6V–110 Vdc
Mounting options: socket,
flange, DIN rail, panel

●

●

Specifications: CSA, CE,
IEC, NEMA, UL, etc.
Other: Physical
dimensions, maximum
voltage, mechanical/
electrical life, etc.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-42

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Page
T40-46
T40-51
T40-61
T40-71
T40-75
T40-85
T40-100
T40-106
T40-110

Tab40book.fm Page 43 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Relay Series

D1PR/D1PF

D2PR/D2PF

40

D3PR/D3PF

40
40
40
40
Approvals

40
40

Features
Polycarbonate cover

Polycarbonate cover

40

Polycarbonate cover

Indicator lamp and pushbutton available

Indicator lamp and pushbutton available

Indicator lamp and pushbutton available

Panel and DIN mounting

Panel, DIN and flange mounting

Panel and DIN mounting

Latching

40
40

8- or 11-pin octal plug-in
Latching (D3PR version)

40

Contact Data
Configuration

SPDT

DPDT

DPDT Latching 4PDT

Max. allowable load

20A

10A

10A

Material

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Dielectric strength
between poles

1500V

1500V

1500V

10A

16A

DPDT

3PDT

16A

16A

40
40
40

Coil Data
AC

6 to 240 Vac

6 to 240 Vac

6 to 240 Vac

DC

6 to 110 Vdc

6 to 110 Vdc

6 to 110 Vdc

VA (Vac)

0.9 VA

1.2 VA

3 VA 1.4W (D3PR and D3PF)

Watts (Vdc)

0.7W

0.9W

2 VA 1.64W (D3PR5 latching)

40
40

Power

40
40

General Data
Ambient temperature
Storage

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

Operational

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

20 milliseconds

20 milliseconds

20 milliseconds

Mechanical operations 10 million

10 million

5 million (D3PR and D3PF)
10 million (D3PR5 latching)

Electrical operations

100,000

200,000

100,000

T40-46 to T40-50

T40-51 to T40-60

T40-61 to T40-70

Response time

40
40

Life

Page Numbers

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-43

Tab40book.fm Page 44 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

General Purpose Plug-In Relays, continued
Relay Series

D4

D5PR/D5PF

D7PR/D7PF

Polycarbonate cover

Polycarbonate cover

Polycarbonate cover

40

Indicator lamp available

Indicator lamp and pushbutton available

Indicator lamp and pushbutton available

Panel and DIN mounting

Panel, DIN and flange mounting

Panel and DIN mounting

40

Socket has built-in hold-down spring

40
40
40
40
40

Approvals

40
40

40

Features

Contact Data
Configuration

SPDT

DPDT

DPDT

3PDT

SPDT

DPDT

3PDT

4PDT

40

Max. allowable load

10A at 250 Vac

5A at 240 Vac

16A

16A

20A

15A

15A

15A

Material

AgCdO

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

40

Dielectric strength

5000V

1500V

1500V

1500V

2500V

2500V

AC

6 to 240 Vac

6 to 240 Vac

6 to 240 Vac

DC

6 to 110 Vdc

6 to 110 Vdc

6 to 110 Vdc

VA (Vac)

0.9 VA

3 VA

1.2 VA

1.2 VA

1.5 VA

1.5 VA

Watts (Vdc)

0.5W

1.4W

0.9W

0.9W

1.4W

1.5W

Storage

–40˚ to 158˚F (–40˚ to 70˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

Operational

–40˚ to 158˚F (–40˚ to 70˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

15 milliseconds

20 milliseconds

20 milliseconds (30 milliseconds for latching)

10 million

Coil Data

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Power

General Data
Ambient temperature

Response time
Life
Mechanical operations

10 million

5 million

Electrical operations

100,000

100,000

100,000

T40-71 to T40-74

T40-75 to T40-84

T40-85 to T40-99

Page Numbers

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-44

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

100,000

200,000

200,000

Tab40book.fm Page 45 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

General Purpose Plug-In Relays, continued
Relay Series

D8

40

D9

40
40
40
40
Approvals

40
40

Features
Dust cover

Dust cover

Panel, DIN and flange mounting

Pushbutton available

Quick-connect and screw terminals

40
40

Panel mounting
Screw terminals

40

Contact Data
Configuration

40

4PST
SPST-NO

DPST-NO

NO

NC

Max. allowable load

30A at
220 Vac

25A at
220 Vac

25A at
220 Vac

8A at
220 Vac

Material

AgCdO

AgCdO

Dielectric strength

4000V

4000V

40
40

40
40

Coil Data
AC

6 to 240 Vac

24 to 240 Vac

DC

12 to 24 Vdc

12 to 110 Vdc

VA (Vac)

2.5 VA

2.6 VA

Watts (Vdc)

1.9W

2.0W

40

Power

40

General Data

40

Ambient temperature

40

Storage

–4˚ to 185˚F (–20˚ to 85˚C)

–13˚ to 140˚F (–25˚ to 60˚C)

Operational

–4˚ to 131˚F (–20˚ to 55˚C)

–13˚ to 140˚F (–25˚ to 60˚C)

30 milliseconds

50 milliseconds

40

Mechanical operations

5 million

1 million

40

Electrical operations

100,000

100,000

T40-100 to T40-105

T40-106 to T40-109

Response time
Life

Page Numbers

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-45

Tab40book.fm Page 46 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Contents

D1 Series Relay

Description

40

Page

D1PR/D1PF Series
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

T40-47
T40-48
T40-49
T40-50
T40-50
T40-51
T40-61
T40-71
T40-75
T40-85
T40-100
T40-106
T40-110

40
40

D1PR/D1PF Series

40

Product Description

40
40
40

The D1 Series of relay
provides a compact singlepole relay capable of handling
20A. Multiple feature and
voltage options allow for the
perfect fit for any application.

40

Features
D1PR
●
Compact relay capable of
breaking relatively large
load currents
●
Panel and DIN rail
mounting
D1PF
●
The contact operation
can be easily checked by
Push-to-Test button
●
Flag indicator shows relay
status in manual or
powered condition
●
LED status lamp shows
coil ON or OFF status—
ideal for use in low light
applications
●
Push-to-Test button allows
for manual operation of
relay without the need for
coil power
●
Lock-down door holds
pushbutton and contacts in
the operate position when
activated
●
Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
from sockets easily
●
ID tag/write label to
identify relays in multiplerelay circuits
●
Bipolar LED allows for
reverse polarity
applications

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Standards and Certifications

UL Listed

When used with
accompanying Eaton
screw terminal socket.

Catalogue Number Selection
D1PR/D1PF Series

D1PF 1 A A
Family Type
D1PF
D1PR
Contact Configuration
1 = SPDT
Standard Features
Blank = Mechanical flag indicator
(only with D1PR)
A = LED test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag (only with D1PF)
1 = LED and mechanical flag indicator

40
T40-46

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vac
W1 = 48 Vdc

Tab40book.fm Page 47 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Product Selection

40

D1PR/D1PF Relay/Socket Quick Reference

40

Relay
Type

Socket

Clip

Module
Type

ID
Tag

Jumper

D1PR1

D1PAA

PMC-1781

B

—

—

D1PF1

D1PAA

PMC-1781

B

—

—

D1PF Series Relay

D1PR/D1PF Series
Coil
Voltage

40
40
40

Contact
Configuration

Coil Resistance
(Ohms)

Catalogue
Number

6 Vac

SPDT

12.2

D1PF1AP

6 Vdc

SPDT

47

D1PF1AP1

12 Vac

SPDT

46

D1PF1AR

12 Vdc

SPDT

188

D1PF1AR1

24 Vac 50/60 Hz

SPDT

180

D1PF1AT

24 Vdc

SPDT

750

D1PF1AT1

48 Vac

SPDT

720

D1PF1AW

48 Vdc

SPDT

2600

D1PF1AW1

110 Vdc

SPDT

13,800

D1PF1AA1

120 Vac 50/60 Hz

SPDT

4430

D1PF1AA

240 Vac 50/60 Hz

SPDT

15,720

D1PF1AB

40

Full Featured

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Plain Cover with LED Indicator
6 Vac

SPDT

12.2

D1PR11P

6 Vdc

SPDT

47

D1PR11P1

12 Vac

SPDT

46

D1PR11R

12 Vdc

SPDT

188

D1PR11R1

24 Vac 50/60 Hz

SPDT

180

D1PR11T

24 Vdc

SPDT

750

D1PR11T1

48 Vac

SPDT

720

D1PR11W

48 Vdc

SPDT

2600

D1PR11W1

40
40
40
40
40
40

240 Vac 50/60 Hz

SPDT

15,720

D1PR11B

110 Vdc

SPDT

13,800

D1PR11A1

120 Vac

SPDT

4430

D1PR11A

24 Vac 50/60 Hz

SPDT

180

D1PR1T

40

6 Vac

SPDT

12.2

D1PR1P

40

6 Vdc

SPDT

47

D1PR1P1

12 Vac

SPDT

46

D1PR1R

12 Vdc

SPDT

188

D1PR1R1

24 Vdc

SPDT

750

D1PR1T1

48 Vac

SPDT

720

D1PR1W

48 Vdc

SPDT

2600

D1PR1W1

110 Vdc

SPDT

13,800

D1PR1A1

120 Vac 50/60 Hz

SPDT

4430

D1PR1A

240 Vac

SPDT

15,270

D1PR1B

40

Plain Cover

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-47

Tab40book.fm Page 48 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40

Accessories

40

D1PR/D1PF Sockets and Accessories

40

Type

Module
Size

Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)

Nominal
Current

Mounting Style

Wire Size

Wire
Connection

Standard
Pack

Catalogue
Number

Socket

B

300

20

Panel/DIN rail

12 /14 (2) AWG, 4 /2.5 (2) mm2

Screw clamping

10

D1PAA 

40

Flange mount adapter

—

—

—

Flange

—

—

25

PFC-D11

Metal spring clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PMC-1781

Protection diode

B

6 to 250 Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BD250

LED indicator

B

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BLG24

B

120/240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BLG240

B

120 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BMV120

B

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BMV24

B

240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BMV240

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PFP-P

40
40
40

MOV suppressor

40
Plastic DIN rail end stop

40
40

Note
 Protection Category (Finger Safe), EN 60529: IP20.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-48

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 49 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Technical Data and Specifications

40

D1PF/D1PR Relay Specifications
Description

D1PR

D1PF

Contact rating

20A

20A

Terminal style

Plug-in

Plug-in

Contact materials

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Maximum switching voltage

300V

300V

Switching current at voltage—resistive

20A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

20A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

20A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

20A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

20A at 28 Vdc

20A at 28 Vdc

1/2 hp at 120 Vac

1/2 hp at 120 Vac

40

Contact Characteristics

Switching current at voltage

1 hp at 277 Vac

1 hp at 277 Vac

Pilot duty

B300

B300

Minimum switching requirement

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Coil Characteristics

40

Operating range
% of nominal (AC)

85 to 110%

85 to 110%

% of nominal (DC)

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

Average consumption

40
40

0.9 VA

0.9 VA

0.7W

0.7W

15% (AC)

15% (AC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

40

Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current

100,000 operations

100,000 operations

40

Mechanical life operations unpowered

10,000,000 operations

10,000,000 operations

Response time

20 ms

20 ms

40

Between coil and contact Vac (rms)

2500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

40

Between poles Vac (rms)

1500V (rms)

1500V (rms)

Storage

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55ºC)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

Operation

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85ºC)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

Dropout voltage threshold

40

Performance

Dielectric strength

40

Environment

40

Ambient air temperature around the device

40

Vibration resistance—operational

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

Shock resistance

10 g-n

10 g-n

Degree of protection

IP40

IP40

40

Cover options

Plain cover

Full featured

40

Features

Mechanical flag indicator (optional LED)

Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator

Product certifications

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

40

Features

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-49

Tab40book.fm Page 50 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Wiring Diagram
D1PF/D1PR

40

12

1

14

5

11

9

40
40
40
40
40

A1

A2

40

13

14

IEC

NEMA

40
40
40

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D1PF/D1PR

40
40

0.53
(14.0)

0.53
(14.0)

0.10
(2.1)

40

1.10
(27.9)

40

1.10
(27.9)

40
1.60
(40.6)

40
40
40

1.40
(35.5)

D1PAA
1.18
(30.0)
0.74
(19.0)

40

0.67
(17.0)

40
40

14

5

12

1

1

40

0.16
(4.0)

3.14
(80.0)

40

9

A2

40
40

0.82
(21.0)

A1 Input

Input
Module
Input

14

13

Input

Input

11

9

IEC

NEMA

40
40
T40-50

COM

14 13

Module
Input

1.57
(40.0)

40

Input

N.O.

9

COM

3.33
(84.0)

N.C.

5

N.O.

14 13

40

1

N.C.

5

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Input

Tab40book.fm Page 51 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Contents

D2 Series Relay

Description

Page

D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-46
D2PR/D2PF Series
Catalogue Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-52
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-52
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-54
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-55
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-56
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-57
D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-61
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-71
D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-75
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-85
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-100
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-106
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-110

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D2PR/D2PF Series
Product Description
The D2 Series is a compact
line of relays with quick
response time and long life.
Available in DPDT, 4PDT and
DPDT latching configurations.

Features

Standards and Certifications

D2PR
●
Ultra-high sensitivity relay
with quick response
●
High reliability, long life
●
Panel, DIN rail and flange
mounting
●
Small size

D2PF
●
Flag indicator shows relay
status in manual or powered
condition
●
Bipolar LED status lamp
allows for reverse polarity
applications
●
Shows coil ON or OFF
status
●
Ideal in low light
conditions
●
Colour-coded pushbutton
identifies AC coils with red
or DC coils with blue
pushbuttons
●
Allows for manual
operation of relay without
the need for coil power
●
Ideal for field service
personnel to test control
circuits
●
Lock-down door, when
activated, holds pushbutton
and contacts in the operate
position
●
Excellent for analyzing
circuit problems
●
Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
from sockets more easily
than conventional relays
●
White plastic ID tag/write
label used for identification
of relays in multi-relay
circuits

40
40

UL Listed

When used with
accompanying Eaton
screw terminal socket.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-51

Tab40book.fm Page 52 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Catalogue Number Selection
D2PF/D2PR 

D2PF 2 A A

40
Family Type
D2PF
D2PR

40
40

Contact Configuration
2 = DPDT
4 = 4PDT
5 = DPDT latching

40
40

Standard Features
Blank = Plain cover (only with D2PR)
A = LED test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag (only with D2PF)

40
40

Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vac
W1 = 48 Vdc

40
40
40
40
40

Product Selection
D2PF/D2PR Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Relay
Type

Socket

D2PR2, D2PF2

D2PAL

D2PR4, D2PF4

40

Module
Type

ID
Tag

PWC-D24

B

PWF-D2P

D2PJ1

—

—

—

D2PA6

PQC-1342

None

—

—

D2PAP

PWC-D24

B

PWF-D2P

D2PJ1

PQC-1782

—

—

—

PWC-D24

B

—

—

PQC-1782

B

—

—

D2PA6

PQC-1342

None

—

—

D2PA4

PYC-A1

None

—

—

D2PA7

40
40

D2PR5

40

Note
 For deciphering catalogue numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-52

Jumper

PQC-1782

40
40

Clip

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 53 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D2PF Series Relay

40.4

D2PF/D2PR Series
Coil
Voltage

Contact
Configuration

Coil Resistance
(Ohms)

Catalogue
Number

6 Vac

DPDT

9.6

D2PF2AP

6 Vdc

DPDT

40

D2PF2AP1

12 Vac

DPDT

46

D2PF2AR

12 Vdc

DPDT

160

D2PF2AR1

24 Vac

DPDT

180

D2PF2AT

24 Vdc

DPDT

650

D2PF2AT1

48 Vdc

DPDT

2600

D2PF2AW1

110/125 Vdc

DPDT

11,000

D2PF2AA1

120 Vac

DPDT

4430

D2PF2AA

40
40

Full Featured Style

40
40
40
40
40
40

220/240 Vac

DPDT

15,720

D2PF2AB

12 Vac

4PDT

46

D2PF4AR

12 Vdc

4PDT

160

D2PF4AR1

24 Vac

4PDT

180

D2PF4AT

24 Vdc

4PDT

650

D2PF4AT1

48 Vdc

4PDT

2600

D2PF4AW1

110/125 Vdc

4PDT

11,000

D2PF4AA1

120 Vac

4PDT

4430

D2PF4AA

220/240 Vac

4PDT

15,720

D2PF4AB

40

6 Vdc

DPDT

40

D2PR2P1

12 Vdc

DPDT

160

D2PR2R1

40

24 Vac

DPDT

180

D2PR2T

24 Vdc

DPDT

650

D2PR2T1

48 Vdc

DPDT

2600

D2PR2W1

110/125 Vdc

DPDT

11,000

D2PR2A1

120 Vac

DPDT

4430

D2PR2A

40
40
40
40

Plain Cover Style

220/240 Vac

DPDT

15,720

D2PR2B

6 Vac

4PDT

9.6

D2PR4P

6 Vdc

4PDT

40

D2PR4P1

12 Vac

4PDT

46

D2PR4R

12 Vdc

4PDT

160

D2PR4R1

24 Vac

4PDT

180

D2PR4T

24 Vdc

4PDT

650

D2PR4T1

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

110/125 Vdc

4PDT

11,000

D2PR4A1

120 Vac

4PDT

4430

D2PR4A

220/240 Vac

4PDT

15,720

D2PR4B

40

24 Vac

DPDT

180

D2PR5T

40

24 Vdc

DPDT

650

D2PR5T1

110 Vac

DPDT

11,000

D2PR5A

Latching Style

40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-53

Tab40book.fm Page 54 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40

Accessories

40

D2PF/D2PR Sockets and Accessories

40

Type

Module
Size

Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)

Nominal
Current

Mounting Style

Wire Size

Socket

B

300

12

DIN rail/panel

14/16 (2) AWG, 2.5/1.5 (2) mm2

40

40

D2PAL 

300

10

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2)

Screw clamping

10

D2PA6

10

DIN rail/panel

14/16 (2) AWG, 2.5/1.5 (2) mm2

Elevator

1

D2PAP 

B

300

10

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

Screw clamping

10

D2PA7 

None

300

10

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

Screw clamping

5

D2PA4

Flange mount adapter

—

—

—

Flange

—

—

25

PFC-D2D72

Plastic ejector clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

PWC-D24

Metal spring clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PQC-1782

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PQC-1342

Hold-down spring

—

—

—

—

—

—

100

PYC-A1

Protection diode

B

6 to 250 Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BD250

LED indicator

40

MOV suppressor

40
40

1

300

40

40

Elevator

Catalogue
Number

None

40
40

Standard
Pack

B

40
40

mm2

Wire
Connection

B

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BLG24

B

120/240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BLG240

B

120 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BMV120

B

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BMV24

B

240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BMV240

Coil bus jumpers

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

D2PJ1

Plastic DIN rail end stop

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PFP-P

Note
 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-54

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 55 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Technical Data and Specifications

40

D2PF/D2PR Relay Specifications
Description

D2PR2/D2PR4

D2PR5

D2PF

Contact rating

10A

5A

10A

40
40

Contact Characteristics

40

Terminal style

Plug-in

Plug-in

Plug-in

Contact materials

Silver alloy

Silver (gold flashed)

Silver alloy

Maximum switching voltage

300V

250 Vac/125 Vdc

300V

40

Switching current at voltage—resistive

10A at 120 Vac
50/60 Hz

3A at 250 Vac

10A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz|

40

8A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz

—

8A at 120 Vac
50/60 Hz

40

8A at 28 Vdc

5A at 30 Vdc

8A at 28 Vdc

Switching current at voltage

1/3 hp at 120 Vac
1 hp at 277 Vac

1/8 hp at 250 Vac

1/3 hp at 120 Vac
1 hp at 277 Vac

40

Pilot duty

B300

—

B300

40

Minimum switching requirement

100 mA at 5 Vdc
(0.5W)

100 mA, 1 Vdc

100 mA at 5 Vdc
(0.5W)

40

Coil Characteristics

40

Operating range

40

% of nominal (AC)

85 to 110%

80 to 110%

85 to 110%

% of nominal (DC)

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

1.2 VA

—

1.2 VA

0.9W

—

0.9W

15% (AC)

30% (AC)

15% (AC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

40
40

Average consumption

Dropout voltage threshold

40
40

Performance
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current

200,000

200,000

200,000

Mechanical life operations unpowered

10,000,000

100,000,000

10,000,000

Response time

20 ms

—

20 ms

Between coil and contact Vac (rms)

1500 rms

—

1500 rms

Between poles Vac (rms)

1500 rms

—

1500 rms

Operation

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

—

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

Storage

40

Dielectric strength

40
40

Environment

40

Ambient air temperature around the device

40

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

—

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

Vibration resistance—operational

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

—

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

Shock resistance

10 g-n

—

10 g-n

Degree of protection

IP40

—

IP40

40
40

40

Features
Cover options

Plain cover

Plain cover

Full featured

Features

Mechanical flag indicator

Latching

Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator

Product certifications

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

UL/CE/CSA

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-55

Tab40book.fm Page 56 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Wiring Diagrams

40

D2PF2/D2PR2

40
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

12

42

1

4

14

44

5

8

11

41

9

12

A1

A2

13

14

40
40
40
40
40

IEC

40

D2PF4/D2PR4

40
40

NEMA

12

22

32

42

1

2

3

4

14

24

34

44

5

6

7

8

11

21

31

41

9

10

11

12

A2

13

40
40
40
40

A1

40

IEC

14

NEMA

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-56

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 57 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D2PF2/D2PR2

40

0.27
(7.0)

0.83
(21.0)

0.02
(0.5)

40

0.83
(21.0)

40
1.10
(27.9)

1.10
(27.9)

40
40

0.24
(6.0)

1.54
(39.1)

0.24
(6.0)

1.40
(35.5)

40
40

D2PF4/D2PR4
0.27
(7.0)

0.83
(21.0)

0.02
(0.5)

40

0.83
(21.0)

40

1.10
(27.9)

0.24
(6.0)

1.54
(39.1)

40

1.10
(27.9)

40
40

0.24
(6.0)

1.40
(35.5)

40

D2PA6

40
0.71
(18.0)

40
44

34

24

14

8

7

6

5

42

32

22

12

4

3

2

1

40

6

5

2

1

7
3

8
4

2.51
(64.0)

2.71
(69.0)
1.25
(32.0)

1
3

1
4

0.17
(4.3)
Dia.
Typ.

1
0

1
1

0.89
(22.7)
1.20
(30.7)

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

12

11

10

9
13

INPUT

N.C.
N.O.
COM

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

12

11

10

9

14

INPUT

A1

4

14

13

INPUT

40
40

N.C.
N.O.

40

COM

40

INPUT

40
40

13

40

9

41
1.00
(25.4)

4

14

A2
1
2

40

31

21
IEC

11

12

11

10

9

40

NEMA

40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-57

Tab40book.fm Page 58 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D2PA7
1.57
(40.0)

40

1.00
(25.4)
0.14
(3.8)

0.74
(19.0)

40

34
7

24
6

44

14

8

5

42

32

22

12

4

3

2

1

40
40
3.30
(84.0)

40

42

40
3.11
(79.0)

40
40

2.40
(61.0)

A2

40

6

44

14

8

5

32

22

12

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

12

11

10

9

N.C.
N.O.
COM

13

3

4

4

3

2

1

7

6

5

12

11

10

9

INPUT

13

41

31

21

12

11

10

9

A2

21

1.18
(30.0)

INPUT

12

40

1.18
(30.0)

40
40

D2PR5
0.10
(2.5)

40
40
40

AC
1

4

1

4

5

8

5

8

0.02
(0.5)

9

12

9

10 11 12

14

13

0.25 1.10
(6.4) (27.9)
Max.

40
40
40

10 11

13
RESET

0.02 (0.5)
1.42 (36.1)
Max.

0.24
(6.1)

0.85
(21.6)
Max.

R

SET

14

RESET

Terminal Arrangement/Internal Connections (Bottom View)

40
40
40
40
40
T40-58

DC

14 – 0.05 (1.3) Dia. x 0.09 (2.3)
Elliptic Holes

40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

13

11

10

NEMA

0.25
(6.4)

0.82
(21.0)

INPUT

9
14

A1

31

COM

MODULE
INPUT

11

A1

INPUT

14

N.C.
N.O.

13

14

INPUT

1

8

IEC

40

2

MODULE
INPUT

41

40

7

1.55
(39.5)

11

40

24

14

0.14
(3.80)

40

34

INPUT

Tab40book.fm Page 59 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D2PAP
2.40
(61.0)

40
40

0.74
(19.0)

3.34
(85.0)

41

31

21

11

12

11

10

9

44

34

24

14

8

7

6

5

42

32

22

12

4

3

2

1

41

31

21

11

12

11

10

9

40

44

34

24

14

8

7

6

5

40

42

32

22

12

4

3

2

1

0.20
(5.6)

3.11
(79.0)

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

12

11

10

9

14

13

N.C.
N.O.
COM

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

12

11

10

9

14

13

INPUT

40
N.C.
N.O.

40

COM

40

INPUT

40

MODULE
INPUT

MODULE
INPUT

1.49
(38.0)

40

40
40

IEC:
A2
A1
NEMA:
INPUT
13
14

A2

INPUT

A1

14

IEC

INPUT

13

40
40

NEMA

0.90
(22.0)

40

1.06
(26.9)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-59

Tab40book.fm Page 60 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D2PAL
2.40
(61.0)

40

1.06
(27.0)

0.74
(19.0)

40
40

41

11

12

9

44

14

42

40

12

9

44

14

8

5

42

12

4

1

1

0.20
(5.6)

40
40

12

4

3.34
(85.0)

11

5

8

40

41

3.11
(79.0)

4

1

8

5

12

9

14

13

N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT

4

1

8

5

12

9

14

13

N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT

40
40

MODULE
INPUT

1.49
(38.0)

40

A2 IEC:

40

A2

INPUT

A1

14 INPUT 13

IEC

0.92
(23.5)

40
D2PA4 Socket for D2PR5 DPDT Latching Relays Only

40
40

Terminal Arrangement
(Top View)

Two 0.17 (4.3) x 0.20 (5.1)
Mounting Holes

40

8

40

3

2

1

7

6

5

Mounting Holes
Two 0.18 (4.6) Dia. or M4
(Two 0.16 (4.1) Dia. or M3)

2.83
(71.9)
Max.

40
40
40

14

INPUT

NEMA:

40
40

A1

MODULE
INPUT

1.16
(29.5)
Max.

2.320 +
– 0.004
(58.92 +
– 0.10)

0.24 (6.1)
0.16
(4.1)

0.65 (16.5)

12

11 10

4

14 13

9

0.870 +
– 0.008
(22.09 +
– 0.20)

1.18
(30.0) Max.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-60

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

NEMA

13

Tab40book.fm Page 61 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Contents

D3 Series Relay

Description

Page

D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-46
D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-51
D3PR/D3PF Series
Catalogue Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-62
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-62
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-64
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-65
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-66
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-71
D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-75
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-85
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-100
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-106
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-110

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D3PR/D3PF Series
Product Description

Features

Standards and Certifications

The D3 Series of relays
provides excellent
functionality in a popular
octal base design. Rigid
pins and guide allow for
quick and easy installation
with little risk of damage.

D3PR
●
Compact relay capable of
breaking relatively large
load currents
●
Panel and DIN rail
mounting
●
8- or 11-pin octal plug-in

D3PF
●
The contact operation can
be easily checked by Pushto-Test button
●
Flag indicator shows relay
status in manual or
powered condition
●
LED status lamp shows
coil ON or OFF status—
ideal for use in low light
applications
●
Push-to-Test button allows
for manual operation of
relay without the need for
coil power
●
Lock-down door holds
pushbutton and contacts in
the operate position when
activated
●
Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
from sockets easily
●
ID tag/write label to
identify relays in multiplerelay circuits
●
Bipolar LED allows for
reverse polarity
applications

40
40
40

(CSA approval
not applicable to
D3PR5 Relays)

UL Listed

40

When used with
accompanying Eaton
screw terminal socket
(for D3PF only)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-61

Tab40book.fm Page 62 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Catalogue Number Selection
D3PR/D3PF Series 

D3PR 2 1 A

40
40

Family Type
D3PR = Standard relay
D3PF = Full featured relay

Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vac
W1 = 48 Vdc

40
40
40
40
40
40

Contact Configuration
2 = DPDT (8-pin)
3 = 3PDT (11-pin)
5 = DPDT latching (11-pin) 
Options
Blank = Plain cover relay (D3PR only)
A = LED test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag (D3PF only)
1 = Indicating light (D3PR only)

40
40
40
40

Product Selection
D3 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Relay
Type

Socket

Clip

Module
Type

ID
Tag

Jumper

D3PR2, D3PF2

D3PA6

PQC-1332

A

—

D3PJ1

D3PAL8

PQC-1351

A

PWF-D3D5

—

D3PA2

PQC-1351

None

—

—
D3PJ1

40
40

D3PR3, D3PF3

40
40

D3PR5

40
40
40

D3PA7

PQC-1332

A

—

D3PAL11

PQC-1351

A

PWF-D3D5

—

D3PA3

PQC-1351

None

—

—
D3PJ1

D3PA7

PQC-1351

A

—

D3PAL11

PQC-1351

A

PWF-D3D5

—

D3PA3

PQC-1351

None

—

—

Notes
 For deciphering catalogue numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
 D3PR only.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-62

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 63 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D3 Series Relay

40.4

D3PR/D3PF Series
Coil
Voltage

Contact
Configuration

Coil Resistance
(Ohms)

Catalogue
Number

120 Vac

DPDT

1700

D3PF2AA

240 Vac

DPDT

7200

D3PF2AB

12 Vdc

DPDT

120

D3PF2AR1

24 Vdc

DPDT

470

D3PF2AT1

48 Vdc

DPDT

1800

D3PF2AW1

120 Vac

3PDT

1700

D3PF3AA

220/240 Vac

3PDT

7200

D3PF3AB

6 Vdc

3PDT

32

D3PF3AP1

24 Vac

3PDT

72

D3PF3AT

24 Vdc

3PDT

470

D3PF3AT1

48 Vdc

3PDT

1800

D3PF3AW1

120 Vac

DPDT

10,000

D3PR5A

110/125 Vdc

DPDT

9000

D3PR5A1

240 Vac

DPDT

36,000

D3PR5B

12 Vdc

DPDT

90

D3PR5R1

24 Vac

DPDT

470

D3PR5T

24 Vdc

DPDT

350

D3PR5T1

48 Vdc

DPDT

1400

D3PR5W1

40
40

Full Featured Style

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Latching Style

40
40
40
40

Plain Cover with LED Indicator
120 Vac

DPDT

1700

D3PR21A

24 Vac

DPDT

72

D3PR21T

24 Vdc

DPDT

470

D3PR21T1

220/240 Vac

3PDT

7200

D3PR31B

24 Vac

3PDT

72

D3PR31T

24 Vdc

3PDT

470

D3PR31T1

120 Vac

DPDT

1700

D3PR2A

110/125 Vdc

DPDT

10,000

D3PR2A1

220/240 Vac

DPDT

7200

D3PR2B

6 Vac

DPDT

4.2

D3PR2P

6 Vdc

DPDT

32

D3PR2P1

12 Vac

DPDT

18

D3PR2R

12 Vdc

DPDT

120

D3PR2R1

24 Vac

DPDT

72

D3PR2T

24 Vdc

DPDT

470

D3PR2T1

48 Vac

DPDT

290

D3PR2W

48 Vdc

DPDT

1800

D3PR2W1

120 Vac

3PDT

1700

D3PR3A

110/125 Vdc

3PDT

10,000

D3PR3A1

40
40
40
40
40

Plain Cover Style

220/240 Vac

3PDT

7200

D3PR3B

12 Vac

3PDT

18

D3PR3R

12 Vdc

3PDT

120

D3PR3R1

24 Vac

3PDT

72

D3PR3T

24 Vdc

3PDT

470

D3PR3T1

48 Vdc

3PDT

1800

D3PR3W1

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-63

Tab40book.fm Page 64 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40

Accessories

40

D3PR/D3PF Series Sockets and Accessories

40

Type

Module
Size

Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)

Nominal
Current

Mounting Style

Wire Size

Socket

A

300

16

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2)

mm2
mm2

40

A

40
40

300

12

Wire
Connection

Standard
Pack

Catalogue
Number

Screw clamping

1

D3PA6 

Elevator

10

D3PAL8 

None

300/600

15/10

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2)

Screw clamping

10

D3PA2

A

600

5

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

Screw clamping

1

D3PA7 

A

300

12

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

Elevator

10

D3PAL11 

None

300/600

15/5

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

Screw clamping

10

D3PA3

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PQC-1332

40

Metal spring clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

PQC-1351

40

Protection diode

A

6 to 250 Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AD250

LED indicator

A

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-ALG24

A

120/240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-ALG240

A

120 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AMV120

A

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AMV24

A

240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AMV240

A

6 to 24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-RC24

40
40
40

MOV suppressor

R/C suppressor

40
40
40
40

A

110 to 240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-RC240

Write-on plastic labels

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

PWF-D3D5

Coil bus jumpers

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

D3PJ1

Plastic DIN rail end stop

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PFP-P

Note
 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-64

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 65 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Technical Data and Specifications

40

D3PR/D3PF Series Relay Specifications

40

D3PR

D3PF

D3PR5
(Latching)

Contact rating

16A

16A

16A

Terminal style

Octal

Octal

11-pin octal

Contact materials

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Maximum switching voltage

300V

300V

300V

Switching current at voltage—resistive

16A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz

16A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz

16A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz

16A at 120 Vac
50/60 Hz

16A at 120 Vac
50/60 Hz

—

40

16A at 28 Vdc

16A at 28 Vdc

16A at 28 Vdc

40

Description

40

Contact Characteristics

Switching current at voltage

1/2 hp at 240 Vac

1/2 hp at 240 Vac

1/2 hp at 240 Vac

1/3 hp at 120 Vac

1/3 hp at 120 Vac

1/3 hp at 120 Vac

Pilot duty

B300

B300

B300

Minimum switching requirement

100 mA at 5 Vdc
(0.5W)

100 mA at 5 Vdc
(0.5W)

100 mA at 5 Vdc
(0.5W)

% of nominal (AC)

85 to 110%

85 to 110%

85 to 110%

% of nominal (DC)

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

40
40
40

40
40
40

Coil Characteristics

40

Operating range

Average consumption

Dropout voltage threshold

3 VA

3 VA

2 VA

1.4W

1.4W

1.64W

15% (AC)

15% (AC)

15% (AC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

100,000 operations

100,000 operations

100,000 operations

40
40
40
40

Performance
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current

40

Mechanical life operations unpowered

5,000,000 operations

5,000,000 operations

10,000,000 operations

Response time

20 ms

20 ms

30 ms

40
40

Dielectric strength
Between coil and contact Vac (rms)

1500V (rms)

1500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

Between poles Vac (rms)

1500V (rms)

1500V (rms)

1500V (rms)

40

Environment
Ambient air temperature around the device
Storage

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

Operation

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

Vibration resistance—operational

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

Shock resistance

10 g-n

10 g-n

10 g-n

Degree of protection

IP40

IP40

IP40

Cover options

Plain cover

Full Featured

Latching

Features

Mechanical flag indicator

Bipolar LED/
Locking pushbutton/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator

—

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

RoHS/UL/UR

40
40
40
40

Features

Product certifications

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-65

Tab40book.fm Page 66 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D3PR2/D3PF2

40
40
1.39
(35.3)

40

1.39
(35.3)

40
0.24
(6.1)

40

1.37
(34.8)

2.20
(55.2)

1.37
(34.8)

2.10
(50.3)

40
12

40

A1

40

11

40

5

4

14

40

40

22
24

3

A2

2

6

7

31

1

IEC

8

NEMA

D3PR3/D3PF3

40
40

1.39
(35.3)

40
40

0.24
(6.1)

40

1.39
(35.3)

1.37
(34.8)

2.20
(55.2)

1.37
(34.8)

2.10
(50.3)

40
21

22

40

24
32

12

40

14

40

34
A1

A2

11

40

7
8

4

9

3
2

31

IEC

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-66

6

5

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

10
1

11

NEMA

Tab40book.fm Page 67 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D3PR5—Octal Base Latching Relay

40
40
1.39
(35.3)

40
40
40

1.37
(34.8)

2.40
(61.0)

40
RESET

COIL 2

21

22

RESET

32

14
A1

A1

31

IEC

COIL

2

40

9
2

11

40

8

3

10
1

7

4

9

COMMON

31

6

5
8

3

A2

11

40

7

4

34

RESET
COIL 2

6

5
32

14

A2

11

24

12

34

COMMON

21

22

24

12

RESET

10
1

NEMA

1

40

11

COIL

40

1

SET

SET

SET

SET

Single Coil (AC)

Dual Coil (DC)

Single Coil (AC)

Dual Coil (DC)

40

D3PA2

40

0.97
(24.6)

1.60
(40.0)

0.59
(15.0)

40
1.29
(33.0)

40
A1
7

0.16
(4.2)

8

1

2
2.02
(51.0)

INPUT

2.12
(54.0)
1.01
(25.6)

3

5

6

11

21

1

8

A2

2

INPUT

INPUT

1
1

8
8

40

7

40

INPUT

2

7

2

7

40

3

6

3

6

40

4

5

12

22

4

5

40

4
14

IEC

24

3

4

5

6

40

NEMA

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-67

Tab40book.fm Page 68 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D3PA3

40

2.32
(59.0)

0.97
(24.6)

2.06
(52.0)

40
40
40
40

1.60 Dia.
(40.0)

14
10

3
4

40
40

1.02
(25.0)

2.05
(52.0)

9
8

5

2.16
(54.8)

INPUT 1

INPUT

11

2

10

INPUT 1

6

9

4

7

32

8
5

4

22

6

24

21

5

0.97
(24.6)

40

1.29
(33.0)

40

A1
7

8

1

40

2
2.02
(51.0)

40

0.16
(4.2)

INPUT

40

11

21

1

8

2
2.12
(54.0)

40

3

1.01
(25.6)

3

4

5

4

5

12

22

A2

2

INPUT

INPUT

1

7

2

6

3

1

8
8

7
INPUT
7
6

4

5

6
14

40

IEC

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-68

NEMA

1.60
(40.0)

0.59
(15.0)

40

8
7

6

IEC

40
40

7

6

7

40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

24

3

4

9

10

3

8
5

INPUT

11

2
9

4

12

3

34

10

3

11

2

A2

A1

11

2

1

31

11
1

5

NEMA

6

Tab40book.fm Page 69 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D3PA6

40

1.45
(37.0)

1.42
(36.0)

1.10
(27.9)

11

22

2.86
(72.0)

40

5

1

12
4

24

21

14

6

8

3

22

11

12

5

1

4

24

21

14

6

8

3

40
0.15
(3.8)

3.00
(76.0)

40

4

5

40

4

5

6

3

6

3

7

2

7

2

1

8
1.58
(40.0)

40

8

MODULE
INPUT

40

1

40

MODULE
INPUT

40

IEC:
NEMA:

A2

A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1
INPUT

A1

INPUT INPUT

7

2

Coil Jumper Buss
INPUT

7

IEC

40
2

40

NEMA

40

1.20
(30.0)

40

D3PA7

40
1.45
(37.0)

40
1.50
(38.0)

1.10
(27.9)
32

24

22

8

7

5

31
11
3.18
(81.0)

40
12
4

21

11

6

1
14 0.15
(3.8)
3

34
9

3.01
(76.0)

32

22

24
21

31
34

6

7

5

8

12

8

11

11

14

9

4

9

3
10
11

2
1 MODULE

5

7
6

6

7

5

8

4

40

1

40

3

40

4

9

40

3
10
11

40

2
1 MODULE

INPUT

INPUT

40

1.58
(40.0)
A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1

IEC:
NEMA:

A2

A1

INPUT

10 Coil Jumper Buss

INPUT

INPUT

IEC

NEMA

40

2

40

INPUT

2

10

40
40

1.35
(34.2)

40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-69

Tab40book.fm Page 70 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D3PAL8

40

0.86
(22.0)

40

22

24

12

14
22

24

40

6

5

4

14

12

6

5

4

3

3

40
40
2.95
(75.0)

40

0.12
(3.10)

5

5

4

6

40

7
8

40

1.45
(37.0)

40

INPUT A2

A2

21

11

40
40

1

MODULE
INPUT

A1
1

2

A2

21

A1

11

INPUT

INPUT

0.12
(30.0)

1.06
(27.0)

2
8

MODULE
INPUT
A2

8

7

7

7

3

1

2

IEC:
NEMA:

A2

2

4

INPUT A1

7

40

3

6

7

8

7

1

2

INPUT

INPUT

IEC

NEMA

1.49
(38.0)

40
40

D3PAL11
0.86
(22.0)

40

24

34 32

22

14

12
32

34

40

9

5

7

8

3

22

24

12

14

7

8

9

4

3

5

4

40
40

0.12
(3.1)

40

6

7
8

2.95
(75.0)

1.45
(37.0)

40

INPUT A2

21

11

40
40

1.06
(27.0)

40

10

11

6

1

A2

31

21

11

A1

10

10

11

6

1

2

2
INPUT

INPUT

0.12
(30.0)
1.49
(38.0)

40
40
40
T40-70

MODULE
INPUT

A1
A2

10

1

MODULE
INPUT

2

IEC:
NEMA:

A2 A2 31

2
11

1

INPUT A1

10

40

3
10

2
11

4

9

3
10

40

5

8

4

9

40

6

7

5

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

IEC

INPUT

INPUT
NEMA

Tab40book.fm Page 71 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Contents

D4 Series Relay

Description

Page

D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-46
D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-51
D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-61
D4 Series
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-73
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-74
D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-75
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-85
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-100
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-106
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-110

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D4 Series
Product Description
The D4 Series is a slim-form
relay designed to fit into tight
spaces. The retaining clip is
built in to the socket to
provide easy and secure
assembly.

Standards and Certifications
File # E1491, E65657

D4 Series



●

●

40

D4PR 1 1 A

File # LR701519
Family Type
D4PR

Features
●

40

Catalogue Number Selection

Slim-styled power relay
Socket has built-in holddown clip
Panel or DIN rail mounting

Contact Configuration
1 = SPDT
2 = DPDT
Options
Blank = Plain cover
1 = Indicating light

40

Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vac
W1 = 48 Vdc

40
40
40
40
40
40

Product Selection

40

D4 Relay/Socket Quick Reference

40

Relay Type

Socket

Hold-Down Clip

D4PR1

D4PA1



D4PA2



D4PR2

40

Notes
 For deciphering catalogue numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are
readily available.
 Socket has built-in hold-down spring.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-71

Tab40book.fm Page 72 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

D4 Series Relay

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D4 Series
Standard
Pack

Catalogue
Number

Voltage/Poles

Single-pole

10

D4PA1

120 Vac

1

D4PR21A

Two-pole

10

D4PA2

110 Vdc

1

D4PR21A1

240 Vac

1

D4PR21B

Voltage/Poles

40

DIN Rail Sockets

40
40

Standard
Pack

Catalogue
Number

DPDT with Indicating Light

SPDT with Indicating Light
120 Vac

1

D4PR11A

6 Vac

50

D4PR21P

110 Vdc

1

D4PR11A1

6 Vdc

1

D4PR21P1

40

240 Vac

1

D4PR11B

12 Vac

50

D4PR21R

6 Vac

50

D4PR11P

12 Vdc

1

D4PR21R1

40

6 Vdc

50

D4PR11P1

24 Vac

1

D4PR21T

12 Vac

50

D4PR11R

24 Vdc

1

D4PR21T1

12 Vdc

1

D4PR11R1

48 Vdc

50

D4PR21W1

24 Vac

1

D4PR11T

Standard DPDT

24 Vdc

1

D4PR11T1

120 Vac

1

D4PR2A

40

48 Vdc

50

D4PR11W1

110 Vdc

50

D4PR2A1

240 Vac

50

D4PR2B

40

120 Vac

1

D4PR1A

6 Vac

50

D4PR2P

110 Vdc

50

D4PR1A1

6 Vdc

1

D4PR2P1

240 Vac

50

D4PR1P

12 Vac

50

D4PR2R

40

6 Vac

1

D4PR1P1

12 Vdc

1

D4PR2R1

6 Vdc

50

D4PR1R

24 Vac

1

D4PR2T

40

12 Vac

1

D4PR1R1

24 Vdc

1

D4PR2T1

12 Vdc

1

D4PR1R1-A2

48 Vdc

1

D4PR2W1

40

24 Vac

1

D4PR1T

24 Vdc

1

D4PR1T1

48 Vdc

1

D4PR1W1

40

40
40

Standard SPDT

40

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-72

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 73 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Technical Data and Specifications

40

D4 Series
Description

Resistive Load
(p.f. = 1)

40

Inductive Load
(p.f. = 0.4, L/R = 7 ms)

40

D4PR1
Rated load

250 Vac 10A

250 Vac 7.5A

30 Vdc 10A

30 Vdc 5A

Carry current

10A

10A

Max. operating voltage

380 Vac/125 Vdc

380 Vac/125 Vdc

Max. operating current

10A

10A

Contact material

AgCdO

AgCdO

Max. switching capacity

2500 VA

1875 VA

300W

150W

Min. permissible load

100 mA, 5 Vdc

100 mA, 5 Vdc

Pickup voltage (max.)

80% AC/70% DC

80% AC/70% DC

Dropout voltage (min.)

30% AC/15% DC

30% AC/15% DC

Voltage (max.)

110%

110%

Mechanical life (min.)

10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC

10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC

Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.)

100,000

100,000

Maximum hp ratings

1/3 hp (125 Vac)

1/3 hp (125 Vac)

1/2 hp (250 Vac)

1/2 hp (250 Vac)

1/2 hp (277 Vac)

1/2 hp (277 Vac)

240 Vac 5A

250 Vac 2A

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D4PR2
Rated load

30 Vdc 5A

30 Vdc 3A

Carry current

5A

5A

Max. operating voltage

380 Vac/125 Vdc

380 Vac/125 Vdc

Max. operating current

5A

5A

Contact material

AgCdO

AgCdO

Max. switching capacity

1250 VA

500 VA

150W

90W

Min. permissible load

10 mA, 5 Vdc

10 mA, 5 Vdc

Pickup voltage (max.)

80% AC/70% DC

80% AC/70% DC

Dropout voltage (min.)

30% AC/15% DC

30% AC/15% DC

Voltage (max.)

110%

110%

Mechanical life (min.)

10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC

10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC

Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.)

100,000

100,000

Maximum hp ratings

1/6 hp (120 Vac)

1/6 hp (120 Vac)

1/3 hp (240 Vac)

1/3 hp (240 Vac)

1/3 hp (265 Vac)

1/3 hp (265 Vac)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-73

Tab40book.fm Page 74 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Dimensions

40

D4PR1

40

General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D4PR2
0.51
(13.0)
Max.

1.14
(29.0)
Max.

0.10
(2.5)

0.19
(4.8)

0.24
(6.0)

0.16
(4.0)

0.02
(0.5)

0.20
(5.2)

0.20
(5.2)

2 4 3

0.28
(7.1)

2.82
(71.6)
Max.

0.08
(2.0)

40
40

2

3

4

8

7

6

5

Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Bottom View)

0.17 (4.2)
Dia. Holes

Five
3.5 x 0.32
(88.9 x 8.0)
1.40
(35.6)

4
3

1.180 0.002
(29.97 0.05)

2
0.77 (19.6)
1.18 (30.0)
2.13 (54.1) Max.

0.16 0.77
(4.1) (19.6)
Max.

5

1

Terminal Arrangement

M3 or
3.30 (0.13)
Dia. Holes

Mounting Holes

D4PA2
0.28
(7.1)

40
40

1

0.16
(4.1)
Dia. Holes

40

40

0.02
(0.5)

Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Bottom View)

40

40

0.16
(4.0)

D4PA1

40

40

0.02
(0.5)

0.30
(7.5)
0.02
(0.5)
0.76
(19.4)

1
5

0.69
(17.5)

0.10
(2.6)

0.35
(8.9)

0.30
(7.5)

40

40

1.10
(28.0)
Max. 0.79
(20.0) 0.08
(2.0)

5 – 0.035 x 0.12
(0.9 x 3)
Elliptic Holes

40

40

0.39
(10.0)

0.02
(0.5)

40

40

0.51
(13.0)
Max.

1.14
(29.0)
Max.

0.01
(2.5)

1.14
(29.0)
Max.

0.79
(20.0)

40
40

0.39
(10.0)

0.08
(2.0)

40
40

Control Relays and Timers

2.82
(71.6)
Max.

0.16 0.77
(4.1) (19.6)
Max.

0.08
(2.0)

0.16
(4.1)
Dia. Holes
0.17 (4.2)
Dia. Holes

Eight
3.5 x 0.32
(88.9 x 8.0)
1.40
(35.6)

0.77 (19.6)
1.18 (30.0)
2.13 (54.1) Max.

6 3
5 4

7

2

8

1

Terminal Arrangement

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-74

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

1.180 0.002
(29.97 0.05)

M3 or
0.13 (3.30)
Dia. Holes

Mounting Holes

Tab40book.fm Page 75 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Contents

D5 Series Relay

Description

Page

D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-46
D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-51
D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-61
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-71
D5PR/D5PF Series
Catalogue Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-76
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-76
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-79
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-80
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-81
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-82
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-85
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-100
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-106
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-110

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D5PR/D5PF Series
Product Description

Features

Standards and Certifications

The D5 Series is rated at
16A and is available in fullfeatured and plain cover
styles.

D5PR
●
Industrial rated 300V, 16A
relay in two-pole and threepole configurations
●
Compact design can be
panel or DIN rail mounted

D5PF
●
Flag indicator shows relay
status in manual or
powered condition
●
LED status lamp shows
coil ON or OFF status—
ideal for use in low light
applications
●
Push-to-Test button allows
for manual operation of
relay without the need for
coil power
●
Lock-down door holds
pushbutton and contacts in
the operate position when
activated
●
Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
from sockets easily
●
ID tag/write label to
identify relays in multiplerelay circuits
●
Bipolar LED allows for
reverse polarity
applications

40
40

UL Listed

When used with
accompanying Eaton
screw terminal socket
(D5PF only)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-75

Tab40book.fm Page 76 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Catalogue Number Selection
D5 Series

40

D5PR3 1 A

40
Family Type
D5PR = Standard relay
D5PF = Full featured relay

40
40

Contact Configuration
2 = DPDT
3 = 3PDT

40
40

Options
Blank = Plain cover (D5PR only)
A = LED test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag (D5PF only)
1 = Indicating light (D5PR only)

40
40
40

Product Selection

40

D5 Relay/Socket Quick Reference

40

Relay
Type

40

D5PR2, D5PF2,
D5PR3, D5PF3

40

Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
G1 = 74 Vdc
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vac
W1 = 48 Vdc

Socket

Clip

Module
Type

ID
Tag

Jumper

D5PAL

PQC-1351

A

PWF-D3D5

D3PJ1

D5PA2

PQC-1351

None

—

—

D5PA3L

PQC-1351

None

—

—

D5PA3S

PQC-1351

None

—

—

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-76

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 77 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D5 Series Relay

40.4

D5 Series
Coil
Voltage

Contact
Configuration

Coil Resistance
(Ohms)

Catalogue
Number

120 Vac

DPDT

1700

D5PF2AA

110/125 Vdc

DPDT

10,000

D5PF2AA1

40
40

Full Featured

220/240 Vac

DPDT

7200

D5PF2AB

12 Vdc

DPDT

120

D5PF2AR1

24 Vac

DPDT

72

D5PF2AT

24 Vdc

DPDT

470

D5PF2AT1

48 Vdc

DPDT

1800

D5PF2AW1

120 Vac

3PDT

1700

D5PF3AA

110/125 Vdc

3PDT

10,000

D5PF3AA1

40
40
40
40
40
40

220/240 Vac

3PDT

7200

D5PF3AB

12 Vdc

3PDT

120

D5PF3AR1

24 Vac

3PDT

72

D5PF3AT

24 Vdc

3PDT

470

D5PF3AT1

40
40

40

Plain Cover with LED
110/125 Vdc

DPDT

10,000

D5PR21A1

6 Vac

DPDT

4.2

D5PR21P

6 Vdc

DPDT

32

D5PR21P1

12 Vac

DPDT

18

D5PR21R

12 Vdc

DPDT

120

D5PR21R1

24 Vdc

DPDT

470

D5PR21T1

48 Vac

DPDT

290

D5PR21W

48 Vdc

DPDT

1800

D5PR21W1

120 Vac

3PDT

1700

D5PR31A

40
40
40
40
40

110/125 Vdc

3PDT

10,000

D5PR31A1

6 Vdc

3PDT

32

D5PR31P1

12 Vac

3PDT

18

D5PR31R

12 Vdc

3PDT

120

D5PR31R1

24 Vdc

3PDT

470

D5PR31T1

48 Vdc

3PDT

1800

D5PR31W1

40

220/240 Vac

DPDT

7200

D5PR24B

40

6 Vac

DPDT

4.2

D5PR24P

6 Vdc

DPDT

32

D5PR24P1

12 Vac

DPDT

18

D5PR24R

12 Vdc

DPDT

120

D5PR24R1

24 Vac

DPDT

72

D5PR24T

24 Vdc

DPDT

470

D5PR24T1

48 Vac

DPDT

290

D5PR24W

40
40

Side Flange Cover

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-77

Tab40book.fm Page 78 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

D5 Series Relay

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D5 Series, continued
Coil
Voltage

Contact
Configuration

Coil Resistance
(Ohms)

Catalogue
Number

120 Vac

DPDT

1700

D5PR2A

110/125 Vdc

DPDT

10,000

D5PR2A1

220/240 Vac

DPDT

7200

D5PR2B

74 Vdc

DPDT

4800

D5PR2G1

6 Vac

DPDT

4.2

D5PR2P

40

6 Vdc

DPDT

32

D5PR2P1

12 Vac

DPDT

18

D5PR2R

40

12 Vdc

DPDT

120

D5PR2R1

24 Vac

DPDT

72

D5PR2T

24 Vdc

DPDT

470

D5PR2T1

48 Vac

DPDT

290

D5PR2W

48 Vdc

DPDT

1800

D5PR2W1

40

120 Vac

3PDT

1700

D5PR3A

110/125 Vdc

3PDT

10,000

D5PR3A1

40

220/240 Vac

3PDT

7200

D5PR3B

74 Vdc

3PDT

4800

D5PR3G1

6 Vac

3PDT

4.2

D5PR3P

40

6 Vdc

3PDT

32

D5PR3P1

12 Vac

3PDT

18

D5PR3R

40

12 Vdc

3PDT

120

D5PR3R1

24 Vac

3PDT

72

D5PR3T

40

24 Vdc

3PDT

470

D5PR3T1

48 Vdc

3PDT

1800

D5PR3W

48 Vdc

3PDT

1800

D5PR3W1

40

Plain Cover

40
40
40

40
40

40

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-78

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 79 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Accessories

40

D5 Sockets and Accessories

40

Type

Module
Size

Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)

Nominal
Current

Mounting Style

Wire Size

Wire
Connection

Standard
Pack

Catalogue
Number

Socket

A

300

25

DIN rail

10 /14 (2) AWG, 6/2.5 (2) mm2

Elevator

10

D5PAL 

None

300

15

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

Screw clamping

10

D5PA2

None

300

15

Chassis

(Output): 16 AWG, 1 mm2

Solder

10

D5PA3L

None

300

15

Chassis

(Output): 16 AWG, 1 mm2

Solder

10

D5PA3S

Metal spring clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

PQC-1351

Protection diode

A

6 to 250 Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AD250

LED indicator

A

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-ALG24

A

120/240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-ALG240

MOV suppressor

40
40
40
40

A

120 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AMV120

A

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AMV24

A

240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AMV240

A

6 to 24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-RC24

A

110 to 240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-RC240

Write-on plastic labels

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

PWF-D3D5

Coil bus jumpers

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

D3PJ1

Plastic DIN rail end stop

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PFP-P

R/C suppressor

40
40
40
40
40
40

Note
 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-79

Tab40book.fm Page 80 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40

Technical Data and Specifications

40

D5 Series

40

Contact Characteristics

D5PR

D5PF

Contact rating

16A

16A

Terminal style

Plug-in

Plug-in

40

Contact materials

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Maximum switching voltage

300V

300V

40

Switching current at voltage—resistive
16A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

16A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

40

Description

40
40

16A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

16A at 28 Vdc

16A at 28 Vdc

1/2 hp at 240 Vac

1/2 hp at 240 Vac

1/3 hp at 120 Vac

1/3 hp at 120 Vac

Pilot duty

B300

B300

Minimum switching requirement

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

% of nominal (AC)

85 to 110%

85 to 110%

% of nominal (DC)

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

40

Average consumption

3 VA
1.4W

3 VA
1.4W

40

Drop-out voltage threshold

10%/15% (AC)
10% (DC)

10%/15% (AC)
10% (DC)

40

Performance
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current

100,000 operations

100,000 operations

40

Mechanical life operations unpowered

5,000,000 operations

5,000,000 operations

Response time

20 ms

20 ms

40
40

Switching current at voltage

16A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

Coil Characteristics

40
40

40
40
40
40
40
40

Operating range

Dielectric strength
Between coil and contact Vac (rms)

1500V (rms)

1500V (rms)

Between poles Vac (rms)

1500V (rms)

1500V (rms)

Environment
Ambient air temperature around the device
Storage

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

Operation

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

Vibration resistance—operational

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

Shock resistance

10 g-n

10 g-n

Degree of protection

IP40

IP40

40

Features
Cover options

Flange/plain cover with LED

Full featured

40

Features

Mechanical flag indicator
(LED optional)

Bipolar LED/
Mechanical flag indicator/
Locking pushbutton/
Removable ID tag

Product certifications

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-80

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 81 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Wiring Diagrams

40

D5PA3L and D5PA3S
22

32

12

1

N.C.
34

14

24
N.O.

2

40

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

N.C.

40
40

N.O.

40
31

11

21

A1

COM

A2

40
40

B

A

INPUT

COM

INPUT

IEC

40

NEMA

40

D5PR2/D5PF2 DPDT
22

12

1

40

3

40
24

14

4

40

6

40
11

21

A1

A2

7

40

9

40
A

B

40
40

NEMA

IEC

40
D5PR3/D5PF3 3PDT
12

32

22

1

2

40

3

40
14

34

24

4

5

40

6

40
11

31

21

7

A2

A

8

40

9

40
A1

IEC

B

40
40

NEMA

40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-81

Tab40book.fm Page 82 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40

Dimensions

40

D5PR and D5PF

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40
40

1.40
(35.4)

1.40
(35.4)

40
40

0.20
(6.1)

40

1.37
(34.9)

D5PA2

40

1.69
(43.0)
1.53
(39.0)

1.03
(26.0)

1.37
(35.0)
6

40

24

34

14

6

2

40

1

0.40
(10.0)

40

5

40

4

40

1.97
(50.0)

1.37
(34.9)

2.10
(53.1)

22

32

12

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

6

5

4

6

5

4

8

7

8

7

3
0.15
(3.8)

40
3.00
(76.0)

40

9

3.14
(80.0)

40

B

40

1.50
(38.0)

40

B

N.C.
N.O.
COM

9

A INPUT

B

A1

B

A2

9

8

7

21

40

31
IEC

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-82

4

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

A
INPUT

11

9

N.C.
N.O.
COM

A INPUT

A
INPUT

40

5

8
NEMA

7

Tab40book.fm Page 83 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D5PA3L and D5PA3S
0.30
(7.5)

40

0.87
(22.2)

1.50
(38.1)

40
40

0.02
(0.5)

1.25
(31.7)

2

1

2.03
(51.0)

1.37
(34.7)

4

5

7

40

3

40

6

8

9

40

1.68
(42.8)
A

40

B

40
0.29
(7.5)

0.50
(2.5)

0.16 Dia.
(4.2)
2 Holes

40
Recommended
Chassis Cutout
0.28
(5.3)

0.87
(22.2)

40

0.16 (3.9)
Dia. Holes

40
40

0.63
(16.2)

0.24
(6.1)

1.37
(34.7)
Solder Type Terminals

1.68
(42.6)

0.13
(3.3)

40
40

1.27
(32.3)

40

0.29
(7.5)

40
0.63
(16.2)

0.24
(6.1)

1.37
(34.7)

0.18
(4.7)
Typ.

40

1.39
(35.4)

40
40

3/16 Q.C. Type Terminals 0.19 (4.7)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-83

Tab40book.fm Page 84 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D5PAL

40

2.48
(63.0)

40
40
40
40

3.70
(96.0)

40

21
9

31
8

11
7

21

31

11

9

8

7

24
6

34
5

14
4

24

34

14

6

5

4

22
3

32
2

12
1

22

32

12

3

2

1

3

3.62
(92.0)

6

8

9

N.C.
4 N.O.

5 1

2

3

6

8

9

7

N.C.
4 N.O.

5 1

2

7

COM

40

B

COM
B

A

A

INPUT

40

INPUT

MODULE
INPUT

MODULE
INPUT

40
A2

40

7

IEC:
NEMA:

INPUT

40

A1
2

A2

Coil Jumper
Buss
A1

INPUT
1.40
(36.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-84

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

INPUT
IEC

B

Coil Jumper
Buss
A

INPUT

INPUT
NEMA

Tab40book.fm Page 85 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Contents

D7 Series Relay

Description

Page

D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-46
D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-51
D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-61
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-71
D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-75
D7PR/D7PF Series
Catalogue Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-86
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-86
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-89
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-90
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-92
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-93
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-100
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-106
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-110

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D7PR/D7PF Series
Product Description
The D7 Series is a costeffective control relay with
high dielectric strength and
high current-carrying
capacity.

Features

Standards and Certifications

D7PR
●
Arc barrier equipped relay
with high dielectric
strength
●
Panel and DIN rail
mounting

D7PF
●
Flag indicator shows relay
status in manual or
powered condition
●
Bipolar LED status lamp
allows for reverse polarity
applications
●
Shows coil ON or OFF
status
●
Ideal in low light
conditions
●
Colour-coded pushbutton
identifies AC coils with red
or DC coils with blue
pushbuttons
●
Allows for manual
operation of relay
without the need for
coil power
●
Ideal for field service
personnel to test
control circuits
●
Lock-down door, when
activated, holds
pushbutton and contacts in
the operate position
●
Excellent for analyzing
circuit problems
●
Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
from sockets more easily
than conventional relays
●
White plastic ID tag/write
label used for identification
of relays in multi-relay
circuits

File # E37317, E65657
File # LR217017,
LR217069

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-85

Tab40book.fm Page 86 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Catalogue Number Selection
D7 Series

40
40
40
40
40

D7PR 1 1 A
Family Type
D7PR = Standard relay
D7PF = Full featured relay
Contact Configuration
1 = SPDT
3 = 3PDT
2 = DPDT
4 = 4PDT

40

Options
Blank = Plain cover (D7PR only)
A = LED test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag (D7PF only)
1 = Indicating light (D7PR only)

40
40

Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vac
W1 = 48 Vdc

40
40

Product Selection

40

D7 Relay/Socket Quick Reference

40
40

Relay
Type
D7PR1, D7PR2,
D7PF1, D7PF2

40
40
40

D7PR3, D7PF3

D7PR4, D7PF4

Socket/Adapter
D7PAA

Clip

Module
Type

ID Tag

PQC-1342

B

—

—

PQC-1349

B

—

—

D7PA9

PQC-1342

None

—

—

PFC-D2D72

—

None

—

—

D7PAB

PQC-1783

A

—

—

PMC-1783

A

—

—

PFC-D73

—

None

—

—

D7PAD

PQC-1784

A

—

—

40
PFC-D74

PMC-1784

A

—

—

—

None

—

—

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-86

Jumper

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 87 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D7 Series Relay

40.4

D7 Series
Coil
Voltage

Contact
Configuration

Coil Resistance
(Ohms)

Catalogue
Number

120 Vac

SPDT

4430

D7PF1AA

6 Vac

SPDT

9.6

D7PF1AP

6 Vdc

SPDT

40

D7PF1AP1

12 Vac

SPDT

46

D7PF1AR

24 Vdc

SPDT

650

D7PF1AT1

48 Vac

SPDT

788

D7PF1AW

48 Vdc

SPDT

2600

D7PF1AW1

120 Vac

DPDT

4430

D7PF2AA

110/125 Vdc

DPDT

11,000

D7PF2AA1

40
40

Full Featured

220/240 Vac

DPDT

15,720

D7PF2AB

6 Vac

DPDT

9.6

D7PF2AP

6 Vdc

DPDT

40

D7PF2AP1

12 Vac

DPDT

46

D7PF2AR

12 Vdc

DPDT

160

D7PF2AR1

24 Vac

DPDT

180

D7PF2AT

24 Vdc

DPDT

650

D7PF2AT1

48 Vac

DPDT

788

D7PF2AW

48 Vdc

DPDT

2600

D7PF2AW1

120 Vac

3PDT

2770

D7PF3AA

6 Vac

3PDT

6

D7PF3AP

6 Vdc

3PDT

25

D7PF3AP1

12 Vac

3PDT

25.3

D7PF3AR

24 Vac

3PDT

103

D7PF3AT

24 Vdc

3PDT

400

D7PF3AT1

48 Vac

3PDT

412

D7PF3AW

48 Vdc

3PDT

1600

D7PF3AW1

120 Vac

4PDT

2220

D7PF4AA

110/125 Vdc

4PDT

7340

D7PF4AA1

240 Vac

4PDT

9120

D7PF4AB

6 Vac

4PDT

5.4

D7PF4AP

6 Vdc

4PDT

24

D7PF4AP1

12 Vac

4PDT

21.2

D7PF4AR

12 Vdc

4PDT

96

D7PF4AR1

24 Vac

4PDT

84.5

D7PF4AT

24 Vdc

4PDT

388

D7PF4AT1

48 Vdc

4PDT

1550

D7PF4AW

48 Vac

4PDT

410

D7PF4AW1

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-87

Tab40book.fm Page 88 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

D7 Series Relay

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D7 Series, continued
Coil
Voltage

40

Contact
Configuration

Coil Resistance
(Ohms)

Catalogue
Number

Plain Cover with LED

40

120 Vac

SPDT

4430

D7PR11A

110/125 Vdc

SPDT

11,000

D7PR11A1

40

6 Vac

SPDT

9.6

D7PR11P

12 Vac

SPDT

46

D7PR11R

40

12 Vdc

SPDT

160

D7PR11R1

24 Vac

SPDT

180

D7PR11T

24 Vdc

SPDT

650

D7PR11T1

48 Vdc

SPDT

2600

D7PR11W1

120 Vac

3PDT

2770

D7PR31A

240 Vac

3PDT

12100

D7PR31B

24 Vac

3PDT

103

D7PR31T

24 Vdc

3PDT

400

D7PR31T1

48 Vdc

3PDT

1600

D7PR31W1

40

120 Vac

4PDT

2220

D7PR41A

12 Vdc

4PDT

100

D7PR41R1

40

24 Vdc

4PDT

388

D7PR41T1

40

120 Vac

SPDT

4430

D7PR1A

110/125 Vdc

SPDT

11000

D7PR1A1

40

220/240 Vac

SPDT

15720

D7PR1B

6 Vac

SPDT

9.6

D7PR1P

12 Vdc

SPDT

160

D7PR1R1

24 Vac

SPDT

180

D7PR1T

24 Vdc

SPDT

650

D7PR1T1

48 Vdc

SPDT

2600

D7PR1W1

120 Vac

DPDT

4430

D7PR2A

40

110/125 Vdc

DPDT

11000

D7PR2A1

220/240 Vac

DPDT

15720

D7PR2B

40

6 Vac

DPDT

9.6

D7PR2P

6 Vdc

DPDT

40

D7PR2P1

40

12 Vac

DPDT

46

D7PR2R

12 Vdc

DPDT

160

D7PR2R1

40

24 Vac

DPDT

180

D7PR2T

24 Vdc

DPDT

650

D7PR2T1

120 Vac

3PDT

2770

D7PR3A

240 Vac

3PDT

12100

D7PR3B

6 Vac

3PDT

6

D7PR3P

12 Vac

3PDT

25.3

D7PR3R

12 Vdc

3PDT

100

D7PR3R1

40

24 Vac

3PDT

103

D7PR3T

24 Vdc

3PDT

400

D7PR3T1

40

48 Vdc

3PDT

1600

D7PR3W1

120 Vac

4PDT

2220

D7PR4A

40

110/125 Vdc

4PDT

7340

D7PR4A1

240 Vac

4PDT

9120

D7PR4B

40

6 Vac

4PDT

5.4

D7PR4P

24 Vac

4PDT

84.5

D7PR4T

24 Vdc

4PDT

388

D7PR4T1

48 Vdc

4PDT

1550

D7PR4W1

40
40
40
40

Plain Cover

40
40
40

40
40
40

40
40
40
T40-88

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 89 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Accessories

40

D7 Sockets and Accessories

40

Type

Module
Size

Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)

Nominal
Current

Mounting Style

Wire Size

Wire
Connection

Standard
Pack

Catalogue
Number

Socket

B

300

16

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

Screw clamping

—

D7PAA 

None

300

10

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

Screw clamping

1

D7PA9

A

300

16

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

Screw clamping

—

D7PAD 

A

300

16

DIN rail/panel

12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2

Screw clamping

—

D7PAB 

—

—

—

Flange

—

—

25

PFC-D2D72

—

—

—

Flange

—

—

25

PFC-D73

—

—

—

Flange

—

—

25

PFC-D74

Metal spring clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PQC-1342

Plastic ID clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

PQC-1349

Metal spring clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PQC-1784

Plastic ID clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

PMC-1784

Hold-down spring

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PYC-B2

Metal spring clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

PQC-1783

Plastic ID clip

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

PMC-1783

Protection diode

A

6 to 250 Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AD250

LED indicator

A

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-ALG24

A

120/240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-ALG240

A

120 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AMV120

A

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AMV24

A

240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-AMV240

Flange mount adapter

MOV suppressor

R/C suppressor

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

6 to 24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-RC24

110 to 240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-RC240

Protection diode

B

6 to 250 Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BD250

LED indicator

B

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BLG24

B

120/240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BLG240

Plastic DIN rail end stop

40
40

A
A

MOV suppressor

40

40

B

120 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BMV120

B

24 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BMV24

B

240 Vac/Vdc

—

—

—

—

20

MOD-BMV240

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

PFP-P

40
40
40
40

Note
 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-89

Tab40book.fm Page 90 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40

Technical Data and Specifications

40

D7PR Relay

40

Contact Characteristics

D7PR (SPDT)

D7PR (DPDT)

D7PR (3PDT)

D7PR (4PDT)

Contact rating

20A

15A

15A

15A

Terminal style

Plug-in

Plug-in

Plug-in

Plug-in

40

Contact materials

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Maximum switching voltage

300V

300V

300V

300V

40

Switching current at voltage—resistive

20A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

40

Description

20A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

—

10A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

—

—

20A at 28 Vdc

12A at 28 Vdc

12A at 28 Vdc

12A at 28 Vdc

1/2 hp at 120 Vac

1/2 hp at 120 Vac

1/2 hp at 120 Vac

1/2 hp at 120 Vac

1 hp at 250 Vac

1 hp at 250 Vac

3/4 hp at 250 Vac

3/4 hp at 250 Vac

Pilot duty

B300

B300

B300

B300

Minimum switching requirement

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

% of nominal (AC)

85 to 110%

85 to 110%

85 to 110%

85 to 110%

% of nominal (DC)

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

1.2 VA

1.2 VA

1.5 VA

1.5 VA

0.9W

0.9W

1.4W

1.5W

15% (AC)

15% (AC)

15% (AC)

15% (AC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

40
40
40
40

Switching current at voltage

Coil Characteristics

40
40

Operating range

40

Average consumption

40

Dropout voltage threshold

40

Performance

40

Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current

100,000 operations

100,000 operations

200,000 operations

200,000 operations

Mechanical life operations unpowered

10,000,000 operations

10,000,000 operations

10,000,000 operations

10,000,000 operations

40

Response time

20 ms

20 ms

20 ms

20 ms

Dielectric strength

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Between coil and contact Vac (rms)

2500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

Between poles Vac (rms)

1500V (rms)

1500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

Operation

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

Storage

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

Vibration resistance—operational

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

Shock resistance

10 g-n

10 g-n

10 g-n

10 g-n

Degree of protection

IP40

IP40

IP40

IP40

Environment
Ambient air temperature around the device

Features
Cover options

Plain cover

Plain cover

Plain cover

Plain cover

Features

Mechanical flag indicator
(optional LED)

Mechanical flag indicator
(optional LED)

Mechanical flag indicator
(optional LED)

Mechanical flag indicator
(optional LED)

Product certifications

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

40
40
40
40
40
T40-90

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 91 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D7PF Relay
Description

D7PF (SPDT)

D7PF (DPDT)

D7PF (3PDT)

D7PF (4PDT)

Contact rating

20A

15A

15A

15A

40
40

Contact Characteristics

Terminal style

Plug-in

Plug-in

Plug-in

Plug-in

Contact materials

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Silver alloy

Maximum switching voltage

300V

300V

300V

300V

20A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

40
40

Switching current at voltage—resistive

20A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

—

10A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

—

—

20A at 28 Vdc

12A at 28 VDC

12A at 28 Vdc

12A at 28 Vdc

1/2 hp at 120 Vac

1/2 hp at 120 Vac

3/4 hp at 250 Vac

1/2 hp at 120 Vac

1 hp at 250 Vac

1 hp at 250 Vac

1/2 hp at 120 Vac

3/4 hp at 250 Vac

Pilot duty

B300

B300

B300

B300

Minimum switching requirement

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W)

Switching current at voltage

40
40
40
40
40
40

Coil Characteristics
Operating range

40

% of nominal (AC)

85 to 110%

85 to 110%

85 to 110%

85 to 110%

% of nominal (DC)

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

80 to 110%

1.2 VA

1.2 VA

1.5 VA

1.5 VA

0.9W

0.9W

1.4W

1.5W

15% (AC)

15% (AC)

15% (AC)

15% (AC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

10% (DC)

40

100,000 operations

100,000 operations

200,000 operations

200,000 operations

40

Average consumption

Dropout voltage threshold

40
40

Performance
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current
Mechanical life operations unpowered

10,000,000 operations

10,000,000 operations

10,000,000 operations

10,000,000 operations

Response time

20 ms

20 ms

20 ms

20 ms

Between coil and contact Vac (rms)

2500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

Between poles Vac (rms)

1500V (rms)

1500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

2500V (rms)

40
40

Dielectric strength

40

Environment

40

Ambient air temperature around the device
Operation

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131ºF (–40˚ to 55˚C)

–40˚ to 131˚F (–40˚ to 55˚C)

Storage

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185ºF (–40˚ to 85˚C)

–40˚ to 185˚F (–40˚ to 85˚C)

40
40

Vibration resistance—operational

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

3 g-n at 10–55 Hz

Shock resistance

10 g-n

10 g-n

10 g-n

10 g-n

Degree of protection

IP40

IP40

IP40

IP40

Cover options

Full featured

Full featured

Full featured

Full featured

Features

Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator

Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator

Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator

Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator

Product certifications

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

40

Features

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-91

Tab40book.fm Page 92 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40

Wiring Diagrams

40

D7PR1/D7PF1

40
40
40

12

42

1

4

14

44

5

8

11

41

9

12

A1

A2

13

14

40
40
40
40

IEC

NEMA

D7PR2/D7PF2

40

12

42

1

4

40

14

44

5

8

40

11

41

9

12

40

A1

A2

13

14

40

40
40

IEC

NEMA

D7PR3/D7PF3

40

12

22

42

1

2

4

40

14

24

44

5

6

8

11

21

41

9

10

12

A2

13

40
40
40

A1

40

14

IEC

NEMA

40
40

D7PR4/D7PF4
12

22

32

42

1

2

3

4

14

24

34

44

5

6

7

8

11

21

31

41

9

A2

13

40
40
40
40

A1

11

10

14

40
IEC

40
T40-92

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

12

NEMA

Tab40book.fm Page 93 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D7PR1/D7PF1

40

0.27
(7.0)

0.83
(21.0)

0.29
(7.4)

0.83
(21.0)

0.29
(7.4)

0.02
(0.5)

40

1.10
(27.9)

0.19
(4.8)

1.54
(39.1)

40

0.02
(0.5)
1.10
(27.9)

40
40

0.19
(4.8)

1.40
(35.5)

40
0.16
(4.7)

0.38
(9.9)

40

0.23
(5.9)

40

0.30
(7.5)

40
40

0.08
(2.1)2X

40

0.55
(14.1)

40
D7PR2/D7PF2
0.27
(7.0)

0.83
(21.0)

0.29
(7.4)
0.02
(0.5)

0.19
(4.8)

40

0.02
(0.5)
1.10
(27.9)

1.54
(39.1)

40

0.83
(21.0)

0.29
(7.4)

40

1.10
(27.9)

40
40

0.19
(4.8)

1.40
(35.5)
0.38
(9.9)

40

0.16
(4.7)

40

0.23
(5.9)

40

0.30
(7.5)

40
0.08
(2.1)2X

40
0.55
(14.1)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-93

Tab40book.fm Page 94 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D7PR3/D7PF3

40
40

1.20
(30.8)

0.26
(6.6)

0.27
(7.0)

0.02
(0.5)

40

1.20
(30.8)

0.29
(7.4)

0.02
(0.5)

1.10
(27.9)

40
40

1.60
(40.0)

1.10
(27.9)

0.19
(4.8)

0.19
(4.8)

1.40
(35.5)

40

0.39
(9.9)

40

0.19
(4.7)
0.23
(5.9)
0.26
(6.7)

0.39
(9.9)

40
40
40

0.39
(9.9)2X

40

0.79
(20.0)

40
40

D7PR4/D7PF4
1.60
(40.6)

0.26
(6.6)

0.27
(7.0)

40

0.29
(7.4)

0.02
(0.5)

40

1.60
(40.6)
0.02
(0.5)

1.10
(27.9)

40
40

1.54
(39.1)

40

1.10
(27.9)

1.40
(35.5)

0.19
(4.8)

0.38
0.38 (9.9)
0.38 (9.9)
(9.9)

40
40

0.19
(4.8)

0.16
(4.7)
0.23
(5.9)

40
40
40

0.38
(9.9)2X

40

1.18
(29.9)

40
40
40
40
40
T40-94

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

0.26
(6.7)

Tab40book.fm Page 95 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D7PA3

40

D7PA4
1

1

10

40

13

4

7

5

5

8

6

10

9

7

11

9

40

2
2

6

3

11

Wiring Diagram (Top View)

40

3

40

12

8

4

2.74 (69.8)
2.58 (67.5) Max.

14

40

Wiring Diagram (Top View)

40

2.74 (69.8)
2.58 (67.5) Max.

40

1.09
(27.8)
Max.

0.65
(16.6)

1.09
(27.8)
Max.

0.65
(16.6)

1.44
(36.6)
1.27
(32.5)

1

5

2

10

8

11

9

40

Combination Slotted/Phillips
Head Screws 6-32 x 5/16"

7

3
6

40
40

Combination Slotted/Phillips
Head Screws 6-32 x 5/16"

4

40

40

1.59
(40.5)
Max.
1.83
(46.5)
1.63
(41.4)

5

1

6

2

13

9

40

10

1.98
(50.5)
Max.
7

3

8

4

11

14

40
40

12

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-95

Tab40book.fm Page 96 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D7PA9 Standard Mount

40

0.71
(18.0)

40

8

40

44

14

8

5

1

40

5

40

Control Relays and Timers

42

12

4

1

4

40
2.52
(64.0)

40
40

2.73
(69.0)

40

0.16
(4.0)
1.26
(32.0)
14

40
40
1.02
(26.0)

40

9

1.03
(26.0)
1.17
(29.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-96

8

5

12

9

13

A2

A1

41

11

N.C.
N.O.
COM

INPUT

INPUT

4

1

8

5

12

9

14

13

14

13

12

9

13

12

40

1

14

40
40

4

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

IEC

NEMA

N.C.
N.O.
COM

INPUT

INPUT

Tab40book.fm Page 97 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D7PAA

40

1.18
(30.0)

40

0.74
(19.0)

40
44

14

8

5

42

12

4

1
3.14
(80.0)

0.16
(4.0)

3.33
(84.0)

2.67
(68.0)

44

14

8

5

42

12

4

1

4

1

8

5

12

9

14

13

N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT

4

1

8

5

12

9

14

13

INPUT
A2

IEC:
NEMA:

INPUT
A1

14

13

41

11

12

0.24
(6.0)

40

N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT

MODULE
INPUT

MODULE
INPUT
1.57
(40.0)

40

A2

A1 INPUT

14

41

11

12

40
40
40
40
40
40

13 INPUT

40

9

40
IEC

NEMA

40

9

40
1.06
(26.0)

40

1.18
(30.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-97

Tab40book.fm Page 98 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D7PAB

40

1.18
(30.0)
0.74
(19.0)

40

1.10
(28.0)

40

44

24

14

40

8

6

5

42

22

12

4

2

1

40
40

3.14
(80.0)

0.16
(4.0)

40

44

24

14

8

6

5

42

22

12

4

2

1

4

2

1

8

6

5

12

10

9

14

40

2.67
(68.0)

3.33
(84.0)

40

13

N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT

4

2

1

8

6

5

12

10

9

14

13

MODULE
INPUT

MODULE
INPUT

IEC:
NEMA:

40

1.57
(40.0)

40

INPUT
A2

A1

14

13

40

41

21

11

40

12

10

9

40

A2

INPUT
0.24
(6.0)

1.45
(37.0)
1.57
(40.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-98

A1

14

INPUT

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

41

21
IEC

13
INPUT

11

12

10
NEMA

9

N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT

Tab40book.fm Page 99 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D7PAD
1.18
(30.0)
0.74
(19.0)

1.41
(36.0)

44

34

24

14

8

7

6

5

42

32

22

12

4

3

2

1

44

34

24

14

42

32

22

12

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

12

11

10

9

40
40
40

N.C.
N.O.

40

COM
INPUT

0.16
(4.0)

40

MODULE
INPUT

40

A1

40

11

40

A2
INPUT

3.33
(84.0)

2.67
(68.0)

21

31

41

IEC

40

3.14
(80.0)

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

40

IEC:

1.57
(40.0)

NEMA:

INPUT
A2

INPUT
A1

14

13

41

31

21

11

12

11

10

9

1.81
(46.0)

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

12

11

10

9

40

N.O.
COM

40

INPUT

40

MODULE
INPUT

0.24
(6.0)
1.96
(50.0)

40

N.C.

14

13

40

9

40

INPUT
12

11

10

40

NEMA

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-99

Tab40book.fm Page 100 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Contents

D8 Series Relay

Description

40

D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D8 Series

40

Product Description

Features

The D8 Series power relays
are perfect for loads up to
30A, with versions for flange
mounting and e-clip mounting
available.

●

40
40
40

●

●

40
●

40

●

40
40

●

40

Allows switching of 25A
and 30A loads
A high-capacity, highwithstand voltage relay
compatible with
momentary voltage drops
No contact chattering for
momentary voltage drops
up to 50% of rated voltage
UL Class B construction
standard
Wide-range AC-activated
coil that handles 100 to
120 Vac at either 50
or 60 Hz
Panel, DIN rail and flange
mounting

Standards and Certifications
File # E1491
File # LR701520

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-100

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Page
T40-46
T40-51
T40-61
T40-71
T40-75
T40-85
T40-101
T40-101
T40-102
T40-103
T40-106
T40-110

Tab40book.fm Page 101 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Catalogue Number Selection

40

D8 Series 

40

D8PR 6 TE A
Family Type
D8PR

40

Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc

Contact Configuration
6 = SPST-NO
7 = DPST-NO

40
40
40

Options
TE = E-bracket
TF = Flange mount

40
40
40

Product Selection

40

D8 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Relay
Type

Mounting
Bracket

Adapter Track/
Panel Mount

Front Connecting
Sockets Track/
Panel Mount

D8PR6TE

D8PA5

D8PA1

D8PA2

D8PR7TE

D8PA5

D8PA1

D8PA2

D8 Series Relay

40
40
40
40

D8 Series 
Type

Standard
Pack

40

Catalogue
Number

40

SPST E-Bracket
Coil voltage
24 Vac

1

D8PR6TET

1

D8PR6TET1

120 Vac

1

D8PR6TFA

24 Vdc

1

D8PR6TFT1

24 Vdc

40
40

SPST Flange Mount

40
40

DPST E-Bracket
Coil voltage
120 Vac

1

D8PR7TEA

40

120 Vac

1

D8PR7TFA

40

24 Vdc

1

D8PR7TFT1

40

DIN rail adapter

10

D8PA1

Screw terminal adapter

10

D8PA2

40

Bracket adapter

10

D8PA5

40

100

PFP-M

40

DPST Flange Mount

Sockets

Accessory
DIN rail end stop

40

Notes
 For deciphering catalogue numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
 Additional coil voltages available—consult Sales Office or Customer Support Centre.

40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-101

Tab40book.fm Page 102 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40

Technical Data and Specifications

40

Coil Resistance
Coil Voltage

Ohms

mA

40

24 Vac

303

71

110/120 Vac

5260

20.4

220/240 Vac

21,000

10.2

12 Vdc

75

158

24 Vdc

303

79

Description

D8PR6

D8PR7

40
40
40
40
40

D8 Relays
Rated load

220 Vac 30A

220 Vac 25A

Carry current

30A

25A

Max. operating voltage

250 Vac

250 Vac

40

Max. switching current

30A

25A

Contact material

AgCdO

AgCdO

40

Max. switching capacity

6600 VA

5500 VA

Min. permissible load

100 mA at 5 Vdc

100 mA at 5 Vdc

Mechanical life (min.)

5,000,000 operations

5,000,000 operations

Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.)

100,000 operations

100,000 operations

Maximum hp ratings

1-1/2 hp (120 Vac)
3 hp (240/265/277 Vac)

1-1/2 hp (120 Vac)
3 hp (240/265/277 Vac)

40

40
40
40
40
40
40

Coil Data
Coil Voltage

Must Operate

Must Release

Maximum Voltage

24 Vdc/Vac, 12 Vdc

75% maximum

15% minimum

110%

120 Vac

75V

18V

132V

240 Vac

150V

36V

264V

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-102

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 103 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D8PR6TF

40
40

2.70 (68.5) Max.
2.36 (60.0)
1.99 (50.5)
Max.
0.25 (6.4)
0.43
(11.0)

1.32 (33.5)
Max.
0.03
(0.8)

Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
or M4 Tapped Holes

0
1.85
(47.0)
Max.

0.12 (3.0)

40

0.08 (2.0)

40

1
4

40

6

Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Top View)

0.18
(4.5)

2.362 0.007
(60.0 0.2)

40

Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)

40
40

D8PR7TF

40
2.70 (68.5) Max.
2.36 (60.0)
1.99 (50.5)
Max.
0.25 (6.4)

0.43
(11.0)

1.32 (33.5)
Max.
0.03
(0.8)

0

0.18
(4.5)

40

0.08 (2.0)

1.85
(47.0)
Max.

0.12
(3.0)

40

Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
or M4 Tapped Holes

2

1
4

6

40

8

Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Top View)

40
2.362 0.007
(60.0 0.2)
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-103

Tab40book.fm Page 104 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D8PR6TE with D8PA5 Bracket Attached

40

2.07 (52.5) Max.

40

Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
or M4 Tapped Holes

1.99
(50.5) Max.

40
40

Control Relays and Timers

0.25 (6.4)
0.43
(11.0)

1.32 (33.5)
Max.
0.03
(0.8)

0.08 (2.0)

4

2.07 (52.5) Max.

40

1.99
(50.5) Max.
0.25 (6.4)
0.43
(11.0)

Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
or M4 Tapped Holes
1.32 (33.5)
Max
0.03
(0.8)

0.08 (2.0)
0
2.09
(53.0)
Max.

40

2

1
4 6

1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)

D8PA1

40

Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes

40

2.03
(51.5)
Max.

40

1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)

40

1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)

40

0.20
(5.0)

2.19 (55.5)
Max.

40

0.57
(14.5)
1.39 (35.2)
Max.

40
40
40

8

Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Top View)

40
40

1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)

D8PR7TE with D8PA5 Bracket Attached

40

40

6

Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Top View)

40

40

1

2.09
(53.0)
Max.

40
40

0

Note: Minimum spacing around relay = 0.20 inches (5 mm).

40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-104

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)

Tab40book.fm Page 105 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D8PA2

40

Two M3.5 Screws
for Coil

0.31 (8.0)

40

Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes

40

2.03
(51.5)
Max.

Four M4 Screws
for Contact

0.36 (9.2)
1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)

0.98
(25.0)
1.81 (46.0)
Max.

2.19 (55.5)
Max.

40
1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)

40

0.20
(5.0)

40

Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)

40
40
40
40

D8PA5

PFP-M DIN Rail End Stop
Two
0.18 (4.5)
Dia. Holes

1.57
(40.0)

M4 Spring Washer

0.94
0.70 (24.0)
(17.8)

Two M4 or 0.18 (4.5)
Dia. Holes

0.39
(10.0)

1.81
(46.0)

0.45
(11.5)

1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)

40

0.07 1.39
(1.8) (35.3)
0.19
(4.8)

1.97
(50.0)
0.39
(10.0)

0.17
(4.4)

0.27
0.94 (7.0)
(24.0)

0.39
(10.0)

0.05
(1.3)

40

1.47
(37.3)

40
40
40

Mounting
Holes
(Bottom View)
0.20
(5.0)

0.12
(3.0)

40

0.24
(6.2)
0.07
(1.8)

M4 x 8 Pan
Head Screw

1.02
(26.0)

40

1.18
(30.0)

0.20
(5.0)

0.78
(19.7)

40
40

1.20 (50.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-105

Tab40book.fm Page 106 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Contents

D9 Series Relay

Description

40

Page

D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D9 Series

40

Product Description

Features

The four-pole D9 Series is
ideal for three-phase motor
applications. Various contact
configurations are available.

●

40
40
40

●

●

40

●

40
40

Ideal for three-phase motor
control applications
No contact chattering for
momentary voltage drops
up to 50% of rated voltage
Push-to-Test button is a
standard feature to check
contact operation
Mounting bracket is
supplied with relay

Catalogue Number Selection

D9PR 8B A
Family Type
D9PR
Contact Configuration
8B = 4PST-NO
9B = 3PST-NO/SPST-NC
10B = DPST-NO/DPST-NC

Standards and Certifications
File # E1491

40

File # LR701520

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-106

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc

T40-46
T40-51
T40-61
T40-71
T40-75
T40-85
T40-100
T40-107
T40-107
T40-108
T40-110

Tab40book.fm Page 107 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Product Selection

40

D9 Series
Catalogue
Number
4PST-NO Power Relay

40

Catalogue
Number

40

DPST-NO/DPST-NC Power Relay

Coil voltage
24 Vac

D9PR8BT

Coil voltage
24 Vac

D9PR10BT

120 Vac

D9PR8BA

120 Vac

D9PR10BA

240 Vac

D9PR8BB

24 Vac

D9PR10BT1

24 Vdc

D9PR8BT1

40

D9PR9BA

40

40

3PST-NO/SPST-NC Power Relay
120 Vac

40

40
Technical Data and Specifications

40

Coil Resistance
Coil Voltage

Ohms

mA

Coil Voltage

Ohms

mA

24 Vac

—

75

12 Vdc

72

167

120 Vac

—

21.6

24 Vdc

288

83

240 Vac

—

10.8

110 Vdc

6050

18

40
40
40
40

D9PR Specifications
NO Contacts
Resistive Load (p.f. = 1)

NC Contacts
Resistive Load (p.f. = 1)

40

Rated load

220 Vac 25A
30 Vdc 25A

220 Vac 8A
30 Vdc 8A

40

Carry current

25A

8A

Max. operating voltage

250 Vac/125 Vdc

250 Vac/125 Vdc

40

Description

Max. switching current

25A

8A

Max. switching capacity

5500 VA
750W

1760 VA
240 W

Min. permissible load

100 mA at 24 Vdc

100 mA at 24 Vdc

Mechanical life (min.)

1,000,000 operations

1,000,000 operations

Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.)

100,000 operations

100,000 operations

Maximum hp ratings

1-1/2 hp (120 Vac)
3 hp (240/265/277 Vac)
Three-phase 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles
Three-phase 5 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles

1-1/2 hp (120 Vac)
3 hp (240/265/277 Vac)
Three-phase 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles
Three-phase 5 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-107

Tab40book.fm Page 108 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Coil Data
Coil Voltage

Must Operate

Must Release

24 Vdc/Vac, 12 Vdc, 110 Vdc

75% maximum

10% minimum

110%

120 Vac

75V

18V

132V

240 Vac

150V

36V

264V

40
40

Terminal Arrangements

40

14

13

14

13

14

13

40

24

23

24

23

24

23

40

34

33

34

33

34

33

40

44

43

42

41

42

41

A2

A1

A2

A1

A2

A1

40

D9PR8

40
40
40

D9PR9

D9PR10

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D9PR

40
40
40

Screw Terminal Brackets
Ten M3.5
1.36
(34.5)
Max.
0.30
(7.6)

40
40
40

2.17
(55.2)

Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia.

0.17
(4.3)

1.70
(43.2)

40

2.52
(64.0)
Max.
1.378 0.004
(35.0 0.1)

40

2.03
(51.5)
Max.

40

0.08
(2.0)

Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-108

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Maximum Voltage

Tab40book.fm Page 109 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

Mounting Bracket
1.37
(35.0)

40
Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia.

Mounting Holes

40

Two M4

40

0.95
(24.0)

40

1.378 0.004
(35.0 1.0)
1.18
(30.0)

40

0.35
(9.0)

1.10
(28.0)

1.14
(29.0)

40
0.28
(7.0)

40
40

1.73
(44.0)

0.17
(4.4)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-109

Tab40book.fm Page 110 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Contents

Accessories

Description

40

D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories
MOD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relay Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coil Bus Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flange Mount Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Accessories

40

Accessories Selection Guide

The MOD Module System

Eaton offers a variety of
simple-to-install relay
accessories that allow you to
customize the features of a
relay system to meet your
exact needs.

Eaton’s plug-in modules are a
simple way to add
functionality to your relay
without the hassle of messy
wiring and additional
mounting of external
electronics. They are available
in a variety of configurations
to meet the needs of almost
any application.

40
40
40
40
40
40

System Diagrams

Circuit Diagrams
Diode Circuit

The MOD Module System

LED Circuit

40
40
40
A2

40
40

A1

A2

A1

The diode module protects
external drive circuitry from
inductive voltages generated
when removing coil voltages.

The LED status lamp verifies
that power is being supplied
to the coil. Ideal for both AC
and DC applications. Polarity
sensitive for DC applications.

RC Circuit

Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV)
Circuit

40
40

+

+

40
40
40

A2

A1

Snubs back EMF of relay coil.

40
40
T40-110

A2

A1

The MOV circuit protects
by shunting potentially
damaging electrical spikes
away from the relay coil. Ideal
for AC and DC applications.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Page
T40-46
T40-51
T40-61
T40-71
T40-75
T40-85
T40-100
T40-106
T40-111
T40-112
T40-114
T40-114
T40-115

Tab40book.fm Page 111 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

40.4

MOD Modules
Eaton’s relay accessories
provide a complete solution
for add-on modules and
identification tags.

40
MOD Modules

MOD-AD250

40

Module
Size

Description

Nominal Voltage

Catalogue
Number

Mating
Sockets

A

Protection diode

6–250 Vdc

MOD-AD250

D3PA6, D3PAL8,
D3PA7, D3PAL11,
D5PAL, D7PAB,
D7PAD

40
40
40

MOD-RC_

R/C suppressor

6–24 Vac

MOD-RC24

110–240 Vac

MOD-RC240

40
40
40

MOD-ALG_

LED indicator

24 Vac

MOD-ALG24

120/240 Vac

MOD-ALG240

40
40
40

MOD-AMV_

MOV suppressor

24 Vac

MOD-AMV24

120 Vac

MOD-AMV120

240 Vac

MOD-AMV240

40
40
40
40

MOD-BD250

B

Protection diode

6–250 Vdc

MOD-BD250

D1PAA, D2PAL,
D2PAP, D2PA7,
D7PAA

40
40

MOD-BLG_

LED indicator

24 Vac

MOD-BLG24

120/240 Vac

MOD-BLG240

40
40
40

MOD-BMV_

MOV suppressor

24 Vac

MOD-BMV24

120 Vac

MOD-BMV120

240 Vac

MOD-BMV240

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-111

Tab40book.fm Page 112 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Relay Clips
Eaton offers a variety of relay
clips designed to improve the
performance and
functionality within an
electrical panel.
Metal Hold-Down Clips
Metal hold-down clips, or
spring clips, are ideal for use
where high heat or humid
conditions are a factor. These
clips hold their shape and
tension and are designed
to withstand harsh
environments. All clips
are made of corrosionresistant stainless steel.

Metal Hold-Down Clips
Catalogue
Number

Mating Sockets

Mating Relays

PMC-1781

PMC-1781

D1PAA

D1PR, D1PF

PQC-1782

PQC-1782

D2PAL, D2PAP, D2PA7

D2PR2, D2PF2, D2PR3, D2PF4

PQC-1342

PQC-1342

D2PA6, D7PAA, D7PA9

D2PR4, D2PF4

PQC-1332

PQC-1332

D3PA6, D3PA7

D3PR2, D3PF2, D3PR3, D3PF3

PQC-1351

PQC-1351

D3PAL8, D3PA2, D3PAL11, D3PA3,
D5PAL, D5PA2, D5PA3L, D5PA3S

D3PR2, D3PF2, D3PR3, D3PF4, D5PR, D5PF

PQC-1783

PQC-1783

D7PAB

D7PR1, D7PF1, D7PR2, D7PF3

PQC-1784

PQC-1784

D7PAD

D7PR4, D7PF4

PYC- _

PYC-A1

D2PA4

D2PR5

PYC-B2

D7PA3, D7PA4

D7PR1, D7PR2, D7PR4

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-112

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 113 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Plastic Ejector/
Hold-Down Clips
These clips are great for
applications where sockets
are located in dense or tight
areas. They allow for quick,
safe and firm securing of
relays in the sockets with the
added benefit that the relay
can be ejected with one
finger. Plastic clips also aid in
keeping operators’ fingers
away from live circuits. The
optional snap-in identification
tag allows for custom
marking of sockets when
used in multi-socket
applications.
Plastic ID Clips
Plastic ID clips allow for easy
circuit identification in multirelay applications. They are
designed for labeling and
are not ideal for securing
the relay in the socket.

40.4
40

PWC-D24

Plastic Ejector/Hold-Down Clips

40

Catalogue
Number

Mating Sockets

Mating Relays

PWC-D24

D2PAL, D2PAP, D2PA7

D2PF2, D2PF4

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Plastic ID Clips

PQC-1349

Catalogue
Number

Mating Sockets

Mating Relays

PQC-1349

D7PAA

D7PF1, D7PF2

40
40
40
40
40

PMC-1783

PMC-1783

D7PAB

D7PF1, D7PF2

40
40
40
PMC-1784

PMC-1784

D7PAD

40

D7PF4

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-113

Tab40book.fm Page 114 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.4
40
40
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Coil Bus Jumpers
Eaton’s coil bus jumpers
allow inputs to be bridged
to adjacent sockets without
additional wiring, making
multi-relay connections quick
and easy. The easy-to-install
design requires no tools and
can be complete in a matter
of seconds.
System Diagrams
Coil Bus Jumpers 

Coil Bus Jumpers
Catalogue
Number

Mating Sockets

D2PJ1

D2PJ1

D2PAL, D2PAP

D3PJ1

D3PJ1

D3PA6, D3PA7, D5PAL

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags
These convenient plastic
labels snap easily onto
the relay socket for clear
identification in multi-relay
panels. The hinged design
makes wiring simple and
allows for angular adjustment
of the tag to improve
readability in the panel.
Marking with a standard
permanent marker creates
a smudge-free surface.

Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags
Catalogue
Number

Mating Sockets

PWF-D2P

PWF-D2P

D2PAL, D2PAP

PWF-D3D5

PWF-D3D5

D3PAL8, D3PAL11, D5PAL

40
40
40
Note
 Jumpers in photo are colored green to improve visibility,
actual jumpers are black.

40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-114

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 115 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Flange Mount Adapters
Eaton’s relay flange mount
adapters create a modular
approach to flexible
mounting options. Each lowcost adapter allows for panel
mounting of a standard
control relay and can
eliminate the need for
a socket.

PFC-D11

Unit with Flange Mount
Adapter

PFC-D2D72

40.4

Flange Mount Adapters

40

Catalogue
Number

Mating Relay

40

PFC-D11

D1PF1, D1PR1

40
40
40

PFC-D2D72

40

D2P, D7PF2, D7PR2

40
40
40
PFC-D73

PFC-D73

D7PF3, D7PR3

40
40
40
PFC-D74

PFC-D74

D7PF4, D7PR4

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-115

Tab40book.fm Page 116 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.5
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Relays—Type AA

Contents

9575H Series 3000 Relay

Description

40

9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC

40

Product Description

Application Description

Standards and Certifications

Type AA panel-mounted
relays are rated (each pole)
40A up to 300 Vac, 50/60 Hz;
5A at 480/600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
and 40A at 28 Vdc.

9575H Series 3000 relays are
ideal for applications when
controlling smaller loads,
such as single-phase motors.

●

40
40

●
●

UL listed, E1491
CSA 41729
CE: EN60947-4-1,
EN60947-5-1

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-116

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Page
T40-117
T40-117
T40-118
T40-119

Tab40book.fm Page 117 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.5

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Relays—Type AA

Product Selection

40

When Ordering, Specify
Catalogue number and
magnet coil code letter.
Example: for DPDT relay with
auxiliary switch and a 120V

9575H Series 3000
Relay

40

Coil Voltage Selection

50/60 Hz coil, order
Catalogue Number
9575H3A010.

Coil Voltage

Hz

Suffix Code

40

120

50/60

A

40

240

50/60

B

480/440

60/50

C

600/550

60/50

D

208

50/60

E

277

50/60

H

6

50/60

J

12

50/60

K

24

50/60

L

48

50/60

M

40

110

—

P

40

220

—

Q

6

—

R

12

—

S

24

—

T

48

—

W

Volts AC

Type AA Relays 
Relay Style

Catalogue
Number 

Relay (DPDT)

9575H3_000

Relay with auxiliary switch

9575H3_010

Relay with blowout magnets

9575H3_100

Relay with auxiliary switch and
blowout magnets

9575H3_110

40
40
40
40

Volts DC

40
40
40
40
40
40

Accessories
Enclosure 
Description

Catalogue
Number

NEMA 1 Enclosure

9575H2449

40
40
40

Notes
 There are no “repair parts” available for these relays.
 Underscore indicates missing code suffix for magnet coil—see Selection table above.
 Only 9575H3 relays without an auxiliary switch should be mounted in the 9575H2449
enclosure.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-117

Tab40book.fm Page 118 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.5
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Relays—Type AA

Technical Data and Specifications
Relay Specifications
Coil
●
Pull-in voltage: 80%
DC coils, 85% AC coils
of nominal voltage
or less at 25ºC
●
Dropout voltage: 10%
of nominal voltage
or more at 25ºC
●
Coil resistance: ±10%
measured at 25ºC
●
Max. DC coil dissipation
capability: 4 watts DC
continuous at 25ºC

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Contacts
●
Contact combination:
DPDT
●
Contact rating each pole
(main contacts): Each pole
rated 40 amps up to 300
Vac, 50/60 Hz, 5 amps at
480/600 Vac 50/60 Hz,
0.75 PF load. 1-1/2 hp
motor load (each pole) at
120–600 Vac, 50/60 Hz.
2 hp motor load at
200–600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
only when using both
poles to switch both sides
of load, 40 amps at 28 Vdc
resistive load each pole.
NEMA A 600 pilot duty
50/60 Hz
●
Additional contact ratings
for relays with blowout
magnets: 10A at 110 Vdc
resistive, 4A at 225 Vdc
resistive, 2A at 325 Vdc
resistive. For inductive
loads, contacts must be
derated accordingly.
●
Contact material: Silver
cadmium oxide, gold
flashed. 5/16 in
(7.9 mm) diameter
standard

Dielectric Withstanding Voltage
●
Between open contacts:
1500 Vrms
●
All other mutually insulated
conductive elements:
2200 Vrms
Miscellaneous
●
Coil terminals: 6–32
screws
●
Contact terminals: 8-–32
screws
●
Main base material:
Molded phenolic, UL
recognized (QMFZ2)
●
Weight (DPDT Relay):
11 oz (311 grams)
approximately
●
Weight (DPDT Relay with
auxiliary switch) 14.5 oz
(411 grams) approximately

Auxiliary Switch Specifications
●
Contact combination:
SPDT
●
Contact rating: Auxiliary
switch rated 10 amps at
125 or 250 Vac, resistive
load; 1/4 hp at 125 or 250
Vac, motor load; 0.4 amps
at 125 Vdc or 0.20 amps at
250 Vdc, resistive load; 3
amps at 125 Vac lamp load.
All AC ratings are 50/60 Hz
●
Dielectric withstanding
voltage: 500 Vac rms
between open contacts,
1500 Vac rms between all
other mutually insulated
conductive elements
●
Terminals: 4–40 round
head screws for auxiliary
contacts standard

Average Operating Times (Milliseconds)

40

Operation

DPDT Relay

DPDT Relay with Auxiliary Switch

Pickup

40

50

40

Dropout

35

35

40

Temperature Ranges

40
40

Temperature

AC

DC

Operating range

–30º to 55ºC

–30º to 55ºC

Non-operating range

–30º to 100ºC

–30º to 100˚C

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-118

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 119 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—Type AA

40.5

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
9575H3 DPDT Relay

40

9575H2449
3.31"
(84.2)

Mounting Holes 0.187 (4.75) Dia. (2 Places)

40

1.88"
(47.6)

8-32 Machine Screw on
Contact Terminals (6 Places)

0.218"
(5.5)
Dia.

0.56"
(4.3)

40
0.230" (5.8)
Square Hole

40

2.25
(58.7)
Max.

40
3.55"
(90.1)

1.87 (47.5)

0.38
(9.5)

2.50 (63.5)

1.62
(41.1)

40

0.159" (4) Dia.
10-32 Tap
Typ. 4 Places

40

4.50"
(114.3)

3.12 (79.2) Max.
6-32
Machine Screw
on Coil
Terminals
(2 Places)

40

5.63"
(142.9)

0.136" (3.4) Dia.
8-32 Tap
Typ. 2 Places

0.50"
(2.7)

40
40

2.00"
(50.8)

9575H3 DPDT Relay with Auxiliary SPDT Switch

0.218" (5.5) Dia.
Typ. 2 Places

Mounting Holes 0.187 (4.75) Dia. (2 Places)

3.00"
(76.2)

40

0.36" (9.1)
Typ. 2 Places

40
40

8-32 Machine Screw on
Contact Terminals (6 Places)

40
2.25
(58.7)
Max.

40

0.20"
(5.1)

40
1.87 (47.5)
2.50 (63.5)

0.38
(9.5)

40

1.62
(41.1)
3.12 (79.2) Max.

40

6-32
Machine Screw
on Coil
Terminals
(2 Places)

40
40

NC
10A 1/4 hp 125 OR 250 Vac
0.4A at 125 Vdc, 0.2A at 250 Vdc
3A 125 Vac “LAMP”
278 VA 125/250 Vac P.D.
NO
COM

40
40

Mounting Holes (2)
AUX. SWITCH
MARKING SURFACE

40

Insulators
(2 Sides)

40
40

4.44 (112.7) Max.

Screw Terminals
(4-40) RHMS
with External
Tooth Lockwashers
(3 Places)

40
40

RELAY TOP VIEW

40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-119

Tab40book.fm Page 120 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6
40

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Contents

Solid-State Relays

Description

40

Page

Solid-State Relays
D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Product Overview
Catalogue Number Selection
Solid-State Relays—D93, D96 and D99 Series

40

D93 3 25 A M D 2

40
40

Description
D93 = Hockey puck
D96 = Compact
D99 = DIN rail

40
40

Input Voltage
1 = 90–280 Vac
2 = 3–32 Vdc
3 = 3.5–32 Vdc
4 = 4–15 Vdc
5 = 20–50 Vdc

Output Voltage
1 = 2–60 Vdc
2 = 24–280 Vac
3 = 3–200 Vdc
4 = 48–480 Vac
6 = 48–600 Vac

40
40

Turn On Type
Z = Zero cross
R = Random
D = DC switch

40
Current
Output current in amps

40
40

Contact Configuration
A = SPST-NO
B = SPST-NC
C = DPST-NO
D = DPST-NC

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-120

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Output Type
C = SCR
T = Triac
M = MOSFET

T40-121
T40-128
T40-133

Tab40book.fm Page 121 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

40.6

Contents

D93 Series—Solid-State Relays

Description

Page

40
40

D93 Series

Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-122
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T40-122
T40-123
T40-127
T40-128
T40-133

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D93 Series
Product Description

Application Description

Features and Benefits

Eaton’s D93 series of solidstate relays is a line of heavyduty industrial relays in the
common “hockey puck”
package. The removable,
finger-safe cover and optional
accessories make the D93
safe and easy to install in a
variety of applications.

A solid-state relay (SSR) can
perform many applications
that an electromechanical
relay can perform. The SSR
differs in that it has no
moving mechanical parts
within it and has some
distinct advantages over an
electromechanical relay.

●

Models are available in a
variety of input voltages and
switch types up to 75A.

When used correctly in the
intended application, the SSR
provides a high degree of
reliability, a long service life,
significantly reduced
electromagnetic interference,
fast response and high
vibration resistance.

●

●

●

All solid-state circuitry with
no moving parts to wear
Compact, panel mounting
for flexible installation
Isolated input and output
terminals to protect the
system from electrical
noise
Internal snubber circuitry
to protect the SSR from
transients

Standards and Certifications
●
●
●
●

UL/cUL listed—UL 508
CSA certified
CE marked
RoHS compliant

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Applications for the SSR
typically include equipment
that requires high cycling
rates, low acoustical or
electrical noise, or high
vibration resistance. Some
examples are medical
equipment, heating/cooling
equipment, lighting control
and pumps/compressors,
among others.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-121

Tab40book.fm Page 122 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Product Selection
D93210ACZ1

D93 Series
Input Voltage

Output Voltage

Contact
Configuration

Switching Type

Rated Current
Load (Amps)

Catalogue Number

90–280 Vac

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D93210ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D93210ACZ2

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Triac

10

D93210ATZ2

90–280 Vac

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

25

D93225ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

25

D93225ACZ2

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Triac

25

D93225ATZ2

40

90–280 Vac

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

40

D93240ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

40

D93240ACZ2

40

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Triac

40

D93240ATZ2

90–280 Vac

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

50

D93250ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

50

D93250ACZ2

40

90–280 Vac

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

75

D93275ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

75

D93275ACZ2

40

3–32 Vdc

3–200 Vdc

SPST-NO

MOSFET

12

D93312AMD2

3–32 Vdc

3–200 Vdc

SPST-NO

MOSFET

25

D93325AMD2

40

3–32 Vdc

3–200 Vdc

SPST-NO

MOSFET

40

D93340AMD2

40
40
40
40

40

40
40
40

Accessories
D93HS1

40
40
40

D93 Series—Heat Sink
Eaton’s D93HS1 heat sink is
specifically designed to be
used with D93 solid-state
relays. It is pre-drilled and
tapped, and matches the heat
dissipation requirements for
relays up to 50A.

D93TP1

Heat Sink Accessory

40
40

Description

Catalogue
Number

Heat sink

D93HS1

Note: Always ensure that all
details of the application are
considered when determining
heat dissipation requirements,
including ambient temperature.
The D93 relays must be firmly
mounted to the heat sink using a
suitable thermally conductive
grease or thermal transfer pad.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-122

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

D93 Series—Thermal
Transfer Pad
The D93TP1 is a selfadhesive transfer pad
designed for use with
Eaton’s D93 solid-state
relays. When used properly,
it will adequately conduct the
heat to a heat sink without
the use of grease.

Tab40book.fm Page 123 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

40.6

Technical Data and Specifications

40
40

D93 Series
Description

Units

D93210ACZ1

D93210ACZ2

D93210ATZ2

D93225ACZ1

D93225ACZ2

D93225ATZ2

40
40

Output Characteristics
Contact configuration

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

Switching device

SCR

SCR

Triac

SCR

SCR

Triac

10

10

10

25

25

25

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

200

250

700

500

500

250

Current rating

A

Switching type
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)

V/us

Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)

A

8

16

16

16

16

16

Motor load rating (rms)

A

4.5

8

8

8

8

8

Min. load current to maintain on

mA

50

120

250

120

120

120

Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)

A

83

250

1000

250

250

250

Max. rms overload current (1 second)

A

24

80

50

40

40

80

Max. off state leakage current (rms)

mA

8

10

10

8

10

10

Peak blocking voltage

Vpk

600

300

—

600

600

—

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Typical on state voltage drop (rms)

Vac

1.6

1.6

1.35

1.6

1.6

1.6

Max. on state voltage drop (rms)

Vac

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

72

300

1700

312

250

300

40

10 AC

10 AC

1 DC

1 DC

40

Max. I2t for fusing (A2)
Input Characteristics
Must release voltage

V

10 AC

1 DC

Typical input impedance

ohms

13k

Current regulator

16–25k

13k

Current regulator

1.5k

Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac

mA

20

2

12

20

16

2

NA

Yes

NA

NA

Yes

Yes

Reverse polarity protection

40
40

Performance Characteristics

40

Operating time (response time)
ON

ms

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

OFF

ms

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

Rated insulation voltage—input to input

Vac

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis

Vac

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

40
40
40

Environment
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature

40

Storage

˚C

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

Operating

˚C

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

40
40

Degree of protection

40

Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case)

˚C/W

3.5

3.5

1.45

1.02

1.02

1.45

Weight

g (oz)

100 (3.5)

100 (3.5)

100 (3.5)

100 (3.5)

100 (3.5)

100 (3.5)

LED—input

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Input terminals

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

Output terminals

M4

M4

M4

M4

M4

M4

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

Terminal torque (max.)

Nm

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-123

Tab40book.fm Page 124 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6
40
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

D93 Series, continued
Description

Units

D93240ACZ1

D93240ACZ2

D93240ATZ2

D93250ACZ1

D93250ACZ2

Output Characteristics
Contact configuration

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

Switching device

SCR

SCR

Triac

SCR

SCR

40

40

40

50

50

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

500

500

250

500

500

Current rating

A

Switching type
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)

V/us

Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)

A

30

30

20

39

39

40

Motor load rating (rms)

A

14

14

14

14

14

40

Min. load current to maintain on

mA

250

250

50

250

250

Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)

A

625

625

250

520

520

40

Max. rms overload current (1 second)

A

80

80

80

100

100

Max. off state leakage current (rms)

mA

10

10

10

10

8
600

40
40
40

Peak blocking voltage

Vpk

600

600

600

600

Typical on state voltage drop (rms)

Vac

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.1

1.8

Max. on state voltage drop (rms)

Vac

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.8

1.8

1250

1250

438

1250

1250

Max. I2t for fusing (A2)
Input Characteristics

40

Must release voltage

V

10 AC

1 DC

1 DC

10 AC

1 DC

Typical input impedance

ohms

13k

ACL

1.5k

13k

Current regulator

40

Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac

mA

20

16

2

20

16

N/A

Yes

Yes

NA

Yes

40

Performance Characteristics

Reverse polarity protection

40
40
40

Operating time (response time)
ON

ms

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

OFF

ms

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

Rated insulation voltage—input to input

Vac

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis

Vac

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

Environment

40
40
40
40
40

Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
Storage

˚C

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

Operating

˚C

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

Degree of protection
Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case)

˚C/W

0.9

0.9

0.95

0.63

0.63

Weight

g (oz)

100

100

100

135 (4.8)

135 (4.8)
Green

40

LED—input

Green

Green

Green

Green

Input terminals

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

40

Output terminals

M6

M6

M6

M6

M6

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

Terminal torque (max.)

Nm

40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-124

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 125 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

D93 Series, continued
Description

Units

D93275ACZ1

D93275ACZ2

D93312AMD2

D93325AMD2

D93340AMD2

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SCR

SCR

MOSFET

MOSFET

MOSFET

75

75

12

25

40

Zero cross

Zero cross

DC switching

DC switching

DC switching

40
40

Output Characteristics
Contact configuration
Switching device
Current rating

A

Switching type
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)

V/us

500

500

NA

NA

NA

Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)

A

39

39

NA

NA

NA

Motor load rating (rms)

A

25

25

NA

NA

NA

Min. load current to maintain on

mA

250

250

20

20

20

Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)

A

1150

1150

27

50

90

Max. rms overload current (1 second)

A

150

150

NA

NA

NA

Max. off state leakage current (rms)

mA

10

10

8

8

8

Peak blocking voltage

Vpk

600

600

—

—

—

Typical on state voltage drop (rms)

Vac

1.8

1.8

1.6

1.6

1.6

Max. on state voltage drop (rms)

Vac

1.8

1.8

2.83

2.83

2.83

5000

5000

NA

NA

NA

Max. I2t for fusing (A2)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Input Characteristics
Must release voltage

V

10 AC

1 DC

1 DC

1 DC

1 DC

Typical input impedance

ohms

13k

Current regulator

1k

1k

1k

Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac

mA

Reverse polarity protection

20

16

10

10

10

NA

Yes

No

No

No

40
40
40

Performance Characteristics
Operating time (response time)
ON

ms

8.3

8.3

300 µs

600 µs

600 µs

OFF

40

ms

8.3

8.3

1

2.6

2.6

Rated insulation voltage—input to input

Vac

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis

Vac

4000

4000

2500

2500

2500

40

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

UR, CSA, CE

40
40

40

Environment
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
Storage

˚C

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

Operating

˚C

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

–40 to 80

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

0.6

0.63

1.06

1.06

0.63

Degree of protection

40
40

Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case)

˚C/W

Weight

g (oz)

200

135 (4.8)

110 (3.9)

110 (3.9)

135 (4.8)

LED—input

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Input terminals

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M6

M6

M4

M4

M6

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

Output terminals
Terminal torque (max.)

Nm

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-125

Tab40book.fm Page 126 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6

Temperature Derating Curves
10 Amp Styles

40

40
40

90
6" x 6" x 1/8" aluminum plate

14
Load Current (amps rms)

40

40 and 50 Amp Styles

16

40
40

Solid-State Relays

12
Heat sink
with 1°C/W
thermal
resistance

10
8
6
4
Free air mounting

0.14°C/W (50A)

50
5" x 6" x 1/8"
aluminum plate

40
30
20

0

0
20°

40

70

10

2

40

Mounted on heat sink with
1°C/W thermal resistance

80
Load Current (amps rms)

40

Control Relays and Timers

40°

60°

80°

20°

100°

40°

60°

80°

100°

Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)

Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)

40
25 Amp Styles
40

40
40
40

35
Load Current (amps rms)

40

75
Mounted on heat sink with
1°C/W thermal resistance
(sink to ambient)

90

30
25
20
15
10

5" x 6" x 1/8"
aluminum
plate

1.5°C/W

60
5" x 6" x 1/8"
aluminum plate
45

100
0.14°C/W

40
105

30
20

110

10

5

0

40

20°

40°

60°

80°

100°

Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-126

95

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

0°

50° 60° 70° 80°
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)

10° 20° 30° 40°

Max. Allowable Temperature

40
40

75 Amp Styles

Load Current (amps rms)

40

Tab40book.fm Page 127 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

40.6

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D93 Series

40
2.28
(57.9)

40

Screw Terminals

0.66
(16.8)

40

0.18
(4.4)

0.6
(15.1)

40

1.74
(44.1)

40
40
1.87
(47.5)

1.4
(35.9)

40
40
40

2.28
(57.9)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-127

Tab40book.fm Page 128 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6
40

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Contents

D96 Series—Solid-State Relays

Description

40
40

Page

D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D96 Series

T40-121

Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T40-129
T40-130
T40-132
T40-133

Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D96 Series

40

Product Description

Application Description

Features and Benefits

Eaton’s D96 series of
solid-state relays is a
technologically advanced set
of electronic relays for tough
applications and harsh
environments. The compact
17.5 mm wide package
with an integrated heat sink
provides easy mounting
in tight spaces.

A solid-state relay (SSR) can
perform many applications
that an electromechanical
relay can perform. The SSR
differs in that it has no
moving mechanical parts
within it and has some
distinct advantages over an
electromechanical relay.

●

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

When used correctly in the
intended application, the SSR
provides a high degree of
reliability, a long service life,
significantly reduced
electromagnetic interference,
fast response and high
vibration resistance.

●

●

●

●

All solid-state circuitry has
no moving parts to wear
Integral heat sink
eliminates the need for
added accessories and
installation
Flexible mounting allows
DIN rail or panel mounting
without additional
hardware or tools
Isolated input and output
terminals protect the
system from electrical
noise
Internal snubber circuitry
protects the SSR from
transients

Applications for the SSR
typically include equipment
that requires high cycling
rates, low acoustical or
electrical noise, or high
vibration resistance. Some
examples are medical
equipment, heating/cooling
equipment, lighting control
and pumps/compressors,
among others.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-128

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Standards and Certifications
●
●
●
●

UL/cUL listed—UL 508
CSA certified
CE marked
RoHS compliant

Tab40book.fm Page 129 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

40.6

Product Selection
D96115ACZ3

40
D96 Series

40

Input Voltage

Output Voltage

Contact
Configuration

Switching Type

Rated Current
Load (Amps)

Catalogue Number

3.5–32 Vdc

3–50 Vdc

SPST-NO

DC switch

15

D96115ACZ3

3.5–32 Vdc

3–150 Vdc

SPST-NO

DC switch

8

D96208ACZ3

90–280 Vac

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Random

10

D96210ACR1

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Random

10

D96210ACR2

90–280 Vac

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D96210ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D96210ACZ2

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NC

Random

10

D96210BCR2

90–280 Vac

48–480 Vac

SPST-NO

Random

10

D96410ACR1

3–32 Vdc

48–480 Vac

SPST-NO

Random

10

D96410ACR2

90–280 Vac

48–480 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D96410ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

48–480 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D96410ACZ2

90–280 Vac

48–600 Vac

SPST-NO

Random

10

D96610ACR1

90–280 Vac

48–600 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D96610ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

48–600 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D96610ACZ2

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-129

Tab40book.fm Page 130 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Technical Data and Specifications
D96 Series

40

Description

40

Contact configuration

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NC

Switching device

SCR

SCR

SCR

SCR

MOSFET

MOSFET

SCR
10

40

Units

D96210ACZ1

D96210ACZ2

D96210ACR1

D96210ACR2

D96115ACZ3

D96208ACZ3

D96210BCR2

Output Characteristics

Current rating

A

10

10

10

10

15

8

Zero cross

Zero cross

Random turn on

Random turn on

DC switching

DC switching

Random turn on

35

35

35

35

NA

NA

35

40

Switching type
Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk)

V

40

Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)

V/us

500

500

500

500

NA

NA

500

Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)

A

8

8

8

8

NA

NA

8

Motor load rating (rms)

A

4.5

4.5

4.5

4.5

NA

NA

4.5

Min. load current to maintain on

mA

50

50

50

50

20

20

50

Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)

A

500

500

500

500

50

35

500

40
40
40
40
40
40

Max. rms overload current (1 second)

A

24

24

24

24

24

17

24

Max. off state leakage current (rms)

mA

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

Typical on state voltage drop (rms)

V

1.25 AC

1.25 AC

1.25 AC

1.25 AC

1.25 DC

1.25 DC

1.25 AC

Max. on state voltage drop (rms)

V

1.6 AC

1.6 AC

1.6 AC

1.6 AC

1.6 DC

1.6 DC

1.6 AC

1250

1250

1250

1250

NA

NA

1250

10 AC

1 DC

1 DC

1 DC

1 DC

ACL

Current regulator Current regulator ACL

Max. I2t for fusing (A2)
Input Characteristics
Must release voltage

V

10 AC

1 DC

40

Typical input impedance

ohms

16–25k

Current regulator 16–25k

Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac

mA

40

Reverse polarity protection

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

12

16

12

16

12

12

12

NA

Yes

NA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Performance Characteristics
Operating time (response time)
ON

ms

40

8.3

8.3

8.3

5

5

8.3

OFF

ms

80

8.3

8.3

8.3

5

5

8.3

Rated insulation voltage—input to input

Vac

2500

2500

4000

4000

2500

2500

4000

Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis

Vac

2500

2500

2500

2500

2500

2500

2500

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

Environment
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
Storage

˚C

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

Operating

˚C

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

Degree of protection
Miscellaneous Characteristics

40
40

Thermal resistance (junction to case)

˚C/W

0.66

0.66

0.66

0.66

0.66

0.66

0.66

Integral heat sink

˚C/W

4.0

4.0

4.0

4.0

4.0

4.0

4.0

Weight

g (oz)

127 (4.1)

127 (4.1)

127 (4.1)

127 (4.1)

127 (4.1)

127 (4.1)

127 (4.1)

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

40

LED—input
Terminal wire capacity

AWG (mm2) 14 (2.1)

14 (2.1)

14 (2.1)

14 (2.1)

14 (2.1)

14 (2.1)

14 (2.1)

40

Terminal torque (max.)

in-lb (Nm)

7.1 (0.8)

7.1 (0.8)

7.1 (0.8)

7.1 (0.8)

7.1 (0.8)

7.1 (0.8)

7.1 (0.8)

40
40
40
40
T40-130

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 131 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Temperature Derating Curves

40

15 Amp Style

35

24

40

30

18

40

15

40

12

40

Current (amps DC)

Load Current (amps rms)

8 Amp Style

25
20
15

9

10
8

6

5

3

1.5
0
0°

10°

20°

30°

40°

50°

60°

70°

85°
80° 90°

Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)

40
40
40

0
0°

10°

20°

30°

40°

50°

60°

70°

80°

90°

40

Ambient Temperature (°C)

40
40

Load Current (amps rms)

10 Amp Style
14

40

12

40

10

40

8

40

6

40

4

40

1.8 2

40

0
0°

10°

20°

30°

40°

50°

60°

70°

80°

90°

40

Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-131

Tab40book.fm Page 132 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6
40

Dimensions

40

D96 Series

40

0.69
(17.6)

40

0.20
(5.0)

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

0.20
(5.0)

0.07
(1.7)

40
40

0.56
(14.2)

40

3.54
(90.0)
1.78
(45.3)

40

1.40
(35.6)

3.64
(92.4)

2.63
(66.8)

40

1.39
(35.2)

40
40
40

0.27
(6.9)

40

0.63
(16.0)
1.36
(34.6)

0.13
(3.4)

2.56 Max.
(65.0)

40
0.24
(6.0)

40
40

0.62
(15.8)
0.55
(14.9)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-132

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

0.56
(14.3)

Tab40book.fm Page 133 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

40.6

Contents

D99 Series—Solid-State Relays

Description

Page

D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-121
D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-128
D99 Series
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-134
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-135
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T40-138

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

D99 Series
Product Description

Application Description

Features and Benefits

Eaton’s D99 series of solidstate relays is a line of
heavy-duty industrial relays
with an integrated heat sink.
The attached metal hardware
can be used for DIN rail or
panel mounting.

A solid-state relay (SSR) can
perform many applications
that an electromechanical
relay can perform. The SSR
differs in that it has no
moving mechanical parts
within it and has some
distinct advantages over an
electromechanical relay.

●

Models are available in a
variety of input voltages in
10A, 25A and 40A sizes.

When used correctly in the
intended application, the SSR
provides a high degree of
reliability, a long service life,
significantly reduced
electromagnetic interference,
fast response and high
vibration resistance.

●

●

●

●

All solid-state circuitry has
no moving parts to wear
Integral heat sink
eliminates the need for
added accessories and
installation
Flexible mounting allows
DIN rail or panel mounting
without additional
hardware or tools
Isolated input and output
terminals protect the
system from electrical
noise
Internal snubber circuitry
protects the SSR from
transients

Standards and Certifications
●
●
●
●

UL/cUL listed—UL 508
CSA certified
CE marked
RoHS compliant

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Applications for the SSR
typically include equipment
that requires high cycling
rates, low acoustical or
electrical noise, or high
vibration resistance. Some
examples are medical
equipment, heating/cooling
equipment, lighting control
and pumps/compressors,
among others.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-133

Tab40book.fm Page 134 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Product Selection
D99210ACZ1

D99 Series
Input Voltage

Output Voltage

Contact
Configuration

Switching Type

Rated Current
Load (Amps)

Catalogue Number

90–280 Vac

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D99210ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D99210ACZ2

90–280 Vac

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

25

D99225ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

25

D99225ACZ2

90–280 Vac

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

40

D99240ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

24–280 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

40

D99240ACZ2

40

90–280 Vac

48–600 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D99610ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

48–600 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

10

D99610ACZ2

40

90–280 Vac

48–600 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

25

D99625ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

48–600 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

25

D99625ACZ2

90–280 Vac

48–600 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

40

D99640ACZ1

3–32 Vdc

48–600 Vac

SPST-NO

Zero cross

40

D99640ACZ2

40
40
40
40

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-134

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 135 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

40.6

Technical Data and Specifications

40
40

D99 Series
Description

Units

D99210ACZ1

D99210ACZ2

D99225ACZ1

D99225ACZ2

D99240ACZ1

D99240ACZ2

40
40

Output Characteristics
Contact configuration

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

Switching device

SCR

SCR

SCR

SCR

SCR

SCR

10

10

25

25

40

40

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

35

35

35

35

35

35

Current rating

A

Switching type
Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk)

V

Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)

V/us

500

200

500

500

500

500

Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)

A

8

8

16

16

20

20

Motor load rating (rms)

A

4.5

4.5

8

8

14

14

Min. load current to maintain on

mA

50

50

120

120

250

250

40
40
40
40
40

Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)

A

83

83

800

800

800

800

Max. rms overload current (1 second)

A

24

24

40

40

100

100

Max. off state leakage current (rms)

mA

10

10

10

10

10

10

Typical on state voltage drop (rms)

Vac

1.25

1.25

1.35

1.35

1.6

1.6

Max. on state voltage drop (rms)

Vac

1.6

1.6

1.8

1.8

1.6

1.6

83

83

3700

3700

3700

83

40

10 AC

1 DC

10 AC

1 DC

40

Max. I2t for fusing (A2)

40
40

Input Characteristics
Must release voltage

V

10 AC

1 DC

Typical input impedance

ohms

16–25k

Current regulator

16–25k

Current regulator

13k

Current regulator

Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac

mA

12

12

12

12

16

16

NA

Yes

NA

Yes

NA

Yes

Reverse polarity protection

40
40

Performance Characteristics

40

Operating time (response time)
ON

ms

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

10

OFF

ms

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

8.3

10

Rated insulation voltage—input to input

Vac

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis

Vac

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

40
40
40

Environment
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature

40

Storage

˚C

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

Operating

˚C

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

40
40

Degree of protection

40

Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case)

˚C/W

1.5

1.5

1.5

0.43

1.5

0.43

Integral heat sink

˚C/W

2.2

2.2

2.2

2.2

2.2

2.2

Weight

g (oz)

320 (11.3)

320 (11.3)

320 (11.3)

326 (11.5)

320 (11.3)

332 (11.7)

LED—input

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Terminal wire capacity

AWG (mm2) 8 (10)

8 (10)

8 (10)

8 (10)

8 (10)

8 (10)

Terminal torque (max.)

in-lb (Nm)

12.5 (1.4)

12.5 (1.4)

12.5 (1.4)

12.5 (1.4)

12.5 (1.4)

12.5 (1.4)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-135

Tab40book.fm Page 136 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6
40
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

D99 Series, continued
Description

Units

D99610ACZ1

D99610ACZ2

D99625ACZ1

D99625ACZ2

D99640ACZ1

D99640ACZ2

Output Characteristics
Contact configuration

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

SPST-NO

Switching device

SCR

SCR

SCR

SCR

SCR

SCR

10

10

25

10

40

40

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

Zero cross

35

35

35

35

35

35

Current rating

A

Switching type
Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk)

V

Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)

V/us

200

200

700

700

500

500

40

Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)

A

8

8

16

16

20

20

40

Motor load rating (rms)

A

4.5

4.5

8

8

14

14

Min. load current to maintain on

mA

80

80

250

250

250

250

Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)

A

83

83

1000

1000

800

800

Max. rms overload current (1 second)

A

24

24

50

50

100

100
10

40
40
40
40

Max. off state leakage current (rms)

mA

10

10

10

10

10

Typical on state voltage drop (rms)

Vac

1.25

1.25

1.35

1.35

1.6

1.6

Max. on state voltage drop (rms)

Vac

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

83

83

1700

1700

3700

3700

1 DC

Max. I2t for fusing (A2)
Input Characteristics

40

Must release voltage

V

10 AC

1 DC

10 AC

1 DC

10 AC

Typical input impedance

ohms

16–25k

Current regulator

16–25k

Current regulator

13k

Current regulator

40

Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac

mA

12

16

12

16

16

16

NA

Yes

NA

Yes

NA

Yes

40

Performance Characteristics

Reverse polarity protection

40
40
40

Operating time (response time)
ON

ms

8.33

8.3

8.33

8.3

10

10

OFF

ms

8.33

8.3

8.33

8.3

10

10

Rated insulation voltage—input to input

Vac

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis

Vac

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

UL, CSA, CE

Environment

40
40
40
40

Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
Storage

˚C

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

–40 to 100

Operating

˚C

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

–30 to 80

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

Degree of protection
Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case)

˚C/W

1.8

1.8

0.43

0.43

0.43

0.43

Integral heat sink

˚C/W

2.2

2.2

2.2

2.2

2.2

2.2

40

Weight

g (oz)

40

40

320 (11.3)

321 (11.3)

326 (11.5)

326 (11.5)

332 (11.7)

332 (11.7)

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Terminal wire capacity

AWG (mm2) 8 (10)

9 (10)

8 (10)

8 (10)

8 (10)

8 (10)

Terminal torque (max.)

in-lb (Nm)

12.5 (1.4)

12.5 (1.4)

12.5 (1.4)

12.5 (1.4)

12.5 (1.4)

LED—input

12.5 (1.4)

40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-136

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 137 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Temperature Derating Curves

40

40 Amp Styles

12

40

40

10

30

40

25

40

20

40

Current in amps

Current in amps

10 Amp Styles

8
6
4

15

2

10

0

0
0°

10°

20°

30°

40°

50°

60°

70°

80°

90°

Ambient Temperature (°C)

40
40
0°

10°

20°

30°

40°

50°

60°

70°

80°

40

90°

Ambient Temperature (°C)

40
40
25 Amp Styles

Current in amps

40
25

40

20

40

15

40

10

40

5

40

0
0°

10°

20°

30°

40°

50°

60°

70°

80°

40

90°

Ambient Temperature (°C)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-137

Tab40book.fm Page 138 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.6
40

Dimensions

40

D99 Series

Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Output

–

40

2

Input

40

+

1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

3.20
(80.0)

40

1.20
(30.0)

40
1.20
(30.0)

40
40
40

0.05
(1.20)

4.20
(107.0)

40
40
40
40

3.10
(77.5)
0.20 (5.0)
Radius

40
40

0.20 (5.0)
Radius

0.50 (11.9)

40
40

3.70
(92.9)

40

4.00
(102.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-138

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 139 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Machine Tool Relays

40.7

Contents
Description
Machine Tool Relays
D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole . . . . . . . . . .
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page

40
40

T40-140

40

T40-145

40
T40-151
T40-156
T40-161

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Product Overview
Eaton’s machine tool relay
offering includes a variety of
NEMA type relays. Included
in this are open style relays
and relays with convertible
or side-mount contacts. Also
included in this family are a
variety of accessories to
match the application,
including suppressors, timing
contacts and enclosures. The
relay coils are available in a
variety of line and control
level voltages.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-139

Tab40book.fm Page 140 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7
40

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Contents

D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole

Description

40

Page

D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40

T40-141
T40-142
T40-143
T40-144
T40-145
T40-151
T40-156
T40-161

40
40
40

D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole

40

Product Description

Application Description

Features and Benefits

Contact poles on the D15
relay are of the fixed design
and are not convertible. The
basic four-pole relay will
accept a front-mounted
contact pole deck and/or sidemounted contact blocks (one
per side). In addition, a sidemounted solid-state timer or
a front-mounted pneumatic
timer can be added to the
relay. Only one frontmounted attachment can be
added to the basic relay.

Side-mounted contact
blocks can be used to
provide additional poles
in applications where a
pneumatic timer is installed
on the front of the relay.
They can also be used where
panel depth is restricted.

●

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

The maximum number of
contacts recommended per
relay is eight, six of which can
be NC. When a pneumatic
timer is used, the maximum
recommended number of
NC contacts is three.
Relays with DC coils are
supplied with a coil clearing
NC contact mounted on the
side of the relay.

40
40

●

●

●

●

600V, 10A continuous
thermal current
State indicator visually
shows relay ON or OFF
status
Relay base has mounting
holes on 35 x 60 mm
centers, permitting direct
replacement of
competitive relays
Relay also mounts on
35 mm DIN rail as standard
Magnet coil has three
terminals, permitting either
top or diagonal wiring—
easy to replace European
or U.S. relays without
changing wiring layout

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-140

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

●

●

●

Contact pole terminals
have captive, backed-out,
self-lifting pressure plates
with ± screws—reduced
wiring time
All terminals are shrouded
or “finger-proofed” to
reduce possibility of
electrical shock
Designed to meet or
exceed UL, NEMA, IEC,
CSA, VDE, BS and other
international standards

Standards and Certifications
●
●
●

UL
CSA certified
CE marked

Tab40book.fm Page 141 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40.7

Product Selection

40

When Ordering, Specify
Catalogue number and magnet coil code letter. Example: For a four-pole relay having
4NO contacts with a 120V 60 Hz coil, order Catalogue Number D15CR40AB.

40
40

Factory-Assembled Multipole Relays
Number of
Poles
D15CR40_B

4

Type of Contacts
NO
NC

Open Type
Catalogue Number 

40
40

4

0

D15CR40_B

3

1

D15CR31_B

2

2

D15CR22_B

1

3

D15CR13_B

0

4

D15CR04_B

40
40
40

D15CR60_B

D15CR80_B

6
(four-pole relay with two-pole
front-mounted deck)

8
(four-pole relay with four-pole
front-mounted deck)

0

D15CR60_B

5

1

D15CR51_B

4

2

D15CR42_B

3

3

D15CR33_B

2

4

D15CR24_B

1

5

D15CR15_B 

40
40

0

6

D15CR06_B 

8

0

D15CR80_B

7

1

D15CR71_B

6

2

D15CR62_B

5

3

D15CR53_B

4

4

D15CR44_B

3

5

D15CR35_B 

6



2

Additional Contact Poles
Description

40

6

D15CR26_B

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Magnet Coil Selection
Catalogue
Number

Front Contact Pole Deck

AC Coils
Volts and Hertz

Code
Suffix

DC Coils
Volts

Code
Suffix

120/60 or 110/50

A

12

R1

40
40

1NO-1NC

C320KGT3

240/60 or 220/50

B

24

T1

2NO

C320KGT4

480/60 or 440/50

C

48

W1

2NC

C320KGT5

600/60 or 550/50

D

120

A1

1NO (early closing)–1NC (late opening)

C320KGT7

208/60

E

4NO

C320KGT13

277/60

H

3NO-1NC

C320KGT14

208–240/60

J

2NO-2NC

C320KGT15

24/60

T

1NO-3NC

C320KGT16

4NC

C320KGT17

40

1NO-1NC

C320KGS3

40

2NO

C320KGS4

2NC

C320KGS5

1NO (early closing)–1NC (late opening)

C320KGS7

40
40
40
40

Side-Mounted Contact Blocks

40
40

Notes
 Underscore indicates missing code suffix for magnet coil—see Magnet Coil Selection table above.
 Not all suffix codes available: consult Customer Support Centre.

40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-141

Tab40book.fm Page 142 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Accessories
C320 Pneumatic
Timer Attachment

40
40

Pneumatic Timer Attachment

C32MP1

Metal Mounting Plate

Timing Range

Catalogue
Number

Description

Catalogue
Number

0.1 to 30 seconds

C320TP1

Metal mounting plate

C321MP1

10 to 180 seconds

C320TP2

Maximum Ampere Ratings

40
40
40
40
40
40

240

480

600

Make

30

15

7.5

6

Break

3

1.5

0.75

0.6

Application

Catalogue
Number

D15

C320LS1

Snap-on shields for both
contactors and starters
provide IEC Type IP20

40
40

Description

Catalogue
Number

25 to a package

C320DSTCVR

40
40
40

These adhesive stickers
come 25 to a package and
provide extra protection from
contaminants when applied
to the sides of Freedom D15.
Adhesive covers are easily
Solid-State Timer

applied to side opening
where auxiliaries are not
installed and provide extra
protection from metal filings
and other debris.

Solid-State ON DELAY Timer 
Timing Range

Catalogue
Number 

40

0.1 to 1.0 seconds

C320TDN1_

1 to 30 seconds

C320TDN30_

40

30 to 300 seconds

C320TDN300_

5 to 30 minutes

C320TDN3000_

40

40
40
40
40
40

This timer is designed to be
wired in series with the
load (typically a coil). When
the START button is pushed
(power applied to timer), the
ON delay timing function
starts. At the completion of
the set timing period, timer
and series wired load will
both be energized.

DIN Rail

C320TS2

Description

Catalogue
Number

1 meter length

XBANS3575P

Transient Suppressor Kits
Description

Coil Voltage
50/60 Hz 

Catalogue
Number

Transient

24/120V

C320TS1

208/240V

C320TS2

277/480V

C320TS3

Suppressor

These kits limit high voltage
transients produced in the
control circuit when power is
removed from the contactor
or starter coil. There are three
separate suppressors for use
on 24–120V, 208–240V or
27–480V coils respectively.
These devices mount directly
to the coil terminals.
Notes
 Side mounted on Freedom Series NEMA 00–2, D15, IECA-K and C25D, C25E and C25F frame.
 Add operating voltage suffix to catalogue number; A = 120V, B = 240V, E = 208V.
 Rated 0.5 ampere pilot duty—not to be used on larger contactors.
 Terminal connections are quick connects only. Two per side.
 Suppressor is compatible with coil voltages/ranges as shown, both 50 and 60 Hz.

40
40
T40-142

Mounting Channel (DIN Rail)

Designed for DIN rail
mounting of Freedom
Series relays.

Finger Protection. Prevents
accidental contact with line/
load terminals.

Adhesive Dust Cover

40

Fits all D15 multipole relays.

timed contacts—circuits in
each pole must be the same
polarity. Units are convertible
from OFF to ON delay or
vice-versa.

Finger Protection Shields

40
40

Volts AC
120

Attachment mounts on top of
any Freedom Series relay
(top-mounted auxiliary
contacts can not be installed
on device when timer is
used). Timer unit has DPST

40
40

Description

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 143 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

AC/DC Interface Module—
Controller Coil Voltage Ranges

C320DC

Controller Catalogue
Number Prefix

Controller
Size or Rating

Coil Range
Volts AC

AE16, AE17, AE56,
AE57, CE15, CE55

A–F

24–240

G–K

48–240

L–N

110–240

00–0

24–240

1–2

48–240

3

110–240

AN16, AN56,
CN15, CN55

CN35

10–30A

24–240

60A

48–240

100A

110–240

The Catalogue Number
C320DC Interface Module is
an optically isolated solid-state
switch that provides a means
of operating AC coils with a
24 Vdc control signal. It acts
as a space-saving interposing
relay that can switch a
specified 50/60 Hz AC source
to the contactor or starter coil.

40.7

provisions for DIN rail
mounting.

40

The module will operate coils
within the voltage ranges
shown in the table to the left.

40

Design Characteristics
●

●

The module may be directly
attached to the coil terminals
of any Freedom Series
contactor or starter—NEMA
Sizes 00–3, D15, IEC Sizes
A–N and lighting contactors
10–100A. It also has

●

DC input: 24V ±10% at
mA nominal
AC operating voltage:
24–240 Vac ±10%
50/60 Hz
AC current rating:
10A make (inrush),
1A break (sealed)

40
40
40
40
40

Typical Application—Solid-State Switch

40

Contactor Coil
24 Vdc
Input
Observe
Polarity on
Module

40

40

24–240 Vac
50/60 Hz

40
40
40

Technical Data and Specifications

40
Example of Terminal Marking with 2NO and 2NC Contacts

Contact Ratings—NEMA A600
Continuous Thermal Rating: 10A
AC Volts
Make

Break

120

60

6.0

240

30

3.0

480

15

1.5

600

12

1.2

1.1
0.55

Pickup
VA

12–600V

80

DC
Voltage
12

31

40

43

40
14

Magnet Coil Data
AC
Voltage

21

40

Continuous Thermal Rating: 5A
DC Volts
Make/Break Amperes

250

Status
(NO or NC)
13

Contact Ratings—NEMA P300

125

40

Location

Watts

Sealed
VA

Watts

49

7.5

2.4

Pickup
Amps

Watts

Sealed
VA

Watts

6.4

76.8

0.28

3.36

22

32

44

Relay terminals are identified
by a two-digit number in
accordance with International
Standards approved by
CENELEC (European
Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization).
The number is marked on
the relay and is used to
identify location and status
of the contacts.

40
The first digit indicates the
location of the contact on the
relay. The numbering begins
with 1 and continues without
a break from left to right.
The second digit indicates
the status of the contacts
(NO or NC). Terminal marking
1 and 2 mean NC and 3 and
4 mean NO.

40
40
40
40
40
40

24

3.2

76.8

0.14

3.36

48

1.6

76.8

0.07

3.36

120

0.64

76.8

0.028

3.36

40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-143

Tab40book.fm Page 144 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40

Dimensions

40

D15 Four-Pole Relay

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

0.54
(13.7)

0.54
(13.7)
1.8
(45.7)

40

C

40
40

2.36
(59.9)

Frt.
Mtd.
Acc.

Side
Mtd.
Blk.

2.96
(75.2)

40
40
40
40
40
40

1.36
(34.5)

Optional Additional
Contact Poles
or Accessories

Mtg. Holes for
M4 or #8 Screws

D15 Six- and Eight-Pole Relays
0.54
(13.7)

0.54
(13.7)
1.8
(45.7)

40

4.66
(118.4)

40
40

2.36
(59.9)

Frt.
Mtd.
Acc.

Side
Mtd.
Blk.

2.96
(75.2)

40
40
40

1.36
(34.5)
Mtg. Holes for
M4 or #8 Screws

Optional Additional
Contact Poles
or Accessories

40
40

Dimensions and Shipping Weights

40

Description

Dimension C

Shipping Weights
Lbs (kg)

40

Relay only

3.30 (83.8)

1.3 (0.6)

Relay with timer attachment

5.55 (141.0)

1.5 (0.7)

40

Relay with front contact pole deck

4.66 (118.4)

1.7 (0.8)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-144

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 145 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40.7

Contents

BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control

Description
D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial
Control
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page
T40-140

40
40
40

T40-146
T40-148
T40-149
T40-150

40
40

T40-151

40

T40-156

40

T40-161

40
40
40
40

BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control
Product Description
Type BF is AC operated, 300V
maximum, and the BFD is DC
operated, 250V. Fixed contact
relays are available in any
combination of NO and NC
from two to 12 poles. BF and
BFD relays have captive
clamp terminals fully
accessible from the front,
a molded coil with low
operating temperature and
silver alloy contacts suitable
for low voltage circuits.

Features and Benefits

40

Standards and Certifications
●

Wiring to Relay
●
In parallel with coil—one
timed and up to 12
instantaneous contacts, or
●
In series with coil—up
to 12 timed contacts in
one relay

●

UL recognized, UL File No.
E19223 (AC relays only)
CSA certified, File No.
LR39402-6, LR28548-10,
11 (AC and DC relays)

40
40
40
40

Permanent Magnet Latch
●
Field mountable on
Catalogue Number BF;
factory installed on BFD
●
Latch coil continuously
rated
●
Latch plunger adjustable
for optimum performance

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-145

Tab40book.fm Page 146 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7
40

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Product Selection

40

When Ordering, Specify
●
Catalogue number of basic relay
●
If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table and
substitute it for the last letter in the catalogue number. Example: BF80V for a 110/60 AC coil

40

Type BF

40

Complete Relay—Type BF and BFD, Two-, Three-, Four- and Six-Pole 

40

BFD 250 Vdc Basic
Relays
120 DC Coil
Catalogue
Number

40

Number
of Poles

NO (Form A)

NC (Form B)

BF 300 Vac Basic Relays
120/60, 110/50 AC Coil
Catalogue
Number

40

2

2

0

BF20F

BFD20S

1

1

BF11F

BFD11S

0

2

BF02F

BFD02S

3

0

BF30F

BFD30S

2

1

BF21F

BFD21S 

1

2

BF12F

BFD12S

0

3

BF03F

BFD03S

4

0

BF40F

BFD40S

3

1

BF31F

BFD31S

2

2

BF22F

BFD22S

1

3

BF13F

BFD13S

0

4

BF04F

BFD04S

Type of Contact

40
40

Type BFD

3

40
40

4

40
40
40

6

40
40
40
40

6

0

BF60F

BFD60S

5

1

BF51F

BFD51S

4

2

BF42F

BFD42S

3

3

BF33F

BFD33S

2

4

BF24F

BFD24S

0

6

BF06F

BFD06S

Coil Voltage

40

BF Coils
Volts AC

Hz

Suffix Code

BFD Coils
Volts DC

Suffix Code

40

12

60

H

6

C

24

60

I

12

D

48

60

J

24

L

110

60

V

38

N

110/120

50/60

F

48

M

40

208

60

K

72

E

220/240

50/60

G

95

B

40

440

60

C

120

S

130

U

240

T

40
40

40
40

Notes
 Relays listed above with equal number of NO and NC contact poles are specially priced—1NO and 1NC pole
are supplied at no additional charge.
 Consult Customer Support Centre for availability.

40
40
40
40
T40-146

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 147 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40.7

When Ordering, Specify
●
Catalogue number of basic relay
●
If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table and
substitute it for the last letter in the catalogue number. Example: BF80V for a 110/60 AC coil
Type BF

Complete Relay—Type BF and BFD, Eight-, 10- and 12-Pole

NO (Form A)

NC (Form B)

BF 300 Vac Basic Relays
120/60, 110/50 AC Coil
Catalogue
Number

Type of Contact
Number
of Poles
8

Type BFD

10

12

40
40
40



BFD 250 Vdc Basic
Relays
120 DC Coil
Catalogue
Number

40
40

8

0

BF80F

BFD80S

7

1

BF71F

BFD71S

6

2

BF62F

BFD62S

5

3

BF53F

BFD53S

4

4

BF44F

BFD44S

0

8

BF08F

BFD08S

10

0

BF100F

BFD100S

8

2

BF82F

BFD82S 

7

3

BF73F 

BFD73S

6

4

BF64F

BFD64S

5

5

BF55F

BFD55S 

4

6

BF46F

BFD46S

2

8

BF28F

BFD28S

12

0

BF120F

BFD120S

8

4

BF84F

BFD84S

7

5

BF75F

BFD75S

6

6

BF66F

BFD66S

5

7

BF57F

BFD57S

4

8

BF48F

BFD48S

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Coil Voltage
BF Coils
Volts AC

Suffix Code

BFD Coils
Volts DC

Hz

Suffix Code

12

60

H

6

C

24

60

I

12

D

48

60

J

24

L

110

60

V

38

N

110/120

50/60

F

48

M

208

60

K

72

E

220/240

50/60

G

95

B

440

60

C

120

S

130

U

240

T

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Notes
 Relays listed above with equal number of NO and NC contact poles are specially priced—1NO and 1NC pole
are supplied at no additional charge.
 Consult Customer Support Centre for availability.

40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-147

Tab40book.fm Page 148 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7
40

Permanent Magnet
Latch, Relay Mounted

40

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Permanent Magnet Latch
Coil
Volts

Coil Hz

Catalogue
Number

24

60

BFMLI 

48

60

BFMLJ 

110/120

50/60

BFMLF

220/240

50/60

BFMLG

AC Relays

40
40
40

DC Relays

40

24

—

BFMLL

48

—

BFMLM

40

120

—

BFMLS

240

—

BFMLT

40
40

Options

40
FASTON Push-On Terminals

40
Description

40

Insert letter F after relay type designation in listed catalogue
number. Example: BFF20F or BFDF20S

NEMA 1 Enclosure for Relay Types
Code
Letter

Catalogue
Number

Description

Code
Letter

Catalogue
Number

F

—

BF, AR—all poles

—

4977D40G04

BFD—4–8 poles

—

4977D40G04

ARD—4–8 poles

—

4977D40G04

40
40

Overlapping Contacts

40

Description

40
40

Code
Letter

NO contact closes before corresponding NC contact opens— A
supplied as NO/NC set(s). Insert letter A after relay
type designation in listed catalogue number. Example: BFA22F
or BFDAF22S

Catalogue
Number

Notes
 For panel mount, add Suffix F.
 Consult Customer Support Centre for availability.

—

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-148

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 149 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40.7

Technical Data and Specifications

40

General Specifications

40

BF Relay Electrical Ratings—NEMA A300
Maximum Current
Volts
Cont.
Make

Break

Maximum VA
Make

Break

120

10

60

6

7200

720

240

10

30

3

7200

720

Horsepower Ratings (UL Recognized)
AC Volts
Phase
115
230

DC Rating—NEMA P300
Maximum Current
Volts
Cont.
Make

40
40
40
Break

Max. Make
or Break (VA)

40
40

1

1/6

1/2

125

5.0

1.1

1.1

138

3

—

1

250

5.0

0.55

0.55

138

40

Resistive Rating
125 Vdc

3A

250 Vdc

1.5A

40
40

Coil Power Requirements
AC

72 VA open, 22 VA closed

DC

12 watts (nominal), 250V max.

40
40

Permanent Magnet Latch Specifications
Item

Specification

40

Unlatching power requirements

Open gap: 24 VA AC
Closed gap: 7 VA
Burden: 4 watts (AC)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-149

Tab40book.fm Page 150 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7
40

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Contact Arrangements—BF and BFD Relays
2 Poles

3 Poles

4 Poles

40
40
40

6 Poles

8 Poles

40
40
40

Rear

Rear

Front

Front

40

10 Poles

12 Poles

40
Rear

Rear

40

Center

Center

40

Front

Front

40

40
40

Note: NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

BF Relay with Permanent
Magnet Latch and SolidState Timer

BFD Relay with Solid-State
Timer

Enclosures—NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD
2.83
(71.9)

40

1.05
1.72
(26.7) (43.7)

40

0.19 (4.8)

1.72
(43.7)
KO KO KO

40

B

E

C

40

3.13
(79.5)

6.59
(167.4)

D

A

40

3.13
(79.5)

1.97
(50)

0.63
(16)

0.38 x 0.5
(9.7 x 12.7)
Conduit
(2 Top, 2 Bottom)

1.69 (42.9)
3.38 (85.9)

NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD Dimensions

BF and BFD Relay Dimensions

Catalogue
Number

A
NEMA 1

Number
of Poles

A
BF Only

B
BF w/Latch

C
BF w/Timer

D
BFD Only

E
BFD w/Timer

Poles

4

3.22 (81.8)

6.22 (158.0)

5.88 (149.4)

4.03 (102.4)

7.06 (179.3)

Relays without Attachments

8

4.19 (106.4)

7.19 (182.6)

6.88 (174.8)

4.97 (126.2)

8.00 (203.2)

All

BF, AR, ARD

5.34 (135.6)

12

4.81 (122.2)

7.81 (198.4)

7.50 (190.5)

5.63 (143.0)

8.66 (220.0)

4–8

BFD

5.34 (135.6)

40

10, 12

BFD

7.97 (202.4)

40

All

40
40

Relays with Attachments

40
40
T40-150

KO

KO KO KO

1.69
(42.9)

40

KO

0.25 (6.4) Dia.
Mtg. Holes (3)

4.5
(114.3)

40
40

5.66
(143.8)

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

BF, AR, ARD

7.97 (202.4)

A

Tab40book.fm Page 151 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40.7

Contents

AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control

Description

Page

D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40

T40-140

40

T40-145

40
40

T40-152
T40-153
T40-153
T40-154
T40-155
T40-156
T40-161

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control
Product Description

Features and Benefits

The AR/ARD relays are
electromechanical convertible
contact relays. AR relays are
AC devices and the ARD is
for DC applications.

Permanent Magnet Latch
By energizing the relay coil,
the latch attachment “sets”
(when the base relay’s
armature/crossbar assembly
has closed) holding the relay
ON, even after the relay coil
has been de-energized. The
clearing coil on the latch is
energized to release the
armature/crossbar assembly.

Application Description
Type AR and ARD relays are
designed for use on machine
tools, process lines,
conveyors and similar
automatic and semiautomatic equipment.

●

●
●

●

40

Operation

Field mountable to fourand six-pole
Latch plunger is adjustable
Latch coil continuously
rated
Unlatching power
requirements
●
Open gap: 24 VA
●
Closed gap: 7 VA
●
Burden: 4 watts AC, 6
watts DC

Surge Suppressor
●
Mounts in contact cavity of
AR relays
●
Limits high transient
voltages resulting from deenergizing relay coil or
other electromechanical
devices
●
Protects sensitive
instruments and solid-state
devices
●
120 Vac maximum, not
used on Vdc
●
For noise suppression, see
Catalogue Number SS-56
starter mounted surge
suppressor.

AR relays are available in
either four- or six-pole
configurations. AR relays are
easily converted to eight- or
10-poles simply by adding a
four-pole deck. In addition,
mechanical latch attachments
are available with four- and
six-pole relays.
Contacts are convertible from
NO to NC, to provide any
combination desired up to a
maximum of 10. For the ARD,
the number of poles cannot
exceed four NC in any pole
configuration. Wide spacing
of contacts simplifies
installation, contact testing and
maintenance. Contacts are
electrically and mechanically
isolated from each other.
Overlap contacts are also
available in one or two sets.
These contacts should be
mounted in the centre pole
positions. AC and DC contact
cartridges should not be used
in the same relay.

Standards and Certifications
●
●

UL File No. E19223
CSA File No. LR39402-6,
LR54517 and LR54520

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Reference Information
●
ART, ARTD: IL 14510,
IL 14485

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-151

40
40

Tab40book.fm Page 152 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7
40

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Product Selection

40

When Ordering, Specify
●
Catalogue number of basic relay with 120/60, 110/50 AC coil from AR/ARD Relays table.
●
If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table below
and substitute it for the last letter in the catalogue number. Example: AR64V for a 110/60 AC coil.

40

AR/ARD Relays

40

AR/ARD Relays

40

Blank
Cavities

AR 600 Vac Relays
120/60, 110/50 AC Coil
Catalogue
Number

ARD 600 Vdc Relays
120 DC Coil
Catalogue
Number

Contact
Number
of Poles

40

4

40
40

6

40
40

8

40

10 

40

NO

NC

0

0

4

AR4A

ARD4S

2

0

2

AR420A

ARD420S

4

0

0

AR440A

ARD440S

0

0

6

AR6A

ARD6S

4

0

2

AR640A

—

6

0

0

AR660A

ARD660S

6

0

2

AR860A

ARD860S 

8

0

0

AR880A

ARD880S

10

0

0

AR10100A

ARD10100S

Coil Voltage

40

AR Coils
Volts AC

Hz

Suffix Code

ARD Coils
Volts DC

Suffix Code

12

60

F

12

D

40

24

60

I

24

L

48

60

G

48

M

40

110

60

V

95

B

110/120

50/60

A

120

S

208

60

B

130

U

220/240

50/60

W

240

T

277

60

C

40

380/440

50/60

H

440/480

50/60

X

40

550

60

D

550/600

50/60

E

40

40
40

40

Contact Cartridges—600V

40
40

Terminal
Type

40

Standard Contact
Cartridge
Catalogue
Number 

Overlap Contact
Cartridge
Catalogue
Number 

AC Cartridges

40

With clamp terminals

ARC

AROC

With screw terminals

ARCR

AROCR

40

DC Cartridges
With clamp terminals

ARDC

ARDOC

With screw terminals

ARDCR

ARDOCR

40

Notes
 Will not accept top-mounted latch or timers.
 Contact Customer Support Centre for availability.
 Standard cartridges are sold in cartons of four cartridges. Catalogue number is for single cartridge.
 Overlap contact cartridges are sold in sets of two cartridges. Catalogue number is for sets of two.

40
40
40
T40-152

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 153 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

ARML Permanent
Magnet Latch for
AR/ARD Relays

Permanent Magnet Latch
Operating
Volts

40

Catalogue
Number

Coil Hz

40

For AC Control Circuits
24

60

ARMLI

48

60

ARMLG

120

60/50

ARMLA

240

60/50

ARMLW

40
40
40

For DC Control Circuits
24

—

ARMLL

48

—

ARMLM

120

—

ARMLS

240

—

ARMLT

40
40
40
40

Accessories

40

Four-Pole Top Deck Adder
●
Increases contact capacity from four/six-poles to eight/10-poles
●
Mounts on top of basic relay using three screws
●
Will not interfere with wiring, testing or convertible cartridges
●
Screw terminals for ring connectors available; to order, add
Suffix R to catalogue number listed below
Four-Pole Top
Deck Adder

Four-Pole Top Deck Adder
Contacts
No. of
Poles

NO

NC

Blank
Cavities

Catalogue
Number

40
40
40
ARSS Surge
Suppressor for
AR Relays

Surge Suppressor

With 600 Vac Cartridges
4

40

Surge Suppressor

2

0

2

ARA20

4

0

0

ARA40

Catalogue
Number

40

ARSS

40
40
40

With 600 Vdc Cartridges
4

2

0

2

ARDA20

4

0

0

ARDA40

40
40
40

Options
Convertible Contacts
Description
AR and ARD relays listed are supplied with NO contacts that
are easily converted to NC. If both NO and NC poles are
required, order by catalogue number. Example: four-pole relay
with 1NO and 3NC contacts, order AR413A.

Overlapping Contacts
Code
Letter

Catalogue
Number



—

Description

Code
Letter

NO contact closes before corresponding NC contact opens — S or
supplied as NO/NC sets of two cartridges. Insert letter S after S2 
relay type designation in listed catalogue number. Example:
AR402AS. Specify the number of sets required: S for one set
and S2 for two sets.

Catalogue
Number
—

Code
Letter

For ring-type connectors, add suffix R to the catalogue number. R
Example: AR420AR.

Catalogue
Number

40
40
40

Screw Terminals
Description

40

40

Note
 Consult Customer Support Centre for availability.

40

—

40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-153

Tab40book.fm Page 154 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40

Technical Data and Specifications

40

General

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Contact Ratings—600 Vac Cartridge NEMA A600
Maximum Current
Volts
Cont.
Make

Break

Maximum VA
Make

Break

120

10

60

6

7200

720

240

10

30

3

7200

720

480

10

15

1.5

7200

720

600

10

12

1.2

7200

720

Maximum VA
Make or
Break

DC Cartridges—NEMA P600
Maximum Current
Volts

Continuous

Make or
Break

125

5

1.10

138

250

5

0.55

138

600

5

0.20

138

Resistive Rating
125 Vdc

3A

250 Vdc

1.5A

Coil Power Requirements
AC

96 VA open, 14 VA closed

DC

14 watts open, 250V max.

Voltage

AR Relays

ARD Relays

Pickup voltage (max.)

85%

65%

Dropout voltage (min.)

60%

15%

Voltage (max.)

110%

110%

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-154

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 155 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40.7

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Four- and Six-Pole with Four-Pole Adder, Solid-State Timer and Mechanical Latch

40

4.09 (103.9)
2.88 (73.2)

40

3.44 (87.4)
2.75 (69.9)

2.88 (73.2)

Latch
S.S. Timer

40

Adder Deck

40
40

Base Relay

40

D
C
B

40

A

40
3.13
(79.5)

1.44 (36.6)
CL
of Mounting Slots
(2) for 0.164 Screws

End View, 4- and 6-Pole

CL
of Mounting Slots
(2) for 0.164 Screws
Side View, 4-Pole

2.05
(52.1)

40
CL
of Mounting Slots
(2) for 0.164 Screws

40

Side View, 6-Pole

40

Four- and Six-Pole with Four-Pole Adder, Solid-State Timer and Mechanical Latch
Relay
Catalogue
Number

A
Four-, Six-Pole Relays

B
Relay Adder

C
Relay with Timer

D
Relay with Latch

AR

3.56 (90.4)

4.94 (125.5)

6.00 (152.4)

6.39 (162.3)

ARD

4.63 (117.6)

6.00 (152.4)

7.06 (179.3)

7.45 (189.2)

40
40
40
40

Enclosures—NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD

40

2.83
(71.9)

5.66
(143.8)

1.05
1.72
(26.7) (43.7)
KO KO KO
6.59
(167.4)

40

0.63
(16)

0.38 x 0.5
(9.7 x 12.7)
Conduit
(2 Top, 2 Bottom)

40

KO

KO KO KO
1.69 (42.9)
3.38 (85.9)

40

KO

0.25 (6.4) Dia.
Mtg. Holes (3)

4.5
(114.3)

40

0.19 (4.8)

1.72
(43.7)

40
A

40
40

Enclosures—NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD
Poles

Catalogue
Number

40

Dimension A
NEMA 1

40

Relays without Attachments
All

BF, AR, ARD

5.34 (135.6)

4–8

BFD

5.34 (135.6)

10, 12

BFD

7.97 (202.4)

40
40

Relays with Attachments
All

BF, AR, ARD

7.97 (202.4)

40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-155

Tab40book.fm Page 156 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7
40

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts

Contents
Description

40

Page

D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole . . . . . . . . . . . .
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40

T40-140
T40-145
T40-151

T40-157
T40-159
T40-160
T40-161

40
40
40
40

D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts

40

Product Description

Features

Options

Standards and Certifications

Relays can be ordered as
complete devices in any pole
combination up to a
maximum of 12NO or 8NC
and 4NO poles, or can be
assembled from components
shown on Page T40-158.

Contact poles D26MPR and
D26MPF in 2- through 8-pole
relays are convertible NO to
NC or vice versa. Simply
reverse the terminal screws
and rotate the unit pole 180˚
(in either direction).

Adding a front deck, the total
number of poles can be
increased to 8, all convertible
NO to NC.

●

40
40
40
40
40

Relay base assembly
(D26MB) will accept from 1
to 4 rear poles (D26MPR,
D26MPS and/or D26MPL).

40

Adding a D26MF, 4-pole fixed
NO attachment, builds a 12pole relay with 8 convertible
poles and 4 fixed NO poles.
Relays with mechanical latch
are available in any
convertible pole combination
up to eight poles maximum.

40
Normally Closed
Contact

40
40
40

Normally Open
Contact

40

To obtain overlapping
contacts, use D26MPS (NO
early closing) and D26MPL
(NC late opening) rear poles,
in related circuits.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-156

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

●

UL listed—Class No.
NKCR2, File E1230(N)
CSA certified—File LR353

Tab40book.fm Page 157 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40.7

Product Selection

40

Complete AC Relays

40

When Ordering, Specify
●
Catalogue number and magnet coil suffix letter.
●
Example: For a 4-pole relay having 4NO contacts, order Catalogue Number D26MR40, with a 120V,
60 Hz coil, order D26MR40A.
●
For fast delivery and minimum inventory, it is recommended that component parts or complete
relays with NO poles be ordered.
4-Pole

40
40

Complete AC Relays—Open Type
Type of Contact

4-Pole with Latch

40

Relay with
Mechanical Latch
Catalogue
Number

Number
of Contacts

NO (Form A)

NC (Form B)

Relay Only
Catalogue
Number

2

2

0

D26MR20

D26MR202

1

1

D26MR11

D26MR112

0

2

D26MR02

D26MR022

3

0

D26MR30

D26MR302

2

1

D26MR21

D26MR212

1

2

D26MR12

D26MR122

0

3

D26MR03

D26MR032

4

0

D26MR40

D26MR402

3

1

D26MR31

D26MR312

2

2

D26MR22

D26MR222

1

3

D26MR13

D26MR132

0

4

D26MR04

D26MR042

6

0

D26MR60

D26MR602

5

1

D26MR51

D26MR512

4

2

D26MR42

D26MR422

3

3

D26MR33

D26MR332

2

4

D26MR24

D26MR242

1

5

D26MR15

D26MR152

0

6

D26MR06

D26MR062

8

0

D26MR80

D26MR802

7

1

D26MR71

D26MR712

6

2

D26MR62

D26MR622

5

3

D26MR53

D26MR532

4

4

D26MR44

D26MR442

3

5

D26MR35

D26MR352

2

6

D26MR26

D26MR262

1

7

D26MR17

D26MR172

0

8

D26MR08

D26MR082

3

4

4-Pole with Pneumatic
Timer Attachment
6

8



40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Magnet Coil Selection
Volts/Hertz

Suffix Code

Volts/Hertz

Suffix Code

120/60–110/50

A

32/60 

V

240/60–220/50

B

12/60 

R

208/60 

E

6/60

P


24/60

T

380/50

277/60

H

480/60 or 440/50
600/60 or 550/50

40
40

L

40

C


D

40

Notes
 10- and 12-Poles: The 6 and 8 contact relays (without mechanical latch only) listed above can be provided
with four additional NO non-convertible contacts. Add suffix number 4 to above listed catalogue number plus
magnet coil suffix. Example: For a 12 contact relay, order D26MR804A.
 Consult Customer Support Centre for availability.

40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-157

Tab40book.fm Page 158 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7
40

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Relay Component Parts Location

Relay Base
Assembly

D26MF
Front Attachment
Timer Attachments or
Mechanical Latch

40

Relay Base Assembly (without Poles)
Description

Catalogue
Number

Relay base assembly

D26MB 

40
D26MD10
Front Deck
D26MF
Front Attachment
Pneumatic Timer or
Mechanical Latch

40
40

D26MB
Relay Base
Assembly

Basic four-pole D26 relay
without contacts. Provision
for adding one to four poles

40
Rear Pole

40
40
40
40

40

Front Deck with …
1NO contact pole

D26MD10

Contact
Positions 

Timer
Operation

Catalogue
Number 

2NO contact poles

D26MD20

4NO contact poles

D26MD40

4

ON delay

D26MR005

4

OFF delay

D26MR006

The relays listed above will
accept up to four catalogue
number D26MPR contacts
(convertible—NO or NC) for
instantaneous operation.
Order contacts separately.

40
40

Rear Pole

For additional information
on timer attachment, see
Page T40-159.

40

Catalogue
Number

Rear pole—NO

D26MPR

Rear pole—NC

D26MPR02

40

Front pole—NO

D26MPF

Front pole—NC

D26MPF02

40

Gold plated
(for low power circuits)
Rear pole—NO

D26MPR03

40

Four-Pole Front
Attachment

Front pole—NO

Description

Catalogue
Number

Front attachment

D26MF

Can be added to any two- to
eight-pole Type M, D26 relay
to provide up to a 12-pole

Non-Convertible Contacts

40

Rear pole NO early closing 

D26MPS

Rear pole NC late opening 

D26MPL

relay. Four NO, nonconvertible contacts are
included in this assembly.

Notes
 Number of available instantaneous contact positions (order contacts
separately—Catalogue Number D26MPR).
 Consult Customer Support Centre for availability.
 To obtain overlapping contacts, these two special poles must be used in related circuits.
 Add magnet coil suffix letter, see Page T40-157. Example: D26MBA.

D26MPF03

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-158

Four-Pole Front Attachment
(4NO Fixed Circuit)

Separate Contacts

Convertible Contacts
Front Pole

Provides up to four additional
front pole type D26MPF
contacts. Convertible, NO
to NC.

For assembly of relays from
component parts and relay
accessories, see components
tables below.

Description

40

Catalogue
Number

Relay with Pneumatic Timer Attachment
Factory Installed (without Relay Contacts)

40
40

Front Deck (Convertible Contact Poles)
Description

40

40

as needed, D26MPR,
D26MPL and/or D26MPS
rear pole type.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 159 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Relay State Indicating Light

Relay State
Indicating Light

Description

Catalogue
Number

120 Vac, 50/60 Hz

D26MAP120

240 Vac, 50/60 Hz

D26MAP240

Light provided with leads and
bracket for mounting on twoto 12-pole relays. May be

Description

Catalogue
Number

Manual test accessory

D26MTA

Tool to manually hold relays
in the energized position for
circuitry testing on completed
Transient Suppressor

Description

Catalogue
Number

ON delay

D26MTE

OFF delay

D26MTD

40
40
40

used to monitor state
of magnet coil or relay
contact operation.

panel. (10 per box, order in
multiples of 10.)

40
40

Transient Suppressor
Description

Catalogue
Number

Magnet coil transient suppressor

D26MAS1

Latch coil transient suppressor

D26MAS2

May be mounted on any
120 Vac relay magnet coil
or latch coil or 120 Vdc latch
coil—connects directly across
coil terminals. All DC magnet
coils have a built-in varistor
for transient suppression.

range—0.1 to 180 seconds,
repeat accuracy ±10%.
Units are convertible from
OFF delay to ON delay or
vice versa.

Attachment mounts on any 0to four-pole D26 relay without
latch. Timer unit has DPDT
timed contacts (circuits in
each pole must be the same
polarity). Adjustable timing

Manual Test Accessory

Manual Test
Accessory

Pneumatic Timer Attachment

Pneumatic Timer
Attachment

40.7

40
40
40

Limits high voltage transients
produced in the circuit when
power is removed from the
coil.

40
40
40
40

Mounting Channel

Mounting Channel

Description

Catalogue
Number

10 in length for 4 relays

D26MC4

20 in length for 8 relays

D26MC8

30 in length for 12 relays

D26MC12

40 in length for 16 relays

D26MC16

Pre-spaced mounting for
adjacent relay installation.
Indexed for cutting to desired

40
40
40
40

length. Captive mounting
screws provided in channel
for easier installation.

40
40

Technical Data and Specifications

40

General

40

Contact Ratings (Amperes) A600
Make and
Emergency
Interrupting

AC Volts
Capacity

40
Break

Continuous
Thermal Rating

40
40

120

60

6

10

240

30

3

10

480

15

1.5

10

600

12

1.2

10

40
40

Coil Power
Relay

Operating Time
Watts
Inrush

Sealed

VA
Inrush

Sealed

Range in
Milliseconds

Two- to 12-pole

95.0

9

155

22

Pickup: 6–13

Latch coil

18.5

11

41

17

Dropout: 8–26

40
40
40

Note
 For DC contact ratings, see Page T40-163.

40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-159

Tab40book.fm Page 160 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40

Dimensions

40

AC and DC D26 Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D26MAS1

A

1 Slot
#10 Screw

0.44
(11.2)

40
40
40

3.50
(88.9)

3.13
(79.5)

2 Holes
#10 Screw

40
40
40

0.75
(19.1)

D26MAS2

0.44
(11.2)

2.38 (60.5)
Max.

40
40

AC Relay
D26

DC Relay
D26

Dimension A

Ship. Wt.
Lbs (kg)

40

1–4 poles

1–3 poles

4.00 (101.6)

2.5 (1.1)

1–4 poles with timer D26 or D87

1–3 poles with timer D26 or D87

6.00 (152.4)

3.3 (1.5)

1–4 poles with latch

1–2 poles with latch

6.13 (155.7)

3.5 (1.6)

40
40
40

1–4 poles with d26mf

1–3 poles with D26MF

5.81 (147.6)

2.8 (1.3)

5–8 poles

4–7 poles

5.25 (133.4)

2.8 (1.3)

5–8 poles with timer D87

4–7 poles with timer D87

7.25 (184.2)

3.5 (1.6)

5–8 poles with latch

3–6 poles with latch

7.31 (185.7)

3.8 (1.7)

9–12 poles

8–11 poles

7.00 (177.8)

3.0 (1.4)

40
Mounting Channel

40
40

A
0.69
(17.5)

B
2.50
(63.5)

2.38
(60.5)

40
40

40
40
40
40
40

0.38
(9.7)

Type
M
3.63
(92.2)

Relay
D26

40
40

1.06
(26.9)

1.25
(31.8)
Catalogue
Number

2.50
(63.5)

1.38
(35.1)
Dimension A

Dimension B

D26MC16

40 (1016)

37.5 (952.5)

D26MC12

30 (762)

27.5 (698.5)

D26MC8

20 (508)

17.5 (444.5)

D26MC4

10 (254)

7.5 (190.5)

Note: Channel mounts through keyholes with #10 screws
(two each end and one every fourth relay). Relays mount with screws
captive in channel. All screws must be tightened firmly.

40
40
40
T40-160

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 161 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40.7

Contents

D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts

Description

Page

D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40

T40-140

40

T40-145

40

T40-151

40

T40-156

40

T40-162
T40-163
T40-164

40
40
40
40
40
40

D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts
Product Description
Type M, DC multipole
relays are physically and
mechanically similar to
the (D26) Type M AC
relays described on Page
T40-157. They differ only in
the electrical ratings and
available pole combinations
due to the use of a normally
closed late opening, coil
clearing contact, factory
wired to the pickup winding
of the magnet coil. (Contact is
shown as L in figure to the
right.) Magnet coil has built-in
varistor for transient
suppression.
The mechanically latched
relay has one extra contact,
normally open early closing,
factory wired in series with
the winding of the
intermittent rated latch coil.
(Contact is shown as S in
figure to the right.)

40

Latch Operation
Component parts for
these relays are the same
as those listed for the (D26)
Type M AC relays on Page
T40-157, except for the
Indicating Light, which is not
applicable to a DC relay.
Contact poles D26MPR and
D26MPF in 2- to 7-pole relays
are convertible NO to NC or
vice versa. Simply reverse the
terminal screws and rotate
the unit pole 180˚ (in either
direction).

With the latch coil deenergized, energizing the
relay coil will pick up the relay
and mechanically latch it in
the pickup position. With the
relay coil de-energized,
energizing the latch coil will
allow the relay to drop out.
Convertible Contacts

Normally Closed
Contact

Normally Open
Contact

DC Type M Relay

40
DC Input

40

LS1
Pick-Up

40

L = NC Late Opening

40
DC Type M Relay
with Latch

40

Relay
DC Input
Coil
Pick-Up
LS1 L

40

Hold
(Not Used)
L = NC Late Opening

LS1 S

40
40

Latch
Coil

40

Release
S = NO Early Closing

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-161

Tab40book.fm Page 162 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Product Selection
Complete DC Relays
When Ordering, Specify
●
Catalogue number and magnet coil suffix letter.
●
Example: For a 4-pole relay having 4NO contacts, order Catalogue Number D26MRD40, with a
120 Vdc coil, order D26MRD40A1.
3-Pole

Complete DC Relays—Open Type

40

Type of Contact 

Relay with
Mechanical Latch
Catalogue
Number

Number
of Contacts

NO (Form A)

NC (Form B)

Relay Only
Catalogue
Number

2

2

0

D26MRD20

D26MRD202

1

1

D26MRD11

D26MRD112

0

2

D26MRD02

D26MRD022

3

0

D26MRD30

D26MRD302

40

2

1

D26MRD21

D26MRD212

1

2

D26MRD12

D26MRD122

40

0

3

D26MRD03

D26MRD032

4

0

D26MRD40

D26MRD402

3

1

D26MRD31

D26MRD312

2

2

D26MRD22

D26MRD222

1

3

D26MRD13

D26MRD132

0

4

D26MRD04

D26MRD042

6

0

D26MRD60

D26MRD602

5

1

D26MRD51

D26MRD512

4

2

D26MRD42

D26MRD422

3

3

D26MRD33

D26MRD332

2

4

D26MRD24

D26MRD242

1

5

D26MRD15

D26MRD152

0

6

D26MRD06

D26MRD062

7

0

D26MRD70

—

6

1

D26MRD61

—

40

5

2

D26MRD52

—

4

3

D26MRD43

—

40

3

4

D26MRD34

—

2

5

D26MRD25

—

1

6

D26MRD16

—

0

7

D26MRD07

—

40
40
40
3-Pole with Latch

3

4

40
40
40

6

40
40
40
7

40

40
40

Magnet Coil Selection

40
40
40

Volts/Hertz

Suffix Code

Volts/Hertz

Suffix Code

12

R1

120

A1

24

T1

240

B1

48

W1

Notes
 Relay has additional factory wired normally closed coil clearing contact (see diagram).
 10- and 11-Poles: The 6 and 7 contact relays (without mechanical latch only) listed above can be provided with four
additional NO non-convertible contacts. Add suffix number 4 to above listed catalogue number plus magnet coil suffix.
Example: For an 11 contact relay, order D26MRD704A1.

40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-162

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 163 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40.7

Relay with Pneumatic Timer Attachment
(without Relay Contacts)

3-Pole with Timer
Attachment

40

Contact
Positions 

Timer
Operation

Catalogue
Number

40

3

ON delay

D26MRD005

3

OFF delay

D26MRD006

40
40

The relays listed above will
accept up to three catalogue
number D26MPR contacts
(convertible—NO or NC) for
instantaneous operation.

Order contacts separately.
For additional information
on timer attachment, see
Page T40-159.

40
40
40

Technical Data and Specifications

40

General

40

Contact Ratings (Amperes) 
Inductive
DC Volts
Make/Break

Resistive
Make/Break

40
40

28

7.0

10.0

48

2.5

10.0

120

1.1

2.0

240

0.2

0.4

Coil Power

40
40
Operating Time

Relay

Watts
Inrush

Sealed

Average
Milliseconds

Two- to 11-pole

168

13.2

Pickup: 10

Latch coil

21.6 intermittent

21.6 intermittent

Dropout: 16

40
40
40

Notes
 Number of available instantaneous contact positions (order contacts
separately—Catalogue Number D26MPR).
 Contact ratings do not apply to contacts D26MPL and D26MPS.
For AC contact ratings, see Page T40-159.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-163

Tab40book.fm Page 164 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.7

Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

40

Dimensions

40

AC and DC D26 Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D26MAS1

A

1 Slot
#10 Screw

0.44
(11.2)

40
40
40

3.50
(88.9)

3.13
(79.5)

2 Holes
#10 Screw

40
40
40

0.75
(19.1)

D26MAS2

0.44
(11.2)

2.38 (60.5)
Max.

40
40

AC Relay
D26

DC Relay
D26

Dimension A

Ship. Wt.
Lbs (kg)

40

1–4 poles

1–3 poles

4.00 (101.6)

2.5 (1.1)

1–4 poles with timer D26 or D87

1–3 poles with timer D26 or D87

6.00 (152.4)

3.3 (1.5)

1–4 poles with latch

1–2 poles with latch

6.13 (155.7)

3.5 (1.6)

40
40
40
40
40
40

1–4 poles with D26MF

1–3 poles with D26MF

5.81 (147.6)

2.8 (1.3)

5–8 poles

4–7 poles

5.25 (133.4)

2.8 (1.3)

5–8 poles with timer D87

4–7 poles with timer D87

7.25 (184.2)

3.5 (1.6)

5–8 poles with latch

3–6 poles with latch

7.31 (185.7)

3.8 (1.7)

9–12 poles

8–11 poles

7.00 (177.8)

3.0 (1.4)

Mounting Channel
A
0.69
(17.5)

B
2.50
(63.5)

2.38
(60.5)

40
40

1.06
(26.9)

0.38
(9.7)

Type
M
3.63
(92.2)

Relay
D26

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

1.25
(31.8)
Catalogue
Number

2.50
(63.5)

1.38
(35.1)
Dimension A

Dimension B

D26MC16

40 (1016)

37.5 (952.5)

D26MC12

30 (762)

27.5 (698.5)

D26MC8

20 (508)

17.5 (444.5)

D26MC4

10 (254)

7.5 (190.5)

Note: Channel mounts through keyholes with #10 screws
(two each end and one every fourth relay). Relays mount with screws
captive in channel. All screws must be tightened firmly.

40
40
40
T40-164

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 165 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Contents

Timing Relays

Description

Page

Timing Relays
Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E5-248—Battery-Powered LCD
Time Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40

T40-170
T40-174
T40-177
T40-181
T40-183
T40-186

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Product Selection Guide
Function Code Cross-Reference Guide

40

Function

Description

Timer Series
Universal TR

1

Asymmetrical flasher, pause first

lp

—

R/P

—

—

RC DLY

2

Asymmetrical flasher, pulse first

li

—

Y

—

—

RC

3

ON delay and OFF delay with control contact

ER

—

—

—

—

—

4

ON delay and single shot leading edge voltage controlled

EWu

—

—

—

—

—

5

ON delay and single shot leading edge control contact

EWs

—

—

—

—

—

6

Single shot leading and single shot trailing edge with control contact

WsWa

—

—

—

—

—

TR

TMR5

TMR6

TMRP

E5-248 

7

Pulse sequence monitoring

Wt

—

—

—

—

—

8

ON delay, power triggered

E

A

N

—

A

—

9

Single shot leading edge voltage controlled

Wu

B

T

—

C

—

10

OFF delay/signal OFF delay

R

E

F

—

D

OFF DLY

11

Single shot leading edge with control input

Ws

F

C/G

—

H

SS

12

Single shot trailing edge with control input

Wa

—

—

—

—

—

13

ON delay control signal start, trailing edge OFF

Es

—

—

—

—

—

14

Flasher, pause first

Bp

C

L

—

B

—

15

Retriggerable single shot

—

—

W/D

—

E

SS

16

Flasher, ON first

—

D

—

—

F

—

17

ON delay control signal start, leading edge OFF

—

A

—

—

—

ON DLY

18

Flasher—control signal start, pause first

—

B

—

—

—

RC DLY

19

Flasher—control signal start, ON first

—

C

—

—

—

RC

20

Signal ON/OFF delay

—

D

—

—

—

—

21

ON/OFF delay

—

—

—

—

I

—

22

Single pulse generator

—

—

—

—

G

OS

23

Memory latch

—

—

—

—

J

—

24

True OFF delay

—

—

—

X

—

—

Notes
 Applies to TRN model only.
 Applies to TRF model only.
 The E5-248 is battery powered and has three programmable trigger functions.
This product may perform somewhat differently from the standard timing relays.
Refer to the operator instructions for details.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-165

Tab40book.fm Page 166 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8
40
40
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Product Overview
Timer Function Descriptions
Function #1—Universal TR, TMR5, E5-248
Asymmetrical Flasher, Pause First
Repeat Cycle, OFF/ON Delay

Function #4—Universal TR
ON Delay and Single Shot Leading Edge Voltage Controlled

After the interval t2 has
expired, the output relay
switches into OFF position.
The output relay is triggered
at the ratio of t1:t2 until the
supply voltage is interrupted.

When the supply voltage U
is applied, the set interval t1
begins. After the interval t1
has expired, the output relay
R switches into ON position
and the set interval t2 begins.

40

When the supply voltage U
is applied, the set interval t1
begins. After the interval t1
has expired, the output relay
R switches into ON position
and the set interval t2 begins.
After the interval t2 has
expired, the output relay
Input Power (U)

40

Input Power (U)
LED U/t*

LED U/t*

40

Output LED**

Output LED**

Output Relay (R)

switches into OFF position. If
the supply voltage is
interrupted before the interval
t1 + t2 has expired, the
interval already expired is
erased and is restarted
when the supply voltage is
next applied.

t1

t2

t1

t2

t1

Output Relay (R)

t1

t2

40
40
40
40
40
40

Function #2—Universal TR, TMR5, E5-248
Asymmetrical Flasher, Pulse First
Repeat Cycle, ON/OFF Delay
When the supply voltage U
is applied, the output relay R
switches into the ON position
and the set interval t1 begins.
After the interval t1 has
expired, the output relay R
switches into OFF position

Function #5—Universal TR
ON Delay and Single Shot Leading Edge Control Contact

and the set interval t2 begins.
After the interval t2 has
expired, the output relay
switches into ON position.
The output relay is triggered
at the ratio of t1:t2 until the
supply voltage is interrupted.

40
40
40

Input Power (U)

Input Power (U)
LED U/t*

LED U/t*

Output LED**

Trigger Signal (S)

Output Relay (R)

t1

t2

t1

t2

t1

40
40
40
40
40
40

Output LED**
Output Relay (R)

40
40

The supply voltage U must
be constantly applied to the
device. When the control
contact S is closed, the set
interval t1 begins. After the
interval t1 has expired, the
output relay R switches into
ON position. If the control
contact is opened, the set

t1

t2

Function #6—Universal TR
Single Shot Leading and Single Shot Trailing Edge
with Control Contact
Asymmetrical Signal ON/OFF Delay

Function #3—Universal TR
ON Delay and OFF Delay with Control Contact

interval t2 begins. After the
interval t2 has expired, the
output relay R switches into
OFF position. If the control
contact is opened before the
interval t1 has expired, the
interval already expired is
erased and is restarted with
the next cycle.

40

The supply voltage U must
be constantly applied to the
device. When the control
contact S is closed, the
output relay R switches to
the ON position and the set
interval t1 begins. After the
interval t1 has expired, the
output relay R switches into
OFF position. If the control
contact S is opened, the

output relay again switches
to the ON position and the
set interval t2 begins. After
the interval t2 has expired,
the output relay R switches
into OFF position. During
the interval, the control
contact is ignored. During
the interval, the control
contact can be operated
any number of times.

Input Power (U)

40

Input Power (U)
LED U/t*

LED U/t*

40

Trigger Signal (S)

Trigger Signal (S)

40

Output Relay (R)

Output LED**

Output LED**

T40-166

interval t2 begins. After the
interval t2 has expired, the
output relay R switches into
OFF position. During the
interval, the control contact is
ignored. A new cycle can only
be initiated when the cycle
has been completed.

The supply voltage U must
be constantly applied to the
device. When the control
contact S is closed, the set
interval t1 begins. After the
interval t1 has expired, the
output relay R switches into
ON position and the set

t1

t2

30% of rated supply voltage

>30% of rated supply voltage

>30% of rated supply voltage

>30% of rated supply voltage

Overvoltage category

III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1)

III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1)

III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1)

III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1)

Rated surge voltage

4 kV

4 kV

4 kV

4 kV

Contact configuration

SPDT (one changeover contact)

SPDT (one changeover contact)

DPDT (two changeover contacts)

DPDT (two changeover contacts)

Rated voltage

250 Vac

250 Vac

250 Vac

250 Vac

40
40
40
40

Output

40

Switching capacity

2000 VA (8A/250V)

2000 VA (8A/250V)

2000 VA (8A/250V)

2000 VA (8A/250V)

Fusing

8A fast acting

8A fast acting

8A fast acting

8A fast acting

Mechanical life

20 x 10^6 operations

20 x 10^6 operations

20 x 10^6 operations

20 x 10^6 operations

Electrical life

2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load,
resistive

2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load,
resistive

2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load,
resistive

2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load,
resistive

Switching frequency

Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load
(in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1)

Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load
(in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1)

Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load
(in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1)

Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load
(in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1)

Overvoltage category

III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1)

III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1)

III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1)

III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1)

Rated surge voltage

4 kV

4 kV

4 kV

4 kV

40

Loadable

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

40

Maximum cable length

10m

10m

10m

10m

Trigger level (sensitivity)

Automatic adaption to
supply voltage

Automatic adaption to
supply voltage

Automatic adaption to
supply voltage

Automatic adaption to
supply voltage

DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms

DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms

DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms

40
40

Control Signal

Minimum control pulse length DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms

40
40

40
40
40

Note
 Refer to Function Code Cross-Reference Guide on Page T40-165 for function details.

40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-171

Tab40book.fm Page 172 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Universal TR Timing Relays, continued
Description

TRL04

TRL07

TRL27

TRW27

Base accuracy

±1% of maximum scale value

±1% of maximum scale value

±1% of maximum scale value

±1% of maximum scale value

Adjustment accuracy

<5% of maximum scale value

<5% of maximum scale value

<5% of maximum scale value

<5% of maximum scale value

Repetition accuracy

<0.5% or ±5 ms

<0.5% or ±5 ms

<0.5% or ±5 ms

<0.5% or ±5 ms

Temperature influence

<0.01% /˚C

<0.01% /˚C

<0.01% /˚C

<0.01% /˚C

–25 to 55˚C

Accuracy

40

Physical
Ambient temperature

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

–25 to 55˚C

40

Storage temperature

–25 to 70˚C

–25 to 70˚C

–25 to 70˚C

–25 to 70˚C

Relative humidity

15% to 85% (in accordance
with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3)

15% to 85% (in accordance
with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3)

15% to 85% (in accordance
with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3)

15% to 85% (in accordance
with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3)

Pollution degree

2, if built in 3 (in accordance
with IEC 60664-1)

2, if built in 3 (in accordance
with IEC 60664-1)

2, if built in 3 (in accordance
with IEC 60664-1)

2, if built in 3 (in accordance
with IEC 60664-1)

Housing material

Self-extinguishing plastic housing,
IP40 rating

Self-extinguishing plastic housing,
IP40 rating

Self-extinguishing plastic housing,
IP40 rating

Self-extinguishing plastic housing,
IP40 rating

Mounting

Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according
to EN 60715, any position

Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according
to EN 60715, any position

Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according
to EN 60715, any position

Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according
to EN 60715, any position

Terminal rating

Shockproof terminal connection
according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required),
IP20 rating

Shockproof terminal connection
according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required),
IP20 rating

Shockproof terminal connection
according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required),
IP20 rating

Shockproof terminal connection
according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required),
IP20 rating

Tightening torque

Max. 1 Nm

Max. 1 Nm

Max. 1 Nm

Max. 1 Nm

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Terminal Capacity

40

Description

40

1 x 4 mm2 without multicore cable end

1 x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 with/without multicore cable end
2 x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 with/without multicore cable end

40
40
40
40
40

2 x 2.5 mm2 flexible without multicore cable end

Wiring Diagrams
Single-Pole, Double-Throw Units (SPDT)—
TRL04 and TRL07

Double-Pole, Double-Throw Units (DPDT)—
TRL27 and TRW27

(+)
U=
(–)

(+)
U=
(–)

40
15

40
A1

B1

A1

15

S (Used only for
control switch
triggered functions)

S (Used only for
control switch
triggered functions)

25

15
A1

B1

40
40

A1

15

25

R

R

18 26

28

26

28

R

40

A2

40

16

18

A2

A2
16

18

40
40
40
40
T40-172

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

16

A2
16

18

Tab40book.fm Page 173 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

40.8

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
17.5 mm (TRL04 and TRL07)

40

35 mm (TRL27 and TRW27)

40
40
3.43
1.77
(45.0) (87.0)

1.77 3.43
(45.0) (87.0)

40
40
40

0.20
(5.0)

1.73
(44.0)
2.36
(60.0)

0.69
(17.5)

0.20
(5.0)

1.73
(44.0)
2.36
(60.0)

40
1.38
(35.0)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-173

Tab40book.fm Page 174 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8
40

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Contents

TR Series

Description

40

Page

Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR Series
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E5-248—Battery-Powered LCD Time Control . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

TR Series

40

Product Description

Features

The upgraded TR Series
Timing Relays are designed
to meet most timing
requirements by offering
more flexibility in range of
input voltage, timing range
and functionality. Use a rotary
switch to choose from
20 selectable time ranges
from 0.1 second to 600
hours. We offer both a power
triggered and signal triggered
model—each with expanded
operation modes. There is a
green LED to indicate when
power is ON and an orange
LED when output is ON.

●

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

●

●

●

●
●

●

●

20 time ranges and 10
timing functions
Time delays from 0.1 sec
to 600 hrs
Space-saving, compact
package
High repeat accuracy of
± 0.2%
LED indication
Standard 8- or 11-pin and
11-blade termination
2 Form C DPDT delayed
output contacts
10A contact rating

Operation
TRNP and TRNB
Internal Connections
4

5

3

6

2

7
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

(–/–)

B

(–/+)

TRNP

(–/–)
TRNB

TRFP and TRFB
Internal Connections
External
Control Start
Signal
4
3

40

5 6 7

2

40

1 11

External
Control Start
Signal
1 2 3
8
9

10

(–/+)

40

(–/–)

40

●
●

40

cULus listed
CSA
CE marked
TUV
TUV

40
40
40
T40-174

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

8

6
9
B
(–/–)

TRFB

Standards and Certifications
●

5

7

(–/+)

40
●

4
A

TRFP

40

9

A

8

(–/+)

1

T40-170
T40-175
T40-175
T40-175
T40-176
T40-176
T40-177
T40-181
T40-183
T40-186

Tab40book.fm Page 175 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

40.8

Catalogue Number Selection

40
TR N P 240 AC
Family Type

40

Input Voltage
24AD = 24 Vac
(50/60 Hz)/24 Vdc
240AC = 100–240 Vac
(50/60 Hz)

TR
Operational Mode
N = Power Triggered
F = Signal Triggered
A = ON delay
A = ON delay, control signal start
B = Interval
(leading edge OFF)
C = Flasher (pause first)
B = Flasher, control signal start
D = Flasher (ON first)
(pause first)
C = Flasher, control signal Start
(ON first)
D = Signal ON/OFF delay
E = OFF delay
F = Single shot leading edge with
control input

40
40
40
40

Model Type
P = Pin/octal
B = Blade style

40
40
40
40

Product Selection

Accessories

TR Plug-In Timing Relays—Power Triggered

Sockets for Use with TR Timers—Standard Pack of 10

40

Blade
Catalogue
Number

Timing Relay

Terminal Style

Catalogue
Number

40

Coil Voltage

Octal
Catalogue
Number

TRNP

8-pin octal

D3PA2

24 Vac/Vdc

TRNP24AD

TRNB24AD

40

TRFP

11-pin octal

D3PA3

100–240 Vac

TRNP240AC

TRNB240AC

TRNB, TRFB

0.187 in solder/QC terminals
(blade style)

D5PA2

40
40

TR Plug-In Timing Relays—Signal Triggered

Coil Voltage

Octal
Catalogue
Number

Blade
Catalogue
Number

24 Vac/Vdc

TRFP24AD

TRFB24AD

100–240 Vac

TRFP240AC

TRFB240AC

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-175

Tab40book.fm Page 176 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

General

TR Series Dimensions and Weights

Description

Specification

40

Operation system

Solid-state CMOS circuit

Time range

0.1 sec to 600 hours

40

Pollution degree

2 (IE60664-1)

40
40
40

Overvoltage category

III (IE60664-1)

Rated operational voltage
240 AC
24 AC
12 DC

24 Vac (50/60 Hz)/24 Vdc

89g

12 Vdc

TRNB, TRFB

85g

20.4–26.4 Vac (50/60 Hz)/21.6–26.4 Vdc

40

10.8–13.2 Vdc

Input OFF voltage

Rated voltage x 10% minimum

Ambient operating temperature

–4 to 149˚F (–20 to 65˚C)

Reset time

100 ms maximum

Repeat error

± 0.2%, ± 20 ms 

Voltage error

± 0.2%, ± 20 ms 
± 0.5%, ± 20 ms

40

Setting error

± 10% maximum

Insulation resistance

100M ohm minimum (500 Vdc)

40

Dielectric strength
Between power and output terminals

2000 Vac, 1 minute

Between contacts of different poles

2000 Vac, 1 minute

Between contacts of same pole

40

Vibration resistance

40

Shock resistance

40
40
40

3.07 (77.9)
Pin (P) Type



Temperature error

40

87g

Voltage tolerance

12 DC

40

1.58H x 1.42W x 2.95D in. (40H x 36W x 74.9D mm)

TRFP

85–264 Vac (50/60 Hz)

40

1.58H x 1.42W x 3.07D in. (40H x 36W x 77.9D mm)

TRNB, TRFB

TRNP

24 AC

40

TRNP, TRFP

100–240 Vac (50/60 Hz)

240 AC

40

1000 Vac, 1 minute
10–55 Hz amplitude 0.5 mm;
2 hrs in each of 3 axes

Operating extremes

10G

Damage limits —
TRNP, TRFP

40G (3x in each of 3 axes)

TRNB, TRFB

10G (3x in each of 3 axes)

Power consumption (approx.)
240 AC

6.5 VA TRNP, TRNB/6.6 VA TRFP, TRFB

240 Vac/60 Hz

11.6 VA TRNP, TRNB/12.1 VA TRFP, TRFB

24 AC (AC/DC)

3.4 VA–1.7W TRNP, TRNB/3.5 VA–1.7W TRFP,
TRFB

12 DC

1.6W

TR Series Contact Ratings
Description

Specification

40

Contact configuration

2 Form C, DPDT (delayed output)

Allowable voltage/current

240 Vac, 30 Vdc/10A

40

Max. permissible operating frequency

1800 cycles per hour

40
40
40
40

Rated load
Resistive

10A, 240 Vac/30 Vdc

Inductive

7A, 240 Vac/30 Vdc

Horsepower rating

1/6 hp 120 Vac, 1/3 hp 240 Vac

Life
Electrical

500,000 operations minimum (resistive)

Mechanical

50,000,000 operations minimum

T40-176

2.95 (74.9)
Blade (B) Type

Note
 For the value of the error against a preset time, whichever value is larger should apply.

40
40

Specification

Dimensions

Weights

40
40

Description

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 177 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

40.8

Contents

TMR5 Series

Description

Page

Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR5 Series
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E5-248—Battery-Powered LCD Time Control . . . . . . .

T40-170
T40-174
T40-178
T40-178
T40-178
T40-179
T40-179
T40-180
T40-181
T40-183
T40-186

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

TMR5 Series
Product Description

Features

The TMR5 Series Time
Delay Relays are designed
for a broad range of
OEM applications. The
TMR5 Series offers
non-programmable plug-in
style timers with a variety
of functions available. Each
unit offers a single function
and single input voltage, and
operates over a defined time
delay range. Units with fixed
time delays are also available.
Eaton also offers customization
capabilities for these timers—
remote adjustments, special
pin configurations, and more.
Contact us to discuss your
specific application and
design of a custom timer.

●

●

●

●

●
●

40

Standards and Certifications

Single timing range for
each unit
Ranges available from
0.02 sec to 24 hours
Wide variety of functions
available
Plugs into standard 8- or
11-pin socket
10A DPDT output contacts
Can be easily customized
to meet your needs

●
●
●
●

cRUus
UL listed (with Eaton socket)
RoHS compliant
CE marked

40
40
40

with
Eaton
socket

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-177

Tab40book.fm Page 178 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Catalogue Number Selection
All configurations from Catalogue Number Selection are available.

40

TMR5 N 05 120

Family Type
TMR5

40
40

N
T
L
R

40
40

Y

40

Operational Mode
8-Pin Octal Sockets
11-Pin Octal Sockets
= ON delay
F = OFF delay, control switch trigger
= Interval ON
C = Single shot, control switch trigger
= Flasher-pause-first
W = Watchdog, control switch trigger

(retriggerable single shot)
= Repeat cycle
P = OFF delay, power trigger
(OFF time first followed by
G = Single shot, power trigger
ON time and repeating)
D = Watchdog, power trigger (retriggerable
= Repeat cycle 
single shot)
(ON time first followed by
OFF time and repeating)

Input Voltage
120 = 120 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
240 = 240 Vac/Vdc
Timing Range 
04 = 0.05–5 sec
05 = 0.1–10 sec
08 = 0.6–60 sec
12 = 3–300 sec
15 = 0.3–30 min
16 = 0.6–60 min
22 = 6 sec–10 min

40
40

Product Selection

40

TMR5 Time Delay Relays

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Input
Voltage

Accessories
Accessories for Use with TMR5 Time Delay Relays

Socket

Timing
Range

Catalogue
Number

8-pin

0.1–10 sec

TMR5N05120

0.6–60 sec

TMR5N08120

0.1–10 sec

TMR5N0524

0.6–60 sec

TMR5N0824

ON Delay
120 Vac/Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

OFF Delay, Control Switch Trigger
120 Vac/Vdc

11-pin

24 Vac/Vdc

0.1–10 sec

TMR5F05120

0.6–60 sec

TMR5F08120

0.1–10 sec

TMR5F0524

0.6–60 sec

TMR5F0824

120 Vac/Vdc

40

24 Vac/Vdc

40

Single Shot, Control Switch Trigger
120 Vac/Vdc

8-pin

11-pin

0.1–10 sec

TMR5T05120

0.6–60 sec

TMR5T08120

0.1–10 sec

TMR5T0524

0.6–60 sec

TMR5T0824

0.1–10 sec

TMR5C05120

0.6–60 sec

TMR5C08120

0.1–10 sec

TMR5C0524

0.6–60 sec

TMR5C0824

40

24 Vac/Vdc

40

Repeat Cycle
(OFF Time First Followed by ON Time and Repeating)

40

120 Vac/Vdc

40
40
40
40

Standard Pack

Catalogue
Number

8-pin socket

10

D3PA2

11-pin socket

10

D3PA3-A2

Hold-down spring

10

D65CHDS

Notes
 Indicates DUAL knob unit. All dual knob units can have independently selectable and
adjustable ON and OFF times. If different ON and OFF times are desired, add two codes for
time ranges in the part number. The first code listed indicates the first timing range of the
unit (OFF time for R, ON time for Y) and the second code indicates the second timing range
(ON time for R, OFF Time for Y).
 Fixed time delay settings are available for orders of 50 pieces or more. Contact EatonCare for
additional information at 877-ETN-CARE (386-2273).

Interval ON

40

40

Description

8-pin

24 Vac/Vdc

0.1–10 sec

TMR5R05120

0.6–60 sec

TMR5R08120

0.1–10 sec

TMR5R0524

0.6–60 sec

TMR5R0824

Repeat Cycle
(ON Time First Followed by OFF Time and Repeating)
120 Vac/Vdc

24 Vac/Vdc

40
T40-178

8-pin

0.1–10 sec

TMR5Y05120

0.6–60 sec

TMR5Y08120

0.1–10 sec

TMR5Y0524

0.6–60 sec

TMR5Y0824

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 179 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

Wiring Diagrams

TMR5 Time Delay Relays

Wiring for 8-Pin Units

Description
Voltage tolerance
AC operation
DC operation
Load burden

Specification

Wiring for 11-Pin Control
Switch Trigger Units
Control
Switch

4 5

+10/–15% of nominal at 50/60 Hz
+10/–15% of nominal

3

6

2 VA

2

7

4

1 8

Setting accuracy
Maximum setting (adjustable)

+5%, –0%

Minimum setting (adjustable)

+0%, –50%

Fixed time delay
< 2 seconds

+1%

0.1–2 seconds

±5%

(DC)+
L1

3
2

−(DC)
L2
Input Voltage

5

6 7

1 11

0.1–2 seconds delay

OFF Delay/single shot/watchdog

±2%

8

40

9
10

40

(DC)+
L1

(DC)−
L2
Input Voltage

Maintain function time (time unit
continues to time after power is
removed)
Temperature
12–120V input voltage
240V input voltage

40

Power
Trigger *

40

0.04 second

+

4

0.01 second

3
2

2000V

Output contacts

DPDT 10A @ 240 Vac/30 Vdc,
1/2 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NO contacts)
1/3 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NC contacts)
B300 and R300; AC-15 and DC-13

Full load

5

6 7

8

40

9
10

40

1 11

Insulation voltage

Life
Mechanical

−

40

0.08 second

–18 to 150˚F (–28 to 65˚C)

40

Wiring for 11-Pin Power
Trigger Units

0.1 second

–18 to 122˚F (–28 to 50˚C)

40
40

Startup time (time from when power is applied until unit is timing)
120 and 240V units
0.05 second
12, 24 and 48V units

40
40

Repeat accuracy (constant voltage and temperature)
> 2 seconds delay
±0.1%
Reset time
ON Delay/interval/repeat cycle

40

(DC)+
L1

(DC)−
L2

Input Voltage
* Should Be Same Voltage
as Input Voltage

40
40
40
40

10,000,000 operations

40

100,000 operations

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-179

Tab40book.fm Page 180 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
TMR5

40

Dual Knob
Only

40
40

2.40
(61.0)

40
40
2.90 (73.7)
1.70
(43.2)

40

3.50 (88.9)

40
40
40
40
40

D3PA2 Socket

D3PA3 Socket

6–32 x 0.312 Combination
Head Screw and Pressure Clamping Plate
(8 places)

6–32 x 0.312 Combination
Head Screw and Pressure Clamp
(11 places)

Two 0.165
(4.2) Dia.
Slots

2.14
(54.3)
2.03
(51.6)

40
1.30
(33.0)
1.60
(40.6)
Max.

40
40
40

0.82 (20.8)
0.58 (14.7)
0.97
(24.6)
Max.
Tolerances: ± 0.010
± (0.25)
Unless Otherwise Shown

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-180

Two 0.17
(4.3) Dia.
Holes

2.05
(52.1)
Max.

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

2.06
(52.3)

0.13–0.16
(3.2–4.0)

2.33 (59.2)
0.97
Max.
(24.6)
Tolerances: ± 0.010
± (0.25)
Unless Otherwise Shown

0.15 (3.8)
0.58 (14.7)
0.77 (19.6)

Tab40book.fm Page 181 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

40.8

Contents

TMR6 Series

Description

Page

Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR6 Series
Catalogue Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E5-248—Battery-Powered LCD Time Control . . . . . . .

T40-170
T40-174
T40-177
T40-182
T40-182
T40-182
T40-182
T40-182
T40-182
T40-183
T40-186

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

TMR6 Series
Product Description

Features

Most electronic time delay
relays with an OFF delay
function require input voltage
to be applied continuously
in order to operate correctly.
However, there are many
applications where this is
not possible—-keeping a
relay energized for some
amount of time after input
voltage has been removed.
Eaton’s TMR6 true OFF
delay product provides
this function even when
input voltage is removed.
It duplicates the operation
of the older OFF delay
pneumatic time delay relays.

●

●

●

●

●

●

40

Operation

Provides OFF delay
function without requiring
input voltage during OFF
time delay
Duplicates operation of
pneumatic OFF delay
timers
Each unit has eight timing
ranges built in, covering
0.05 seconds to
30 minutes
Selecting a range is easy
using a rotary switch
(no math is required or
DIP switches to set)
Uses industry-standard
8-pin octal socket
10A DPDT output contacts

Timing Ranges
Select one of the eight timing
ranges using the selector
knob, and then adjust the
time within that range for an
accurate delay setting.

True OFF Delay
Upon application of input
voltage, the relay is
energized. When the input
voltage is removed, the
preset time begins. At the
end of the preset time, the
relay is de-energized.

Voltage must be applied for
a minimum of 0.1 second to
assure proper operation.
Any application of the input
voltage during the preset
time will keep the relay
energized and reset the time
delay. No external trigger
switch is required.

40
40
40
40
40

True OFF Delay
Input
Power
(Voltage)

40

ON

40

OFF

40
ON
Output
(Load)

40

Delay
OFF

40
40

Standards and Certifications
●

Timing Ranges

●

Dial Setting

Timing Range

●

A

0.05–5 sec.

●

B

0.1–10 sec.

C

0.3–30 sec.

D

0.6–60 sec.

E

1.8–180 sec.

F

3–300 sec.

G

0.1–10 min.

H

0.3–30 min

40

cRUus
UL listed (with Eaton socket)
RoHS compliant
CE marked

40
40
40

with
Eaton
socket

40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-181

Tab40book.fm Page 182 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8
40

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Catalogue Number Selection

Wiring Diagram

All configurations from Catalogue Number Selection are available

Wiring for 8-Pin Units

40

TMR6 X 00 120
4 5

40

3

40
40

Input Voltage
120 = 120 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
240 = 240 Vac/Vdc

Family Type
TMR6
Operational Mode
X = True OFF delay

2

7
1 8

(DC)+
L1

−(DC)
L2
Input Voltage

Timing Range
00 = Programmable

40

6

40
Dimensions

40

Product Selection

40

TMR6 True OFF Delay Relays

40
40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Input
Voltage

Catalogue
Number

0.05 sec–30 min
(user selectable, 8 ranges)

TMR6X00120

TMR6

True OFF Delay
120 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc

40

Timing
Range

240 Vac/Vdc

TMR6X0024

2.40
(61.0)

TMR6X00240

40
40
40

Accessories

2.90 (73.7)

Accessories for Use with TMR6 Time Delay Relays
Description

Standard Pack

Catalogue
Number

8-pin socket

10

D3PA2

40

Hold-down spring

10

D65CHDS

40

Technical Data and Specifications

40

40
40
40
40

1.70
(43.2)

Description

D3PA2 Socket
6–32 x 0.312 Combination
Head Screw and Pressure Clamping Plate
(8 places)
Two 0.165
(4.2) Dia.
Slots

2.14
(54.3)

TMR6 Time Delay Relays
Specification

2.03
(51.6)

Voltage tolerance
AC operation

+10/–15% of nominal at 50/60 Hz

DC operation

+10/–15% of nominal

Load burden

2 VA

Setting accuracy

40

Maximum setting (adjustable)

40

Repeat accuracy (constant voltage
and temperature)

±0.1% or 50 ms, whichever is greater

40

Temperature

–18 to 150˚F (–28 to 65˚C)

Insulation voltage

2,000V

40

Output contacts

DPDT 10A @ 240 Vac/30 Vdc,
1/2 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NO contacts)
1/3 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NC contacts)
B300 and R300; AC-15 and DC-13

Minimum setting (adjustable)

40

+5%, –0%
+0%, –50%

Life

40

3.50 (88.9)

Mechanical

2,000,000 operations

Full load

100,000 operations

40
40
T40-182

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

1.30
(33.0)
1.60
(40.6)
Max.

0.82 (20.8)
0.58 (14.7)
0.97
(24.6)
Tolerances: ± 0.010 Max.
± (0.25)
Unless Otherwise Shown

Tab40book.fm Page 183 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

40.8

Contents

TMRP Series

Description

Page

Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMRP Series
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E5-248—Battery-Powered LCD Time Control . . . . . . .

T40-170
T40-174
T40-177
T40-181
T40-184
T40-184
T40-185
T40-185
T40-186

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

TMRP Series
Product Description

Application Description

Features

Eaton’s TMRP Series timers
combine flexibility with ease
of use and installation to
make the most versatile
timer in our offering. The
thumb-wheel setting design
allows for quick selection and
review of up to 10 timing
functions and seven timing
ranges. The TMRP units can
be mounted in a 1/16 DIN
cutout or on a DIN rail with
our D3 series sockets. Input
voltage is 12–240 Vac/Vdc to
work with all popular control
voltages.

A timing relay is a simple
form of time-based control,
allowing the user to open or
close the contacts based on
a specified timing function.
The TMRP series is equipped
with a set of thumb-wheel
style selector switches, which
can easily be set to a specific
function and time, thereby
reducing the number of
product variations required.
The universal input voltage
of 12–240 Vac/Vdc further
reduces the number of
product variations.

●

The TMRP timers are ideal
for high-variability operations,
such as systems integrators,
distributors, and small equipment manufacturers. The
flexible enclosure design
allows for back-panel mounting,
through-panel mounting, or
DIN rail mounting.

●

●

●

40

Multiple user-selectable
timing functions and timing
ranges in a single unit
reduce product variations
and stock keeping units
(SKUs)
Universal input voltages
from 12–240 Vac/Vdc
eliminate the need to
order and stock separate
coil voltages
Timing ranges up to 9990
hours
Dual LED indication makes
troubleshooting easy

●

●

●

●

Flexible design for backpanel, through-panel
(45 mm x 45 mm cutout),
or DIN rail mounting
SPDT or DPDT contacts
with 12A ratings
Plastic dust cover keeps
out contaminants and
eliminates accidental set
point changes
Use with standard Eaton
D3 sockets—see Technical
Data and Specifications

Function

Solid green “Input”

Supply voltage present

Solid red “Output”

Relay energized

Slowly flashing red “Output”

Timing cycle activated, relay not energized

Rapidly flashing red “Output”

Timing cycle activated, relay energized

40
40
40
40
40
40

LED Indicator
LED Description

40

40
40
40
40
40

Standards and Certifications
●
●
●

40

UL recognized
CE marked
RoHS compliant

40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-183

Tab40book.fm Page 184 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Product Selection
TMRP Timing Relays

TMRP5100

40

Supply Voltage

40

12–240 Vac/Vdc

Description

Catalogue
Number

10-Function

40

Control switch trigger, DPDT

TMRP5100

Control switch trigger, SPDT

TMRP5101

Power trigger, DPDT

TMRP5102

40
40
40

Technical Data and Specifications

40

TMRP Timing Relays

40
40

Description

TMRP5100

TMRP5101

TMRP5102

Functions 

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

A, B, C

Time range

0.1 sec to 9,990 hours

0.1 sec to 9,990 hours

0.1 sec to 9,990 hours

Input

40

Supply voltage

12–240 Vac/Vdc

12–240 Vac/Vdc

12–240 Vac/Vdc

Supply voltage tolerance

±15%

±15%

±15%

40

Rated consumption

2.5 VA (2W) maximum

2.5 VA (2W) maximum

2.5 VA (2W) maximum

Reset time

150 ms

150 ms

150 ms

40

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Yes

Yes

40

Operate time

25 ms maximum

25 ms maximum

25 ms maximum

Release time

25 ms maximum

25 ms maximum

25 ms maximum

40

Rated surge voltage

4 kV

4 kV

4 kV

DPDT

Output

40

Contact configuration

DPDT

SPDT

Contact rating (AC)

12A resistive at 120, 240 UL 508

12A resistive at 120, 240 UL 508

12A resistive at 120, 240 UL 508

Contact rating (DC)

12A resistive at 30 UL 508

12A resistive at 30 UL 508

12A resistive at 30 UL 508

40

Contact rating horsepower

1/2 at 120 Vac, 1 at 240 Vac

1/2 at 120 Vac, 1 at 240 Vac

1/2 at 120 Vac, 1 at 240 Vac

Contact rating pilot duty

A300, 720 VA at 240 Vac

A300, 720 VA at 240 Vac

A300, 720 VA at 240 Vac

40

Minimum load

12V/100 mA

12V/100 mA

12V/100 mA

Contact material

Silver-nickel 90/10

Silver-nickel 90/10

Silver-nickel 90/10

Contact resistance

100 milliohms max. at 1A 12 Vdc

100 milliohms max. at 1A 12 Vdc

100 milliohms max. at 1A 12 Vdc

Mechanical life—full load

10 million operations

10 million operations

10 million operations

Electrical life—full load

100,000 operations

100,000 operations

100,000 operations

50 ms minimum

50 ms minimum

50 ms minimum

0.10% at constant voltage and temperature

0.10% at constant voltage and temperature

0.10% at constant voltage and temperature

40

40
40
40

Control Signal

40

Accuracy

40

Minimum control pulse length

Repetition accuracy
Physical

40

Ambient temperature

–10 to 55˚C

–10 to 55˚C

–10 to 55˚C

Storage temperature

–40 to 85˚C

–40 to 85˚C

–40 to 85˚C

40

Mounting

Use with D3PA3 socket

Use with D3PA2 socket

Use with D3PA2 socket

40

Note
 Refer to Function Code Cross-Reference Guide on Page T40-165 for function details.

40
40
T40-184

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 185 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

40.8

Wiring Diagrams
TMRP5100

TMRP5101

Instant if 6–7 Shorted

6

5

7

4

8

3

9
2

10
1

11

5

3

6

2

7
1

40

External Control Switch

External Control Switch
4

40

TMRP5102

8

4

6

2

7

40
40

8

40

INPUT

40

1

INPUT

5

3

40
40

INPUT

40
Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

TMRP Series

40
4

5

2.83
(71.9)

1

OUTPUT

TIME
SET

40

S

40
3
2

3.15
(80.0)

40

8

0.64
(16.3)

4

0.25
(6.4)

9

0

40

10

0

5

0

40
8-Pin Octal Base

6

A

1.76
(44.7)

TIME
BASE

7

FUNCTION

40

8

R.045

INPUT

1.88
(47.8)

40

7

2

0.06
(1.5)

6

3

1.88
(47.8)

1

11

40

11-Pin Octal Base

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

T40-185

Tab40book.fm Page 186 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.8
40

Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Contents

E5-248—Battery-Powered LCD Time Control

Description

40

Page

Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E5-248—Battery-Powered LCD Time Control
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
40
40

T40-170
T40-174
T40-177
T40-181
T40-183
T40-186
T40-186

40
40
40
40
40

E5-248—Battery-Powered LCD Time Control

40

Product Description

Features

The E5-248-C1420 is an
advanced timing relay
capable of performing a wide
variety of timing functions
without the need for external
power. The through-panel
mount design and LCD
display allow easy access
for set-point and function
changes. Programmable
activation modes effectively
triple the functionality, and
the relay can be configured
for normally open or normally
closed operation.

●

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

●

●

●

●

●

40
40
40
40

●

40

●

40

●

40

●

No external voltage supply,
because of internal
replaceable lithium battery
High contrast, 2-line LCD
display, 5-digit with many
symbols for easy operation
and reading
Nine programmable time
ranges from 0.20 seconds
up to 99.999 hours
Resolution up to 0.01
seconds
Inputs for start and
reset; universal inputs for
12–260 Vac/Vdc
Eight timing modes—
●
ON Delay, OFF Delay,
One Shot and Single
Shot
●
Repeat cycle modes:
Delay, Cycle,
Symmetrical delay
Three programmable
activation modes
Relay contacts rated at
8A programmable to
NO or NC
Protection IP65
Plug-in connector

Standards and Certifications
●

CE marked

Product Selection
Battery-Powered LCD Time Control

Battery-powered LCD time control,
1.89 x 1.89 in (48.0 x 48.0 mm)

E5-248-C1420

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Battery-Powered LCD Time Control
1.89
(48.0)

1.89
(48.0)

0.41 (10.5) Max.;
0.37 (9.5)
at Front Panel

1.77
(45.0)
0.63
(16.0)

2.49
(63.2)

0.12
(3.0)

Panel cutout is 1.77 + 0.02 in sq. (45 + 0.6 mm sq.).

40
40
40
40
T40-186

Catalogue
Number

Description

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 ww.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 187 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Alternating Relays

40.9

Contents

D85 Series—Alternating Relays

Description

Page

D85 Series—Alternating Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40

T40-188
T40-188
T40-189
T40-189
T40-191

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Product Description
Alternating relays are used
in applications where the
optimization of load usage is
required by equalizing the run
time of two loads. They are
also used where additional
capacity is required in case
of excess load requirements.
This alternating action is
initiated by a control switch—
such as a float switch, manual
switch, timing relay, pressure
switch or other isolated
contact. Each time the
initiating switch is opened,
the output relay contacts will
change state, thus alternating
the two loads. Two LED
indicators show the status of
the output relay.
The D851 and D852 Series
Relays are used with one
control switch and are
available in either SPDT or
DPDT output configurations
with or without a selector
switch to lock in one
sequence. The D852X Series
Relays are available in DPDT
cross-wired output
configurations for use with
one or two control switches
(LEAD and LAG).

40

Features
The D853 Series is designed
for use with three-switch
applications (LEAD, LAG and
STOP). The D853 Series
combines a standard DPDT
Cross-Wired alternating relay,
contactor auxiliary contacts,
and a control relay into one
compact and economical
product. This saves space
and labor, while reducing the
number of components
needed. The D853 Series
uses Sequence On–
Simultaneous Off (S.O.S.O.)
operation, where the two
loads are energized
sequentially, but remain on
together until the STOP
switch is opened. This device
also protects against failure
of the STOP and LEAD
switches. If both switches
fail, the two pump motors will
be energized simultaneously
when the LAG switch is
closed.

Each of the D85 Series
alternating relays is available
with an optional threeposition selector switch,
which allows the unit to
alternate the two loads as
normal, or lock the relay to
one load or the other. By
locking the alternating relay
to one load, the other load
can be removed for service
without rewiring the first load
for continuous operation. The
selector switch has a low
profile to prevent any
accidental actuation.

●
●

●

●

●

●

●

For duplex loads
Works with one-, two-, or
three-switch applications
Compact plug-in design
using industry standard
sockets
10A SPDT or DPDT output
configurations
Optional low profile
selector switch to lock in
one sequence
Two LEDs indicate relay
status
D853 Series replaces
separate components in
duplex panel—saving
space and reducing labor

●
●
●

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Standards and
Certifications
●

40

40

CE
cRUus
UL listed 
RoHS compliant

40
40
40
40

Note
 When used with appropriate Eaton
socket.

40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-187

Tab40book.fm Page 188 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.9
40

Control Relays and Timers
Alternating Relays

Product Selection
D85 Series—Alternating Relays

40



Output Contacts

Control
Voltage

Socket

Catalogue
Number

SPDT

12 Vac

8-pin

D851NR

40

SPDT

24 Vac

8-pin

D851NT

SPDT

120 Vac

8-pin

D851NA

40

SPDT

240 Vac

8-pin

D851NB

SPDT w/selector switch

12 Vac

8-pin

D851LR

SPDT w/selector switch

24 Vac

8-pin

D851LT

SPDT w/selector switch

120 Vac

8-pin

D851LA

SPDT w/selector switch

240 Vac

8-pin

D851LB

40

DPDT

12 Vac

11-pin

D852NR

DPDT

24 Vac

11-pin

D852NT

40

DPDT

120 Vac

11-pin

D852NA

DPDT

240 Vac

11-pin

D852NB

DPDT w/selector switch

12 Vac

11-pin

D852LR

40

DPDT w/selector switch

24 Vac

11-pin

D852LT

DPDT w/selector switch

120 Vac

11-pin

D852LA

40

DPDT w/selector switch

240 Vac

11-pin

D852LB

DPDT cross-wired

12 Vac

8-pin

D852XNR

DPDT cross-wired

24 Vac

8-pin

D852XNT

DPDT cross-wired

120 Vac

8-pin

D852XNA

DPDT cross-wired

240 Vac

8-pin

D852XNB

40

DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch

12 Vac

8-pin

D852XLR

DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch

24 Vac

8-pin

D852XLT

40

DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch

120 Vac

8-pin

D852XLA

DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch

240 Vac

8-pin

D852XLB

40

40
40

40

40
40

40
40

Accessories
D85 Series—Alternating Relays

40
40
40
40

Description

Standard
Pack

Catalogue
Number

8-pin socket

10

D3PA2

11-pin socket

10

D3PA3-A2

Hold-down spring

10

D65CHDS

Note
 Contact Eaton for relays for 3-switch applications (Lead-Lag-Stop).

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-188

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 189 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.9

Control Relays and Timers
Alternating Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

40

D85 Series—Alternating Relays

40

Description

Specification

Voltage tolerance

+10%/-15% of control voltage at 50/60 Hz

Load (burden)

Less than 3 VA

Output contacts

10A resistive at 240 Vac / 30 Vdc, 1/2 hp at 120/240 Vac (NO), 1/3 hp at 120/240 Vac (NC)

Mechanical life

10,000,000 operations

Electrical life

100,000 operations

Temperature

–20˚ to 150˚F (–28˚ to 65˚C)

40
40
40

Transient protection

10,000 volts for 20 microseconds

Indicator LEDs

2 LEDs marked LOAD A and LOAD B

Optional selector switch settings

ALTERNATE, LOCK LOAD A, LOCK LOAD B

40
40
40

Wiring Diagrams
D851 Series Relays, SPDT

D852 Series Relays, DPDT

Input
Voltage
L2

Input
Voltage

L1

L1

Control
Switch

D852X Series Relays,
DPDT Cross-Wired

L2

Input
Voltage

L1

D853 Series Relays,
Three-Switch Applications
L2
Stop

Control
Switch

5

3

6

4

2

7

3
2

1

8

Load A: Pin 2
Load B: Pin 8

5

6 7

1 11

Lag

8

3

Lag

6

2

9
10

40

4 5

4 5
4

40

Input Voltage
L1

L2

7
1 8

3

6

2

Load
B

Load
B

7
1 8

Load
A

Load
A

Load A: Pins 3 or 11
Load B: Pins 1 or 9

Typical Installations for SPDT and DPDT Alternating Relays,
Standard Installation
L2

L1

Typical Installations for SPDT and DPDT Alternating Relays,
Anti-Bounce Installation
L1

L2
M2
M2

SPDT
O/L

1
2
Control
Switch
5

4

8

M1

M1
SPDT

M2

3

2

Control
Switch
5

4

In the OFF state (standard
installation), the control
switch is open, the
alternating relay is in the
LOAD A position, and both
loads (M1 and M2) are off.
When the control switch
closes, it energizes the first
load (M1). The red LED
marked “LOAD A” glows. As
long as the control switch
remains closed, M1 remains
energized.

When the control switch
opens, the first load (M1) is
turned off and the alternating
relay toggles to the LOAD B
position. When the control
switch closes again, it
energizes the second load
(M2). The red LED marked
“LOAD B” glows.

When the control switch
opens, the second load (M2)
is turned off, the alternating
relay toggles back to the
LOAD A position, and the
process can be repeated
again. On relays with DPDT
contacts, two pilot lights can
be used for remote indication
of LOAD A or LOAD B status.

40
40
40
40
40

1
Off

40

40

M1

O/L

40
40

Lead

Lead

40

40

8

40

3

40

To eliminate any bounce
condition of the control
switch, the addition of a
second switch (OFF) along
with two auxiliary contacts is
recommended as shown in
the Anti-Bounce Installation.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-189

Tab40book.fm Page 190 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.9

Control Relays and Timers
Alternating Relays

40

Typical Installations for DPDT Cross-Wired Alternating
Relays, Standard Installation

Typical Installations for DPDT Cross-Wired Alternating
Relays, Anti-Bounce Installation

40

L1

L1

L2

L2
M2
M2

40

Cross-Wired

40

M1

Lag
8

40

Cross-Wired

M1
Lag

Lead

2

O/L

1

40

M1

O/L

2

7

M2

Off

Lead

1

40

7

40

3

6
3

40
40
40
40
40
40

8

6

In the OFF state, both the LEAD control switch and the LAG
control switch are open, the alternating relay is in the LOAD A
position, and both loads are off. When the LEAD control switch
closes, it energizes the first load (M1). The red LED marked
“LOAD A” glows. As long as the LEAD control switch remains
closed, M1 remains energized. If the LAG control switch closes,
it energizes the second load (M2).

When the LEAD control switch closes, it turns on the second
load (M2). The red LED marked “LOAD B” glows. If the LAG
control switch closes, it will energize the first load (M1). When
the LAG control switch opens, the first load (M1) is turned off.
When the LEAD control switch opens, the second load (M2) is
turned off, the alternating relay toggles back to the LOAD A
position, and the process can be repeated again.

When the LAG control switch opens, the second load (M2) is
turned off. When the LEAD control switch opens, the first load
(M1) is turned off and the alternating relay toggles to the LOAD
B position.

To eliminate any bounce condition of the control switch, the
addition of a second switch (OFF) along with two auxiliary
contacts is recommended as shown in the Anti-Bounce
Installation.

40
40

Typical Installations for DPDT Cross-Wired Relays for Three-Switch Applications

40

L1

40

L2

40

L3

40

L1

40

L2

40

L3

40
40
40
40
40
40

Lag
Switch

M1
M1

M2

M2

M1

7

M2

O/L

1
Stop
Switch

Motor
2

8
Lead
Switch

Motor
1

M1

M2

O/L

2

4

L1

3

L2

6

In the OFF state, all three switches are open, the alternating relay
is in the LOAD A position, and both loads are off. No action
happens with the alternating relay or either load when the STOP
switch closes. When the LEAD switch closes, Load #1 (M1) turns
on. When the LAG switch closes, Load #2 (M2) turns on. Both
loads remain on as long as all three switches are closed.

The alternating relay toggles to the LOAD B position. The entire
cycle is then repeated, but with Load #2 (M2) energized first
followed by Load #1 (M1). This type of operation is known as
“Sequence On–Simultaneously Off (S.O.S.O.)”—the two loads
are energized sequentially, but remain on together until the
STOP switch is opened.

When the LAG switch opens, Load #2 (M2) remains on because
the STOP switch is still closed. When the LEAD switch opens,
Load #1 (M1) remains on because the STOP switch is still
closed. When the STOP switch opens, both Load #1 (M1) and
Load #2 (M2) are turned off simultaneously.

If both the STOP switch and LEAD switch fail to close and turn
on the first load, both loads will be turned on simultaneously
when the LAG switch is closed.

40
40
T40-190

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 191 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Alternating Relays

40.9

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

D85 Series—Alternating Relays

40
40
2.4
(60)

40
40
1.7
(43)

2.9
(74)

40

3.1
(79)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-191

Tab40book.fm Page 192 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.10
40

Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays

Contents

Safety Relays

Description

40

Page

Safety Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40

T40-193
T40-194
T40-197

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Product Description

Application Description

Features

Safety relays are intended to
reliably monitor the signals
from safety devices at all
times and switch off quickly
and reliably in an emergency.
Single-channel and dual
channel versions are available
for the construction of safety
applications. The internal
logic of the safety relays
monitors the safety circuits
(emergency stop, guard door,
and so on) and activates the
enable paths in a fault-free
condition. Upon actuation of
the safety device or in the
event of a fault, the enable
paths are switched off. Any
faults that occur in the control
circuit, such as ground fault,
cross connection fault or wire
breakage are also detected.

Eaton’s ESR5 safety relays
provide optimal safety and a
high degree of reliability on
plant machinery. Applications
that meet the highest
safety requirements in
accordance with EN 954-1,
EN ISO 13849-1 up to PL e
and accordance with
IEC 62061 up to SILCL 3
can be realized with the
ESR5 safety relay.

●

Compatible with a wide
variety of safety devices:

●

●
●
●
●
●
●

Emergency stops
Rope pulls
Two-hand control stations
Light curtain (OSSD)
Gate enable device
Safety switches

●

●

●

●

Use for the highest
safety requirements in
accordance with EN 954-1
EN ISO 13849-1,
IEC 62061 and EC 61508
Suitable for the world
market with UL, cUL
certifications and TÜV
Rhineland functional
safety certifications
Applicable for EN 60204
stop categories 0 or 1
Plug-in screw terminals
for fast and fault-free
replacement
Multi-voltage versions
(24–230 Vac/Vdc) for a
flexible range of application
Delayed and non-delayed
contact expansions
accommodate a wide
variety of applications

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-192

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Standards and
Certifications
●

●

●
●
●

UL 508; CSA-C22.2 No
14-95; CE Marked
UL/cUL file number:
E29184
Degree of protection: IP20
TÜV Rhineland certified
UL/cULus listed

Tab40book.fm Page 193 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays

40.10

Product Selection
Safety Relays

40

Technical Overview

40

Single
Channel

Dual
Channel

Safety
Safety
Output (NO) Output
Output (NO) (Delayed)
Delay

Signal
Output
(NC)

Feedback Control
Output
Voltage

Removable
Terminal
Type of
Blocks
Unit

Catalogue Number

■

—

4

—

—

1

—

24 Vac/Vdc

■

Main

ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC

■

■

2

—

—

1

—

24 Vac/Vdc

■

Main

ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC

■

■

3

—

—

1

—

24 Vac/Vdc

■

Main

ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC

■

■

3

—

—

1

—

230 Vac

■

Main

ESR5-NO-31-230VAC

■

■

3

—

—

1

—

24–230 Vac/Vdc

■

Main

ESR5-NO-31-AC-DC

■

■

2

2

0.1–30s

—

—

24 Vdc

■

Main

ESR5-NV3-30

—

■

2

—

—

1

—

24 Vac/Vdc

■

Main

ESR5-NZ-21-24VAC-DC

■

—

5

—

—

1

1

24 Vac/Vdc

■

Expansion

ESR5-NE-51-24VAC-DC

■

—

—

4

0.3–3s

1

1

24 Vdc

■

Expansion

ESR5-VE3-42

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Application Overview
Emergency Safety
Stop
Switches

Light Curtain/ Two-Hand Control
(EN 574 Type III C)
OSSD 

Contact
Expansion

Off-Delayed

Cross Circuit
Recognition

Monitored
Manual Reset  Catalogue Number

■

■

—

—

—

—

—

—

ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC

■

■

—

—

—

—

■

—

ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC

■

■

—

—

—

—

■

—

ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC

■

■

—

—

—

—

■

■

ESR5-NO-31-230VAC

■

■

—

—

—

—

■

■

ESR5-NO-31-AC-DC

■

■

■

—

—

■

■

■

ESR5-NV3-30

—

■

—

■

—

—

■

—

ESR5-NZ-21-24VAC-DC

—

—

—

—

■

—

—

—

ESR5-NE-51-24VAC-DC

—

—

—

—

■

■

—

—

ESR5-VE3-42

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Application Overview, continued

40

Single
Channel

Dual
Channel

Stop Category
EN 60204

Control Category
to EN 954-1

Achievable PL per
ISO 13849-1

Achievable SIL per
EN IEC 62061

Catalogue Number

■

—

0

2

PL d

SIL 3

ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC

■

■

0

4

PL e

SIL 3

ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC

■

■

0

4

PL e

SIL 3

ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC

■

■

0

4

PL e

SIL 3

ESR5-NO-31-230VAC

■

■

0

4

PL e

SIL 3

ESR5-NO-31-AC-DC

■

■

0/1

4

PL e

SIL 3

ESR5-NV3-30

—

■

0

4

PL e

SIL 3

ESR5-NZ-21-24VAC-DC

■

—

0

4

PL e

SIL 3

ESR5-NE-51-24VAC-DC

■

—

1

3

PL d

SIL 2

ESR5-VE3-42

40
40
40
40
40
40

Notes
 Laser scanners or light curtains with OSSD outputs.
 All main units can also be reset automatically or manually.

40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-193

Tab40book.fm Page 194 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.10
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays

Technical Data and Specifications
Safety Relay
Description

Unit

Standards

EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061,
IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178,
UL/CUL listed

40
40
40

Type-dependent standards
Lifespan, mechanical—c (contacts)

x 106

Maximum operating frequency

Ops/h

Climatic proofing

40
40

ESR5-NO-21_

ESR5-NO-41_

ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC

ESR5-NZ-21_

General
EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061,
IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178,
UL/CUL listed

EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061,
IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178,
UL/CUL listed

EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061,
IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178,
UL/CUL listed

—

—

—

EN 574 Part no. IIIC

10

10

10

10

3600

3600

3600

3600

Cold according to
EN 60068-2-1, dry heat
according to EN60068-2-2,
damp heat according to
EN 60068-2-3

Dry heat according to
EN60068-2-2, damp heat
according to EN 60068-2-3

Cold according to
EN 60068-2-1, dry heat
according to EN60068-2-2,
damp heat according to
EN 60068-2-3

Dry heat according to
EN60068-2-2, damp heat
according to EN 60068-2-3

–4˚ to 131˚ (–20˚ to 55˚)

Ambient temperature

˚F (˚C)

–4˚ to 131˚ (–20˚ to 55˚)

–4˚ to 131˚ (–20˚ to 55˚)

–4˚ to 131˚ (–20˚ to 55˚)

40

Ambient temperature storage

˚F (˚C)

–13˚ to 167˚ (–25˚ to 75˚)

–13˚ to 167˚ (–25˚ to 75˚)

–13˚ to 167˚ (–25˚ to 75˚)

–13˚ to 167˚ (–25˚ to 75˚)

Mounting position

Any

Any

Any

Any

40

Vibration resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-6)

2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz,
amplitude: 0.15 mm

2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz,
amplitude: 0.15 mm

2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz,
amplitude: 0.15 mm

2 g, frequency: 10–150 Hz,
amplitude: 0.15 mm

40

Shock resistance (IEC 60068-2-27)

—

—

—

—

Protection type
Housing

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

Finger- and back-of-hand
proof

Finger- and back-of-hand
proof

Finger- and back-of-hand
proof

Finger- and back-of-hand
proof

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Terminals
Protection against direct contact when
actuated from front (IEC 0106 Part 100)
Weight

kg

0.17

0.22

0.17

0.22

Terminal capacity
Solid or flexible

mm2

1 x (0.2–2.5)
2 x (0.2–1)

1 x (0.2–2.5)
2 x (0.2–1)

1 x (0.2–2.5)
2 x (0.2–1)

1 x (0.2–2.5)
2 x (0.2–1)

Flexible with ferrule

mm2

1 x (0.25–2.5)
2 x (0.25–1)

1 x (0.25–2.5)
2 x (0.25–1)

1 x (0.25–2.5)
2 x (0.25–1)

1 x (0.25–2.5)
2 x (0.25–1)

Solid or stranded

AWG

24–12

24–12

24–12

24–12
2

Terminal screw
Pozidriv screwdriver

Size

2

2

2

Flat-blade screwdriver

mm

0.6 x 3.5

0.6 x 3.5

0.6 x 3.5

0.6 x 3.5

Max. tightening torque

Nm

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

Vac

6000

4000

4000

6000

III/2

III/2

III/2

III/2

—

—

—

—

Main Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage—Uimp
Overvoltage category/pollution degree
Outside
Inside
Rated insulation voltage—Ui

Vac

250

250

250

250

40

Rated operating voltage—Ue

Vac

230

230

230

230

40

Rated operation current
AC-15
230V (360 ops./h)—Ie

A

5

4

5

4

230V (3600 ops./h)—Ie

A

3

3

3

3

40
40
40
40
40
40

DC-13
24V (360 ops./h)—Ie

A

6

4

6

4

24V (3600 ops./h)—Ie

A

3

2.5

3

2.5

Max. summation current of all poles
24 Vac/Vdc devices
230 Vac devices

A

72

72

72

72

A

—

—

—

—

72 A2 (6 + 6)

72 A2 (4.2 + 4.2 + 4.2 + 4.2)

72 A2 (4.9 + 4.9 + 4.9)

72 A2 (6 + 6)

10

6

10

6

Square of the total current
(and total current)
of all current paths
Short-circuit protection
Max. fuse

A gG/gL

40
T40-194

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 195 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.10

Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays

Safety Relay, continued
Description

Unit

ESR5-NO-21_

ESR5-NO-41_

ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC

ESR5-NZ-21_

Power Supply Circuit
Actuating voltage 50/60 Hz

Vac

24

24

24

24

Actuating voltage—Us
Voltage tolerance pick-up voltage

Vdc

24

24

24

24

xe

0.85–1.1

0.85–1.1

0.85–1.1

0.85–1.1

Power consumption
AC operated 50/60 Hz

VA

—

—

—

—

40
40
40
40
40

AC operated 50/60 Hz

W

3.4

3.4

3.4

3

DC operated

W

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.5

Short-circuit proof

Short-circuit proof

Short-circuit proof

Short-circuit proof

—

—

—

—

40
40

Fuse for control circuit supply
24V
115/230V

40

Control Circuit
Rated output voltage

Vdc

24

24

24

24

Rated operational current

mA

S12, S22: 30, S34: 45

S12: 65, S34: 40

S12, S22: 30, S34: 45

S11, S21: 60, Y2: 45

50

22

50

22

2.3

2.3

2.3

2.3

Resistance—R
Short-circuit current

A

Response time

ms

100

65

100

50

Recovery time

ms

—

—

—

—

40
40
40

Response time with reset monitoring—tA1

ms

—

—

—

—

Response time without reset monitoring—tA2

ms

100

65

100

50

Reset time—tR/tR1

ms

Single-channel 45;
dual-channel 10

45

Single-channel 45;
dual-channel 10

20

40

Minimum on duration—tM

ms

—

—

—

—

40

Recovery time—tW

ms

Approx. 1000

Approx. 1000

Approx. 1000

Approx. 1000

Synchronous monitoring time—tS

ms

—

—

—

500

Emitted interference

EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-4

Interference immunity

According to EN 61000-6-2,
EN 62061

According to EN 61000-6-2

According to EN 61000-6-2,
EN 62061

According to EN 61000-6-2

40

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-195

Tab40book.fm Page 196 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.10
40
40
40
40
40
40

Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays

Safety Relay, continued
Description

Unit

ESR5-NO-31-24V230VAC-DC

ESR5-NV3_

ESR5-VE3_

ESR5-NE-51_

General
Standards

EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061,
IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178,
UL/CUL listed
UL/CUL listed
UL/CUL listed
UL/CUL listed
UL/CUL listed

Type-dependent standards

EN 60204
(if applicable)

EN 60204
(if applicable)

EN 60204
(if applicable)

—

—

Lifespan, mechanical—c (contacts)

x 106

10

10

10

10

10

Maximum operating frequency

Ops/h

3600

3600

3600

900

3600

Climatic proofing

Dry heat according to
Dry heat according to
Cold in accordance with: Dry heat according to
Dry heat according to
EN60068-2-2, damp heat EN60068-2-2, damp heat EN 60068-2-1, dry heat in EN60068-2-2, damp heat EN60068-2-2, damp heat
according to EN 60068-2-3 according to EN 60068-2-3 accordance with EN
according to EN 60068-2-3 according to EN 60068-2-3
60068-2-2, humidity
storage test in accordance
with 60068-2-78

40
40

ESR5-NO-31-230VAC

Ambient temperature

˚F (˚C)

–4˚ to 131˚ (–20˚ to 55˚)

–4˚ to 131˚ (–20˚ to 55˚)

–4˚ to 113˚ (–20˚ to 45˚)

–4˚ to 131˚ (–20˚ to 55˚)

40

Ambient temperature storage

˚F (˚C)

–13˚ to 167˚ (–25˚ to 75˚)

–13˚ to 167˚ (–25˚ to 75˚)

–13˚ to 167˚ (–25˚ to 75˚)

–13˚ to 167˚ (–25˚ to 75˚)

–13˚ to 167˚ (–25˚ to 75˚)

Mounting position

Any

Any

Any

Any

Any

40

Vibration resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-6)

2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz,
amplitude: 0.15 mm
amplitude: 0.15 mm
amplitude: 0.15 mm
amplitude: 0.15 mm
amplitude: 0.15 mm

40

Shock resistance (IEC 60068-2-27)

—

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

Protection type
Housing
Terminals
Protection against direct contact when
actuated from front (IEC 0106 Part 100)

—

—

—

–4˚ to 131˚ (–20˚ to 55˚)

—

IP40

IP40

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

Finger- and back-of-hand
proof

Finger- and back-of-hand
proof

Finger- and back-of-hand
proof

Finger- and back-of-hand
proof

Finger- and back-of-hand
proof

Weight

kg

0.3

0.3

0.17

0.17

0.22

Terminal capacity
Solid or flexible

mm2

1 x (0.2–2.5)
2 x (0.2–1)

1 x (0.2–2.5)
2 x (0.2–1)

1 x (0.2–2.5)
2 x (0.2–1)

1 x (0.2–2.5)
2 x (0.2–1)

1 x (0.2–2.5)
2 x (0.2–1)

Flexible with ferrule

mm2

1 x (0.25–2.5)
2 x (0.25–1)

1 x (0.25–2.5)
2 x (0.25–1)

1 x (0.25–2.5)
2 x (0.25–1)

1 x (0.25–2.5)
2 x (0.25–1)

1 x (0.25–2.5)
2 x (0.25–1)

Solid or stranded

AWG

24–12

24–12

24–12

24–12

24–12
2

Terminal screw
Pozidriv screwdriver

Size

2

2

2

2

Flat-blade screwdriver

mm

0.6 x 3.5

0.6 x 3.5

0.6 x 3.5

0.6 x 3.5

0.6 x 3.5

Max. tightening torque

Nm

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

6000

6000

4000

4000

4000

Main Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage—Uimp Vac
Overvoltage category/pollution degree
Outside
Inside

III/2

III/2

III/2

III/2

III/2

—

—

—

—

—

40

Rated insulation voltage—Ui

Vac

250

250

250

250

250

Rated operating voltage—Ue

Vac

230

230

230

230

230

40

Rated operation current
AC-15

40

230V (360 ops./h)—Ie

A

4

4

—

5

4

230V (3600 ops./h)—Ie

A

3

3

3

3

3

40
40
40
40
40
40

DC-13
24V (360 ops./h)—Ie

A

4

4

—

6

4

24V (3600 ops./h)—Ie

A

2.5

2.5

3

3

2.5

A

50

50

49

50

50

A

50

50

—

—

—

50 A2 (4 + 4 + 4)

50 A2 (4 + 4 + 4)

50 A2 (4 + 4 + 4)

49 A2
(3.5 + 3.5 + 3.5 + 3.5)

50 A2
(3.7 + 3.7 + 3.7 + 3.7
+ 3.7)

6

6

10

10

6

Max. summation current of all poles
24 Vac/Vdc devices
230 Vac devices
Square of the total current
(and total current)
of all current paths
Short-circuit protection
Max. fuse

T40-196

A gG/gL

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab40book.fm Page 197 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays

40.10

Safety Relay, continued

40

Unit

ESR5-NO-31-230VAC

ESR5-NO-31-24V230VAC-DC

ESR5-NV3_

ESR5-VE3_

ESR5-NE-51_

Actuating voltage 50/60 Hz

Vac

230

24–230

—

—

24

Actuating voltage—Us

Vdc

—

230

24

24

24

Voltage tolerance pick-up voltage

xe

0.85–1.1

0.85–1.1

0.85–1.1

0.85–1.1

0.8–1.1

Power consumption
AC operated 50/60 Hz

40

VA

—

—

—

—

—

AC operated 50/60 Hz

W

5.8

5.8

—

—

2.2

40

DC operated

W

2.9

2.9

1.8

2

2.2

40

—

Short-circuit proof

—

—

—

Short-circuit proof

Short-circuit proof

—

—

—

40

Description

40

Power Supply Circuit

Fuse for control circuit supply
24V
115/230V

40

40

Control Circuit
Rated output voltage

Vdc

24

24

24

24

24

Rated operational current

mA

S10, S12, S22: 35, S34,
S35: 45

S10, S12, S22: 35, S34,
S35: 45

S12, S22: 3.5, S34, S35: 7

A1, A2: 84, K1/K2: 5

A1, A2: 92

40

11

11

500

—

—

0.7

0.7

0.1

—

—

40

Resistance—R
Short-circuit current

A

40

Response time

ms

250

250

150

20

20

Recovery time

ms

—

—

—

—

—

Response time with reset
monitoring—tA1

ms

60

60

150

20

20

40

Response time without reset
monitoring—tA2

ms

250

250

150

20

20

40

Reset time—tR/tR1

ms

20

20

20 (non-delayed enable
paths); 100 (min. delayed
enable paths)

0.3–3 s (+50%)
adjustable

20

40
40

Minimum on duration—tM

ms

—

—

—

—

—

Recovery time—tW

ms

Approx. 1000

Approx. 1000

Approx. 330

Approx. 1000

—

Synchronous monitoring time—tS

ms

—

—

—

—

—

40

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Emitted interference

EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-4

40

Interference immunity

According to
EN 61000-6-2

According to
EN 61000-6-2

According to EN 61000-6-2, According to
EN 62061
EN 61000-6-2

According to
EN 61000-6-2

40
40

Dimensions

40

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

40

Safety Relays, Contact Expansion Modules
ESR5_ 24 Vac/Vdc
0.88
(22.5)

40

ESR5_ 230 Vac
1.77
(45.0)

4.51
(114.5)

3.06 3.90
(77.6) (99.0)

3.26 2.62
(82.8) (66.5)

40

4.51
(114.5)

40
3.06 3.90
(77.6) (99.0)

3.26 2.62
(82.8) (66.5)

40
40
40

0.26
(6.6)

3.74
(95.1)

0.26
(6.6)

3.74
(95.1)

40
40
40

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T40-197

Tab40book.fm Page 198 Wednesday, July 4, 2012 10:05 PM

40.10

Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

This page left intentionally blank

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
T40-198

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

Tab42book.fm Page 1 Thursday, July 5, 2012 8:03 PM

Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks
and Fuse Holders
Screw Connection

42.1

IEC—XB Series
IEC—XB Series Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spring Cage Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IDC Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XB Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42.2

T42-2
T42-4
T42-31
T42-58
T42-67
T42-82
T42-90

NEMA
NEMA Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T42-106
C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T42-107
TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T42-111

Spring Cage

42.3

Power Distribution
Power Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Terminal Block Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42.4

T42-116
T42-117
T42-123
T42-126

Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T42-128
C383 Series Disconnect Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T42-129
C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T42-131

Insulation Displacement Connection

42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T42-1

Tab42book.fm Page 2 Thursday, July 5, 2012 8:03 PM

42.1
42

Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
IEC—XB Series

Contents

IEC—XB Series

Description

42

Page

IEC—XB Series
Screw Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spring Cage Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pluggable Spring Cage Connection
Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IDC Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miniature Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XB Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42
42
42
42

T42-4
T42-31
T42-58
T42-67
T42-82
T42-90

42
42
42
42
42

IEC—XB Series Overview

42

Product Description

Features

The XB Series from Eaton
offers a complete terminal
block system with a universal
range of accessories.
Marking, bridging and testing
accessories are standardized
across the different
termination technologies—
reducing inventory and
logistics costs. The modular
terminal block design allows
for use of the different
terminal block types together
or individually, providing the
highest degree of flexibility.

Global acceptance—The XB
Series terminal blocks are
designed to worldwide
standards and meet the latest
international requirements.

42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42

Application Description
The metal portion of the XB
Series terminal blocks are
made from high-grade, straincrack and corrosion-proof
copper alloys. They won’t
experience any electrolytic
corrosion or rusting, even
when moisture is present.
The metal surfaces are
protected with a lead-free,
galvanic nickel or tin plating.
The good electrical
conductivity permits only a
low temperature rise. The
Polyamide 6.6 housings
allow for operating
temperatures up to 257˚F
(125˚C) and are certified for
inflammability Class V0 in
accordance with UL 94.

Flexible Plug-in bridge
system—All three
technologies (screw, spring
and IDC) use the same bridge
system, allowing for
individual potential
distribution and quickly
bridged connections among
the same terminal block type
or across different types. The
XB Series terminal blocks
have two bridge shafts
arranged in one line, making
flexible chain bridging and
skip bridging between nonadjacent terminal blocks
possible. Plug-in bridges are
available from 2 to 50
positions. Reducing bridges
are also available to connect a
larger terminal block to a
smaller one.

Standards and Certifications
Large surface area for
marking—All XB Series
terminal blocks have
generously sized surface
areas for labeling. This allows
for clearly labeled wiring that
results in reduced startup
time and simplifies activities
such as testing and
maintenance. There are
provisions for marking
individual terminal blocks and
end stops, strips of terminal
blocks, and large groups of
terminal blocks.
Standardized testing
system—All test plugs make
contact in one of the easily
accessible bridge shafts. A
2.3 mm diameter test plug is
available for individual
measuring wires. Modular
test plugs are also available
for more advanced testing.

42
42
T42-2

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

●

●
●

●

UL® and cUL®
recognized—File No.
E67464
CE approved
LVD 
●
EN 60947-7-1
●
EN 60947-7-2
●
EN 60998-2-3
●
EN 60352-4/A1
ATEX approval
(Eex e applications)

Note
Not all standards apply to all terminal
blocks. Contact Eaton for details.



Tab42book.fm Page 3 Thursday, July 5, 2012 8:03 PM

Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
IEC—XB Series

42.1

Technical Data and Specifications

42

IEC—XB Series

42

Description

Specification

Insulation material

Polyamide 6.6

Dielectric strength

600 kV/cm

Creep resistance

600 CTI

Internal insulation resistance

1012 ohms cm

Surface resistance

1010 ohms

Flammability rating

UL 94 V0

Continuous operating temperature

–40 to 257˚F (–40 to 125˚C)

42
42
42
42
42

Modular Terminal Blocks for Potentially Explosive Environments
The modular terminal blocks
The standard modular
are approved for fitting in
terminal blocks from Eaton
Zone 1, the Ex environment,
are approved for potentially
as well as Zone 2. Zone 1
explosive environments. In
fitting is conditional upon
addition to the usual
terminal blocks being used in
approvals, they also have
connection boxes approved
been approved by a testing
for EEx e type protection and
centre authorized by the EU.
having the equivalent of at
No extra approval is required
least IP54 protection.
in Intrinsic Safety type
applications.
The EEx approved modular
terminal blocks can be
Modular terminal blocks on
divided into the following
www.eaton.com fulfill the
groups:
requirements for “Increased
Safety” protection type when
●
Screw connection
installation instructions are
terminal blocks
followed, and have a type
●
Spring-cage connection
examination certificate
terminal blocks
in accordance with the
●
Ex directive Ex-RL 94/9/EU.
Insulation Displacement
Connection terminal blocks
These test certificates are
●
Mini terminal blocks
recognized in all the EU
●
Terminal blocks for
member states and beyond.
specialized applications

42

More detailed information
on modular terminal
blocks in the EEx e area is
available on the Internet
at www.eaton.com for
downloading.

42
42
42

Here you will find the
following:
●

●
●

●

●

42

Technical data in accordance
with EN 50 019
Approved accessories
Important installation
instructions and mounting
diagrams
EU type examination
certificates
General information on
Ex protection

42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42

Identifications
Explosion protected electrical
equipment must be marked
so that the safety
characteristics are
identifiable. The identification
of electrical equipment is
described in the harmonized
standard EN 50014, as
shown in the following
example:

EN 50014
Standard Example
Description

Identification

Manufacturer or
trademark

Eaton

Type designation

XBUT25

Abbreviation of
explosion protection
Protection type
increased safety “e”

Identification in Accordance
with ATEX-RL
Electrical equipment that is
certified in accordance with
the ATEX 100a guideline also
receives identification
describing the site for use.

ATEX
Guideline Example

42

Description

Identification

Manufacturing data

02.01.2004

Address of the
manufacturer

Duncan, SC

42

EEx e ll

Number of the
appointed dept.

344

42

e

Common marking

Ex symbol

Equipment group

II

42

Equipment group

II

Mark of the
testing body

KEMA

Approval number

05ATEX2158 U

Category

2

Use in gas and/or
dust atmospheres

GD

42

42
42
42
42
42

Logic Control Products CA08100001K—June 2012 www.eatoncanada.ca

T42-3

Tab42book.fm Page 4 Thursday, July 5, 2012 8:03 PM

42.1
42

Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
IEC—XB Series

Contents

Screw Connection

Description

42

Page

Screw Connection Terminal Blocks
Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triple Level Sensor/Actuator .